


W,u- 



I^^HI 



In ^H 






nftwffi 



aSEfi&i 



mm 



iwm 






KOWfl 






pi 







Class EC £ . 

Bunk. .F"b5 



i 



NEW METHOD 

OF LEARNING 

THE FRENCH LANGUAGE; 

EMBRACING . -TH THE 

Stnaletic ana ggntyetic ^ohts of Ittatrmtian ; 

BEING 

A PLAIN AND PRACTICAL^WAY OP ACQUIRING THE ART 

OP 

READING, SPEAKING, AND COMPOSING FRENCH. 

ON THE PLAN OF WOODBURY'S METHOD WITH GERMAN 



BY LOUIS FASQUELLE, LL.D. 

PROFESSOR OP MODERN LANGUAGES IN THE UNIVERSITY OP MICHIGAN 

TWENTY-SEVENTH EDITION. 

NEW YOKK: 
TYISON & PHINNEY, 321 BEOADWAY, 

(SUCCESSORS OP MARK H. NEWMAN & CO.) 

CHICAGO: S. C. GRIGGS & Co., Ill LAKE STREET. 

BUFFALO: PHINNET & CO. 

auburn: seymour sc alward. cincinnati: moore, wilstach, keys & co. 

Detroit: morse & selleok. st. louis: keith & woods. 

1856. 



1C 






We have published f or the use of Teachers, 

'•A Kev to the KxKRClflKS jn Fasqielle'sNew FRENpn 
Method, with occasional Notes and References to the Rules, ly 
Louis Fasquelle,LLJ >., Ac" Price 7fl cts. The "Key" can be sen 
bv mail, by Beading the publisher the price in F. O. stamps. 

\i:\vm.\x & Ivison. 



09 



FntERKP n.-. - IBM, 

n v LOO I B r a I Q D i: i. i. B, 
In the Clork't omc* of lb - i if thfl Doited Plat*-, for 






ew 



&jj* £onsi nf iju >nm$ Eangtugt 

AND LITEKATURK, 

THROUGHOUT THE- UNITED STATER 

Sljia bolnme 

SB JWOST KE8PKCTFULLY DEDICATED. 



WOODBURY'S GERMAN SERIES. 



I. NEW METHOD WITH GERMAN. 

523 pp. 12mo.— Price, $1 50. 

II. KEY TO NEW METHOD. 

80 pp. 12mo. — Price, 50 cents. 

III. SHORTER COURSE WITH GERMAN. 

230 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

VI. KEY TO SHORTER COURSE. 

80 pp. 1 2mo. — Price, 50 cento. 

V. ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER. 

250 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cento. 

VI. ECLECTIC GERMAN READER. 

280 pp. 12mo.— Pri« 

VD. GEBMAH-EHGLISH AND BIGLISH-GERMAB HEADER, 

70 pp. 12mo. — Price, 25 cento. 

vin. WbvpVfmtp'i 9ttut WlttyvS* 

j u r 8 r I c r n u n g t c r e iu I i I* cb e n ^ p r a d) e. 
Prtil $i\ 



JTaoqucllc's J^rcncl) ©criea. 



I. FRENCH COURSE. 

600 pp. 12ma — Price, $1 25. 

II. KEY TO FRENCH COURSE. 

] |n pp. l'Jiiii..— Pri 

m. COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER. 

260 pp. 18ma — Prioey 7r. cento. 

IV. TELEMAQUE. 

#90 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cento, 

V. NAPOLEON. 

274 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 



PREFACE 



The universality of the French language furnishes sufficient 
proof of its utility. Throughout Europe, in many parts of Asia, 
Africa, and America, no education is complete without a knowledge 
of that tongue ; which in more than one country of Europe is 
emphatically called " the language? Its merits are becoming so 
well appreciatea in this country, that it is almost unnecessary to 
particularize them, — to speak of its unsurpassed precision and clear- 
ness, and of its capability of expressing every idea in the m.jst 
laconic and in the most ornamental style. The language of 
France, that happy compound of the Celtic, the Romanic and the 
Teutonic elements, is equally adapted to the lightest literature 
and to the most profound diction of science. The rich mines of 
French literature, too long but imperfectly known here, offer in 
every department of knowledge treasures equal to those presented 
by the literature of any other nation. 

Many works have been published, in this country and in Eng- 
land, to facilitate the acquisition of the French language ; but. 
during his more than twenty years' practice in teaching the mod- 
ern languages, the author of this volume has in vain looked for 
the appearance of a book which, like several of the French gram- 
mars published in Germany, should unite in due proportions the- 
ory and practice. To the high merits of several of the theoretical 
grammars, he bears his most cheerful testimony ; yet, the student 
might go through them, and know but little of the idiomatic or 
practical part of the language. Several of the practical works, 
though well executed according to the plans which their authors 
had laid, neglect grammatical rules, if not entirely, at least, far 
too much ; and the student may, after having devoted a long time 
to the mere memorizing of sentences, find himself in possession of a 



Yl PREFACE. 

number of set phrases, valuable, it is true, but from which, desti- 
tute of landmarks, the slightest deviation must lead him into 
unknown regions. 

A' work which, unit/ng practice with theory, should attempt to 
avoid the difficulties mentioned above, had been long contem- 
plated by the author of these pages, when " "Woodbury's New 
Method with the German" made ha appearance. Finding in that 
work the two systems, the analytic and the synthetic, beautifully 
blended and well elaborated, he had no hesitation in adopting the 
"New Method," so successfully applied by Mr. Woodbury to 
the German, as the model on w Inch to construct his long intended 
treatise on the French. The result is the present work. 

The work commences with a comprehensive treatise on pro- 
nunciation. The power of the letters, as initials, medials and 
finals, is fully explained under the different letters. Peculiar care 
■. taken to render this part sufficiently full, to provide the 
student with a satisfactory guide and adviser, in the principal 
difficulties of the French pronunciation. The words presenting 
pecuuarities of pronunciation, are placed as exceptions to the rules 
given in this part 

In the commencement of the First Part of this grammar, the 
rules are given in the most simple form, and the idioms are grad- 
ually introduced and explained; copioi 

or more theoretical Part, render further information easily attam- 
after the rules of every lesson, comes a risumi of ex- 
amples in illustration of them, as also of preceding on 
tain'mg often new idioms and conversational phrase 
examples on the rules, the resumes and the French i 
to be rendered into English consisting almost entirely of ques- 
tions and answers, combfee, it is thought, all the benefits pre- 
•ented by the practical grammars, while the rules in the 
and the ease with which reference may be had to the 
Part, present all the advantages of the theoretical treats 
will be easily seen that the teacher and Btudent will find here the 
practice, with as little or as much of the theory as they maydeaire. 

The grammatical rules and idioms are introduced gradually, so 
as not to offer too many difficulties at once. Car.' has been 
taken not to present the rules as abstract and arbitrary laws, while 



PREFACE. ffi 

tlie resemblance or difference of construction between the two 
languages is carefully pointed out. 

Exercises to be rendered into French are placed at the end of 
every lesson. The materials for these are found in the examples 
to the rules, in the resumes, in the French exercises and in the 
vocabularies preceding the same. Besides all this, in accordance 
with an admirable feature of Mr. Woodbury's system, the student ; 
is furnished with the means of carrying on in connection with the 
regular course already indicated, a series of exercises in French 
composition, at once easy, interesting, and profitable in the highest 
degree. 

The grouping of the tenses of the verbs and the classification 
of the h-regularities, will, it is hoped, simplify this part of gram- 
mar. In the former, the student will see that by learning a tense 
in one conjugation, he often learns it in the others ; in the latter 
he will perceive that the deviations of the irregular verbs are 
often very trifling and confined to particular tenses. 

An attempt is made in the " Practical Resumes," Lessons 98 
and 99, to simplify as much as possible the somewhat complex 
subject of the past participle. 

The rules of the Second, or theoretical Part, are deduced from 
the most reliable sources ; they are nearly all illustrated by short 
extracts from the best French authors. This will, it is hoped, 
while giving classical authority to the rules, inspire the student 
with a desire of becoming more intimately acquainted with the 
authors from whose works the examples are taken. It will be 
perceived, also, that the sentiments contained in the extracts, have 
not been overlooked. 

In the Second Part, the verbs are given in their fullest form. 
The irregular, defective, peculiar (See § 49), and unipersonal 
verbs are placed alphabetically. 

The author would here respectfully suggest, not with a view of 
offering advice to experienced teachers, but as a mode which he 
has found beneficial in practice, that the student commence to 
learn the verbs from the paradigms in the Second Part as soon as 
he has acquired some little knowledge of the pronunciation, and 
this simultaneously with his learning the lessons of the First Part. 
The verbs in the French, and in the other, so called Romanic 



viii PRKJAPB. 

languages, are more complicated and require more study than the 
verbs in the German and other Teutonic languages. Having in 
this manner acquired some knowledge of the verbs, the student 
will, by the time he, in his progress through the first part, reaches 
the groupings of the tenses mentioned above, be able to recognize 
the verbs as old friends, and better to appreciate the classification 
f the irregularities. This course is advised not as indispensable, 
but as beneficial. 

The reading lessons, in prose and in verse, extracted from the 
best sources, and containing grammatical references to both parts 
of the work, will nut be unacceptable to the student. A vocabu- 
lary for these lessons is placed immediately after them. 

Among tho numerous works which have been consulted during 
the preparation of this grammar, the author would mention with 
gratitude the labors of the French Academy, Laveaux, Lemare, 
Bescher, Girault-Duvivier, Boniface, Bescherelle, Landais, etc 

With a sincere hope that the present volume imy assist the 
American student in obtaining a knowledge of tie beautiful 
language of France, it is respectfully submitted. 

L F. 

UWIVF.IWTY Off Mil III'lAS - , ) 

Ann Arbor t Sept. 1661, 1861. f 



GENERAL INDEX. 



A, prep. $ 142, (2). 

Abbreviations, p. 275. 

Accents, Lesson 2. 

Acheter, to buy, § 49, (5) ; its gov- 
ernment, L. 50, 1. 

Accorder, s', to agree ; said also of 
watcbes, L. 92, 3. 

Active verb, () 43, (2), (3.) 

Active Voice, used in French in 
cases where the passive is used in 
English, L. 35, 2 ; L. 46 3-6128, 
(5.) ; § 113, (1.) 

Adjectives, § 14, (1). Quaking 
adjectives, § 14, (2). Degrees of 
signification, § 14, (2). Gender 
and number of, § 15. Formation 
of feminine of, § 16, L. 13. Irregu- 
lar adjectives, §16, (8). Adjectives 
baving no feminine, § 16, (9.) 
Plural of, § 17, L. 14. Agree- 
ment of adjective with nouns, 
§ 18; §83; L. 13, L. 14. Relate 
ing to several nouns, § 18, (3); 
L."l4, 1, 2. Determining adjec- 
tives, § 19. Demonstrative, § 20 ; 
§ 93. Possessive, § 21 ; § 94 ; Re- 
marks on, § 95. Agree with ob- 
ject possessed, § 21, (2) ; L. 9, 3. 
Numeral adjectives, § 22 ; place of, 
§ 96. Cardinal adjective, § 22, (1), 
(2), (4); Variations of, § 23; Ob- 
servation on, § 24. Ordinal num- 
bers, § 23, (3),(5). Observation on, 
§ 25. Indefinite adjectives, § 30 ; 
§ 97. Verbal adjectives, syn- 
tax of, 6 65. Remarks on feu, 
wi, &c. § 84. Adjective used ad- 
verbially, § 67, (3) ; § 84, (5). 
Place of, § 85 ; § 86 ; L. 15. Ad- 
jective preceding noun, § 85, (11). 
Adjective different in meaning be- 
fore and after. § 86. Regimen or 
government of, § 87 ; § 88 ; § 89 ; 
§ 92 ; L. 79. Adjective requiring 
a different preposition in French 
and English, § 90. 

Adverbs, § 67. Formed from adjec- 
tives, § 68. Degrees of significa- 
tion, § 69. Adverbs forming a 
comparison of themselves, § 70. 



Syntax of, § 136. Place of, § 136 ; 
L. 34 ; L. 41. Observation on, 
§ 137. Adverts of negation, 
§138. 

A droite, to the right, L. 70, 6. 

A gauche, to the left, L. 70, 6. 

A fleur de, even with, L. 80, 2. 

A force de, by dint of, L. 80, 2. 

A l'egard de, with regard to, L. 80, 2, 

A raison de, at the rate of, L. 80, 2. 

Au dehors, outside, L. 80, 2. 

Au dedans, inside, L. 80, 2. 

Au dela, beyond, L. 80, 2. 

Age, avoir used for, L. 20, 6. 

A la campagne, in the country, 
L. 34, 8. 

A la chasse, hunting, L. 34, 8. 

A la pex .he, fishing, L. 34, 8. 

A 1'anglaise, a la t ju^aise, after the 
English, French fashions, L. 69, 3. 

A l'ecole, at school; a l'eglise, at 
■ church, L. 25, 6. 

A Tendroit, right side out; a l'en- 

^ vers, wrong side out, L. 69, 1. 

A l'insu, unknown to, L. 82. 

Alphabet, L. 1. 

Aller, to go, used for proximate fu- 
ture, L. 26, 1. Aller trouver, to 
go to, L. 26, 3. S'en aller, to go 
"away, L. 40 ; 1, 2 ; L. 47, 1. Aller, 
to fit, to sit, L. 47, 2. Aller a pied 
a. cheval, en voiture, to walk, ride, 
go in a carnage, L. 62, Exam- 
ples. 

Amis (un de mes), a friend of mine, 
L. 67, 3. 

Amuser, (s',) to take pleasure in, etc., 
L. 38, 6. 

Analogy between many French and 
English words, § 147. 

Answers in French should be ex- 
plicit, L. 24, 12. 

Apporter, amener, to bring, carry, 
L. 44, 6. 

Approcher, (s\) to drau near, L. 
39, 6; 

Articles, § 13 ; L. 4, 1,2. Elision 
of, L. 4, 2; §13, (7); §146. Con- 
traction of; §13, (8) ; L. 5, 1; L. 25, 
6. English article, a or an § 14; 



GENERAL IND1X. 



(9). Recapitulation of articles. I Cases, §2. 

& 13. Syntax of. () 77. Use of, Ce, demons, prn. § 87, (6) ; § 108 



77. (1), (2), (3), etc. Before 
words used in partitive sense, 



<j 116; L. 81. 

before etre, L 

L. 81. 1. 
— . demons, adj., 
Cedilla, L. 3, 6. 
Oeque, what, L. 31, 4. 
Celui qui, he who, L. 81, 4. 



TJsed for he, she 
1. C'est moi 



20, (1);L.10,1,2, 



$ 78, (2), (8), (4), (5). (6) (7) 
$18, (10); L.6. 1; L. 7. 5;L. 8, 
4, L 12, 3; L. 20, 8. Article used 
before words in general 
and abstract noons 

L. 8, 2, 8 : L. 28, 11; L.29 and 80. Chacon, eac* one, v 41, (2). 
Article omitted '"ton" comber of Chaque, each, <j 30. (4). 
asovereign L.80 8. Artlclefcused Changer dliabit, to change mttsoomi 
\ the body, L. 68 •'•. changer de maisoo, to move, L. 68, 
1. Changer, to exchange, L. 68, 2. 
adiecth prep, at the house of, $ 142, (•> 

24, 9. 
of. <> 80. Remarks on c I ■ :nv noun*. <i3,(5), (6). Nnm- 

[dioms in which the article berofverbs after collective nouns, 
(■omitted r it 

II L.8 11,— H not aspirate Collocation of words, $144 
in heroine Ac,, L. 8 11, note. Oombien de temps, komlongj c 
i 

I. ::t 8. 
Anjonrdlim, to- '■■•< its i 

■II 6. 
An li'«i de, 1 1. 86 I 

Aorevoir / 
Auxiliary v. 1 

• rep. '', 1 12 1. 

used Idiomatically ' Conjugation of verba First oonta- 
wi(M , • m paradigm,^ |8. Pecnlia* 



Wen de fois I houofien > L 111. 

Oombien y a-t-fll how far? mm 

long sin e? I. 67 i 
Comparison of adjectives, L. 17. 
Compound nouns, $ 3,(7). ^9;L. 

Conditional mode, § 46, 2d, (3). 

Formation and 

termination I Irre- 

gularitii - of L 62 l N 

- 126. 



■I- l. - I Witl 

:ii i l fcr the day 

month L. 19 

\v,.ir mil I 
I ■ 

[eon 

oh ohand ana 

•i pom, 
I. 67 1 Ivoh ds< I tor dimen- 

• 

itis.'ly. 
Ij and 

1 B 6 

C*riTAi.s 
Cardinal muni 

<' after 

K..r the day of the month, 



ition, paradigm, $ 60. 
Third conjugation, parad 
61 Peculi u fries of vx i 
third conjni ( > 62. 

Fourth conjugation, paradigm $ 

issive verbs, paradign 

Rule, ^66, Reflective verbs, para- 

Itive form of, 

e torm, <\ 68. 

Interrogative and negative form, 

digm ',i.l -J Terminationsofref- 
nlari rableof irregu- 

lar verbi 

with, L. 
Connaitrc quelqn 

voi\ ' 

I. B7, ' Connail 

know ' etc., L v 7. 6. 8e 

connail ' U 

Conjunctions, $ 73. Lists of, $ 7^ 



GENERAL INDEX. 



2). Syntax of, § 143. Govern- 
ment of, „§ 127 ; § 143. Requir- 
ing subjunctive, § 143, (2) ; infin- 
itive, $ 143, (1) ; conditional or 
indicative, § 143, (3) ; si, if, § 125, 
(3) ; L. 62, 6. Examples of con- 
junctions, L. 100. 

Convenir, to be becoming, L. 49, 2. 

Coucher (se), to retire, go to bed, L. 

. 37,5. 

Dans, prep, in, § 142, (2). 

Davantage, more, note, L. 16. 

Day of month, week, not preceded 

by preposition, L. 26, 10. 
Degrees of comparison of adjectives 

L. 16 ; L. 17. 
Demain, to-morrow, its place, L. 41, 5. 
Demander, to ask, its government, 

L. 50, 1. 
Demettre (se), le bras, &c, to dislo- 
cate one's arm, &c, L. 93, 1. To 

resign a place, L. 93, 2. 
Demonstrative adjective, § 20. See 

Adjective. 
Demonstrative pronoun, § 36. See 

Pronoun. 
Depecher (se), to make haste, L. 

40, 7. 
Devant, prep, before, § 142, (1). 
Devenir, to become, L. 85, 5. 
Devoir, to otce, expressing future, 

obligation, L. 35, 5. 
Dimension, etc., L. 68. 
Diphthongs, sounds of, L. 2, 14. 
Dont, prn. of whom, of which, L. 

31,8. 

Elision, § 146. Of article L. 4, 2 ; 

§ 13. (7).. Of pronoun je, L. 4, 5. 

Of preposition de, L. 6, 3. Of ne, 

L. 7, 3. Of pronouns le, la, L. 

.9,2. 

Eloigner (s'), to go from, to leave, L. 
39, 6. 

Emparer (s'), to seize, lay hold of, L. 
93, 3. 

Empecher (s'), to help, to prevent 
one's self \*. 93, 4. 

Emporter, Emmener, to lake away, 
L. 44, 6. 

En, pronoun, % 39, (17) ; % 95, (5) ; 
$ 110; % 103, (1); % 104; L. 
15, 7 ; L. 22, 3. Before a past 
participle, % 135, (7) ; L. 42, 11, 
12. Used instead of possessive 
adjective, § 95, (5) ; L. 96, 1, 2. 



En, prep. % 142, (2) ; L. 34, 5, 6, 7. 

Endormir (s'), to fall asleep, L. 39, 5. 

Ennuyer, to weary, L. 38, 4. S'en- 
nuyer, to become weary, L. 38. 5. 

Entendre parler, to hear about, of, L. 
35,7. 

Entendre, to understand, L. 96, 3. Se 
faire entendre, to make one's self 
understood, L. 96, 4. Followed by 
another verb, L. 97, 4. 

Envoyer chercher, to send for, L. 

„ 26, 5. 

Epouser, to marry, said only of par- 
ties, L. 67, 2. 

Essayer, to try on, L. 47, 4. 

Est-ce-que, prefixed to the verb, § 

A 98; L. 25. 

Etre, conjugation of, § 47, (5). 
Number of etre after ce, § 116. 
Used for aller, to go, L. 43, 5. For 
to belong, L. 47, 5 ; L. 91, 2. Etre 
riche de, to be worth, L. 49, 5. 
Etre en retard, to be late, and 
other idioms with etre, L. 91, 1. 
Y etre, to be at home, in, L, 91, 3. 

Euphonw t, L. 4, 6. 

Eveiller (s'), to awake, L. 39, 5. 

Every day, tous les jours, L. 26, 8. 

Facher (se), to be or become angry, 
L. 40, 4. 

Faire, before another verb, to cause, 
to have, L. 32, 3, 4 ; L. 97, 4. 
Faire faire, to have made, L.32, 4: 
L. 63, 1. Faire raccommoder, to 
have mended. Faire la cuisine, 
faire cuire, to cook. Faire bouillir, 
to boil, L. 63, 1. Faire peur, to 
frighten ; faire attention, to pay 
attention; fkire tort, to injure; 
faire du mal, to hurt, L. 63, 3. 

, used unipersonally, in speak- 
ing of the weather, L. 33, 5. 

Falloir, to be necessary, L. 48. 

Feminine terminations, § 6, (2), (3), 

Feu, adj., hate, § 84, (1). 

Future absolute, <j 45, (2). Use of, 
§ 124. Formation of, $ 61 ; L. 60, 
1, 2, 3. Irregularities of, L. 61, 
1, 2, 3, 4. Future anterior, § 45j 
(2), 8. Use of, $ 124. Forma- 
tion of, L. 60, 4. Future used in 
French where the present is used 
in English, L. 61, 5. 

Gender, $ 4. By the meaning, § 5. 
By the termination, <j 6. 



GENERAL INDEX 



G&ner, to incommode, trouble, &c., L. ' 
83, 6. Se goner, to constrain or 
trouble one's self, L. 83, 5. 

Gens, people, L. 95, 2, 3, 4. 

Government. See Regimen. 

Grc. trill. Bon ere, mal gre, &c. 
L. 88. 5. 

Guere (ne;, but UUle, L. 17, 6. 

Hater (se). to hasten, L. 40, 7. 
llicr. yatcrday, its place, L. 41, 5. 
Hoar of the day. I- - 

Imperative in 1). Use 

"i'. i 196. Tmini— liiiiin of. L. 
70, 1. [rregokriUee, L 70, 3,4. 
Two imperative* ooiriing together, 
<) 100, 10). Imp n 
l.y a verb. I- 71. I. 
Imperfect ofindicati' 

: ■ 119 . I. 6 B. Formation 
and termination, L. 6& Irregu- 
larities 1. :. I 
Imperfect <■(' subjunctive, f 

of, L. 7">. Terminations 

• •I" i.. 7"> l - 8. formation of, 

:. 7"' ■"'. 

Importer Dtmporte, M matter, 

qn'tmporte I what • L 

!. 'J. 
I i 

indicative m 
Indicative present «, I 
lia Terminal 
Infinitive modi 

Important nil' 

other, put in inlinr 

In ordei to L - 

Inqnmter, i i i to I 

Int«i i' 

'.' | I. _ 
I 

i 

i 

l«v J i 

1. 1. 

.' ; t. •''. 

Laisker. to Ur 
an«-tiur rerb U Wl I 



La plupart, most. Number of vert 

after, L. 85, 3. 
Le. meaning so, it, &c., L. 46. 4, 5. 
Le mien, mine, &c, L. 9, G ; L. 12. 0. 
Lequel, &c, !rA<eA. L. 18, G ; L. 31, 7. 
Lever (se), to rise, L. 37, 6. 
L'un, Tautre, one another, § 41, (10); 
L'un et l'autre.&rfA, 6 41,(11); L. 

19, 3. 

Madame, Mademoiselle, used before 
names of kindred, L. 24, Beta 
Before titles. L. 2'.', G. Tlural of, 
L i 

etc, L. GG. Mal de 
dints I I U Ju . in.il <le lit 
L. 66. 
Marcher, to watt, L. 36, 6, 
Marier, to marry, to v *> jor m ti 

many, L. ' ; 7 i. Be marier, /<> c<-( 

morr Etre marii, to 

k- 7/i/;; • 1, 1.7. 2 

Measure, weight, price by. I 

Mener, porter, to toXr, to carrv, L. 

M 6. 
Mettie. to put on L 82, 1. Mettre 

le convert, /<> lay tkt 

Mettre a men mettre 

pied a tcrre, to alight; mettre a 

i.l |M.[te. /,. turn OtU 

tre an t'.iit, to or., 
' ■ l Be mettre 
I. 
Mettre a I'heure, to art <f ira/<rA, L, 

Midi, minnit, -noon, midnight, L. 

Indicative. $ | 

Impel i Snli- 

junctive 6 46, 4th, (6). Inflnitive, 

i irticiple, 6 -15, 

:'nomU 

. I. 

ith ob- 

Monde, world, , Tool 

!.. '.'.'). 

dred, L. 24, note. Before titles, 
B. Plural o 
Month, day ••( L. I 

10. 
Must./oflotr, &c.. L. 48; 6 62. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Naitre, to bi bom, Je suis ne, I was 
bom, L. 43 : note. 

Ne, negative,' § 138. Place of, L. 7, 
1. Ne— que, only, L. 19, 2. Ne, 
idiomatic, § 127, 3 ; § 138, (4), 
(6) ; L. 72, 9. Ne— plus, no- 
more, L. 17, 4. Ne — guere, L. 
.17, 5. 

Ni, neither, nor, L. 7, 4. Article 
used or not after ni, L. 8, 3, 4. 

Ni l'un, ni l'autre, neither, L. 84, 4, 5. 

Negative, second, suppressed after 
certain verbs, % 138 (2). 

Neuter verbs. % 43 (5). Their aux- 
iliary, L. 43 ; % 46. 

Nominative. See Subject. 

Non, no, Je dis que non, J say no. 
L. 82, 3. 

Notre, votre, our, your, &c, L. 9, 5. 
Le notre, ours, L. 9, 6. 

Noun, § 3. Proper, (3). Common, 
(4). Collective, % 3. (5), (6). 
Compound, $ 3, (7). Taken in a 
partitive sense, % 13, (10) ; § 78, 
(1), (2); L. 6, 1; L. 29, 8. 
Taken in a general sense, § 77, 
(1), (2) ; L. 8, 2. Gender by the 
meaning, § 5. By the termina- 
tion, § 6. Plural of, $ 8 ; L. 11. 
Plural of compound, § 9 ; L. 59. 
Syntax of, § 76. Place of sub- 
ject in affirmative and negative 
sentences, § 76, (1), (2). In inter- 
jected sentences, § 76, (3). In 
interrogative sentences, % 76, (4), 
(5); L. 6, 4; L. 56,1. Place of 
regimen, $ 76, (6), (7), (8), (9) ; 
L. 56, 2, 3. Respective places of 
possessor and object possessed, 
\ 76, (10) ; L. 5, 3. Of object and 
its substance, $ 76, (11) ; L. 5, 4 ; 
L. b3, 6. Of object and its use, 
§ 76, (12), (13), (14) ; L. 59, 7. 

Nouveau, nouvel, new, L. 13, 6. 

Nu, bare, adj., § 84, (2). 

Nul, no, () 30, (7). 

Nuile part, no where, L. 25, 8. 

Number, § 1, (5). See Different 
Parts of Speech. 

Number. See Numeral Adjectives. 
Ordinal adverbs of number, <s 29. 

Numeral collective nouns, § 27*. 

Numerals, fractions, § 28. 

On, one, people, they, § 41, (4), (5) ; 

$ 113 ; L. 35, 1, 2. 
Ordinal numbers, § 22, (3), (5). Not 



used after nr.mes of sovereigns or 
for days of the month. L. 30. 3 : § 

A 26, (1), (3). 

Oter, to take off, to take away, L. 32, 2. 

Ou, or, agreement of verb with 
nouns connected by, L. 84, 2, 3. 

Oui, yes, Je dis que oui, / say yes, L 
82,3. 

i 

Paradigms of auxiliary verbs, § 47 
For others, see Conjugations. 

Par ou 1 which way ? L. 44, 5. 

Participle past, § 45, 6th, (7). With- 
out an auxiliary, § 66, (3) ; L.42, 
10 ; L. 98, 1. Accompanied by 
elre,%\Z\, (2); L.42, 6; L. 98,3. 
In reflective verbs, () 135, (1), (2) ; 
L. 45, 2 ; L. 98, 6 ; L. 99, 4. In 
neuter verbs, L. 98, 3. Accompa- 
nied by avoir, % 134, (3) ; L. 42, 5 ; 
L. 98, 4. Never agrees with indi- 
rect regimen, L, 42, 9. Neuter 
verbs with avoir, % 135, (6) ; L. 
99, 2. Of unipersonal verbs. L. 
45, 6; L. 99, 3. Never agrees 
with en, % 135, (7) ; L. 42, 11, 12 ; 
L. 99, 8. Followed by an infini- 
tive, \ 135, (3) ; L. 98, 7 ; L. 99, 

5. Of passive verbs, L. 46 ; L. 98, 
2. Fait always invariable before 
an infinitive, L. 63, 2 ; L. 99, 7. 
After lepeu, §135, (8). 

present, § 64 ; L. 97. 

Partitive sense, nouns taken in, L. 

6. 1 ; § 13, 10 ; fr 78, (1), (2) ; L. 
29,8. 

Pas, point, not, difference, § 138, (1). 
Place of, L. 7, 1, 2. Omitted when 
a second negative occurs, § 138, 
(3) ; L. 7, 4. Omitted after certain 
verbs, § 138, (2). 

Passer (se), to do without, L. 39, 1. 

Passive voice, § 113 (1). 

Passive verb, § 43 (4) ; L. 46. Con- 
jugation of, \ 54. Rule, () 55. Its 
participle, L. 46, 2 ; L. 98, 2. 

Past anterior, § 45, (2), 5. Use of 
§122; L. 55. 

Past definite, § 45, (2), 3. Use of 
<) 120; L. 51. Its terminations 
and irregularities, L. 52. 

Past indefinite, (\ 45, (2), 4. Use of, 
§ 121 ; L. 41. 

Past of subjunctive, § 45, (5), 3. 

Payer, to pay, its government, L. 60. 

Personne, no body, § 41, (6) ; L. 7, T» 

Persons, §31, (3). 



xiy 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Place, respective, of noun, direct 
and indirBCt regimen, L. 56, 2, 3 ; 
ft 76, (7), (8), (9). In interjected 
sentences, <) 76, (3.) Of noun in in- 
terrogative sentences. 6 7 ( '>. (,4). 
(5) ; L. 56, 1 ; L. 6. 4. Of adjec- 
tive. L. 8, 5 ; L. 15 ; <> 85 ; $ 86. Of 
pronoun subject or nominative, ty 
98. Of regimen pronoun, L. 9, 1 ; 
L. 27; L. 28; () 101; { 1"2. 
Place of M aixl y, (> 104 ; L. 67. 
Of adverb. <> 186; L. 34 ; L. 41. 
4,5. Ofverb, 4144. 

Plaire - pklM to, L. 

in i,. [JaednnJpersaaaJl]y,oonime 
il vous plaira, <it VOU\ I. V1 

Ptaavoir, to 

Pluperfect of Indicative, § 45, (2), 6. 
Use. 

of subjunctive. $ 45, (5). 

1. I. 

Plural of nouns, <> B;L.ll. I 
pound Doom Nouns 

Daring ii" I'liirul. <) n». Noam 
baring do nngnlar, $11. Plural 
ofadiectives $17; L M 
or pnyeica] properties of man, 
single in tlie individual, do! put 

in tin' plural L I 

Plus .1.' man than, before a number, 

L. SO 7. 
Plusieui L.18,7 

Poor, I 

1 . 88 1 1 • . 
I. 1 1 

Lion < } 71. Table of princi- 
pal 
men! 
i. ut another prepoaitioii 

r.y meam i 

• rnmiiit 

l in. Repetition ol 
1 I j 
Promi • 

for pi- an I . 
Prendre government, L 

60,1. 
Prendre garde, to tab caret prendre 

le <l<-iiil. i ruins; 

prendre la peine, to UUet ihr tron- 
prendre lei dei ' 
prendre on parti, 

prendre <iu the, da 

l. 71 B. 
Prendre le tl ■■■■'* taa 

I. 71 



Pronouns, § 31. Personal, § 32. Be- 
marks on, § 33. Use oimoi, tot, 
instead of subject or nominative 
pronouns, ty 33, (8), etc. Reflective 
pronoun «, § 88, (12), (13). Sot, 
(14). Possessive pronoun, § 34. 
Remarks on, \> 35. Demonstrative 
pronouns, <) 36. Remarks on, ft 87. 
( '■ . demonstrative pronoun, \) 37, 
(6); ft 108; ft 116; L. 81. Used 
L. 82. C'lui. celle, ce- 
lui-ci. ,-. •-". $ 20; L. in 

l. In 6. Relative pronouns, 
ft 38. Remarks on, <\ 89. En, 
110 
1 Place •>! /: >,ft 104. J 

2). Place off, 4104 : 
\ 111. Donl, L 81, 8. Syntax ol 
pronouns, <\ 98. Place of subject 
or nominative § 88 Repetition 
of. t) ■■ tee of regimen 

pronouns, ft 100; L. 8, 1 ; L 27. 
Respective place of regimen pro- 
noiins v, 101 ; L.28. Rule on tliis 
subject, ft 102. Repetition of regi- 
iiii-n pronoun, <> 106 L 
Uulfs on possessive pronouns, v> 
108 On demonstrative pronouns, 
& 107. 0d relative pronouns. <i 

r rap- 

preased I. 19, 1; 1 
Interrogatii • L l - 
Que, *-. »» i i , never mppn •-• d, L. 19, 
idiomatic I. 

ft 109 1 
I. 18 l 
Qaelqo . L. 18, 

7; I. 

Quel -que, qnelqae 

the subjunctive, L. 88,8. 
Quelque cboso, something, anything, 

L 7 8. Require 4« before an aaV 

jective I. 18,8. Kotosedmnofi 

ative sentences, L. 7, 6. 
Qnelqae pari sfMtart, 

Quel | n ii ii % 41. 7. 

Qu'esl ee que osedidiomaticalr/lbl 

i. •_' 2 
Quiconque il CO. 

i A'o, &c, L. 

■ 1. 81 8 

i Bbaolately, ft 



A L INDEX. 



XV 



Rappeler ( ge ), to remember, recollect, 
L 37, 2. 

Reading lessons, p. 466. 

Recevoir des nouvelles, to hear from, 
L. 35, 6. 

Reflective verbs, § 43, (6). Conjuga- 
tion of, § 56 ; L. 36. Often used 
in French for the English passive, 
L. 36, 2. Its auxiliary is etre, L. 
45; § 46. Its participle, § 135: 
L. 45; L. 98, 5; L. 99, 4. 

Regarder, to concern, L. 94, 5. 

Remercier, to thank, Je vous remer- 
cie, equivalent to a refusal, L. 89, 2. 

Resume of rules on participle past, 
L. 98; L. 99. 

Rien, nothing, etc., L. 7, 7 ; L. 18, 3. 

Regime, regimen or object, § 2. 
Direct, § 2, (2) ; § 42, (4) ; L. 56, 
2, 3 ; § 76. Indirect, § 2, (3) ; § 
42, (5); L. 56, 2, 3; §76. 

Regimen or government of adjec- 
tives, § 87; L. 79. After etre 
unipersonal, § 87, (4) ; L. 79, 3. 
Adjective followed by de, § 88. 
By a, § 89. By different preposi- 
tions in botI\ languages, § 90. 
Regimen of verbs, § 129 ; L. 21, 4 ; 
L. 50. Verbs followed by no 
preposition. § 130 ; L. 76, 1. By 
d, §131. By de, 132; L. 21, 4; 
L. 77. By a preposition in French 
and by none in English, L. 78, 1, 
2. By a different prep, in both. 
L. 78, 3. Regimen of prepositions, 
§ 139 ; L. 80. Important rules on 
regimen, § 92 ; § 133 ; § 140 ; L. 
80, 5. 

Regimen of prendre, to take ; voler, 
to steal; acheter, to buy; deman- 
der, to ask ; payer, to pay, L. 50, 1. 

Rejouir (se), to rejoice, L. 40, 5. 

Remettre, to set a dislocated bone, 
&c, L. 93, examples. 

Repetition of demonstrative adjec- 
tives, § 93. Of possessive adjec- 
tives, § 21, (4). Of articles, § 80, 
L. 6, 5, Of subject or nominative 
pronouns, § 99; L. 87. Of regimen 
or objective pronouns, § 105 ; L. 
87. Of adverbs, § 137. Of prep- 
ositions, § 141. 

Rester, used unip. to remain, to have 
left, L. 85, 4. 

Reste de, left, L. 85, 4. 

Retarder, to lose, to put back said of 
•zntcbes, &c, L. 92, 1. 



Savoir, to know, and connaitre, te 
be acquainted with, L. 30, 5. 

Seoir, to suit, become, L. 47, 3. Used 
unipersonally, L. 49, 1. 

Servir (se), to use, L. 39, 2. Servir, 
to help at table, L. 89, 1. 

S'il vous plait, if you please, L. 89, 3. 

Si, conj., § 125,(3). Should not pre- 
cede conditional mode, L. 62, 6, 

Souvenir (se), to remember, recollect, 
L. 37, 2. 

So, rendered by U, L. 46, 4. 

Speech, parts of, § 1, (1). 

Stem of a verb, L. 23. 

Subject or nominative, § 2, (1) ; 
§ 42 (2). Verb having several sub- 
jects in different persons, L. 83, 2. 
Agreement of verbs with subjects, 
L.83, 1; L. 84; §114; §115. 

Subjunctive mode. § 45, 4th, (5). 
Use of, §127; §143; L. 72, 8, 9, 
10. Present of, § 45, (5), 1. Ter- 
mination of, L. 72. Subjunctive 
used after verbs expressing con- 
sent, command, etc., followed by 
que, L. 72, 8. After severaluniper- 
sonal verbs followed by que, L. 73, 
1. After certain conjunctions, § 
143 ; L. k 73, 4. After' croire, espe- 
rer, &c, interrogative or negative, 
L. 74, 2. After another verb, un- 
certain, and preceded by relative 
pronoun or a superlative, L. 74. 3, 
4. Past of subjunctive, L. 72, 7. 

Substantive. See Noun. 

Superlative absolute, § 14, (11) ; L. 
17, 1. Superlative relative, § 14, 
(9) ; L. 17, 2. 

Syntax, § 75. Of noun, § 76. Arti- 
cle, § 77. Adjective, § 83. Pro- 
noun, § 98. Verb, § 114. Parti- 
ciple, § 134. Adverb, § 136. Pre- 
position. § 139. Conjunction. 
§143. 

Taiee, to conceal, L. 96, 5. Se taire, 
to be silent, L. 96, 5. 

Tarder, to tarry, to long, L. 58. 3. 

Tel, such, § 41 (12), (13). Monsieur 
un tel, Mr. such a one, § 41, 13. 

Tenir, to hold, used in the sense of to 
keep. Tenir sa parole, to keep 
one's word, tenir la porte ouverte, 
to keep the door open, etc., etc, L. 
90, 1. Tenir un langage, to make 
use of language, expressions, etc., 
L. 90, 2. Tenir, to be attached, 



XVI 



GENERAL INDEX 



etc , L. 90, 3. Faire tenir, to for- 
ward, L. 90, 6. Se tenir, to re- 
main, to abide by, etc., L. 90, 6. 

Tenses of verbs, (> 45. Formation of, 
(<)61). See Different Tenses. 

Terminations of regular verbs, $ 60. 
Of indicative, L. 23, 5. Of imper- 
fect of indicative, L. 53, 6. Of 
past definite, L. 51. Of future. 
L. GO. Of conditional, L. 62. Of 
imperative, L. 70. Of subjunc- 
tive. L 72. Of imperfect of Bub- 
junctive, L. ~'y. Of infinitive, L. 
21, l. Of present participle, L. 
28, :; Of past participle, L. 28, 1. 

Times, number of, in a given space, 
i. 68,1 

Tmit,aU, etc, $80, (15V (16) j $97, 
(4), (6), (G). Tout, every, I. 26, 
8. T..111. the whale, b. 26, 9. 
Tout. ' nftnhi. ipnk, variable by 

euphony, L. '88,4. 
Tromper, to deceive, L. 38, 1. Sc 
feromper, /" be mistaken, etc., L. 



IK one, a, an, one, 6 l" 1 .. (4); (11); 
I. >'., 2. Not osed before norma 
placed In apposition, L, 80 I 

Unipersooal vet Para- 

digm Of *', 81 - Auxiliary of 

nupersona] verbs, L 16, B I 

l. ; I 
I. I'.', 6. 
Whir, i ■< < - m , used to indicatepasl 
just elapsed, L 26 2 Venlr 
tronver, /•> com 1 1 I. 26 8. 
Verbal adject I ''7. 

Subject or nominative 
men or object 
of, v '- (»)■ DiflJBrenl sort of 
rerb 

(::,: L 48. Passive s i I. 
10, Neuter > 48 (5); L. 43. 



Reflective, § 43, (6); § 56; L. 86 
2. Unipersonal, $ 43, 7 ; § 61-2. 
Auxiliary verbs, § 43, (8). Use 
of, § 46 ; L, 43. 45. Modes and 
tenses of, § 45. See Different 
Modes and Tenses. Irregular 
verbs, L. 24, Table of, $62. Syn- 
tax of the verb, () 114. Agreement 
of the verb with subject, § 114; 
L. 83 ; L. 84 ; L. 85. Verb after 
a collective noun, <) 115 ; L. 85, 1, 
2, 3. Number of verb after ce, 
<\ 116. Verb after nouns indifferent 
persons, <j 117. Use of tenses, 
i)118. S-i Different Tenses. Regi- 
men or government of verbs. 
■imen. 

Veuillez. be so kind, L. 70, 4. 

Vocabulary to the reading lessons. 
p. 486. 

Voici, hrrc is, L. 34, 4. 

Voila, there is, L. 34, 4. 

Voler. to rob, Meal, its government, 
L. 60 1 . 

Vbuloir dire, to mean, L. 32. 6, 6. 

(en), to bear a grudge, &c.. 

I. 94, '■■- 

Vowels, I. 2. 

W:i \t. rel. prn.. ce que, L. 81, 4 J qvt, 

L ::i ..V 

, interrogative, rendered by, 

qu'est-ee-qui L 82 2. 

Whole (the). UtOUt, L. 26, 9. 

Will, need m the sense of« 
dered by vouloir, L. 60, 5. 

Words, Variable, 61, (8). Invariable 

V iTora, to fetters, 4 61-2 s L. 33,4. 
7 avoir, 

followed by the present when tin 

action continues, L 
r,prn.ltadv.« 89, (IK); $ 103, (2). 

Place Of <>104; $111: L. 21 II 



NEW FRENCH COURSE 

PART FIRST. 
LESSON I. LEgOff I. 

THE LETTERS. 

The Frinch alphabet contains twenty-five letters : — 
Old names. New names. 



A 


a 


B 


b 


C 


c 


D 


d 


E 


e 


F 


f 


G 
H 


8 


I 


i 


J 


.1 


K 


k 


L 


1 


M 


m 


N 


n 





o 


P 


P 


Q 


q 


R 


r 


S 


s 


T 


t 


u 


u 


V 


V 


X 


X 


Y 


y 


z 


z 



ah ah 

bay be || barre. 

say ke ) cas, ciL 

day de 5 dard. 

a a u effet. 

eff fe frere. 

jay* ghe grele., 

ash he haie. 

e e idee, 

jee * je jais. 

kah ke kali, 

ell le lit. 



me mat. 

enn ne natte. 

o o orge. 

pay pe pere. 

ku ke | quadre. 

err f re rat. 

ess se soie. 

tay te tort. 

u % u urne. 

vay v vase. 

eeks xe T rixe. 

e grec e grec yeux. 

zed ze ** zele. 
W, caOed in French double V, might be added, as many for- 
eign words which have that letter have been adopted into the 
French language. 

* Like s in pleasure. f Nearly like err in error. 

1 No corresponding sound in English. || Nearly like be in globe. 
§ Nearly like ke and de in cake and grade. The e of the ether let- 
ters has the same sound. 
Tf kse ** seia rose. 

1 



18 LESSON II. 

LESSON n. LECON IL 

THE VOWELS. 

Vowels ar« rendered long or short by certain marks placed over 
them These marks, which are three in number, are called accents. 

The acute accent (' ) is placed over the e to give it a sharp or close 
8onnd. (See 4, i.) 

The grave accent ( * ) is placed over a, e, u, to give to those vowels 
a grave or open sound. (See 5, e.) 

The circumflex accent ( » ) is placed over a, e, t, o, u, to give to those 
letters :i long and broad sound.* 

1. a like a in mass. Ex. face, face ; bateau, boat; tableau, picture; 

p«tte, paic ; malfluj . 

2. a like a in bar, far. Ex. Age, age; chateau, castle; p<ite, paste ; 

bhime, W MM ; crine, cranium. 

3. e nearly like u in bud, and frequently silent at the end of poly- 

syllable*. Ex. h\ the; me, me* It, thee; que, that; mruble, 
piece of furniture ; r*up!e, people ; rime, rim*. 

4. ft like a in fate. Ex. >U\ summer; amitic, friendship , 6\ev£, 

rais',1 ; » ]<■ e, ?in>rd. 

5. e like fli in ;viir. Ex. \>iro, father ; fr<re, brother ; m<*re, mother; 

1 1< \e, />«/>«'/. 

6. e nearly lit Bx. rive, drram ; extr/me, extreme ; 

crone. erWMI ; cr/pe, rm,.- ; font. / 

7. i ii. irly like i in ; i/i. Ex. midi, mid-day ; ici, here ; fini, finished; 

i. i like - ■ In iee. Ex. tie, island} gite, lodging } < pitre, epistle; 
dime, fitM; aliime, oigfM, 

9. o nearly like oin nofc Ex. robe, rooe; globe, giofte ; cachot, dun- 

geon; haricot, faat 
10. 6 like o in wonr. Ex. ikp6% deposit ; pnvot, proi»st , bientot, 
soon; supp.'-t, suppart'-r. 
1. u. The exact French sound of this letter is not found in Eng- 
lish. The position of the lips in whistling, is very nearly the 
portion which they should have in emitting the French I 
i/rne, urn; h/ne, moon ; but, aim ; tribw, tribe; tribi/t, tribute ; 
i\u, elected. 

• This accent Indicate! the ropp re a rion of the letter B after the vowel 
on which it is pieced, thus: were formerly written, fnu, 

Ustt. bfstc, the 8 was not sounded, but gave to the preceding rowel that 
prolonged bound now represented by the circumflex accent. 



LESSON II. 19 

12. u s the u with a prolonged sound. Ex. mure, mulberry; du, 

due ; cru, growth ; bruler, to burn. 

13. y See 28, y. 

THE DIPHTHONGS. 

14. A vowel surmounted By an accent cannot form a dipththong 
with another vowel, it must be pronounced separately. Ex 
obeir, to obey; deite, deity ; reussite, success. Exceptions, ou, 
where — pronounced oo ; i and e accented (if e follow i), form 
a diphthong. - • 

15. A vowel surmounted by a diaeresis ("') follows the above 
rule. Ex. hai, hated; pa'ien, pagan ; mats, maize. Excep- 
tions ; u followed by e at the end of a few words, as in cigue,- 
hemlock, is pronounced like u alone. 

16. ai is like a in fate. Ex. j'at, I have ; je ferat, I will make; bate, 

bay; mai, May; balat, broom. 

When the diphthong ai is followed by s, d, or i, it assumes a 
broader sound, resembling the French e, or ai in the English 
word_patr. Ex. j'avais, Ihad; je ferats, I should make; lait, 
milk ; laid, ugly. 

17. au nearly like oh! in English. Ex. taux, rate; chaud, warm. 

e preceding au is blended with that diphthong without chang- 
ing its sound. Ex. ~beau, handsome; chateau, castle; tableau, 
picture ; eau, water. 

18. ei nearly like a in fate. Ex. heige, serge; nez'ge, snow; setgle, 

rye ; retne, queen ; petgne, comb. 

19. eu approaches the sound of u in tub. Ex. ]eu,play; lieu, place; 

pew, little; pew, fear ; chalewr, heat. Exceptions, in eu, had; 
j'eus, &c, Ihad; j'ettsse, etc., I might have; eu is pronounced 
like u alone. 

20. ia nearly like ia in medial. Ex. il \ia, he bound ; il crta, he cried 

dialogue, dialogue. 

21. ie like ee in bee. Ex. il lie, he binds; il etudte, he studies; harpte, 

harpy ; mie, the soft part of bread. 

22. oi nearly like wa in was. Ex. crotx, cross ; il bott, he drinks ; 

rot, king. 
23 on like oo in cool. Ex. dowx, soft ; coup, blow : nous, we • vous, 
you; aou,neck. 



LESSON II. 



24, 



25 



36. 



27. 



ua 






a 




■g| 


ue 


C ~-C 




P 




8^ 


Ul 


o S 








; I 


HO 


fl 


t 





II salua, he saluted; il remuo, he moved; H 

contribua, he contributed. 
II salue, he salutes; il remue, he moves; il 

contribue, Tie contributes. 
produit, produce ; cond u ite, conduct ; \ut, htm; 

bruit, noise; il rtduj't, he reduces, 
duo, duet. 
f when initial, when coming between two ccnsonants, or when 
forming a syllable of itself, has the sound of the French t. 
Ex. style, style; type, type ; yeux, eyes ; Vpres, Ypres ; y, there , 
between two vowels y has the power of two fs, one of which 
forms a diphthong with the preceding, and the other with the 
following vowel ; the syllabic division taking place between 
the f s. Ex. moyen, means ; essayer, to try ; nettoyer, to clean ; 
citoyen, citizen ; abbaye, abbey ; these words are pronounced 
as if they were written timi-irn, cssai-icr, iwttoi-ier, citouieiu, 
abbai-ie. The words pays, country ; paysage, landscape ; pay- 
san, peasant, are pronounced /.<-t>, p&Wftge, | 

tiii: nasai. BOUBD8. 
The combination of the vowels with the consonant morn, 

- what the French call //' ton nasal, the nasal sound. 
When the consonant m or n is doubled, or is immediately fol- 
lowed by a vowel 4 the oaetJ sound doei not tike place. 
Ex. mnoeeat, mnocml; ieuoobQe, i mm ovable; imitile, useless ; 

inoui, unheard tf. Tlie syllables t";i and im in the words in- 
. we pronounced as in English ; the syl- 
labic divi.M.-n of i-mi-ti-le and i-nou-i will explain the reason 
of the | .! sound in those words. 

ample, ample ; chambre, chamber ; lampe, 
lamp. 
*: an, year ; banc, bench ; dans, in , man- 
2, ion, ci>ck. 

§ nK7/ibre, limb ; rmporter, to carry away; 
W trembler, to tremble. 

en, in; dent, Coofl ; prendre, to take; 
rend re, to render. 



29 



M 



31 



pronounced 

anhj nearly 

like an in 

pant. 



• The words *mm\ ennuyer, emmn\<T.rnirrcr,rTwrgueiUir, form excep- 
tions to this rule. The first syllable of ennui, mnin/rr. rmmcur is nasal ; 
tnivrcr.eiunguedlir are pronoumv.l , ,,-nirnr, rn-orguriUir. 

f Thiscombination.it lonmi tuns ret den the Preach nasal sound 
more accurately than ani>. the g giving as unpleasant twang not existing 
in the French nasal syllables. 



LESSON III. 



21 



in 



somewhat 

like an in 

crank. 



32. en final is sometimes pronounced like en in then. Ex. Eden, 

Eden. 

33. en in the third person plural of verbs is silent. Ex. ils lisent, 

ils portent, ils donnent ; pronounce ils Hz, ils port, ils donn. 

34. im 1 , . r timbre, stamp ; impossible, impossible ; im- 
portant, important. 

1 lin, flax ; pin, pine ; crin. horse-hair ; \in 
wine. 

35. om] pronounced f tombe, tomb; comble, height; sombre, dark 

onh, nearly J tomber, to fall. 
on like on in 1 mon, my ; ton, thy ; son, his ; bond, bound 
song. pont, bridge. 

86 um"j somewhat ( hnmble, humble; parfnm, perfume. 

I like un in 1 un, one ; chaenn, each one ; importwn, im- 
un j hunting. | portunate. 



LESSON EI. 



LEgoN m 



THE CONSONANTS. 

1. A final consonant is generally silent. 

2. The letters c, f, 1, r, however, when final, are generally pro- 
nounced. 

3. The final consonant of a word is generally carried to the next 
word, when that word begins with a vowel or an h mute. (See 
11, h.) 

4. For illustrations and exceptions, see the several letters. 

5. B initial is pronounced as in English. In the middle of words, 

and at the end of proper names, b is sounded. Ex. aodiquer 
to abdicate, Job, Caleb, Sic. B is also pronounced in radoufr, 
refitting of a vessel, and rumo, (pronounced romb,) point of th 
compass. It is silent in plomo, lead; aplomo, perpendicular. 
When b is doubled, only one of these letters is pronounced. 
Ex. a66e, abbot ; saooat. 

6. C has its proper sound (k) before a, o, u, 1, n, r. Ex. cabane, 

cottage; con, neck; ecu, crown; enclin, inclined; Cneius, 
Cneius ; croire, to believe. 
c before e and i, and with the cedilla (9) before a, 0, or u, has 
the sound of s; ceci,this; cendres, ashes; facade, front; fa- 
$on fashion; recu, received. 



22 LESSON III. 

ch js pronounced like sh in she. Ex. char, car; cfiarl on, coa J ,• 

cfaingement, change. 
o in the words vermicelle and violoncelle, is pronounced like c7u 
ch is pronounced like k in a few words derived from the Greek. 

Ex. c7iaos, anac7ironisme, cfcronique, patriarc7iat, orc/iestre, &c. 

In patriarc7ie, arcfieveque, Acheron, ch is pronounced like sh. 

In Michel- Ange, Michael-Angelo, it sounds like k. 
c final is sounded, except when preceded by n. Ex. avec, with ; 

arc, bow; sac, bag; sue, juice; Turc, Turk. 

Exceptions: it is silent inaccroc, rent; broc,jug; clerc, clerk, 

estomac, stomach ; lacs, snares ; marc, mark ; yore, pork ; tabac. 

tobacco — ch is silent in almanack. 
c preceded by n is silent. Ex. banc, bench ; flanc, flank. 
c is pronounced like g in second, second, and fecond, fruitful. 
c final is seldom pronounced upon the next word. 

7. D has the same sound as in English. Ex. (fame, lady. D is pro 

nounced in the middle of words. Ex. aiverbe, adverb ; ad- 
mirer, to admire. 

a is silent at the end of words, except in proper names : as in 
David, David ; also in the word surf, south, and in a few for- 
eign words, as le Cid, the Cid; le Talmurf, the Talmud, &c. 

d final, coming before a word commencing with a vowel or an 
h mute, assumes the sound of t — un grand homme, is pro- 
nounced grand tomme ; courf-il, does he sew f vend-il, does he 
sdU are pronounced cou-til, ven-til. 

8. F is pronounced as in English. Ex.fi&vre,fever; fiacre, hackney- 

coach. 
f final is generally sounded. Ex. soi/, thirst ; chef, chief; sui/, 
taUoxo. 

Exceptions: c\ef, key; che/-d'oeuvre, master-piece; ceu/-dur, 
hard egg ; ceuj-frais, fresh egg ; boeu/-frais, fresh beef; boeu/- 
r:i]c, salt beef. In the plural of the words ceu/ and toeu/,/ 
is always silent. 

The f of neu/, nine, is silent before a consonant, and sounda 
like v before a vowel or h mute; neu/ livres, pronounce neu 
litres — neu/ hommes, neu/ enfants, pronounce neu-vomme, 
neu-venfanls. 

9. G is always hard (that is like g in game) before a, o, u. Ex. 

/?arde, guard ; gond, hinge ; UgV, acute. 
g before e and i lias always the soft sound, (that of s in pleasure). 

Ex. ^erbe, sheaf; prendre, son-in-law ; gihicr, game ; £p'let, vest. 
grin, guo, gue, gui, are pronounced gha, gho ghe, ghi, L f - **^' 



LESSON III. 



2S 



u is silent. Ex. il legua, he bequeathed; liguons, let us 
bequeath; guerre, war, guitare, guitar. 
Exceptions : In aiguille, needle, Guise, &c, the two vowels 
are sounded. Theue ofgue final is mute, unless a diaeresis 
is on the e, as in cigue, hemlock. 

10 gi is pronounced like ni in union. Ex. regne, reign ; peigne, 
comb ; dahjner, to deign ; saigner, to bleed. 
Exceptions : Gnide, Progne, stagnant, ignee, &c. 
g final takes the sound of k before a vowel or an h mute; — 
sang humain, human blood, is pronounced san Ttumain. 

1 1 . H is mute or aspirate — h mute (having of itself no sound) when 
preceded by a word subject to elision, ($ 146) is treated as 
a vowel — h aspirate is always initial, the breathing or aspi- 
ration is very sligh* but not entirely absent, as is advanced 
by some grammarians. 

As it is important, on account of elision and of the pro- 
nunciation of the last consonant of a word preceding h, to 
know when it is aspirate or not, we will give a list of the 
words which commence with h aspirate, omitting however 
the derivatives and a few words seldom used. 





Hableur 


Haras 


Have 


Hors 




Hache 


Harasser 


Havre 


Hotte 




Hagard 


Harceler 


Havresac 


Hottentot 




Haie 


Hardes 


Heler 


Houblon 




Haillons 


Hardi 


Hennir 


Houille 




Haine 


Harem 


Henri 


Houlette 




Hair 


Hareng 


Heraut 


Houppe 




Eaire 


Hargneux 


Herisson 


Houri 




Halage 


Haricot 


Herisser 


Houppelande 




Hile 


Haridelle 


Heron 


Housse 




Halle 


Harnais 


Heros* 


Houx 




Hallebarde 


Harpe 


Herse 


Euche 




Hallier 


Harpie 


Heurter 


Huee 




Halte 


Harpon 


Hibou 


Hnguenol 




Hamac 


Hasard 


Hideux 


Huit 




Hameau 


Hater 


Hierarchie 


Humer 




Hanche 


Hausser 


Hollandef 


Huppe 




Hangar 


Haut 


Homard 


Hure 




Hanneton 


Haut-bois 


Honte 


Hurler 




Hanter 


Hautesse 


Horde 


Hussard 




Harangue 








12. J 


is pronounced 


like s in pleasure. Ex.^our, day 


; jamais, never. 



* The h of the other words having the same derivation, heroine, hero- 
xsme, heroique, &c, is not aspirated. 

f We say, however, du fromage d'Hollande, Dutch cheese; de la toile 
d'Hollande. Dutch linen. 



24 LESSON III. 

K sounds like k in English. Ex. km, khan; kilogramme, a 
French weight. 

13. L in the combinations il, ill, not initial, but in the middle or at 

the end of words, has the liquid sound found in the English 
word brilliant. Ex. paiZZe, straw ; fille, daughter ; ha.il, lease • 
travaiZ, labor. 

Exceptions: fiZ, thread; BresiZ, Brazil ; Nil, Nile; mtZ, mtZie 
thousand; civil, civil; profit, profile ; vt'ZZe, town, and its deriv 
atives; tranqui/Ze, tranquiZZite, &c., quiet, quietness, <$/-c. 

I is silent in bariZ, barrel ; cheniZ, kennel ; coutiZ, ticking ; fiZs 
son ; fourniZ, bakehouse ; fusiZ, gun ; griZ, gridiron ; outiZ, tool 
persiZ, parsley. 

II in SuZZy has the liquid sound — 1 is silent in pouZs, pulse ; and 
gentiZshommes, noblemen. 

The 1 marked as silent in the words above, is never carried to 
the next word. 

14. M ) initial are pronounced as in English. For these letters in 

15. N S combination with the vowels, see nasal sounds, (page 20.) 

Final consonants after m and n are generally silent. Ex. temps 
weather ; je romps, je prenrfs, / break, I take. 

m is silent in condamner, to condemn ; automne, autumn. 

n final, and not belonging to a noun, is carried to the next word, 
when this word begins with a vowel or an h mute, if the two 
words arc closely connected. Ex. un bon enfant, a good child 
mon ami, my friend; pronounce bun nmfant, mon nami. 

16. P » generally sounded as in English. P is however silent in 

baptcmc, baptism; bnptiser, to baptize; compte, account; 

dompter, to subdue; exempt, exempt; sept, seven; septieme, 

seventh. 
p final is silent. Ex. coup, blow ; drap, cloth. 

Exceptions: cap, cape; and proper names generally, 
p final is not carried to the next word. 
7. Q qu is pronounced like k. Ex. f/westion, question ; qui, wk) 

qud\iu\ quality: — ue final is silent after q. Ex. pratique, pra 

/tee. 

Exceptions: qu is pronounced as in English in antique* 

('•</i/ntcur, 6fuestxe, figidtation, elation, in-ftarto, UqudRn, 

<7?/adrag.'naire, ^<adruple, <7uadrupede, Quinte-Curce, Quin- 

tilien, 71/intuple, (71/irinal. 
q final is sounded. It is however mute in corj-d'Inde, turkey; 

and in cin7, £ir, when followed by a word commencing with a 

consonant. 



LESSON III. 25 

18. R The French r is pronounced with greater force thau tho 

English. / 

rr is pronounced like r. Ex. arriver, to arrive ; arranger, to ar- 
range. 

Exceptions : in the future and conditional of acquerir, to ac- 
quire; courir, to run, and mourir, to die, the two r's are dis- 
tinctly sounded, Ex. je courrai, je mourrai, je courrais, jo 
mourrais, j'acquerrais, &c. 

r final is pronounced when preceded by a, i, o, u. Ex. car, for ; 
finir, to finish; cor, hunting horn; pur, pure. 
Exception: Monsieur, Sir. 

r preceded by e is generally sounded in monosyllables. Ex. 
fer, iron ; cher, dear. 

r preceded by e is silent in words of more than one syllable. 
Ex. parler, to speak ; manger, to eat ; chercher, to seek. 
Exceptions : r is sounded in amer, belveder, cancer, cuiller, 
ether, enfer, hiver, Jupiter, Lucifer, magister. 
The final r of an infinitive is not often carried to the next 
word in conversation. In serious reading it is generally 
carried to the next word. 

19. S has generally the same sound as in English. 

s between two vowels is pronounced as in the English words 
rose, prose. Ex. base, base ; vase, vase; pause, pause; choss, 
thing. 

Exceptions : s in words composed of a particle, or an adjective, 
and a word commencing with s, preserves the hissing sound. 
Ex. parasol, parasol ; vraisemblable, likely ; desuetude, desue- 
tude ; preseance, precedence, &c. 

sc is pronounced as in English. Ex. scandale, scandal ; science, 
science. 

ech is pronounced like sh, in the words schisme, scMsmatique, 
scMste, sc/ierif, scheik, sckelling— It is pronounced sk in 
scheme. 

9 final is generally silent. Ex. pas, step; mais, but; jus, juice 
Exceptions: s is pronounced in aloes, aloes; atlas, atlas, 
blocus, blockade ; cens, census ; en sus, besides ; gratis, gra- 
tis ; lapis, lapis ; iris, iris ; mais, maize ; mceurs, manners ; 
prospectus, prospectus ; Rheims, Rheims ; vis, screw ; and in 
Latin and Greek names ending in s — Delos, Romulus, &c. 

b is carried to the next word when the word commences with 
a vowel or an h mute; it has then the sound of z — bona 
amis, good friends, is pronounced ban zami. In conversation 
2 



26" LESSON III. 

the final s of verbs is not generally carried to the r.exi 
word. 
20. T is pronounced like t in tal»:s. Ex. turd, lal^\fori^ wngr, 

t has the sound of the English c in cedar, in the combinations 
tial, liel, lion, final or in the middle of words. Exs^jar.'ial, 
partial: cssen/iel. essential ; observation, observation. Words 
in which those terminations are preceded by s or x, are ex- 
cepted; the t therefore in bas/ion, ques/ion, mix/ion, &.«. 
retains its proper sound. 

t lias the sound of c in cedar, in the words inep/ie, absurdity , 
minu/ie, minulia ; prophelie, prophecy ; and in words ending 
in alio, derived from the G reek, and having in English the ter- 
mination cy, aristocra/ie, dt'mocra/ie, 6Yc.; aho in ini/ier, to 
initiate. 

In o'ber words ending in tie, and in those ending in tie and 
tier, the t has its proper sound. Ex. garan/ie, guarantee ; 
moi/ie, half; amide, friendship ; ehan/ier, dock-yard; nic/icr, 
trade. 

th sounds always like t alone. Ex. ffce, tea ; these, thesis. 

t final is generally silent. Ex. \>u>, aim ; mot, u 

Exceptions: t is sounded in l>ru/, chur, correc/, dot, direct, 
defici', fa/, exact, ne/, pr.'-t.'ri', BOSpeef, stric.', &e. 

t in sept, huit, vingt, is soundeil except when it comes before 
a consonant. 

t is seldom carried to the next word ; t in et (and) is always 
silent. 
21: V is a little softer than the English v. Ex. i iande, meat ; voile, 

veil. 
2'2. W which is found onV in foreign word-, is pronounced like v. 
Ex. U'urtemborg, IVcstphalie. In a few other words it has 
the pronunciation of the English w. Ex. whig, tehist. 
23. X initial, which in Trench is only found in a few words is pro. 
nounced likeg* Ex. xylon, cotton-plant ; A'avier, ,V 
A'ante, A'antippe. 
Xerxes is pronounced gzrrcss. 

X following an initial e. and i "wel or an h, is also 

Rounded like gt. Ex. exil, exile ; examiner, to examine ; ex. 
hiber, to exhibit. 

X not following an initial e, but coming between two vowels, 
sounds like k^. Ex. arc, axis; loxe, luxury; Alexandre, 
Alexander; maxime, maxim; sexe, &X 

f Bonnds like sb in tho following words : 6ix, tix dix, ten. 



LESSON III. 27 

soixante, sixty; Bruselles, Brussels; Au-ronne, Auxerre, 

Ai.z-en-Provence. 

In sitfieme, diarieme, deua;ieme, di.r-sept, diavhuit, dix-neuf, 

it is pronounced like z in zone. 
x final is generally silent. Ex. pri.r, price ; croiw, cross ; vote, 

voice. 

Exceptions : x is sounded like ks at the end of names of 

Greek and Latin origin. Ex. Ajaar, Stya?, etc. In Aia?-la-Cha- 

pelle it has the same sound. 

The x of deua;, si#, dia:, coming before a consonant is silent, 

except in the cases mentioned above ; i. e., in diar-sept, dix- 

huit, dix-neuf. 
x when carried to the next word, sounds like z. 
34. Z sounds as in the English words zinc, zone. Ex. zele, zeal. 

zenith, zenith. 
z final is generally silent. Ex. nez, nose; chez, with, <$-c. , 

allez, go. 

Exceptions : gaz, gas. In Metz, Suez, &c. it sounds like ss. 
z final is generally carried to the next word when that word 

commences with a vowel, or an h mute. 

Exercise 1. — The Vowels. 

(a) Table, table ; fable, fable ; chat, cat ; eclat, splendor ; arbre, 

tree ; tard, late ; balle, ball. 
(&) ame, soul; blame, blame; batir, to build; pate, paste; age, 

age ; mat, mast. 
(e) me, me; de, of; que, that; elle, she; malle, mail; parle, 

speak; fourche, fork ; salle, hall. 
(e) pre, meadow ; alle,gone; donne, given ; passe, passee, past, 

eleve, raised ; armee, army. 
(e) tres, very ; apres, after ; achete, buy ; mere, mother ; espere, 

hope; leve, raise; chere, fare; chevre, goat. 
(6) meme, same ; careme, Lent ; arret, arrest ; tempete, tempest ; 

tete, head; bete, beast. 
(i) lit, bed; dit, said; dire, to say; lire, to read; lime, file; cire, 

wax ; rite, rite. 
(i) diner, to dine; ile, isle; dime, tithe; abime, abyss; epitre, 

epistle ; gite, lodging. 
(o) mot, word ; cachot, dungeon ; repos, rest ; trot, trot ; globe, 

globe ; carrosse, coach. 
(6) t6t, soon; plut6t, rather; r6ti, roast meat; dep6t, deposit; 

prevdt, provost. 



21 LESSON III. 

(n) bu, drank; cru, believed; dii, of the; elu, elected; menu, 

minute; pnjm, foreseen ; ecu, crown. 
(u) chute, fall; bn'.lot, fireship ; mur, ripe; dument, duly ; il 

fiit, he mighj be ; nous fumes, we were. 

Ttie Diphthongs. 

(ai) je donnai, I gave ; je p:\rlerai, 7 tn'/Z s/vafc ; j'allai, I went ; 

je eherehai, I taught ; je menu, I ied ; j'irai, I trill go. 
(ais) je donnais, / teas gi\ ino- ; je parlerais, 7 would speak ; j'allais, 

I was going ; je cheichajf •<"# i" je menais, / u-as 

leading; j'irai*, I would go. 
(.m, eau) maux, mZt; chameau, camel; ehevaux, horses; beau, 

handsome; nouveau, new ; troupcau, flock. 
(ei) neig-e, snow; veinc, pern; nine, queen; Seine, Si'i'.v ; je 

peigne, / nT7i/' ; Mill, bosom. 
(eu) pcu, little ; peur, /Var; leur, //ifir ; il meurt, /k <it« ; samr, 

sister ; <ruf, qgg ; liu-ur. 
(eu) like i/. J'i'us, / ZiaJ; tu cus, thou hadst ; il eut, he had ; cu, 

ftarf. 
(ia) liant, binding ; il lia, Tie bound; partial, partial; il cria, ta 

cried ; il Ilia, /if denied ,' il pria, /i/* prayed. 
(ie) parantie, guarantee ; il prie, he* ;>r<7i/s ; il lie, /i« &ind5 ; il rie 

/ic mny laugh ; il nie, /i^ </• 
(oi) loi, /<; . il \ nit, M fed ; il boit, he drinks ; roi, 

long ; droit, right ; il CTO 
(ou) bout,/-/!^; il t , il moud, he grinds ; coupe,cup; 

loup, fcnpj rroiite, crust. 

(ua) nuapc, doud ; nuance, Made ; il salua, he saluted ; il remua, 

he moved ; il contril>ua, he contributed. 
(ue) nue, cloud ; lae,£readj nfOB,t rece iv ed; il salue, he to. 

lutes ; il remuc, M 
(ui) lui, him ; luisant, shming ; euire, to bake ; cuit, baked ; nuire, 

to injure ; produire, to product. 
(j) tliyrse, thyrsus ; type, type ; style, style ; yeux, eyes ; Vvetot, 
Yietot ; payer, to ;>ay; envoyer, /o spiuf ; abbaye, abbey, 

essayer, to try; pays, country ; pay sage, landscape ; paytwin, 

peasant. 

Exercise 2. — The Nasal Sounds. 

Ml 

30. Innocent, innocent ; inutile, xseless ; diner, dinner; immortal, 
immortal; une, one; lune, moon; dunes, downs. 



LESSON III. ?9 

Bu 

31. am ambre, amber; chambre, chamber; Adam, Adam ; ramper, to 

creep ; ample, ample ; lampe, lamp. 

an tante, aunt; manteau, cloak; plan, plan; plancher, floor; 
rang, rank ; sang, bloud ; enfant, child. 

em remplir, to Jill ; temple, temple; temps, weather; assemblee, 
assembly ; trembler, to tremble ; membre, limb. . 

en sentir, to feel ; tente, tent ; pente, declivity ; je rends, J ren- 
der; je prends, I take; je sens, I feel. 

32. en amen, amen ; specimen, specimen ; examen, examination. 

33. en ils donnent, they give; ils parlent, they speak; ils ecrivent, 

they write ; ils cherchent, they seek. 

34. im simple, simple; timbre, stamp; daim, deer; faim, hunger; 

imposteur, impostor ; important, important. 
in fin, fine ; pain, bread ; demain, to-morrow ; crin, horse-hair ; vin, 
wine ; bain, bath ; teindre, to die ; peindre, to paint. 

35. om sombre, dark; nora, name; ombre, shadow; tombe, tomb, 

nombre, number ; comble, height. 
on pont, bridge ; honte, shame ; montre, watch ; raison, reason ; 
maison, house ; fondre, to melt ; non, no. 

36. um tumble, humble; parfum, perfume ; humblement, humbly. 
un lundi, Monday; brun, brown; alun, alum; emprunter, to 

borrow ; importun, importunate ; un, one. 

Exercise 3. — The Consonants. • 

(b) baume, balsam; blessure, wound; brun, brown; absolution, 
absolution ; abstrait, abstract ; abbaye, abbey ; Jacob, Jacob. 

(c) cacher, to conceal; coin, corner; decuple, decuple; cire, 
wax; cinq, five; chercher, to seek; je cache, i" conceal; pa- 
triarche, patriarch ; patriarchat, patriarchate ; chambre, cham- 
ber ; arche, arch; changer, to change; orchestre, orchestra; 
charbon, coal ; sac, bag ; sue, juice ; clerc, clerk ; banc, bench ; 
Hone, flank ; second, second; feeond, fruitful ; facon, fashion ; 
recu, received. 

(d) daim, deer ; don, gift ; admirer, to admire ; bord, border; nord, 
north; sud, south; Obed, Obed; Talmud, Talmud; grand 
&ge,adcancedage ; rend-il, does he render? i prexid-i],doeshetakei 

(f) foin, hay; faim, hunger; froid, cold; bref, short; soif, thirst; 
suif, tallow; clef, key ; chef, chief; chef-d'oeuvre, master- 
piece; ceuf, egg; ceufs, eggs; oeuf frsas,freshegg ; boeuf, ox, 
beef; boeufs, oxen ; neuf maisons, nine houses ; neuf chevaux, 
nine horses; neuf amis, nine friends. 

(g) gager, to bet; gosier, throat; gibier, game; guide, guide; 



■ • LESSON III 

ligue, league; il ligua, he leagKed ; nous liguons, toe league, 
aiguille, needle; aiguillon, goad; cigui. 1 , hemlock: digne, 
worthy; regne, reign; Espagne, Spain; Pologne, Poland ; 
brugnon, nectarine ; soignant, taking care ; jo'ignani, joining ; 
stagnant, stagnant ; rang honorable, honorable rank. 

(k) hate, haste; honte, shame; haut, high ; herbe, Jierbage ; al- 
manach, almanac. 

( j) jujube, jujube ; jeune, young ; juger, to judge; jurer, to swear 
jonc, rush ; joindre, to join ; dejeuner, to breakfast ; Juif, Jew, 
jeu, play. 

(1) lame, blade; loi, law; illegal, illegal; illieite, unlawful, 
paille, straw ; soloil, sun; pareil, similar; bail, lease ; railler, 
to rail ; souiller, to soil; caille, quail; canaille, rabble; ville, 
town ; vii -■:iul; peri], peril; 

pointilleux, punctilious; baril, barm; l'usil, gU*i gentil- 
homme, nobleman; gcntilahonimes, noblemen; bouleille, bottle. 

I iOMTUIDEP, 

(m n) mon, my; marge, margin ; noin, name; champ, field; moine, 
monk; prompt, quick; condamner, to condemn ; fain, At 
son argent, his money; bon appetit, goodapp lite; lien itroit, 

CU)S' 

(p) partir, roup, blow; i r; drap, cloth; 

. bapU me, ba t 
(q) qu< rir, to fetch; quitter, to leave; mu&ique, musie ; logiqae, 

rank-, firty ; ijuoi, what; aijuatitjiif, aquatic ; Quin- 

tilifn, Quintilian; cinq,jfi ; cinq livn 
ft) ranger, to arrange; error, to err; arriv< 

tu pour; je courrai, I will run ; je COUraia, /tOOJ rir. 

joui ptikr 

?o sj>eak ; changer, to change; IV r, bum," hiver, m 
(■) silence. v,base; rose, 

-f, thing ; ol>-' 
sol. vjjo 

Barras, Harms; Romolua, C 
noii- 
(♦) tiers, third; tiare, it'ara; tort, wrong; portion,* portion; 



* T. in tlu> English words corresponding to the French words In which 
this letter Is pronounced like c iu cedar, has general'; the sound of eh; 
as in motion, i>ai tiul, dec. 



LESSON IV. 31 

sanction, sanction ; essentiel, essential; partialite, pa^iality ; 
section, section ; question, question ; bastion, bastion ; obser- 
vation, observation ; minutie, minutia ; democratic, democracy; 
amitie, friendship ; initiation, initiation ; mot, word; lot, lot; 
sept, seven; sept livres, seven books; et, and; vingt livies, 
twenty books. 

voir, to see; va,go; leve, raise; lever, to raise; \is&ge,face 
vive, f. lively. 

Westphalie, Weimar, Wurms, Wurtemberg. 
xylon, cotton plant; Xenophon; exiler, to exile; excuser, to 
excuse ; luxe, luxury ; Alexandre, Alexander ; maxime, 
maxim; soixantieme, sixtieth; six, six; sixieme, sixth; six 
livres, six books ; Bruxelles, Brussels ; Aix-la-Chapelle ; 
dix, ten ; Phinix ; Ajax ; deux hommes, two men ; dix amis, 
ten friends. 

zele, zeal; zone, zone; zoologie, zoology; vous lisez, you 
read; nez, nose; Metz; allez-y, go there; venez ici, come 
here. 



LESSON IV. LEQON IV. 

1. [n French the article [J 13, (2.)] has, in the singular, a dis- 
tinct brm for each gender. Ex. 

Le fils, the son; ' La fille, the daughter, the girt ; 

Le frerej the brother; ' La soaur, the sister. 

2. l.efore a word commencing with a vowel or an h mute, [L. 3, 11,] 
the article is the same for both genders. [§ 13, (7.)] Ex. 

L'aieul, the grandfather; L'aiicule, the grandmollier ; 

, L'hote, the landlord; L'hotesse, the landlady. 

3. There are in French only two genders, the masculine and the 
feminine. [§ 4.] Every noun, whether denoting an animate or an 
inanimate object, belongs to one of these two genders. 

Masc. L'bomme, the man; Le lion, the lion ; 

' Le livre, the book; Le papier, the paper; 

L'arbre, the tree; Le bois, the wood; 

Feu. La femme, the woman; La lionne, the lioness t 

La table, the table; La feuille. the leaf; 

La plume, the pen; La porte, the daw. 



8B0S IV. 



4. AVUR, TO HAVE, IX THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE. 



-b 



Affirmatively. 



Interrogatively. 



Jai, 

Tu as, ft 33.(1.) (2.)] 

Ha, 

Elle a, 

ons, 

<:Z, 
111. 
t, f. 



1 

■ 



Ai-je 1 

As-tu 1 
A-t-fl J 

A-t-clle 1 
Avons nous 1 
Ave.: \ 
Ontils '. m. 



Hast thou 7 
Has he ? 

Have ire? 

: 



5. The e of the pronoun je is elided when that pronoun come* 

i or an h mute. [] 146.] 

6. In interro i lien i!ie third person singular of a 
-erb ends with ly followed by a pronoun, a 
t, called euphonic, must be placed between the verb and the pronoun. 

A-t-fl 1 he? Artel Has she? 



. 



vous avez lc 



The father has the rural, you have IM 
wattr. 

child hoi 
I !hc pepper. 









' 




Qui 














. 




Tab 


^t 




















f. pen ; 


Vinaigre, m. vinegar. 


. 







I. Qui ale: 3. A-t-il la farine? 4. 

• teunier a la farine. 8. Le 

i plume 

I 

i 
.-.la fille a ! I le Bel. 17. Atja levin! 

ilement le \ 
19. Avei vous 1:>. table.' 90. Oui, Madame, jV la table. 



LESSON V. 33 




f'X. Have you the wheat? a.""Te"S," T5ir, I have the wheat. 3. Who 
has the meat ? 4. The butcher has the meat and the salt. * 5. Haa 
he the oats ? 6. No, Madam, the horse has the oats. 7, Have we 
the wheat ? 8. You have the wheat and the flour. 9. Who has the 
Bait? 10. I have the salt and the meat. 11. Have we the vinegar 
the tea and the coffee ? 12. No, Sir, the brother has the vinegar- 
13. Who has the horse? 14. The baker has the horse. M5. Have 
we the book and the pen ? 16. No, Miss, the girl has the pen, and 
the miller has the book. 17. Have you the table, Sir ? 18. No, Sir, 
I have only the book. 19. Who has the table? 20. We have the 
table, the pen, and the book. , 



LESSON V. LEQON V. 

1. The article le, with the preposition de preceding, must be con- 
tracted into du, when it comes before a word in the masculine singu- 
lar, commencing with a consonant or an h aspirated. [L. 3, 11. § 13, 
(8.) (9.) 

Du frere, of the brother ; Du chateau, of the castle ; 

Du heros, of the hero ; Du chemin, of the way. 

2. Before feminine words, and before masculine words' commencing 
with a vowel, or an h mute, the article is not blended with the pre- 
position. 



ela dame, f. of live lady, De l'amie, f. of the female friend ; 

e l'argent, m. of the money; De l'honneur, m. of the honor. 



3. In French, the name of the possessor follows the name of the 
object possessed. [§ 76, (10.)] 

La mai-son du medecin, The physician's house ; 

L'arbre du jardin, The tree of the garden ; 

La lettre de la soeur, The sister's letter. t 

4. The name of the material of whic 1 . an object is composed follows 
always the name of the object; the two words being connected by 
the preposition de. (d' before a vo el or an h mute.) [§ 76. (11.)] 

L'habit de drap, Wp cloth coat ; 

La robe de soie, '' K. 'he silk dress ; 

La montre d'or, ., The geld watch. 



34 



57 

; ft 

LESSON V. 



Resume of Examples. 
Le tailfcurS 1' habit de drap du I The tailor has the physician's cloth 

A-Mut Mvr. dc to dame J | Bi, »« * «V« «' 

EXERCISE 7. 

Ar-cnt m. lOwr, money ; Coutoau, m. ia ifc ; Poite-crayon, m. pencil- 

BaLm. stocking; Cuir, m. leather; ™ sc; e ,„„ 

SS Dame, £ J- Robo, 1. «/««; 

ghapJau.m.A^; Dra,,, .a. doth; BatfcL. m.£»j 

.'' «.«//*»; t>r',,n. Tailleur, in. /aitor. 

1 \vez vous la montre d'or 1 2. Oui, Madame, j'« la montre d'or 

et le chapeau de aoie. 3. Monaieur, avez vous le livre du tadleur. 

4 Noil Monsieur, j'ai lelivre du medecin. 6. Out Ua le pain du 

- o„t le pain du boulanger et la farine du meunier. 

rte-crayond' Oui, Monaieur, nooi .avons 

kporte-crayon d'argent 9. Atom uoua I'avoiue du chevall 10. 

eetlefoindu oheval. 11. Qui a ThaU dc drap 

du charpentierl If onnier a le chapeau de bow du tailleur. 

13 LetaUli cuir du cordonnier. 11. Avez vous la 

nr.j'ai la table de boia du eharpentier. 

M | q a la montre d'argent 19. La aoeurtlu 

.nieralar- Soulier de cuir? 21. 

, llle .,[ loa |,. n. 22. Avona nuns le las de lame? 

..,;,. du tadleur. 24 Qui 
ade colon. 26. La dan. 
a le Soulier de satin de la BOBOI du boi 
Exeuci 
1 Have voulhe tailor's book? ' have the pi' 

ch. l8 ..Who haa tie gold watch? 4. The lady has the gold watch 
andmesmerpe; Have you the tailor* ah oe 1 altaji 

thetad,,-sel.„nsi 7.11 ooden table 1 8 Y, oe,S* 

ble. .9.Havetheythe 8 dverkn.feJ10They 
h:u , ,-ne sdv.r knife. II. The lady has the ailver kmfe and Utt 
gold pencils. 12. H« she the satin Ml *?£*»* 
•tatarhaath. aatin dre«. 14. Who ha* th. wood? 15. The car. 



\ 



< ( 



LESSON VI. 36 

penter's brother has the wood. 16. Have you the woollen stock- 
ing? 17. No, Sir. but I have the cotton stocking. 18. Who has the 
baker's bread? 19. We have the baker's bread and the miller's 
flour, 20. Have we the horse's hay? 21. You have the horse's 
oats. 22. Have we the tailor's silk hat? 23. Yes, St, you have the 
tailor's silk hat and the shoemaker's leather shoe. 24. Have you the 
ciotir^oe of the physician's sister? 25. No, Madam, I hava the lady's 
Bilk a/ess. 



LESSON VI. LEgON VI. 

1. The article, preceded by or contracted with the preposition de, 
according to Rules 1 and 2 of Lesson 5, is placed in French before 
words used in a partitive sense. Such words may generally bo 
known in English when some or any is or may be prefixed to them, 
[$ 13, (10.) § 78, (1.)] 

Du pain, Bread, or some bread; 

De la viande, Meat, or some meat; 

De l'argent, Money, or some money. 

2. The French numeral adjective, un, m. une, /., answers to the 
English indefinite article, a or an. [§ 13, (4.) (11).] 

Un homme, A man ; 

Une femme, A woman. 

3. The e of the preposition de is elided before un and une. [§ 146.1 

D'un livre, m. Of or from a book; 

D'une niaison, f. Of or from a nouse. 

4. When the nominative or subject of an interrogative sentence is 
ji noun, it should be placed before the verb ; and immediately after 
the verb in simple tenses, ard after the auxiliary in comp<^d tenses, 
a pronoun must be placed, agreeing with the nominative in gender, 
number and person. [§ 76, (4.) (5.)] 

Le medecin a-t-il de l'argent 1 Has the physician money ? 

Le boucher a-t-il de la viande ? Has the butcher meat ? 

Le libraire a-t-il du papier 1 Has the bookseller paper ? 

La dame a-t-elie de la soie ? Has the lady silk ? 

Resume of Examples. 



Aves vous du pain ? 

Vous avez du paiu, du beurre, et 

du fromage. 
Vbtre froie a-t-il une livre de 

beurre'] 



Have you bread ? 

You have bread, butter, and cheese. 

Has your br oilier a pound of butter 9 



36 LE880KVL 

Avez vous le livre d'un libraire 7 I Have you a bookseller's book? 
Non j'ai le livre dune dame. | No, J have a lady's tnak. 

an a-t-elle du yncians sister paper ,4 

papier et do l'encre'? 

o. It will be seen by some of the above examples, that the ar 
tide most be repeated before every noun used in a partitive sense 

9. O 

: ra. maAogar.-- Livn 

Moroeau, m.pie» j 

rd'hui, to-day i "'* r "• 

Plume, : 

arj 

i 

Livre, in. book ; 
i 

I. Avezvous dc laviandel % Oui, Monsieur, ftl one livre de 

vian,: ilsa-t-ilun morceau de painl 4. Oui, Madame, 

il B , : pain. «6. Le librairea-t.il un livre 1 6. 11 a de 

M.ur a-t-elle une montre dor? 8. 

- t-il du 

11. 

. a du fromage et du b 

! U. La dame a une 
ctiill. r u her a-t-il 

17. J ir . Q ,iun0 

ir du 

a un livre, 

ir, die a une plume 

.. ■ " . 

10. 
I If :lVl pound of tea 

3. W 

,!i. 7 

i meat 
to-day, Su? lt>. YeaJ^I have a piece of beef 17. lias your 



LESSOR TIL 37 

carpenter a mahogany table? 18. Yes, Sir, he has a mahogany 
table. 19. Has your sister a glove ? 20. No, Sir, your sister has a 
silk glove. 21. Has the bookseller's son a gold pencil ease? 22. 
Yes, Sir, he has a gold pencil case and a steel pen. 23. Who has 
your sister's watch? 24. Your brother has the gold watch and the 
silk hat. 25. We have gold, silver, and steel. (See Rule 5.) 



LESSON" vn. LEgON vn. 

1. To render a sentence negative, ne is placed before the verb, and 
pas after it. 

Je n'ai pas le cheval. J have not the horse. 

Vous n'avez pas la maison. You have not the house. 

2. When the verb is in a compound tense [§ 45, (8.)] the first 
negative ne is placed before the auxiliary, and the second between 
the auxiliary and the participle. 

Je n'ai pas eu le cheval. J have not had the horse. 

Vous n'avez pas eu la maison. You have not had the house. 

3. K will be seen in the above examples that the e of ne is elided, 
when the verb begins with a vowel. [§ 146.] 

4. When the words ni, neither ; rien, nothing ; jamais, never ; per- 
Bonne, no one, nobody, occur, the word ne only is used, and those 
words take the place of pas. [§ 41, (6.)] 

Je n'ai ni le livre ni le papier. I have neither the book nor the paper. 

Avez vous quelque chose 1 Have you any thing ? 

Nous n'avons rien. We have nothing, or not any thing. 

Personne n'a le livre. No one has the book. 

Vous n'avez jamais le couteau. You never have the knife. 

5. A noun used in a partitive sense (Lesson 6, Rule 1)', and being 
the object of a verb, conjugated negatively, should not be preceded 
by the article, but by the preposition de only. \_\ 78, (7.)] 

Nous n'avons pas d'argent. We have no money. 

Vous n'avez pas de viande. You have no meat, 

6. ' -^lqu'un, some one, any one; [§ 41, (7.)] quelque chose, srme- 
zldr- ' : ncr ; should only be used in an affirmative or interroga- 
te - n a sentence which is negative and interrogative at 



^uelqu'itn ? Have we any one ? 

quelque chose 1 Have you any thing ? 

uqus pas quelque chose 1 Have we not something 1 



38 LESSON VII. 

7. In a negative sentence, ne — personne, signifies nobody, not anj 
body; and ne — ricn, nothing, not any thing. 

Je n'ai personne, / have no me. no! any one. 

Vous n'avez rien. Youha\ ,>t any thing. 

8. Avoir, to have, in the Present of the Indicative. 

vchi. N - vcly. 

Je n'ai J have not; 

, hast not; N'aa tu pas ! li 

H il pasl li 

She has 
Nousn' i 
\ 

l m. not t 
; llrcc I hey f. not/ 



Le tnilUur at il le boatOO 1 
Lap ni le cuir. 



Unior the kutkm ? 

II 

h "id neither the cloth nor tkt 

n /+■ 



\ I 

'. 

noi any thing. 
Nous n JV..M-* jamais de cafS, (R. 6.) I Winner hot ^ 

11. 

Ami. m ' * '■' no>>ody; 

■■ 

Quelqo'un, m. some out, 

I 

' 

L neighbor. 

it n-t-il tie la Boie ! -. Le chapelier n'a paa do aoie 
: \-:-il iiu veloui 

bicur. i! ■ i, il a <lu velo 

I 

l 

. Monsieur, il a deux 
boutons do soie. 11. Qui a voire chien ! 15. Le voisin a le cliienda 
mun couwu. 16. N'a-t-il p~=. I au»=>i ! 17. Non, Moiuieur 
















LESSON VIII. 39 

II a le coeval de votre ami, 18. Avez vous l'histoire de France? 
19. Non, Madame, je n'ai ni l'histoire de France ni l'histoire d'Angle- 
terre. 20. N'avez vous ni le livre ni le papier? 21. Non, Mademoi- 
selle, je n'ai ni l'un ni l'autre. 22. Qui a du papier? 23. Le libraire 
n'a pas de papier. 24. Quelqu'un a-t-il un livre ? 25. Personne n'a 
de livre. 

Exercise 12. 

1. Has the baker velvet ? 2. No, Sir, the baker has no velvet. 
3. Who has silk velvet? 4. The hatter has silk velvet and a silk hat. 
/6. Have you two silver buttons ? 6. No, Sir, I have a cloth coat, a 
silk hat, and a velvet shoe. 7. Has your neighbor a wooden^ table ? 
8. Yes, Sir, he has a mahogany table. / 9. Has your cousin a history 
of England? 10. No, Sir, he has a history of France. 11. I have 
neither the cloth nor the velvet. 12. We have neither the meat nor 
the coffee. 13. Has any one a book ? 14. Your cousin has a book, 
a velvet coat, and a silk hat. 15. Have you the physician's book ? 

1 6. Yes, Madam, I have the physician's book, and the lady's gold pen. 

17. Has the merchant cloth? 18. The merchant has no cloth, but he 
has money. 19. Who has your neighbor's dog? 20. Nobody has 
my neighbor's dog. 21. Has^ any one my book? 22. No one has 
your bjioJk 23. Has your cousin's brother any thing? 24. No, Sir, 
he has nothing 25. Who has your friend's book ? 26. Your brother 
has my cousin's book. 27. Has he the tailor's coat? 28. He has not 
the tailor's coat. 29. We have neither the cloth nor the silk. 



LESSON VIII. LEgON/ VHL ' 

1. The verb avoir is used idiomatically in French, with the words 
tpielque chose, chaud, froid, faim, honte,peur, raison, tort, soif, som- 
tneil. 

J'ai quel que chose. Something is the matter with me. 

I] a chaud. He is viarm. 

Elle a faim. She is hungry. 

Nous avons honte. We are ashamed. 

Vous avez peur. You are afraid. 

lis ont tort. They are wrong. 

Avez vous raison 1 Are you right ? 

J'ai sommeil. / am sleepy. 

2. A noun, whether taken in a general or in a particular sense, 
Is, in French, commonly preceded by the article le, in its different 
forms. [} 77, (1.) (2.)] 



40 



LESBOS VIIL 



Le pain est ngcessaire. Bread is necessaty. 

II a le pain. He has the bread. 

3. A noun, preceded by the article U, retains that article aftr ni, 
nor, neither ; but a noun taken in a partitive sense, [L. 6, 1,] takea 
after ni, neither article nor preposition. 



Je n'ai ni l'arbre ni le jardin. 
' ous n'avons ni arbre ni jardin. 



/ hare neither the tree mrthe ear dent 
Wt have neither tree ncr garden. 



4. A noun, taken in a partitive sense, and preceded by an adjee- 
tive, takes merely the preposition de. [} 78, (3.)] 

5. The following adjectives are generally placed before the noua . 

Beau, Handsome; Cher, dear ; Jeune, yotmgt Meilleur, better; 

•id; Gnu nJoto, pretty } Petit, small; 

Mauvais. /'.?'/; Yieux, old; 
Vilain 

ii'LES. 



!<iue chose! 
Jc-n'air: I. have nothing.) 

t il chau.ll 
11 n 'a ni (Void ni cliuud. 

ilir at-, lie l.iiui mi Botfl 

Kile n'a pea him mala boose, 
ml ai il Bommeil I 

M..ii ami :i a ni Munmcil ni pour. 

I ill nil .111 Villi 

: i bit ni vin. |K B ) 
I 

.t ni 1.- vin. [I; 



/ ing the matter irilh you 

Nothing is the matter irith me. 
Is your brut her tcarm ? 
If is neither irarm nor eold. 
Is your sistrr hungry or thirsty? 
■ a. but ashamed. 
I 



cale.1 






m nor afraid. 



•me. 
VMM 7 
(hr \"ine1 



' 



Taire, oi tktctm- Fn-il. in. "null, little; 

Pear, f. (fear, afraid; 
' utton; What, irhich ; 

Capitaitu'. captaini Honie.t.shame, ashamed;^ <, right; 

in. hammer; Tori in. Wi 
Faim. f. 
Ftrlilanti' ■ 

1. Qui a 60 m moil ? *J. M<>n frere a faim, maia il i 

i tort I i. Pai raiaon,je n'ai pas t.>rt. 
vous le bon faai] <le mon frere .' ti. Je n'ai paa 1<- fn-il. 7. A 
froid aujourd'lmi ? 8. Jfl n'ai | re, j'ai clinud. 

Je n'ai pas de pain. 1 I 
voua paa faim? 13. *» n'ai ni faim ni aeif. 13. Avna voui hont*1 



LESSON IX. \41/ 

14. Je n'ai ni honte ni peur. 15. Avons nous du poivre ou du sel? 
16. Vous n'avez ni pobre ni sel. 17. Quel livre avez vous? 18. J'ai 
le livre de mon cousin. 19. Avez vous le marteau de fer ou le mar- 
teau d'argent? 20. Je n'ai ni le marteau deferni le marteau.d'argent, 
j'ai le marteau de bois du ferblantier. 21. Avez vous quelque chose? 
22. Je n'ai rien. 23. Avez vous le gros livre du libraire ? 24. Je n'ai 
ni le gros livre du libraire, ni le petit livre du menuisier, j'ai le boa 
Jivre du capitaine. 

Exercise 14. 

1. Are you sleepy, Sir? 2. No, Sir, I am not sleepy, but I am 
hungry. 3. Have you pepper or salt 2^. I have neither pepper nor 
salt : I have cheese. 5. Is your brother thirsty or hungry ?-| 6. My 
brother is neither thirsty nor hungry .07. Is your sister right or 
wrong? 8.^ She is not wrong, she is right. • 9. Is the good joiner 
afraid? 10 He is not afraid, but ashamed. 11. Have you milk or 
cheese ?v 12. I have neither milk nor cheese, I have butter. \ 13. Have 
you the line cloth or the good tea? 14. I have neither the fine cloth 
nor the good tea. 15. Is anything the matter with you, my good 
friend?? 16. Nothing is the matter with me, my good Sir. 17. Have 
you no"bread? 18. Yes, Madam, I have good bread, good butter, and 
good cheese. 19. Is the carpenter sleepy? 20. The carpenter is not 
sleepy, but the tinman is hungry. f 21. Have you the tinman's wooden 
hammer? 22. I have not the wooden hammer. 23. Which hammer 
nave you ? 24. 1 have the steel hammer. 25. Have you a good cloth 
coat? 26. No, Sir, but I Ijave a silk dress. 27. Has the tailor the 
good gold button? 28. Yes, Sir, he has the good gold button. 
29. Who has my brother's gold watch ? 30. Some one has the gold 
watch. 



LESSON IX. LEQON IX. 

1. The pronouns le, him, it; la, her, it, are, in French, placed before 
the verb* These pronouns assume the gender of the nouns which 
they represent. 

Voyez vous le couteau 1 m. Do you see the knife ? 

Je le vois. I see it. 

"Voyons nous la fourchette ? f. Do we see the fork? 

Nous la voyons. We sec it. 

* Except in the socond person singular, and in the first and 
persons plural of the imperative used affirmatively. 




A^untV /* # 



LESSON IX. 

"ThTvow el of the pronouns le and la, is elided before a verli 
commencing with a vowel or an li mute. [; 146.] 
_yous lo baton I m. 
Je I'al 

riny-miHf I'i.ganpel f. 
Nous Lavouih— ^_ 



/ 
li 



3. The possessive adjectives mon, m. ma, f. my; ton, m. ta, f. thy, 
ton, m. sa, f. his, ha, agree in gender with the object possessed, thai 

~^--is with Uili uoiULJoHovvi'ig them. [\ 21, (1.) (2.)] 

- — ' ^"* = *^Ttt n n ; m|/U> y. m r^ My 

rol f. letter? 

■ — - — // 

Hm win au i, C u 

feminine noun in the singular, commencing with a 
vow^Lor m h uiuie, theAiasculine form, mon, ton, son is used 

3.)] 

J hair my m 
, it«lntml«. f. 

..ee. f. wi his army. 

re used 
without TtQiotidn before a noun Qf either gender, in the singular. 

J. 
6. The ' 'nine; lo 

dan, in. : ■• '• h,s " r 

r of the 

i 






mien. ' - 

: 



/ ' mine. 



- 
mouton 1 



■ 

I on le mien! 
mien, 

■ 

Elle I. .. 



! i 
//' 

/ 

// cue 



■SV has tu 



yours. 



Zf(^S*JM 



LESSON IX. 43 

Ne l'avez vous pas 1 Have you it not? 

Votre frere ne l'a-t-il pas 1 I Has not your brother it ? 

Exercise 15. 

Assiette, f. plate ; Crayon, m. pencil ; . Parent, m. relation ; 

Biscuit, m. biscuit; Cuisinier, m. cook ; Plat, m. disk; 

Boeuf. m. beef; Pourchette, f. fork; Poisson, m. fish ; 

Boucher, m butcher ; Matelot, m. sailor; Porcelaine, f. china; 

Commode, f. chest of Mouton, m. mutton, Sofa, m. sofa ; 

drawers; sheep; Tout, all; 

Couteau, m. knife; Miroir,m. looking-glass; Veau, m. veal, calf 

1. Avez vous la fourchette d'argent? 2. Oui, Monsieur, je l'ai. 
3. Le cuisinier a-t-il le boeuf ? 4. Non, Monsieur, il ne l'a pas. 5. 
Quel mouton avez vous? 6. J'ai le bon mouton et le bon veau du 
boucher. 7. Votre parent a-t-il la commode ? 8. Non, Monsieur, 
il ne Pa pas. 9. A-t-il mon poisson ? 1G Qui a tout le biscuit du 
boulanger? 11. Le matelot n'a ni son pain ni son biscuit. 12. 
A-t-il son couteau et sa fourchette? 13. II n'a ni son couteau ni sa 
fourchette, il a son assiette [R. 4]. 14. Quel plat a-t-il? 15. II a 
lejoli plat de porcelaine. 16. Avez vous le mien oulesien? IX 
Je n'ai ni le votre ni le sien, j'ai le notre. 18. Avez vou? peur, 
Monsieur? 1.9. Non, Madame, je n'ai pas peur, j'ai faim. 20. 
Quelqu'un a-t-il ma montre d'or ? 21. Non, Monsieur, personne ne 
l'a. 22. Qu'avez vous, Monsieur ? 23. Je n'ai rien. 24. Avez vous 
le sofa d'acajou de mon menuisier? 25. Non, Monsieur, je ne l'ai 
pas. 26. J'ai son joli miroir et son bon crayon. 

Exercise 16. 

1. Have you the silver pencil case? 2. No, Sir, I have it not. 3. 
Have you my brother's plate ? 4. Yes, Madam, I have it. / 5. Ha3 
the butcher the good biscuit ? 6. He has it not, he has the good 
beef the good mutton, and the good veali 7. Have you my knife 
and my fork ?* 8. I have neither your knife nor your fork. 9, 
Who has the good sailor's biscuit ? 10. The baker has it, and I have 
mine. 11. Have you mine also?. 12. I have neither yours nor his, 
|13. Are you hungry ? 14. I am not hungry, I am thirsty and sleepy.? 
15. Are you not ashamed? 16. No, Sir, I am not ashamed, but I 
am cold. 17. Is your relation right or wrong ? 18. My relation is 
right, Sir. 19. Has he my china dish or my silver knife ? 20. He 
has neither your china dish nor your silver knife, he has your china 
V>!ate. 21. Has any one my silver pencil-case? 22. No one has it, 

* The possessive adjective must in French be repeated before every 
nmn. [§ 21, (4.)] 



44 LESSON I. 

but your brother has your cloth coat. 23. Have you mine or his 1 
24. I have yours. 25. Has the baker the mahogany cnest of d^w. 
ers? 26. He has it not, he has the mahogany sofa. 27. Ha* the 
tinman my plate ? 28. He has not your plate, he has mine. 29. 
Which sofa have you? 30. I have my brother's sofa. 31. i havn 
neither his nor yours, I have mine. 



LESSON X. LECON X. 

1. The demonstrative adjectives ce, m. cette, f. this or that are al- 
Wmya placed before nouns; they agree in gender with these nouns. 

H*,(i.>] 

Av.z vmis ce parapluie 1 m. // ami this or that umbrella ? 

Vous n'avcz pas cctte boutdlle, f. You have not this or thai txMle. 

fore a word QMSCnline singular, commencing with a vowel, or 
an h m | the place of 0ft [\ -20, (1.)] 

• argent 1 Have you m>t this or that money? 

:nK'ur. I )',:re had this or that .'. 

3. When it is deemed nocesssry to express in French, the differ- 
10 between tin- words i : iis and that, the adverbs 
ci and Li may l.c plaeed after the Boons. ['; 20, (2.)] 

I I parasi'l, I have that 

rasol-ld, pan: 

>ve pronouns, celoi, m. cclle, f. this or that, are 
me, but arc never joined with tbem like adjec- 
l.)] 

J'ai mOO I stnl de votro / have my umbrella and vnur Mother's, 

I ma robe et i my sister's, i. e., 

sceur, titter, 

5. The pronouns celui, eelle, with the addition of the words ci and 
i'. are i.- , the I'flrr, the former. 
[) 37, (i.)] They agree in gender with the word which they n-pre- 

ci mais vous d ). but you 

hii-lo. , cr ). 

6. The pronouns ceci and ecla. are used absolutely, that is, without 
a noun, in pointing out objects. 

Nona n'avona pas ceci, nous avons We have not t\is, we have that 

c»la. 
Ceci ou cola, Tfti or that 



1 ESSON X. 



Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous le lirre de cet homme % 
Je n'ai pas son livre, j'ai le mien. 
Le cuisinier a-t-il ce parapluie 1 
II n'a pas ce parapluie-ci, il a ce 

parapluie-la, (R. 3.) 
Avez vous celui de votre frere 1 

Je n'ai pas celui de mon frere, j'ai 
celui de ma sceur, (R. 4.) 

Avez vous celui-ci ou celui-la 1 
Je n'ai ni celui-ci ni celui-la. 
Quelle robe avez vous ? f. 
J 'ai celle-ci. 
Avez vous ceci ou cela? (R. 6,) 



Have you that marts book ? 

I have not his book, I have mine. 

Has the cook that umbrella ? 

He has not this umbrella, he has that 

umbrella. 
Have you your brother's? that afyom 

brother. 
I have not my brother's, I have my 

sister's; i. e., that of my brother, that 

of my sister. 
Have you this one or that one ? 
J have neither the latter nor the former. 
Which dress have you ? 
J have this (one.) 
Have you this or that ? 



Exercise 17. 

Lettre, f. letter ; 
Malle, f. trunk; 
Parasol, m. parasol ; 
Poulet, m. chicken ; 
Plomb, m. lead; 
Plus, no longer ; 



Encrier, m. inkstand; 
Etranger, m. stranger, 

foreigner ; 
Lait, m. milk ; 
Parapluie, m. umbrella ; 
Volaille, f. poultry. 



Ardoise, f. slate; 

Balai, m. broom ; 

Bois, m. wood ; 

Bouteille, f. bottle ; 

Dame, f. lady; 

Fromage, m. cheese; 

Jardinier, m. gardener ; Saliere, f. salt stand ; 

1. Votre frere a-t-il son encrier d'argent? 2. II ne l'a plus il a un 
encrier de plomb. 3. Avons nous la lettre de Petranger ? 4. Oui, 
S|onsieur, nous avons celle de l'etranger [R. 4.]. 5. Votre soeur n'a 
pas son ardoise, mais elle a son chapeau de satin. 6. Le menuisier 
a-t-il votre bois ou le sien ? 7. II n'a ni le mien ni le sien, il a celui 
du jardinier. 8. Avez vous mon bon parapluie de soie? 9. J'ai 
votre parapluie de soie et votre parasol de satin. 10. Avez vous ma 
bouteille? 11. Je n'ai pas votre bouteille, j'ai la malle de votre 
sceur. 12. Le domestique a-t-il cette saliere? 13. II n'a pas cette 
salierc-ei, il a celle-la. 14. Avez vous le bon ou le mauvais poulet ? 
15. Je n'ai m celui-ci ni celui-la. 16. Quel poulet avez vous? 17. J'ai 
calui du cuisinier. 18. Le boulanger a-t-il de la volaille? [L. 6 
R. 1.] 19. Le boulanger n'a pas de volaille, il a du lait [L. 7. R. 5.] 
30. Avez vous votre fromage ou le mien ? 21. Je n'ai ni le v6tre ni 
le mien, j'ai celui du matelot. 22. Quelqu'un a-t-il faim ? 23. Per- 
sonne n'a faim. 24. Avez vous quelque chose ? 25. Non, Monsieur, 
je n'ai rien. 

Exercise 18. 

1. Has your brother that lady's litnbrella? 2. My brother has that 
lady's umbrella. 3. Have you this parasol or that one? 4. I have 



49 LESSON XI. 

neither this (one) nor that (one).', 5. Have you the stranger's gold 

watch? 6. No, Sir, I have the baker's. 7. Who has my slate! * 

8. 1 have your slate and your brother'*. 9. Has the cook a silver 

salt stand? 10. The cook has a silver salt stand, and a silver dish. 

11. Has the cook this poultry or that? 12. He has neither this nor 

that. 13. Has he this bread or that? 14. He has neither this nor 

that, he has the baker's good bread. 15. Have you my cotton para- 

eol ? 16. I have not your cotton parasol, I have your silk parasol. 

17. Has the gardener a leather trunk ? IS. The gardener has a leather 

trunk. 19. Who has my good ch Nobody has your 

. but some one has your brother's. 21. Have you mine or 

^ i _\ [ have neither yours nor his, I have the stranger's. 23. Has 

ook this bottle or that broom 1 24. He has this bottle. 25. Have 

lead inkstand 1 26. No, Sir, Hiave a china inkstand 27. Has 

the stranger poultry 1 28. The stranger has no poultry but he has 

'. Vniir brother is hungry and thirsty, afraid and sleepy. 

30. Is anyone ashamed? 31. No, Sir, nobody is ashamed. 32. Is 

your brother right or wrong? 33. My brother is right, and yours is 

wrong. 31. Your Mater haa neither her satin hat nor her velvet hat. 



LESSON XI. LErnX XI. 

Il.lKAl. \ 8.) 

1. The plural in French is generally formed, as in English, by the 
addition of l to die singular. 

mine, one femme, -1 man, a wommnj 

I1Z fcinmcs, ten. 

The form /•• of the article becomes plural by the addition of $. 
and may be placed before plural nouns of either gender. 

The men, the women. 

2. l>t Ban not to Rule 1. Nouns ending in 5, x, * remain 
■unhanged for the plural. 

Lc 1 'i»£*r 

La voix lea \<>ix, 

3. 2d Exception. Nouns ending with au, and eu, take x for thl 
plur;.l. 

:iux, The boat, the boats ; 

Le lieu, lea lieux, Tie place, tie plact+ 



LESSON XI. 



47 



4. 3d Exception. The following nouns ending in ou, take x for 
the plural, bijou, jewel; caillou, pebble; chou, cabbage ; genou, knee, 
hibou, owl; joujou, plaything. 

Les bijoux, les cailloux, les choiix, The jewels, the pebbles, the cabbages; 
Les hiboux, les genoux, les joujoux, The owls, the knees, the playthings. 

5. 4th Exception. The following nouns ending in ail change thai 
termination into aux for the plural; bail, lease; corail, coral; email 
enamel; soupirail, air-hole; sous-bail, under-lease ; travail, labor. 

Los banx, les coraux, les emaux, The leases, the corals, the enamels; 
Lrs soupiraux, les travaux, les sous- The air-holes, the labors, the under- 
baux, leases. 

6. 5th Exception. Nouns ending in al form their plural in aux. 

Le cheval, les chevaux, The horse, the horses ; 

Le general, les generaux, The general, the generals. 

Bal, ball; carnaval, carnival; chacal, Jackal; regal, treat, follow the 
general rule. 

7. 6th Exception. Ciel, heaven; ceil, eye; and ai'eul, ancestor, 
form their plural irregularly. 

Les cieux, les yeux, les aieux. Tlie heavens, the eyes, the ancestors. 
For further rules see \ 8, \ 9, and § 10 of the Second Part. 

Resume of Examples. 



Les Anglais ont ils les chevaux 

du general 1 
Les generaux n'ont pas les bijoux. 
Les enfants ont ils les cailloux 1 
Les yeux de l'enfant. 
Les tableaux de cette eglise. 
Avez vous les oiseaux de ce bois 1 
Avez vous les encriers d'argent de 

ma sceur 1 
J'ai les bijoux d'argent et d'or de 

Petranger. 
Les rois n'ont ils pas les palais de 

marbre 1 



Have the English the general's horses? 

The generals have not the jewels. 

Have the children the pebbles ? 

The child's eyes. 

2 J he pictures of that church. 

Have yon the' birds of. that wood ? 

Have you my sister's silver inkstands? 

I have the gold and silver jewels of tlie 
foreigner. 

Have not the kings the marble pal- 
aces? 



Baril m. barrel ; 
Bas. m. stocking ; 
Chocolat, m. chocolate; 
Bijou, m. jewel; 
Chou, in. cabbage; 
Dans, in ; 
Enfant, m. child; 
Fer, m. iron; 
JTils, m. son; 



Exercise 19. 

General, m. general ; 
Gilet, m. waistcoat; 
Grand, adj. large, great; 
Jardin, m. garden; 
Joujou, m. plaything; 
Legume, m. vegetable ; 
March and, m. merchant ; 

a. b ln.( 

bad; 



Meunier, m. miller; 
Morceau, m. piece; 
Oiseau, m. bird; 
Petit, adj. small; 
Paire, f. pair ; 
Poivre, m. pepper; 
Qu', que, what; 
Etien, nothing. 



1. Avez ^ous les marteaux du charpentier ? 2. Nous avonn lea mar 



48 LESSON XI. 

teaux du marechal ? 3. Lcs marechaux ont ils deux marteaux de 
bois? 4. Ils ont deux marteaux de fer. 5. Les generaux ont ils 
les chapeaux de soie de l'enfant ? 6. Ils ont les bijoux et les joujoux 
de l'enfant. 7. Les enfants ont ils les oiseaux de votre bois ? 8. Ha 
n'onl pas les oiseaux de mon bois, mais ils ont les clievaux de mon 
general. 9. Ix> marechal a-t-il une paire de bas de laine? 1C. Le 
marechal a deux paires de bas de laine. 11. Monsieur, n'avez vous 
pas froid ? 12. Nun, Monsieur, j'ai chaud. 13. Avez vous du cafe 
ou du choeolat ? 11. Je n'ai ni cafe ni chocolat. 15. N'avez vous 
• lioux demon grand jardin ? 16. J'ai les legumes de votre 
petit jardin. 17. Votre ills, qu'a-t-il ? 18. Mon tils n'a rien. 
19. Avez vous deux morceaux/k> pain ? 20. Le meunier a un mor- 
ceau de pain et deux barils de furine. 31. L'epieier a-t-il du cafe, du 
the, du chocolat, et du poivrv ? 22. II a da the et du cafe, et le cho- 
colat et le poivre de votre Ekaichsnd. 23. Qui a Jc l'argent ? 24. Jo 
n'ai pas d'argent, majs j'ai du papier. 20. Avez vous de bon papier! 
26. J'ai de mauvais papier. 

ROI81 20. 

1. Have you my brother's horses? 2. I have not your brother's 
horses, I have your C 3. Have the blacksmiths good 

iron? 4. The blacksmith hi - of iron. 6. Have you two 

i of stockings and two pairs 

our deter the gold jewels 1 8. .My sister has 
the gold jewels .-mil the paper pl.i\ things. '.'. 1 lam you the cabbages 
In your garden 1 10. We have two cabbages moor garden. 11. Hera 
you the silk hats? 12. The generals have the silk hats. 13. Have 
you BOfl rl 14. We have neither coffee nor sugar. 

16. 1< your brother ashamed? 18. My brother is neither 
ashamed nor afraid. 17. Who baa two barrels of Hour ? 18. The 
miller has two barrels of lloiir. ]!'. Have the birds bread 1 20. The 
birds have no bread. 21 . Has the merchant tea, chocolate, sugar and 
pepper? 22. It r and pepper, bat he has neither 

BBOeolata. 23. Whnt hasyoar sister 1 94 She has nothing. 25. 
What is the matter wiih your brother 1 26. Nothing is the matter 
with him. 27. Is he not cold? 28. He is not cold, he is warm. 
29. Is he wrong ? 80. He is not wrong, he is right. 31. J i | 

two cloth coats? 32. I have only one cloth coat, but I hi 
aatin waistcoats. 33. Who has my brother's letter ? 34 Your sis* 
Ur bas it. 35. Your sister has it not 




LESSON XI J. 



"LESSON XII. LEgON XII. 

1. The plural form of the pronouns le, him or it ; la, her or it, is 
Jes, them, for both genders. Its place is also before the verb . 

Vous les avez. Les avez^vous 1 You have them. Have you them ? 
Nous ue les avons pas. We have them not. 

2. The plural of the article, preceded by the preposition de, of, or 
from, is des for both genders. 

Des livres, des plumes, Of or from the books, of the pens ; 

Des freres, des sceurs, Of ox from the brothers, of the sisters. 

3. The same form of the article is placed before plural nouns used 
in a partitive sense. [L. 6, R. 1.] 

J'ai des habits. J have clothes. 

Vous-avez des maisons. You have houses. 

4. Rule 5, Lesson 7, and Rule 4, Lesson 8, apply also to plural 
nouns used partitively. 

Nous n'avons pas de livres. We have no books. 

Vous avez de bons crayons. You have good pencils. 

5. The plural form of the possessive adjectives, mon, ton, son, 
notre, votre, leur, is mes, my; tes, thy; ses, his, her; nos, our; vos, 
your ; leurs, their, for both genders. 

Mes freres, mes soeurs, My brothers, my sisters; 

Nos livres, nos plumes, Our books, our pens. 

6. The possessive pronouns, le mien, la mienne, etc. [L. 9, R. 6,] 
form their plural as follows : 

Mas. Fern. - Mas. Fern. 

Les miens, Les miennes, mine ; Les tiens, Les tiennes, thine ; 
Les siens, Les siennes, his or hers; Les notres, Les notres, ours; 

Les votres, Les votres, ' yours ; Les leurs, Les leurs, theirs. 

Vos maisons et les miennes, Your houses and mine; 

Vos champs et les siens, Your fields and his; 

Les siens, les votres et les notres. His, yours and ours. 

7. The demonstrative adjectives, ce, cet, cette, have ces for thei 
plural. 

Ces hommes, ces femmes. These men, these women. 

8. The demonstrative pronoun, celui, m. this, or that, makes ceux in 
the plural. The feminine form, celle, merely takes the s in the 
plural. 

Mes chandeliers (m.) et ceux de vos My candlesticks and those of your 

freres. brothers. 

Vos chandelles (f.) et celles de nos Your candles and those ofow neigh- 

voisins. bors. 

3 



LKSSOH XII. 



RESUME OF EXAMPLES. 

Yotre frere a-t il mes chevaux 1 | Has your brother my hitrsei? 
II n'a ni lcs votres ni lea siens. lie has neither yours wr his. 

A-t-il ceux de nos voLsins ? <, Has he those of our n:ighbor$ f 

11 no lea a pee 1 11 Uu them hot. 

Ma soeur a-t-ellc vos plumes ou 

celles de ma cousine ? 
Elle n'a ni les miciines ni celles de 

ma cousine, elk- a les siennes. 
Avons nuus des martcaux ? 
Vous n'avc/ pee de marteaux. 
Vous avez de j«»!is crayons. 
Avez vons lcs habits dea enfantl 1 
Je n'ai pas lcs habits dee infants. 
Vous avez les cliapeaux dee damee, 
Avez vous ccux-ci ou ceux la 1 



Has my sister your pens or my aux- 
in's, f. ? (or those of my cousin). 

She has neither mine nor my cousin 1 ! 
she has her oicn . 

Have ice hammers? 

You have no hammers. 

You have pretty pencils. 

Hive you the children s ciothes? 

1 have not the children's dothes. 

You have the ladies' hats. 

Ha vc you these or those ? 



EXEKCISE 21. 

Acajou, m. mahogany; Chand.lk. f candle ; Fusil, m. gun ; 
Aubergiste, in. innkcep- Cousine, f. cousin; Laine, f. inml ; 

er; Crfa, m. horse-hair; Marbre, m. marble / 

Blanc, lie, while; Bbteiate, m. cabinet- Matelas. m. mattress; 

Chaise, t ctatr ; vm MeiHeure, adj. f better i 

Chandelier, m. candle- Fcrblano. ni. tin; Onvricr, m. trnrkman ; 

stiek ; Fcrblautier. m. tinman ; Voyageur. m. traveller. 

1. Avez vous les marteaux dea man 'cliaux I 'J. Oui, Monsieur, jo 
le3 ai. 3. No les avez \..us pas.' -\. Nun, Monsieur, nous ne lea 
avons pas. 5. I/ouvricr lea a, 6. L'aubergiete a-t-il vos elievaux ? 
7. L'aubergiete n'a ni mea chevaux ni leavetree,!! • 

Ix- in. decin a-t-il des li\res ? ;>. Oui, Monsieur, il a de boM litres. 

mea meilleuree plumes.' il, Oui, Moaaieai 

j'ai VOS Illeilkures pinnies, les iiiiemies et eelles de voire cuiisine 

12. Le voyafreur a-t-il de bone fnana ? 13. 11 n'a paa da bona fusil*, 
il a des fusils de fcr. 11. l.e matt-lot n'a-t-il pas mea matelas de 
crin ? 15. II ne les a pas. 16. Qu'a-t-il 1 17. II a les matelas de 
laine de I'd* niste. 18. L'ebeniate a-t-il des lablaa d'aeajou' iy. 
Oui, Madame, il a des tabic d'aeajou et dea tables de marbre hl.inc. 
vous mea enaieea i>u lea \. irc^.' 21. Je n'ai ni les rotitaj 
ti les miannna. j'ai eelles de l'ebeniate. 33. N'avea vous par son> 
Uk Non, Monsieur, je n'ai ni sommeil ni faim. 34, le far* 
blantie: a-t-il voa chandeliers de far .' 25. Non, Monsieur, il a ceux 
du nurechal. 

Exercise 22. 

1. Hare yon my tables or youra? 2. I have neither youra nor 
nine* I have the innkeeper's. 3. Have you them ? 4. No, Sir, I hart 



LESSON XII I. 51 

them not. 5. Has your sister my horses ? 6. Yes, Sir, she has 
your two horses and your brother's. 7. Are you right or wrong ? 
8. I am right, I am not wrong.) 9. Has the tinman my silver can- 
dlesticks or yours? 10. He has neither your silver candlesticks nor 
mine. 11. What has he? 12. He has the cabinet-maker's wooden 
tables. 13. Has he your mahogany chairs ? 14. No, Sir, he has my 
white marble tables. 15. Have you these tables or those? 16. I have 
neither these nor those, I have the cabinet-maker's. 17. Have you 
good pencil-cases ? 18. No, Sir, but I have good pencils. 19. Has 
the traveller iron guns ? 20. Yes, Sir, he has mine, yours, and his. 
21. Has he not your brother's ? 22. He has not my brother's. 23. 
Has the workman my iron hammers ? 24. Yes, Sir, he has them. 
25. Has my brother your pens or my cousin's ? 26. He has mine 
and yours. 27. Have you the children's clothes? 28. Yes, Madam, 
I have them. 29. Have you your sister's hat? 30. I have my 
cousin's, f. 31. Is any thing the matter with your brother? 32. 
He is cold and hungry. 33. Have you horses ? 34. Yes, Sir, I have 
two horses. 35. I have two horse-hair mattresses and one wool 
mattress. 



lesson xm. LEgON xni. 

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. The adjective in French, whatever may be its place,* agrees in 
gender and number with the noun which it qualifies [§ 15,(1.) (2.)]. 

2. Adjectives ending with e mute, i. e. not accented, retain th"\t 
termination for the feminine. 

Un gar^on aimable, An amiable boy; 

Une fille aimable. An amiable girl, 

3. Adjectives not ending in e mute, take e for the feminine. 

Un gar^on diligent, A diligent boy ; 

Une fille diligente, A diligent girl. 

4. Exceptions. Adjectives ending in el, eil, en, et, on, as, and q* 
double the last consonant and take e for the feminine. t 

Mas. Fern. Mas. Fern. 

Essentiel, essentielle, essential; Sujet, sujette,* subject; 
Vermeil, vermeille, vermilion; Bon, bonne, good; 

Ancien, ancienne, ancient; Bas, basse, low; 

_ r-^JL 

* For the place of adjectives see L. 15, and Rule 5, L. 8. 



52 



L E S 6 N XIII. 



5. Adjectives ending in /change the /into re; those ending in a 
change that letter into se for the feminine. 

Un habit neuf, Une robe neuve, 
A new coat; dress ; 

Un homme hcureux, Une femme heureuse, 

A happy man ; A happy woman ; 

6. The adjectives beau, handsome ; fou, foolish; m ou, soft; nouveau 
MOB ; vieux, old, become bel, fol, mol, nouvel, and vieil, before a noun 
masculine commencing with a vowel or an h mute; the last conso 
nant of the latter form is doubled, and e added for the feminine, Ex, 
belle, folle, nouvelle, vieille. 

7. Additional rules and exceptions will be found, } 15 of th« 
Second Part of this grammar. 

8. Conjugation of the Pbxssnt of the Indicative of 

Ktke, to Be 



Affirmatively 


Interrogatively 


Je suis, 
Tu es, 

Kile est, 


J am ; 

art; 
It 


Bob-jel 

Kst-il 1 
■ lie I 


Am I? 
Art thou 7 
Is he 7 
Isshe7 


mines, 

•. m. 

nt f. 




SniniiU'S nous! 

roui l 
8ont ils ? 
Sont ellcs 1 


Are we 7 
if% MM f 

Are they 7 
Are they 7 



OF El \MTLES. 



Avez vons un pardon diligent et une 

Mile diliir.t:' 

r«,Mii <-<t diligent, mais ma 

fllle cm paiQKHMW | R. 6 ] 

;•• aneieime 7 
Cette coutume nest DM ancienne, 

elle est rmuvelle [R 8 J 
Vutre plume /. est elle bonno ou 

man. ; 
Mi MMV Ml trcs vive, [R. 6] 
Vutre ni.iivm est elle meilleurc que 

la mienno 1 
La in.iison de ma soear n'est pas si 

bonne que la voire. 



// ma diligent boy and a di*' 

j I rl f 

it diligent, but my daughter 

Is this custom ancient 7 

This custom is not ancient, it is nev, 

Is your pen good or bad 7 

Mil sister is veni lively. 

Is your house belter than mine 7 

Mil sister's house is not so good M 

yours. 



Exkkcise 23. 

Beau, bel, belle, hand- Fille, f. daughter f Fnrasol, m. parasol t 

some ; Habit, m. emit ; lVtit.-e, small ; 

Hcureux, -sc, happy; Paressoux,-sc, idle ; 
Ici, here; !;iine, f. china i 

Mcilleur, c. better; Que. titan; 

new; Vieux, vieille, old; 



Ron m. good ; 

• ased; 
Cravalc. f. cravat ; 
Dame, f. lady ; 

r m. inkstand. 
Excellent, -e, excellent 



Parapluie, m. umbrella ; Vif, vive, quick, lively ; 



LESSON XIII. 53 

1. Cette dame est elle contente? 2. Non, Monsieur, cette dame 
Ii'estpas contente. 3. Votre fille est-elle vive? 4. Mon fils esttres 
vif et ma fille est paresseuse. 5. N'a-t-elle pas tort 1 ? 6. Elle n'a 
pasraison. 7. Votre cousine est elle heureuse ? 8. Oui, Madame, elle 
est bonne, belle et heureuse. 9. A-t-elledes amis'? 10. Oui, Monsieur, 
elle a des parents et des amis. 11. A-t-elle une robe neuve et de vieux 
soulier3? 12. Elle a de vieux soulierset une vieille robe. 13. Votre 
frere n'a-t-il pas un bel habit [R. 6.] ? 14. II a un bel habit et une 
bonne cravate. 15. Avez-vous de bonne viande, Monsieur ? 16. J'ai 
de la via.ide excellente. 17. Cette viande-ci est elle meilleure que 
celle-la? 18. Celle-ciestmeilleure que celle-la. 19. Votre ami a-t-il le 
bel encrier de porcelaine ? 20. Son encrier est beau, mais il n'est 
pas de porcelaine. 21. Quelqu'un a t-ilfaim? 22. Personne n'a faim. 
23. Les generaux sont ils ici ? 24. Les generaux et les marechaux 
sont ici. 25. J'ai vos parasols et vos parapluies, et ceux de vos 
enfants. 

Exercise 24. 

1. Is your little sister pleased ? 2. Yes, Madam, she is pleased. 
3. Is that little girl handsome ? 4. That little girl is not handsome, 
but she is good. 5. Have you good cloth and good silk ? 6. My 
cloth and* silk are here. 7. Is your sister happy ? 8. My sister is 
good and happy. 9. Has that physician's sister friends? 10. No, 
Madam, she has no friends. 11. Is your meat good? 12. My meat 
is good but my cheese is better. 13. Has the bookseller a hand- 
some china inkstand? 14. He has a fine silver inkstand and a pair 
of leather shoes. 15. Have you my silk parasols? 16. I have your 
cotton umbrellas. 17. Is your brother's coat handsome? 18. My 
brother has a handsome coat and an old silk cravat 19. Have you 
relations and friends ? 20. I have no relations but I have friends. 
21. Is that handsome lady wrong ? 22. That handsome lady is not 
wrong. 23. Have you handsome china? 24. Our china is hand- 
some and good. 25. It is better than yours. 26. Is not that little 
girl hungry ? 27. That handsome little girl is neither hungry nor 
thirsty. 28. What is the matter with her ? 29. She has neither re- 
lations nor friends. 30. Is this gold watch good? 31. This one is 
good, but that one is better. 32. Have you it ? 33. I have it, but I 
have not your sister's. 34. I have neither yours nor mine, I have 
your mother's. 

* The article, the possessive and the demonstrative adjective are re- 
peated before every noun. Mon frere et ma sceur, my brother and sister. 



54 LESSON XIV. 

LESSON XIV. LE£ON XIV. V, 

iGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES — PLCRAL OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. An adjective qualifying a plural noun, or two or more singula! 
nouns of the same gender, assumes the gender of the noun or noun» 
and is put in the plural. 

Les arbres et les fruits sont beaux. The trees and fruits are fine. 
Les rleurs et les pinnies sont belles. The flowers and plants arc fine. 
Vos jardius sont trcs beaux. Your gardens arc very fine. 

2. An adjective qualifying two or more nouns of different gender! 
is put in the plural masculine (J 18.) 

Mon fi ere et ma sceur sont contents. M\i brother and sister are pleased. 
Le canif et la plume sont bons. The penknife and pen arc good. 

3. The plural of the feminine of adjectives is invariably formed by 
the addition of an s. 

Yi'Us a c/. dfl joliet unisons. You hare pretty houses. 

UUntives. Those young ladies are attentive. 

4. The plural of the masculine of adjectives is generally formed by 
the addition of an s. 

Ces ecolk-rs sont att.-ntits. Those scholars are attentive. 

maguitiipucs. Your woodi are magnificent. 

5. The terminations s and x are not changed for the plural mascu- 
line. 

: nits sont mnurais. Our fruits are bad. 

ktaB. \ <■■ re hideous. 

6. To the termination eau, x is added for the plural masculine. 

Vos champs sont trfcs beaux. Your fields arc very fine. 

7. The termination al is generally changed into aux for the plural 
masculine [J 17 (3.)]. 

'mines sont egaux. .1/ \ are equal. 

8. For more explicit rules and for exceptions, see } 17, Second Pari 

9. Thesent ok m Indicative of ktrk, to de. 

• v * ntirely and Interrogatively. 

I am. not .- Nc ■uia-Ja pas I / not ? 

Tn r.'. ■- Thou a, t no!; Art Hum not 1 

H ■ .! pasl 

1 h all 

•unines pas II imes nous pas | 

I I M| not 7 

lis ne sont pas m. They art noli Y l ihcynotl 

Ellcs ne sout pas f. They aic not \ Ne sont elles pas I f. Are L/uy not? 



LESSON XIV. 



Resume of Examples. 



Aver, vous des e.coliers attentifs ? 
Mes ecoliers et nies ecolieres sont 

tres attentifs et tres studieux. 
Ces demoiselles soat elles studi- 

euses 1 
Elles ne sont pas tres studieuses. 
(!es regies sont elles generates ? 
Oes principes sont generaux. 
Leurs habillenients sont superbes. 
Avez vous peur de ces chevaux 

retifs 1 
Vos montres d'or sont excellentes. 
Les miennes sont elles nieilleures 

que les votres 1 
Les votres sont nieilleures que les 



Have you attentive scholars ? 

My scholars {male and female') art 

very attentive and very studio-.is. 
Are those young ladies studious ? . 

They are not very studious. 

Are those rules -general ? 

Those principles are general. 

Their clothes are superb. 

Are you afraid of those restive horses 7 

Your gold watclies are excellent. 
Are mine better than yours ? 

Yours are better than mine ■ 



Exercise 25. 

Agreable, agreeable; Mauvais, e, bad; Souvent, often ; 

Aino, e, elder; Mule, f. mule; Travail, m. labor; 

Allemande, f. German; Oisif, ve, idle; * Tres, very ; 

Jamais, never; Pantoufles f. slippers; Utile, useful; 

Indulgent, e, indulgent ; Personne, m. nobody; Veloura, m. velvet; 

Laine, f. wool, woollen ; Retif, ve, restive ; Vif, ve, quick, lively. 
Maroquin, m. morocco; 

1. Les chevaux de notre ami sont ils retifs? 2. Ses chevaux no 
sont pas retifs mais ses mules sont tres retives. 3. Les chevaux et 
les mules de votre frere sont excellents. 4. Vos soeurs sont elles 
tres vives ? 5. Mes freres et mes soeurs sont tres vifs. 6. Sont ils 
eouvent oi*ifs ? 7. Non, Monsieur, mes soeurs ne sont jamais oisives. 
8. Avez vous peur de votre frere ? 9. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai peur 
de personne. 10. Ne sommes nous pas indulgents ? 11. Vous etes 
indulgents, et vous avez raison-. 12. Ai je vos livres? 13. Vous ne 
les avez pas, vous avez ceux de mon frere aine. 14. Ne les avez 
vous pas ? 15. Je ne les ai pas. 16. Avez vous une bonne paire de 
has de laine ? 17. J'ai une belle paire de bas de soie. 18. Avez vous 
le3 bonnes maisons ou les mauvaises? 19. Je n'ai ni les bonnes ni 
les mauvaises, j'ai celles de ma cousine. 20. Le travail est il agre- 
able! 21. Le travail est utile et agreable. 22. Avez vous mes 
beaux souliers de maroquin ? 23. Je n'ai pas vos beaux souliers de 
maroquin, j'ai vos belles pantoufles de velours. 24. Avez vous les 
pantoufles de votre soeur, ou les miennes ? 25. Je n'ti ni les votres 
ni celles de votre soeur, j'ai celles de l'Allemande. 

Exercise 26. 
1. Are your brothers and sisters very (bieri) quick ? (Note, p. 53.) 



wO US80S XV. 

2. My brothers are quick, but my sisters are not quick. 3. Have yon 
not two restive horses ?f 4. No, but I have a restive mule. 5. Have 
you not two good pairs of silk gloves ? 6. 1 have a good pair of 
cotton gloves, and two pairs of silk gloves, j 7. Are you not afraid 
of your friends? 8. No, Sir, I am never afraid of my friends. 9. ] 
am afraid of nobody. 10. Are you right or wrong] 11. I am right 
19. Have you my beautiful leather slippers, or my old satin slip, 
pcrs? 13. I have your old leather shoes and your velvet slippers. 
1 J. Are those ladies pleased ? 15. Those ladies are pleased and they 
10. Has the German l;uly your father's shoes or mine? 
iiis nor yours, she has my sister's. 18. litis 
your elder brother good houses or bad ? 19. His houses are better 
than yours and than mine.* SO. Are his houses old? 81. His 

22. Have ynu'theiu ! 

Sir, I have them not, I have no houses. 24 Have you my brother's 

25. Your sister has hers and my mother's. 26. Are 

27. My scholars ;ire very attentive and very 

- studious 1 2i>. They are 

80. Are you often wrong? 31. 

or agreeable ? 33. yea, Sir, 

agreeable and useful. 84. We have them and you have 

not 



xv. :;v. 

1. The Q French, follows the noun much more fire. 

', (1.)] 

btct$. 

'!..• nouns, hi I 

ent; EL 5.], and will be found [;■ 85, (11.)] 

I 

:— lst,Allpaiw 

njunction ore nevi r undi 
ry noun, pronoun ■ 
ezt L. 



LESSON XV. flY 

Nous avons une histoire interessante. We have an interesting history. 
Vous avez des enfants polis. You have polite children. 

4. 2d, All such as express form, color, taste ; such as relate to 
hearing and touching ; such as denote the matter of which an object is 
composed ; as also such as refer to nationality, or to any defects of 
the body. [j 85, (4.) (5.) (6.) (7.)] 

Nos parents out des chapeaux noirs. Owr relations have black hats, 

Vous avez des pommes douces. You have sweet apples. 

Voila de la cire molle. There is soft wax. 

Cette dame espagnole a un enfant That Spanish lady has a lame child. 
boiteux. 

5. 3d, Almost all adjectives ending in al, able, ible, ique and if. 

Ces hommes liberaux sont aimes. Those liberal men are loved. 

Voila un esprit raisonnable. That is a reasonable mind. 

Voila un esclave fugitif. That is a fugitive slave. J 

6. Some adjectives have a different meaning according to theii 
position before or after the noun. [$ 86.] 

Un brave homme, a worthy man. Un homme brave, a brave man. 

7. En is used for the English words some or any, expressed or 
understood, but not followed by a noun ; en has also the sense of 
of it, of them, thereof, generally understood in English sentences, 
particularly in answers to questions. [§ 39, (17.) 5 104, j 110, 
(2.) (3.)] 

Avez vous des souliers de cuir 1 Have you leather shoes? 

J'en ai. I have some, I have {of them). 

Votre fils en-a-t-il 1 Has your son any ? 

8. An adjective used substantively, and having a partitive significa- 
tion (in a sentence containing the pronoun en), must be preceded by 
the preposition de in the same manner as if the noun were expressed. 
[See R. 4. Lesson 8.] 

Avez vous de bonnes plumes 1 Have you good pens? 

Non, mais j'en ai de mauvaises. No, but I have bad ones. 

Besume of Examples. 



Avez vous de beaux jardins 1 
Oui, j'en ai de beaux. [R. 7.] 
Votre frere n'a-t-il pas des souliers 

noirs 1 
II n'en a pas, mais ma sceur en a. 
N'a-t-elle pas aussi une robe 

blanche 1 
Oui, elle en a une. 
Non, elle n'en a pas. 
Qui en a une "? 
Qui n'«n a pas 1 



Have you fine gardens ? 

Yes, I have fine ones. 

Has not your brother black shoes ? 

He has none, but my .vster has son 
Has s/ie not also a whue dress ? 

Yes, she has one. 
No, she has none. 
Who has one ? 
Who has none ? 
3* 



58 



LESSON XV. 



Le bnucher n a-Ml pas de la viande 

fraiche 1 
II en a, il n'cn a pas. 
II en a beaucoup. 
II n'en a guure. 
II en a deux, livres. 



Has not the butcher frtsk meat? 

He has sorre, he has none. 
He has vmcA (»f'U). 
He has bul Utile {of il). 
He has two pounds {of il). 



Exercise 27. 

Amusant, e, amusing; Bijou, m. jewel; Laine, f. irool; 

Amcricain, e. American ; Blanc, he, white; Mademoiselle, f. JWss, 

Anglais, e, English; Brave, brave, worthy; Monsieur, m. Sir, Mi ^ 

Arabian; Chile, m. shawl; Gentleman; 

Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Conicau, m. knife ; Parent, m. relation; 

cr ; Francais, e, French; Soldat, m. soldier; 

Beaucoup, much, many ;Gucre, tittle, but little; Terra, f. land. 
Beige, 13 Guitare, f. guitar ; 

I. Avez vous une bonne guitare? 2. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai une 
guitare excellence. 3. Avez vous de bons habits ? 4. Oui, Madame, 
j'ai de bons habits noirs et de belles robes blanches. 5. Votre mere 
n'a-t-elle pas mi elude de soie ? 6. Oui, Mademoiselle, ellc en a un 
at on de laine. 7. L'aubergiste a-t-il de bons chevaux 
anglais! 8. L'aubergiste a des ehevaux anglais, francais et 
arabes. [». II en a de supcrbes. 10. l.'aini de votre fro re a-t-il des 
bijoux d'or? 11. Oui, Monsieur, il en a. VI. A-t-il auaai des bijoux 
13. II en ■ ausai. 14. En a-t-il beaucoup? 15. Non, 
Monsieur, il n'en a gut'-rc. 16. Votre ami a-t-il des parents } 17. 
( >ui. Monajfinr. il n a. 18, Ce Monsieur a-t-il une bonne plume 
d'aeier on une belle plume d'<>r I 19. I! en a une d'aeier et nous en 
avons une dor. 80. Le genera] n'a-t-il jms de bona solda' 
Ii en a de Me bravi Vmoricsini n'ont ils pas do bonne 

hml -'3. Ils en ont d'exeellente. 2 J. Ix- marchand a-t-il des cuu- 
ttaux anglais on ftuftcaial 25. Lcs couteaux du marchand ne sont 
ni anglais ni francais, ils sont beiges. 

Exeucise 28. 

l. Haa your brother Arabian boraeal 2. Ves, Sir, he has some. 
3. Has he handsome Ones! 1. Yea, Sir, be has handsome ones. 
6. Are the good Americans wrong? 6. No. Mi-*, the J are not 

wrong, they are right 7. Have you a French shawl 1 8. \ 
1 have one, I have a handsome French shawl. *.». Has your innkeeper 
jour aflver knift or mine? 10. He has neither yours nor mine, he 
ha* his sister's handsome steel knife. 11. Has the Belgian a good 
guitar? 12. lie has an excellent French guitar. 13. He has an ex- 
cellent one. 14. Has the gentleman amusing books? 15. Yes, Sir 
ha has two. 16. Has the general Franch or Arabian horses ? 17 



LESSON XVI. 69 

He has neither French nor Arabian horses, he has English horses. 
18. Who has Arabian horses? 19. The Arabian has aome. 20. 
Has the Englishman any ? 21. The Englishman has some. 22. Has 
your friend's sister a good steel pen? 23. My friend's sister has 
one, but my relations have none. 24. Are you not wrong, Sir ? 
25. Yes, Madam, I am wrong. 26. Are those knives English 1 ? 27. 
No, Sir, they are Belgian. 28. Have you relations ? 29. I have 
two, and they are here O'ci). 30. Has the English butcher meat? 
31. Yes, Sir, he has much. 32. Has he much money ? 33. He has 
but little. 34. Has the Belgian general brave soldiers ? 35. Yes, 
Sir he has good ones. 



LESSON XVI. LECOST XVI. 

PLAN OF THE EXERCISES IN COMPOSING FRENCH. 

Hitherto the student has been occupied exclusively in acquiring 
facts, forms and principles, and in translating, by the aid of these, 
French into English and again English into French. Following still 
the plan of the work, let him now undertake the higher business of 
endeavoring to compose in French. With this intent, let him take 
some of the words, given for this purpose, in the lists at page 267, 
and seek to incorporate them in sentences entirely his own. The 
words taken from the lists, are to be used merely as things suggest- 
ive of thought. The form which, in any given case, the sentence 
may assume, should be determined by the models found in the Lea- 
sons preceding ; for, every sentence which the pupil has once mas- 
tered in the regular course of the Lessons, is or should be to him a 
model, on which he may at pleasure build other constructions of his 
own. Indeed, this constructing sentences according to models, that 
is, shaping one's thoughts according to the forms and idioms pecu- 
liar to a foreign tongue, is the true and only secret of speaking and 
writing that language well. The pupil, therefore, as he passes along 
in the ordinary course of the Lessons, should frequently be found 
applying his knowledge in the way of actually composing independ- 
ent sentences. In this way, he will soon acquire a facility and ac- 
curacy in the language, which are hardly otherwise attainable at all* 



60 LH8SON XVI. 



Comparison. 

1. Adjectives and adverbs are always compared in French, as 
they often are in English, by means of adverbs. 

Plus beau, plus souvent, More beautiful, oftener. 

2. The first part of the comparison for the degree in quality is 

. or as much; ") _ , . . . . 

These adverbs como almost always be- 

,rre '> L. •• i j 

. . > fore an adjective, a participle, or an ad- 

Pas aussi, pas si, not so, not as; \ ( J ' r * 

Moins, less; 



I verb. 



Aussi grand, as tall grand, ^Jkr. 

Pas aussi grand, not as tall. Moins grand, Us* toll, not as tall 

ich, as many; "| Coming almost always before a 

tiore; I noun, an adjective used -sub* 

Tas autant de, not as much or as many ; f stantivd ve or do- 

, fewer; J monatratlve pronoun. 

oka. Antanl >dones. 

4. T: ! by : 

Qne, as, .' l quantity 

•i. the word following the llrst adverb 14' the. com; 

Autan- 

utter. 
it sister. 

■■ 
part 

| m much sugar 0$ 

i: 

; . books at 
hooks r 

■ 



>:-ci quo do coux 
|ei que de 



of Ohm as of those. 

He is as happy as you. 

Have you more plate* than dishett 



LESS05 X Y I. ' 



CI 



J'ai plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 
Est-il plus complaisant que ses 

freres 1 
Le Franfais a-t-il moius de legumes 

que de fruits 1 
II a moins de livres que de manu- 

scrits. 
U n'a pas autant de ceux-ci que 

de ceux-la 1 
En a-t-il moins que votre frere 1 

II en a tout autant. 



J have more of these than of those. 
Is he more obliging than his brothers 1 

Has the Frenchman fewer vegetables 

than fruits? 
He has fewer books than manuscripts. 

He has not so many of these as of 

those. 
Has he less {of them) than your 

brother ? 
He has quite as many. 



Exercise 29. 



Bleu, e, blue ; 

Courage, m. courage ; 

Davantage,* more ; 

Drap, m. cloth; 

Ennemi, m. enemy; 

Espagnol, e, Spaniard ; Jardin, m. garden 

Estampe, f. engraving ; Manteau, m. cloak ; 



m. manu- 



Fer, m. iron ; Manuscrit, 

Fromage, m. cheese ; script ; 

Hollandais, m. ZftifcA- Marechal, m. blacksmith; 

man ; Modestie, f. modesty ; 

Italien, ne, Italian ; Soie, f. silk ; 

Tres, very; 

Verre, m. glass. 

1. Etes vous aussi content que votre frere ? 2. Je suis aussi con- 
tent que votre frere. 3. Votre pere a-t-il autant de courage que de 
modestie ? 4. II a moins de modestie que de courage. 5. Le 
libraire a-t-il autant de manuscrits que d'estampes ? 6. II a plus de 
celles-ci que de ceux-la. 7. A-t-il autant d'amis que d'ennemis? 
8. II a plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 9. A-t-il autant de pain que 
de fromage? 10. II a tout autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 
11. Le marechal a-t-il plus de chevaux que votre frere? 12. II en a 
plus que mon pere et plus que mon frere. 13. N'avez vous paa 
froid? 14. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai pas froid, j'ai tres chaud. 15. Avez 
vous deux manteaux de drap? 16. J'en ai un de drap et un de ve- 
lours bleu. 17. N'avez vous pas plus de verres que d'assiettes? 
18. Nous en avons davantage.* 19. Le marechal a-t-il plus de fer 
que d'acier? 20. II n'a pas autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 
21. II a moins de celui-ci que de celui-la. 22. Les Hollandais ont ils 
de beaux jardins? 23. Leursjardins sont tres beaux. 24. Lea 
jardins des Italiens sont plus beaux que ceux des Espagnols. 

Exercise 30. » 

1. Are you more attentive than your sister? 2. I am not so atten- 
tive as your brother. 3. Have you more courage than my brother ? 
4. 1 have quite as much. 5. Has the blacksmith as much money as 
iron ? 6. He has more of the latter than of the former. |L. 10, R. 5.] 



* Davantage means more. It can never be placed before a xioun ; it : 
lie used instead of plus, at the end of a sentence. 



62 J,KSSON XVII. 

7. Has he more modosty than the Spaniard ? 8. He has more. 9. He 
has more than your friend's sister. 10. Are you not cold, Sir! 
11. No, Sir, hut I am afraid and sleepy. 12. Has the Dutchman 
more cheese than the Italian? 13. He has more cheese and more 
money. 14. Have you as much English silk as Italian silk? 15. I 
have more of this than of that. 1G. Who has more friends than the 
Spaniard? 17. Your friend has more. 18. Has the Spaniard as mik.h 
of your money as of his? 19. He has less of mine than of his. 20. 
Have we more silk cloaks than cloth cloaks ? 21. We have more of 
these than of those. 22. Have you good cloaks? 23. Yes, Sir, I 
have good cloaks, good hats, and good leather shoes. 24. Have you 
more plates than dishes? 25. I have not more plates than dishes; 
but I have more glasses than plates. 20. Are you not very cold? 
27. No, Sir, I am neither cold nor warm. 28. Has your carpenter 
wood ? 29. Yes, Sir, he has wood, money, cheese and meat. 30. Who 
has more money than the carpenter? 31. The Dutchman has more. 
32. Who has more engravings than books? 33. The bookseller has 
more of these than of those. 31. An- you as attentive as your 
friend ? 35. I am more attentive than my friend. 



LESS « xvii. >n xvn. 

COMPARISON, — ENCORE, AC. 

1. The superlative absolute i* formed by placing tres, fort, or bien, 
very, before the adjective. [} 14, 11.] 

Oes chandelbra sont treVntQea, T%e$ecandL v useful. 

Notre tailleur Btl I'ieti obligeaDt Our tir.lor is very oMiginf, 

2. The superlative relative is formed by adding the article le, la, 
lea, to a comparative. [J 14, (9.)] 

Votre neveu <-^t !•• pftu savant <le tons. Your urpheir is the most learned o/aQ. 

3. Encore i> need in French in the sense of m<<re, some more, anf 
more, still, — used affirmatively and interrogatively, Out not nega- 
tively. 

Ave* vous encore du cafe 1 Havt you ami man 

l ) fflfiet. 

J ha\* some more, or some bjt. 

—plus is used in the sense of not any more, and no more, m 

R 

Je n'ai plus dc livres. / have no metre books. 

Je n'ai plus in choc< 1st / **M ne chotoUU Ufl. 



LESSON XVII. 



63 



5. Nc — guere means but Hale, but few. 

Je n'ai guere d'amis. I have but few friends. 

Je n'en ai guere. J have but few — but little. 

6. The pronouns* moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of the nomi- 
native pronouns je, tu, il, ils, after the que of a comparison, and when 
the verb is understood. 



Vous etes plus heureux que moi. 
Vous avez plus de merite que lui. 



You are happier than I. 
You have more merit tlixm he. 



Resume of Examples. 



T )tre marchand est bien obligeant. 
"V )ila le meilleur de ces ga^ons. 
Nous avons encore des amis. 
Vous avez encore du credit. 
Avez vous encore une piastre 1 
Le macon a-t-il encore des briques 1 
II n'en a plus. 
II n'a plus de briques. 
II n'en a guere. 
II n'en a plus guere. 
Je n'ai guere de livres. 
Avez vous plus de courage que lui? 
II a moins de courage que moi. 
Combien de piastres avez vous en- 
core 1 



Your merchant is very obliging. 
That is the best of those bmjs. 
We have some more (or still) friends. 
You have still (or yet) credit. 
Have you a dollar left ? 
Has the mason more bricks ? 
He has no more — he has none left. 
He has no more bricks. 
He has but few. 
He has but few left. 
I have but few books. 
Have you more courage than he ? 
He has less courage than I. 
How many dollars have you still, or 
have you left 1 



Exercise 31. 

Correct, e, correct; Neveu, m. nephew; Soeur, f. sister; 

Credit, m. credit ; Niece, f. niece ; Salade, f. salad; 

Beaucoup, much; Nouvelles, f. news; Tante, f. aunt ; 

Boyer, Bnyer; Quel, which, which one; Tous, all; 

Dictionnaire, m. diction- Savant, e, learned; Ville, f. town, city, 
ary; 

1. Votre dictionnaire est il tres correct ? 2. II est plus correct que 
celui de Boyer. 3. Votre dictionnaire est le plus correct de tous. 
4. Quel est le meilleur de ces jardins? 5. Celui-ci est le meilleur de 
tous les jardins de la ville. 6. Avez vous encore de l'argent? 7. Je 
n'ai plus d'argent,mais j'ai encore du credit. 8. Avons nous encore de 
If- saiade? 9. Nous n'en avons plus. 10. Nous n'avons plus de 
viande. 11. Qui en a encore? ]2. Mes freres et mes soeurs en ont 
encore. 13. En avez vous encore beaucoup? 14. Je n'en ai plus 
guere. 15. Votre tante a-t-elle plus de robes que votre niece? 16. 
Elle n'en a pas beaucoup. 17. Votre neveu est il plus savant que 
votre niece? 18. II n'est pas aussi savant qu'elle. 19. Elle est plus 
Bavante que lui. 20. Avez vous encore froid? 21. Je n'ai plus froid, 
j'ai bien chaud. 22. N'avez vous plus de nouvelles ? 23. Je n'en ai 
plus. 24 En i.vez vous beaucoup? 25. Je n'en ai gu£re. 



64 



Exercise 32. 



1. Has your brother a very good dictionary ? 2. His dictionary ii 
not very correct. 3. Has your father more courage than he ? 4. He 
has much more courage than your nephew. 5. Have your brothers 
credit? 6. They have but little credit, but they have money. 7. Is 
our aunt obliging? 8. My aunt is very obliging. 9. Have you still 
ooks, pens, and paper? 10. I have no more books, but I have still 
good pens and excellent Engli>h paper. 11. Who has still paper? 
12. I have no more, but my brother has some more. 13. Have you 
any news, Sir? 14. No, Madam, I have none to-day. 15. Have you 
as much wood as my brother's son I ]t\. 1 have more than you or he. 
17. Are you still wrong? 18. No, Sir, I am no longer (plus) D I 

I am right 19. Are your sisters still hungry 1 30. They are neither 

hungry nor thirsty, but they are still sleepy. 91. Is your niece as 
learned as he ? '22. She is more learned than he and (</ur) his aunt. 
U3. Have you DO BOWS, Sir.' -J I. No, Madam, I have DO more I 

Who has news! -JC. 1 have n<» more. 21. Have you them all? 

. I have then all. 39. Has your aunt much of it left? 

30. She has but little more of it. 31. Has your brother any more 

English horsst I 88. H<- has no more. 33. He has two more. 34. 

II • you a h.iiid-om.- Preach shawl left ? 35. I have no more French 
shawlSi but I have an El 



LESSON XYIH. LE0ON XVIII. 

1. The adverbs of quantity, combien, how much, how many; Imp, 
too much, tnn many ; bsauconp, much, many ; BSi . peu, lit- 

,■ and the word pas, meaning no, when 
coming before a noun or an adjective, arc followed by the , 
tion dr. 

ic-n de fieun I If 

I 
op de loi-ir. \ i nurh Uifure. 

rnps. \ 

'J. The adverb biro, used in the sense of beaueoup 'much, many,) is 
followed bv the pre]' ned to or blended with t: 

I.. «;.] 

Vous avi-z Men de la complaisance. V>u have much kindntu. 
Elle a Li«u dm amis. • \at many friends. 



LESSON XVIII. 65 

3. Quelque chose, something, any thing [L. 7, 6.] and rien, nothing, 
not any thing, take de before an adjective. 

Votre ami a quelque chose d'agre- Your friend has someth'Mg pleasant. 

able. 

Avez vous quelque chose de bon 1 Have you any thing good ? 

Je n'ai rien de bon. / have nothing {not any thing) good. 

4. Quel, m., quelle,/, quels, m. p., quelles,/.^., are used interro- 
gatively for which or what before a noun. 

Quelle serviette avez vous 1 What or which napkin have you ? 

Quelles bourses votre ami a-t-il 1 What purses has your friend ? 

5. Que is used for what before a verb. 

Qu'avez vous 1 What is the matter with you ? 

6. Lequel, m., laquelle, /, lesquels, m. p., lesquelles, /. p., are 
used absolutely for the word which, not followed by a noun, and 
equivalent to which one, which ones. 

Lequel votre fils a-t-il 1 Which (one) has your son ? 

Lesquelles avons nous 1 ' Which (ones) have we ? 

7. Quel ques is used before a plural noun for a few, some; quelquea 
uns, m., quel ques unes,/, are used absolutely, with the same mean, 
ing — Plusieurs means several, and is invariable. 

Le Danois a-t-il quelques pommes'? Has the Dane a few apples? 
II en a quelques unes. He has a few. 

II en a plusieurs. He has several. 



Resume of Examples. 



Combien de poires avez vous ? 
Nous avons beaucoup de poires. 
Nous en avons beaucoup. 
Nous avons assez de cerises. 
Nous n'en avons pas assez. 
Vous n'avez guere de peches. " 
Votre jardinier a bien des peches. 
N'avez vous pas de peches 1 
J'ai beaucoup de peches et d'abri- 

cots. 
Le boucher a-t-il quelque chose de 

bon. 
H a quelque chose de bon et de 

mauvais. 
II n'a rien de bon. 
Quelles poires /. avez vous 1 
Nous avons celles de votre soeur. 
Quel habit m. avez vous 1 
Nous avons celui du tailleur. 
Qu'avez vous de bon 1 
Lequel avez vous 1 
Lesquels votre frere a-t-il 1 
J'ai du fruit mur 1 



How many pears have you ? 

We have many pears. 

We have many (of them). 

We have cherries enough. 

We have not enough (of them). 

You have but few peaches. 

Your gardener has many peaches. 

Have you no peaches ? 

I have many peaches and apricots. 

Has the butcher any thing good ? 

He has something good and bad. 

He has not any thing (nothing) good 

What or which pears have you ? 

We have your sister's. 

Which or what coat have you ? 

We have the tailor's. 

What have you good ? 

Which (one) have you ? 

Which (ones) has your brother ? t 

I have ripe fruit. 



LISBON XVIIL 



Exercise 33. 

Abricot, m. cpncot ; Fleur, f. flower; Pommes, f apple; 

Anuna, m. pineapple; Legume, m. vegetable; Pomme-de- terre, f. p+ 

Bcurre, m. bvtUr; Magasin, m. warehouse; talv ; 

Cerise, f. cherry; Oncle, m. uncle; Prune, f plum; 

Spicier, m. grocer; Poire, f. par; Sucre, m. sugar; 

Stranger, e, foreign ; Poivre, ni. pepper ; 'Die, ui. lea. 
Jardin, m. garden ; 

1. Combien do poromea-de-terre votre frere a-t-il ? 2. II n'en a 
pas beaucoup. 3. L'epteier a-t-il beaueoup de suerc dans son mo- 
gasin ? 4. 11 n'en a guere, mais il a beaucoup de beurre et de poivre. 
5. Votre jardinier a-t-il beaucoup de cerises ? 6. II a plus de cerises 
que de prune.-*. 7. Les prunes sont ellea meiUeures que lea cerises ? 
8. Les cerises sunt ineillcures que lea prunes. 9. Avez vous quel- 
ques poires mures? 10. Nous en avons quclques unes, nous avons 
aussi beaucoup d'ananas et d'abricots. 11. Votre oncle a-t-il quel- 
que chose de DOD dans son jardin? 12. II a quclquc chose de l>on 
et de beau. 13. II a de beaux legumes et de belles lleurs. 11. A\cz 
vous des Beura etfangeres 1 15. Pen ai quelques unes. 16. Lee- 
quelle.* avez vous 1 17. raicellesde votre frere et cellee de votre 
jardinier. IS. N'avez vous 19. Nun, Mon- 

sieur, je ne les ai pas. 20. C^ui en a beaucoup? 31. l'ersonne n'en 
a beaueoup. 22. J'en ai qnelqnes ones. S3. Avez vous Rl 
the.' 24. J'en ai a»r... 2& JYn ai plus que lui. 

34. 

I, Has your gardener many \> getable r, he has many. 

3. I low many gardens has he ' 4. He has several gardens ami seve- 
ral houses, 5. Haw you manybooksl <>. I have but few, but my 
friend has many. 7. What coat has your brother ? 8. He hsi 
cloth coat. 9. Has your uncle many peaches 1 10. He has but fcw 
peaches, but he has many cherries. 11. How many plums has '.he 
tailor? 12. The tailor has no plums, he has cloth. «nd silk. 13. What 
Bilk has your friend the merchant? 14. He has a great deal [beau* 
coup) of silk, and a great deal of money. 15. Has the gardener any 
■od ; n (dans) his garden 1 16. He has many pincafpU-s. 
tables than fruit .' 1* He has more of this than 
of those. 19. Has your uncle m. 9 '. He has 

a few, and be has many apples and plum-. 21. H. 
'22. I have still many, but my brother lias no more. 23. Which 
I He has large (grost t) peaches. 25. Which 
(ones) luivc you? 26. I havj the best peaches. 27. Has the mcr» 



LESSON XXX. 



67 



«*ant any thin* good in his warehouse ? 28. He has nothing good in 
his warehouse, but he has something good m his garden. 29. How 
many potatoes has the foreigner? 30. He has not many. 31. Has he 
good vegetables ? 32. He has good vegetables. 33. Is he right or 
wrong ? 34. He is right, but you are wrong. 35. He has neither 
this book nor that, he has the bookseller's. 



LESSON XIX. 



LEQON XIX. 



1. The relative pronoun, que, whom, which, that, and the conjunc- 
tion, que, that, are never omitted in French, a*id must be repeated be- 
fore every verb depending on them. [$ 109.j 

Les crayons que j'ai sont meilleurs The pencils {which) I have, are better 
que ceux que vous avez. than those {which) you have. 

2. Ne, before the verb, and que after it, are used in the sense of 
only, but. 

Je n'ai qu'un ami. I have but otic friend. 

3. L'un et l'autre, means both ; les uns et les autres, these and 
those, the latter and the former. [§ 41, (11.)] 

Vous avez l'un et l'autre. You have both. 

4. Cardinal and ordinal numbers as ear as twenty. [§ 22, 23.} 



Cardin 


al. 


Ordinal 




Un, m. uie, f. 


One, 


Premier, m. e,f. 
Second, m. e,/. 


First, 


Deux, 


Two, 


Second, 






Deuxicme, 




Trois, 


Three, 


Troisicme, 


Third, 


Quatre, 


Four, 


Quatrienie, 


Fourth, 


Cinq, 


Five, 


Cinquieme, 


Fifth, 


Six, 


Six, 


Sixieme, 


Sixth, 


Sept, 


Seven, 


Septieme, 


Seventh, 


Huit, 


Eight, 


Huitieme, 


Eighth, 


Neuf, 


Nine, 


Neuvieme, 


Ninth, 


Dix, 


Ten, 


Dixieme, 


Tenth, 


Onze, 


Eleven, 


Onzieme, 


Eleventh, 


Douzc, 


Twelve, 


Do\izieme, 


Twelfth, 


Treize, 


Thirteen, 


Treizicme, 


Thirteenth, 


Quatorze 


Fourteen, 


Quatorzieme, 


Fourteenth, 


Quinze, 


Fifteen, 


Quinzieme, 


Fifteenth, 


Seize, 


Sixteen, 


Seiziemc, 


Sixteenth, 


Dix-sept, 


Seventeen, 


Dix-septieme, 


Seventeenth, 


Dix-huit. 


Eighteen, 


Dix-huitieme, 


Eighteenth, 


Dix-neuf, 


Nineteen, 


Dix-neuvieme, 


Nineteenth, 


Vin S fc ' 


Twenty. 


Vingtieme, 


Twentieth. 



68 LESSON XII. 

5. The cardinal numbers are used, in French, for the day of the 
month, except the first, for which the ordinal number premier is 
substituted : — 

Le dix aout, le cinq juillet. The tenth of August, the fifth of July. 

Le premier an moifl prochain, The first of next »u»ith. 

6. The verb avoir, to liave, is used actively, [} 26, (1.)] for the day 
of the month. The verb etre may also be used : — 

Qrtil jour du mois avons nous 1 Waat day of the month have we ? 

r "Us le vin^t. We have the twentieth. 

.uijounl hui le dix. To-day is the tenth. 

7. Before the word onze, the article le or la is not elided. [} 1 46.] :— 
Nous avons 1c onze de decembre. We hare (it is) the Wth of December. 

KPUM. 

Ifonvrfer a-t-il les outils que vous Has the workman the tools which you 

avez 1 have? 

I tons qaej'al BOOt elke aud Are the houses which I have as good 

bonnet que ceuea qne roaa avcz ] as those which you have ? 

ComUen de franca »▼«■ n B m many francs have you? 



Jen'aJ qne <lix franca, maia mon 
bo a plus de vinjrt . 
Dona le qnatoraa du moisl 



I have only ten francs, but my brnther 
has more than twenty (of them). 

Have we the fourteen! h day of the 
month? 

\ 6 . MM have only the eleventh. 



oatonr, n<>us n'avona que la 

I le oea denz volumes avcz Wiich of those two volumes have you? 

J'ai Inn c-t la / M both. 

01 la [inmUro place ;i // you the first or the second 
<lruxi*me1 place? 

J'ai la premiere, ct mon frirc a la / hove the first, and my brother has 
the second. 

Auiouril'hui, to-daffi Farrier m Ptbmaeyi CiuiW m. tool ; 

Canelle, f. etw • . m. franc i Onvrage, m. work; 

Centime, m. centime — Histoire f \istoryi Oenvrea, f. morkt, 

Htk part of a Italieii in. Italian i Place, {'.place; 

Kilogramme, m. Wo- Quart, n. quarter; 
C<">!nliien, Aoiff much, hoie grammt — about two Septembre, m. Bifttte* 

f. cravat ; afennlaier, m. joiner} Volume, ni. volume, 

alf; Monaaebne, f. muslin; 

I. I* cheval que vous avez est il Inn? 3. II o-t mcilleur que crlui 
que vons avez et que celuidenotre ami. 3. Comhien d'enf.r 

D ai qu'un, rnnis l'ltalien en a plus que moi. 5. Avona 
nous le dix eeptembrc? 6. Non, Monsieur, nous avona le ncuf 



LESSON XIX. 69 

fevrier. 7. Avez vous ma cravate de soie on ma cravate de mousse- 
line? 8. J'af l'une et l'autre. 9. Avez vous huit kilogrammes de 
canelle? 10 Non, Monsieur, je n'en ai qu'un demi kilogramme. 11. 
Combien de francs avez vous, Monsieur? 12. Je n'ai qu'un demi franc, 
mais mon ami a un franc et demi 13. Votre soeur a-t-elle vingt cinq 
centimes? 14. Oui, Monsieur, elle a un quart de franc. 15. N'avons 
nous pas le premier aout? 16. Non, Monsieur, nous avons le six sep 
tembre. 17. Est-ce aujourd'hui le dix ? 18. Non, Monsieur, c'est le 
onze. 19. Votre frere a-t-il la premiere place? 20. Non, Monsieur, 
il a la dixieme. 21. Votre menuisier a-t-il beaucoup d'outils? 22. 
Oui, Monsieur, il en a beaucoup. 23. Cet ouvrage a-t-il dix volumes ? 
24. Non, Monsieur, il n'en a que neuf. 25. J'ai le sixieme volume 
des oeuvres de Moliere et le premier volume de l'histoire de France 
de Michelet. 

Exercise 36. 

1. Is that cinnamon good ? 2. That cinnamon is better than yours 
and your brother's. [R. 1.] 3. What day of the month is it to-day? 
4. It is the sixth. 5. Has your father twenty francs ? 6. No, Sir, he 
has only six francs fifty centimes. 7. How many volumes has your 
work ? 8. It has many, it has fifteen. 9. Has the joiner read (lu) the 
second volume of Michelet's history of France? 10. Yes, Sir, he has 
read the second volume (of it). 1 1. Has your friend,Moliere's works? 
12. He has only two volumes of them. 13. Have you my cloth coat 
or my velvet coat? 14. We have both. 15. We have this and that. 
16. How much cinnamon have you? 17. We have two kilogrammes. 
18. How many centimes has the merchant? 19. He has twenty-six. 
20. Have you the third or the fourth place? 21. I have neither the 
third nor the fourth, I have the tenth. 22. Are you not ashamed to- 
day? 23. No, Sir, I am not ashamed, but I am afraid. 24. Have you 
a quarter of a franc ? 25. No, Sir, but I have half a franc. 26. Have 
we the sixth of July ? 27. No, Sir, we have the fourth of March. 
28. Has your uncle six children? 29. No, Sir, he has only one 
30. Have you ten kilogrammes of meat ? 31. I have only five kilo 
grammes. 32. -Is the butcher's meat good? 33. It (elle) is not verj 
good. 34. How many kilogrammes have you (of it) ? 35 1 have 
only two, but my brother has four. 



70 LEESOX IX. 



LESSON XX. LEgON XX. 

1. For the time of the day, the verb etre, is used unipersonally m 
French, in the same manner as the verb to be is used in English fot 
the same object. The word heure, sing, heures, plur. represent* 
the English expressions, 6 'clock, or time, and must always be ex 

pressed. 

Quelle hcure est il 7 What o'clock (time) is it? 

11 eat une hemfe // it one o'clock. 

II est dix heures. It is ten, it is ten o'clock. 

2. Midi is used for twelve o'clock in the day, and minuit, for mid- 
night, or ticehe at night. Douze heures is never used except in the 
sense of twelve h/wrs. 

Est il midi 1 Est il iuinuit 1 Is it noon ? Is it midnight ? 

3. Et quart, ft demie, [\ 84, ('2.)] answer to the English expres- 
sions, a quarter, half-y 

11 est MBf heures et quart // is a quarter after nine. 

II est mi<li at demi. It is half after tv 

Il e^t une heore et demie. It is half after one. 

4. Motel mi quart, moins vingt minutes, answer to the English 
expressions, a quarter before, twenty minutes before, I 

11 est d'X Inures m<>ins un quart. It wants a quarter of ten. 

11 <\st leuf luures nioins dix mi- // it (en minutes be/ore nine. 

5. The w..ril d.-mi, preceding the word heure, does not vary 

: after it, il ifl variable. [| 84, (2.)] 

Une demi heure. Half an hour. 

ire it demie. An hour and a half. 

6. The verb avoir, is used actively [}43, (2,) (3,)] in French in 
peaking of age, and the word an, year, is always expressed. 

Quel Igc avcz vous 1 //"'c old are you? i.e., What. Ag* 

have yon ? 
J'ai plus do vingt ans. more than twenty. 

7. Plus de, moins de, are used for more than, less than, before a 
number. 

A»ons nous plus de dix metres de Have wemorrfhan tenmetres of this 

toiled Ilollande I Holland (Holland linen) T 

Vous en avvz moius de six aunes. You have less than nx tits of it. 



I ESSON XX. 



11 



Resume of Examples. 



II n'est pas encore deux heures. 

Est il une heure et deinie 1 

II est raidi et quart ou midi et demi. 

II est huit heures moins un quart. 

Quel age votre flls a-t-u"? 

II n'a que dix-huit ans. 

Votre beau-frere n'a-t-il pas plus de 

dix-neuf ans 1 
Ma belle soeur n'a pas moins de dix- 

huit ans et demi. 
Est il plus de dix heures d votre 

montre 1 
II n'est que neuf heures a. mon 

horloge. 
Votre tils est il plus age que le 

mien 1 
II est plus jeune que le votre. 



It is not yet two o'clock. 

Is it half-past one 1 

It is a quarter or half-past twelve. 

It wants a quarter of eight. 

How old is your son ? 

He is only eighteen years old. 

Is not your brother-in-law more than 
nineteen years old ? 

My sister-in-law is not less tlurn eigh- 
teen years and a half. 

Is it more than ten o'clock by your 
watch ? 

It is only nine by my clock. 

Is your son older than mine ? 
He is younger than yours. 



Exercise 37. 

AgS, e, old; Cela, that; Jour, m. day; 

Aune, f. ell; Cinquante^/ity; Maintenant, now ; 

Beau-frcre, m. brother- Cousin-germain, m. first Mars, m. March ; 

in-law; cousin; Metre, m. met/re, a 

Beau-fils, x^pn-in-law; Enfant, m. child; French measivre about 

Beau-pere, m. father-in- Fevrier, m. February; three French feet; 

law; Horloge, f. clock; Mois, m. month" ; 

Belle-mere, f. mother-in- Indienne, f. printed cat- Ruban, m. ribbon ; 

law ; ico ; Tard, late ; 

Belle-sceur, f. sister-in- Jeune, young ; Verge, f. yard. 



1. "Vd^Tbeau-frere est il plus age que le mien? 2. Le v6tre est 
plus jeune que le mien. 3. Quel age a votre belle-mere ? 4. Elle 
a pres de cinquante ans. 5. Quelle heure est il maintenant 1 6. 
II est six heures passees. 7. fites vous certain de cela? 8. Oui, 
Monsieur, j'en suis certain. 9. Est il plus de deux heures a votre 
montre? 10. II n'est que midi a. ma montre. 11. Avez vous plus 
de cinq ans, mon enfant? l^,Je n'ai pas encore quatre ans. 13. 
Av^fiBfej^yj ^^s is^Mi^ffes d'indienne ? 14. J'enai moins de trois 
metres. 15. dombie*na1iuriesdej:uban votre beau-pere a-t-il? 16. 
II n'a guere de ruban, il n'en a qu'une demi-aune. 17. Est il midi 
moins un quart ? 1 8. II est plus tard, Monsieur, il est midi et quart. 
19 Quel jour du mois avons nous? 20. Nous avons le six octobre. 
21 N'est-ce pas le huit fevrier que . . . ? 22. Non, Madame, e'est le huit 
mars. 23. Combien de jardins a votre cousin-germain ? 24. II n'ea 
a qu'un, mais il est tres beau. 25. II en a plus de dix. 



V2 1SSB0N XXI. 



Exercise 38. 

I. How old is your brother-in-law? 2. He is fifty years old. S. 
Is your sister-in-law older than mine ? 4. No, Sir, my sister-in-law 
is younger than yours. 5. Is your son twenty-five years old ? 6. 
No, Madam, he is only sixteen. 7. What day of the month have we 
to-day? 8. We have the eleventh. 9. Have you the twentieth vol- 
ume of Chateaubriand's works? 10. No, Madam, we have the 
eleventh. 11. What o'clock is it. Sir? 12. It is only twelve o'clock. 
13. Is it not later? 14. It wants a quarter of one. 15. It is a quar- 
ter after five. 16. How many yards of this holland (toile cTHoU 
lande, f.) have you ? 17. I have ten ells and a half. 18. I have six 

f it, and sixteen yards of Italian silk. 19. Is your mother- 
in-law younger than your father-in-law? 20. She is younger than 
ho. SI. An yon twenty years old? 22. No, Sir, I am only nine- 
teen and a half. 23. Are yon sure (itr) that it is ten o'clock. 24. 

lam, 1 am sure of it. 25. Is it twenty minutes of ten? 26. 

it is a quarter before twelve (mutt). 27. How many houses 
have yon ? 28. I have only one. but my sister-in-law has f 
Have you mine (f.) or yours ? 30. I have neither yours nor mine, I 
have your son-in-law'.-. 31. Has your mother-in-law fire yards of 
that priii!' She has only two yards of if* 33. What 

o'clock is it by (a) your watch? 34. It is half-past four by my 
watch. 35. It is more than seven o'clock by mine (<l la mienne). 



LESSON XXI. LEQON XXI. 

THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS 07 VERBS. 

1. The four classes or conjugations, into which the French verbs 
are divided are distinguished by the endings of the present of the In- 
finitive [) 44]. The first conjugation a^p in er ; as chanter, to sing ; 
donner, to give ; parler, to speak ; cherchei*4^«rt&»* ^^4^ *** 

The second conjugation ends in ir ; as, cherir, to cherish ; punir, to 
punish; munir, to prmiile ; finir, to finish. 

^he termination of the infinitive of the regular verbs of the third 
conjugation, is evoir ; as, devoir, io owe ; recevoir, to receive; that of 
the irreirular verbs is oir, as valoir, to be worth. 

The fourth conjugation ends in re : as, rendre, to render ; fendnv 
t» split ; tendre, to stretch ; vendre, to sell 



LESSON XXI. 



13 



2. A verb preceded by another verb (other than the auxiliaries 
avoir and etre), or by a preposition (other than en), is put in the present 
of the infinitive. 

II va travailler ou lire, He is going to work or to read. 

3. In French, verbs are often connected with others by prepositions 
not answering 1 literally to those which accompany the same verbs in 
English. They also often come together without prepositions. The 
student will find in j 129, and the following sections of the Second 
Part, lists of verbs, with the prepositions which they require after 



4. The following idioms are followed by the preposition de when 
they come before a verb: (§ 132) avoir besoin, to want; avoir cou- 
tume, to be accustomed ; avoir dessein, to intend, to design ; avoir envie, 
to have a wish, a desire; avoir honte, to be ashamed; avoir intention, 
or, 1'intention, to intend ; avoir le temps, to have time or leisure ; avoir 
Ie courage, to have courage ; avoir peur, to be afraid ; avoir raison, to 
be right ; avoir regret, to regret ; avoir tort, to be wrong ; avoir sujet 
to have reason ; avoir soin, to take care. 



Cet enfant a besoin de dormir, 
Vous avez honte de courir, 



That child wants to sleep. 
You are ashamed of running. 



Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous quelque chose a. dire 1 
Je n'ai rien a dire. 
Votre soeur n'a-t-elle rien a ecrire 1 
Elle a deux lettres a ecrire. 
A-t-elle le temps de les ecrire "? 
Elle n'a pas dessein de les ecrire. 
Elle n'a pas 1'intention de les ecrire. 
Elle n'a pas envie de les ecrire. 
Avez vous peur de danger 1 
Je n'ai pas honte de danser. 
Votre cousin a raison de sortir. 
N'avez vous pas soin d'ecrire 1 
Avez vous le courage d'aller a la 
guerre. 



Have you any thing to say? 
I have nothing to say. 
Has your sister nothing to write ? 
She has two letters to write. 
Has she time to write them ? 
She does not design to write them. 
She does not intend to write them. 
She has no desire to write t/tem. 
Are you afraid to dance ? 
I am not ashamed to dance. 
Your cousin is right to go out. 
Do you not take care to wiite 7 
Have you the courage togotothewi 



Exercise 39. 

Acheter, to buy ; Faire, to make ; Marcher, to walk ; 

Champ, m. field ; Fatigue, e, tired, weary ; Mars, m. March ; 

Danser, to dance ; Gazette, f. newspaper; Ne — rien, nothing ; 

De bonne heure, early ; Juillet, in. July ; Page, f. page ; 

Dormir, to sleep ; Juin, m. June; Seize, sixteen ; 

Ecrire, to write; Lire, to read; Travailler, to vwrlc, labor. 

1. Votre belle-mere a-t-elle quelque chose a faire? 2. Elle n'a rien 
k faire. 3. A-t-elle deux pages a ecrire ? 4. Non, Monsieur, elle 
4 



74 LISBON 1X1. 

n'enaqu'une. 5. Avezvous l'intention de lire cettc gazette* 6. Oni 
Madame, j'ai l'intention de la lire. 7. Avez vous raison d'acheter un 
habit de velours? 8. J'ai raison d'en acheter un. 9. Vctre petite 
fille a-t-elle besoin de dormir ? 10. Oui, Monsieur, elle a besom de 
dormir, elle est fatiguce. 11. Avez vous peur de tomber ? 12. Je 
n'ai pas peur de tomber. 13. Le jardinier a-t-il le temps de travailler 
dans les champs ? 14. II n'a pas en vie de travailler dans les champs. 
15. Vo3 champs sont ils aussi grands que les miens? 16. llssont 
pius grands que les votres. 17. Ave/, vous hontc de marcher? 
18. Je n'ai pas lionte de marcher, mais j'ai honte de danser. 19. Quel 
Age a votre Ills ? 20. II a seize ans. 21. Avons nous le deux mars 
ou le cinq juin? 22. Nona avons ie vingt-huit juillet. 23. Est il 
midi? 24. Non, Monsieur il n'est pas encore midi, il n'est que onze 
heures et demie. 25. 11 eat encore de bonne heure. 

Exercise 40. 

1. What has your brother-in-law to do? 2. lie lias letters to 
write. 3. Does he want to work ? 4. Yes, Sir, he wants to work. 
hfl intend to read my book ? 0. He doea not intend to read 
your book, he lias no time. 7. Is your sister ashamed to walk? 
BOt ashamed to walk, but my brother M ashamed to 
dance. 9. Has your cousin any thing to say? 10. My cousin has 
nothing to say, she is afraid i 11. Initiate? 13. No, 

Madam, it is m < arly. 13. Have you a wish to rea.l my 

JO to the war? 15. I 
have not the courage to go to the war. 1& I> y<>nr sister right to 
buy a »iK. 11 ri-ht t<> buy one. 18. Docs 

that child want to sleep? IB, No, Sir, that child does not want to 
Bleep, he is not tired. 20. Has your brother's gardener a wish to 
work in my garden? 21. He baa a wish to work in (drat) mirjo. 
22. How old is that child? 23. That child is ter. _t What 

istheday of the month 1 25. It is the ninth of March. 26. Are you 
afraid to walk ? 27. 1 am not afraid to walk, but I am tired. 9& Have 
you time to read my brother's book? 29. I have tin;.- to read his 
book. 30. Has the joiner a wi-h to speak? 31. He has a wish to 
work and to read. M >0 afraid of falling? 33. 1 1 

afraid of fulling, but he is afraid of working. 34. What oVlock is it 1 
35. It is twelve. 



LESSOK XXII. 75 



LESSON xxn. LEgON xxn. 

1. The expressions avoir besoin, to want ; avoir soin, to take care ; 
avoir honte, to be ashamed ; avoir peur, to be afraid, require also tha 
preposition de before a noun. Those idioms mean literally, to have 
rued, to have care, &c. 

Avez vous besoin de votre frere 1 Do you want your brother ? 

J'ai soin de mes effets. I lake care of my things. 

II a honte de sa conduite. He is ashamed of his conduct. 

Elle a peur du chien. She is afraid of the dog. 

2. As these expressions require the preposition de before their ob- 
ject, they will, of course, require the same preposition before the 
pronoun representing that object. 

J'ai besoin de vous. I want you. 

J'ai soin de lui. / take care of him. 

De qui avez vous besoin'? Whom do you want ? 

De quoi a-t-elle besoin 1 What does she want? 

3. When the object is not a person, and has been mentioned before 
the pronoun en takes the place of the preposition de, and that of the 
pronoun representing the object. 

Avez vous besoin de votre cheval ? Do you want your horse 7 

J'en ai besoin. / want it. 

4. The expressions etre fache, to be sorry ; etre etonne, to be as- 
tonished ; etre content, to be satisfied, require the preposition de be- 
fore a noun or pronoun. [$ 88.] 

Je suis fache de son malheur. J am sorry for his misfortune. 

Je suis etonne de sa conduite. lam astonished at his conduct. 

Je suis content de lui. J am pleased with him. 

5. Etre fache, in the sense of to be angry, requires the preposition 
eontre. 

Vous etes fache eontre moi. You are angry with me. 

6. For rules on the government of adjectives, see } 87, and fol- 
lowing Sections. 

R^sumS of Examples. 






Avez vous besoin d'argent 1 

J'ai besoin d'argent. 

Je n'en ai pas besoin. [R. 3.] 

En avez vous besoin 1 

J'en ai besoin, et mon frere en a 

besoin aussi. 
Avez vous besoin de votre frere 1 



Do you want money ? 

I want money. 

I do not want any. 

Do you want any 7i 

I want some, and my brother wants 

some too. 
Do you want your brother ? 



LISBON XXII. 



J'ai besoin de lui * 

De quoi avez vous besoin'? 

J'ai besoin d'un dictionnaire. 

Avez vous soin de votre livre 1 

J'en ai soin. 

Avez vous soin de votre pere 1 

J'ai soin de lui.* 

Votre fWre est il fachd eonrre moi ? 

II est fiohe eontre votre scuur. 

Avix. v.ms pen de M ehien ? 

J 'en ai j>eur. 

De qui avez vous hontel 

Je n'ai hoiite de personne. 

Avez vous besoin de quelqne 

chose"? 
Je n'ai besoin de ricn. 



I want him. 

What do you want ? 

I want a dictionary. 

Do nou take cart of your bock ? 

I take care of it. 

Do you take' care of your father? 

wt of him. 
Is your brother tmgff irith me T 
Be is a mcry with your sister. 
Arc you afraid of this dag? 
I am afraid of him. 
Ofvohom arc you ashamed? 
J am ashamed of nobody. 
Do you want any thing ? 

I want nothing. 



Exercise 41. 

Besoin, m. want, need ; Fatigud. e, weary, tired ; Parler, to speak; 
Condnito, f. conduct \ Garcon, m.boy; Keposer, to rest; 

PofttqPP, m. srrrayit ; J vimv homme, m. wown^Soin, m. care ; 
Ktl.ts, in. things rlothrs; man ; Travailler, to work; 

Etoiitic, e, astonishci! ; Lire . to read ; Yieux, old. 

Fich6, e, sorry, angry, 

1. Qui a besoin de pain? 2. Pcrsonne n'en a besoin. 3. N'avea 
vous pns besoin de votre doinestiijiie ? 4. Oni, Monsieur, j'ai besoin 
de lui.* 6. Voire jardinier a-t-il soin de voire jardin ? 6. Qui, 
M.id.iiin-. i! ra ■ -..in. 7. A-t-il bien soin de son vicux pere? 8. Oui, 
<ur, il a bien soin de lui. '». Voire girfOI] a-t-il honte de u 
cenduite .' ,-ieur, il en a lionte. 11. Avez vous peur 

i lieval-ei on de eelui-la > 12. Je n'ai peur ni de celui-ci ni do 
celui-l.i. 18. NotM domestic|iie a-t-il soin de vos etl'ets ? 1-J. II en 
a bwn soin. 15. Avez vous peur de parler on de lire? 16. Je n'ai 
peur ni de parler ni de lire. 17. P.tes vous etonne de eette at! 
18. Je n'en siii-* pM ei..nn.'-. 10. Bu i'tes vous faehe ? 20. Oui, 
Monsieur, j'en nil bien tVu-lie. 9 1 . Avei vous besoin de ce garcon 1 
22. Oui, Madame, j'ai besoin de lui. 23. N'avez vous pas besoin de 
son livre ? 94 Je n'en ai pas besoin. 25. Avez vous envie de 
travailler ou de lire ? 26. Je n'ai envie ni de travailler ni de lire, 
j'ai envie de ine repotat tar je mil fatigu6. 

Buioin 42. 

1. Do you want your servant ? 2. Yes, Sir, I wnnt him. 3. Doe* 
your brother-in-law want you ? 4. He wants me and my brother. f 

* The word en should be avoided aa much aa possible In relation t* 
persons, 
f Repeat the preposition de. 



LESSON XXIII. *l*l 

5. Docs he not want money ? 6. He does not want money, he has 
enough. 7. Is your brother sorry for his conduct? 8. He is very 
sorry for his conduct and very angry against you. 9. Does lie take 
good (Men) care of his books? 10. He takes good care of them. 
11. How many volumes has he? 12. He has more than you, he has 
more than twenty. 13. What does the young man want? 14. He 
wants his clothes. 15. Do you want to rest (vous reposer) ? 16. 
[s not your brother astonished at this ? 17. He is astonished at it. 
18. Have you a wish to read your brother's books? 19. I have a 
wish to read them, but I have no time. 20. Have you time to work ? 
21. I have time to work, but I have no time to read. 22. Does the 
young brother take care of his things ? 23. He takes good care of 
them. 24. Is that little boy afraid of the dog? 25. He is not afraid 
of the dog, he is afraid of the horse. 26. Do you want bread ? 27. 
I do not want any. 28. Are you pleased with your brother's con- 
duct ? 29. I am pleased with it. 30. Has your brother a wish to 
read my book? 31. He has no desire to read your book, he Is 
weary. 32. Is that young man angry with you or with his friends? 
33. He is neither angry with me nor with his friends. 34. Do you want 
my dictionary ? 35. I want your dictionary and your b> »tiier's. 



lesson xxin. LEgoN xxni. 

1. If the ending or distinguishing characteristic of the conjugation 
of a verb, in the present of the infinitive, be removed, the part re- 
maining will be the stem of the verb: — 

Chant-er Fin-ir Rec-ercir Rend-re 

2. To that stem are added, in the different simple tenses of a reg- 
ular verb, the terminations proper to the conjugation to which it be* 
ongs [$ 60.] 

3. Participle Present. 

Ch&nt-ant Fin-issant Rec-evant Rend-ant 

Singing Finishing Receiving Rendering 

4. Participle Past. 

Chant-6 Fin-i R ef -u Rend-u 

Sung Finished Received Rendered 



79 



LESSON XXIII. 



5. TKKMISAriOS OF THE PRESENT OF THE IXDICATTvTI. 



Je 

Tu 

II 

Nous 

Vooi 

Eta 



chant -e 

sing 

pari -es 

sjtaktst 
donri -e 

girt* 

cherch -ons 

seek 

port -ez 

carry 

aim -ent 

levcjik. 



finish 

clier -is 
fourn -it 

furnishes 

pun -issons 

pi/nuA 

sais -issez 

scut 

un -bsent 

unite 



rcf -ois 
apcr? -ois 

prreeivest 

per^ -oit 
gathers 

couc -cvons 

conc«'r« 

d -cvez 

MM 

de$ -oivcnt 



rend 

render 

vend -a 

»<•//«» 

tend 

tends 

entend -oni 

hear 

pct-d -ez 

UN 

mord -ent 
Mi 



6 The present of the in.ii.-ative baa but one form in French, there- 
fore Je chante, may be rendered in English by, / sing, / do stng, or 

I am si ■:.. , , . 

7 The plural of the present of the indicative may be formed from 
the participle present by changing ant into ons, « ent. Ex: chantant, 
MM clmnJons; linissant, nous fuussons ; reccvant, MM I UMUHIj 
rendant, Ml mulons. 

8. This rule holds good not only in all the regular, but la almost 
all the irregular verbs. 

9 Verbs ma y be conjugated interrogatively in * rench (except in 
th e fir . ruler of the present of the indicative,) [J 98 (4.) (5.),] 

by placing the pronoun after the verb in all the simple tenses, and 
between the auxiliary and the participle in the compound tenses. 

Chanter, vonn bienT •** *#*2 

Av ,., tantel " tyammmgwMl 

p„ bten chant* 1 Have you not sung xcell ? 

Jos pa* hicn 1 p* «* «*J* h*" 7 , ,,, 

pwle-Cl bicn 1 [L.4, R. Doa your father speak teeti? 
:..g. EL 1 ] 
10 The verb porter means to carry. It means also to »rrar, in 
speaking of jennenU ; appoiter means to bring, and emporter to carr^ 
auay, aimer .mans (o !mr, CO 10*. to 6e/bnd o/, and takes the prepo- 
sition a before another verb. 

Quel habit portal < "' t^SSL* 

Je porta un habit de drop noir. / wto* * coat of bine k cloth 

frere 4 u' apporteXu ! [L. 4, Pa* *w ww * ra ttrr on.*? 

Q LppOfta dc Urgent I son ami. He brings money to his / 
11. A noun used in a general sense [} 77 (1.)] takes the article le, 
la, 1', or lea. 
Alroc* MM le bcenf ou le mouton 1 Do you like beef or ""*>»? 
Je n'aimo ni le becuf ni le uiouton. 1 UU neUher 6etf nor «* 



LESSON XXIII. 



19 



Resume of Examples. 



Chantez vous une chanson ita- 

lienne ? 
Nous chantons des chansons alle- 

mandes. 
Portez vous ce livre a 1'honame 1 
Non, je le porte a mon frere. 
Emportez vous tout votre argent 1 
J 'en emporte seulement une partie. 
Finissez vous votre le^on aujour- 

d'hui "? 
Nous la finissons ce matin. 
N'aimez vous pas les enfants atten- 

tifs? 
Je les aime beaucoup. 
Ne recevez vous pas beaucoup de 

lettres 1 
Nous en recevons beaucoup. 
Vendez vous beaucoup de marchan- 

dises 1 
Nous en vendons beaucoup. 
Votre frere aime le bceuf et le mou- 

ton. 



Do you sing an Italian song ? 

We sing German songs. 

Do you carry this book to ike man 7 
No, I carry it to my brother. 
Do you carry away all your money ? 
J carry aivay only a part of it. 
Do you finish your lesson to-day? J 

We finish it this morning. 

Do you not like attentive children ? 

I like them much. 

Do you not receive many letters ? 

We receive many letters. 
Do you sell many goods ? 

We sell many. 

Your brother likes beef and mutton, 



Exercise 43. 

[ We shall hereafter put a hyphen between tKe stem and the termination oj 
the verbs placed in the vocabularies. Tile nWmber indicates the conjugation.] 

Non seulement, not only ; 
Lecture, f. reading ; 
Paille, f. straw ; 
Perd-re, 4. to lose ; 
Port-er, 1. to carry, to 

wear ; 
Rec-evoir, 3. to receive ; 
Souvent, often ; 
Toujours 



Aim-er, 1. to love, \ 

like, to be fond of; 
Autre, other ; 
Assez, enough; 
Chapeau, m. hat; 
Cher-ir, 2. to cherish ; 



Donn-er, 1. to give; 
Fin-ir, 2. to finish; 
Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish; 
Gard-er, 1. to keep ; 
Guere, but little ; 
Habits, m. p. clothes, 



Cherch-er, 1. to seek, to garments; 

look for ; Mais, but ; 

Conipagnon, m. compan- Maison. f. house 

ion ; Marchand, m. merchant ; Travail, m. labor ; 

Dame, f. lady; Marchandises, f.p. goods; Trouv-er, 1. to find; 

De bonne heure, early ; Neveu, m. nepliew ; Vend-re, 4. to sell. 
D-evoir, 3. to owe ; 

1. Votre mere aime-t-elle la lecture ? [R. 11.] 2. Oui, Mademot 
6elle, elle l'aime beaucoup plus que sa soeur. 3. Quel chapeau votre 
neveu porte-t-il ? 4. II porte un chapeau de soie, et je porte un cha- 
peau de paille. 5. Cette dame aime-t-elle ses enfants? 6. Oui, 
Monsieur, elle les cherit. 7. Fournissez vous des marchandises a 
ces marchands ? 8. Je fournis des marchandises a ces marchands, et 
ils me donnent de l'argent. 9. Vos compagnons aiment ils les beaux 
habits? [R. 11.] 10. Nos compagnons aiment les beaux habits et 
les bons livies. 11. Cherchez vous mon frere ? 12. Oui, Monsieur, 
je le cherche mais je ne le trouve pas. 13. Votre frere perd-il son 



80 LE88 S XX^II. 

temps. 14. II perd son temps et son nrgetiL 15. Perdons nous 
toujours notre temps? 16. Nous le perdons treP*§ouvent. 17. De- 
vez vous beaucoup d'argent ? 18. J'en dois assez, mais jcn'en dois 
pas beaucoup. 19. Yendez vous vos deux maisons a notre mcde- 
cin ? 20. Je n'en vends qu'une, je garde l'autre pour ma bellevsceur. 
21. Recevez vous de I'argent aujourd'liui ? 22. Nous n'en reeevons 
gucie. 23. Yotre menui>ier Unit il son travail de bonne heure ? 
•J\. II le iinit tard. 25. A quelle heure le unit il ? 26. II le finit \ 
niidi et demi. 27. Nous finissona le notre a due lieures moins vingt 
minutes. 

CIS! 4 1. 

1. Does your companion like reading! 2. My companion does 
not like reading. 3. Does your father like good books? [R. 11.] 
4. He likes good books and good clothes.* 5. Do you owe more 
than twenty dollar ten, bat my brother owes more 

than fifteen. 7. Are yon iah your work early 1 8.1am 

right to finish mine early, and you are v. long not to (</<■ ne pas) fin- 

. 
but little. II. Do to that little child 1 12. 

want 

W\ ' not sell our 

i finish your work 

this morning (marin)*. 18? Vet, Sir. I finish it this morning early. 

IT. D un, he 

.v nephew ? Kr, we 

Em. 21. !>■ ' DOt only his 

04 lost to- 
day ? 2). H ore than ten i 
finish \ niir 

27. I* : 

I le i-« twelvo 

your brother like meat? 

2. 1 i i: goods at 

.lock.' ji them at half after twelve. 35. We 

them ten m 

♦ Repeat the article. 



LESSON ZZIV. 81 



LESSON XXIV. LEgON XXIV. 

1. There are in French, as in other languages, verbs which are 
called irregular, because they are not conjugated according to the 
rule, or model verb of the conjugation to which they belong. [§ 62.] 

2. Many irregular verbs have tenses which are conjugated regu- 
larly. 

3. The singular of the present of the indicative of the irregular 
verbs, is almost always irregular. 

4. In verbs ending in yer, the y is changed into i before an e mute. 
\\ 49.] 

5. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs. 

Aller, 1. to go; Envoyer, ] . to send ; Venir, 2. to come ; 

Je vais, I go, do go, or J'envoie [R. 4.] I send, do Je viens, J come, do come, 

am going ; send, or am sending ; or am coming ; 

Tu vas, Tu envoies, Tu viens, 

II va, II envoie, II vient, 

Nous allons, Nous envoyons, Nous venons, 

Vous allez, Vous envoyez, Vous venez, 

lis vont, lis envoient [R. 4.] lis viennent. 

6. All verbs ending in enir are conjugated like venir. 

7. The student will find in § 62 the irregular verbs alphabetically 
arranged. He should always consult that table, when meeting with 
an irregular verb. 

8. The expression, a la maison, is used for the English at home, at 
his or her house, &c. 

Le chirurgien est il a la maison 1 Is the surgeon at home ? 

Mon frere est a la maison. My brother is at home. 

9. The preposition chez, placed before «» noun or pronoun, answers 
to the English, at the house of, with (meaning at the residence of), 
among, etc. [§ 142, (3.)] 

Chez moi, chez lui, chez elle, At my house, at his house, at her house. 

Chez nous, chez vous, chez eux, m. At our house, at your house, at their 
chez elles, f. house. 

That is literally, at the house of me, at the house of him, &c. 

Chez mon pere, chez ma soeur, At my father's, at my sister's. 

10. The word avec answers to the English with, meaning merely 
in the company of • 

Venez avec nous, ou avec lui. Come with us, or with Mm. 

11. The word y means ie it, at it, at that place, there. It is 

4* 



82 



LESSON XXIV, 



ally placed before the verb, and refers always to something men 
tioned. [j 39, { 103, } 104.] 

Votre sceur est elle chez vous ? Is your sister at your house ? 

Oui, Monsieur, elle y est. Yes, Sir, she is there. 

12. In French, an answer cannot, as in English, consist merely of 
an auxiliary or a verb preceded by a nominative pronoun ; as, Do 
you come to my house to-day? / do. Have you books? J havt. 
The sentence in French must be complete; as, / go there; I have 
some. The words oui or non, without a verb would however suffice. 

Yencz vous chez moi aujourd hui 1 Do you come to my house to-day? 
Oui, Monsieur, j irai. Sir, I will. 

Ave/, row <U-s livres chez vous 1 Have you books at home f 

Oui, Monsieur, nous en avous. Fes. Sir. we have. 



Resume of Examples. 



Ou est lo colonel ? 

iiez son frdre ain6. 

I pas dM nous? 
Non, M"iiMeur. il n'y est pas. 

inure Mt ello a la 

Madame, elk n'y est pas. 

AlleZ vous cliez DOOa, ou chez lui ? 

Nous allons cha Ifl capitaine. 
' 

Monsieur, il eat ches nous. 

u paa voe habits chez 
von sceurs ] 

■ lies. 
N'alk-z vous pas chez M monsieur 1 
Je n >■ rail paa,Je n'al j>as k tempi 
d'y aller aujourd'hui. 



Where is the colonel J 

He is at his eldest brother's. 

Js he not at our house ? 

. he is not. 
Is your mother at home ? 

Ms, Madam, she is not. 

Do you go to our house, or to his 

house? 
H the captain 's. 

! /.« he not at your brother's 7 
he is at our house. 
u>t send your clothes to your 

•inn to their house. 
Do you not go to that gentleman's ? 
I [R. 12. J / have not time to 

go there to-day. 



Exercise 45. 

All-er. 1. ir, r<> g$ ; Hoiioger, ra. wakh-ma- Rclicur, m. book-binder ; 

Ami m. I -ur, 1. to remain, 

Associ6,m. partner ; Hoik I ; lite; 

Gapitaine, m captain i Magasin, m. warehouse s Rusv 

Deineur tr. 1. to VUM; Ven-ir, 2. Ir, to come; 

Matin, m. morning ; A -hbor. 

Qilet. in wmttiMl ; lVintiv i. 

allei vous mon ami .' 2. Je vais chez Monsieur tot 
est il I la DEUdaon .' 3. 11 v est ee matin. 4. D "us? 6. 

Nous venous de chez vous et de chez voire sfrur. 6. Qui • 

* The French in speaking to a person whom they respect, prefix th<i 
.sieur, Madame, or Mademoiselle to the word representing thelf 
Interlocutor's reiatieas, or friend*. 



LESSON XXIV. -83 

nous? 7. Mon voisin y est aujourd'hui. 8. Ou avez vous l'inten- 
tion de porter ces livres ? 9. J'ai l'intention de les porter chez le fils 
du medecin. 10. Avez vous tort de rester chez vous ? 11. Je n'ai 
pas tort do rester a la maison. 12. L'horloger a-t-il de bonnea 
montres chez lui? 13. II n'a pas de montres chez lui, il en a dans 
son ruagasin. 14. Chez qui portez vous vos livres? 15. Je les 
porte chez le relieur. 16. Allez vous chez le capitaine hollandais? 
17. Nous n'allons pas chez le capitaine hollandais, nous allons chez 
le major russe. 18. Est il chez vous ou chez votre frere? 19. II 
demeure chez nous. 20. Ne demeurons nous pas chez votre tail- 
leur? 21. Vous y demeurez. 22. Votre peintre d'ou vient il? 23. 
II vient de chez son associe. 24. Ou portez vous mes souliers et 
mon gilet ? 25. Je porte vos souliers chez le cordonnier et votro 
gilet chez le tailleur. 

Exercise 46. 

1. Where does your friend go ? 2. He is going [L. 23, R. 6. J to 
your house or to your brother's. 3. Does he not intend to go to 
your partner's ? 4. He intends to go there, but he has no time to-day. 
5. What do you want to-day ? 6. I want my waistcoat, which (qui) 
is at the tailor's. 7. Are your clothes at the painter's ? 8. They are 
not there, they are at the tailor's. 9. Where do you live, my friend ? 
10. I live at your sister-in-law's. 11. Is your father at home? 12. 
No, Sir, he is not. 13. Where does your servant carry the wood? 
14. He carries it to the Russian captain's. 15. Does the gentleman 
who (qui) is with your father live at his house? 16. No, Sir, he 
lives with me. 17. Is he wrong to live with you ? 18. No, Sir, he is 
right to live with me. 19. Whence (d'ou) comes the carpenter? 
20. He comes from his partner's house. 21. Has he two partners? 
22. No, Sir, he has only one, who lives here (ici). 23. Have you 
time to go to our house this morning ? 24. We have time to go 
there. 25. We intend to go there and to speak to your sister. 26. 
Is she at your house ? 27. She is at her (own) house. 28. Have you 
bread, butter, and cheese at home ? 29. We have bread and butter 
there. 30. We have no cheese there, we do not like cheese. 31. 
Is your watch at the watchmaker's? 32. It (elk) is there. 33. 
Have you two gold watches ? 34. I have only one gold watch. 35. 
Who intends to go to my father's this morning ? 36. Nobody in- 
tends to go there. 



84 JLB8 80 5 XXT 



LESSON XXV. LEQJON XXV 

1. In the first person singular of the present of the indicative of 
almost all those French verbs, which in that person have only one 
syllable, the common interrogative form [L. 23. 9.] is not ..".lowed. 
To render the verb interrogative, the expression csl-ce que is prefixed 
to the affirmative form. [( 93, (5.) (6.)] 

la -lu dran ? Do I 

at ! Do 1 

The first parson singular of the Indicative of avoir, to have; 
tore, to 08 ; altar, togo; ponvoir, to be able; devoir, to owe; savoir, 
r, be conjugated interrogatively according 
to the general rule.-. 

,\ i | pa 1 HI i/ >ur han dkerchiefs ? 

tjou? 

3. The form i sf-CS que is always allowable, and sometimes prefer- 
able, when the first person singular of the present of the indicative 
of a verb baa BeversJ syllables, [\ 96, (6.)] 

D I 

4 i y, [n Bunill nsed with all the 

>njugated InterrogB, 

Itead of, que hsei 

I 

rIVE PliKSKNT CJ 

■ ■'■ 1° come. 

je vieUil d* 
i <>vumlc4*.ing1 

tu 7 
Vi.nt-il] 
doojsI 

at ilsl 

G. The article le, | llrJ int « 

au before a noun masculine commencing with a consonant, or an • 
enpbat pln**l I1 " im - i\ 13 > ( 8 -)] 

Allez vous au V.il on an n.:'. 1. I D 

7. A Pegbec 

alluns ul 'Igfl ,! 

8. Quelque part, means somewhere, anywhere; nulle part, no- 
whtrt 



LESBO JT XIT, 



85 



Vjtre neveu ou est il 1 
n est quelque part. 
II n'est nulle part. 



Where is your nephew 7 
He is somewhere. 
He is nowhere. 



Resume or Examples. 



Est-ce que je vais a, l'ecole 1 

Vous "Uez a l'eglise aujourd'hui. 

Est-ce que je commence mon tra- 
vail? 

Est-ce que je parle anglais 1 

Est-ce que j'envoie ce livre a mon 
frere? 

Allez vous au marche demain 1 

J'y vais apres-demain. 

Envoyez vous vos enfants a. l'ecole 1 

Je les envoie chez le professeur. 

Je les y envoie cette apres-midi. 

Vos habits ou sont ils 1 

lis sont quelque part. 

Ils ne sont nulle part. 

Est-ce que je demeure chez vous 1 

Est-ce que je mange trop ? 



Do I go to school ? t 

You go to church to-day. 
Do I begin my work ? 

Do I speak English ? 

Do I send this book to my brother? 

Do you go to market to-morrow 7 

I go there the day after to-morrow. 

Do you send your children to school 7 

I send them to the professor's. 

I send them there this afternoon. 

Where are your clothes ? 

They are somewhere. 

They are nowhere. 

Do I live at your house ? 

Do I eat too much 7 



Absent, e, absent ; Cuir, m. jgather ; Perruquier, m. Aair-dres- 

Adresse, f. address; Depuis, since; ser; 

Banque, f. bank; Ecole, f. school; Point, not; 

Banquier, m. banker ; Ecolier, m. scholar ; Poste, f. post-office ; 

Billet, m. note ; ticket ; Eglise, f. church ; Kouge, red ; 

Chapelier, m. hatter; Marche, m. market; Village, m. village; 

Concert, m. concert ; Noir, e, black ; Vert, e, green. 
Coup-er, 1. to cut; 

1. Ou est-ce que je vais? 2. Vous allez chez le chapelier. 3. Est-ce 
que je vais a. la banque ? 4. Vous allez a. la banque et au concert. 
5. Est-ce que je coupe votre bois? 6. Vous ne coupez ni mon bois 
ni mon habit. 7. Est-ce que je porte un chapeau vert ? 8. Vous ne 
portez pas un chapeau vert, vous en portez un noir. 9. Votre 
ecolier va-t-il quelque part? 10. II va a. l'eglise, a l'ecole et au 
marche. 11. Ne va-t-il pas chez le perruquier? 12. II ne va nulle 
part. 13. Ne portez vous point des bottes de cuir rouge? 14. J'en 
porte de cuir noir. 15. N'allez vous pas chez le banquier? 16. Je 
ne vais pas chez lui, il est absent depuis hier. 17. Vient il a la 
banque ce matin? 18. II a l'mtention d'y venir, s'il a le temps.* 19. 
A-t-il envie d'aller au concert ? 20. II a grande envie d'y aller, mais 
il n'a pas de billet. 21. Demeurez vous dans ce village? 22. Oui, 



* The i of « is elided before il, ils, but in no other case, 
•nly instance of the elision of i. 



This is the 



Monsieur, j'y demeure. 24. Envoyez vous ce billet a la poste? 25. 
Je l'envoie a son adresse. 

Exercise 4S. 

1. Do I wear my large black hat 1 2. You wear a handsome grefln 
hat 3. Does the banker go to the hair-dresser's this morning? 4. 
He goes there this morning. 5. Does he intend to go to the bank 
this morning? 6. He does not intend to go there, he has no time. 
7. Do you send your letters to the post-olliee ? 8. I do not send 
them, they are not yet written (icriles). 9. Do I send you a note ? 
10. You send me a ticket, but I have no wish to go to the concert 
- your brother go to school to-morrow ? 12. He goes (there) 
to-day, and remains at home to-morrow. 13 Do I go there ? 14. You 
do not go anywhere. 15. Where do you go? 1G. I am going to 
your brother'?-, is he at home ? 17. He is not at home, lie If 

iterday. 18. Does your brother live in this village? 19. He 
does nut, [L, 24. IS.] lie lives at my nephew's, - JU. Are you wrong 
to go to school! 21. No, Sir, 1 :.m light to go to church ami to 
school. 22. Do you wish to come to my house I 23. I like to go to 
your house, and to your brother's. 24. When are you coming to 
our hou* -morrOW, if I have time. 26. Does the banker 

like to come ben I 87. H" likes to conn- to your house. 28. Is the 
bab>4reeter coming 1 29. He it net yet coming. 30. What are you 

sending to the scholar I 31. I am sending books, paper, and clothes, 
re is he ? 33. He is at school. 84. Is the school in the vil- 
lage ? 35. It is there. 



LESSON XXVI. X XXVI. 

1. The verb aller, is need, in French, in the same manner as the 
verb to go, in Rngtishj t«> indicate a proximate future. 

Allez v. Uin! Are yen ■..'<• this morning? 

I 

2. The verb venir is used idiomatically, in French, to indicate a 
past just elapsed It requires, in this signification, the pr. 

de before another verb. 

Je Ticns d'6crire met l'-ttros. J ha i my Utleit. 

Nous venons de reccvoir des lettrcs. Wc have just rtcnixJ I 

8. Aller treuver, venir trouvor, are used in the sense sf it go to, 



IE SS ON XXVI. 87 

to come to, in connection with nouns or pronouns representing per- 
sons •— 

Allez trouver le ferblantier. Go to the tinman. 

J'ai envie d'aller le trouver. / have a desire to go to him. 

Venez mo trouver a dix heures. Come to me at ten o'clock. 

4. Aller chercher, means to go for, to go and fetch : — 

Allez chercher le medecin. Go and fetch the physician. 

Je vais chercher du sucre et du cafe. / am going for coffee and sugar 

5. Envoyer chercher, means to send for, to send and fetch :— 

Envoyez chercher le marchand. Send for the merchant. 

J'envoie chercher des legumes. I send for vegetables. 

6. The first and second persons of the plural of the imperative 
are, with few exceptions, the same as the corresponding persons of 
the present of the indicative. The pronouns nous, vous, are not 
used with the imperative. 

I. Plural of the Imperative of Aller, Envoyer, and 

Venir. 

Allons, let us go ; Envoyons, let us send ; Venons, let us come ; 

Allez, go ; Envoyez, send ; Venez, come. 

8. Tous, m. t jutes, f. followed by the article les and a plural noun, 
are used in French in the same sense as the word every in English. 

Votre frero vient tous les jours. Your brother comes every day. 
Vous allez a l'ecole tous les matins. You go to school every morning. 

9. Tout, m. toute, f. followed by le or la and the noun in the 
singular, are used for the English expression the whole coming before 
a noun. 

II reste ici toute la journee. He remains here the whole day. 

10. A day of the week or of the month, pointed out as the time 
of an appointment or of an occurrence, is not preceded by a preposi- 
tion in French. 

Venez lundi ou mardi. Come on Monday or Tuesday. 

Venez le quinze ou le seize avril. Come on the fifteenth or sixteenth 
of April. 

II. When the occurrence is a periodical or customary one, the 
article le is prefixed to the day of the week or the time of the day. 

II vient nous trouver le lundi. He comes to us Mondays. 

U va trouver votre pere l'apres-midi. He goes to your father in the afternoon. 



Resume of Examples. 

;re pere. I J am going t 

irdel'argent. We have just 
Que venez vous de faire 1 | What have you just done? 



Je vais parler a. M. votre pere. I J am going to speak to your father. 

Nous venons de recevoir de l'argent. We have just received money. 



LXSSO 



XXVL 



Je vieua de d6chirer mon habit. 

Votre frere va-t-il trouver son ami 1 
II va le trouver tous les jours. 
II vient me trouver tous les lundis. 
Allez vous chercher de l'argcut 1 
Je n'en vais pas chercher. 
Envoyez vous chercher des livrcs 

arabes ? 
Allcz vous chcz cette dame lundi 1 

J'ai l'intention d'y aller mardi. 
J'y vais ordinaircnient le mercredi. 
11 va a l'6glise le dimauclie. 



I have just torn my coat. 

r brother go to his friend ? 
I to him every day. 
He comes to me every Mon*\ny. 
Do vo u go and fetch money ? 
I do not. [L 24. 12.1 
Do you said for Arabic books 7 

Do you go to thai lady's hous* 0% 
ay J 

/ intend to go there on Tuesday. 
■ ,il>/ go there Wednesdays. 
He goes to chmch Sundays. 



Mardi, m. Tuesday; 
Mercredi, m. Wednes- 
day ; 
Musique, f. music ; 
Prochain. e. 
Vendredi. iu. Friday ; 
Kcst-cr, 1. to remain, 

S.imedi. Saturday ; 
Teinturicr. m. dyer. 



Exercise 49. 

Annee, f. year; Pll— I Jill, III S 

A{>prend-re. 4. ir. tolcarn; K 

Apres-midi, f. afternoon ; ficri-re, 4. ir. to write ; 
Commenc-cr, 1. /<> case- Eoeelgn-er, 1. 1" teach; 

mence ; 
Compagne, f. compan- Jeudi. ni. Thurstiay ; 

ion ; Jnurnee, f. day ; 

f. ac- Irian. luis a 

quoin' Lundi. in .1/ 

Deniain. to ■WW J Malade. sick; 

1. Qu'allcx vuiit faire ? 'J. Je vais apprendre mes lecons 
3. N'al!.-z rove pas eerire .'» roa eonnaiaaanoesl 4. Je mti 

.:ic. 5. Qui vient dfl \<>us parh-r '. 8. l-'Irlandais vient da 
nous parlrr. 7. Quand l! Ucllf fOUI BBMigMf la mu- 

riqne ? s. Bile \a me I'enseigner I'annee proehaiae. ;». Ya-t-clle 
commencer mardi ou metered] ? 10. Elk M W 0(MHMMa ni DMfdl 

ni metered!, tUt ■ ^intention de eommencer jeudi, al eUe ■ It temps. 

11. Yotrc OOmiUfllMl va-t-clle ■ lY^ii-c U>BJ les dimaiiclies ? 1J. Kilo 
y va ton* les dimanches et tous 1. s inercrcdis. 13. Qui allez v.uis 
trouver? 11. le M nil tn.mer per-Minc. IV \'a\e/. vous pas 
l'intention de venir me trouver demainl 16. J'ai l'intention d'aller 
trouver vi'tre teinturicr. 17. F.n heithei It D> decin ? 

18. Quami je soil inalade, ji- I'envoie chercher. 19. keste-t-il avee 
vous loose la jonrtJtt .' 80. II ne reete chex moi que qvtJqatt 
minutes. 21. Allez fi le matin! ie matin 

■I Wtprtt mldl 28. Yalta vote toot lee jewel 84. J'y vais tous 
les jours except.'- Ic lundict le diinanclie. 25. Le samedi je reste chit 
nous, et le dimanche je vais .\ lY^lise. 

;;ci8E 50. 

1. What is the Irishman going to do? 2. He is going to teach 
music. 3. lias he just commenced his work 1 4. He has just com 



LESSON XXVII. 89 

menced it. 5, Who has just written to you ? 6. The dyer has just 
written to me. 7. Does your little boy go to church every day? 
8. No, Sir, he goes to church Sundays and he goes to school every 
day. 9. Do you go for the physician? 10. I send for him because 
(parceque) my sister is sick. 11. Do you go to my physician or to 
yours? 12. I go to mine, yours is not at home. 13 Where is he? 
14. He is at your father's or at your brother's. 15. Do you inten 
to send for the physician ? 16. I intend to send for him. 17. Am I 
rignt to send for the Scotchman? 18. You are wrong to send for 
him. 19. Do you go to your father in the afternoon? 20. I go to 
nim in the morning. 21. Does your brother go to your uncle's every 
Monday ? 22. He goes there every Sunday. 23. Are you going to 
learn music ? 24. My niece is going to learn it, if she has time. 
25. Am I going to read or to write ? 26. You are going to read to 
morrow. 27. Does he go to your house every day? 28. He comes 
to us every Wednesday. 29. At what hour? 30. At a quarter 
before nine. 31. Does he come early or late? 32. He comes at a 
quarter after nine. 33. What do you send for? 34. We send for 
wine, bread, butter and cheese. 35. What do you go fpr? 36. We 
go for vegetables, meat and sugar. 37. We want sugar every 
morning. 



LESSON XXVIL LEgON XXVII. 

PLACE OP THE PRONOUNS. 

1. The personal pronoun used as the direct regimen [} 2, (2.) $ 42, 
(4.)] or object of a verb,* is in French placed before the verb, except in 
the second person singular or in the first and second persons plural 
of the imperative used affirmatively. 

II me voit, il l'aime. He sees me, he loves him. 

II nous aime, il vous aime. He loves us, he loves you. 

2. The personal pronoun representing the indirect regimen of the 
verb, [§ 2, (3.) \ 42, (5.)] answering to the dative of the Latin, and to 
the indirect object of the English with the preposition to expressed 
or understood, is also in French placed before the verb:— <• 

* The young student will easily distinguish the personal pronoun used 
as the direct regimen of a verb, by the fact that there is in English no 
preposition between the verb and this pronoun. 



90 LESSON XXVII. 

II me parle, il lui parle. He speaks to me, he speaks to kirn 

II nous donne une fleur. Be gives us a flower* 

II vous parle, il leur parle. He speaks to you, he speaks to them. 

3. The personal pronoun is generally placed after the following 
rerbs: aller, to go; aceourir, to run to; courir, to run; venir, to 
come; penser a, songer a, to think q/\-— 

II vieiit a iuoi. * He comes to me. 

II peQM a vous, a eux. Ma of you, of them. 

4 In the imperative used affirmatively, the pronouns follow the 
verb : — 

Aimez les, parley lour. Love them, speak to them. ' 

5. The words en and \j follow the above rules, except the 3d. 

/ '. of it, 1 think of it. 

6. The pronoun used as indirect regimen, answering to the geni- 
tive or ablative of the Latin, and to the indirect object which in 
English is separated from the verb by a preposition other than to, is 
in French always placed after the verb : — 

Jo pttfa <]■■ lui. .1.-11.'. <lVux. / "'•• of him, of her, of them. 

rom it awe ens. I n main vith you and icilh tkem. 

7. All pronouns need M objects of verbs, must be repeated : — 
j c |e| :i j m ,. j,- lcs / love them, raped and honor tkem 

hoi. 

I Do yon hear or understand me? 

jos. / ur hear you. 

H 



■ BUS el il DOW 

.' 

a dames 1 



/ understand them. 

II 

your friend? 
I / him. 

ut those ladies? 
I 



la envie <\<- Fear parler. / 

Portal lui —lie lui pa: '.■ I "Peak t* 

Altai a lui. our./. n lui. ****> 

Tarlez leur,— ne leur parle/. pi-.. ■',— do not speak to tkem. 

51. 

AnVro, f. affair i 

Arlue. m 

Poirier, m 
I 
CoHiinuiii-iu-er. I. tea ./)i- Example, m out '" respect. 

muu 



* The preposition to is understood. He gimt a /lover to us. 



LESSON XXVII. 01 

1. Allez vous lui ecrire ? 2. Je vais lui ecrire et lui communiquer 
cette nouvelie. 3. Allez vous lui parler de moi ? 4. Je vais lui par- 
ler de vous et de votre compagnon. 5. Leur envoyez vous de beaux 
arbres ? 6. Je leur envoie des pommiers, des poiriers, et des cerisiers ? 
7. Ne m'envoyez vous pas des cerisiers ? 8. Je ne vous en envoie 
pas, vous en avez deja. 9. Avez vous raison de leur parler de cette 
affaire? 10. Je n'ai pas tort de leur parler de cette affaire. 11. Ve- 
nez a nous demain matin. 12. Venez nous trouver, cette apres-midi. 

13. Ailez vous les trouver tous les jours ? 14. Je vais les trouver 
tous les soirs. 15. Leur donnez vous de bons avis? 16. Je leur 
donne de bons avis et de bons exemples. 17. Nous parlez vous de 
vossoeurs? 18. Je vous parle d'elles. 19. Ne nous parlez vous pas 
de nos freres? 20. Je vous parle d'eux. 21. Ne les aimez vous 
pas ? 22. Nous les aimons et nous les respe.;;i,ons. 23. Pensez vous 
•a ce livre ou n'y pensez vous pas? 24. Nuus y pensons et nous en 
parlons. 25. Nous n'y pensons pas. 

Exercise 52. 
1. When are you going to write to your brother ? 2. I am going 
to write to him to-morrow morning. 3. Do you intend to write to 
him every Monday ? 4. I intend to write to him every Sunday. 5. 
Have you a wish to speak to hira to-day ? 6. I have a wish to speak 
to him, but he is not here. 7. Where is he ? 8. He is at his house. 
9. Do you speak to them ? 10. Yes, Sir, I speak to them about (de) 
this affair. 11. Do they give you good advice? 12. They give me 
good advice and good examples. 13. Do you go to your sister every 
day? 14. I go to her every morning at a quarter before nine. 15. 
Does she like to see (voir) you? 16. She likes to see me and she 
receives me well. 17. Do you think of this affair? 18. I think of it 
the whole day. 19. Do you speak of it with (avec) your brother? 
20. We speak of it often. 21. Do you send your companion to my 
house ? 22. I send him every day. 23\ Are you at home every 
day? 24. I am there every morning at ten o'clock. 25. Do yculike' 
to go to church? 26: I like to go there every Sunday and every 
Wednesday. 27. Do you speak of your houses ? 28. I speak of 
them (en). 29. Does your brother speak of his friends ? 30. Yes, 
Sir, he speaks of them (d'eux). 31. Does he think of them ? 32. 
Yes, Sir, he thinks of them (d eux). 33. Does he think of this news ? 

14. Yes, Sir, he thinks of it (y). 35. I love and honor them. 



02 LKSSOIf XXVIII. 

LESSON XXVIH. LECON XXVIE. 

RESPECTIVE PLACE OF THE PROXOUXS. See $ 101 

1. When two pronouns occur, one used as a direct regimen or ob. 
jcct (accusative), the other used as the indirect regimen or object 
("dative), the indirect object, if not in the third person singular or plu- 
ral, must precede the direct object. [} 101, (1.)] 

Je vous le donne. N il to you. 

II me le AoflM. « K*** il ^ me - 

11 nuib le douue. 11 ..ires it to us. 

2. When the pronoun used as an indirect object [dative, Rule 2 

- in the third person lingular or plural, it must be placed 
after the direct object [| 101, (£.)] 

lui .li.nnons. re it to kirn. 

Rons le leor doonons. FF - I I ' them. 

3. Tlie above rules of precedence apply also to the imperative used 

■y : — 

\.- • paa |R. 1 ] Do not give it to us. 

lui donna pea, [R. - J £>« «"< f»w «'< **■« 

4. Willi the imperative used aflirmatively, the direct object pre. 
Cedes i;. •' inuiri-ct objc 1 . [| 101, (.5.)} 

to us. 
icur. SAw rt to them. 

6. En and y always follow tlie other pronouns : — 

J give him some. 

!s us thither. 

6. Pm - : icativb or thb Irregular Vbkm, 

otte; m, to will, be vil- Pouvom, to be ablet 

I *•<•, do see, or i<- vux. 1 will or am Jo puis. I can, I may, I 

■ible ; 
Tn \ Tu pens," 

II v,.it. u v.i.t il peal) 

Notu v..r.: Nous ponvons, 

Voai Vow poarea, 

il.nt, Mv.nt. 

7. The above verbs take no preposition before another verb. 

8. The preposition, pour, is used to render the preposition to, wh«* 
the latter means tn order to. 

Je Tais chez vous pour parlor a vo- I go to your house to speak U ym 
tro frire et pour vous voir. brother and to see you. 

• After the verbs pouvoir, to be able ; o»er, to dart aavolr, to bw» 
the negative pas may be omitted. 



LESSON XXVIII. 



93 



J'ai besoin d'argent pour acheter / want money to {in ordei to) bup 
des marchandises. goods. 

Resume of Examples. 



Voulez vous nous le donner 1 

Je veux vous le preter. 

Pouvez vous me les donner 1 

Je ne puis vous les donner. 

Votre frere peut il le lui envoyer 1 

II ne veut pas le lui envoyer. 

Qui veut le leur preter ? 

Personne ne veut le leur preter. 

Envoyez les nous. 

Ne nous les envoyez pa*. 

Donnez nous en. 

Ne leur en envoyez pas. 

Envoyez le leur, pour les conJenter. 

Je puis vous l'y envoyer. 



Will you give it to us? 

I will lend it to you. 

Can you give them tome? 

I cannot give them to you. 

Can your brother send it to him? 

He will not send it to him. 

Who will lend it to them ? 

No one will lend it to them. 

Send them to us. 

Do not send them to us. 

Give us some (of if). 

Do not send them any. 

Send it to them (in order) to satisfy 

them. 
I can send it to you there. 



Exercise 53. 

Commis, m. clerk ; Guere, but little ; Poisson, m. fish; 

Counaissance, f. acquain- Marchande de modes, f, Pologne, f. Poland; 

tance; milliner; Preter, 1. to lend; 

Croi-re, 4. ir. to believe; Montr-er, 1. to show; Semaine,/. week; 
Dette, f. debt ; Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; Souvent, often ; 

D-evoir, 3. to owe ; Pay-er, 1. to pay ; Voyage, m. journey. 

1. Voulez vous donner ce livre a mon frere ? 2. Je puis le lui 
preter, mais je ne puis le lui donner. 3. Voulez vous nous les en- 
voyer ? 4. La marchande de modes peut vous les envoyer. 5. Les 
lui montrez vous ? 6. Je les vois et je les lui montre. 7. Avez vous 
peur de nous les preter? " 8. Je n'ai pas peur de vous les preter. 9 
Ne pouvez vous nous envoyer du poisson? 10. Je ne puis vous en 
envoyer, je n'en ai guere. 11. Voulez vous leur en parler? 12. Je 
veux leur en parler, si je ne l'oublie pas. 13. Venez vous souvent 
les voir ? 14. Je viens les voir tous les matins, et tous les soirs. 15. 
Ne leur parlez vous point de votre voyage en Pologne? 16. Je leur 
en parle, mais ils ne veulent pas me croire. 17. Est-ce que je vois mes 
connaissances, le lundi? 18. Vous les voyez tous les jours de la 
eemaine. 19. Vous envoient elles plus d'argent que le commis de 
notre marchand? 20. Elles m'en envoient plus que lui. 21. En 
envoyez vous au libraire? 22. Je lui en envoie quand je lui en dois. 
23. N'avez vous pas tort de lui en envoyer ? 24. Je ne puis avoir 
tort de payer mes dettes. 25. Ils vous en donnent, et ils Youe en 
pretent quand vous en avez besoin. 



04 



Exercise 54. 

I. Will you send us that letter? 2. I will send it to you, if you 
will read it. 3. I will read it if (si) I can. 4. Can you ltnd me your 
pen ? 5. I can lend it to you, if you will take eare of it [L. 22, (3.)] 
& May I speak to your father? 7. You may speak to him, he is 
here. 8. Are you afraid of forgetting it? [L. 21, (4.)] 9. I nm 
not afraid of forgetting it. 10. Will y >u send them to him? 11. I 
intend to send them to him, if I have ume. 12. Do you speak to 
him of your journey? 13. I speak to him of my journey. 14. I 
speak to them of it. 15. Can you communicate it to him? 16. I 
have a wish to communicate it to him. 17. Do you see your ac- 
quaintances every Monday ? IX. I see them every Monday and every 
Thursday. 19. Where do you intend to see them .' 20. I intend to 
see them at y>ur brother's and at your sister-. 81. Can you send 
him there every day ? 22. I can send him there every Sunday, if he 
wishes (>Y j.i. Can you give them to mel -1. lean 

give them to you. 36. Who will lend them books. I 86. No one 
will lend then any. 'J7. Your bookseller is willing to sell them 
good books and good paper. 88, Is be at home I 89, He is at his 
broth' arong to pay your debts? 31. lam right 

d it to 01 ? 33. 1 am willing to send 
it to ] them to us? 

35. We are willing to give them to your acquaintances. 



LESSON* XXIX. LECON XXIX. 

U8K OF THE ARTICLE ("» 77.) 

1. The nrticlc le, la, lee, ei already stated, is used in French before 
nouns taken in a general MB 

Leu janlins sont lot ornemonti del Gardens art the ornaments of vil 

villas agnca. .:-\d of rural <l> 

2. The article is also used in French, as in English, before nouni 

taken in a particular sense : — 

Lea janlins do cc village sont su- Tie gardens of this villagt art su- 
perb. 

3. It is also used before abstract nouns, before verbs and adjcctivM 
ased substantively : — 



LESSON XXIX. 



95 



La paresse est odieuse. Idleness is odious. 

La jeunesse n'est pas toujours do- Youth, is not always tractable. 

cile. 

Le Loire et le manger sont neces- Eating and drinking are necessary to 

saires a la vie. life. 

4. The article is used before the names of countries, provinces, 
rivers, winds and mountains : — [§ 77, (3.) (4.)] 

La Francs est plus grande que France is larger than Italy. 

l'ltalie. 
La Normandie est tres fertile. Normandy is very fertile. 

5. The article is used before titles : — 



Le general Cavaignac. 
Le marechal Ney. 



General Cavaignac. 
Marshal Ney. 



6. In respectful address or discourse, the words, Monsieur, Ma- 
dame, Mademoiselle are placed before titles and designations of 
relationship : — 



Monsieur le president. 
Madame la comtesse. 
Mademoiselle votre soeur. 



{Mr.) President. 
{Madam) Countess. 
{Miss) your sister. 



7. The plural of Monsieur, Madame and Mademoiselle, is Messieurs, 
Mesdames, and Mesdemoiselles. 

8. The student should be careful to distinguish a noun' taken in a 
general or in a particular sense from one taken in a partitive sense. 
[J 78.] 

General or particular sense. Partitive sense. 

Nous aimons les livres, Nous avons des livres, 

Wc like books. We have books i. e. some books. 

Nous avons les livres, Vous avez ecrit des lettres. 

We have the books. You have written letters, i. e. some 

letters. 

Resume of Examples. 



La modestie est aimable. 

Le courage est indispensable au 
general. 

Les fleurs sont 1'ornement des jar- 
dins. 

Les fleurs des jardins de ce chateau. 

Avez vous l'intention de visiter la 

France 1 
J'ai l'intention de visiter l'ltalie. 
Le capitaine Dumont est il ici "? 
Le major Guillanme est chez lui. 
Voyez vous Madame votre mere? 
Je vois Monsieur votre frere. 
Men frere n'aime pas les louanges. 



Modesty is amiable. 

Courage is indispensable to the gent' 

ral. 
Flowers are the ornament of gardens* 

The flowers of the gardens of this 

villa. 
Do you intend visiting F-ance f 

I intend visiting Italy. 
Is captain Dumcnit here ? 
Major William is at home. 
Do you see your motliei ? 
I see yowr ir other. 
My brother is not fond of 



LISSOX XXIX. 



Exercise 55. 



Aim-er, 1. to be fond of, Demeur-er, 1. to dwell, Legume, m. vegetable t 

to like ; lire ; Loin, far ; 

Apportrer, 1. to bring ; £tudi-er, 1. U> study; Lundi, m. Monday; 
Bois ra. wood, forest ; Flcur, f. ji Pcche, f. peach; 

Capitainc, m. captain ; Fraiso. f. strawberru ; Prune, f. plum. 
Caporal. m. corporal; Framboise, f. raspberry; 



1. Aimez vous le pain ou la viande ? 2. J'aime le pain, la via 
et le fruit- 3. Avons nous de9 peches dans notre jardin? 4. Nous y 
avons des peches, des fr. ,'t.oises ct des cerises. 5. Mon- 

sieur votre Mm airue-t-il les cerises ? 6. II n'aime guere les cerises, 
il pre fere les prunes. 7. Avez vous des legumes? 8. Je n'aime 
point les legumes. 9. Nous n'avons ni legUIMO ni fruit*. [L.8. 3, 4.] 
10. Nous n'aimons ni les legumes nj lea fruita. 11. Allez vous tous 
les jours dans le bois de Monsieur TOtre frfere ? 12. Je n'y vuis pas 
tous les jours. 13. Voire mrur npporle-t-elle les llcurs ? 14 Elle 

les appoite. Uk Hftiam rotre meqe appo rt a> t o U o dea ileurs? 
16. Elle en apporte tons les lun.lis. 17. VoyM vous le general Ber- 
tnind ? 18. Je ne le vois pas, je vuis le caporal Duchri;. 
demoiselles vos I i so?urs sont 

fatiguecs d't'tudier. 21 lo president est-il chez lui? 

irleeoloMl Dumont 23. De- 
• -:-il loin li'i.i .' 2». II ne demenra pas lob) •d'ici. 25. OH 
deme . run. 

icise 56. 
1. Dow your !»ixtor like flowers? . likes flowers, and 

my brother is fond of hooks. 3. Is he wrong t<> like Looks .' i 
Sir, he is right to like booka and (lowers. 6. Have you many flowers 
in your gardens ' (i. \\Y i, a \e many flowon and much fruit 7. Is 
yourcousin (bad of raapberrieal 8. My cousin ia fond o( 
and *straw':.. -(he captain fond of praiOMl 10. He is not 

fond of praiaofl. IL Has the gardener brought you vegetables* 
12. He has brought me vegetables and fruit.* 13. Is he ashamed to 
bring you ra ; II. [a itbef ashamed nor afraid to sell 

Tegetables. 15. Is your mother tiro- 1 other is not tired. 

17 Is your brother at colonel D's! 18. He lives at colonel D's, but 
he is not at home at present (d prlsent). If*. How many peachea 
have you! 20.*! have not many peaches, but I have many plums. 
21. Does CapL B. like peaches! 22. He likes peaches,* plums, 

Tho student moat not forget that the article is repeated beJbre erarf 



USiON XXX. 91 

raspberries, and strawberrie?. 23. Are you going into (dans) your 
brother's wood? 24. I go there every morning. 25. Is general L, 
here? 26. No, Sir, he is not here, he is at your cousin's. 27. Does 
your friend, General H. live far from here ? 28. He does not live far 
from here, he lives at his brother's. 29. Have you fine flowers in 
your garden? 30. We have very fine flowers; we are fond of 
flowers. 31. Do you give them to him? 32. I give them to you. 
33. I give you some. 34. I give them some. 35. Give us some. 
86. Do not give us any. 



LESSON XXX. LEQON XXX. 

USE OF THE ARTICLE CONTINUED. 

1. Adjectives of nation will, according to R. 3 of the last lesson, 
be preceded by the article : — 

II apprend le fran^ais, l'anglais, He learns French, English, German 
l'allemand et l'italieu. and Italian. 

2. After the verb parler, the article may be omitted before an ad- 
jective of nation, taken substantively : — 

Votre frere parle espagnol et portu- Your brotJier speaks Spanish and 
gais. Portuguese. 

3. The article is not used in French before the number which fol- 
lows the name of a sovereign. This number, (unless it be first and 
second) must be the cardinal, and not the ordinal: — [§ 26, (3.)] 

Vous avez l'histoire de Henri qua- You have the history of Henry the 
■ tre. Fourth. 

4. A word placed in apposition with a noun or pronoun is not in 
French preceded by un, une, a or an, unless it be qualified by an ad- 
jective or determined by the following part of the sentence. 

Votre ami est medecin. Your friend is a physician. 

Notre frere est avocat. Our brollier is a barrister. 

Votre ami est un bon medecin. Your friend is a good physician. 

Notre frere est un avocat celebre. Our brother is a celebrated advocate. 

5. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs; 

Apprendre, to learn; ConnaItre, to know ; Savoir, to know; 

J'apprends, J learn, do Je connais, / know, or Je sais, / know., or do 

learn, or am learning ; do know ; know ; 

Tu apprends, Tu connais Tu sais, 

II apprend. II connaifr, II sait, 

Nous apprenons, Nous connaissons, Nous savons, 

Vous apprenez, Vous connaissez, "Vous savez, 

lis apprennent. Us connaissent. Us savent. 



qq IESSOS IXX. 

6. Connaitre means to be acquainted with ; savoir, to know, is said 
ouly of things. 



\' 



Oonnaissez vous ce Francis, cet 
Anglais, cct Alleniaud, ct cct 
Espagnoll . 

Savcz vous le fran^ais, 1 anglais, 
Valk-uiand, ct l'espagnol 1 



Do you know that Frenchman, thai 
Englishman, thai German, ani 
that Spaniard ? 

Do you. know French, English, Ger- 
man, and Spanish? 



Resume of Examples. 



Maine G. bbH to ftaneaia 
I] m te sail pat, mala D I'appread. 

Docteur L. 1 
je ne le oonaafa paa,maiaj< 

il demenre. 
Ce monsieur ost il pefeatn I 
Non, il est architecte. 
Oc monsieur eat un arcbifc 
lingua. 

.M.ais parle grcc Bt arabo. 

11 parle lo BjlM I'axabfl ft 1 italiin. 

Avrz vous vr. I B*M ,1( ' 

LoBBI <lix-liuit ! 



D«fj captain G. know French? 

ot know it. but learns it. 
Do v»u know Dr. L. ? 
/ on not acquainted with him, but * 

m a painter? 

I it a distmguis/.ed 

." .nehman speaks G 
Arabic. 

Arabic, and 

Italian la not 
il 

I nth ? 



Allemnnrl e, tfcrwaaj Hongroia,e // 

Chftoi >' ■ * 

m. upholsterer. 

I < —r? 2. o„i, Madame, je leeoaaafa 

fcrtbien. • ,"<•! pays U eatl 4. Death* 

6 Park-t-U lUemand I 6. 11 parle allemand, polonato, 
dois , ■ Qpaa med - Non, Monatonr, awnt 

I* revolution, iletail eapitaine, 9. Vvez voaa envie ffapptandii le 

, • i, gree modern* IL 
Conn:. « q«" Ptrtonl ''•' »-• Jo 

ne lea connais pas. ,3. S.,v./. v. .us .„> ik d.-mnirvnt ? 14 Ha da- 
meurent cbe/. to at) leader de voir, frera. 16. tfav« vous P a« 1 m»- 

toire de Louis r.r.a^r/..-. dans Notre bibliottteqH l« * 

cello do Louis qnatone, ni eelto da Henri qnati ' voua 

tort d'apprendre to chinoia ! is. Je n'ai pas tort d»appnodr« to .-In- 

nois. 19. Voa compagnona apprennent ih 

20 lis aavent ptaaianra languea anci< 

Toua anglaial 23. Je saia l'anglaia ct je le parle. 23. Connaieaai 



LESSON XXXI. 99 

vous l'Anglais que nous voyons ? 24. Je ne le connais pas. 25, II 
ne me connait pas et je ne le connais pas. 

Exercise 58. 
1. Does our physician know French ? 2. He knows French, Eng- 
lish, and German. 3. Does he know the French physician? 4. He 
knows him very well. 5. Are you acquainted with that lady ? 6. I 
am not acquainted with her. 7. Is she a German or a Swede ? 8. 
She is neither a German nor a Swede, she is a Russian. 9. Do you 
intend to speak to her ? 10. I intend to speak to her in (en) English. 
11. Does she know English? 12. She knows several languages; 
she speaks English, Danish, Swedish, and Hungarian. 13. Is your 
brother a colonel ? 14. No, Sir, he is a captain. 15. Is your up- 
holsterer a Dane ? 16. He is not a Dane, he is a Swede. 17. Are 
you a Frenchman? 18. No, Sir, I am a Hungarian. 19. Do you 
know Chinese ? 20. I know Chinese, Russian, and modern Greek. 
21. Are you wrong to learn languages ? 22. I am not wrong to 
learn languages. 23. Do you know the Englishman who lives at 
your brother's ? 24. I am acquainted with him. 25. I am not ac- 
quainted with him. 26. Do you like books? 27. I am fond of 
books. 28. Have you a desire to learn Russian ? 29. I have jio de- 
sire to learn Russian. 30. Have you no time ? 31. I have but little 
time. 32. What do you learn? 33. We learn Latin, Greek, French, 
and German. 34. Do you not learn Spanish? 35. We do not 
learn it. 



LESSON XXXI. LEQON XX* I. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS, (§ 38). 

1. Qui, used as nominative, may relate to persons or to things: — 
Les fleurs qui sont dans votre jardin. The flowers which are in your garden. 

2. Qui, used as the object of a verb, can only be said of persons. 
It is used interrogatively with or without a preposition : — 

Qui votre frere voit il "? Whom does your brother see ? 

De qui parlez vous ce matin 1 Of whom do you speak this morning ? 

3. Que may be said of persons or things. It can never be under- 
stood, and must be repeated before every verb. [L. 19. 1.] 

Les personnes que nous voyons. The persons whom we see. 

Les langues que nous apprenons. The languages which we learn. 

4. Ce que is employed for that which, or its equivalent what: — 

Ce que vous apprenez est utile. That which you learn is useful. 

Trouvez vous ce que vous cherchez. Do you find what you seek? 



100 



LESSON IXIL 



5. Que answers to the English pronoun what, used absolutely be- 
fore a verb: — 

Que penscz vous dfl ccla I ' ] l " * °f that ? 

6. Quoi, when not used as an exclamation, is generally preceded 
ky a preposition, and relates only to tin: 

De ,, n ,,i Tonka row parler 1 O/VW rfo ivu ?r/.«A to speak ? 
A ,,' <ij *■*' 

7. LeqoeL, m., laqoelle, t, leeqoela, m p., leeqoellea, t \>.,which, oi 
trhi'c/i 0M • 1- I s 8.] or irhich anM, relate to persons or things. They 
may be p r eceded by a prepoeitioii: — 

IC ■■ hnr< V >u brought? 

oal V" 7 

8. Dont, of which, or tf whom, whose, may relate to persons or 
things, in the maaeoUne or feminine, singular or plural. It can never 
be naed abeolaielj and must always be preoeded by ai eofteeedea*. 
It is preferable to da qui or dnqnel, fee. 

young ladm of whom your sislt* 
speaks I 

\ KRB8, 

Dim:, 4. to urn. Fai-hf:. 4. fa MaTT-aa, 4. to put. 

| I ■'■ ■ ' ' /"«'. dojntt,ot 

am *•' 

II .lit. 

Nona •' 



ammo. am p*tmg. 

Tu neta, 
II met, 

Nona mettona, 
Vous mettea, 
Us mettent 



!, 



Oonnafaaea rooi le monsieur «u>i 
pari 

. 
I 

L'AngU 

ptol dont la M 

itinl 

usdttes. 
Ponrqai fait«H voui i 

Nous parlous do ccdontvousparlez. 



tkt gtnlltmm v>h, 

| | (0 Aim. 

/ In you? 

I njfair? 

■[■ ) whom you speak 

her*. 

II 

■;.// 
ll 

qMeJttafewaraitarf 

II ■■ rrtn. 

He speak oftXat of v>\k\ you speak. 



I 



LESSON XXXI. 101 



Exercise 59. 

Arriv-er, 1. to anive; Habillement, m. dress, Plaisir, rx. pleasure: 
Avec, with; clot/ies; Presquo, almost; 

Coffre, m. trunk; Hollandais, e, Dutcli; Rien, nothing; 

Command-er, 1. to order; Linge, m. linen; Soulier, m. shoe; 

Ecossais, e, Scotch; Monsieur, m. gentleman ; Vvai, e, true. 
Enfant, m. child; Nom, m. name; 

1. Qui connaissez vous? 2. Nous connaissons les Hollandais dont 
vous nous parlez. 3. Quelles lecons apprenez vous ? 4. Nous ap- 
prenons les lecons que vous nous recommandez. 5. Ce que je vous 
dis est il vrai ? 6. Ce que vous nous dites est vrai. 7. De qui nous 
parlez vous ? 8. Nous vous parlons des Ecossais qui viennent d'arri- 
ver. 9. Savez vous qui vient d'arriver ? 10. Je sais que le monsieur 
que votre frere connait vient d'arriver. 11. Vos soeurs que font 
elles? 12. Elles ne font presque rien, elles n'ontpresque rien a. faire. 
13. Que mettez vous dans votre coffre? 14. Nous y mettons ce que 
nous avons, nos habillements et notre linge. 15. N'y mettez vous 
pas vos souliers? 16. Nous y mettons les souliers dont nous avons 
besoin. 17. De quoi avez vous besoin? 18. Nous avons besoin de 
ce que nous avons. 19. Cet enfant sait il ce qu'il fait? 20. II sait 
ce qu'il fait et ce qu'il dit. 21. Ne voulez vous pas le leur dire? 
22. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. 23. Faites vous ce que le marchand 
vous commande ? 24. Nous faisons ce qu'il nous dit. 25. II parle 
de ce dont vous parlez. 

Exercise 60. 

1 . Have you what (ce dont) you want ? 2. We have what we want. 
3. Is the gentleman whom you know, here ? 4. The lady of whom 
you speak is here. 5. Is she just arrived? [L. 26. 2.] 6. She is just 
arrived. 7. Do you know that gentleman ? 8. I know the gentleman 
who is speaking with your father. 9. Do you know his name ? 10. 1 do 
not know his name, but I know where he lives (demeure). 11. What 
do you do every morning? 12. We do almost nothing; we have very 
little to do. 13. Does the tailor make your clothes? 14. He makes 
toy clothes, my brother's, and my cousin's. 15. Do you know what 
you say? 16. I know what I say, and what I do. 17. Do you know 
the Scotchman of whom your brother speaks? 18. I know him well. 
19 What does he put into his trunk? 20. He puts his clothes. 
21. Is that which you say, true? 22. What I say is true. 23. Do 
you understand that which I say to you? 24. I understand all that 
you say. 25. Of whom does your brother speak ? 26. He speaks of 
the gentleman whose sister is here. 27. Is your brother wrong to 



102 LESSON XXXII. 

do what he do.'s? 28. He cannot be wrong to do it. 29. What are 
youlin^ 30. I am doing that which you do. 31. Where do you 
'pu my bocks ! 32. Into (dans) your brother, trnnk 3. Is you 
Mother here « 34. Me is not here. 35. He ie at my brother s, or at 

my father's. 



LESSON XXXII. LE0ON XXXLL 

1 The verb nu-ttre i- used in the MM MM as the English to put 
on, "in speaking rf geiMflM. Mettre le convert, means to lay the 
cloth, 0T M M Uibb-:— 

2. 6t.-r in. ' — 

^ledinerl H ^**M-rf 

3 . The rerh bin :lll " lh,r wb » '" the 8en9e of '° 

llt i! bi.ir une MbOfl 1 £« ^ Jnjttjf have £*«« *«« ? 
fait Wtlr plus d B *"'"• 

, IV be need in the name sense before ita -wn InnnHhreH- 

•"^ 

L«.e.]fbUoMdbydirei8Med in the sense of to 



mean : — 



\es? 

! . 

,.r black coalM^ 

ll „ij your rloakl 

, 1 am afraid to take* 

Ehyou have ymr shoes mended? 



j.ii penr de l« 

DOtr I 

j,- ]<■ m 

POWQUOJ D fttl I WWI 1 - 

man - 

;, tv..i«l. j'ai peer de leeer. 

■ HTomin...l.r von sou 



Booermeehablta. Ihave ***%£*** 

[hire une rmre ' , of boots mm*. 



LESSON XXXII. 



103 



Je fain abuser un puits. 

Votre frere que veut il dire 1 

Que veut dir^. cela 1 

Cela ne veut rien dire. 

Otez vous vos souliers et vos bas 1 

Je n'ote ni les uas ni les autres. 
Le diner est pret ; le domestique va 

mettre le couvert. 
Voulez vous oter le couvert 1 

Je vais mettre le couvert. 
Je vais oter le couvert. 



J have a well dug. 

What does your brother mean ? 

What does that mean ? 

That means nothing. 

Do you take off your shoes and stock- 
ings ? 

I take off neither these nor those. 

Dinner is ready; the servant is 
going to lay the cloth. 

Will you take away the things ft on 
the table ? 

I am going to lay the cloth. 

I am going to take away the things. 



drm 



Exercise 61. 

Gat-er, 1, to spoil ; 
Gilet, m. waistcoat ; 
Grand, e, large, very ; 
Manteau, m. cloak ; 
Noir, e, black; 
Pantoufle, f. slipper; 
Pourquoi, why; 



1. to 



Pret, e, ready ; 
Raccommod-er, 

mend ; 
Tout-a-l'heure, 

ately ; 
Uniforme, m. uniform; 
Velours, m. velvet. 



Apothicaire, 

gist; 
Apres, after; 
Cave, f. cellar; 
Creus-er, 1. to dig ; 
Dimanche, m. Sunday i 
Diner, m. dinner; 
Fache, e, sorry, angry ; 

1. Le general N. met il son uniforme? 2. H ne le met point. 
3. Pourquoi ne portez vous point votre manteau noir ? 4. J'ai peur 
de le gater. 5. Mettez vous vos souliers de satin tous les matins? 
6. Je ne les mets que les dimanehes. 7. II est midi ; le domestique 
met il le couvert ? 8. II ne le met pas encore ; il va le mettre tout-a- 
l'heure. 9. Le diner n'est il pas pret? 10. Le domestique 6te-t-il 
le couvert? 11. II ne l'ote pas encore, il n'a pas le temps de l'oter. 
12. Otez vous votre habit quand vous avez chaud? 13. Je l'ote 
quand j'ai trop chaud. 14. Faites vous faire un habit de drap? 15. 
Je fais faire un habit de drap et un gilet de~satin noir. 16.' Ne faites 
vousj^int -raccommoder vos pantoufles de velours ? 17. Ne faites 
\£]^PP creuser une cave? 18. Je fais creuser une grande cave. 
19. L'apothicaire que veut il dire? 20. II veut dire qu'il a besoin 
d'argent. 21. Savez vous ce que cela veut dire? 22. Cela veut dire 
que votre frere est fache contre vous. 23. Avez vous envie de met- 
tre votre manteau ? 24. J'ai l'intention de le mettre, car j'ai grand 
froid. 25. Je vais l'oter, car j'ai chaud. 

Exercise 62. 
1. Do you take off your coat ? 2. I do not take off my coat, I put 
it on. S. Do you take off your cloak when you are cold ? 4. When 
I am cold I put it on. 5. Does your little boy take off his shoes and 
stockings ? [j 21, (4.)] 6. He takes them off, but he is going to put 
them on again (remeitre). 7. Does that little giH lay the cloth? 8. 



104 LESSON XXXIII. 

She lavs the cloth every day at noon (midi). 9. Do. s she take awaj 

the things after dinner? 10. She takes away the talnga every iay. 

11. Do yoa intend to have a coat made ? 12. I intend to have a coal 

mad- *13 I am going to have a co.it and a vest made. 14. Does 

your "brother have hifl boots mended! 15. He has them mended. 

16 W i 17. I do not know what he means. 

]8 ; Is ; , r With my brother? 19. He is neither 

ur brother. 20. Is he afraid to spoil his 

H. He is not oil it- 22. Doee tke droggiat want 

24. Has yuiir sisier taken 

36. Why 

do you i i off becauee they hart 

I to have a house built? 29. I in- 

tailor sju.il your e 

33. No person 
.. 1 wear a black hat. 



ill. XXXIII. 

■ 
1 '; :! . v in tlie tllird P ,-rs " n 

euta fro nou 

the termination of the el 

: .und In the personal form in the some j 62. 

3. J':::.-:.-.: Of N nnB *» 

I. • SHOW, it u 

G«k . i !Aaw - 

'. 

4 U . may be fol.owed oy a 

lingular 

U y »«lu rlbler an m 

II y « .arc appks in your £«rdM%. 



X X X 1 1 1. 



105 



5. In relation to the weather, the verb faire is used unipersonally 
in the same manner as the English verb to he. 



II fait beau temps aujourd'hui. 
II fait chaud, il fait iroid. 



It is fine weather to-day. 
It is warm, it is cold. 



Resume of Examples. 



Pleut il ce matin *? 

II ne pleut pas, il neige. 

II va pleuvoir ce matin. 

Ne gcle-t-il pas ce matin 1 

II ne gele pas, il fait du brouillard. 

Y a-t-il du sucre chez vous 1 

II y en a beaucoup chez mon frere. 

Y a-t-il plusieurs personnes chez 
moi 1 ? 

II y a plus de cent personnes. 

N'y a-t-il personne a. 1'eglise ? 

II n'y a encore personne. 

Est il trop tot 1 

Au contraire, il est trop tard. 

Fait il froid ou chaud aujourd'hui 1 

II fait chaud et humide. 

Fait il du vent ou du brouillard 1 

II fait un temps bien desagreable. 



Does it rain this morning ? 
It does not rain, it snows. 
It is going to rain this morning. 
Does it not freeze this morning ? 
It does not freeze, it is foggy. 
Is there any sugar at your house ? 
There is a great deal at my brother's. 
Are there several persons at my house ? 

There are more than one hundred 

persons. 
Is there nobody at church ? 
Tliere is as yet no one tliere. 
Is it too soon ? N 

On the contrary, it is too late. 
Is it cold or warm to-day ? 
It is warm and damp. 
Is it windy or foggy ? 
It is very disagreeable weather. 



Exercise 63. 

Assemblee, f. assembly, Convert, e, cloudy; Manuscrit, m. maniu- 

party; Ecurie, f. stable'; script; 

Bibliotheque, f .library ; Epais, se, thick ; Veau, m. veal ; ' 

Brouillard, m./og - ; Foin, m. hai/; Vent. m. wind ; 

Chambre, f. room; Gibier, m. game; _ Volaille, f. poultry. 

Cinquante, fifty ; Humide, damp ; 

1. Quel temps fait il aujourd'hui? 2. II fait un temps superbe. 
3. Fa'\ il tres beau temps aujourd'hui? 4. II fait un temps couvert 
et humide. 5. Pleut il beaucoup ce matin? 6. II ne pleut pas en- 
core, mais il va pleuvoir. 7. Fait il du vent ou du brouillard ? 8. II 
ne fait pas de vent. 9. Le brouillard est tres epais. 1C, Combien 
de personnes y a-t-il a l'assemblee? 11. II y a plus de deux cents 
[L. 20. 7.] personnes. 12. N'y a-t-il pas beaucoup de manuscrits 
dans votre bibliotheque? 13. II n'y en a pas beaucoup, il n'y en a 
que cinquante-cinq. 14. Fait il trop froid pour vous dans cette 
chambre? 15. II n'y fait ni trop froid ni trop chaud. 16. Y a-t-il 
beaucoup de foin dans votre ecurie? 17. II y en a assez pour mon 
cheval. 18. Restez vous a ia maison quand il pleut? 19. Quandil 
pleut je reste a la maison, mais quand il fait beau temps je vais choz 
mon cousin. 20. Y a-t-il de la viande au march© ? 21. II y en a 
6* 



106 LESSON XXXIV. 

beaut o up. il y a aussi du gibier. 22. II y a du venu, du mouton et 
de la volaille. 23. N'y a-t-il pas aussi des legumes et des fruita! 
24. II n'y en a pas. 25. II y en a aussi. 

Exercise G4. 

1. Are you cold this morning? 2. I am not cold, it is warm this 
morning. 3. Is it foggy or windy ! 4. it is neither foggy nor windy, 
it rains in toireute (<l verse). 5. Is it going to rain or to snow? 6. 
It is going to freeze, it is very cold. 7. It is windy and I'oggy. 8. 
Is then any body at your brother's Unlay .' 9. My brother is at 
nome, and my sister is .-it etiureh. 10. Is there any meat in the mar- 
ket ? ii. There hi meat and poultry. 1-. Is, it too warm or too 
cold, for your sifter, in this room? 13. It is not so warm in this 
room, as in your brother's library. 14. Are there good English 
books in your sister's lil.rary ? 15. There are some good ones. |& 
Are there peaches and plums in your garden .' 17. There are many. 
18. Do you remain at your brother's, when it SHOWS I 1!'. When it 
- we remain at home. 90. Are there ladies at your mother's/ 
21. Your two sisters are there to-day. 22. Ha\e you time to go 
and feteh r I have no time this morning. 21. Is your 

horee in the stable I 86. It ii not there, it is at my brother's* 26. 

,t hail this BOming .' -'. It does not hail, it freezes. 28. 

What weather is it this moningl 89. It is very fine weather. 

■ warm ? 81. It is neither tOO warm nor too cold. 32. 

X It is going to snow. 34. Does it snow 

lay ? 35. It does not snow every day, but it snows very often 

(ssSMMSf). 



OSSON wwiv. LB0OH XXXIV. 

Of iii i: auvkkii. ($ 136.) 

I. In simple tenses, the sdverb generally follows the wrb, and Is 

'■■ ■— 

Men. 
ti moiselle lit trta mal. IVuit young r% badly. 

■2. W .it n a verb il in the infinitive, tin- two negatives ne and pa% 

»*> r.id rien, should be fit ' \ — 

JVpaii parlcr, no pas lire. S'ot to tpeal, not to read. 



LESSON XXXIV. 107 

3. The adverb assez, enough, tolerably, precedes generally the 
other adverbs. It precedes also adjectives and nouns : — 

Vous ecrivez assez correctement. You write pretty correctly. 

Vous avez assez de livres. You have books enough. 

Cet enfant est assez attentif. That child is attentive enough. 

4. Voici means, here is ; voila, there is : — 

Voici le livi-e que vous aimez. Here is the book which you like. 

Voila le monsieur dont vous parlez. There is the gentleman of whom yov, 
■ speak. 

5. Dans is used for in or into, when the noun which follows it is 
preceded by an article, or by a possessive, demonstrative, or numeral 
adjective. [§ 142, (2.)] : — 

Le crayon est dans le pupitre. The pencil is in the desk. 

Mettez cette lettre dans votre malle. Put this letter into your trunk. 

6. En renders to, in, or into, coming after the verbs to be, to go, to 
reside, followed by the name of a^ part of the earth, a country, or 
province : — 

Notre ami est en France. Our friend is in France. 

Vous allez en Italie. You go to Italy. 

7. The preposition a. is used for the words at or to, in or into, be- 
fore the name of a town, city, or village, preceded by the verbs men- 
tioned above : — ^ 

II va a. Paris le mois prochain. He is going to Paris next month. 

8. The same preposition is used in the expressions, a la campagne, 
a la ville, a la chasse, a la peche, &c. 

Nous allous a la campagne. We go into the country. 

Vous n 'allez pas a la ville. You do not go to the city. 

Je vais a la chasse et a la peche. I go hunting and fishing. 

9. Indicative Present of the Irregular Verbs, 

Condui-re, 4. to conduct. Ecri-re, 4. to write. Li-re, 4. to read. 

Je conduis, I co'/iduct. do J'ecris, I write, do write, Je lis, I read, do read or 

conduct, or am con- or am writing ; am reading; 

ducting ; 

Tu conduis, Tu ecris, Tu lis, 

II conduit, II ecrit, II lit, 

Nous conduisons, Nons ecrivons, Nous lisons, 

Vous conduisez, Vous ecrivez, Vous lisez, 

lis conduisent. lis ecrivent. Us lisent. 

Kesume of Examples. 



Votre parent ecrit il bien 1 

II ecrit assez bien et assez vite. 

Nous avons assez de livres. 



Does your relation write weU ? 

He writes well enough and rapidly 

enough. 
We have books enough. 



108 



LESS03 XXXIV. 



Nous sommes assez attentifs a nos 

lerOTlS. 

Voila la demoiselle dont vous parlez. 

Votre cheval n'est il pas dans le 

champ 1 
II n'y est pas, il est dans le jardin. 
All'-/, vi 

• 
Oucoii.i m.-mmc'? 

Jo lo conduis en Allem 
Demeoi ■ illc ? 

Nona daaneurona ft la 
■ 

. pftcne. 



attentive enough to our let- 

the younc lady of whom yon 
speak. 
Is not your horse in the field ? 

i the garden. 
C . ' vet this year? 

Paris and to I. 

I i/ouiig man? 
I take hn: G 

Wc lire in the country. 



' Bnbae, f. Switzerland i 

ate i 

Couxmis, in. clerk; .irney. 

at encore U l - plus la mime, 

jVn ; , ut .' I. 11 

d'argent pour acbi mt, fnaia j'ai 

h\ re, en 
avez • 
vous i 

vous I i villa .' 19. II ne 

'. r-t-il i 
allcr ' 11 va 

i 

I'intention da 

.. ' Dm 

Milan ni I 
BaJajnl 

23. II ne dement Votre 

domes: I eat ft 1* cole. 

00. 
I, Does;, - :i 7 3. He write* toler- 

a\».y well, but not 8. Have j enottflfa 

in TOOI lil ■• it I intend to buy 

aomc more. 5. V. I 6. I 

intend to read it 7. Does your son like to go flailing? 8. He liken 



LESSON XXXV. 109 

to go fishing and hunting. 9. When does he like to go fishing 1 
10. When I am in the country. 11. What do you do when you are 
in the city ? 12. When I am in the city, I read and learn my lesson. 
13. Do you intend to go to France this year? 14. I intend to go to 
Germany. 15. Will you go to the city if it (s'iZ) rains? 16. When it 
rains I always remain at home. [R. 1.] 17. How many friends have 
you in the city? 18. I have many friends there. 19. Are there many 
English in France? 20. There are many English in France and in 
Italy (Italie). 21. Are there more English in Germany than in Italy? 
22. There are more English in Italy than in Germany. 23. Is it fine 
weather in Italy ? 24. It is very fine weather there. 25. Does it 
often freeze there ? 26. It freezes sometimes there, but not often. 
27. Does that young lady read as well as her sister? 28. She reads 
better than her sister, hut her sister reads better than I. 29^ Is there 
anyone at your house? 30. My father is at home. 31. Is your 
brother-in-law absent? 32. My brother-in-law is at your house. 
33. There is no one at home to-day. 



LESSON XXXV. LEgON XXXV. 

1. The indefinite pronoun on has no exact equivalent in Englisn. 
It may be rendered by one, we, they, people, &c, according to the 
context. On has, of course, no antecedent, and seldom refers to a 
particular person, [J 41, (4.) (5.) § 113.] : — 

On doit honorer la vertu. We should honor virtue. 

On nous apporte de l'argent. Money is brought to us, 

2. As may be seen in the last example, on is often the nominative 
of an active verb, which is best rendered in English by the passive 
[5113,(1.)]:- 

On dit que votre epouse est ici. It is said that your wife is here. 
On raconte des histoires singulieres. Singular histories are related. 
On recolte beaucoup de ble en Much wheat is harvested {grown) in 
France. France. 

3. Avoir lieu, answers to the English expression, to take place : — 
Cela a lieu tous les jours. That takes place every day. 

4. Au lieu de, answers to the English, instead of. The verb which 
follows it must, according to Rule 2, L. 21, be put in the infinitive: — 

Au lieu d'etudier, il jouo. Instead of studying, he plays. 



110 



LESSON XXXV. 



5. Devoir, to nice, is used before an infinitive, like tbe English Terb, 
lo be, to express obligation :— 

Je dois lui eciire demain. / Ml to writ* to Aim to-morrow. 

Noi devons y alkr demain. W *g* *m to-morrow. 

6 Reeevoir des nouvelles, means, to hear from :— 
Devcz vous recevoir da nouvclles Are you to hoar from your sister? 
de votre sceur. 

.ndr, r-rkr, answers to the English phrase, to hear of ol 

^ntenda vous souveut parler do Do you often hear ofyourfrwnds? 
vos amis 1 



Bt > mpi , m . 



m cUy 7 

: 
\ 



Que di- vill ° ^ 

jours 1 

ie cHose do i 



ami I 

UdoUw 

BOB Tcre. 
11 dame au lieu dc IBM 



\ i heard of hi 

"i Mm. 
j 

fUtet tits even- 

(Ml morning. 

I 

U . f tnstead of walking. 



1 Voiuappo 

MMMta Pas tOUS 

., : .....mdon 

la 7. 

demon fibl 

...d.t 

U.Quaod do.t DjoapMHTM 
vovag«- ' 12. On dit quil doit b MnnMNI lc mo.s prochain. IS. 



LESSON XXXVI. Ill 

Ce mariage a-t-il lieu aujourd'hui ou demain? 14. On nous dit qu'i] 
doit avoir lieu cette apres-midi. 15. II aura lieu a cinq heures et 
demie. 16. Avez vous envie de venir au lieu de votre frere? 17. 
Mon frere doit venir au lieu de notre cousin. 18. Avez vous l'in- 
tention de lui dire ce qu'il doit faire? 19. II sait ce qui. doit faire. 
20. Savez vous ce qu'on dit de nouveau? 21. On ne dit rien de 
nouveau. 22. Trouve-t-on beaucoup d'or en Califomie ? 23. On y 
en trouve beaucoup. 24. Y trouve-t-on aussi des diamants? 25. 
On n'y en trouve point, on n'y trouve que de' l'or. 

Exercise 68. 
1. What do people say of me? 2. People say that you are not 
very attentive to your lessons. 3. Is it said that much gold is found in 
Africa ? 4. It is said that much gold is found in California. 5. Do they 
bring you books everyday? 6. Books are brought to me [R. 2.] 
every day, but I have no time to read them. 7. What should one do 
(doit on faire) when one is sick ? 8. One should send for a physician. 
9. Do you send for my brother ? 10. I am to send for him this 
morning. 11. Do you hear from your son every day? 12.^1 hear 
from him every time that your brother comes. 13. Does the sale 
(yente, f.) take place to-day ? 14. It takes place this afternoon. 15, 
At what time Qieure) does it take place ? 16. It takes place at half 
after three. 17. I have a wish to go there, but my brother is sick. 
18. What am I to do ? 19. You are to write to your brother, who, 
it is said (dit on), is very sick. 20. Is he to leave for Africa? 21. 
He is to leave for Algiers. 22. Do you come instead of your father 1 
23. I am to write instead of him. 24. Does the concert take place 
this morning ? 25. It is to take place this afternoon. 26. Do you 
know at what hour? 27. At a quarter before five. 28. Is your 
brother coming ? 29. My brother is not coming, he has no time 
30. Are you angry with your brother ? 31.1 am not angry with 
him. 32. Is any thing new said? (Is there any thing new?) 33 
There is nothing new. 34. What is said of him ? 35. Nothing i 
said of him. 



LESSON XXXVI. LEQON XXXVI. 

REFLECTIVE VERBS. (§ 43, (6.) § 56.) 

1. A verb is called reflective or pronominal, when it is conjugated 
with two pronouns of the same person, i. e., the usual nominative 



112 LESSON XXX YL 

pronoun and the pronouns me, te, se, &c. [\ 56.] la these verbs tat 
subject is represented as acting upon itself: — 

Je m'applique d 1 etude. I apply (myself) to study. 

Je uie propose de voyager. I propose ^ .ravel, i. e. tl 

is my inUnlion to travel. 

In these verbs, the second pronoun is in fact only the objective 

pronoun direct or indirect, which, according to Rules 1 and 2, Lesson 

. before the verb. 

1. The reflective form of the verb, which is much more frequently 

n French than in English, often answers to the passive form 

so common in the latter language : — 

„ , . . ( That is <crn rren/ dan— literally, 

Celase -urs. ; , ;,,„, 

Cctte inarchantlise so vend i * amditt is rasilu sold. 

nient. tuutiM sells itself easily. 

\ l thus. 
Cela «e fait am*,. 

3. The verb se porter, literally to carry one's self, is used idiomati- 
cally for to do or to be in speaking of health : — 

// 
j.- i i . ; eeflL 

4. S'osseoir, [J ■■• ■ reflective verb: — 

V ■\,r s it s down. 

6. Se promnBff means !<> u.uk. t<> rrd. . && for pleasure, or health : — 

I 

Je DM I 

6. Marcher, all. r 'iify to tralk or to 
ride, when m the manner of progressing a— 

■u tcalk mus't 

I V on horseback and in a carrift. 

7. i '■■..:.. \ . : r or thk la v thb 

0c ro»T-E«, 1. to be or!? B'j ft o nl 

parte, J i \s, IsU down. 

: down) 
Tn M i Tu {>■ pr 

\..iis nuiis as 

:..nt. lis s'a 

8. The reflective pronouns in the imperative of .'eflcctive 



LESSON XXXVI. 



113 



follow Rule 4, of L. 27 and Rules 3, 4, of Lesson 28 and also, } 100. 

(30(3.):- 

Asseyons nous, asseyez vous. Let us sit down, sit down. 

Ne nous asseyons pas. Let us not sit down. 

Besum£ of Examples. 



A quoi vous appliquez vous 1 
Je m'occupe de mes affaires. 
Je m'adresse a mes amis. 
Vous adressez vous a votre pere. 
Je m'adresse alui [§ 100, (4.)] 
Comment se porte Monsieur votre 

pere 1 
II se porte passablement bien. 
Pourquoi ne vous asseyez vous pas 1 
Je m'assieds quand je suis fatigue. 
Je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir. 
Vous promenez vous tous les jours 1 
Je me promene en voiture au- 

jourd'hui. 
Vos amis se promenent ils a. cheval "? 
N'aimez vous pas a marcher 1 
J'aime beaucoup a aller a cheval. 
Aimez vous a vous prom ener'? 
Asseyons nous, s'il vous plait. 
Ne nous asseyons nous pas 1 
Ne nous asseyons pas, il est trop 

tard. 
Combien ce drap se vend il la* 

verge ? 
II se vend vingt-cinq francs le 

metre. 
Comment cela s'appelle-t-il 1 

Comment vous appelez [§ 49, (4.)] 
vous"? 



To what do you apply y „ 

I occupy myielfwith my ajfavi 

I apply to my friends. 

Do you apply to your father? 

I apply to him. 

How is your father ? 

He is tolerably well. 

Why do you not sit down, ? 

I sit down when I am weary. 

I have no time to sit down. 

Do you take a walk every day ? 

I lake a ride to-day (in a carriage). 

Do your friends take a ride? 

Do you not like walking ? 

I like riding much. 

Do you like walking {for pleasure) ? 

Let us sit down, if you please. 

Do we not sit down ? 

Let us not sit down, it is too late. 

How much is that cloth sold a yard ? 

It is sold twenty-Jive francs the 

metre. 
How is that called? What is the 

name of that ? 
What is your name ? How do you 

call yourself? 



Exercise 69. 

Banquier, m. banker ; Magnifique, magnificent; Pied, m. foot ; 
Comment, liow ; Matin, m. morning ; Port-er, to carry, wear ; 

Cheval, m. horse ; Mieux, better ; Quelquefois, sometimes; 

Drap, m. cloth; Oblige, e, obliged; Quitt-er, 1. to leave; 

Fatigue, e, weary, tired ; Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out ; Voiture, f. carriage. 

1. Comment ce monsieur s'appelle-t-il? 2. Je ne sais comment 
. s'appelle. 3. Cette dame ne s'appelle-t-elle pas L. ? 4. Non, 
Madame, elle s'appelle M. 5. Monsieur votre pere se porte-t-il bien 
ce matin ? 6. II se porte beaucoup mieux. 7. Fait il beau temps 
aujourd'hui? 8. II fait un temps magnifique, n'allez vous pas vous 



* The English a or an before a measure is rendered into French by the 
article le, or la, &c. 



114 LESSON XXXVII. 

promener ? 9. Nous n'avons ni cheval ni voiture. 10. Xe pouvez 
vous marcher? 11. Je suis trop fatigue pour marchei. IS. N'allez 
vous pas a cheval tous les matins? 13. Je me promcne tons lea 
matins. 14. Comment vous promenez vous ? 15. Quelquefois a 
pied et qnelquefoifl en voiture. 16. A qui vous adressez vousquand 
vous avcz besoin d'argeut ? 17. Je m'adreese a mon banquier' 
18. Nt voulez vous pas vous aaeeoir! 19. Nous vous soinmes bien 
obliges. 20. Ce drap >e vend il fort bien ! 21. II se vend fort eher. 
22. Ne devcz vous pas aller a la campagne, a'il fait beau temps? 
doit il quitter la villa aujourd'hui? 24. 11 doit partir 
Ma MBUr se prom.' ne tons Irs matins. 

sro. 

1. Does your sister walk every day 1 '2. She takes a walk every 
morning. 3. Sin- Like* riding 0D horseback and in a carriage. 

4. What is that link- girl railed .' 5. She is called L <>. Is not that 
gentleman called 1...' 7. No, Sir, he ia called (Land his cousin is 

called il. 8. How iayonr brother 1 '.'. fcty brother ia very well, bat 

well. 10. How are your two daaghtera 1 II. They 

day. 12. Will you not ait down, gentlemen 1 

It, \\ . art- much obliged to you. Madam, we have Dot time. 

•V Well. Ift II, .w is 

. (Tame) I 17. II 
Bneweatbet to>day1 19. I: hi very fine weather, will yon 

not take I walk I U<>. 1 |,a\.- no time to walk. 81. To whom doea 

your brother apply 1 brother. 88. fa his 

brother at horn.'' •_• I \... S:r. !>•• :- Bl I'.in- 86. When | 
Intend 1 intenda to go tO France in ono 

month. °7. Is your ftiater to Leave to-morrow mon 

I w hat >'.o people 

II. Are you too 

much htigned to wa ted, but I have 

to walk. 33. Do you like walking or riding 1 .''.J. I like 
riding, when 1 have a good bora* I not like walking. 



xxxvn. i. iv' a xxxvir. 

l. The reflective p ronoun poeaeaafea, lav 

live. In si;. .rliclo takea the 

place of this adjeotfvt 7, (9.)] 



LESSON XXXVII. 



115 



Vol J chauffez vous les pieds 1 Do you warm your feet ? 

Je me chauffe les mains et les pieds. / warm my hands and feet. 

2. Se souvenir [2. ir. See § 62.], se rappeler [§ 49, (4.)], correspond to 
ihe English verb to remember. Se rappeler takes a direct object, that 
is, no preposition intervenes between the verb and its object, if the 
same be a noun or a pronoun : — 

Vous rappelez vous ces demoisellesl Do you remember those young ladies ? 
Je ne me les rappelle pas. / do not remember them. 

3. Custom seems, however, to sanction the use of the preposition 
de between the verb se rappeler and an infinitive : — 

Nous ne nous rappelons pas d'en We do not remember having been de- 
avoir ete prives (Condillac). prived of it. 

4. Se souvenir, takes the preposition de before a noun or pronoun 
as well as before an infinitive : — 

Vous souvenez vous de cette affaire 1 Do you remember that affair ? 

Je ne m'en souviens pas. J do not remember it. 

Je me souviens de lui avoir ecrit. J remember having written to him. 

5. Se coucher, corresponds to the English verbs to retire, to go to 
bed :— 

Je me couche de bonne heure. I retire early. 

6. Se lever [§ 49, (6.)] means to rise, to get up : — 

Je me leve au point du jour. / rise at the break of day. 

Resume of Examples. 



Vous coupez vous les ongles 1 

Je me coupe les ongles et les che- 

veux. 
Vous coupez vous les doigts 1 
Je me coupe souvent les doigts, 

quand je taille ma plume. 
Vous rappelez [ty 49, (4.)] vous les 

malheurs du frere de votre ami 1 
Je me rappelle ses malheurs. 
Je me les rappelle distinctement. 
Je me rappelle de l'avoir vu. 
Vous souvenez vous de cela 1 
Je ne m'en souviens pas du tout. 
A quelle heure vous couchez vous 1 
Nous nous couchons tous les jours 

au coucher du soleil. 
Nous nous levons de meilleure heure 

que vous, — au lever du soleil. 
fl se leve a cinq heures du matin, et 

il se couche a dix hemes et de- 

nue du soir. 



Do you cut your nails ? 
I cut my nails and hair. 

Do you cut your fingers 7 

I often cut my fingers, when I merit* 

my pen. 
Do you remember the misfortunes of 

your friend's brother ? 
I remember his misfortunes. 
I recollect them distinctly. 
I remember having seen htm. 
Do you remember that ? 
I do not remember it at all. 
At what hour do you retire ? 
We go to bed every day at sunset. 

We rise earlier than you, — at sun- 
rise. 

He rises at five o'clock in the morn- 
ing, and goes to bed at half after 
ten in the evening. 



116 LESSON" XXXVII. 



Exercise 71. 

Associe, m. partner ; De meilleure heurc, rerruquier, m. .tan* 

J3ois, ru. wood; earlier; dm 

Boucher m. butcher ; Doigt m. finger; Pocle. m. I 

8e briil-er. 1. ref. to Per, m. iron; Poucc, in. thumb; 

burn one's self. W\\.\n. fire ; Promesse, f. promise: 

Charpentier, in. carpers Main, f. hand ; souvenir, to rcmem- 

ter. S'occuper, 1. to occupy bcr (see Venir, ^62.); 

IS:; chauffer, l. ref fo o;i<r'j self. ' TravaiD-er, 1. to work. 

warm one's self. ParfaiUuient, perfectly ; 

I. Le perruquicr se coupe-t-il le poucc ? 2. Non, Monsieur, il s*. 
coupe les chevenx, 3. Le eluurpentier ne *e coupe-t-il pas la main ! 
4. 11 ne B6 coupe pas la main, il coupe le bois. 5. Ne vous rappeloz 
vous pas eette dame ? 6. Je me rappelle eette dame et ees me>sicurs. 
7. De quoi vous occupc/. voua .' 8. Nuns nous OOCUpOM de nos af- 
- dee fusils qu*a votre para ? 10. Je 

ne in'en suuvions point da tout 1 I. Cette petite Bile ne M briilc-t- 
elle pas.' 12. Elle ne se bru'.e pas, il n'y a p:is de leu dan-, le | 

13. Poutquoi le boucher do se chauffe-t-il pas.' 14 Parcequ'fl n'a 

pas froid. 16. Cea ent'ants ae h'-vent ilfl de mrillcurc heure que Boil 
1G. lis se eouehent de bonne heure, ( leg matins a. 

six heurea 17. \ -coir.' IS. 11 n'a 

pas le tempi I <>s promes- 

p.irfaiteincnl. 81, Ne VOW cliaufTcz 

pea quad vow avw freed I --. Je ne me chaafle presqw j.i- 

imeil I 1 1. On ae 
couche quad on ■ eeameil, et on mange quad on ■ bint, i2j. 

Quai. ; de bonne h< «iuand 

On se portc bum, on doit (should) se lever de bonne heure. 

I, Do you rise early when you are well? 2. When I :im well, I 

rery morning at §ve o'clock. 3. Do you remember your eowin 
J . i. I remember bim perfectly well. 5. Do you go to bed early? 
6. We u r o to bed al ton o'clock. 7. Does not the tailor burn his 
fingers? 8. He does not burn liis lingers, his iron la not warm. 9. 
'■penter cut bia thumb ? 10. He cuts neither his thumb 
nor his hand. 11. Why do you not warm yourself 1 12. I do not 
warm myself, because 1 am not cold. 13. Is it not very cold to-day? 

14. It is not cold to-day, it rains. 15. Does your hair-dr 

aunrise I 16. The carpenter rises at nnnrJM bed at sun- 

aeL 17. Do you rise earlier than P 18. We riot ffrarj morning at 



LESSON XXXVIII. 117 

the break of day. 19. Do you cut your hair often 1 ? 20. I cut my 
nair and my nails evory month. 21. Do you remember that gentle- 
man ? 22. I remember him very well. 23. I do not remember him. 
24. Do you jut your fingers when you mend a pen ? 25. I cut my 
hand when I work. 26. Do you remember what you learn ? 27. I 
do not remember all that {tout ce que) I learn. 28. Do you know if 
your father is well ? 29. He is very well to-day. 30. Is not your 
mother well? 31. She is not very well. 32. Do you remember 
your friend's misfortunes 1 33. I remember them. 34. I remember 
that. 



lesson xxxvm. LEgcw xxxvm. 

1. The verb tromper, conjugated actively, corresponds to the Eng- 
lish verb to deceive : — 

II trompe tout le monde. He deceives every body. 

2. Conjugated reflectively, se tromper means to be mistaken ; lite- 
rally, to deceive one's self: — 

On se trompe bien souvent. One is often mistaken. 

3. Ennuyer, [5 49, (2.)] used actively, means to weary the mind, tc 
lease, to bore : — 

Cet homrae ennuie ses auditeurs. That man wearies his hearers. 
Vous nous ennuyez par vos de- You tease, or weary us by your ques- 
tions. 



4. S'ennuyer has no exact correspondent in English. It signifies 
generally, to be or to become mentally weary of any thing or place : — 

Nous nous ennuyons ici. We are weary of being here. 

Vous ennuyez vous a la campagne "? Are you weary of being in the country ? 

Je m' ennuie partout. I find no amusement anywhere. 

5. Je m'ennuie means in fact, lam mentally weary, I want change, 
amusement, occupation, &c. : — 

6. S'amuser, answers to the English expressions, to amuse one's self 
to take pleasure in, to spend one's lime in, to find amusement in, to 
enjoy one's self: — 

Nous nous amusons a. la campagne. We enjoy oursaves in the country. 
Vous vous amusez a des bagatelles. You spend youi time in trifles. 

Resume of Examples. 



On se trompe souvent soi-meme en 

cherchant a tromper les autres. 
Votre commis ne se trompe-t-il pas 1 
U so trompe bien rarement. 



We often deceive ourselves while seek- 
ing to deceive others. 
Is not your clerk mistaken 1 
He is very rarely mistake*. 



118 LESSON XXXVIII. 



Ne vous trompez vous pas frequein- 

mont 1 
Tout le monde est sujet a se trom- 

per. 
Ce marchandtrompetoutle monde. 
Sa conversation nous ennuie. 
Vous ennuyez vos amis par vos 

plaint< >. 
Est-ce que je ne vous ennuie pas 1 



Are you not ft tquently mistaken? 

Every one is cpt to be mistaken. 

That merchant deceives every body. 

His conversation wearies us. 

You weary your friends by your am 

plaints. 
Do I not wean/ uou ? 



Vous ennuyez vous cues nous ? weary of remaining with us? 

Je lu'cnuuica la ville et je m'amuse I become iceanj of the city and Jiud 

a. la eampagne. ] amusement in the country. 

A quoi TOM amuses vous? / ■),/! do you amuse ymaself? 

Je m'amuse a lire l'allemand. • I amuse myself m reading German. 

Exercise 7'^. 

Apprond-re. 4. ir. to Entond-re, 4. to heir ; Quand 

learn ; Ennuyer, 1. See $ 49. (2.) Quelquefoia, sometimes ; 

Baoqmier, m. banker; Lant;r EUo-evoil, 3. to receive; 

Client, m. client, cus- Maude, sick ; Rev-enir, 2. ir. to come 

tomer ; Klemoire, in. bill; baek ; 

Demenr-er, 1.1 I or, 1. to prefer; Tromp-er, 1. to deceive. 

1. Aimez vous ademcurer ;i la eampagne .' 3. .!<• pretere la cam- 
la ville. 3. Vous ennuyez vous souvent a la eampagne ? 
4. Quand je in'ennuii' : .\ la eampagne, je reviens a la ville. 6. Recoit 
mveUes da General L .' <;. On o'entend pu parler dfi lui. 
IS quelquefois? 8. Tout le monde se trompe 
quelquefoia, 9. Le benqnier Lrompe-t-il sea clients'? 10. II ne 
trompe in at* ■ - amia, il m trompe paanonaa. II. Ne 

vouatrompai roue pea dans <■«• memoirel 12. Je ne mc trompe pas. 
13. Voua amuaes Torn a lire on .1 satire 1 14. Je m'amuse a ap- 
prendre l'allemand et le t"r.in<;:iis. 15. Aval TOO! tort d'apprendre 

lee languea-1 i«J. J'ai paiaoa da lee apprendre. 17. Vous ennuyez 

.'. «-nt .' 1H. Je m'ennuic quand je n'ai Hen a faire. 19. A 
quoi vuns smuaes roue quand vous fetes .1 la eampagne ! 20. Nous 
nous promenons le matin, et nous travail Ions le reate de la journee 
21. Vous portez vous toujoura bien? 22. Nous sommes quelque- 
fois malades. 23. Envoyez vous chcrcher le medecin ? 24. Nous 
Penroyona eherrher. 26. Je vaia le onaronar. 

Exercise 71. 

1. Are you not mistaken? 2. I am not mistaken. 3. Is not the 
banker mistaken ? 4. He is not mistaken, but his clerk is certainly 
(cerlainemenl) mistaken. 5. Does lie not deceive you? 6. He does 
not deceive me, he deceives nobody. 7. Are you not wrong to de- 
ceive your father? 8. I do not intend to deceive him. 9. Does not 



LESSON XXXIX. 119 

tne merchant make a mistake? 10. He makes a mistake in the bill 
which he writes. 11. Do you like the country or the city? 12. I 
prefer the city ; I soon become weary of the country. 13. Does not 
that child weary you by his questions ? 14. Does not that long story 
(recit, m.) weary you? 15. It does not weary me, it amuses mo. 
16. Do you amuse yourself when you are in the country? 17. I 
amuse myself, I learn French and Italian. 18. Are you not weary 
of remaining at your uncle's? 19. I am never weary of remaining 
there. 20. Is your brother often mistaken? 21. Every body is 
sometimes mistaken. 22. Does his conversation weary you? 23. 
On the contrary, it amuses us. 24. Is your brother heard from ? 
25. Nothing is heard of him. [L. 35.] 26. Is your sister well ? 27. 
No, Sir, she is sick. 28. Do I weary you ? 29. You do not weary 
me. 30. Ami mistaken? 31. You are not mistaken. 32. Is he 
often mistaken ? 33. He is often mistaken. 34. Do ycu not rise 
late ? 35. No, Sir, I rise early. 



LESSON XXXIX. LEgON XXXIX. 

1. The reflective verb, se passer, is used idiomatically in the sen 99 
of to do without. It is followed by the preposition de, when it 
comes before a noun or a verb : — 

Vous passez vous de ce livre 1 Do you do without that book ? 

Je ne puis m'en passer. p / cannot do without, it. 

2. Se servir [2. ir. see § 62.], to use, also requires the preposition 
de before its object :-r— 

Je me sers de votre canif. J use your penknife. 

Je ne m'en sers pas. J do not use it. 

3. The second example of the two rules above, shows that, when 
the object of those verbs is a thing, it is represented in the sentence 
by the pronoun en*: — 

Je m'en sers, je m'en passe. J use it, I do without it. 

4. The pronoun* used as indirect object of a reflective verb, if rep- 
lesenting a person, follows the" verb \_\ 100, (4.)] : — 

Je puis me passar de lui. I can do without hipi. 

" Je m'adresse a vous et 5 elle. I apply to you and to Iter. 

5. S'endormir [2\ ir. see \ 62.] ; to fall asleep, an 1 s'eveiller, to 
awake, are also reflective. 

* The rule does not apply to the reflect' ve pronoun, which is some- 
times an indirect object. 



120 



LESSON XXXIX. 



Je m'endors aussitot que je me I fall asleep as soon as I go to bed. 

couche. 
Je m'oveille a six heures du matin. / awake at six o'clock in the morning, 

6. S'approcher, to come near, to approach ; s'eloigner, to draw back, 
to leave, take the preposition de before a noun. Their object, when 
a pronoun, is subject to Rules 3 and 4 above : — 

Votre fils s'approche-t-il du feu 7 Docs your son draw near the fire? 

II ne s'eu approehe pas. He does not come near it. 

II s'eloigne de moi et de vous. He goes from mc and from you. 



B of Examples. 



Vous servez vous de ce coutcau ? 
Je ne m'en sers pas, il ne coupe pas. 
De quels coutcaux vous sen . 
Nous nous servons de OOOtoMU 

d'acier. 
Pouvez vous vous passer d'argentl 
Nona ne poavona notm en pernor 

Vous pa-.se/. vous ilr voire ln.'iit r<- ? 

Nona nous pu.s.Miiis de lui. 

VoUMl'Iresv/. Volls;.. • 

Nous imiis a.lre.ssotis a eux et a. 

fkefletneat 

Je in i'Vi -ill.' d .lire. 

Pourquol vous approchea vous du 

feu I 

•i approeh* parcequo j'ai 

froi.l. 
Nous nous tloifDOOl ilu f> ii. 

Nolls ; -Lis. 

Nous nous uppioehons do notre 
Nous nous approchons de lui. 



Do you use that knife 7 

I do not use it, it does not cut 

nircs do you use? 
We use sir, I knives. 

Con you do without money? 

lot do without it. • 
Do yon do without your teacher ? 

■thout him. 
Do you apply to those gentlemen? 
We apply t" them and to you. 

I tatUff. 

J air ale v< -y early. 

Why do you come near the fire 1 

1 or it because J am cold. 

'm the fire. 
om it. 
We go near aur father. 

We go near him. 



Exercise 75. ■ 

Aussi. also; Encre, f. ink ; Ordinaircment, 

—que, as soonFentlrc. f. window* ally; 

as; Pen m.firr; Plume, f. pen ; | 

Canif. m. penknife ; Pourchette, f. fork i I'mirquoi. why; 

lie, young lady, Hi-ure. !* hour, o'clock; Pr6t-er, 1. to tend { 

Domestique, m. .vr-Moins, lea, btftrti Quart, m. quarter ; 

rani; Oblige, o. oiUgedi Taill-er, 1. to mend. 

1. Ponvez vous rov 'ere I 2. Nous pouvons nous en 

:ous n'avons lien a tain. 3. Vous senez vous de votre 
plume ? 4. Je M m'en sers pas ; en avez VOU8 besoin I 5. No voulez 
vous pas vous approcher ilu leu ? 6. Je vou- suifl bien oblige, je n'ai 
pas froid 7. Pourquoi ces demoiselles B'eloigMOt ellcs de la fen»V 
tre! 8. Elles e'en eloignent parcequ'il y fait trop froid. 9. Ce« 
enfant* ne s'adreasent ils paa i vous? 10. He s'adreaeent a mol 



IES80N XL. 121 

et a mon frere. 11. A quelle heun vous eveillez vous le matin? 
12. Je in'evcille ordinairemcnt a. si 1 : hcures nioins un quart. 13. 
Vous levez vous aussitot que vous vous eveillez ? 14. Je me leve 
aussitot que je m'tsveille. 15. De quels livres vous servez vous ? 

16. Je me sers des miens et des votres. 17. Ne vous servez voua 
pas de ceux de votre frere? 18. Je m'en sers aussi. 19. Les plumes 
dent [L. 31. R. 8,] vous vous servez sont elles bonnes ? 20. Pour- 
quoi votre ami s'eloigne-t-il du feu? 21. II s'en eloigne parcequ'il 
a trop chaud. 22. Pourquoi votre domestique s'en approche-t-il ? 
23. II s'en approche pour se chauffer. 24. Vous ennuyez vous ici ? 
85. Je ne m'ennuie pas. 

Exercise 76. 
1. Will you lend me your penknife ? 2. I cannot do without 
>t, I want it to mend my pen. 3. Do you want to use my book ? 
4. I want to use it, will you lend it to me ? 5. What knife does, 
your brother use ? 6. He uses my father's knife and my brother's 
fork. 7. Will you not draw near the fire ? 8. We are much obliged 
to you, we are warm. 9. Is that young lady warm enough? [L. 34, 
3.] 10. She is very cold. 11. Tell her (diles lui) to come near the 
fire? 12. Why do you go from the fire? 13. We are too warm. 
14. Does your brother leave the window? 15. He leaves the win- 
dow because he is cold. 16. To whom does that gentleman apply ? 

17. He applies to me and to my brother. 18. Why does he not ap- 
ply to me? 19. Because he is ashamed to speak to you. 20. Do 
you awake early every morning? 21. I awake early, when I go to 
bed early. 22. Why do you go to sle,ep ? 23. I go to sleep because 
I am tired. 24. Are you afraid to go near your father? 25. I am 
not afraid to approach him. 26. Can you do without us? 27. We 
cannot do without you> but we can do without your brother. 28. 
Do you want my brother's horse? 29. No, Sir, we can do without 
it. 30. Do you intend to do without money? 31. You know very 
well that we cannot do without it. 32. Is your brother weary of 
being here ? 33. He is not weary of being here. 34. Come near 
the fire, mv child. 



LESSON XL. LEQON XL. 

1. The verb aller (1. ir. \ 62.), conjugated reflectively, and pre- 
ceded by the word en, i. e. s'en aller, corresponds to the English ex- 
pTew»ion8 to go away, to leave: — 
6 



122 



LESSON XL 



2. Indicative Present of the Verb s'en Aller, to Go awat 

Je m'en vais, / sv away j Nous nous en al- We go away; 

Tu t'en vas, Thau art going Ions. 

away; Vous vous en allez, Yon are going 

H s'en ra, He goes away ; a way .• 

lis s'en vont. T/4cy go awuy. 

3. Thi same Tense Conjugated Interrogatively. 

Est-ce que jc m'en Z>o I go away 7 Nous en allons Do we go away? 

vais 7 nous 7 

T'en vas tu7 .Art f«W ^y/'/i^ Vous en allez Do you go away? 

away? v«>us 7 Are they going 

S'en va-t-in Is he going away ? S'en vont ils? away) 

4. Se facher, /o be or become angry, requires the preposition contre 
or de before the noun or pronoun following it : — 

Se fichc-t-il contre votrc fnirc 7 Does he become angry against jomt 
brother 7 
He him. 

: angry al nothing. 

6. Se rtjouir, to rejoice, is followed by the p-vposition d«: — 
Je me rtjoui- de retro l"iilicnr. / rejoiet at your kapptmtu. 

pbire [4. ir. in \ 88,] to take pleasure, to delight in anything 
to like to be in a place, |*Ju I object : — 

Je me plais a la earapagne. / like to be in the e/mntiy. 

Je DM plais a ctudier, a 1 i r i ■ . I take pleasure in st inlying, in reading, 

7. Se depecher, se hater, to make haste, take de before their or> 
>ct:— 

Dfipeehez TOM tie finir von lemons. Matt haste to finish yo 
Pourquoi no vous depiche;'. v<>us j>as7 Why tin you iu4 make haste 1 



H se ficlie contro lui. 
Vous vous ffiehez dun rien. 



to mart-hand s'en va-t-il aujour- 

d'hui I 
Nous nous en allons dentin 
Je m'en vais qnaodje sob 

Pottranoi row Achea vona oootra 

lui! 
II se plait d jouer, il D'ttodk j.v 

niais. 
Tom plaisez vous cbe* ffM parents I 

De quoi vous rekmiaaes \«>nsl 
Nous nous rejooJsBons de rotre 
succes. 

ns m rMotnaMOS. 
Pourqvol row depochez vous 7 
Nous nous dgpdchous d'ecrtro. 
Nous notM plaisons en Angleterro. 
Nona do nous plaisons pas d Taxis. 



vierrhant go away let-dam? 

■ tnth him 7 

treasure inpuiying, \* nevm 

'■'.e to be at your relations' f 
At what I 

^ess. 

i! 

II 

MV n-.aki 

We like to be in England. 

Wt do not, like U> bt in Paris. 



LESSON XI* 



123 



Nous ne nous y plaisons pas. 
Vous plaisez vous a. New York? 
Nous iious y plaisons. 



We do not like to be there. 

Do yon like to be in New Y01 k ? 

We like to be there. 



Exercise 77. 



Ambassacleur, m. am- Jouer, 1. to play, Prochain, e, next ; 

bassador; Malheur, m. misfortune; Retourn-er, 1. to return; 

Anivce, f. arrival; Mieux, belter t - Semaine, f. week; 

Autrui, m. others; Midi, noon; Tante, f. aunt; 

Cour-ir, 2. ir. to run ; Parceque, because; Turc, turque, Turkish. 

Jamais, never; 

1. Vous en allez vous bientdt? 2. Je m'en vais la semaine pro- 
chaine. 3. Pourquoi vous en allez vous ? 4. Parceque je ne me plais 
pas ici. 5. Vous plaisez vous mieux chez votre tante qu'ici ? 6. Je 
m'y plais mieux. 7. N'avez vous pas tort de vous en aller si tot ? 
8. J'ai raison de m'en aller. 9. Ne vous rejouissez vous pas des mal- 
heurs d'autrui? 10. Nous ne nous en rejouissons point. 11. Cet 
homme se fache-t-il contre le jardinier? 12. II se fache contre lui parce 
qu'il ne veut pas se depecher. 13. Se fache-t-il bien souvent? 14.11 
se fiche a. tout moment, il se fache d'un rien. 15. Ne vous depechez 
vous jamais? 16. Je me depeche toujours quand j'ai quelque chose a 
faire. 17. Ne vous plaisez vous pas a. courir et a. joue*r? 18. Je me 
plais a jouer et mon frere se plait a lire. 19. Vous rejouissez vous 
de Parrivee de l'ambassadeur turc? 20. Je m'en rejouis. *21. Ne vous 
plaisez vous pas en Amerique ? 22. Je m'y plais beaucoup mieux 
qu'en France. 23. Votre ecolier ne se plait il pas chez vous ? 24. II 
se plait chez moi, mais il desire retourner chez son pere. 25. Depe- 
chez vous, il est deja midi. 

Exercise 78. 

1. At what hour does your friend go away? 2. He goes away 
every morning at nine o'clock. 3. Do you go away with (avec) him ? 
4. I go away with him when I have time. 5. Will you make haste 
to finish your letter? 6. I make haste to finish it. 7. Does the gar- 
dener get angry with his brother? 8. He gets angry against him when 
he does not make haste. 9. Make haste, my friend, it is ten o'clock; 
10. Why do you not make haste? 11. 1 like to play, but I do not like 
to study. 12. Do you like to stay at my house ? 13. I like to stay 
there. 14. Are you rejoiced at the arrival of your mother? 15. I 
rejoice at it. 16. Is not your brother wrong to go away so soon ? 
17. He is right to go away, he has much to do at home. 18. Do you 
rejoice at other people's misfortunes? 19. I do not rejoice at them. 
20. I rejoice at your success. 21. Does not your brother draw near 
the fire? 22. He goes from the fire, he is too warm. 23. Does that 



124 LESSON XL I. 

young lady get angry against you? 24. She gets angry at trirles (da 
rlni). 25. Do you like to be in Paris? 26. I like to be there. 27. 
Can you do without me to-day ? 28. We cannot do without you — 
make haste to finish your work (overage). 29. Do you want your 
penknife? 30. I want to use it. 31. Make haste to rise.it is six 
o'clock. 32. Is it line weather? 33. No, Sir, it rains. 34. Is your 
father well this morning? 35. Yes, Sir, he is very well. 



LESSON XLL LECON XLL 

THE l'AST INDEFINITE. \ij 121.] 

1. The past indefinite is composed of the present of the indicative 
of one of the auxiliary verbs, avoir and itre [\ 45, (8.)], and the par- 
ticiple past of a verb. See the different paradigms of verbs, } 47 and 
following sections: — 

J'ai parlc, Je Miis aniv6. 1 t spoken, I am arrived. 

2. The past Indefinite is used to express an action entirely com- 
pleted, but performed tl I time of which a part is not yet elapsed, 
or at ■ time entirely peat, but not specified. [) 121, (1.) (2.)]: — 

J'ai vii vntre pen OB matin. I hair fin vnur father this warning. 

Je tie vuii-. ii u 16. / hare met yet spoken to you. 

3. The past Indefinite may also be used, when the time is sped- 
Je lui ai terrl la Bemetne dernlere. / wr et e to him last ireek. 

Je lui ai cuviiVl uiir Litre k' mois / sent him. a Utter last month. 

dernier. 

4. In this tense and in other compound tenses, the adverb is gene- 
rally placed between the auxiliary and the participle [} 13(i, (30]*— 

Vous nous avez smivent parld. You hair often spoken to us. 

Je ne l'el pee encore yu. I ha him. 

5. The adverbs aujourd'hui, tit-day; demain, tu-morrow ; hier, yester- 
day; polysyllabic adverbs of manner ending in merit, and long ndverba 
generally, do not come between the auxiliary and the participle, but 
follow Rule 1. L 34. See | 136, (5.):— 

Vous avc7. hi deniiereiiH nt. Yem read lately. 

6. The udpenonaJ verb y avoir, [L. 33. II. 3. 4,] placed before a 
word expressing time, eorreeponda with the Englieh word, eve; — 

ii line lcttrc. il y ■ huit jours. / received a letter eight days ago. 
\ '..us ,i\ez taheM uuc mauiou, il y a You ln/ug/U a House a year ago. 
uo an. 



LESSON XLI. 



125 



Resume of Examples. 



Vos neveux nous ont parle. 
Nous avons parle a votre pore. 
Le tailleur a-t-il fait raon habit 1 
Le boulanger a mis son chapeau. 
Le cordonnier a ote ses souliers. 
Votre f'rcre a dit quelqne chose. 
Votre soeur qu'a-t-ellc dit 1 
N'avez vous rien dit a mon cousin ' 
Je ne lui ai rien dit. 
Je ne l'ai jamais rencontre. 
Je ne leur ai jamais parle. 
Qu'avez vous fait aujourd'hui? 
Hier, nous n'avons pas travaille. 

[$130.] 
Leur en avez vous souvent parle 1 

Je leur en ai souvent parle. 
Je ne le leur ai pas encore dit. 

N'avez vous pas assez ecrit 1 
II m'a ecrit, il y a longtemps. 
II nous a repondu, il y a un mois. 



Your nephews ipok: to us. 

We spoke 10 your fallter. 

Has the tailor viacL? my coat ? 

Tiie baker has put on his hat. 

Tiie shoemaker has taken his shots off. 

Your brother said something. 

What did your sister say? 

Have you told my cousin nothing 7 

I have told him nothing. 

I have nevx.. "*t him. 

I never spoke to l/iem. 

Wlial have you done to-day ? 

We did not work yesterday. 

Have you often spoken to Uicvi about 

it? 
I have often spoken to them about it. 
I have not yet said any thing to them 

about it. 
Have you not written enough ? 
He uvole to vie a long time ago. 
He replied to us a month ago. 



Avocat, m. barrister; 
Cela. ceci. thai, this ; 
Dit, from dire, said; 
Etudi-er, 1. to study; 
Gant, m. glove; 



Exercise 79. 

Garcon, m. boy ; 
Hier, yesterday ; 
Journee, f. day; 
Lu. from lire, read ; 
Ministre, m. minister ; 



Mis,/?w/i mettre, put on 
Plant-er, 1. to plant; 
Poirier, m. pear-tree ; 
Soulier, m. shoe ; 
Vu, from voir, seen. 



1. Qui vous a dit cela? 2. L'avocat me l'a dit. 3. Lui avez vous 
parle de cette affaire? 4. Je ne lui en ai pas encore parle. 5. L'avez 
vous vu dernierement ? 6. Jel'ai vu il y a quelques jours. 7. N'avez 
vous pas ecrit hier? 8. Nous avons lu et ecrit toute la journee. [L. 
26, (9.)] 9. N'avez vous pas ote vos gants et vos souliers? 10. Je 
n'ai pas ote mes gants, mais j'ai ote mon chapeau. 11. Le tailleur 
n'a-t-il pas mis son chapeau? 12. Oui, Monsieur, il a mis son cha- 
peau. 13. Qu'avez vous fait a. ce petit garcon ? 14. Je ne lui ai rien 
fait. 15. Ne lui avez vous point dit que je suis ici ? 16. Je ne le lui 
ai pas encore dit. 17. Qu'avez vous etudie ce matin ? 1 8. Nous avons 
etudienosleconset nous avons lu nos livres. 19. Le jardinier du mi- 
nistre a-t-il plante le poirier ? 20. II l'a plante :1 y a plus de huit jours. 
21 Avez vous achete un habit de drap noir? 22. J'en ai achete un. 
23. L'avez vous porte aujourd'hui ? 24. Je ne l'ai pus encore porte. 
25. Nous avons mis nos souliers et nos bas ce matin. 

Exercise 80. 
1. Have you studied to-day? 2. We have no time to study, we 



126 LESSON XL II. 

have read a page. 3. Have you not written to my brother ? 4. 1 
have not yet written to him. 5. Has not the German written to my 
mother? 6. He has not yet written to her. 7. Have you told (.1) 
my mother that I have taken (pris) this book ? 8. I have not yet 
Been your mother. 9. What have yon done this morning 1 10. We 
have done nothing. 11. Have you taken off your coat .' 12. I have 
not taken off my coat, it is too cold. 13. Has the bookseller ivriU 
ten to your brother ? 14. He wrote to him a long time ago. 15. 
Did he write to him a month ago ? 10. He wrote to him more than 
a year ago. 17. II..,e you planted a pear-tree . ? IS. We have planted 
several. 19. Is it too cold to (jxrnr) plant tree* I 20. It is too warm. 
21. What has the gardener done to your little boy 1 513. He has done 
nothing to him. 23. Has any one done any thing to him? 24. No 
one lias done any thing to him. 25. Is any thing the matter with him ? 
20. Nothing is the matter with him. 27. Has your father put on his 
black ball 38, No, Sir, he has not put on hia black hat. 39. What 
has yum brother said 1 80. Ho has said nothing. 31. Has your sit- 
ter told you lh.it ! :*2. She told it me. 33. Did you not work yes- 
terday .' 34. We did not work yesterday, we had nothing to do. 

35. Your little boy has done nothing to-day. 



LESSEN XLII. LE0ON XLII. 

TIIK TAST rAHTICHU.K. [$ 134.] 

1. The past participle, which in French forms a pnrt of every COBS* 
pound t. |] i^ susceptible <>f changes In its termination. 

2. The student will find in the table of the terminatioi 
regular r< '.rent changes which the past participle 
of those verbs undergoes. The feminine terminations of the past 
partii iple of the irregular verbs, will be found in the alphabetical 

table, 

3. The teal letter of the feminine termination is always an i mute. 

4. The plura. of i p.i^t participle not ending with nn r, i- formed 
by the addition of that letter t<> the singular, masculine or femi- 
nine. 

"). Tin' participle past, arooropi luxiliary avoir, Bevel 

agrees with the nominative or subject [ij 134, (3.)]: — 

Let demolacuea out i ;"i- r l*dtn ■ 

Ces messieurs ont lu toute la journcc. Those gentlemen read Uu tckoU day. 



LESSON XIII. 



127 



6. The participle past, having etre as its auxiliary, assumes in its 
termination the gender and number of the subject [§ 134, (2.)] * — 

Ma fille est arrivee ce matin. My daughter arrived this morning 

Nos freres ne sont pas venus. Our brothers are not come, 

7. The participle, accompanied by the auxiliary avoir, agrees in 
gendei and number with its direct object or regime direct, [5 2, (2.) 
J 42, (4 )] when that object precedes it [§ 134, (4.)] :— 

Les dames que nous avons vues. The ladies whom we have seen. 
Les lettres que nous avons lues. The letters which we have read. 

8. When the regime direct or objective (accusative) follows the 
participle, no agreement takes place [§ 134, (5.)] : — 

Avez vous vu les dames 1 Have you seen the ladies ? 

Avons nous lu les lettres 1 Have we read the letters ? 

9. A participle past never agrees with its regime indirect, or indi- 
rect object (dative or ablative) [§ 2, (3.) § 42, (5.)] : — 

Les dames a. qui nous avons parle. The ladies to whom we have spoken. 

10. The participle past used adjectively, that is, without an aux 
iliary follows the rule of the adjective, [{ 66, (3.) § 134, (1) | :— 

Des livres bien imprimes. Well printed books. 

11. The participle, preceded by the relative pronoun en, remains 
invariable, although the en should relate to a feminine or plural 
noun [j 135, (7.)] :— 



Avez vous apporte des plumes 1 
J'en ai apporte. 



Have you brought pens 1 
I have brought some. 



12. The presence of en does not, however, prevent the agreement 
of the participle, when it is preceded by a direct regimen [§ 135, 
(7-)] :- 
Les plumes que j'en ai apportees. The pens which I have brought from it. 



Resume of Examples. 



Vos soeurs ont elles ecrit 1 
Elles n'ont pas encore ecrit. 
Les lettres que nous avons ecrites. 
Avez vous ecrit vos lettres 1 
Je les ai lues, je les ai ecrites. 
Les avez vous apportees 1 
Jc ne les ai pas apportees. 
Avez vous appele ces dames 1 
Je ne les ai pas appelees. 
Qui avez vous vu ce matin ? 
Nous avons vu ces demoiselles. 
Nous les avons vues. 
Nous ne leur avons pas parle. 
^vez vous des livros relies 1 



Have your sisters written ? 

T/iey have not yet written. 

Tlie letters which we have written. 

Have you written your letters ? 

I have read them, I liave written [hem. 

Have you brought them ? 

I have not brought tliem. 

Have you called those ladies ? 

I have not called them. 

Whom have you seen this morning? 

We have seen those young ladies. 

We have seen them. 

We have not spoken to them. 

Have you bound book: ? 



128 



LESSON LZIL 



J'ai des livres brocMs. 

Avez vons achcte des pommes ~ 
J'en ai achcte. 
Nous en avona achcte. 
Nous les en avoas persuades. 



/ have unbound (stitched, in papa 

covers.) bunks. 
Have y<>u bought apples? 
I have bought stime. 

bought some. 
persuaded them of it. 



Exercise 81. 

Atliet-er, 1. to buy. [<j49, Donn-er, 1. to girc ; Gard-cr, 1. to keep; 

Dit. from Dire, 4. ir. G ravu re. f. engraving t 
Oub!i-er, 1. to f<< 

Ajipcl-er, l.tocall. [\>49, Entendre. 4. to hear ; Itcc-cvoir, 3. to receives 

(1 ] Examin-cr, 1. to exam- Reli-er. 1. to Hud ; 

1 Kvrims, m. p. incomet 

7 031 ; '1 

1. to break; Xu./rom voir. 3. ir. seen. 
Commission, f. errand; 

vousapporte nos habits ! -2. Nous ne les avons paa 
encore >] i. Nona ne les avoni 

pas ouLlies, mais nous n'avons pas en le tempa Je les apportar. 6 
Pourquoi - marchands? G. Je lesai appcles, 

mais its ne m' ndo cette uiu- 

ajgne ? v 

que j'ai I voua don- 

one, jo les ai 

.-. ires? 13. Je les ni 
bien cx.-unin '<■-«. 11 ! s ai point 

. 
16 a-t-clle W— 6 ccs tasses? 

Llle ii'i ; '.ivres re« 

B 1. Nous avez 
vous dil . ■ . :.. £g vous lea 

avez onbtieea. mmission. 

icise 82. 

I. Have you seen • 2. I have nol tbjOB, 3. 

Have you bfOl Q them, I 

have left ' r mother called 

:' :n. 7. 1 

lold it me. 1 rand ? 1 1. We 

• .ten it, we b IS. Where 

We left it at the merchant** 14. 

i i bought the beautiful (beUes) engrcringa which I sav/ at 



LESSON XLIII. 129 

your bookseller's? 15. 1 have not seen them. 16. Has your mother 
bought them ? 17. She has bought booKs, but she has bought no 
engravings. 18. Has that little girl broken my cups? 19. She has 
broken them on purpose. 20. Does that lady receive her income 
every month? 21. She receives it every six months. 22. Is the 
house which you have bought large? 23. I have bought no house. 
24. Did you receive a letter from your father yesterday ? 25. I re- 
ceived a letter from him four days ago. 26. Have you spoken to 
those ladies? 27. I have spoken to them. 28. Have you given 
them flowers? 29. I have given them some (en). 30. Are the 
books which you have bought bound? 31. No, Sir, they are in 
paper covers. 32. Have you examined that house ? 33. I have not 
examined it. 34. Your brother (en) has examined several (plusieurs) 



LESSON XLHL LECON XLHI. 

USE OF THE AUXILIARIES (§ 46). 

1. The active verb [9 43, (2.) (3.)] that is, the verb which has 
or may have a direct regimen or object, always takes avoir, as its 
auxiliary [(§ 46, (1.)] :— 

Nous avons ecrit a notre banquier. We have written to our banker. 

2. Almost all neuter verbs, i. e. verbs which cannot have a direct 
object, take the auxiliary avoir, when they express action : — 

Nous avons couru, marche, parle. We have run, walked, spoken. 

3. The compound tenses of a few neuter verbs, expressing action, 
are, however, conjugated with tire — aller, to go; arriver, to arrive; 
choir, tomber, to fall ; deceder, mourir, to die ; naitre, to he born ; 
venir, to come ; parvenir, to succeed ; devenir, to become ; revenir, to 
return : — 

A quelle heure etes vous venu 1 At ivhat hour did you come ? 
Je suis * ne en France. J was bom in France. 

4. A few neuter verbs [§ 46, (3.)] take avoir, when they express 
action, and etre, when they express situation : — 

* Observe that when the person spoken of is living, the French use the 
present and not the past of the auxiliary with the past participle of 
naitre, to be bom : — Cette dame est nee en Angleterre. That luly (is) 
was bom in England : — Mon frere est ne en France. My brot/ie° («) was 
torn in France. 

6* 



ISO 



LESSON XLIII. 



//(i5 your brother gone out this 
img 1 

Is your brother gone out? 



Votre frerc a-t-il sorti ce matin ? 

Votre frere est il sorti 1 

5 The past indefinite of the verb ctre, [4. ir.] (J'ai ete, &c) ia 
used instead of the preterite indefinite of aller (Je suisalle;) when 
speaking of a place where one has been : — 

Lc medecin a etc a Paris. T.hc physician has been at Paris. 

J'ai ute a. leglise cc matin. I ■. at to church this viorning. 

C. When, however, we are still in a given place or on the road 
towards it, the expression, Je suis allc, &.c. is used: — 

Le mddecin est alio a Londres. T,\c physician is gone to London 

Votre seen i _;lise. ter is gone to diurcA. 

uft of Examples. 



Avez vous 6t6 an bal liier an soir ] 
Nous n'y avoiis pu ele. 
On cette demoiselle a-t-clle 6t6? 
Elle a etc elicz son frerc et chcz 

nous. 
Ou vutro soeur est cllc all6c cc 

matin | 

Elk- est sllee tr on ver n oa — Ina 
. ..us pu sorti sojoord'hoJ 1 
nrtL 
on est blonsii or Is general ? 

il est 

Ou ce monslenr eat il no 7 

niece a-t-clle etc voir son 
I v lc voir liicr. 



Elle eat all6e le roil hier. 



Did you go to the ball last evening ? 

I : I '/• gO. 

Whither did thai young lady go? 

I to her brothers and to our 
house. 

your sister gone this morn- 

gont to her cousin. 
not go <>u! to-day? 

I N out. 

Where is the general? 

J do not kmnr, Sir, he is gone out. 

U fttgei flenutn born ? 

or Lyons. 
Did your niece goto visit her brother? 

She went to see him yesterday {and 
is back). 

! to see him yesterday {and is 
not back.) 



[SB 83. 



PlWultillo, f. jncdry ; Ma. on, m. mason : m. goldsmith ; 

Qhapelier, m. hoi i - In m. warehouse ; l'art-ir, 'J. ir. to set ou*; 

£td. {from utn-, 4. Ir.) Maude Ketonrn-er, 1. to «• 

been ; Merchandise, f. merchan- turn ; 

7 in; r:. to go out ; 

Ji r, m. walch-m utre, 1. ir.Yeim. from vciiir, 2. 

ker ; to bi ir. . "inc. 

idle lieure voire BCBUr eel elle venue ? 'J. Kile est f cnue 
A huit UeuiQa BOine un (juart. 3. Ces demoiselles sunt BjIsM 
Rouen ou \ Caen.' 4. Elles ne sont nees ni a Kouen ni 
elles sont ik-cs a Strasbourg. 5. L'horlugcr est il ohn lui ? 6. Non, 
Monsieur, il est alii I son magasin. 7. A-t-il wtw A Paris cette 



LESSON XL 1 1 1. 131 

an nee? 8. Oui, Madame, il y a ete. 9. Y a-t-il aehete des marchan- 
dises ? 10. II y a aehete de la bijouterie. 1 1. Avez vous ete trouver 
mon pere? 12. J'ai ete le trouver. 13. Votre chapelier a-t-il sorti 
aujourd'hui ? 14. II n'a pas sorti, il est malade. 15. Le macon es>t il a 
lamaison? 16. Non, Madame, il est sorti. 17. Quand est il sorti ? 
18. II est sorti il y a une heure. 19. Votre chapelier est il arrive 
aujourd'hui ou hier? " 20. II est arrive hier a quatre heures du matin. 
21. Notre taitleur a-t-il ete voir son pere aujourd'hui? 22. II est 
parti pour Lyon. 23. L'orfevre de mon cousin n'est il pas parti 
pour l'Espagne ? 24. Non, Monsieur, il est retourne en Allemagne. 
25. Ma soeur a ete a. l'eglise ce matin, et elle est allee a. l'ecole, il y a 
une demi-heure. 



1. Is the physician at home? 2. No, Sir, he is not at home; he is 
out. 3. Have you been out this morning ? 4. No, Sir, I have not 
been out; I am sick. 5. Is your sister's little girl out? 6. Yes, Sir, 
she is out, she is at my brother's. 7. At what hour did the hatter 
arrive ? 8. He arrived last evening at nine. 9. Did the jeweller go to 
Paris or to Lyons this year? 10. He went to Paris six months ago, 
but he is back (de retour). 11. Did you go to my brother or to my 
sister? 12. I have not had time to go to them. 13. Where was that 
gentleman born? 14. He was born in England, in Exeter or in Ports- 
mouth. 15. Was not your sister born in Paris? 16. No, Sir, she 
was born in Madrid, in Spain. 17. Did you tell me that your brother 
has bought a good house ? 18. He has bought a very good house in 
London. 19. Do you know at what time the watchmaker arrived? 20. 
He arrived this morning at a quarter before five. 21. Has he brought 
much jewelry ? 22. He has not brought much jewelry, but he has 
brought many watches (montre, f.). 23. Has he been in France or 
in Germany ? 24. He has been in France, in Germany, and in Swit- 
zerland (Suisse). 25. Is your sister in (d, la maison), Sir? 26. No, 
Sir, she is out ; she is gone to church. 27. Did she go to school 
yesterday ? 28. She went to school and to church. 29. Is she there 
now? 30. No, Sir, she is back. 31. Is the hatter arrived? 32. Yes, 
Sir, he is arrived. 33. When did he arrive U 34. He arrived yester- 
day at nine o'clock in the morning. 



iss 



LISBON XLIY, 



LESSON XLIV. 



LECON XLIV. 



1. Combien de temps corresponds with the English expression 

kow long. 

Combien de temps avcz vous dc- ILnc long did you live in Italy? 
meuri en Italic ? 

2. C'jcabicn de fois answers to the English, how often, how man) 
t imps 

Cambifnde fois y area TOllfl etc I Hov many times have you, been Lien? 

3. Jusqu'o'i i< oaed for how far, what distance, &a 
Juqu'oik aw ll ■ r- ■■ a been? 

4. Jnaqu'a quelle benre {till what hour,) means also, how late. 
J oaqn'a queue benre area vous at- How late did you trait ? 

5. LVoft means tpaenee; par on, which way, in what di rec t io n . 
u' my friend w 
H 

6. Mener[{ 19. ,porl r, to '.'../, carry ,'amener, apporter, to (ring 

mporter, to : ' We use 

I • •. in the 

Porter 
apporter, . to bear, to carry away, &c. 

'■hoot. 
.?. cc livrc u . foot .'*> wiir sister. 



' oa moo ami ? 

11 allc I 



1 

Jl v.i y recti r jusqu'au prlnl 

1 

dcmeuif Bix nns. 
Jnaqn 

l 

Ho beurc avcz voh.9 
a'a niinuit. 

. ■•lie. 

rona oaUe petite lillo u 
l'ecolel 



- zone? 
i 

to stay there? 

in London? 

Champs Elf- 
I/fie late did i ru write? 

-nan Ifldiex? 

■me? 
i 
•id) that little girl U 



LS8SOH X1IV. 183 



Je ne l'y mene pas, je 1'y porte, elle 
est trop petite pour marcher. 

Amenez vous vos enfants ? 

Portez vois une lettre a la pcste ? 

J'emmene mon cheval, j'emporte 
ma mont.'e. 



I do not lead her there, I carry kei 
there; she is too imall to walk. 

Do you bring your children ? 

Do you take a letter to the post-office ? 

I bring away my horse, I bring awau 
my watch! 



Exercise 85. 

Bruit, m. noise; Ici, here; Pied, m. foot ; 

Drap, m. cloth; Loin, far; Quitt-er, 1. to leave; 

Eleve, m. pupil; Magnifique, magnificent; Soieries, f. p. silk goods; 

Fils, m. son; Midi, noon; Voiture, f. carriage; 

Fin, e,fine; Nouvelle, f. news; Voyageur, m. traveller. 

1. Le jeune homme est il alle loin ? 2. II n'est pas alle bien loin, 
il n'est alle que jusqu'a Paris. 3. Vos enfants font trop de bruit, 
pourquoi ne les emmenez vous pas ? 4. lis sont malades, ils ne peu- 
vent marcher. 5. Comment les avez vous amenes ici ? 6. Je les ai 
amenes en voiture. 7. A quelle heure amenez vous le medecin ? 
8. Je l'amene tous les jours a. midi. 9. Combien de fois par jour 
menez vous vos eleves a. l'eglise? 10. Je les mene a l'eglise deux 
fois par jour. 11. Combien de fois y avez vous ete? 12. J'y ai ete 
plusieurs fois. 13. Par ou ces voyageurs sont ils venus ? 14. Ils sont 
venus par Amiens et par Rouen. 15. D'ou apportez vous cette nou- 
velle? 16. Je l'apporte de Cologne. 17. D'ou avez vous amene 
ces superbes chevaux ? 18. Je les ai amenes d'Angleterre. 19. Si vous 
quittez la France, avez vous l'intention d'emmener votre fils? 20. J'ai 
Vintention de l'emmener. 21. Qu'avez vous apporte de France? 22. 
Nous avons apporte de magnifiques soieries, des draps fins et des cha- 
peaux de Lyon. 23. Avez vous amene votre fille a pied ou a. cheval? 24. 
Je l'ai amenee en voiture. 25. Vos freres nous ont apporte des livres. 

Exercise 86. 

1. How long did your son live in London? 2. He lived there 
ten years. 3. How far is the physician gone ? 4. The physician 
is gone as far as Cologne. 5. Has he taken his son with him ? 6. 
He has not taken him. 7. How have you brought your two little 
girls ? 8. I brought one in a carriage, and I carried the other. 9. 
Is ehe too little to walk? 10. She is not too small to walk, but she 
is sick. 11. Have you brought your horse ? 12. We have brought 
two horses. 13. Have you brought the books which you have pro- 
mised me (jpromis)1 14. I have forgotten to bring them. 15. 
Has that lady brought her eldest (aine) son? 16. She has brought 
all her children. 17. How did they come? 18. They came in a 
carriage. 19. Which way did your brother come from Germany! 



134 LESSON XLV. 

20. He cama by Aix-la-Chapelle and Brussels. 21. Do you intend 
to take your son to school this afternoon ? 22. I do not intend to 
take him there, it is too cold. 23. Is that child too sick to walk ? 
24. He is too sick to walk, and I intend to carry him. 25. Why do 
you not take him in a carriage? 26. My brother has taken my 
horse away. -7. Have you brought the physician ? 28. I have not 
brought him, no one is sick at our house. 29. Will you take this 
book to church ? 30. I have another, I do not want it. 31. Have 
you taken my letter to the post-offiee ? 3:2. I have forgotten it. 
33. How late did you write? 34. I wrote until midnight (minuW). 
85. Whence do your sisters come ? 36. They come from Paris. 



LESSON XLV. LE£ON XLV. 

(See Lesson 36.) 

1. The reflective or pronominal verb always takes etre as its 
auxiliary [} 46] : — 

Viiir.' oonsfaa I'est promenft. Y.'ur eousm\ ha.< takm a umOt, 

Nos amis M BOOl U Our friends have fluttered themselves. 

2. Although the past participle of a reflective verb be conjugated 

with .'tre, it agreea with its direct regimen, when that ragjfflea pre- 

mvariable when the regimen follows it. The student 
■boald he earet'ul to tee, if the reflective proDoan be a direct or an 
indirect regimen [\ 135.]: — 

Voiis VOUI 6te^ : >moi- You have faltered yourselves, young 

selles. I atlies. 

Elles as sont donnc la main. tM given (to) each otter the 

hand. 

It will be easily perceived that K in the first sentence is a direct 
regimen, and that the same word in the second represents an indi- 
rect objeet. 

3. Verba essentially unipersonal, i. v.. vrrhs which cannot be con- 
jugated Otherwise, take avoir U an auxiliary: — 

II a plu, il a ncige, il a gi It rained, it snowed, it froze. 

4. Verbs occasionally iini|>er.sonal, take itre as :in auxiliary: — 
II lui est arrive un mallicur. A misfortune has hap/Kited to him. 

ft. Faire [4. ir.] used unipersonally, and V avoir, to be there, Ukc 
the auxiliary avoir: — 

A-t-il fait beau temps 1c mois passe 1 Was it fine iceaiher last month ? 
Y a-t-U M beaucoup de moode 1 W*r* thtn many ptopU then? 



LESSON XLV. 



136 



6. The participle past of a unipersonal verb is always invariable 
[{135,(6.)]:- 
Les pluies qu'il yaeu cet ete. The rains which we have had this 



Resume of Examples. 



Les Italiennes se sont elles prome- 

nees ? 
Oui, Monsieur, elles se sont prome- 

nees. 
Nous nous sommes apercus de cela. 

Votre mere s'est elle bien portee 1 
Vos soeurs se sont elles assises 1 
Cette marchandise s'est elle bien 

vendue 1 
Vos enfants se sont ils appliques a. 

l'etude 7 
Ils s'y sont appliques. 
Nous nous sommes donne de la 

peine. [§ 135, (1.)] 
Quel temps a-t-il fait ce matin 1 
N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps 1 
Quel malheur vous est il arrive 1 

Vous est il arrive quelque cbose 7 
II ne m'est rien arrive. 



Did the Italian ladies walk ? 

Yes, Sir, they have taken a walk. 

We perceived that, or we took notice 

of that. 
Has your mother been well ? 
Did your sisters sit down ? 
Did that merchandise sell well ? 

Did your children apply to study ? 

T/iey applied to it. 

We gave (to) ourselves much trouble. 

What weather was it this morning ? 

Was it not fine weather? 

Wliat misfortune has happened to 

you? 
Has any thing happened to you ? 
Nothing has happened to me. 



Exercise 87. 

Acier, m. steel; Grel-er, 1. pec. to hail; Se tromp-er, 1. ref. to be 

S'adress-er, 1. ref. to ap- Hollandais, e. Dutch; mistaken; 

ply; Neig-er, 1. pec. to snow; Se serv-ir, 2. ir. ref. to 

S'aperc-evoir, 3. ref. to Peine, f. trouble ; use; 

perceive; Plu, from pleuvoir, rain- Se vend-re, 4. ref. to sell. 

S'asse-oir, 3. ir. ref. to ed; 

sit down ; Plume, f. pen ; 

S'ennuy-er, l.pec.[§49.] Se port-er, 1. ref. to be 

to grow weary ; or do ; 

1. A qui vos soeurs se sont elles adressees? 2. Elles se sont 
adressees a moi. 3. Ne se sont elles pas trompees? [L. 38. 1.] 4. 
Elles se sont trompees. 5. Vous etes vous apercu de votre erreur? 
6. Je ne m'en suis pas apercu. 7. Vous etes vous ennuyes a la 
cainpagne ? 8. Nous nous y sommes ennuyes. [L. 38. 4.] 9. Ces 
demoiselles se sont elles ennuyees chez vous] 10. Elles s'y sont 
ennuyees. 11. De quoi vous etes vous servie pour ecrire, Mademoi- 
selle? [L. 39.2.] 12. Je me suis servie d'une plumfc d'or. 13. 
Ces ecolieres ne se sont elles pas servies de plumes d'acier? 14. 
Elles se sont servies de plumes d'argent. 1 5. La Hollandaise s'est 
elle assise ? 16. Elle ne s'est point assise. 17. Lui est i' arrive un 



136 LESSOW XLVL 

malheur? 18. II na lui est rien arrive, elle ne se porte p:\s bjcn. 19 
Ne s'est elle pas donne [} 135, (1.)] de la peine pour rien? 20. 
Cctte soie ne s'est elle pas bien vendue ? 21. Elle s\st tres Lien 
'.endue. 22. N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps toute la joumec ? 23. 
Nod, Monsieur, il a phi, il a neige et il a grele. 24. N'est-il rien 
arrive aux deux dames que nous avons vues ee matin ? 25. Non, 
Ifadame, il ne leoi est rien arrive. 

Exkkcise 88. 

1. Has it rained to-day? 2. It has not rained, but it lias hailed 

and snowed. 3. Has any thing happened to your little buy .' 4. 

Nothing has happened to him, but he is siek to-day. 5. Did youi 

I down at your house I 6. She did not sit down, she was 

siek. 7. Did that cloth seil well .' 8. It Bold very well, we have sold 

it all. 9. Did yon perceive your error (errevr) 1 10. Wo perceived 

it. 11. Wire not your sisters, mistaken in this affair 1 12. They 
Were not mistaken. 18. Were not your eousins weary of being in 
the country .' 14. They were weary of being at my brother's. 15. 
What have you u-.d to write your exercises? 16. 1 DSed a gold 
pen. and my brother DSed a silver pen. 17. Have you DSed my pen- 

i used it 19. What has happened to yon 1 

> happened to me. 91. Has your mother neon well 1 22. 

Bhehasnol beenwi apply to their studies, 

They applied to their studies and have finished their 

i tins morning 1 26. It was very 

:. r. 87. I las j our sister taken much trouble In this affair ? 

baa taken much trouble for nothing. 29. Did the Dutch 

ik? 30. They walked thia morning. 81. How far did they 

walk.' 3J. They w., 01 your brother's. 33. Have you 

cfa other the hand I 84 We -hook hands. 35. Those ladies 

nattered them much (beaucoup). 



LESSON XLVL i >N XLVI. 

mi. 5 1 1. 

1. The passive verb is conjugated by adding to the verb lire iii all 
its tense-, the peal participle of an active verb. See model) 

2. This participle musl agree in gender and number with the sub- 
joet [| 131, (SO L - *-■ K - ••]*— 



ON X L V I. 



187 



Ces vieillards sont respectes. Those old men are respected. 

Ces enfants sont aimes de tout le Those children are loved by every body. 
nionde. 

3. The genius of the French language seems to prefer the active 
to the passive voice. Many expressions which are in the passive ir» 
English, are accordingly rendered into French by the active or re 
flective [$ 128, (5.) } 113, (1.)] :— 



Cctte maison est a. louer ou a vendre. 

Ma sceur est a plaindre. 

Cet homme est a craindre. 

Cet homme s'appelle H. [L. 36. R. 2.] 

Cet homme se trompe. [L. 38. R. 2.] 

On dit que cela est ainsi. [L. 35. R. 2.] 

On nous a dit cela. [L. 35. R. 2.] 



That house is to be let or sold. 
My sister is to be pitied. 
That man is to be feared. 
That man is called H. 
That man is mistaken. 
It is said that it is so. 
We have been told that. 



4. In an answer to a question [see L. 24. R. 12.], the pronoun le 
corresponds in signification with the English word so, or it, expressed 
or understood. Le refers then to a noun not determined (not pre- 
ceded by an article or a possessive adjective), to an adjective, to a 
verb or even to a whole sentence : — 



Ces enfants sont ils aimes 1 
lis ne le sont pas. 
Ces demoiselles sont elles sceurs ? 
Elles ne le sont pas. 



Are those chilaren loved ? 
They are not (so). 
Are tlwse young ladies sisters? 
They are not. 



5. When le refers to a determined noun, it often corresponds in 
signification to the pronoun he, she, or they, which may or may not be 
expressed in the English sentence. Le must then assume the gender 
and number of the noun to which it refers. 



Etes vous la sceur de mon ami 1 
Je la suis. 



Are you the sister of my friend ? 
I am (she). 



Resume of Examples. 



Leur conduite est elle approuvfie 1 

Elle n'est approuvee de personne. 

Cette dame est elle estimee et res- 
pectce 1 

Elle n'est ni estimee ni respectee. 

Ces marchandises sont a vendre. 

Ces enfants sont bien a plaindre. 

A-t-on dit quelque chose a mon frere? 

On ne lui a rien dit. 

Savez vous comment cela s'appelle 1 

Madame, etes vous maitresse ici 1 

Je ne le suis pas, Monsieur. 

Etes vous la maitresse de la mai- 
son'? 

Je la suis. 



Is their conduct approved ? 

It is approved by nobody. 

Is thai lady esteemed and respected ? 



She is neither esteemed nor respected. 
Those goods are to be sold (for sale). 
Those children are to be pitied. 
Has any thing been said to my brothe-? 
Nothing has been said to him. 
Do yott, know how that is called ? 
Madame, are yon mistress here ? 
I am not (so), Sir. 
Are you tlie mispress oftfe hmtse ? 

I am (she). 



138 LESSON LXVL 

Exercise 89. 

B'appel-er, 1. pec to icCroi-re, 4. ir. to believe ; Pun-ir, 2. to punish; 

called [() 49, (4.)] i Ecolier, m. scholar ,- Rarcment, seldom ; 
A'ltour. m. author ; Jardin. ni. garden ; Rulieor, m. bookbinder . 
Blam-er. 1. to blame; L"ii-er. 1. In Id, to praise; Souveot 
Car. for; Mere. f. m Us-er, 1. /« mar out; 

Couduitc, f. conduct ; Pan ; Vend-re, 4. to sell. 

1. Votre mere est elle aimee de sa soeur? 2. Elle est aimee de 
•on frere et de sa soeur. 3. Lesltaliens sont ils aimes desFraneais? 
■ofiata ne sont ils pas blames ? 5. Ils sont blames quelque. 
fois. 6. Sont ils souvent punis I 7. lis .sont raremeat punis. 8. 
Par qui ttes vous puni quand vous t'-tes paresseux ? 9. Je ne suis 
jamaifl puni. 10. Sa conduite a-t-elle i'-te approuvee .' 11. Elle a 

Otv approuvee de tout le monde. 12. Bile a et6 approuvee par* sea 

amis. 13. Cet auteur e>t il estime .' 14. II est e-time de tout le 
monde. 15. Le jardin du relieur e.>t il a vendre < • 1 1 a louer .' ]<!. 
On <lit qu'il eat a louer. 17. Le menuiaier a-t-il (ait fairs un habit ? 
IS. 11 en a Gut burs deux. 19. Lea habits que vous avei schetea 
sont ils uses (toorn ou/) .' SO. Da sout uses,j'en ai fait fairs d'autrea. 
31. DiUon que noa amis sont aimes de tout le monde 1 'J-j. On ne le 
Lea dames que nous avooa \ nee :\ 
Pegiiee bier an Boir, s..nt ell • lea ne le sont paa, on 

dit ou'elles aont I ' i dit que 1'offieier qui vieat d'ar- 

river a 1 

00. 

1. Are you blamed or praised I 'J. I an neither blamed nor 

Dotyonreoo I by every bodyl 4. She is 

ostfinmnd by nobody. •'■ Whaf has been ^ii<l <>t" my brother 1 <>. 

id of bim. 7. Do you know if your brother's 

to be let .' B. I bave been told 1 that it Is to be 

told. 1'. Is not an Idl The idle man is to 

1J Mo 
■ always punished woen be i- idle. 18. Are your acholara praJaed 
when they are diligent (diligent ! 1 1. They are praised when lloy 
arc diligent, and they are blamed when they are idle. 15. Is that 
seined and respected 1 16. She is loved, esteemed and re- 
by everybody. 17. What baa been told you? 18. We have 
been to! 1 that your brother is respected by every body. 19. Madam, 
are you Mr. S.'s sister.' SO. No. Sir. I 11. Madam, are 

• The prepositions de and par are used Indifferently afU-r many passive 



LESSON XLVII. 139 

you pleased with your son's conduct? 22. No, S:r, I am not, for he 
is blamed by every body. 23. How is that large (gros) man called ? 
24. It is said that k e is called H. 25. What is your brother's name ? 
26. He is called James. 27. Have you been told that my brother 
is arrived? 28. We have been told so. 29. Are the goods which 
your brother has brought, for sale? 30. They are not for sale. 31. 
Has the bookbinder had a coat made ? 32. He has had a coat made. 
33. Is his other coat worn out ? 34. The coat which he bought last 
year is worn out. 



LESSON XLVH. LE£ON XLVII. 

1. In the compound tenses of the verb s'en aller, to go away 
[L. 40. 1, 2.], the pronoun en will of coursa keep its general place, 
after the other pronouns and before the auxiliary. It must never 
come between the auxiliary and the participle : — 

Je m'en suis alle, I went away; Nous nous en We went avjay ; 

.sommes alles, 

Tu t'en es alle, Tlwu wentest Vous vous en etes You went away ; 

away ; alles, 

II s'en est alle, He went away ; lis s'en sont alles, They went away 

Les dames s'en sont allees. The ladies are gone away. 

Les messieurs s'en sont alles. The gentlemen are gone away. 

2. The verb aller when referring to articles of dress answers to the 
English to fit, to sit : — 

Mon habit va bien. My coat fits or sits well. ' 

3. Seoir [3. ir. see table § 62.] answers to the English to suit, to 
become : — 

Ce chapeau ne vous sied point. That hat does not become you. 

4. Essayer (5 49.) corresponds in signification to the English to 
try on : — 

J'ai essayc mon gilet, il me va bien. / have tried my waistcoat, it fits me 
well. 

5. £tre is often used in French for appartenir, to belong [{ 106, 
(3.)]:- 

» . . M ^ „.s„™ o S To whom does thr-ihouze belong? 

A qui est cctte maison? j ^^ w & mi ? 

EUe est a. mon cousin. It is my cousin's. 



140 



LESSON XL VI I. 



Resume of Examples. 



A quelle bcure vous en etes vous 

alio] 
Je rn'en suis alio a. ncuf hoims. 

vous allocs Hop tot, 

us em sonimes alle.s trap 

Obo TOM va-trlk' 1 ■'. 
I pa* bi<n. 

ried ii fbrt l>ii-n 7 
Jo I'aJ 
bien. 
II lui va bun (regime indirect). 

i pu l > i • • n . 

I a raoi 1 



At what hour did ijm go away? 

I went away at nine » clock. 

Did you ^o away too soon, ladies? 

We went away too late. 

Does that dresf fit you icell ? 

i 'fit rue welt. 

-.' c,xiL become you veni well? 

I ied u on. Out it Joes not fit 

J; fits Urn 

It hurts me. it presses vie too much. 

Are those books ynns or mine? 

me nor to you. 

II then? 

H '..< liiite yonbi 

I have brought BW brother'*. 



81. 

Beau f; N, ' lf ve ' neWt 

r boot; ] r'rss. 

about. 

, v ,, : I me vont pas 

j. EUea 

'■ •"'■ Le cordonniei 

',; alio ? 6. II ne a'en eat paa encore alle. ~ A quelle nenre 

8. Klles s'en 

BOIj[ ,.;];. beurea da laprea-midi. 9. [/habit que voaa 

re | io. II o'eet ni ft In! ni ft not, 

.,,„ bean iV.-p-. II. Lui va-t-il bien I IS, II Inlra fort Men, 

et il lui iied Lion. 18. Oa I'a Uil fait fnire ' 14 H P« Wl Cure en 

ip ie lit llade- 

17. Yutro pilot va-t-ii 

ii de votre b< eaueonp aUenc 

.■ habit ne toun -• ■-i.--t.il paal laurait (cmncl) 
r, il eat de beancoup trap large. 31. ' 

nff 23. Je I'ai eaaayi , mai« la coulenr ne ma 

allfl trop elaire ? 34. Kile eat I • 1& Le« couleura 
fonc« . i nt {anuria. 



lesson xlviil 141 

Exercise 92. 

1. Are 5 our fries ids gone away 1 2. They are not yet gone away, 
they are still here. 3. At what hour did your mother go away ? 4 
She went away early this morning. 5. Did your little sister go away 
late? 6. She went away too soon. 7. Does your sister's new dress 
become her ? 8. It does not become her. 9. Why does it not bo 
come her? 10. Dark colors never become her. 11. Do light colors 
become your brother's wife ? 12. They become her very well. 13. 
Are your new boots too narrow or too wide ? 14. They are neither 
too narrow nor too wide, they fit very well. 15. Does your brother's 
waistcoat fit him ? 16. It fits him, but it does not become him. 17. 
Light colors never become him. 18. Does your coat press you? 
19. It does not press me, it is by far too wide. 20. Whose house is 
that? 21. It is my father's and brother's. 22. Whose books have 
you brought this morning ? 23. I have brought my brother's and 
my sister's. 24. Whose dresses are those ? 25. They are my mo- 
ther's, my sister's, and my cousin's. 26. Are not those German 
books yours ? 27. They are not mine, they are my friend's. 28. 
Are those pens yours or mine ? 29. They are neither yours nor 
mine, they are my brother's. 30. Does this hat fit you? 31. Yes, 
Sir, it fits me, but it does not become me. 32. Is your hat too 
small? 33. It is too large {grand). 34. Are your gloves too large ? 
35. They are too small, I cannot put them on. 



LESSON XLVm. LECON XLVHI. 

1. The verb falloir [3. ir.], to be necessary, is always conjugated 
unipersonally. See table, { 62. 
II faut, il a fallu. It is necessary, it was or has been we- 



ll faut etudier tous les jours. It is necessary to study every day. 

2. As falloir has always a unipersonal pronoun for its nominative 
or subject, a pronoun in the indirect regimen (dative — me, te, lui, 
nous, vous, leur), placed before the verb, will be equivalent to the 
•wonoun used as nominative to the English verbs must, to be 
iliiged) &c. : — 

II me faut ecrire un thSme. I must write an exercise. 

Ou nous faut il aller 1 Where must mm go ? 



142 LESSON XLVIII. 

3. Falloir i 3 used in the signification of to icant, to nad, to 1 1 undc 
(lie necessity of having: — 

II me faut un livre. / need a book. 

II lui faut de l'argent. He is in want ofmo'uy. 

4. When must is used in the last acceptation, and lias a noun as 
its nominative, the noun in the corresponding French sentence should 
be in the indirect regimen preceded by a : — 

II faut un livre d ma soeur. M>i sister viust have a bcok {needs a 

book). 

vA of Examples. 



Pour nppremlre une langue il faut 

fttadier. 
11 faut aUet a. llflg^fBe ct a lccolc. 

1 1 faut r.-stcr a la in: 
]! mo faut lire un boo livre.* 
11 lol faut aller voir tt mere. 
Que linns fan! il lain 1 

(jm- leurflrat-il lire • 

Que 1-ur faut il! 

11 (ear bntde l'argent on dn credit. 

: ait il dnqUAnte francs 1 



To learn a language it is 

to study. 
It is necessary to go to church and to 

sehooL 
V is iiecess.ni/ to remain at home. 
I must raid a good book. 

i -/ sm her mother. 
IT' ■ | . ■ 
What vi u si they rend ? 
What do they irant or need 7 

urn st have money of 

• >r mutt yo:t ha c fifty 

11 nn- faut einqnante-dnq franca i ■"< m «r / need fifty-five francs 
Combien d'argent faut-il u votre // money docs your father 

Il lui hi ftnt beauconp. n wamta much (of it). 

lfoasaTODSoeqn11[E.8.]noasika& n ■ ■■■ vhatwe w am. 

Bxkkoibb 93. 

Aller trouvcr, to go to .. Port, very, very much ; 

. ,.,- ModtBtS, milliner; 
Cliirut^i.-irm <!._•■' •• ; OuTWfe,BB. work I 

Centime, m. inn;, oj a Dette, f Payer, 1. pee. ft 49, (2.)], 

franc; Knvuv er, 1. ir. [^ 40, /•' nay; 

Combien, how m Peme, f. trouble; 

any? Pin I Quand, when. 

1. Que faut il faire aujoiird'hui ? '2. Aujonrd'hui il faut travailler. 
8. A-t-il fallu travailler fort pour finir I'onvrage a temps 1 4. II a 

fallu travailler tOUte la JOOrnee. . r >. Quand faut il i'crirc a notre 
ami .' <i. II faut lui < erire aujourd 'hui. 7. Me faut il aller trouvcr 

mon pere? 8. D Tons fkut aller le troover, il d pnrier. 9. 

A-t-il boaofo tie qvelqne chose 1 1<>. 11 lui font lies livres, desplumca 
et de l'enere. 1 1. Ne lui faut il pas anssi de l'argent ! 1-'. 11 lui en 

• Another conatructiun of these wntencea will Ui fouiil Le-uwo 22, 
1. 1 



LESSON XLJX. 143 

faut beaucoup pour payer ses dettes. 13. Vous faut-il encore quelque 
chose? 14. II ne me faut plus rien, j'ai tout ee qu'il tne faut. 15. 
Ne faut il pas du papier a votre sceur? 16. II ne ]ui en faut pas da- 
vantage.* 17. Que faut il envoyer au chirurgien? 18. II faut lui 
envoyer de 1'argent, il en a grand besoin. 19. La modiste a-t-elle 
tout ce qu'il lui faut? 20. Elle n'a pas tout ce qu'il lui faut. 21. 
Combian vons faut il? 22. II me faut cinq francs. 23. Ne vous 
faut il pas davantage ? 24. II ne me faut pas davantage. 25. Que lui 
faut il pour sa peine ? 26. II deinande un franc vingt-cinq centimes. 

Exercise 94. 
1. What must we do ? 2. You must bring your book and learn 
your lesson. 3. Is it necessary to write to your brother to-day ? 4. 
It is not necessary to write to him. 5. Has it been necessary to 
speak to your father? 6. It has been necessary to speak to him. 7. 
Is it necessary to go to D. to-day ? 8. It is necessary to go there 
(y). 9. Must I go to your sister? 10. You must go to her, she 
wishes to speak to you. 11. How much money must your. brother 
have? 12. He must have ten francs fifty centimes. 13. How many 
books does your sister want? 14. She must have many books, she 
reads (lit) much. 15. What will you send to the surgeon ? 16. We 
must send him our horse; his own (le sieri) is sick. 17. Must he 
not have paper? 18. He must have some; he has letters to write. 
19. Must he have much? 20. He must have a quire (main, f.). 21. 
Do you want any thing more? (See No. 13, in the French exercise 
above.) 22. I need something more. 23. I need nothing more. 
24. Must you have one hundred francs? 25. I must have ten dol- 
lars. 26. What does the surgeon want? 27. He must have money 
to (pour) pay his debts. 28. Has the tailor all that he wants? 29. 
He has not ah that he wants. 30. The milliner has received all that 
she wants. 31. What must you have for your trouble? 32. How 
much do you want? 33. How much do we want? 34. What must 
Id;? 35. You must write a letter. 36. What must she write? 
37. She must write four pages. 38. She must go to church. 



LESSON XLIX. LEgON XLIX. 

1. The verb seoir [3. ir. Lesson 47, R. 3.], is also used uniper* 

Bonally : — 

U ne vous sied pas de parler ainsi. M does not becoiie you to speak thus. 

* This adverb can never be placed before a substantive. 



144 LESSON XLIX. 

2. The verb convenir [2. ir. see \ 62.], to suit, is at times used uni. 
personally. It then signifies to be suitable, advisable, cce. : — 

II convient de lui ecrire. It is advisable to write to him. 

3. The irregular verb valoir [see table, J 62.] corresponds in sig- 
nification to the English expression, to be worth : — 

Cettemaisonvaut cinq mille francs. That house is worth five thousand 
francs. 

4. Ne rien valoir means to be good for nothing; ne pas valoir 
grand'ehose, to be worth little, not to be good for much. 

Ce drap ne rant rien. That cloth is good for nothing. 

Notre maison ne rant pas grand'ehose. Our House is nut good for much. 

5. Etre riche de . . . amoBto be worthy to possess; when a person 
is the nominative of the verb, valoir is never used in this sense. 

Cette pris. nine est riche de cinq T%at person is worth five thousand 
mili' do! 

6. Valoir miens, conjugated unipersonally, means to be better; 
valoir la peine, to be worth the uliile : — 

11 rant mieiix travailler que '1 etre D it bt tier to labor than to be idle. 

oiaif 

11 m rant paa la peine de parier /.' is not worth the while to speak vhe% 

quand on n'a rien ii dire. one \ 1 1 say. 

IPUS. 
// does not become you to reproach us. 
It is not suitable for you to speak so. 



II M vous sied paa de nous fl 

repfo 
II ne v.ms oonvient paade parier de 

la Rorle. 

II ne nana oonrienl paa dy aller. 
Combieo voire jardin rant il ' 
II raut beancoup ]>ius que li 
It ae rant |as antanl que b 
Notre maiaon ne rant rien. 

Tchoso. 
Cela ne vaut DBA la | 
Co chit, an pent valoir cent milk 

franca 
De combieo rotrc onclc est il riche 1 
11 est richede deux cent mflk 



' suit HI to go there. 

•en worth 7 
It is much more valuable than yours 
/ it worth so much as mine. 

Our house is good for nothing. 
i ■ much. 

toktk. 
be worth one hundred 
■ :nd I runes. 
How mush is your uncle worth 7 
He is worth two hundred thousand 

francs. 
Is it not better to read than to plan f 



Nc vaut il pas mieux lire qnejoner 1 

Exercise 05. 

Assurer, 1. to assure % Caas-cr, 1. to break ; Coutcau, m. knife; 

Au jiiHte, precisely \ Centaine, f. about a hun- March*, m. market ; 

AiHre chose, something dred ; MArit-cr, I. to 

else i Ohaino, f. chain i m*Ht / 



IKES ON XL IX. 145 

Montre. f. watch ; Pouvoir, 3. ir. to be able ; Tout au plus, at most; 

Negligence, f. neglect ; Reproch-er, 1. to re- Va. from allov, to go ; 
Negoeiant, merchant; f roach ; VingtainCjf. about twenty. 

1. Vous sied-il do nous reprocher notre negligence? 2. II me 
Bied de vous faire des reproches quand vons le meritez. 3. Vous 
convient il d'aller trouver mon frere? 4. II ne me convient pas 
d'aller le trouver, j'ai autre chose a faire. 5. Combien ce champ 
peut il yaloir? 6. II peut valoir une vingtaine \_\ 27, (2.)] de mille 
francs. 7. Valez vous mieux que votre frere. 8. Mon frere vaut 
beaucoup mieux que moi. 9. Ce couteau ne vaut il pas plus que le 
vfitre? 10. Le mien est meilleur, il vaut davantage. 11. Combien 
votre montre vaut elle? 12. Elle ne vaut pas grand'chose, elle no 
va pas bien. 13. De combien le negotiant, est il riche ? 14. Je ne 
puis vous le dire au juste, il est riche d'une centaine de mille francs. 
15. Ne vaut il pas mieux rester ici que d'aller au marche? 16. II 
vaut mieux aller au marche. 17. Votre chaine d'or vaut elle plus 
que la mienne ? 18. Elle vaut tout autant. 19. Elle ne vaut pas 
grand'chose, elle est cassee. 20. Cela vaut il cinquante francs? 
21. Cela vaut tout au plus deux francs? 22. Avez vous demande 
au marchand ce que cela vaut ? 23. Je ne le lui ai pas demande 24. 
II m'assure que cela vaut une centaine de francs. 

Exeecise 96. 

1. How much is my house worth ? 2. It is worth about twenty 
thousand francs. 3. Is that horse worth as much as this one ? 4. 
This horse is worth two hundred dollars, and that one three hundred. 
5. Is it worth the while to write to your brother? 6. It is not worth 
the while. 7. Is it worth the while to go out when one does not 
wish to walk ? 8. It is not (n'en) worth the while. 9. Does it suit 
you to write to my brother to-morrow ? 10. It does not suit me to 
write to him. 11. Does it become you to reproach me with my neg- 
lect? 12. It becomes me to blame (blamer) you when you deserve it. 
13. What is that man worth? 14. I cannot tell you exactly, about 
fifty thousand francs. 15. Is that cloth good? 16. No, Sir, it is good 
for nothing. 17. Is your gun worth as much as mine? 18. Yes, Sir, 
it is worth more. 19. Will you go to my father's ? 20. No, Sir, I 
have something else to do. 21. Is it better to go to market early 
than late ? 22. It is better to go early. 23. How much may your 
ho^se be worth ? 24. It is not worth much, it is very old. 25. Is 
your watch better than mine ? 26. It is not worth much, it does not 
go. 27. Is that book worth two francs? 28. It is worth one, at 
7 



146 



LESS ON L. 



most. 29. Have you asked your sister what th;it book is worth * 
30. I have not. [L. 24, R. 12. L. 46, R. 4.] 31. What must I do? 
32. You must speak to your father. 33. .Must he have money ? 34. 
He must have some. 35. Has he net sold his horse? 36. He has 
sold it, but it was not worth much. 



LESSON L. 



LECON L. 



1. When the verbs prendre [4. ir. >r '; 68.], to take; voler, to rob 
to steal; aeheter, to buy ; demander, to ask for ; paver, to j>n'>. art' f'o!- 
lowed by one regimen only, <t by several regimens in the same rela- 
tion; these regimens, if nouns, most nol be separated from the verb 
by a preposition; if pronouns, they take the form of the direct regi- 
men, le, la, les : — 

Aw/ vmis pt is le ; // you taken the hook? 

Aves vona pay.' le librairel // Bar? 

Ave/, vona ihiineniH rotre argent H ted/or your 

Law/. Tom rlitmnndf ! iJ you asked fir mm? 

ten the verba shove menti <1 are accompanied b] 

regimens holding different relations, the regimen representing ilie 

thing or object will !«• direct, and come under the shove rule, and 
that representing the person, will, if a noon, be preceded by the 

on ", and, if a pronoun, sssvme the form <>f the indirect 
regimen : lui, to him, t> h> r ; leor, to Hum : — 

.I'.ii pris |fl | 

.I.ii payl le livri- SO. liluiiiro. 

Jo Is lui ai pSJS, A 

3. Demander is used also in the K ■ ;uirr foT , to 

for:- 

J'ai d.-mandu ce monsieur. I far that gentleman. 



I ■ tm inn brother. 

1 Ike book. 

I ■ .,.' htm Jot it. 



Vous a-t-on vole vos Uvrce 7 
On me km I ' 2). 

A-t on payl lei soolien so oorden- 

nier 1 

On ne le* lui s pea enoore pay6s. 

Qu'a-Uon prll ii votro pore 7 

On lui a prll KM nr. 

I rien pay! 7 
On in a psyl j>res<ni" t.>ut. 
J ai ach>.-t6 dvs livres au libraire. 



B > ar books ft 

TV'/ haif hen ylolen from me. 
i : uh maker been paid fir 

' yet t>rn pni<! for dm, 
ii < been taken ' from yc 

fat fur ? 
U h i ' lira frtm hi 

I 

/ tvu^/u books from Uu bookseller. 



Qui avez vous demande % 
J'ai demande mon frfero aine. 
Avez vous deniande de l'argent a. 

votre ami 1 
Je ne lui en ai pas demande. 



N L. U1 

Whom have you asked for? 
I inquired fur my eldest brother. 
Have you asked your friend for 

money ? 
I have not asked him for any. 



Exercise 97. 

Chapelier, m. hatter; Loyer, m. rent; Renseignements, m. p, 

Crayon, m. pencil; Pantoufle, f. slipper; information; t 

Demeur-er, 1. to dwell; Paysan, m. peasant ; Revenu, m. income ; 

Fenetre, f. window; Proprietaire, m. land- Tout, e, all; 

Frapp-er, 1. to knock; lord; Voyageur, m. traveller. 

Legume, m. vegetable ; Rend-re, 4. to return ; 

1. Que vous a-t-on pris? 2. On m'a pris mes livres, mes crayons et 
mon canif. 3. Savez vous qui vous les a pris 1 ? 4. Je ne connais pas 
celui qui me les a pris, mais je sais qu'il demeure ici. 5. Avez vous 
demande vos livres? 6. Je les ai demandes a mon cousin. 7. Vous 
les a-t-il rendus ? 8. II me les a payes. 9. Vous a-t-on vole beaucoup 
de fruit cette annee? 10. On m'a vole des legumes, mais on ne m'a 
point vole de fruit. 11. Avez vous paye votre chapeau au paysan? 
12. Je ne le lui ai pas paye, je l'ai paye au chapelier. 13. A qui avez 
vous demande des renseignements ? 14. J'en ai demande au voyageur. 
15. Savez vous qui vient de frapper a la porte? 16. C'est M. L., qui 
vous demande. 17. Qui avez vous demande? 18. J'ai demande votre 
frere. 19. Votre frere a-t-il paye toutes ses dettes? 20. II ne les a 
pas encore payees, parce qu'il n'a pas recu ses revenus. 21. Lui avez 
vous paye ce que vous lui avez achete ? 22. Je le lui ai paye. 23. 
Ne leur avez vous pas paye votre loyer ? 24. Je le leur ai paye. 25. 
lis nous ont paye notre maison. 

Exercise 98. 
1. Have you paid your landlord? 2. I have paid him my rent. 3. 
Have you paid him for the windows which you have broken ? 4. I 
have paid him for them. 5. Has the. hatter paid for all his hats ? 6. 
He has not paid for them, he has bought them on credit (d credit). 
7. Do you pay what you owe, every day? 8. I pay my butcher 
every week. 9. Have you paid him for his meat? 10. I have paid 
him for it. 11. For whom did you inquire this morning? 12. I 
inquired for your brother. 13. Why did you not inquire ibr my 
father? 14. I know that your father is in England. 15. Has the 
hatter been paid for his hats? 16. He has been paid for them. 17. 
Has your money been taken from you ? 18. My hat has been stolen 
from me. 19. Have you asked your brother for your money? 20. 
I have asked him for it, but he cannot return it to me. 21. Has he 
no money ? 22. He has just paid all his debts, and he has no money 



148 



1ESSOM LI. 



left (de resti). 23. Have you asked your father for money? 24. I 
nave not asked him lor any, I know that he has none. 25. From 
What bookseller have you bought your books? 26. I bought them 
from your bookseller. '21. Are you wrong to pay your deb 
I am right to pay them. '20. Who is inquiring for me 1 30. The 
physician is inquiring for you. 31. Who knocks 1 32. Your shoe, 
maker knocks. 



LESSOX LI. 



THE TAST DEFINITE. 



LE(;ON LI. 
ft 120.) 



1. The past definite may be called the narrative or historical tense 
of the French. It is used to express an action entirely past, definite 
and complete in itself. The time mual be specified, and every por- 
tion of it must be elapsed. One night at leaat should have occurred 

since the action took place. 
Men (rare partit bier pour Paris. Afy brother left yetterday for Paris. 

2. The student will bear in mind that the past indefinite [I* 41.] 

may be used for the past definite. The past definite, however, may 
never be need for the indefinite. In conversation the indefinite is 

often preferred to the definite, a.s the latter would at times appear 

to,, formal ['; 191, (8.)]s— 

lly be rendered in English by the. 
simple form of the imperfect, or by the same tense conjugated with 

«/*/. The p.ist definite Ban never be rendered in English, by the par- 
ticiple present of the \erl> preceded by uas. 

J'alJai a 1 eglise hier matin. / tmit, or did go to church yesierdaf 









morning. 




4. 


Tekmin I 


I Of Tin: Past DBPUrm Koru 




Cohj Bee I- 28, and ^ CO. 




Jc 


chant -ai 


fin -is 


-us 


rend -is 




Matin 


Jin,.>l,rd 




rendered 


ru 


pan -as 


-is 


■ni 


Vell.l -is 




(ionn -a 


chrritkedtt 


; rreeivedtt 


lotdttl 


ii 


-it 


perf -ut 


tend -it 




girt 


furmifitd 


gathered 


tended 


Nous 


clierch -inics 


pan 


umes 


elltelld -inns 




Maj*l 


puni.'ktd 


tnnetired 


heard 


Vous 


port -atcs 




«1 


perd -ites 




tarried 


str.td 




lis 


aim 


un -ircnt 


-ureiit 


mord -ircnt 




Uced, lihed 


united 


dectired 


M 



5. It will be seen that the terminations of the second and fourtk 
conjugations axe alike 



LESSON LL 149 



Resume of Examples. 



On nous parla de vons hier. 

Le banquier nous donna de l'argent 
l'annee dernicre. 

Le banquier nous a donne de l'ar- 
gent. 

Le professeur nous parla de vous 
l'annee dernicre. 

II nous a parle de ses amis et des 
notres. 

Pendant notre voyage, il nous ra- 
conta ses aventures. 

II nous a raconte l'histoire de sa 
vie. 



They spoke to us of you yesterday. 
The banker gave ws money last year. 

The banker has given us money. 

The professor spoke to us about yon 

last year. 
He spoke to us of his friends and of 

ours. 
During our journey he related to us 

his adventures. 
He related to us the history of Ms life. 



Exercise 99. 

Aine, e, elder, eldest; Se lev-er, 1. ref. to rise; Remerci-er, 1. to thank; 
Avec, with; Lorsque, when ; Sejour, m. slay; 

Se couch-er, 1. ref. to go^eut ve, new; Semaine, f. week; 

to bed ; Ordinairement, general- Soldat, m. soldier ; 

Dernier, e, last ; ly ; Tard. late ; 

S'echapp-er, 1. ref. to Pendant, during; Trop tot, too soon. 

escape; Pri-er, 1. to beg ; 

Habillenient, m. dress ; Proprietes, f. p. properly; 

1. Le banquier recut il beaucoup d'argent la semaine derniere ? 
2. II en recut beaucoup. 3. Aussitot que vous apercfites votre frere, 
ne lui parlates vous pas? 4. Des que je l'apercus, je lui parlai. 5. 
Avez vous deja porte vos habillements neufs? 6. Je ne les ai pas 
encore portes. 7. Quand il vous donna de l'argent, hier, le remer- 
ciates vous? 8. Je le remerciai et je le priai de vous l-emercier. 9. 
Avez vous trouve vos livres? 10. Je ne les ai pas encore trouves. 
11. Lorsque vous vintes nous voir ne finites vous pas vos aflaires 
avec mon pere ? 12. Je les finis alors et je le payai. 13. N'avez 
vous pas vu votre soeur ainee pendant votre sejour a. Lyon ? 14. Je 
ne I'ai pas vue. 15. Ne vous couehates vous pas trop tot hier au 
oir? 16. Je me couchai tard. 17. A quelle heure vous 6tes vous 
eve ce matin? 18. Je me suis leve a cinq heures; je me leve ordi- 
nairement de bonne heure. 19. Ne cherchates vous pas a vous 
echapper de votre prison l'annee derniere ? 20. Je n'ai jamais cherche 
& m'echapper. 21. Avez vous vendu vos proprietes? 22. Je ne 
les ai pas vendues. 23. Qu'avez vous donne au soldat. 24. Je ne 
lui ai rien donne. 25. Pendant son sejour a B., nous lui donnamea 
tout ce qu'il voulut. 



160 LESSON LIL 

Exercise 100. 

1. What did you leceive last week ? 2. We received fifty francs 
from your friend, and twenty-five from your brother. 3. Did you 
take your son to church with you yesterday ? 4. I did not take hire 
there (y). 5. What did you lose last year ? 6. We lost our money, 
our clothes and our horses. 7. Have you looked (cherclus) for them ? 
8. I looked for them, but did not find them. 9. Did they speak of 
your brother yesterday? 10. They spoke of him and of you. 11. 
What did the physician give you 1 12. He pave me nothing. 13. 
At what hour did your sister rise yesterday? 14. She rose at fivt 
o'clock. 15. Did you rise early this morning I 16. We rose at 
half-past six. 17. Has your cousin sold all his property 1 18. Ho 
has not sold it, he has given it to his eldest sister. 19. Has the trav- 
eller related his adventures to you 1 ~o. He related them tome. 11, 
Did that man i: . o ■peak to your father .' 23. lie tried to 

speak to him. ^;S. Did the professor speak of your brother during 
his stay at your house ? 24. He spoke of him. -J j. I las your friend 
worn his oeWCOal .' 86. He has not worn it yet. 'J7. Have you 
thanked your brother I 28. 1 have thanked him. 29. What have 

you given to your eldest sistir .' 80. I have given her nothing,! 

have nothing to give her. 31. When your brother gave you a book 
last year, did you thank him .' 82. 1 did not thank him. 33. Is it 
I. It is not late, it is only six. li.'j. I, it tine weather or bad 
weather .' 3'j. It is very line weather. 



LBBSOK LI I. LEpON LIT. 

1. The terminations of the past definite of irregular verbs, are sel- 
dom arbitrary,* but an Irregular verb of one conjugation will some- 
times, in tliis tense, assume the terminations of another conjugation. 
In a few instances the • of the verb is entirely changed. 



1 


'. 


J' o -na 


f -us 


Tu 




11 


f -ut 


•nines 


f -nones 


-atea 


f -utes 


lb e -urcnt 


f -urcnt 



■ 


I,! 


| 


V -IS 




1 -US 


V -M 




1 -US 


v -it 




1 -lit 






1 -Ames 


v -ttcs 










1 -uruut 



• This termination is arbitrary only in rerba ending in rasr in which 
an r, comes after the i of the termination : vinnus, tinmes, Ac 



LESSON LII. 



151 



2. Avoir and $tre, t will be perceived, take in (his tense a new stem, 
c us, /-us ; etre and lire, though belonging to the 4th conjugation, take 
the terminations of the 3d, and voir, a verb of the 3d, takes the ter- 
minations of the 4th. 

3. In other instances, the stem of the verb drops some of its letters, 
and sometimes adopts others. This may be seen in the verbs 



Venik, 


Prendre, 


Craindre, 


Connaitre, 


Conduire, 


to come ; 


to take ; 


to fear ; 


to know ; 


to conduct. 


Je v -ins 


pr -is 


craign -is 


conn -us 


conduis -is 


Tu v -ins 


pr -is 


craign -is 


conn -us 


conduis -is . 


11 v -hit 


pr -it 


craign -it 


conn -ut 


conduis -it 


Nous v -intnes 


pr -imes 


craign -imes 


conn -umes 


conduis -imes 


Vous v -intes 


pr -ites 


craign -ites 


conn -utes 


conduis -ites 


lis v -inrent 


pr -irent 


craign -irent 


conn -urent 


conduis -irent 



4. Like venir, are conjugated all verbs ending in enir ; like crain- 
dre, connaitre, and conduire, those ending in indre, aitre and uire , 
and like prendre, those composed of this verb and a prefix : as, com- 
prendre, surprendre, &c. 

5. We would at all times refer the student to the table of irregu . 
lar verbs. \ 62, for those tenses of the irregular verbs with which he 
is not familiar. 

Resume of Examples. 



Ne conrluisites vous point votre ills. 

en Espagne Panose dernicre 1 
Je l'y conduisis et je l'y laissai. 
Aussitot que vous vites votre frere, 

ne le reconnutes vous pas 1 
Je le reconnus aussitot que je 

I'aperfiis. 
Le pharmacien ne vint-il pas vous 

voir 1 
D vint me voir ; il fut bien etonne 

de trouver chez moi, un de ses 

anciens amis. 
Ne prites-vous pas conge de vos 

amis, hier? 
Je pris conge d'eux, et je les priai 

de m'ecrire. 



Did you not take your son to Spam 

last year ? 
I took him thither and left kirn. 
As soon as you saw your brother, did 

you not recognize him ? 
I recognized him as soon as I per- 
ceived him. 
Did not the apothecary come to see 

you? 
He came to see me; he was muck 

astonished to find one of his old 

friends at my house. 
Did you not take leave of your 

friends yesterday ? 
I took leave of them, and begged 

them to write to vie. 



Exercise 101. 

Accompagn-er, 1. to ac-De mon mieux, as well Histoire, f. history; 

company ; as I could; Inform-er, 1. to infor; 

& la fin, at last; Se depech-er, 1. ref. foNotaire, m. notary; 

Amicalement. kindly; make haste; Lu, from lire, 4. ir. 

Arrivee, f. arrival; Dcs que, as soon as; read; 

Attend-rc, 4. to wait for ; Ecolier, m. scholar ; Peintre, m. painter ; 
Au secours, to the assis- S'ennuy-er, 1. pec. to be- Sans, without ; 

tance ; come iveary ; Secour-ir, 2. ir. to * 

Conge, m. leave; Se hat-er, 1. ref. to cour. 

fjour-ir, 2. ir. to run ; fiasten ; 



152 LESSON LIZ. 

1. Nos ecoliers s'ennuverent-ils hier, d'attcndro si longteuipal 

2. lis furent obliges d'attendre si longtemps, qu'a la fin ils perdireni 

patience. 3. Ne rceutes-vous point votre parent amicalement iors- 

qu'il vi:it vous voir '.- 4. Je le rccii9 do mon mieux. J. Ne lutes-vous 

pas !:i lettre de votre frere avanthier? G. Je la his et je i'envoyaj a 

inon onule. 7. Ne courates-voua pas au secours de votre frere 

it que vous le vltea ea danger 1 8. Je me hatai de leeecourir. 

lesdevenirl 10. Nous nous sommes 

rcu mon frere ne m'in- 

format n informai. 13. A 

quelle benre • He venue anjoard'hail 14. Ello est 

as prior do 

rent me voir, maia ils mo quitterent 

me parler de lent ma pas on 

i l'annee deraiere - un tableau d'histoire. 

Le peintre italien :•- - 2 I. 11 le linit hier. 

til. II Pa V'.::\ ee m iti i. 22. e nouvelle 

jeune homme a-t-il pria conge 
24. II a pria conge do lui 25. II prit conge do hi! 

1. DM;' :.. Ho accompanied 

J. Did your companion 
tuki' I . me this morning, 

G. I 

i tii 

the i -pael nine. 

1 day 
! rtm 
.' 12. 1 ha 

■ 
17. Did yon 

. i bo my 

■ 1 last 

ipanj 

■ \ for 

t for 

I, He took 

■. Wore VOU not 



LESSON LIII. 153 

astonishod yesterday to see that lady? 30. I was not astonished to 
eee her. 31. Did you make haste to read your book last night 
{hier au soir) 1 32. I made haste to read it. 33. Have you finished 
it ? 34. I have not yet finished it 



LESSON LIH. LEgON LIH. 

THE IMPERFECT. (§ 119.) 

1. The imperfect or simultaneous past tense may be called the 
descriptive tense of the French. The action which it represents, or 
the situation which it describes, is imperfect of itself. This tense 
leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undetermined. 
It may often be rendered in English by the auxiliary was, &c. and tho 
participle present of the verb [§ 119, 120.] : — 

J'ecrivais ce matin quand vous etes I was writing this morning when you 

entre. came in. 

Je passais hier quand vous m'ap- J was passing yesterday when you 

pelates. called, me. 

2. The imperfect is also used to express an action which is cus- 
tomary or often repeated. It may then be rendered in English by 
the word, used to, placed before the verb : — 

L'annee derniere, j'allais tous les Last year, I went {used to go) every 

jours a l'ecole. day to school. 

Quand nous demeurions a la Wlien we were {used to be) in the 

campagne, nous nous couchions country, use used to go to bed at nine 

ordinairement a neuf heures. o'clock. 

3. The imperfect can seldom be rendered in English by the past 
tense which takes did* as an auxiliary. The past definite never 
corresponds in meaning to the English imperfect composed of the 
auxiliary " was," and the participle present. It cannot be rendered 
by the verb preceded by " used to." 

J'allais a la cliasse hier matin / zoas going hunting yesterday morn- 

quand nous nous rencontrames. ing "when we met {did meet). 

J'allai a la chasse hier matin. / went {did go) hunting yesterday 

morning. 

4. The imperfect is formed from the participle present, by changing 
ant into ais, &c. § 61. It may also be formed by adding ais, etc. to the 

* Except when, in interrogative sentences; did is used as an auxiliary 
to used to expressed or understood. 

7* 



164 



lesson l: 



stem of the ve?b for the 1st and 4th conjugations, issais, etc. foi 
the 2d, and roots, etc. for the 3d. 

5. Terminations of the Imperfect of the four Coxjuga* 



Je chant -ais 
/ was singing 
Tu pari -ais 

Thou wist ipc.ikmg 

11 donu -ait 
He was giving 

Nous cherch -ions 

We were licking 

Vous port -iea 

You were carrying 

lis aim -atent 
Tktf were loving 



fin -'; 
was finishing 

cher 

watt cherishing 

r.iiini -iaaatt 
teas furnishing 

pan 

were punishing 

:-ais 

were seizing 
u:i 
were uniting 



rec -evais 

was receiving 

aperc -evais 

Md perceiving^ 

perc -eras 

iroj gathering 
OODC -evioiis 
»(r( conceiving 

d -eviez 

■ n it;-,' 
L-rrf deceiving 



rend -ais 

too* rendering 

vend -ais 

trait selling 

tend -ait 

teas tending 

entend -ions 

trrr* hearing 

pard -iez 

trrre losing 

moid -aient 

u-fre biting. 



:i-LES. 



Je chantais quand on m'appotta 

rotre latere. 
J'aimai> autreftne a lire l< • 

an^l 

dana votre chambre loreejne 

it re. 

Comment voire pare ae portahVfl, 
loraqoeToosdemeorieienJ 

oe anemia InJ 

■ 

ii bier tOOtfl la ma: 

loraqne 
rotre ami nooa rencontre. 
i are. 



/ ir^w sinking when they brought mi 

you i 
I used to like formerly to read the 
poets. 

I room when you came 
in. 

II ■■< you r father when you lived 
I ' 

,1 u paid my father what you 

. i you had prome' 

ised 

J spoke • '•■'''• mornipg: 

I was sp vr father w.ien 

I brother. 



I 



- formerly 

1 '"Vim; 

Cfhambre 

Crayon : 



Betroar-er 



1. to find 



Bcolier, m. a 

Is'cir. 8, 
Mi lit i : 

pper ; 

■cue; 
■in ; 
l. De qoJ pariiex-voua ee matin quand je - ! ns vena voua trouvcr* 
:>iiif parlait de BOD I rlaia du miei 

- aajeui le huMif que le mouton, antrefoial 4 Painuia le 
boaafj mais je n'ai jamais aime le mouton. b. Ne vendiex-vooa paa 
beaaeonp <h- livrea, loraqne voua demeurii 

beaoooap paieaoaM j'etaia Libraire, 7. Le libraire a til rendu beeav 
coup da crayons ce matin? 8. 11 a venda beaucoap i 
jourd'hui. y. Vendies-woa baanooop de pa reh e mi n loraque vous 
atiez libraire? 10. J« n'en veudaia preaque paa. 11. Voire frere 



LESSON LI II. 16b 

poilait-il un habit vert lorsqu'il demeurait a Londres? 12. II portait 
an habit brun et des pantoufies noires. 13. Q,ue cherchiez-vous ? 
14. Je cherchais mon livre. 15. Depuis quand l'aviez-vous perdu. 
16. J e l'avais perdu depuis hier. 17. L'avez-vous retro uve? 18. Je 
I'avais retrouve, mais je l'ai perdu de nouveau. 19. Ce boulanger 
vous fournissait-il de bon pain ? 20. II nous en fournissait d'excel- 
lent? 21. Punissiez-vous souvent vos ecoliers? 22. Je les punissais 
quand ils le meritaient. 23. Oi etiez-vous ce matin quand je vous 
cherchais. 24. J'etais dans ma chambre. 25. Je finissais mon 
theme. 

Exercise 104. 

1. Who was at your house this morning? 2. My friend G. was 
there, and was looking for you. 3. Were you looking for me this 
morning'? 4. I was not looking for you, I was looking for your 
scholar. 5. Did you speak to my father yesterday ? 6. I was speak- 
ing to him when they brought me your letter. 7. Did you use to 
sell much meat when you lived in B. ? 8. I sold much meat because 
I was a butcher. 9. Did your father use to wear a white hat when 
he lived in London ? 10. He used to wear a black hat, and my brother 
wore a black coat. 11. Were you singing when my father came? 
12. No, Sir, I was finishing my exercise. 13. Had you lost your 
pencil this morning? 14. I had lost it, and was looking for it when 
you spoke to me. 15. Has your brother paid all that he owed? 
16. He has not paid for his coat. 17. How was your mother when 
she lived in Italy ? 18. She was very well. 19. You used to like 
reading, (la lecture), did your sister (use to) like it also ? 20. She 
liked it also. 21. Where was your sister this morning when I was 
looking for her? 22. She was at my mother's. 23. What song were 
you singing this morning? 24. 1 was singing an Italian song. 25. 
Have you been afraid to speak to me? 26. I have never been afraid 
to speak to you. 27. Have you brought my book ? 28. I have not 
brought it. 29. Of what were you speaking ? 30. I was speaking of 
nothing. 31. What were you giving to my brother? 32. I was net 
giving him anything. 33. What were you carrying? 34. I was 
earrying a tree. 35. Where were you carrying it ? 36. I was carry- 
ing it home. 



156 LESSON LIV. 

LESSON LIV. LECON LIV. 

the nir::r;Fi;cT — CONTINUED. 

1. The imperfect of the indicative of every French verb, regiJar or 
irregular, cods in a 

2. No verb of the first bo R, is irregular in this tenso. 

3. The only irregularity found in the irregular verbs of the second 
gation in, is that, I • ij Brfect, the stem of these verbs 

Like= - •-', eonr-ir, je cou- 

. 
■\. The irregular ; . change that 

termination (oir) alar verbs of the same: 

-,.-.. - prions: Be-oir, to become, 

voir. [ 62.] 

the irregular verbs of the fourth 
conjugation under s admit of a 

complt.: We, however, offer the following : — 

. 
Je pren i 'tc. 

I 

in whic i prendre ■ comprendfe, 

■ 
'. . j 

-Exception*: 
i 

ore regular in this tense. 
8. The hich the French grnrnmatjaoa dc- 

rirr : - ; vc- 

naut, valant, t, ocndoiaaM 

Exec; 

lipun. 



lui. 
11 cu avait gtaud besoii 



.raiU monty? 
He hud b . 



LESSOR LIT. 



157 



Quelle voiture conduisiez-vous 1 

Pour qui me preniez-vous 1 

Je venais vous trouver quand je 

vous rencoutrai. 
A qui ecriviez-vous ce matin'? 



Jecrivais 
frSre. 



ma sosur et a mon 



What carriage were you driving ? 

For whom were you taking me ? 

I was coming to you when I met you. 

To whom were you writing this morn~ 

ing ? 
I tvas writing to my sister and to my 

brother. 



Exercise 105. 

Oubli-er, 1. to forget; Teind-re, 4. ir. to dye; 

Peche, f. fishing ; Teinturier, m. dyer ; 

Peind-re, 4. ir. to paint; Toile, f. linen cloth; 

Reven-ir, 2. ir. to re- Rencontr-er, l.to meet; 

turn ; Val-oir, 3. ir. to be loorth , 

Sav-oir, 3. ir. to know ; Veu-ir, 2. ir. to come, to 
Se tromp-er, 1. to be have just; 

mistaken; Vite, quickly. 



Autrement, 
Cass-er, 1. to break ; 
Chasse, f. hunting; 
Dire, 4. ir. to say; 
Montre, f. watch; 
Moms, (au) at least; 
Mort, e, dead; 
Offcns-er, to offend; 

1. Pourquoi n'ecriviez-vous pas plus vite ce matin? 2. Parceque 
j'avais peur de me tromper. 3. Ne craigniez-vous pas d'offenser 
cette dame ? 4. Je craignais de l'offenser, mais je ne pouvais faire 
autrement? 5. Que peigniez-vous ce matin? 6. Je peignais un 
tableau d'histoire. 7. Votre teinturier que teignait-il ? 8. II teignait 
du drap, de la soie et de la toile. 9. De quelle couleur les teignait 
il? 10. II teignait le drap en noir, et la soie et la toile en vert. 11. 
Conduisiez-vous le jeune Polonais a l'ecole lorsque je vous ai rencon- 
tre? 12. Je conduisais mon fils aine a. l'eglise. 13. Que lisiez-vous ? 
14. Je lisais des livres que je venais d'acheter. 15. Ne saviez-vous 
pas que ce monsieur est mort ? 16. Je l'avais oublie. 17. Combien 
la montre que vous avez cassee valait-elle ? 18. Elle valaitau moins 
deux cents francs. 19. Ne valait-il pas mieux rester ici que d'aller a 
la chasse? 20. II valait beaucoup mieux aller a l'ecole. 21. Votre 
ami que vous disait-il ? 22. II me disait que son frere est revenu 
d'Espagne. 23. N'alliez-vous pas a la chasse tous les jours lorsque 
vous demeuriez a la campagne ? 24. J'allais souvent a la peche. 
25 Mon frere allait tous les jours a l'ecole quand il 6tait ici. 

Exercise 106. 

1. Were you afraid this morning when you came to our house ? 
2- I was afraid. 3. Of what were you afraid? 4. I was afraid of 
the horse. 5. Was not your friend afraid of falling? {de iomber, 
See L. 21. R. 2, 4.) 6. Ke was not afraid of falling, but he waa 
afraid of making a mistake (de se tromper. See 2. in Exercise above). 
7. Were ysu not afraid of offending your brother? 8. I was afraid 
of offending him. 9. Were you +aking your sen to school? 10. . 



158 LESSON IV. 

was conducting him to school. 1 1 . Was the dyer dyeing your coat 
12. He was not dyeing my coat, he was dyeing silk. 13. What color 
was he dyeing the silk ? 14. He was dyeing some red and sorno 
green. 15. Was he dyeing his linen cloth black or green 1 
16. He was neither dyeing it black nor green, lie was dyeing it 
pink (rose). 17. Were you awaife (sroea oous) that your uncle is 
dead? 18. I did not know it (imperftct). 19. What was the gen. 
tleinan reading ? 20. He was reading a letter which lie had just re- 
ceived. 21. Were you cold when you came here ! 22. 1 was Jold, 
hungry and thirsty. 23. Were you not ashamed of your conduct 
(conduile). 21. I was ashamed of it. 25. Were you not in want 

v.' 20. I was not in want of it 27. Did you not want 

your father ? 2& We did not want him. 2D. Whither were you 

an I met you! 30. 1 was going to your house. 31. Were 

you driving your brotiu ft carriage .' 32. 1 was driving my own (la 

. 83. Were yon writing to me or to my father? 31. 1 was 
writing to your friend 1 ! ennatn. 35. Your friend was taking me for 
your eldest brother. 



9QM l.V. ION I.V. 

Tm; pASI | .:. mi. ill | 122, 123.) 

i. X i pari anterior is formed from the past definite of the mix. 
i the past partieipk of the verb: 
■ 

interior ,-v rally ■ momentary action, 

„l iu .j, to wther action. The latter immediately 

follows the former, and often dependa upon it. The action m> 
ternary one. The past anterior is 
often preceded - que,ausaiUM <iue, as soon 

as; quand,lon 

Dee que I'eusflnimattotv je m'en i I ' '■ ' '"." taslc 

allai. 
3. This tense partakes of the nature of the pasl definite. 

4 The plupi imperfect of the auxiliary, 

and the past participle of the verb ; 
vena, I 

this tense might be : all the rules on the mi 

of the Imperfect The action which ij m the sit uation 

which U frequent y a customary one, or one often re- 

peated :— 



LESSON LV. 



159 



Des que j'avais fini ma tache je As soon as my task was finished I used 
m'en allais. to go away. 

Resume of Examples. 



Aviez- vous eu soin de vos effets 1 
J'en avais eu soin. 
N'aviez-vous pas eu besoin de moi 1 
J'avais eu besoiu de vous et de votre 

frere. 
N'aviez-vous pas eu l'intention de 

me parler 1 
Nous avions eu envie de dormir. 
Des que vous eutes fini votre lettre, 

ne la portates-vous pas a la poste 1 
Des que vous aviez fini vos lettres. 

ne les portiez-vous pas a la poste 1 

Des que vous futes arrive, ne com- 
men<;ates-vous pas a dcrire 1 

Des que vous etiez arrive, ne com- 
men9iez-vous pas a ecrire 1 



Had you taken care of your things? 

J had taken care of them. 

Had you not wanted me ? 

I had wanted you and your brother. 

Had you not intended to speak to 'me 7 

We had had a wish to sleep. 

As soon as you had finished your Utter 

did you not carry it to live posl-officel 
As soon as your letters were finished, 

did you not {commonly) take them 

to the post-office ? 
As soon as you had arrived did you 

not commence writing ? 
As soon as yo-u, used to arrive, did you 

not {generally) commence writing ? 



Exercise 10*7. 

Arret-er, 1. to stop; Egar-er, 1. to mislay; 
Bal, m. ball ; Invit-er. 1. to invite ; 

Bourse, f. purse ; Se lev-er, ref. to rise ; 

Se coucher, 1. ref. to go Malade, sick; 

to bed ; Musicien, m. musician ; 

Dangereusement, dan- Oubli-er, 1. to forget; 

gerously ; Part-ir, 2. to set out ; 

Diner, m. dinner ; 



Perd-re, 1. to lose; 
B,emont-er, 1. to wind 

up; 
Betrouv-er, 1. to find 

again ; 
Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go out; 
Spectacle, m. play. 



1. Ne saviez-vous pas oii le musicien etait alle? 2. Je savais 
qu'il etait alle a Paris. 3. Ne vous avait-on pas dit que votre frere 
est morH 4. On m'avait dit qu'il etait dangereusement malade. 5. 
Ne vous couchiez-vous pas ordinairement, des que vous aviez fini vos 
legons ? 6. Des que je les avais finies, j'allais au spectacle. 7. Des 
que vous eutes fini vos lecons, que fites-vous hier au soir 1 8. Aus- 
sitot que je les eus finies, j'allai au bal. 9. Cette petite 'fille n'avait- 
elle pas envie de dormir] 10. Elle avait plus envie de dormir que 
d'etudier. 11. Qu'aviez-vous faitde (with) votre livre quand je vous 
le demnndai. 12. Je l'avais egare. 13. Ou l'aviez-vous egare ? 14. 
Je l'avais oublie dans le jardin. 15. Pourquoi votre montre etait- 
elle arretee 1 16. Parce que j'avais oublie de la remonter. 17. L'hor- 
loger ne l'avait-il pas remontee ? 18. II avait oublie de le faire. 19. 
N'aviez-vous pas perdu votre bourse 1 20. Je l'avais perdue, mais je 
1'ai retrouvee. 21. Votre cousin etait-il parti? 22. II n'etait pas 
encore parti. 23. Etait-il sorti 1 24. II etait sorti avec ma mere. 



160 LESSOR LVL 

25. Ou etait-il alle ? 26. II etait alle chez mon frere, qui 1'ivnil 
invite a diner. 

Exercise 108. 

1. Had you not intended to speak to my brother ? 2. I had in- 
tended to speak to him, but he was gone. 3. Did your sister go to 
bed last evening as soon as she had read (lit) her book ? 4. She 
went to bed as soon as she had read it. 5. Did she usually go to 
bed as soon as she bad read her book? 6. She generally went to 
id read six pages. 7. Were you told thai your 
sister was sick ? 8. I was told that she had been dangerously sick. 
9. Did you know what you had done with your pen? 10. I knew 
that I had mi-laid it. 11. Had your Bister mislaid hers? IS. She 
had left (Zaissee) it in my room. 13. How many of your hooks have 
you mislaid 1 14. I had mislaid five, bat my brother lias found them. 
15. Where had yon left them? 16. I had left them in the garden. 
17. Was your brother's watch stopped.' 18. It was stopped. 19. 
Why was it stopped? 20. He had forgotten to wind it up. 21. 
Bad he not lost bis k 32. He had not lost it. 23. Had 

you wanted my father 01 me? 21. I had wanted your little girL 
2j. Was she oat 1 2 oat with your brother. 27. Was 

she gone one thither. 2'.». Was the 

ie intended to leave at the. 
81. Had yoa spoken to him when 1 came yesterday 1 32. I had 

U) him. 33. Had yo r is here ? M. 

I had told him. 86. I- he still herel ;;» ; . No, Sir* he ia gout, hj 

went this morning at 



LVL I.F.rnX LV1. 

l. We have given [I. 81 B I.)] B ru'c for the plj«ce of 

the noun. Bubject "r nominative of an interrogative sentM 

Btudent, we have hitherto refrained from intro- 

another construction whi d ed by the Frenehj 

instead of that given in the role. When a sentence commences 

with oft, where i que, ; combien, horn much, how 

tunny; and quand. ;':•;: the noun may be placed immediately after 

the verb. Thii n ia similar to (hat of the English inter- 

rogative sentence wlicn the verb has no auxiliary [\ 16, (&.)} : — 

■ irr our fric-.ds and frictions i 

Qu'6crit retre aeneapenaant i What imut y»ur < nnspondtnt? 



LH8S0N LVI. 16.1 

U. When there are in a French sentence two regimens of equal 
>ength, the direct should precede the indirect [§ 76, (7.)] : — 
Avez-vous donne les jouets a Ten- Have you given tlie child the play- 

fant 1 tilings ? 

Avez-vous donne cette lettre a. Have you given the man that letter ? 

l'homme 1 

3, The regime indirect precedes the direct, when the latter is fol- 
lowed by a relative pronoun, or by other words qualifying it, and 
rendering it much longer than the indirect [§ 76, (8.)]. The indirect 
regimen should also precede the direct, when the sentence would 
otherwise be equivocal [§ 76, (9.)] : — 
Avez-vous donne a l'enfant, les jouets Have you given the child, the play- 

que vous lui aviez promis 1 things which yon had promised 

him ? 

Resume of Examples. 



Quel age a cette demoiselle 1 
Que veulent dire ces messieurs 1 
Ou sont alles messieurs vos freres 1 
Combien d'enfants a ce monsieur 1 

Avez vous paye cet argent au mar- 

chand 1 
J'ai paye mon habit au tailleur. 
Vous avez paye au tailleur, le gilet 

que vous avez achete. 
N'aviez-vous pas demande cela a 

l'enfant ? 



How old is that young lady? 

What do those gentlemen mean ? 

Where are your brothers gone ? 

How many children has that gentle- 
man ? 

Have you paid the merchant that 
money ? 

I paid the tailor for my coat. 

You have paid the tailor for the coat 
which you have bought. 

Had you not asked the child for that ? 



Exercise 109. 

Accompagn-er, 1. to oc-Chaine, f. chain; Dernier, e, last; 

company; Chapeau, m. hat, bon-Frcs, near, nearly; 

Aine, e, eldest ; net ; Rend-re, 4. to return 

Associe, m, partner ; Cinquante, f. fifty ; Serrurier, m. locks?nith ; 

Aubergiste, m landlord ; Clef, f. key ; ' Serviette, f. napkin. 

Bouteille, f. bottle ; Commis, m. clerk ; 

1. Ou etaient vos parents Pannee derniere? 2. lis etaient en An- 
gleterre. 3. Oii sont restes les messieurs qui vous accompagnaient 
ce matin ] 4. Us sont restes chez leur3 associes. 5. Que lisaient 
vos amies lorsque vous les avez quittees ? 6. Elles lisaient les nou- 
velles qu'elles venaient de recevoir. 7. Que dit monsieur voire 
pere ? 8. II ne dit rien. 9. Quel age a ce monsieur? 10. II a pres 
do cinquante ans. 11. Quel age o-nt vos enfants? 12. L'aine a dix 
ans, el le plus jeune a six ans. 13. Avez-vous demande votrechaine 
d'or a ce monsieur? 14. Je la lui ai demandee. 15. Avez-vous 
rendu au commis, 1'argent qu'il vous avait prete ? 16. Je le lui ai 
rendu. 17. Aviez-vous envie d'envoyer vos clefs au serru?ier? 18. 
J'avais envi8 de les lui envoyer, car elles sont cassees. 19. Aviez- 



162 LESSON LVII. 

vous oublia de payer votre habit au tailleur? 20. J'avais oublie de 
Ic lui payer 21. Valait-il la peine d'envoyer cea plumes a l'eeolier? 

22. II ne valait pas la peine de les lui envoyer, il en avait d'aulres. 

23. Valait-il la peine d'envoyer ees bouteilles a l'aubergiste ! 24 11 
valait la peine de les lui envoyer, ear il n'en avait pas. 25. Avez- 
vous demande des serviettes a votre pere .' 2G. Je n'ai pas voulu 
Jui er demander. 

Exercise 110. 
1. What does the lailor mean .' 2. I do not know what he means. 
3. Where [a your eldest sister? -1. She is at my brother's, or at 
my sifter's, b. What mi the locksmith Baying to you .' G. He was 
saying that he has brought my key. 7. How many tetters have you 
carried to the post-office 1 B. I have carried Beven, three for you, 
and four for my father! !>. Have you given my sister tlie letter 
Which I have written I 10. I have not given it to her, I left il upon 

my table. 11. Where is the gentleman who has brought that pen- 
IS. He lives at my father's, do you wish to speak to him? 

13. I wished to send him a letter which 1 brought from England. 

14. Have you returned to that man the money which he had lent 

you I \b. I have returned it to hii your mother paid the 

milliner (modish < for her bonnet I 17. She has not yet paid her for 
i:. ]s. How old ia the shoemaker's eldest son 1 19. He is twenty- 
yon s uMi to send your brother the key of your 
21. I had a' it to him. -jj. Was it worth the 

while to give your bn I was worth the while 

to give it to him. for ear) lie wanted it. 'J I. Was it worth the while 
- to the druggist (apolhi >. It was 

worth the while to send them to him. 26. Where is the landlord? 

27. He is in England 28. Is your Bister al home! 29 

■he is gone out. 30. How many children has the locksmith 1 31. 

He has ten. 83, How many books has the physician 1 83, He has 

five hundred volumes. 84. Have you given the gentleman that let- 
■ ,o. I have forgotten to give it to him. 



SON I. VII. ON LVil. 

I. The French avoid placing the verb a: atencM 

lowing, when the nominative is .. noun: — 

ire M 11. T If il hm. 

i est mon i" re. J trU. 

I -ua oil est Georgu 1 Do you know vkere Qtw. 



LESSON LVII. 



163 



2. In speaking ot a state, condition or action, commenced in the 
past, but still continuing, the French use the picsent of the indica- 
tive. The past is commonly used in English in similar cases : — 

Combien de tea ps y-a-t-il qu'il est How long has he been here,? 

ici 1 
II y a deux heures qu'il ecrit. He has been loriling these two hovjrs. 

11 y a uu mois qu'il demeure a Paris. He has lived in Paris one month. 
II y a deux ans qu'il est mort. He has been dead tliese two years. 

3. When however the state no longer continues, the past may be 
used in French, in the same manner as it is used in English : — 

Combien de temps avez-vous de- How long did you live in L. ? 

meure aLI 
Combien de mois avez-vous appris How many months did you learn 

l'allcmand % German ? 

II y un mois que je ne l'ai vu. J have not seen him this month. 

4. Combien y a-t-il . . . Combien de mil'es y a-t-il . . . Quelle 
distance y a-t-il ? answer to the English expressions How far . . . 
How many miles is it . . . What is the distance, &c. 

Combien y a-t-il de Paris a. Londres 1 How far is it from Paris to London ? 



Resume op Examples. 



Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous 
avez cette niaison 1 

II y a deux ans que nous l'avons. 

Combien de temps avez-vous eu 
cette niaison 1 

Nous l'avons eue dix ans. 

Combien de temps y a-t-il que votre 
frcre apprend le grec 1 

II y a six ans qu'ill' apprend. 

Quelle distance y a-t-il de Calais a. 
Boulogne 1 

II y a huit lieues de Calais a Bou- 
logne. 



How long have you had that house ? 

We have had it these two years. 
How long did you have that house! 

We had it ten years. 

How long has your brot/ier been 
learning Greek ? 

He has been learning it six years. 

How far is it from Calais to Bou- 
logne ? 

It is eight leagues from Calais to 
Boulogne. 



Exercise 111. 

Affiche, f. bill ; Demi, e, half; Morceau, m. piece ; 

An, m. annee f. year ; Fatigue, e, tired; Ne, from naitre. 4. to be 
Attend-re, 4. to expect, to Imprimeur, m. printer ; born ; 

wait for ; Lieue, f. league; Verger, m. orchard ; 

Compagnie, f. company ; Maintenant, now ; Vienne, Vienna. 
Copenbague, Copenha- Mois, m. month ; 

gen; 

1. Combien de temps y a-t-il que M. L. demeure a. Paris? 2. Il-y- 
& dix ans qu'il y demeure. 3. N'a-t-il pas demeure a Lyon ? 4 II y 
a demeure autrefois. 5. Pouvez-vous me dire ou est le fils du 
eapitaine. 6. II y a un an qu'il est en Angleterre. 7. Savez-vous ou 



164 LESSON LVII. 

demeure M. B. ? 8. II demeurait autrefois a Rouen ; je ne sais pas oil 
il demeure maintenant. 9. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous etes ici ! 
10. II y a plus de deux moisque nous sommes ici. 11. Combicn de 
temps v a-t-il que vous avez ce verger ? 12. II yauuan que noua 
Savons. 13. Oh cet imprimeur est-il nc .' 1-1. II est no & Falaise. 
15. Savez-vous combien il y a de Paris a Yienne ? 16. II y a trois 
cent six lieues de Paris a Yienne et deux cents lieues de Vienne a 
Copenhague. 17. Y a-t-il longtemps que la compagnie est venue? 
18. II y a plus de deux heures qu'elle est ici. 19. Y a-t-il long- 
temps que vous avez hi cctte affiche. 20. 11 y a plus de trois 
heures que je l'ai hie. 21. N'y a-t-il pas plus d'une demi-lieure quo 
;:■ lit I SSL 11 y :: >i Longtemps qu'elle lit, qu'elle en est 
23. V a-t-il longtempa que vous atteiidez ce moreeau do 
musique. 'J 1. 11 y a plus d'un an que je l'attends. 

1 L2. 

1. HOW long has the printer been lure.' 2. He has been hero 

more than a year. 3. Do you not know where my father lives? 4. 

1 . but 1 have no time to go to his house to-day. 

5. I low long has the physician lived in Paris ? 6. He has lived thero 

7. 1 1 -.v | ; .' did he live ii; fa lived in 

mii tell me where the lock- 

Btnilh live* 1 10. 11' 11. Have you been 

' r this book? 12. I have been waiting lor it more 

n been learning Greek .' 14. 

He has been learning it these two years. 15. Was not your sister 

bom in F was born at Paris. 17. How long 

has your brother had this orchard 1 i^. lie has had it more than 

Bis months. 19. How fir i> it from Pai Iris one 

hundred ami rbtteen leagues from P 21. N it farther 

(plus U» rurin ' -_'. It 

is farther from Lyons to Turin than from Lyons to Geneva. 23. 
'..\r in Germany 1 34. He lived in Gesw 
many two 

26. We have been here six montha '27. How long 
• M yon live In 

■ > yean. 31. Have you been learnii g Giiiimii moil than one 
B9L I have been learning i: m->re than four cat*. 33. Yoiu 
Mister has been learning music one year and a naif. 



LKSSON LVIII. 16JJ 



LESSON LVIII. LEQON LVIII. 

1. Clianger [1. see § 49, (l.')],used in the sense of to change, to leave 
one thing for another, is followed by the preposition de : changer 
d'habit, de chapeau, etc., to put on another coat, hat, <SfC. ; changer 
d'avis, to change one's mind ; changer de maison, to move, to chang 
houses ; changer de place, changer de pays, changer de climat, to go 
tc another place, country, climate ; changer de nom, to change one's 
name. The student will perceive that the noun following changer, is 
not preceded by a possessive adjective, like the noun of the English 
sentence : — 

Voulez-vous changer d'habit 1 Will you change your coat ? 

Ce monsieur a change de nom. That gentleman has changed his name. 

2. Changer contre, means to exchange for ; changer pour, to change 

for, to get change for : — 

Voulez-vous changer votre chapeau Will you exchange your hat for mine ? 

contre le mien 1 
Changez ce billet pour de l'argent. Change that bill for silver. 

3. Tarder means to tarry, to be long in coming. Tarder, used 
unipersonally, and preceded by an indirect object, means to long, to 
wish for : — 

Votre sceur tarde bien a, venir. Your sister is very long coming. 

II me tarde de la voir. J long to see her. 

Resume of Examples. 



N'avez-vous pas change d'apparte- 

mentl 
Nous avons change de maison. 
Votre frere a change de conduite. 

Cette dame a change de religion. 
Contre quoi avez-vous change votre 

cheval 1 
J'ai besoin de monnaie, pouvez-vous 

me changer cette piece de vingt 

francs 1 - 
Ce gar^on a beaucoup tarde. 
II nous tardait d'arriver. 
II leur tardait de revoir leurs amis. 



Have you not taken another apart- 
ment? 

We have changed' houses. 

Your brother has changed his con- 
duct. 

That lady has changed Mr religion. 

For what have you ezclianqed your 
horse ? 

I want change, can you change me 
this twenty franc piece ? 

That boy tarried very much. 

We longed to arrive. 

They longed to see their friendi 

again. 
I long to see France again. 



U me tarde de revoir la France 

Exercise 113. 

Air, m. air; Blanc, che, white; Gris, e, gray; 

Avis, m. mind, mean- Combat, m. combat ; Guinee, f. guinea ; 
ing t Conduite, f. conduct i Jeune, ymng t 



166 LESSON LVIII. 

Maitre, m. master; Passe, e, past, last ; Vie, f. life, conduct ; 

Manteau, m. cloak; Pays. m. country ; Visage, in. countenance 

Monnaie, f. change; Rentr-er, 1. to come in face. 
Mouille. e, wet; ^ again; 

Parceque, because; 

1. Cet homme n'a-t-il pas change de vie? 2. II a change de con. 
duite. 3. Cette grande maison n'n-t-elle pas change de maitre. 4. 
Elle a change de maitre, le capitaine G. vient de l'acheter. 5. Voua 
nouille, pourquoi ne changez-vous pas de manteau? 6. Parce- 
que je n'en ai pas d'autre. 7. Votre cousine ne change-t-elle pas 
souvent d'avis ? S. Elle en change bien souvent. 9. Pendant le 
comhat, ce jeune soldat n'a-t-il pas change* de visage? 10. II n'a 
point c 11. Ce malade ne devrait-il pas changer 

d'air? 12. Le medecin lui reoommande de changer de pays. 13 
it votre cheval gris ? 14 Je ne l"ai plus, je l'ai change contre 
nnblane, 15. Avec qui l'avez-vous change? 16. Je l'ai change 
avec le jeune homme qui demeurait ici le mois passe, 17. Le mar- 
ohand pent il me changer cette piece de quarante francs? 18. II ne 
saurait (cannot) VOUS la changer, il n'a pas de monnaie. 19. Avcz- 
;., monnaie d*une guinea {change for a guinea). 20. Combien 
08 une gaineel 21. II v en a vingt-et-un. 
• ._. \ i taroVt-ilpaa arentrer! 23. II tarda bean* 

eonp. 21. Ne voua tarde-t-fl pas d'aller en Italic? 25. II uie tarde 
d'y slier. 

1 11. 

1. Why do y.'ii not shSBgfl your COal ? 2. For a very good rea- 
son, Qlillll. tj bMMM 1 bare no Other. 3. Has your father changed 
BOOeea I I WO intend lo do BO ('/' lr fnirr) to-inoriu\v. 

ia that child changed his conduct I S. I If has changed his con- 

duct. In- i- » (mamleiiani). 7. Have you changed your 

religion ? have not changed my religion. 9. Do you 

nut change your place very often I l". I change my place when I 

am tired. 11. Dues imt y.oir si~ier change her mind even* day ! 

1^. Bhe does not Change her mind c\cry day. 13. Was not your 

brother afraid, did nut his countenance change 1 1-1. His eounte- 

nance changed, but he was nol afraid. 15. Hare yoa not changed 

,/,,- . r. ' 16. I h ive not chai my room is 

i.. in France.' 18. I long to 

19, Does nut your mother tarry too Itngl 80. She is 

very long in Coming. 21. II ed the forty franc i 

-j.' I ii. re not changed it yet 23. V. hj have you not 

34. Because your lather has no change. 25. Have you the change 



LESSON LIX. 167 

for a guinea? 26. No, Sir, I have only twelve shillings. 27. How 
many cents are there in a dollar? 28. There are one hundred. 29. 
Has that gentleman exchanged that horse ? 30. Yes, Sir, he has ex- 
changed it for a warehouse. 31. Will you exchange your hat for 
mine ? 32. No, Sir, your hat is too small for me. 33. With whom 
have you exchanged your horse ? 34. I have exchanged it with my 
brcther. 35. I have exchanged it for a white one. 



LESSON LIX. LEQON LIX. 

1. We have given, in Lesson 11, rules for forming the plural of 
nouns, but have in accordance with our plan of not presenting too 
many difficulties at once, deferred until the present Lesson, the rules 
for the formation of the plural of compound nouns. 

2. When a noun is composed of two substantives, or of a substan- 
tive and an adjective, both take the form of the plural : un chef-lieu,, 
des chefs-lieux, achief place, chief places ;un gentilhomme, des gentils- 
hommes, a nobleman, noblemen [§ 9, (1.) (3.)]. 

3. When, however, two nouns are connected by a preposition, the 
first only becomes plural : Un chef-d'oeuvre, des chefs-d'oeuvre, a 
master-piece master-pieces [§ 9, (2.)]. 

4. In words composed of a noun and a verb, preposition or adverb, 
the noun only becomes plural; Passe-port, passe-ports, passport, 
passports [§ 9, (6.)]. 

5. Words composed of two verbs, or of a verb, an adverb, and a 
preposition, are invariable: un passe-partout, des passe-partout, 
master-key, master-keys [§ 9, (8.)]. 

6. We have seen [L. 5. R. 4.] that the name of the material al- 
ways follows the name of the object, and that both are united by the 
preposition de. The name of the profession or occupation also fol- 
lows the noun representing the individual, and the same preposition 
de connects the two : un maitre d'armes, a fencing master; un maitre 
ae dessin, a drawing master ; un marchand de farine, a dealer in flour 
[\ 76, (12.) \ 81, (4.)]. , 

7. The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, &c, always precedes the noun 
describing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose to 
which it is adapted; the name of an apartment, that of the use to 
which it is appropriated. The connectinf preposition is a : un moulin- 
a-vapeur, a steam mill ; un bateau-a-vapeur, a steamboat ; un moulin- 
a-eau, a water-mill; la salle-a-manger, the dining-room [{ 76 (13.) 
(14) $81,(4.)^.;]. 



_68 LESSON* LII. 



RtBUMf of Examples. 



Lille ct Arras sont lcs ehets-licux 
des departementa du Nurd ct du 
Pas-de ■ 

I les bateanx- 

a-vapcur sont Ires nombreux en 
Anieriquc. 
C .'it-- maisoa contient un salon ; une 
sallc-a-mangcr, une cuisine <t plu- 
■ ueher. 



Lisle an! Arras are the chief placet 
of the departments of the North and 
I Udetu. 

Railroads and steamboats arc vciy 
numerous in America. 

That house contains c draicimr-room, 
a dining-room, a kite 



■ '. plus com- Windmills are more common in 
D France que lcs moulins- France than water or stet 
aVean mi aVvapev. 

1 1 ,"). 

Armcs : jin, m. drawing ; Ordinaire, usual; 

Bat-ir. 2. • . Roue, f 

honteWe, f. bottle ; r\. to travel; 

Cabriolet, m I sail. 

Chat-huant, m pro- 

Cbanve-aouris, f. bat ; vide one's self 

.'.-il avoir un passe-port pour voyager en France ? 2. 11 faut 
un. 3. Lea its pour 

- 
gleterre. ur lea rhnmina do fori fi. 

r sur lea chcinins-dc-lVr que sur lcs chemins 
ordinair. -partout ? 8. Je n'ai 

point de pas- 

tore ;'i quatre chevaux ? UL 

Nob, ifonaiear.Boaa a'avona qn'nn cabriolet a ancheva]. 18 

41 l-.iti un !imulin-.':-vapciir ? 14. II a fait butir deux moulins, 

Minn a-t-il n 

maltre d'anneal 16. Non, Monaienr, il a deja an w 

et un Diaitn- di chambree-a-eoucbaf avez 

vous ? 18. Nous en avons deux. 19. Avez-vous une bouteille de 
vin ? 20. Non, Mofcaieor, maia j'ai une boateUle-a-rio yuine-bmtU) 
[}81.]. 21. Voyez-vous lcs cliats-luia: , maia jo voia 

lee chauves-souris. 23. J'ai une voiture a quatre roues. 

1 1 6. 

1. Is your father in England 1 2. No. Sir, he is in France with 
mv brother. I L 1 -. Sir, they havo 

taken two. 5. Is it necessary to have a passport to travel in Amer- 
ica? 6. No, Sir, but it is Deeeaaary to have one to travel in Italy. 
7. la there a steamboat from Calais to Dover (Dourres) T 8. There 



LESSON L X. 



1GU 



are several. 9. Is there a railroad from Paris to Brussels (Brib- 
xelles) ? 10. There is one from Paris to Brussels, and one from Paris 
to Tours. 11. Has your "brother bought a wind-mill? 12. No, Sir, 
but he has built a steam-mill. 13. Are there many wind-mills in 
America? 14. No, Sir, but there are many water and steam-mills. 
15. Have your sisters a dancing-master? 16. They have a dancing- 
caster and a music-master. 17. Does your cousin learn drawing ? 
18. He does not learn it, he cannot find a drawing-master. 19. Is 
the fencing-master in the dining-room ? 20. No, Sir, he is in the 
drawing-room. 21. Is your cousin in his bed-room? 22. No, Sir, 
he is out (sorli). 23. How many rooms are there in your house. 
24. Five ; a kitchen, a dining-room, a drawing-room, and two bed- 
rooms. 25. Are there owls here ? 26. Yes, Sir, and bats too. 27. 
Have you seen those master-pieces ? 28. Yes, Sir, I have seen them. 
29. Have you sent them to the chief place of the department ? 30. 
I have sent them there. 31. Have you a two-horse gig? 32. I have 
a four-horse one. 33. Has your brother a two-wheel carriage ? 34, 
He has a two-seat carriage (<1 deux sieges). 



LESSON LX. LEgON LX. 

THE TWO FUTURES, SIMPLE AND ANTERIOR. (§ 124.) 

1. The future of every verb in the French language ends with rat, 
ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. 

2. This tense, in all the regular verbs, as also in the irregular verbs 
not mentioned in the next lesson, may be formed from the present 
of the infinitive by changing the r of the first and second conjuga- 
tions, and the oir and re of the third and fourth, into the termlratidSJi 
alrsady given and here again repeated. 

3. Conjugation of the Future Simple of the Regular 

Verbs. 
Je chante -rai 

Kill sing 
Tu parle -ras 

wilt speak 

II donne -ra 

shall give 

Nous clierche -rons puni -rons concev -rons 

will seek shall punish will conceive 

Vousporte -rez saisi -rez dev -rez 

will carry will seize will owe 

lis aime -ront uni -ront decev -ront 

teiUlvr* 



fini -rai 

will finish 

cheri -ras 

wilt cherish 
fourni -ra 

will furnish 



recev -rai 

w ill receive 

apcrcev -ras 

wilt perceive 

percev -ra 

will rrather 



rend -rai 
will render 
vend -tas 

wilt sell 

tend -ra 

will tend 

entend -rons 

will hear 

perd -rez 

will lose 

mord -ront 



2«70 LKSSOWLX. 

4 The future anterior is merely the past participle of the verb, 
conjugated with the future of one of the auxiliaries ,w, are .- - 
J'aurai finite me serai Matte. I shnUJ^-c do^ I skallhavc JlaJ'crcn 

5 The student, when rendering English into French, should be 
careful to distinguish u-ill, taken as an auxiliary, from the same word 
employed as a principal verb. In tins latter case, it is always eqmva- 
knttotheverbjo ! r^,or to be willing, and should not be rendered 
by the future of the verb, but by the present of vouloir .— 

Ne voulez-vous pas lui Ocrire 1 *"£#£• ^ * "^ " 

If Of EXAMI'LES. 
Quand parlcrez--ous ace monsieur 1 

Vous fournira-t-il des provisions 1 
lis ne : ),lirs r.'Vi-nus. 

adres-TOua pas vos propria 

_ 
Que vouli-7.-vi'u-* arob 1 

E 

10181 1 it> 

7 *So nromen-cr, 1. ref. 

■ arc : 

,. Menerez-vous to* enfiu* "^ J 

march.' IU J T- 

6 Jc le mineral a I'ecurie. 7. Lui , 
tfcjaidonneraidufoinetdera •"* 

Veau! 10. J, It B U°jl 

ccquovousdevez. 12. Nevoulcr-v« 

mepromener-ucetteapr^nia, 14 ' J 

ouLhevaP 16. Jt me prom 

nera on voiturc. 16. Marcucre^vou. Icaueuup d^u, vulr* voyage 



■ U you speak U> thai gatUf 
;•■ ." visum? 

\i v fid .-.,.' a, *ur pn/ertqt 
set? 

nod 1 
H 



LESSON LXI. 171 

a Paris? 17. Nous ne raarcherons pas du tout. 18. N'appellerez. 
[{ 49, (4.)] vous pas, le colporteur? 19. Je ne l'appellerai pas. 
20. N'aeheterez-[§ 49, (5.)] vous pas ce chateau. 21. Nous l'ache- 
terons si nous pouvons. 22. Ne gelera-t-il pas [H 9 ' ( 5 -)j cette 
nuit? 23. Je no le crois pas, il fait trop chaud. 24. Ne seineroz- 
[J 49, (G.)] vous pas tout le ble que vous recolterez? 25. Jc n'en 
eemerai qu'une partie, je vendrai le reste. 26. Je cachetterai uie3 
lettres et je les porterai a. la poste. ,. 

Exercise 118. 

1. Will not the gentleman call his children? 2. He will call his 
children and his sister's. 3. Will you not bring your children? 
4. I cannot bring them. 5. Will you not take a ride this afternoon ? 
6. We will ride in a carriage to-morrow. 7. Will you not buy my 
father's horses ? 8. I shall not buy them ; I have no money. 9. Will 
you not call the pedlar ? 10. I do not wish to call him ; I do not wish 
to buy any thing. 11. Will you pay the tailor? 12. I will pay him 
for my coat. 13. Will it not freeze to-morrow? 14. It will freeze 
to-morrow; it is very cold. 15. Will you not sow oats in this field 
(champ)' 1 . 16. I will not sow oats ; I will sow wheat there. 17. Will 
you take your sister to school ? 18. I will take her there this after- 
noon. 19. Will you not take your son to market? 20. I will not 
take him there. 21. Will not the gardener take his horse to the 
watering place? 22. He will take him there. 23. Will you give 
oats to your horse ? 24. I will give him hay. 25. Will you bring 
your son with you? 26. I will bring him to-morrow. 27. Will he 
bring his horse? 28. He will bring his horse and carriage. 29. Why 
do you carry that little child? 30. He* is too sick to (pour) walk. 
31. Will your brother sell his property? 32. He will only sell part 
of it. 33. Will not your servant carry the letter to the post-office ? 
34. I will seal it and give it to him. 35. Will you feed my horse? 
36. I will feed him and give him some water. 



LESSON LXI. LEgON LXI. 

IRREGULARITIES OF THE FUTURE. 

1. The two irregular verbs of the first conjugation aller, logo, and 
envoyer, to send, make in the future firai,fenverrai [see § 62.] : — 

2. All the verbs of the second conjugation, which end in enir, change 
that termination into iendrai t &c, for the future : as, tenir, to Ibdld, 



172 



LESSON LX1. 



renir, to come;je tiendraije viendrai. Acquerir, to acquire ; conquerir 
w conquer ; reqm rir, to require ; mourir, to die ; and courir, to run, and 
.ts compounds, doutti the r in the future .-faequerrm^je mourrai, 
je cour'rai. Cueillir, to gather, and its compounds, change the i pre- 
ceding the r into e : —je cucilleral 

3. In the third conjugation, s'asseoir, to sit down, and seoir, to sti, 
make/0 m'assitrai and je siirai. Falloir, to be necessary, vouloii, to 
be willing, and valoir, to be worth, make ii faudraje voudrai, and je 
vaudrai. Voir, to see, and revoir, to see again, make /« terra/, >e 
reverrai. Pouvoir, to 6c aWe, makes je pourrai, and pourvoir, to pro- 
ride, /> peurwwoi Savoir, to know, and avoir, to hare, make>e saurai, 

4. Etre, to 6<\ faire, to make, and its compounds, are the only verbs 
of the fourth conjugation, which arc irregular in the future :—je serai, 
jeferai, Su. 

6, The futures simple and anterior, arc used in French after an 
adverb of time, in C8SM similar to tln.se in which the English use 
the present and perfect of the indicative, with ix/ufurc meaning:— 

toad tow wrrw ow mmtem , . When wn tee *".&**?* y, :.. 

gS one row aun , reon ottte 4 ««. oj p* »■•" '«*'«••«< < Au 
lettre ... 



I 

Nuns trout en Fraaoe el •» • 

Hotu row eeverrow chon 

N,- viettdrea vows pas dow trouver. 

Quand Di v ten dr o n l jautai m 
lettre. 

Q la peine I 
Cel halnt ira-t il Men 1 
11 hudra tour envoyor de largest 



goto France this year? 
and Italy. 
ii Tot you. 

M'/// you not '•"'»■' to h>2 

«, / sA/j// have tny let- 

be worth the whiU? 
Will thai coat fit well? 
It will be necessary to send then 

money. 



ir. to 



CISE 110. 
Lenten* 

Mar. Ii I 

Ho) m- : 

l'ait-ir. 1. ir. to set out, 
to It 



Tcrmctt-rc, 4. ir. to per. 

mil ; 
rinisir, m. pleasure; 

Bort-ir, '2. ir. to £» «**• 



Hi.ntot. toon ; 
Commit re, i. 

know i 
Demenre, f dwelling 
■'/. try ,• 
tart 

L V\icnuV ions voir demainl 2. J'irai vous voir, si 

ie team le uennet 3. N'cnverrcz-vous pas chereher Ic m 

votre tils est unlade ' 4. Je firai chereher moi-D* me. 6. Quand je 
MBJ MljWJ|Jl uiarcucrai plue lentenienU 7. Quand you* connaiuer 



LESSON LXI. 



17$ 



«a demeure irez-vous le voir ? 8. J'irai le voir aussit6t que jo saurai 
oh il demeure. 9. Ne le verrez-vous pas aujourd'hui? 10. Je le 
verrai eette apres-midi. 11. Ne pourrez-vous point nous accoin- 
pagner? 12. Je le ferai avec beaueoup de plaisir. 13. Ne leur en- 
verrez-vous point des fraises? 14. Je leur en enverrai quand les 
miennes seront mures. 15. Ne faudra-kil pas leur ecrire bientot? 
16. Quand nous aurons recu des nouvelles d<? leur parent, il faudra 
leur ecrire. 17. Que ferons-nous demain? 18. Nous irons a la 
chasse. 19. N'irez vous pas chez votre pere? 20. Nous irons cer- 
tainement. 21. Quand votre guitare sera arrivee, la pretercz-vous. 
22. Je ne pourrai la preter. 23. A quelle heure partirez-vous de- 
main ? 24. Je partirai a cinq heures du matin. 25. Ne sortirez-vous 
pas ce soir ? 26. Je ne sortirai pas, et je me coucherai de bonne 
heure. 

Execise 120. 

1. Will you send for the physician? 2. I will send for him this 
afternoon. 3. Will not the little girl go and fetch apples? 4. She 
will send for some. 5. Will you not sit down when you are tired? 
6. We will not sit down, we have no time. 7. What will your 
brother do when he is tired ? [R. 5.] 8. He will do what [ce que] 
he can. [R. 5.] 9. Will it be worth the while to (de) write to him? 
10. It will not be worth the while, for (car) he will not come. 11. 
Will it not be necessary to speak to the merchant? 12. It will not 
be necessary to speak to him. 13. Will it be necessary for us to 
take passports? 14. It will be necessary. (11 le faudra.) 15. Will 
not your little boy walk more slowly when he is tired? 16. When 
he is tired, he will sit down. 17. What will your sister do to-mor- 
row? 18. She will go to church and to school. 19. Will she not 
come here? 20. She will not be able to come. 21. Will you walk 
or go on horseback, (Irez vous a pied ou a cheval?) 22. I shall go on 
horseback. 23. Why do you not go in a carriage ? 24. Because my 
carriage is in London. 25. When will you see them ? 26. I shall 
ee them as soon as I can. 27. Will they come to our house to- 
morrow? 28. They will do so with much pleasure. 29. When you 
see that gentleman, will you speak to him? 30. I will not speak to 
him. 31. When you have written your letters, what will you do? 
32. 1 shall come to your house. 33. When you have read that book, 
will you send it to me? 34. I will send it to you. 35. Will you send 
it to-day ? 36. I will send it to-morrow. 37. They will come to you 
to-morrow. 



174 



LESSON LXII. 



LESSON LXII. 



LI-COX LXII. 
125.) 



THE TWO CONDITIONALS. 

1. The conditional present may be formed from the future, by 
displacing the termin: tions ai, as, a, ons, cz, unt, and substituting 
those of the imperfect of the indicative, ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient. 

2. Every verb in the French language, regular and irregular, has 
in this tense the above terminations. 

3. Conjugation of the Conditional Present of the Regu- 
lar \ 



Je chanter -ais 

iTfu'd sing 

Tu parler -ais 

vonlJ.it spenk 

II dormer -ait 

should fire 

Rons clie.clier -Ions 

would seek 

Vous porter -lex 

should carry 



finir -nis 

tcmilJ fini.-h 

clierir -ais 

WlMri chrrigh 

fuurnir -ait 

should /umiak 

punir -ions 

should puni'h 

-les 

would true 

ILs aimer -aient unir 

would lore should unite 



recoTT -a is 

would rr 

apercevr ais 

tcruld.-! ; 

percevr -;• i t 

would gather 

concevr -ions 

would tonecire 

di'vr- 
flimitd owe 
d6corr -slant 

would dtceice 



rendr -ais 

would rrndrr 

vendr -nis 

wouldtt tell 

tendr -ait 

Simula . 

entendr-iou 

.-llollld 

I >' -i»l i- -iez 

would lure 

mordr aient 

should bile 



4. The irregnlaritii iitional appear not in the tennina- 

tfaras, but in the tUm of the verb. They are precisely the same as 
: the future. Those [rregulsrttiee will be found In the last 
kted !■' re. The conditional of any irreg- 
ular \erh may Ik.- fonni d by plneing after the last r of the future, the 
terminations of the imperfect of the indk 

formed from the conditional present of 
one of the auxiliaries amir, tin; and the past participle of the verb 
..(2.)]:- 

J'aurais i / / '"iild have 

j self. 

6. The two futures and the two conditionals should not be use* 
after the conjunction Bol -.-.the present end thi 

jet of the indicative should be used;— 
S'il ponvalt quitter son pore, il vlen- / %ve kit falktr, hx wouU 

di.iit. 
Bi j'olaU a votrc place, j irai.s. / / ytmr SSSCS, / W S Sl s T gt\ 

iHUi*tg iftm h/uiti$m 

■nps. 1 

Jo lirais, si j'avais des livres Id. I / would read if I had books hert. 



LESSON LXII. 175 



JT aimerais in ieux aller a pied qu'a. 

cheval. 
Votre mere se porteraifc rnieux a. 

Paris. 
Nous nous passerions facileinent dc 

ce livre. 
Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux lui ecrire 1 
Nc faudiait-il pas lui ecrire 1 

Je nvassierais si j'etais fatigue. 
Cct habit m'irait bien, sll etait assez 
large. 



I would prefer walking to riding. 

Your mother would be better in Paris. 

We might easily do witlwut that book. 

Would il not be better to write to him f 
Would it not be necessary to write to 

him > 
I would sit doicn if I were tired. 
That coat would Jit me well if it were 

broad enough. 



Exercise 121. 

S'amus-er, 1. ref. to Inter romp-re, 4. ir. to Se tromp-er, 1. ref. to be 

amuse one's self ; interrupt} mistaken; 

S'approch-er, 1. ref. folnvit-er, 1. to invite ; Se por-ter, 1. ref. to be 

come near ; Mett-re, 4. ir. to put on; or do; 

S'eloign-er, 1. ref. to go Mouill-er, 1. to wet ; Voyage, m. journey. 

from; Ot-er, 1. to take off; 

S'ennuy-er, 1. ref. [§ 49.] Peut-ctre, perhaps; 

to be or become weary; Sech-er, 1. to dry ; 

1. Quel habit mettriez-vous si vous alliez a la chasse? 2. Je 
inettrais un habit vert. 3. N'oteriez-vous pas vos bottes, si elles 
etaient mouillees ? 4. Je les oterais, et je les ferais secher. 5. Si 
vous aviez froid. ne vous approcheriez- vous pas du feu? 6. Je m'en 
approcherais certainement. 7. Votre petit garcon ne s'en eloigne- 
rait-il pas, s'il avait trop chaud? 8. II s'en eloignerait bien vite. 9. 
Vous ennuieriez-vous ici? 10. Je ne m'ennuierais pas, je m'amuse- 
rais u lire. 11. Ne vous tromperiez-vous pas, si vous faisiez ce cal- 
cul ? 12. Je me tromperais peut-etre, si j'etais interrompu. 13. 
Viendriez-vous si on vous invitait? 14. Je viendrais avec beaucoup 
de plaisir. 15. Ne vous porteriez-vous pas mieux, si vous lisiez 
moms? 16. Je me porterais beaucoup mieux. 17. Ne faudrait-il 
pas lui parler de votre affaire? 18. II faudrait lui en parler. 19. 
Combien d'argent vous faudrait-il ? 20. II me faudrait mille francs, 
si je faisais ce voyage. 21. Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux lui parler que 
lui ecrire ? 22. II vaudrait mieux lui ecrire. 23. Si vous etiez a. 
ma place, que feriez-vous 1 24. Si j'etais a. votre place, je lui paierais 
fi que je lui dois. 25. Si j'avais le temps, je porterais volontiers 
vos lettres a. la poste. 

Exercise 122. 

1. Would you not read if you had time? 2. I would read two 
hours every day if I had time. 3. What coat would your brother 
put on if he went to church ? 4. He would put on a black coat. 5. 
Would you put on a black ha.. 6. I would put on a straw hat 



176 LESSON LXIXL 

(chapeau de vaille) if it was warm. 7. Would you not draw [L. 39, 
6.] near the fire if you were cold? 8. We would draw near it. 
9. Would you not take oil' your coat? 10. I would take it off, if it 
were wet 11. Would you go to my father's if he invited yon 1 12 
[would go to bis house and to your brother's, if they invited mo. 
13. Would you put on your boots, if they were wet ? 14. If Ihey 
were wet, I would not put them on. 15. How much money wculd 
you want, if you went to England? 1G. We won'.d want th/ce 
thousand franca 17. Would you not be better if you lived {de~ 
mcurer) in the country? 18. I should not be better. 19. Would 
it not be better to write to your brother ? '20. It would be better to 
Vote to him. 21. Would you read the book if I lent it to you ! 22. 
I would certainly read it. 23. IT you were in his place, would you 
go to school! 2\. It' I were in his place, I would go. 2o. If you 

my place, would yon write to him? 26. I would write to 
him every day. 27. ir sister be mistaken? 28. She 

would not be :.. attentive. '29. If you rose every 

at live, would you be better? 30. I should not be better. 
31. Would yon .-on foot? 32. I would prefer going on 

!:. 33. Would you uot sit down ? 31. I would sit down 
it' I were tired. 



Xm. LE£ON LXILL 

'. Ir.) ia u*cd in the formation of a number of 

I, Fairo fa ire, to have made, 

er, to have mended; (aire la cnieine, to 

: laire bouillir, re rGtir 

chauffer, to warm (in speaking of food); laire bonne 

• 

ititeV. 

Yous av amended. 

2. Tii fiure never varies, when it precedes an 
Infinitive — 

3. Faire peur, to frighten; f.iire attention, ' %; faire 

faire du mal, to hurt, take A before a 
noon: — 



...-.:.. IT ■.■-.•/ '-. \gtemed thou children* 
Vous leur avcz (kit mal. You Ur'c hurt them. 



LESSON LXIIL, 



177 



4. The last example will show that, when a noun preceded by a, 

expiessed or understood, is replaced by a pronoun, that pronoun will 
takt the form of the indirect regimen (dative). By an exception to 
the rules for the place of personal pronouns, when faire attention 
has for its indirect object a pronoun representing a person, that pro- 
noun follows the verb: — 

Nous ferons attention a lui. We will pay attention to Turn. 

5. In speaking of the parts of the body, the French use the article 
ie, la, les, &c, instead of the possessive adjective [§ 77, (9.)] when 
the possession is expressed by a reflective (L. 37. R. 1.) or other per- 
sonal pronoun or by some other word in the sentence : — 

Vous ru'avez fait mal a la main. You have hurt my hand. 

Lc bras lui fait mal. His arm hurls or pains him. 



Resume of Examples. 



Ferez-vous raccommoder vos sou- 

liers. 
Je ferais faire un habit si j'avais de 

l'argent 1 
II ne sait pas faire la cuisine. 
Avez-vous fait cuire votre viande 1 
Ferez-vous chauffer votre bouillon 1 
Vous lui avez fait mal au coude. 
Vous m'avez fait mal au pied. 
Vous avez fait peindre votre mai- 

son. 



Will you have your shoes mended ? 

I would bespeak a new coat if I had 

money. 
He does not understand cooking. 
Have you cooked your meal ?' 
Will you warm your broth ? 
You have hurt his elbow. 
You have hurt my fool. 
You have had your house painted. 



Exercise 123 
Gravure, f. 



engj-av-Voignet, m. wrist; 
ing ; Tete, f. head ; 

Ma<;,on, m. mason; Tout-a-l'heure, by-and- 

March-er, lo step, tread; by; 
Ou. where; Travail, m. work, la- 



Bat-ir, 2. to build; 
Bouillon, ra. broth; 
Bras, m. ami; 
Cuisinier, m. cook; 
Epaule, f. shoulder; 
Gigot-de-mouton, rn. fe°-Pied, m.foot; bor. 

of mutton ; 

1. Quand ferez-vous batir une maison? 2. J'en ferai batir une 
Pannee prochaine, si je regois mon argent. 3. Avez-vous fait bouil- 
lir ce gigot de mouton? 4. Je l'ai fait rotir. 5. Le cuisinier a-t-il 
fait chauffer votre bouillon 1 6. II ne l'a pas encore fait chauffer, mais 
il le fera tout-a.-1'heure. 7. N'avez-vous pas fait venir des livres? 
8. Nous n'en avons pas fait venir, mais nous avous fait venir des 
gravures. 9. N'avez-vous pas fait peur a ces petites iilles? 10. 
Nous leur avons fait peur. 11. Ferez-vous attention a votre travail ? 
12. J'y ferai attention. 13. Avez-vous fait mal a cette petite fille? 
14. Je ne lui ai pas fait mal. 15. N'avez-vous pas fait mal a cq 
ehien? 16. Je lui ai fait mal. 17. Ou avez-vous fait mal a votre fils! 
8* 



178 LESSON LXIV. 

18. Je lui ai iait rnal an bras et a la main. 19. No lui avez-vous pas 
fait mal an pied? 20. Je lui ai fait raal a Tepaulo. 21. A qui ce 
macon a-t-il fait mal ? 22. II n'a fait mal a personns. 23. Vousai-je 
t'ait mal au pied. 24. Vous m'avez marche sur le DMS! '-i vous m'avez 
fait mal. 25. La tete, l'epaule, le bras, le poignet et la main me font 
mal. [R. j.) 

Exercise 121. 

1. Will you have your coat mended? 2. I will not have it 
mended. 3. \^ill your brother have his house painted? 4. He will 
have it painted next year. 5. Will you not have a coat made? 6. I 
would have one made if I had money. 7. Have you hurt your 
brother? 8. I have hurt him, I have stepped npon his foot. 9. 
Does his arm pain him? 10. Yes, Sir, his shoulder, arm and wrist 
pain him. 11. Will not your son pay attention to his work? 12. 
He will pay attention to it, lie has nothing else (rim autre chose) to 
do. 13. Have I hurt your hand or your elbow 1 14. You have 
hurt my fingers (daigls). 15. Does your cook understand cooking? 
16. He understands cooking. 17. Has the cook roasted that leg of 
mutton? 18. IK' has boiled it. 19. Has he nut warmed it? 20. 
He has nut had time to warm it. 21. Has the physician sent for en- 

gravingsl 23. He h Have yon hurt his 

J l. I have not hurt his elbow, but his hand. 25. I lave I 

r.ot hurt your You have hurt my wrist. 27. Where 

have you hart your - I hurt him. 2!'. Would the 

• I that meat if he had time ? 3d. He would not boil it, he 

31. When will he warm your brothl 88. He will 

warm it hv-and-hy, if lie has time. 88. If you had stepped upon 

would you not have hurt me? 31. I should certainly have 

hurt you, if 1 had stepped upon your foot 



LESSON LXIV. >N I. XIV. 

1 Faire conn -come or get acquainted, takes the rrepo. 

•Jtlon avc before its < ro an mille, die, faire no 

faire un tour de promenade, mean mtfa, &c., toga 

on ajnurnn. in take <i walk : — 

m fait Vingt mill's a lirmtm miks on hor*- 

val 
3. Faire sea adieux, faire des e tuple t tea, fairs des progris, faire des 



LESSON LXIV. 179 

questions, f lire du feu, correspond in signification to the English 
expressions, lo bid farewell, lo make purchases, lo improve or progress^ 
to a*k questions, lo make a fire : — 

J'ai fait raes adieus a raes parents. I bid farewell to my relations. 
Avez-voua fait du feu dans ma Have you made a fire in my room? 
cliambrel 

3. Faire sortir means, to send out, or to order nut ; faire entrer, to 
let m, to bid come in ; faire attendre, lo keep wailing : — 

Vous les avez fait entrer dans ma You made them come into my room. 

eliambre. 
Vous avez fait attendre mon pere. You made my father wait. 

4. Faire son possible, to do one's best, takes the preposition pour. 
Faire semblant, to pretend, faire usage, lo make use, are followed by 
de:— 

Nous avons fait notre possible. We have done our bed. 

Resume of Examples. 

We became acquainted with them. 



Nous avons fait connaissance avec 

eux. 
Vous avez fait vingt lieues en dix 

heures. 
Nous ferons un tour de promenade. 
Je lui ai fait plusieurs questions. 
lis nous ont fait leurs adieus. 
Vous nous avez fait attendre. 
Cet enfant fait semblant de dormir. 
Vous faites semblant de lire. 

Nous ferons notre possible pour le 



You travelled twenty leagues in ten 

hours. 
We shall take a walk. 
I asked him several questions. 
They have bid us farewell. 
You have made us wait. 
That child pretends to be asleep. 
You pretend to be reading, or do at 

if you were reading. 
We will do our best to see him. 



Exercise 125. 

Aise, glad; Se fach-er, 1. ref. to be- Negociant, m. merchant. 

Aliment, m.food; come angry ; Quart, m. quarter; 

Credit, m. credit; Faire l'aumone, to give Rarement, seldom; 

Demand-er, 1. -to ask; alms; Reuss-ir, 2. to succeed; 

Dorm-ir, 2. ir. to sleep ; Laiss-er, 1. to leave, let ; Riz, m. rice. 

fttude, f. study ; Mendiant, m. beggar ; 

1. Seriez-vous bien aise de faire connaissance avec ce monsieur 
2. Pen serais bien aise. 3. Ce cheval fait-il une Iieue en un quart 
dheure 1 4. II a fait ce matin une lieue en douze minutes. 5. Leur 
avez-vous fait des questions ] 6. Je leur en ai fait.* 7. Ciuelles 
questions leur avez-vous faites? 8. Je leur ai demande s'ils avaient 
fait des cmplettes? 9. Vos eleves font-ils des progres dans leurs 
etudes ? 10. Us j^p font pas beaucoup, ils viennent rarement a l'ecolo. 

* Bee L. 42. 11, and $ 135, (7.) 



180 LESS ON LXIV. 

11. Si vous etiez chez vous, feriez-vous semblant de dormir? 12. J* 
ne ferais certainemcnt pas semblant de dormir. 13. Pourquoi ne 
faites-votis pas entrer ce mendiant ' 14. Ma mere vient de lui faire 
l'aumone. 15. .: fait-il usage de son credit. 1G. II en fait 

usage. 17. De quels malade fait-il usage? 18. I: fait 

usage de riz et de bouillon. 19. Faites-vous votre pcfsiblc pour 
20. Je fais tout mon possible. 21. Avez-vous fait entrer 
ee3 cnfants, ou les avez-vous fait sortir? 22. Je les ai laisses ou ils 
ctaient. 23. Vous :.' attendrel 24. Vous nous avea 

fait attendre pluaieura heurea 2j. Si vous faisiez attendre ces 
dames, elks be facheraient. 

Exercise 12G. 

1. Does that child pretend to readl 2. Hfl pretends to read. 3. 
Does not that gentleman pretend to Bleep? 4. lie does not pretend 
it), b. Will you take a walk this 
morning? (>. [would . pleasure, if I had time. 7. Have 

you become acquainted with the physician? 8. I have not yet be- 
I with him. 9. How many questions have yi I 

(ri) the child ? 10. I asked him many questions. 1 1. Have you asked 
him if be 12. 1 did not ash him. 13. Will 

not that little girl do 11. She will do 

.' what food do !:en you 

,*id and rice. 17. Have you for- 
gotten to bid farewell to your mother? 18. I had not forgotten it; 
1 intended to go to her hoi 1". Willi whom have 

21. Do you not 

Dg ! -2. I di Biting, they are 

i nol make 

Have you left your children in your room ? 2f>. I have 

not don- Have you sent them out .' 28. I bare 

them on 29. Have you 

made purchases this morning? 30. 1 have made none, I have no 

a fire in my room \ 32. He has 

made one. 33. Will you do your best to come to-morrow? 31. I 

will do my best to < .;i. Wo travelled yesterday forty 

leagues in sixteen hours. 



LEBSOU 1XT. 



181 



LESSON LXV. 



LEgON IXV. 



1. Faire is also used in the sense of playing the part of, or preteruL 
ing to be : — 

II fait le grand seigneur.' He plays the great lord. 

2. Faire also means to matter, to concern, to help: — 

Cela ne fait rien. That is no matter. 

Cela ne vous fait rien. That is nothing to you, does not concern 

you. 
Qu'est-ce-que cela nous fait 1 What is that to us ? 
Je ne puis qu'y faire. J cannot help it. 

3. Se faire mal conjugated reflectively, means to liurt one's self. 
Se faire is used reflectively in the sense of the English verbs, to be- 
come, to turn. It is, also, used .with the signification of the words 
cause, have, get, <%c. Se faire takes ttre as its auxiliary. [} 46. 
L. 45.] :— 

I have become a physician. 

I have had a pair of boots made for 



I have had my beard shaved. 
We have had our hair cut. 



Je me suis fait medecin. 

Je me suis fait faire une paire 

de bottes. 
Je me suis fait raser. 
Nous nous sommes fait couper les 

cheveux. 
Je me suis fait mal au doigt. / have hurt my finger. 

4. Besides the instances mentioned, [L. 33. R. 5.], faire is used 
unipersonally in many idiomatic expressions : — 

II fait jour, il fait nuit. It is daylight, it is night. 

II fait de la boue, il fait de la It is muddy, it is dusty. 

poussiere. 

II fait clair de lune, il fait ohscur. It is moonlight, il is dark. 

II fait bon ici, il fait cher ici. It is comfortable here, it is dear here. 

Resume of Examples. 



Ce jc-une homme fait ie savant. 

Cela ne me fait rien. 
Que pouvons-nous y faire 1 
Mon frere s'est fait orfevre. 
Pcurquoi vous faites-vous raser? 
Je me ferai couper les cheveux. 
Je me suis fait batir une maison. 
Nous nous sommes fait mal a la 

tete. 
II commence a. se faire tard. 
Fait-il cher vivre k Paris 1 
II fait beaucoup de boue. 



That young man plays the teamed 

man. 
That is nothing to me. 
What can we do to it ? 
My brother has turned goldsmith. 
Why do you get shaved ? 
I will have my hair cut. 
I have had a house built for me. 
We have hurt our heads. 

It is beginning to groio late. 
Is it dear living in Paris ? 
It is very muddy. 



182 LESSON I- XV. 

Exercise 127. 

Absolnment abstMUly ; fcturliant. m. student ; Peintre, m. pavrter; 
{Sm.^«« Fou.folle,/^, sfe/fe- Personnc, m «^; 
Artisan, m. i«c« . Tanneur, m. tenner; 

RS^* m^Ainent, e, inper- Vigneron.m. ™~*ra 

rino-rine o vexed; , 

B ,t p. prwuwiwjOttvrfBT, m. woriman ; Vitrier, m. *te««r. 

1 Pourquoi cet ouvricr fait-il le malade ! 2. II fait le nialade 

ravailler. 3. Cet fetudiant no fiuU 

savant ? 4. 11 no fait pas le savant, il fait lo foil. 5. biod-il 

;in „ homme de lair, lo mattre ici ! 6. 11 no tied a pereonne 

dc faire Timportinont. 7. Cela fait-il quelque chose ! [R. ».] 8. 

Cola no fait abaolument rien. 9. Cela peuOl Sure quelque oho 

,erons1 LO. Cela ne lent fait rien da tout. 11. N ctos-vous 

- 12. Nous en Bommee bien ftehes, nuus 

;-,l pas lait 

i i. Non, Monsieur, il B'eat fait peintre. 16. Cet artisan 

ritrierl l& Us'est fait taiineur.et eon frcre a'cat 

f ul .„l.lit it. I • pas fait couper lee chereuxl 

vouspaa a, 
bonne bear* 

,l.,ir do lunel 22. 11 f '-^ '' n « 

[UU bon vivre en Ameriqoel 24 D 

l0 maroho. 

1 Doei not Ihtf gentleman pUj ' ^' Ho plays 

Um lord and fool* : D w not that boy 

.. Biek I i. n.- pretends to be »ick, he dooa not wish to 

wish to work do you pi* 

7. i it muddy to- 

o1 muddy, it is dusty. 9. Will it be moonlight tins 

eroningl 10. ttwl - ht, it will be very dark, II. la 

it comfortable hen I 12. It is very comfortable, 18. It il too warm 

neither too warm nor too cold here, 15. 

w .urhaircutl 16. 1 had my haircut yesterday morn- 

17 Will von nut go home, it U 

li„h, 90 ll,s not the g azier tur i ' 21. Ho! 

turned goidemlth, be has turned Ujk-h that co 

brother! 23. That does not concern him. m Arc y 
.orrv for that I 25. I MB sorry for it, but 1 cannot help it. 20. VI hy 



LESSON LX VI. 183 

do you get shaved? 27. Because I cannot shave myself. 28. Have 
you not hurt those children'? 29. I have not hurt them. 30. Have 
you hurt your arm? 31. No, Sir, but I have hurt my head. 32. 
Has not your sister hart her hand ? 33. She has hurt her hand, and 
my mother has hurt her elbow. 34. Have you not hurt your head? 
35 I have not hurt my head, but I have hurt my hand. 



lesson: lxvi. leqon lxvi. 

1. Avoir mal, means to have a pain or ache, a sore. When used 
in relation to one of the limbs, it means generally, to have a sore, a 
bruise, a cut, &c. The name of the part of the body is preceded by 
the preposition a and the article [See L. 63, R. 5. § 77, (9.)] : — 

N'avez-vous pas mal air doigt 1 Have you not a we finger? 

Je n'ai pas mal a la tete. My head does not ache. 

2. Avoir une douleur, or des douleurs, corresponds to the English 
to have a pain or pains : — 

J'ai une dou 1 3iir au bras. I have a pain in my arm. 

3. The construction mentioned in R. 1, is used aflcr avoir, taken in 
the sense of tenir, to hold, and after avoir froid, and avoir chaud [L. 
63, R. 5.] :— 

Vous avez les armes a la main. You have your arms in your hands. 

J'ai chaud aux mains etaux pieds. My hands' and feet are warm. 

4. The article le, &c, is used before words indicating moral and 
physical properties, in Cases where the English use a or an, or omit 
the article. When, however, an adjective precedes the noun, un, une, 
or de, des, are at times used : — 

Cette dame a l'esprit juste. That lady has a correct mind. 

Votre soeur a les yeux noirs. Your sister has black eyes. 

5. A moral or physical property, which, in the individual is single, 
is not put in the plural in French, though the reference be to a num 
ber of individuals : — 

Ces dames ont l'esprit juste. Those ladk >ave correct minds. 

Ces gallons se sont fait mal a la tete. Those boys u- ■ ce hurl then heads. 

Resume of Examples. 



N'avcz-vous pas mal au pied 1 
Ccttc demoiselle a le mal de tete. 
N 'avez- vous pas mal aux dents 1 
Mon frere a le mal de dents. 
Mon cousin a mal au cote. 



Have you not a sore foot ? 
That young lady has the headache. 
Do not your teelh aclie ? 
My brother has the toothache. 
My cousin has a pain in kit side, 



184 



LESSON L X V I. 



II a des douleurs de poitrine. 
Qu'avez-vous a la niain 1 

Je n'ai rien a la main. 

J'ai chaud atix mains et froid aux 

i-urs ont le gout dclicat. 
Ces messieurs out le aea aquilin. 



He has pains in his chest. 

■u in your hand? 
■he mailer with you* 

I g in my hand. 

itm »»« 

V hands are warm and my feel 

'■rs have a delicate taste. 
T.wse gentlemen have Roman noses. 



Exeiicise 129. 

Bleu, e. blue ; Mai da ::■• 

Bonche, C mouth ; [W, almost; 

Dent I. Mai < i . •:-( ill" in. cur- Tcint, in. complexion; 

ache; 
f. throat ; tm ceil, cues. 

ire, f. memory ,■ 

1. Ce ji-une boOMM a-t-il ni.il .'i la gorge! 3. Ooi, Monsieur, ii 

y a deux jours «|u"il a le m is SOUVeat m:il 

i. J'ai le inal de tete presqai -. j. N'aves* 

J';ii ni.il :.n bras et a la main. 
HBOC a-Lellc le inal ti'orciUe. S. Oui, Madame, elle a le inal d'oreille 

le. i". Noo, 
': N 1 .voua point froid 

eor,je n'y ai point froid. 13. 4 
aieor a-- |oilin1 14. 11 a le nei aquiUn et la 

lie a-t-elle de belles deal 

a-t-il lea 

19. Vo- 

Non, Ifonaienr, elle a 

leayeu -Ha fail mal au visage! 2± 

Ilea une lionno 
9A. I • - kaliennea 
n'ont pas le teint i. 

Exercise 130. 

1. What la the matter with your hand ? '2. I have bad a soro hand 
■ 

: our brother In hi 

M a pen in his hand. 7. Has your little boy a aore throat ? 
8. He has a sore throat. 9. OUT eldest sister the tooth- 

ache? 10. She has not the toothache, but ahe Has a sore linger. 
11. Why doe* uot tin* BOldiu walk ! 13. Hi cannot walk, he has a 



EBSON LXVII. 186 

sore foot. 13. Have you not sore feet? 14. My feet are not sore. 
15. If your fingers were sore would you write? 16. If T had sore 
fingers I should not write. 17. If your brother had th'e headache 
would he study his lesson? 18. He could not study his lesson if 
he had the headache. 19. Has not that gentleman pains in his chest? 
20. He has pains in his chest and in his side. 21. Has your little 
girl black eyes or blue eyes? 22. She has black eyes and a fresh 
complexion. 23. Has not your daughter the tooth-ache ? 24. She 
has the looth-ache and the ear-ache. 25. Are not your hands and 
feet cold? 26. My hands are cold, but my feet are warm. 27. Have 
not those ladies aquiline noses? 28. They have aquiline noses and 
a fair complexion (le leint beau). 29. Has your sister large hands ? 
30. No, Sir, my sister has small hands. 31. Have not those little 
girls hurt their heads ? 32. They have not hurt their heads, they 
have hurt their faces. 33. That little boy has black hair (cheveux). 



LESSON LXVIL LEQON LXVIL 

1. Avoir beau — Vous avez beau, corresponds in signification to the 
English expression, it is in vain for you to. It must be followed by 
the infinitive : — 

Vous avez beau dire, il ne viendra It is in vain for you to speak, he wiU 
pas. not come. 

2. Epouser, marier, to marry, have, in French, a different mean- 
ing. Marier, conjugated actively, can only have as its nominative 
the person performing the ceremony, or giving one or both of the 
parties in marriage ; epouser takes, as its nominative, the contracting 
parties only, and must always be followed by a direct regimen. Se 
marier, to get married, and marier, conjugated passively, take the 
same nominative as epouser. 

M. L. a marie sa fillc avec M. Q. Mr. L. has married his daughter to 
Mr. G. 

M. Q. a epouse la fille de M. L. Mr. G. has married Mr. L.'s daugh- 

ter. 

M. G. et Ml'e. L. sont marics. Mr. G. and Miss L. are married. 

Mon frfire va se marier. My brother is going to be vMrried. 

3. Un de mes amis, is equivalent to the English, a friend of 
mine : — 

Votre ami a epouse une de mes Your friend has married Jt friend of 
amies. mine. 



186 LESSON LXVIL 



Resume of Examples. 



11b ont lit.au dire ct beau fairc, ils ) Whatever they may say or do, lk>vf 



nc L'empecheroat pea de Be ma 

ricr. 
Tons avez beau lui faire des re- 

montrancea. 
L'evOque de B. a marie ma sceur. 

Le capitaine G. a epousS m 
sine. 

Quail 1 il so mariera. il nous invitcra 
a la 

rice avec mon 
cousin. 

de nu-s 



- •' prevent his marrying. 

vain for you to remonstrate 
Ufith Mm. 

lop of D. has married my 

Captain G. has married my cousin. 

When he marries, he will invite us 

V ■■■sin is married to my cousin, 

y sin has married a cousin of 

7uine. 

d has mar. 



LSI. 

Aind, e, elder, eldest ; Devoir. 8. ir. !„,■•■ to Parent, 0, ".'ation; 
|ue, in. arch- I Princesac, f. prim 

Proc! 

oir, •". ir. to /,.■ 

; 
: 

I. V< va-t-illr pas B6 marior .' 9. Kile se mariera 

proehaine. B. < Elle epoojeera le ftia 

is qui a marie' its deux epoui I 

- -t-il pa* aoasi aerie' 

'l domoiaelle a-t- 

1. L. capitaine au 25* n,< i 
d'inunterie. II. Ce \ llard n'a-t-il pi mnrierl 19. Ii 

tort de se marier. mais il a tori emoiaelle. 

! ii EHea 
rieronl le moia prochaia. ! 

rii :.:. it. Qai doivent- ' 18. L'aiaoa 

doit epo ( ;. n'a.i-il 

I 

•J 1. J'.'M 

do de v«s Uvrea et n . parler a una 

I. la y.nir brother v g r , it is in 

vain lor us to speak to Lum, he will marry her. 3. Will not your 



LESSON LXVIII. 187 

father marry your sister to Mr. G? 4. No, Sir, he will marry her 
to Mr. L. 5. Is Captain H. married'? 6. No, Sir, he is not yet mar- 
ried, hut he will be married next year. 7. Whom does he intend to 
marry ? 8. He intends to marry a cousin of mine, who is at my 
brother's. 9 Who will marry them ? 10. My eldest brother intends 
to marry them. 11. Is your youngest sister married? 12. No, Sir, 
Bhe is not married. 13. Is she going to be married? 14. She will 
marry when she is [L. 61. 5.] old enough (assez agee). 15. Whom 
did Colonel J. marry? 16. He married a sister of mine. 17. How 
long have they been married [L. 57. 2.] ? 18. They have been mar- 
ried two years. 19. Is not that young lady wrong to get married? 
20. She is wrong to marry, she is too young. 21. Who married 
General S. and Miss N. ? 22. The bishop of Arras married them. 
23. Did not the archbishop of York marry that couple? 24. The, 
archbishop of Paris married them. 25. Will not your aunt marry? 
26. She will not marry. 27. Is not your sister at home? 28. No, 
Sir, she is with (chez) an aunt of mine. 29. Is your brother at your 
house? 30. No, Sir, he is with one of my relations. 31. Is he 
married? 32. He is not married. 33. Is Captain H. married? 34 
He was married last week. 35. He married Miss H. 



LESSON LXVIII. LECON LXVIII. 

DIMENSION, WEIGHT, ETC. 

1. The verb avoir is used in expressing the size of an object. The 
preposition de precedes the noun of dimension. When there is no 
verb in the sentence, the preposition must be placed before the num 
ber, and again before the noun of dimension : — 

Cette muraille a dix pieds de That walk is ten feet high. 

hauteur. 
Ce puits a cent pieds de profondeur. That well is one hundred feet deep 
Une table de quatre pieds de Ion- A table four feci long. 

gucur. 

2. In sentences, where sizes are compared, and the verb etro ia 
Urfed, the preposition de is placed before the number expressing the 
excess : — 

Vous etes plus grand que moi de You are taller than I by two inches. 
deux pouces. 

3. When the price of an article is mentioned, the article le is used 
before the noun expressing the measure, weight, &c. When the 



188 



LBSBON LXVIII. 



remuneration, or rent, &e. for a definite space of time is mentioned 
the preposition par (per) is used: — 

Le beurre Be vend an fhmc la livre. Butter is sold a franc a pound, 
11 gagne six franca par jour. He cams six francs per dan. 

4. The same preposition is used, when we speak of the number of 
times any occurrence takes place in a given space of time : — 
Jc vaU a la poste deux fob par I go to the post-office twice a day. 
jour. 

Rtsoxfl of Examples. 

Cin namon is sold two francs a pound, 

1k sir francs a metre. 

l'!c is five hundred fa L high. 



La candle se vend dvux francs la 

livre. 
Cette Boie rant six francs le metre. 

cinq cents pieds de 

hantenr. 

Cet etang u huit pieds de profuii- 
dour. 

ambre •!«• quhute i 
■■:< ur. sur dix-huit d • largcur, 
ct huit de hantenr. 

:■• taille est voire t": 

8a taille est da cinq pieds huit 

:ni est-il grand on i 

ll ■ - 1 

ii>> >ti eat plus haute one la 

ini'iiii'', il>- CUM pi 

: ur Jour. 



That pond is eight feel deep. 

%g uii eighteen 

.'feet high. 

I • /■ 7 
igki inches. 

Is our friend tall or short? 

H 

V higher than mine bf 

I :'(l'J. 

II pi'is us • ; U fir ma a iccck. 



; 



Prorbndeur, f. depth; 

POUCC, in 

•ird, rod. 



Bon march6 .hi-op; Qrandenr, f. riztt 

i 

S 

I 

I 

re inaison cst-elle grande ? 2. Elle a cinquante | 

I l .;r \otre jarilin 

'. II a rineft-cinq verges <!■■ longueur largeur. 

i dix-huitpouceade longueur, 

d largeur et ti ..-. 7. Votre maiaon cst-elle plus 

longue (pie celle-ci .' $. I 

1 1 

i de hauteur, i~. I>o 
• lie est cet officicrl 13. II e taille. ll. Do 

coinbieu . 

grand de toutc la ttte. 1»: de beaueonp pi 

que moi ! 17. Je suis plus grand quo vous de trois poucea. 



LESSON LXII. 189 

18. Combien cette 6tofle se vend-elle la verge? 19. Elle so vend 
trois francs b metre. 20. La cassonade ne se vend-elle pascher? 
21. Elle se vend a bon marche. 22. Combien delettreseerivez-vous 
par semaine ? 23. Je n'en ecris que six par semaine. 24. Ccmbien 
payez-vous par semaine pour votre loyer? 25. Je ne paie que dix 
francs par semaine. 

Exercise 134. 

1. How large is your father's garden? 2. It is twenty -five rods 
fongand ten broad. 3. Is your cousin's house large ? 4. It is fifty- 
six feet long and forty broad. 5. Is your house larger than mine ? 
6. It is larger than yours by ten feet. 7. Do you know how deep 
that well is? 8. It is twenty-five feet deep and six feet broad. 
9. How is that cloth sold a metre? 10. It is sold forty-five francs a 
metre. 1 1. How much do you receive a week for your work ? 12. I 
receive fifty francs a week for my work. 13. How much does your 
friend pay a month for his board (pension, f.) ? 14. He pays seventy 
francs a month. 15. Are you taller than your cousin? 16. I am 
taller than he by the whole head. 17. Is not your nephew taller than 
your son ? 18. He is taller than my son, by three inches. 19. How 
large is this room? 20. It is sixty feet long by forty. 21. What 
size is your brother ? 22. He is tall, he is taller than I. 23. How 
many books do you read a week ? 24. I read ten volumes a week. 
25. How is butter sold a pound ? 26. Butter is sold two francs a 
pound. 27. Do you know how much your son earns a day ? 
28. He earns as much as yours, he earns ten francs a day. 29. How 
much is that silk worth a metre ? 30. It is worth six francs a metre. 
31. Our friend's stature is middling. 32. Do you go to church twice 
a day? 33. I go to church once a day. 34. Does your son go to 
the post-office every day ? 35. He goes thither six times a day. 



LESSON LXIX. LEgON LXIX. 

1. Mettre (4. ir.) forms, in French, many idiomatic expressions. 
Mettre a meme de, to enable ; mettre pied a terre, to alight, to land; 
mettre le pied, to set one's foot ; mettre a la porte, to turn out of 
doors; mettre au fait de, to acquaint with; mettre a. l'abri, to shelter, 
mettre a l'ombie, to put in the shade; mettre un habit a l'endroit, a 
'envers, to put on a coat right side out, wrong side out, &c. :— 



190 



LESSON LXIX. 



Nous l'avons mis a meme de con 

naitre la vcritS. 
11 a mis cut iusolent ii la portc. 



We enabled him (o '-enow the truth. 



He turned that ins doit person out 
of dt 

2. Mettre conjugated reflectively, i. e. sc mettrA, means /.> plac* 
one's self, to dress one's self; se mettre a table, In sit down to table, 
so mettre en colerc, to became angry, to put one's self into a passion. 

II se nut a ['ombre, an BOleiL He places himself in Hie shade, in Iht 



3. Se mettre. followed by an infinitive, means to cemmence, to le- 
gin :— 

lis se mircnt ii plcurer. ;'<>>£■ 

A I'anglaiae, a la Iran raise, are used elliptieally for i la mode 
franeaise, a la mode anglaise, after the French, after the English 
fashion. 



Ii. Ed '•:.': OV I AAMPLES. 

Cc cavalier a aria pied a terra. 
Vona a'osea mettre le pied cbei lui 



I'.mts a I'abrl '!<• l.i 
ploie. 
Voua ..■ 

Pourqu i I'om- 

nta Be min Dl i 
Ponrqnol ne • 

a I'oui i 
Je vala in.- mettre i d pi naion. 



That horseman is come down from 

his horse. 
You dan not set \wur foot inside his 

house. 



from the rain. 
) i put iiour cloak inside out. 

llieman always dresses after 

i: 
\ N to table at ten 

li ■ .n to the shade? 

Ulren commenced hi 

t Stt yourself to icorkl 

I 

U> commence our jcrur- 



■',• fitudl-er, 1. to study ; 

I i alise, f. mettre, dressed, 

&. merveiue, exceedingly Enttv l Pluie, f. ram; 

well; Etourdi, e. giddy Ir. to laugh; 

Couvert, See L. 82 l.j sent Tablier, an 

1. A\ mme de mettre le pied eliez vous 1 

9, Je le lui ai defend a. 3. Avez-vous mia cea tf]\ts a l'alm de la 
pluie. 4. Je lea ai mia a I'abri de la ploie et du vent. .'>. Avcz-voua 
tuis votre 1'ri.re au fldt de eette affaire .' G. Jo ue l'eu ai paa mia an 



LESSON LXIX 191 

fait 7. Ne l'avcz-vous pas mis a meme d'etuaier? 8. Jo l'ai mia 
a. indme de s'instruire, s'il desire le faire. 9. Vuiilez-vous mettro 
cela de cote? 10. Je vais le mettre au soleil. 11. Votre ami n'a-t-il 
pas voulu entrer? 12. II n'a point voulu mettre pied a tefre. 13. 
Votre teinturier n'a-t-il pas mis son tablier a l'envers? 14. Non, 
Monsieur, il l'a mis a l'endroit. 15. N'avez-vous pas mis cet etourdi 
a la porte? 16. Nous lui avons ferme la porte au nez (in his face). 
17. A quelle heure vous mettez-vous a table? 18. Aussitdt que le 
couvert sera mis [L. 61, (5.)]. 19. Cet homme se met-il bien? 20. 
II se met toujours a l'anglaise ou a l'italienne. 21. Ces enfauts ne 
se mirent-ils pas a pleurer ? 22. Au lieu de se mettre a pleurer, ils 
se mirent a rire. 23. Pourquoi ne vous mettez-vous pas a ecrire ? 
24. II est temps de se mettre a table. 25. Ces Siciliennes sont-elles 
bien raises? 26. Elles sont raises a merveille. 

Exercise 136. 

1. Did the gentleman alight this morning? 2. No, Sir, he would 
not alight, he had no time. 3. Have you put that insolent person 
out of doors ? 4. No, Sir, but I forbade him to set his foot in my 
house. 5. Did you shelter those little children from the rain? 6. I 
sheltered them from the rain and the wind. 7. Have you enabled 
your son to study medicine (la medecine)? 8. I enabled him to 
study medicine, if he wishes to do so. 9. Have you put on your 
coat inside out? 10. I have not put it on inside out, but right side 
out. 11. Did you put yourself in a passion? 12. No, Sir, I did 
not become angry. 13. Did you sit down to table at four o'clock 
yesterday? 14. We sat down to table at six o'clock. 15. Do you 
intend to commence boarding? 16. I intend to board with Mr. L. 
(chez M. L.) 17. When do you commence your journey ? 18. We 
commence our journey to-morrow morning. 19. Did your son com- 
mence laughing ? 20. No, Sir. he commenced weeping. 21. Why 
do you not commence working ? 22. Because I am going to com- 
mence reading. 23. Does that lady dress after the English fashion 
24. She dresses after the Italian fashion. 25. Are those ladies wel. 
dressed? 26. They are extremely well dressed. 27. Will you not 
place yourself in the shade ? 28. I will place myself in the sun, I 
am very cold. 29. Is your coat inside out? 30. No, Sir, it is right 
side out. 31. Is this the right side of this cloth (l'endroit) ? 32. It 
is the wrong side (Venvers). 33. Are you not dressed after the Eng- 
lish fashion? 34. I am dressed after the Italian fashion. 35. Yon 
are well dressed. 



192 



LBS SO 



LXX. 



LESSON LXX. LEgON LXX 

the imperative. 
1. Conjugation of the Imperative of the Regular Verbs : — 



Chant -e 


fin -is 


re9 -ois 


rend -s 


ting 


fnish 


receive 


render 


Qu'il DM -e 


cbcr -i*se 


aperg -oive 


vend -o 


let him speak 


let him cherish 


let him perceive 


/<■« him tell 


Donn -ons 


(burn 


pore -evons 


tend -ons 


let us give 


let us furniik 


let us gather 


M us tend 


Clicrch -cz 


pun -issez 


cone -evcz 


entend -ez 


seek 


;)Uii.c\ 


cniciivc 


hear 


Qu'ils port -cnt 


s&is -issent 


d -oivent 


nerd -ent 


let them carry 


let them seize 


Ut tliem owe 


/«£ iA*m /ojki 



2. The second person singular, and the first and seeond persons 
plural of the imperative, are the same as the first person singular, 
and the first and second persons plural, of the present of the indica- 
tive. The pronouns are dropped. 

Je parte, park; je inns, finis. J speak, speak ; I finish, finish. 

3. Exceptions — Avoir, t ■ hate, makes in those persons of the im- 
perative, aie, ai/oiis, aijtz; ctre, to be, sais, snynns, soyez ; savoir, to 
know, sache, sachons, sachez ; and aller, M, and xas before y not fol- 
lowed by an intiii. 

4. Vouloir has only the Becond person plural, veuillez, liave the 
gixjdnrss to. . , . 

5. A third penon singular and plural is given in the imperative by 
most of the French grammarians. These parts, however, belong 
properly to the BUbjOBCtive, u tii< y exprees rather a strong wish than 
a command. Hie English ax p rCSe ioM, UL him speak, that he may 
sj*afc, are rendered in French by qu'il parle. 

6. A droite, B gauche, corrre.-pond in signification to the English 
t: Ihc rig!*/, to the l»fl. 

.r.cho. Go to the right, to the left, 

7. For the place of the pronouns in connection with tho impera- 
tive, see L. 27. R. 1,4 ; L. 28, R. 1, 2, 3, 4. 

:.': of Examples. 

1st in take thr first street to the right. 

F>ek net longer to deceive him. 

1st HI know how to amlenl ourulvet 

with necessaries. 
Pay great attention to what you sty. 



Prcnons la premiere rne a droite. 
Ne cherehez phis a le tromper. 
Bariums nou; contentor do 

sain-. 
Faites bicn attention a ce que tous 

ditea 

DitaS toqioori la vciite. 

Allans! Messieurs, d6p6chez-Yous. 

Tema, Monsieur, voila votre ar^tvit. 
Veuillez accepter c* prtsent 



v,7 the truth. 
Ci>me ! gentlemen, male haste. 
here is your money. 
B* ar> kvmi am to mooept this prmtmt 



LESSON I. XX. 193 



Exercise 137. 

Clef, f. key ; Promett-re, 4. ir. to p w- Renvoy-er, 1 to send 

Crayon, m. pencil; mise; back; 

Institutrice, f. teacher ; Rapport^er, 1. to bring Sans faute, without fail ; 

Obe-ir, 1 . to obey ; back ; Se serv-ir, 2. ref. to use ; 

Partie, f. part ; Remett-re, 4. ir. to de- Tiers, m. third ; 

Precepteur, m. instruc- liver ; Verrez, 3. ir. // c/m voir, 

tor ; to see. 

1. Envoyez chercher le medecin, votre petit garcon est malade. 
2, Nous Pavons deja envoye chercher. 3. Vous n'avez pas besoin 
do votre crayon, pretez-le-moi [L. 27. R. 4; L. 28. R. 4]. 4. Je ne 
saurais vous le preter, je m'en sers. 5. Donnez-le-nioi ou me le 
pretez [§ 100, (6.)]. 6. Je l'ai promis a votre institutrice. 7. Si 
vous ne le lui avez pas dit, dites-le-lui aussitot que possible. 8. Ne le 
lui dites pas encore. 9. Parlez-lui-en [§ 39, 17.] la prochaine fois 
que vous le verrez. 10. Ayez patience, mon ami, votre pere ne tar- 
dera pas a venir. 11. Obeissez a votre precepteur. 12. Je lui 
obeis toujours. — Donnez-lui-en une bonne partie. 13. Je lui en ai 
deja donne plus des deux tiers. 14. Avez vous porte cette clef au 
serrurier? 15. J'ai oublie de la lui remettre. 16. Portez-la-lui sans 
faute cette apres-midi. 17. Veuillez me dire ou demeure M. G. 
18. Prenez la premiere rue a gauche, il demeure dans la deuxieme 
maison a droite. 19. Allons, Mesdemoiselles, depechons-nous. 20. 
Menez-les-y le plus tot possible. 21. Ne me les rapportez pas. 22. 
Renvoyez-les-moi demain. 23. Portons-les-y. 24. Ne les y portons 
pas. 25. Pretez-les-lui, mais ne les lui donnez pas. 

Exercise 138. 

1. Give a book to the young man. 2. I have already given hini 
one, and he does not read it. 3. Lend it to him, if you will not givo 
it to him. 4. I will not lend it to him. 5. Make haste, young la- 
dies, it is ten o'clock. 6. Have the goodness to give me a pen. 7. 
I have given one to your brother. 8. Obey your father, and speak 
io your sister. 9. Will you not send for the letter? 10. I will send 
/o:" it. 11. Send for it as soon as you can. 12. Do not do so (le), 
but write to my cousin. 13. Come, children (mes enfants), learn 
your lesson. 14. Give him some [j 39, 17], or lend him some [§ 100, 
(6.)]. 15. Do not make haste, we have (le) time. 16. Have pa- 
tience, my child, the merchant will soon come. 17. Send it to him, 
/f you cannot give it to him. 18. Write to him this afternoon with- 
»ut fail. 19. I would write to him if I had time. 20. Let us take 
the first itreet to the left. 21. Take the second street to the right. 
9 



19 4 LESSON LXXI. 

22. Pay attention to what your brother says. 23. Let us tell the 
truth 24 Let us read that hook to-day. 25. Pay your debt* aa 
soon as possible. 26. Let us obey our instructor. 27. Carry the 
kev to him 28. Bring me back the books which I have lent you. 
29 Do not bring them back to me, read them. 30. Let us have 
patience, we shall soon have money. 31. Let us speak to them, they 
are at my father's. 32. Tell them that 1 intend to write to them to- 
morrow morning. 33. Go to church this afternoon. 34. Bring me 
back my letters. 35. Do not carry them there, but bring then to 
rn»> as soon as possible. 

-*—- •- 

LISSOM LXXI. LBGON LXXL 

1 A verb following another verb in the imperative, is put in tne 
infinite, (according to general Rule L 21. 2.) The conjunction 
which often cornea between the Iwo ferba in Bnghab, is not used in 

^Stapnrieraunw 

A C7 i 

o. I>roni!r fear* to to* heed; when followed by m- 

other teife In the Infinit ' '"■'— 

abet. ! "f a!l - 

3 Prendre le deniL mtomoumngi |«iidieUpetoe,li 

,,„•,,„ re un 
prendre dn cafe, dn the, ft*, to tofa 

■nvova ch« oUtnr. 

N'av ;ul '■ 

Preoee hi peine ae • 

. dU the OU dU 

Qael I>.»rti av«/.-v,.\-.s pris 1 

Attends. 4. to - J?, 1 

to» , r,;/^ ; 

ChrcoUU.m.cWa*; or; ./ lo \^n,U 

Courricr, in ■ . r ' l " ' 

Troi-re 4 ir. U> I- , ; , A, W2-W. 

Wch^cr; 1 <o *«r , QIaelquefoU, ^.^ ; Sc ui-rc, 4. ir U U «** 



1H-)/ resolution ha:t you tcU<n 7 



LESSON LXXI. 195 

1. Allez voir mon frere, il a quelque chose a vous cornmuniquer. 
2. Courez lour dire que jc les attends. 3. Mon frere a bien pris 
garde de dechirer ses habits. 4. Votre cousine a-t-elle pris garde 
de tacher sa robe? 5. Elle a pris garde de tomber, car en tombant 
elle Paurait gatee. 6. Ces petites filles ont-elles pris le deuil ? 7. 
Elles viennent de le prendre. 8. Pour qui prenez-vous le deuil ? 9. 
Je porte le deuil de ma mere. 10. Prenez-vous du the ou du cafe 
le matin? 11. Nous prenons du the et du cafe. 12. Ne prenftz- 
vous pas quelquefois du chocolat? 13. Nous n'en prenons que lors- 
que nous sommes malades. • 14. Quel parti le gouverneur a-t-il pris ? 
15. II a pris le parti de se taire. 16. Prendrez-vous mon parti (my 
part) ou celui de votre fils? 17. Je prendrai le votre, si je crois que 
vous avez raison. 18. Pourquoi ne prenez-vous pas la peine de lire 
salettre? 19. Parce qu'elle n'en vaut pas la peine. 20. Votre cour- 
rier a-t-il pris les devants? 21. II n'a pu prendre les devants. 22. 
N'avez-vous pas tortde prendre son parti? 23. Je n'ai pas tort de le 
prendre. 24. Avez-vous pris le the* (your tea) ? 25. Nous n'avons 
pas pris (our) le the, nous avons pris le cafe ? 

Exercise 140. 

1. Has your brother taken care not to spoil his hat? 2. He has 
taken care not to spoil it, he has only one. 3. Go and speak to your 
sister, she calls you (appelle). 4. Will you not take a cup (tasse) 
of tea ? 5. I have just taken my tea. 6. What have you said to 
your little girl ? 7. I have told her to take care not to tear her dress. 
8. Let us take care not to tear that book. 9. My son has just brought 
it. 10. Has he taken his tea? 11. He has not yet taken tea, it is 
too early. 12. At what hour do you take tea* at your house ? 13. 
We take tea at six o'clock. 14. Do you take tea* or coffee for break- 
fast (a votre dejeuner) ? 15. We take coffee. 16. Is your courier 
gone on before? 17. He has not been able to go on before. 18. 
What resolution have you taken ? 19. I have taken the resolution 
' jo study my lesson. 20. Have you taken care not to teai jour 
books ? 21.1 have taken care not to stain them. 22. What has 
your brother determined ? 23. He has determined to remain silent. 
24 Have you taken my part? 25. I have taken my brother's part. 
26 Are you right to take his part ? 27. I am right to take his part, 
because he is right. 28. Are you not afraid to take his part ? 29. 1 
am not afraid to take his part. 30. Will you take your sister's part 

* Le the, the meal called tea ; du the, the beverage called ten. 



196 LESSON LXXII. 

or minu? 31. 1 will take my sister's part. 32. Go and read your 
book, you do not know your lesson. 33. I know my lesson, and 
I know also that you are my friend. 34. Let us go to our father, hw 
wants us. 



LESSON LXXII. LECON LXXII. 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. All the French verbs, regular and irregular, end in this tense 
with e, es, e, ions, iez, ent : — 

2- Conjugation of the Present of the Subjunctive of tiie 
K.j.i lab Verba : — 

Qne je chant -o fin -isse re? -oive rend -o 

That I may ling may finish imi« recite may render 

Que tu pari -<'s char -tees aperf -oivea vend -es 

Thai thnu mayettrpeak niayr.it cherish mayest perenre HHjtrt t$U 

Qu'il donn -e (burn -isae perf -oive tend -e 

That he may give may furniih may \ercetre mm lend 

Que nous cherch -ions pun ic -evions eniend -ions 

That tee may seek may funi.'h may cenceire may hear 

Que roiu port i vim perd -iez 

may carry mm/" WUftWt may lose 

. mi ' -oivent mord -ent 

J h.it they may love may unite may deceive may bite 

3. In the first conjugation, the subjunctive is in the singular, simi- 
lar to t the indicative. Exception: aller — je 

faille. 

■i. The tiiM and seeond peraoni plural of the subjunctive, in (ho 
four conjugations, are the corresponding persona of the 

imperfect of the indicative. The third person plural is like the eor- 
responding person in the indicative j»r. ent Exceptions: avoir, 
subjunctive, tuna oj aosti MCAtona, 

vnus snchi'z,ils saclu i, . toytms, VOUS SOJ/es, '/•■>' toioti ; faire, 

..Her, ils ailknt ; vouloir Us 
rtuill'itt ; valoir, ils vaiOent. 

5. The subjunctive may. I I from the participle pre sent, 
by changing ant into ,,- chantey 

.. iiant, je sache ; craj- 

6. The verbs presenting ■ this last rule are the fob 
lowing, which the student will find conjugated in the Second Pail 

of this grammar, j (J2 : — 



LESSON LXXII. 197 

Acq lie fir Concevoir Mourir Prendre, Savoir Venir 
Aller Dccevoir Mouvoir (and Tenir (and _ (and 
Apercevoir Devoir Percevoir its com- its com- its corn- 
Avoir Etrc Pouvoir pounds) pounds) pounds) 
Boire Faire Pourvoir Recevoir Valoir Vouloir 

7. The past of the subjunctive is formed from the subjunctive 
present of one of the auxiliaries, avoir, tire, and the past participle of 
a verb [{ 45.] : — 

Que j'aie parle, que je sois venu. That I may have spoken, that I may 
have come. 

8. A verb is put in the subjunctive, when it is preceded by the 
conjunction que, and another verb expressing consent, command, 
doubt, desire, surprise, want, duty, necessity, regret, fear, apprehen- 
sion, &c. [{ 127, (2.)] :— 

Je veux que vous lui parliez. I wish you to speak to him. 

Je desire que vous arrivicz a temps. / wish you to arrive in time. 

9. When the first verb expresses fear or apprehension, the verb 
preceded by que, must also be preceded by ne, which, however, has 
no negative sense [} 127, (3.) $ 138, (4.) (5.) (8.)] :— 

Je crams qu'il ne tombe. I am afraid lest he fall. 

10. After craindre, to fear ; apprehender, to apprehend; avoir peur, 
to be afraid; trembler, to tremble, pas is used in connection with the 
ne, when we wish for the accomplishment of the action or occur- 
rence expressed by the second verb [} 138, (7.)] : — 

Je tremble qu'il n'arrive pas a / trevible that he may not arrive in 
temps. time. 

Resume of Examples. 



Le me deem veut-il que je boive de 

l'eau 1 
Je consens que vous alliez le voir. 
Nous doutons que vous arriviez a 

temps. 
Je crains que votre maitre ne vous 

punisse. 
J 3 crains que votre maitre ne vous 

punisse pas. 
Je m'etonne qu'il ne saclie pas cela. 

J'exige que vous lui donr.iez cela. 
Voulez-vous qu'il aille a la ehasse! 
Que voulez-vous que je dise? 

J'aime mieux que vous me 
payiez. 



Does the physician wish me to drink 

water ? 
I consent that you go to see him. 
We doubt your arriving in lime. 

I fear lest your master may punish 

yon. 
I fear that your master may not 

punish you. 
I am astonished that he does not 

know that. 
I require von to give him that.. 
Do you wish him to go hunting. 
What do yon wish me to (that 1 

should) say ? 
I would rather liave you U\ pay 

me. 



198 LESSON LXXII. 



Exercise 141. 



Artisan, m. mechanic; Empech-cr, 1. to prevent: Moulin-a-scie, raw-mili 

Atelier, m. icorkshop; Forteracnt, very much; Obe-ir, 2. to obey ; 

An deasua, above-. Force, f. strength; Rempl-ir, 2. to fulfil; 

Bracelet, m. bracelet ; Magasin. m. warehouse; Rue. f. street} 

Deja, already >.; Malsain. c. unhealthy; Tomb-er. 1. to fall. 

1. Que voulez-vous que nous fassions? 2. Je desire que vous 
fassiez attention a vos etudes. 3. Ne craignez-vous pas que la pluio 
no vous empeehe de sortir ? 4. Nous craignons fortement que la 
pluie ne nous empeehe de remplir nos engagements? 5. Doutez-voua 
qu'il soit chez lui maiutenant ? 6. Je doute qu'il y soit, il est dej.'i 
dix beures. 7. Exigez-vous qu'il parte de bonne heure? 8. Je 
m'ctonnc qu*il ne soit -pas dej.'i parti. 9. Aimez-vous mieux que 
je vous rende oea brareleta .' 10. Pause mieux que vous me lea payiea. 
11. Votrc f oi-in craint-il que sun enfant ne SOrte .' 12. 11 eraint qu'il 
ne tomb." dans la rue. 13. Ne deairez-vous paa que v< 
obeiaaenl .' 14. Je souliaite qu'ila m'obeiasent et qu'ils obeissent a 
lean pn 15. Ne cmignez-voua pas que cet artisan ne 

tombc malade .' 1G. Je crains qu'il ne toinbe malade, ear son atelier 
est trea malaain. 17. Ne r paa qu'il suit oblige^ de tra- 

vailler? IS. Je regrette qu'il soit oblige de travailler an dessus de sea 
ton''-. 19. N a paa qu'on lui apprenne cette nouvelle? 

20. Je di aire qn'on la lui apprenne le plus tot possible. 21. Votro 
pen ne raut-i tea an magasin 1 22. II vent (pie 

j'acln'te un moulin- Ueoie. j:: 1) -!r, . -vous que je T0O8 quitte.' 24. 
: >i. 2.;. Je veux que vous partiez 
ce matin. 

LOisa l 12. 

1. Do you wish me to speak to the mechanic ? 2. I wish you to 
tell him to (de) some lure to-morrow morning. 3. What do you 
wish me to do ! 4. I wish you to bring me a book. 5. Do you not 
wish me to read your letter 1 6. I wish you to read it and (</»'') 
ghre it to my aiatera. 7. Do< - i ol your Bister fear lest the rain may 
prevent her going out ! s . Bhe feara that the rain may prevent .»ur 

it. !•. Do you doubt that your father be at Inline now? 

10. 1 doubt his being there, il. Do you require me to 'l<> my work 

12. I wish you tu do y.mr work before going out 
sortir). 13. Do you not regret your !.. work.' 11. I 

do not regret my being obliged to work. 16. Are you not astonished 
that be knows that: 16. I am astonished that be knowa all 



LESSON LXXIII. 199 

17. Do you require me to pay him to-day? 18. I wish you to pay 
him to-morrow. 19. What would you have me do (See No. 1, of 
the ab ne exercise) ? 20. I will have you pay him immediately. 
l l\. Do you fear lest the master punish your son? 22. I fear that he 
may not punish him. 23. What would you have me say? 24. I 
would have you say the truth. 25. Does not your father wish you 
to buy a house ? 26. He wishes me to buy a storehouse. 27. Do 
ycu wish us to leave you ? 28. I wish you to go away to-morrow 
29. Do you wish me to stay with you ? 30. I wish you to stay 
here. 31. Do you wish me to tell him that news? 32. I wish you 
to tell it to him. 33. Do you wish your children to obey their 
teacher ? 34. I wish them to obey him. 



LESSON LXXTTI. LECCXN" LXXIII. 

USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE CONTINUED. 

1. A verb preceded by the conjunction que and one of the uni- 
personal verbs, il faut, it is necessary; il importe, it matters, it is 
important ; il convient, it is proper, becoming ; il vaut mieux, it is 
better ; il plait, it pleases, suits ; il se peut, il peut se faire, it may be, 
il est juste, it is just; il est bon, it is proper; il est neeessaire, it is 
necessary ; il est important, it is important ; il est temps, it is time ; 
il est indispensable, it is indispensable ; il est a propos, it is proper ; 
il est facheux, it is sad, it is a, pity ; il est urgent, it is urgent, or by 
another verb or expression implying necessity, will, or propriety, 
must be put in the subjunctive [§ 127, (4.)] : — 

II faut que vous restiez ici. You must remain here. 

II est juste que vous soyez recom- It is just you be rewarded. 
pense. 

2. The unipersonal verb, il est, governs the indicative present or the 
future, when it is used affirmatively, and followed by que, coming 
after one of the adjectives, sur, sure; certain, certain; vrai, true; 
demontre, proved ; incontestable, incontestable ; evident, evident, and 
others having a positive and affirmative sense: — 

II est cortain qu'il vient ou qu'il It is certain that he comes or will come. 
viendra. . 

3. When however the verb, il est, used in the above connection ia 
negative or interrogative, it is followed by the subjunctive : — 

n'est nullement certain qu'il His by no means certain that he will 



'200 LESSON LXilll 

4. After certain conjunctions, afin que, in order that; quoiqua 
although, <%c. [see full list, 5 143, (2.)] the subjunctive is always used 

Quoiquc vous fassiez, quoique vous Whatever you may do, whatever //<>*• 
disiez. >ay. 

5. Other important rules on the government of conjunctions will 
be found in said \ 143. 

MPLB8. 



Que feul 
Faut-il 

lire qne vous lui 
ies. 

I 

. rd .' 

: 

1 
. 



/• sister do 7 
■ itc to him ? 
I ssaryfor you to xcrite to htm. 

■ Mm hit 

' ■ arrivti so late * 

:.rt him- 

lime. 



ASalre, f 

I 

: :. . 
: I 

I 
I 

1. Qne iez ce qua voua 

.• .' 4. II 

QpruDt6! 
I 
i 

an bel poiatl 

I qu'il so 

- 

: . 

: 

udrn mienx q l 



LESSON LXXIV. 201 

'.ui en pretions. 20. Que .faut-il que nous fassions? 21. II faut qua 
vous portiez ce linge chez moi. 22. N'est-il pas temps que je me 
eouche ? 23. II est temps que vous vous couchiez. 24. Faut-il que 
je me leve ? 25. II faut que vous vous leviez. 

Exercise 144. 

1. What must our friend do? 2. He must remain at our house 
untL I come. 3. What must our neighbor do ? 4. He must put his 
affairs in order. 5. Is it not right that you should pay your credi- 
tors? 6. It is right that I should pay them. 7. Is it time for your 
little boy to go to school ? 8. It is time for him to go to school, it is 
ten o'clock. 9. Must I write to your correspondent to-day or to- 
morrow? 10. You must write to him to-morrow morning. 11. Is 
it not a pity that your brother has torn his cap (casquette) ? 12. It is 
a pity that he has torn it. 13. Is it necessary for your mother to 
finish her letter? 14. It is not necessary that she finish it. 15. Is it 
certain that your son has forgotten his money ? 16. It is certain that 
he has forgotten it. 17. It is by no means certain that he has for- 
gotten it. 18. Must you furnish money to that mechanic? 19. I 
must furnish him some, he has none. 20. Whatever you may do 
you will not succeed (reussir). 21. Whatever your brother may 
say, nobody will believe him (croire, ir.). 22. Must I write to you? 
23. You must write to me. 24. Do you wish me to be sick ? 25. I 
do not wish you to be sick. 26. Do you require me to tell you 
that ? 27. It is necessary that you tell me all. 28. Do you wish 
me to go to your house? 29. I wish you to go there. 30. Must I 
get up? 31. You must rise immediately (d Tinstant). 32. Must 
your brother retire ? 33. He must go to bed immediately. 34. It 
is time for him to go to bed, it is twelve o'clock. 



LESSON LXXIV. LE£ON LXXIV. 

USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. CONTINUED. 

1. The verbs croire, to believe ; dare, to say; esperer, to hope ; gager 
and parier, to bet; penser, to think ; sentir, to feel; voir, to see; and 
others expressing affirmation or something certain and positive, are 
(when they are conjugated affirmatively, and have que after them) 
followed by the indicative present or future [§ 127, (2.) Note] : — 

Je pense, je crois, je dis qu'il J think, I believe, I say iliat he will 
viendra. come. 

9* 



202 



2. The above verbs, when used in the same connection and conju 
gated negatively or interrogatively, are followed by the subjunctive 
[| 127, (2.)] :- 

Je ne crois pas qu'il vienne. J do not believe he will come. 

3. A verb, preceded by another verb and by a relative pronoun, is 
put in the subjunctive, while there is an idea of uncertainty, aud in 
the indicative, when the idea is certain [) 127, (2.) Note] :— 
J'ai un liommc qui me rendra scr- I have a man who iciU oblige me. 

qui mc / want a man who will (may) oblige 
vie. 

4. A verb, preceded by a superlative relative, or by the words, le 
seul, le premier, le dernier, is put in the subjunctive [{ 127.] : 

Voilo le seul chapem qae j'aie. r , ; it tke ,»,/„ hot i have. 
\ oila le meillear homme que je There is the best man I know. 



vice. 
J'ai besoin dun bommo 
rende » 



que le concert a hi lieu. 
pease pas que ootre ami 
one, 

\i>us apprendi 
par < icur. 
Je ne pease pa* qu'fl putoe 
dre tMit cela pax i 

band B'enrlchit 

mix dipeu d uutrui. 

qu'il B'enri* 

Jr De crou pas qne vous rtossisslcz 

qui conaent un litre. 
Je eherche an atienne 

un litre. 

!•• rm-ilK-nr i 

que j'aie, a cooditionqae vous mo. 
le rei d 



i took place. 
I ilo not think that OUT friend trill 

come. 
1 that you will learn that by 

heart. 
I t'tink that he can learn all 

I "klI this merchant grows rich 

M «f others. 

UV him- 

1 will surccd 

I hare ,: \ held* a litre. 

* holds a litre. 

1 Und you the bat hat I have, on cx>n~ 
■ t \at you will rctturn it to mt 
lo-m< 



Litre, in. i tre, about a 

1 

Deboal 

i Portier, m. 

Bfl que ee drap dare lo I, Je crois qu'il 

durera bieii, car il e.-t fort oua que OOtTO portier tarde ft 

rentrer ' J. Je crois qu'il ne tardera pas. 5. Desirez- vous que noua 



K.ntr-er, 1. to -..-me in 

Suffl-re, J. ir. to stifficti 
Tann( in- in. /, 



LESSON LXXIV. 203 

restlons deboul? 6. Je desire au contraire, que vous vous as- 
seyiez. 7. Croyez-vous que ces etudiants puissent apprendre cinq 
pages par cosur en deux heures ? 8. Je crois que e'est impossible. 
9. Esperez-vous que noire ami arrive de bonne heure? 10. J'espere 
qu'il arnvera bientot. 1 1. Quelle sorte de carafe vous faut-il ? 12. Il 
m'en fau', une qui contienne un litre. 13. J'en ai une de cristal, qui 
eositkrat deux litres. 14. Pensez-vous que ce negociant s'enrichisse 
a vos depens ? 15. Je sais qu'il s'enrichit aux depens d'autrui. 16. 
Quel parasol pensez-vous me prefer? 17. Je pense vous preter le 
meilleur que j'aie. 18. Le tanneur reussira-t-il a gagner sa vie ? 19. 
Je ne crois pas qu'il y reussisse. 20. Pensez-vous que cet argent 
Buffise avotrepere? 21. Je crois qu'il 1 ui suffira. 22. Croyez-vous 
que ces messieurs comptent sur moi ? 23. Je sais qu'ils comptent sur 
vous. 24. Pensez-vous que le concert ait lieu aujourd'hui ? 25. Je 
crois qu'il n'aura pas lieu. 

Exercise 146. 
1. Do you believe that the concert has taken place? 2. I believe 
that it has taken place. 3. Do you believe that your sister's dress 
will wear well ? 4. I think that it will wear well, for the silk is very 
good. 5. Do you believe that our friend will succeed in earning a 
livelihood? 6. I believe he will succeed in it (y), for he is very dili- 
gent. 7. Do you think that the tanner grows rich at my expense ? 
8. I think that he enriches himself at the expense of others. 9. 
Does the merchant grow rich at my father's expense? 10. He 
grows rich at your expense. 11. What kind of a house must you 
have (cous faut-il) ? 12. I must have a house which has ten rooms. 
13. I have a good house which has twelve rooms. 14. What kind 
of a decanter do you seek? 15. I seek one which holds three litres. 
16. I have one which holds two litres, I will lend it to you. 17. 
What coat will you send me ? 18. I will send you the best I have, 
take care not to stain it. 19. Do you think that the student will 
learn all that by heart? 20. I do not think that he will learn it. 21. 
Do you believe (that) he will come? 22. I believe that he will 
come soon. 23. Do you think that your father depends upon me! 
24. I kno v that he depends upon you. 25. Does not that gentle- 
man depend upon me ? 26. I think that he depends upon your bro- 
ther. 27. Will the porter soon come in again? 28. I hope that he 
will not tarry long- 29. Will you not lend me your umbrella? 30. 
I will lend it to you with pleasure. 31. Does my brother remain 
standing? 32. He does not wish to sit down. 33. Do you wish 
me to sit down? 34. T wish you to remain standing. 35. I wish 
that he may come. 



204 LESSON LiXV, 



LESSON LXXV. >N LXXV. 

THE IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF THE Sl'BJlTNCTl YE. 

1. The terminations of the imperfect of the subjunctive are in aU 
the verbs, regular and irregular, gatione, tse, sses, t, 

. 

! preceding the / of the third person singular always 
takes the circuni 

.r OF THE SOBJUNOnVB OF 

Til!. B 

read -tea 

• ng lish might rtctice migU- 

Qui! ' ; 1 -it 

That lie migh' . might gather 

stem 

That trc mifht feck .m.-h nigh; ■ 

I tarry might teize might '■< lose 

That dug might loot ...' bitt 

•1. 1 I from the past definite [h. 61.] by 

I Mll- 

■ 
Thie rule baa 

no cm-' ; 

11 : ! 1 

of the 

tally to the 

rmed from the imperfect 
nd the past 
; 
Qtt3J 

7. .' tfcvM 

and |-lupcrlVct of 

! Future of the indicative 

na under the aboviMnenl 

Of the sub- 



LESSON LXXV. 



205 



junctive ; so the imperfect and other past tenses of the indicative, 
and the two conditionals, govern the verb in the second part of the 
proposition, in the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive. 



Ne fallaifc-il pas que je lui parlasse 1 

11 faudrait que je lui donnasse ce li- 
vre. 



Was it not necessary that I shoidd 

speak to him ? 
It would be necessary for me to give 

him that book. 



Resume of Examples. 



Vourlriez-vous que je donnasse un 
coup de baton a cet enfant 1 

Je voudrais que vous tirassiez un 
coup de fusil sur cet oiseau. 

Exigeriez-vous que nous revinssi- 
ons de bonne beure 1 

Que voudriez-vous que ces bommes 



Que vouliez-vous que je fisse 1 
11 faudrait que j'eusse mon argent. 

Je ne voulais pas que vous mourus- 

siez de froid. 
Elle craignait que vous ne mourus- 

siez de misere et de faim. 
Voudriez-vous que je jetasse un 

coup-d'oeil sur ces papiers % 



Would you wish me to give that child 

a blow with a stick ? 
I would vjish you to fire your gun 

upon that bird. 
Would you require us to return early ? 

What would you wish those men to 

do? 
What did you toish me to do? 
It would be necessary for me to have 

my money. 
I did not wish you to die with the cold. 

She feared lest you might die with 

want and hunger. 
Would you wish me to cast a glance 

upon tliese papers ? 



Exercise 147. 

Ivrogne, m. drunkard; Ressembl-er, 1. to i 

Mer, f. sea; semble ; 

Lievre, m. hare; Retablissement, m. j 

Perdrix, f. partridge ; covery ; 

Poste. xa.. post; Sante, f. health; 
Se rend-re, 4. ref. to re- Tir-er, 1. to fire, shoot, 
pair ; 



3, f. woodcock; 
Bord, in. shore; 
Charg-er, 1. to load; 
Coup, m. blow; 
Coup-de-fusil, m. shot; 
Coup-d'ceil, m. glance; 
Demi-use, half-worn ; 
Fouet, m. whip; 

1. Voudriez-vous que j'achetasse un habit a demi-use 1 ? 2. Je vou- 
drais que vous en achetassiez un neuf. 3. Voulait-on que ce soldat 
malade se rendit a son poste ? 4. On voulait qu'il se rendit a son 
regiment. 5. Faudrait-il que je demeurasse aubord de la mer ? 6. II 
faiidrait pour le retablissement de votre sante, que vous vous ren- 
dissiez en Suisse 1 7. Ne pensez-vous pas que cet enfant ressemble a. 
sa mere ? 8. Je ne pense pas qu'il lui ressemble. 9. A qui ressemble- 
t-il ? 10. II ressemble a sa soeur ainee. 11. Consentiriez-vous que 
voire fille epousat cet ivrogne. 12. Voudriez-vous que nous mou 
russions de misere? 13. Je eraignais que ces dames ne mourussent 
[5 127, (3.) L. 72. 9.] de froid. 14. Ne voulez vout. pas tirer sur ce 
lievre? 15. Je tirerais sur cette becasse si mon fusil etait charge. 



206 LESSON LXXVI. 

16. Uombien de coups de fusil voudriez-vous que jc tira?se? 17. Si 
vous aviez de la poudre, je voudrais que vous tirassicz sur cetto per- 
drix. 18. Voulez-vous que je jette un coup d'oeil sur cette Icttrel 
19. Je voudrais que vous la lussiez. 20. Que vouiriez-vous que je 
21. Je voudrais que vous fissiez attention a ros etudes, 22. 
Faudrait-il que je so; D i'audrait que vous restasaitt a. la 

maison. 24. Que voudriez-vous que je 6sse a ce chevai I 25. Je 
voudrais que vous lui donnassiez dcs coups de fouet. 

1-iS. 

1. What would you have me dol 2. I would have yon cast a 
glance upon this tetter. 3. Would you wish me to give that dog 

ive that horse Mows 
with a whip. 00 require us t<> return at 

return early. 7. Do you think that your 
brother r .1 do not think he resembles my 

father. 9. Whom do you think that In- i 10. I think he 

a my mother. 11. How many shots have you fire* 
have fired five shots at thai woodcock. 13. Would you not have mo 

; It. I would have you fire at that pari 

for me to 
dwell .' 16. It v i to dwell on the - 

me die with hunger? 18. I would not have you 
die of hunger. 19. V have your 1 rith cold? 

him die with 

you have your son do ! have him learn his lessona, 23. 

we him learn l 24. I would have him learn 

German and Spanish. I 

I 

It would be out 29. Would it ho 

.It would be necessary for you 

to go to church 1 you to writo 

to me. 33. Did you wish me to buy a coat half worn out? 3 \. I 

you to buy a good ha.t. 



LXXVI. \ l.X XVI. 

129.) 

ether in French without preposltlona, 
which are in English joined by them. Many others ai 

French by prepositions different from I ng the corres. 



LESSON LXXVI. 



207 



ponding verbs in English. No satisfactory general rule3 can be 
give: 1 on this point. We have given in the Second Part of this gram- 
mar [^ 130, 131, 132.] copious lists of the verbs in general use, with the 
prepositions which follow them, when they come before other verbs. 
We have also hitherto noted the prepositions usually placed after the 
verbs introduced in our lessons. 

2. The student will recollect, that a verb following another verb 
(not avoir or tire) or a preposition (not en) must be in the infinitive, 
- 3. The following verbs, extracted from the list, \ 130, although 
they, in English, take a preposition before another verb, do not take 
one in French : — 



Aller, 1. ir. to go 
Compter, 1. to intend 
Courir, 2. ir. to run 
Daigner, 1. to deign 
Desirer, 1. to desire 
Devoir, 3. to owe 
Envoyer, 1. ir. to send 
Esperer, 1. to hope 



Falloir, 3. ir. to be ne- 

cessary 
Mener, 1. to lead, take 
Penser. 1. to think 
Pouvoir, 3. ir. to be able 



Savoir, 3. ir. to know 
Souhaiter, 1. to wish 
Valoir mieux 3. ir. to be 

better 
Venir, 2. ir. to come 



Pretendre, 4. to pretend Vouloir, 3. ir. to wish, 
Preferer, 1. to prefer will. 



Besume of Examples. 



Comptez-vous diner avec nous 1 

Je vais diner chez mon pore. 

Ne voulez-vous pas donner a man- 
ger a ce chien 1 

Desirez vous monter dans ma cham- 
bre? 

Je pre fere descendre chez votre pere. 

Demeurc-t-il en haut ou en bas 7 

Preferez-vous demeurer au rez-de- 
chaussce 1 

Je desire demeurer au premier etage. 

Nous pre ferons louer le second etage. 

Nous esperons louer une chambre 
au second. 



Do you intend to dine with us ? 
I am going to dine at my father's. 
Will you not feed that dog ? 

Do yoib wish to go up to my room ? 

I prefer to go down to your fatlier's. 

Does he live above or below ? 

Do you prefer to live on the ground 

floor? 
I wish to live in the first story. 
We prefer to take the second story. 
We hope to rent a room in the second 

story. 



Exercise 149. 

Cabinet, m. closet ; En haut, up stairs, above; Salle, f. parlor ; 

Compt-er, 1. to cipher; Eaisan, m. pheasant ; Touch-er, 1. to touch, 

Demain, to-morrow ; Jou-er, 1. to play; play; 

Dejeun-er, 1. to break- Lou-er, 1. to rent, to let ; Troisieme, third story ; 
fast; Pinc-er, 1. to play ; Violon, m. violin. 

En bas, down stairs, 6e-Plaisir, m. favor, plea- 
low ; sure ; 

1. Combien de chambres comptez-vous louer? 2. Nous comp- 
tons louer une salle au rez-de-chaussee et deux cabinets au troisieme. 
3. Ne preferez-vous pas louer une chambre-a-coucher au second ? 4. 
Nous preferons demeurer au rez-de-ch"ussee. 5. Ne pouvez-vous 



208 LE88 0N LXITI. 

rester a diner avec nous aujourd'hui ? 6. Je vous remercie, je pre- 

fere vonir domain. 7. M. votre pere viendra-t-il domain dejeuner 

avec nous? 8. II compte venir demain, de bonne heure. 9. Que 

voulez-vous leur dire ? 10. Je veux lcs prier de me faire ce plaitdr. 

11. Comptez-vous faire ce plaisir a mon frere? l± J'espire le lui 

faire. 13. Pr ferez-voua demeurer en haut ouenbas? 14. Nous 

demeurer en bas. 15. Que pensez-voua faire de ce jeune 

penaona I'envoyer a M. votre beau-frere, 17. 

Ne savez-vous pas jouer du violon '. 18. Je Bala en jouer. 10. 

lit-elle toucher le j Bile b»H toucher 

le piano etpinoer la harpe. 91. Ne t pas ecrirel 23. None 

a jouer de la guitarel 
Nous Bouhaitona trouver un 
appartem 

150. 

r brother-in4aw intend to rent the ground floor .' -2 
He intend o rooma in the Becond Btory. :t. I low many 

;r -"ii intend to take.' 4. Ho intends to : 
rooma in prefer to live on the 

the ground floor. 7. D< 
father n inerwithua to-morrow 1 8. He intenda 

I »i> you prefer to live up 

I prefer to 1 11. D 

12. She knows how to play 

i intend to I er)l 14. 

ip to my 

room f 16. 1 to your father's. 17. I><> you wtafa to 

18. I •«•• i*h md floor. 

r to ataj 

ak1 88. 

I think of OU wish me to 

• 

you wish I your mother? 36. I \n i - * . 

it to her. r play on the 

'J8. She ■ i play on the 

wish to live • prefers liu'og 

! \V;il you not d ■ I M ill dfl it 

and dine wiih ih to- 
day f 31. He I dine with him 
3.Y Our t'rv nd know i .jilier. 



LESSON LXXVII. 



209 



LESSON LXXVII. 



LEgON LXXVII. 



GOVERNMENT OF VERBS CONTINUED. 

1. Many verbs, in French, are joined with other verbs follow. ng, 
vy means of the preposition de, of, where the corresponding verbs 
n English either take no preposition, or one other than of. Besides 
avoir besoin, &c. [L. 21. R. 4.], the following verbs extracted from 
list, 5 132, belong to this class : — 

Dispenser, to dispense Negliger, to neglect 

Ernpecher. to prevent Prier, to beg 

Eviter, to avoid Promettre, to promise 
Se flatter, to flatter one's Proposer, to propose 

self Refuser, to refuse 

Jurer, to swear Supplier, to entreat 

Manquer, to fail Trembler, to tremble 
Menacer, to threaten 



Achever, to finish 
Bruler, to burn, to long 
Cesser, to cease 
Commander, to com- 
mand 
Conseiller, to advise 
Defendre, to forbid 
Dire, iu say 



Resume of Examples. 



Pourquoi n'achevez-vous pas d'ap- 

prendre ce metier'? 
Nous brulons de contimier nos etu- 
des. 
II ne cesse de nous tourmenter. 
Me defendez-vous de faire du bien 

a cet homme 1 
Ne negligez pas de lui faire une 

visite. 
Me promettez-vous de faire une 

visite a mon ami 1 
Je vous prie d'aller tout droit chez 

vous. 
Je vous conseille de venir par le 

chemin-de-fer. 
Ne manquez pas de lui faire mes 

compliments. 
L'avez-vous menace de le frapper 1 
J'ai refuse de lui faire credit. 
Me proposez-vous de lui confler cet 

argent % 
Je vous conseille de le lui confler. 
J 'evite de lui reprocher ses fautes. 



Why do you not finish learning that 

trade? 
We burn to continue our studies. 

He does not cease tormenting us. 
Do you forbid my doing good to that 

man? 
Do not neglect paying him a visit. 

Do you promise me to pay a visit to 

my friend? 
I beg you will go straight Iwme. 

I advise you to come by the railroad. 

Do not fail to present my compli- 
ments to Mm. 

Have you threatened to strike him ? 

I refused to give him credit. 

Do you propose to me to trust Mm 
with this money ? 

I advise you to trust Mm with it. 

I avoid to reproach him with his 
faults. 



Exercise 151. 

A'rros-er, 1. to water ; Gard-er, 1. to keep ; Tout droit, straight ; 

Arrosoir, m.watering-pot; Jardinier, m. gardener ; Rend-re, 4. to do, to ren- 

Au contraire, on the Lendemain, m. next der ; 

contrary; day; Veille, f. eve, day before; 

Corrig-er, 1. to correct ; Oubli-er, 1. to forget; Voie, f. conveyance, way, 

Faire part, to communi- Se rend-re, 4. ref. to or mode of travelling. 
' cote ; repair ; 



210 LESSON" L XXVI I. 

1. Pourquoi ne eessez-vous pas dc lire? 2. Jamais tort de cesser 

de lire avant de savoir ma lecon. 3. Avez-vous defeodu a votre 

jardinier a'arroser ees Hours ? 4. Au contraire, je lui avais com- 

mande de lea arroser. 5. Pourquoi a-t-il neglige de is faire ? 6. 

Parcequ'il a oublie d*apporter l'arrosoir. 7. Que desire fain M. F. ? 

8. 11 brole de container L'etude de la medecine. 0. N'avez-voua pas 

tort de faire des visiles a ce monsieur? 10. J'aurais tort de \ 

gliger. 11. I fuse de rendre ce service a. votre en- 

nemi ? 12. Faurais eu I de le lui rendre, 13. Quelle 

?0 ien de prendre? 14. Je vous ai conseille 

de prendre la voie du 1 I menace de 

r cet enfant? 16. Je I'ai mei it. Avez- 

devendre dee marchandises a mon frere ? 18. J'ai re- 

, rediL 19. Avez-vous dit a mon Blade M 

ren d r ,. 20. Je I'ai] d'y aller tont droit 21. Vous 

renirla veille ia nous prop" 

air le lendemain. 28. Votre compagnon ae propoae-tril de 

de faire part de cela a tout lo 

monde. 

162. 

l. II. .v yn'i forbidden mj cousin I ' nei I 2. 1 

.I,, him. 3. Has your mother ordered 

lered him to 

neglected to 

e will yon take to 

go to P " 1 "' - N " u 

told • ' h: ' vt ' I " 1 ' 1 

I. It ■ your brother ■•-. 

- brother-in-law! 12. Hi 

i ;h:il letter? 

Do you propose lo trust 

him with tfa - 1 llim wil1 ' ''• '"• 1)c> 

him with hi- I [avoid to rejvoMh 

him with them, i 

Lehim. 21. 
plime ; 

do you 
ardener ! 80. I have not fcilod to pay 



LESSON LXXVIi: 



211 



liu. 31. I have forgotten to pay you. 32. Do not neglect to write 
to me. 33. Tell him to go to my father. 34. Do not cease to work. 
35. Tell him to come Christmas Eve. 36. I have told him to come 
'he dav after. 



LESSON LXXVIH. LEQON LXXVIH. 

GOVERNMENT OF VERBS CONTINUED. 

1. Many French verbs reach their object by means of prepositions, 
while the corresponding English verbs govern their object directly, 
that is, without intervening prepositions. Other French verbs reach 
their object through prepositions different from those used in English. 
We give here a few verbs coming under those two classes, commen- 
cing with the first : — 

2. Verbs which have a preposition before a noun,, in French, but 
have none in English : — 

Abuser de, to abuse Jouir de, to enjoy Plaire a, to please 

S'approcher de, to ap- Manquer a, to offend, to Se souvenir de, to re~ 

proach fail member 

Convenir a, to suit Medire de, to slander Se servir de, to use 

Deplaire a, to displease Se mefierde, to mistrust Ressembler a, to resem- 

Desobeir a, to disobey Obeir a, to obey ble 

Douter de, to doubt Pardonner a, to forgive Survivre a. to survive 
Echapper a, to escape 

3. Verbs reaching their object through different prepositions in the 
two languages. 

S'affliger de, to grieve for Louer de, to praise for Remercier de, to thank 
Feliciter de, txfeongrat- Profiter de, to profit by for 

ulaie Penser a. to think of Pure de, to laugh at 

Gemir de, to grieve for Se passer de, to do with- Rougir de, to blush ct 
S'informer de, to inquire out Songer a, to think of 

about 

Resume of Examples. 



N'aves-vous pas abuse de notre pa- 
tience 1 

Nous en avons abuse. 

Vous avez desobei a vos parents. 

Vous pardonnerez a vos ennemis. 

Vous penserez constamment a vos 
devoirs. 

Vous y penserez constamment. 

Ne riez-vous pas de nos erreurs 1 

Nous n'en rions point. 

Ne ressemble-t-il pas a son pere 1 



Have you not abused our patience? 

We have abused it. 

You have disobeyed your parents. 

You will forgive your enemie?. 

Yon will think constantly of ymw 

duties-. 
You will think of them constantly. 
Do not laugh at our mistakes. 
We do not laugh at them. 
Does he not resemble Ms father ? 



212 LESSON LXXVIII. 



Exercise 153. 

Arrangement, m. or- Cceur. m. J S e ~ P uf "" ™* 

clU; Devoir, m..dut 9 ; Now ;clto, f. mn i 

Circonstancc, f. zircxim- Faute. f. fault ; . Pointre, m. jwm^- 

8 informer, 1. ref to in- Procbain, m. 
,,'«d; S SelHer, 

■ : dheur, in. vusfor- Buocas, m. n 



; 



{MHfi 



I. Cot arrangement voua convient-il ? 2. 11 ne meconnent pas, 

mt a aotre parent. 3. Cola ne deplait-il pas au peintre 1 

Ini J 'plait beaucoup. 5. No craignes-vous pas 

ience de votre ami? 6. Je crains d'en abuser. 7. 

,.us jamais a \ 8. J\ pons,- loua lea jours. 

re aujourd'hui? 10. Pai pense a lui, 

^jg , n. A-t-il eu Boin de son pare, 

et Ini a-t-il obei? 12. 11 luiul.it constamment 13. Ne lui a-t-il 

i i. II lui a desobei plusieurs Fois, maia il gemit de 

leur complaisance! 16. 

• ,ut mon creur. 17. Le Bellier voua a-t-il 

: is. li m'en a felicite. 19. N^vea-voua 

re malheurl - ''• nouaneriona 

ooa pas dee 

Je ne m'en aouviena pins. 

fendu de medire de votre pro. 

[♦ ft defcnda aoua aommoe informea da 

• 

154. 

, Hay* v,.i not abused your friend's kindness? 2. I have Mt 

■a. Does n..t your 
.nducl does nol please 
them. . r >. Why haa> you not obeyed your father 1 6. Ihaveobeyed 
him iluih 7. Have you i ol Ian fhed al 
n „, i onr mistakea. 9. Has the young man lau| 

1 al his in - 

II. H nes! 13. Ha 

, t bis misforl i ea. 13 Do you aver laugh at tho 

•■ mis. 

rot yea. 

, qoI remem 17. ] ia1 young lady 

bat motharl 18. She does not l e aa s abl a hr ■■*" 



LESSON LXXIX. 213 

19. Have you thanked ycur friend for his kindness? 20. I have 
thanked him for it. 21. Has your mother forbidden you to read 
that book? 22. She has forbidden it (me Ta). 23. Why do you 
not forgive your enemies? 24. I forgive them with all my heart. 
25. Bo you not think of your duties ? 26. I think of them (y) every 
day. 27. Have you congratulated your friend ? 28. I have congratu- 
lated him on his success. 29. Have you not slandered those gen 
tlemcn? 30. I never slander my neighbor. 31. Does that house 
suit you ? 32. It suits me, but it does not suit my father. 33. 
Does that house suit the painter ? 34. It suits him very well, but it 
is too small for me. 35. My father has forbidden my speaking to 
that gentleman. 



LESSON LXXIX. LEgON LXXIX. 

REGIMEN OP ADJECTIVES. (5 87.) 

1. The regimen or complement of an adjective is generally a 
noun or a verb completing its signification. This regimen is usually 
connected with the adjective, by means of a preposition. 

2. That preposition is often different in French from that connecting 
the corresponding English adjective with its regimen [§ 87, (1.) (3.)]. 

3. When an adjective follows the verb etre, used unipersonally, 
the preposition de connects that adjective with its regimen [§ 87, 
(4-)] :- 

II est necessaire de travailler pour It is necessary to labor in order to 
vivre. live. 

4. The following adjectives, extracted from lists, § 88, 89, 90, reach 
their regimen through prepositions, different in French and Eng 
lish:— 

Amoureux de, in love Mecontent de, displeased Propre a, fit for 

with with Rebel] e a, rebellious toio- 

Cheri de, beloved by Reconnaissant de, grate- ards 
Content de, pleased luith ful for Bon pour, kind towards 

Desole de, grieved for Rempli de, filled with Insolent avec, insolent 
Fache de, sorry for Bon a, good for towards 

Inquietde, w?ieas?/ about Cruel a, cruel towards Poli envers, polite to 
Ivre de, intoxicated with Exact a, exact in 

Resume of Examples. 



N'6tes-vous pas content de vos pr : 

gres 1 
J'en eais fort content. 
Votre domestique est-il exact 



remplir ses devoirs 1 j his duties? 



Are you not pleased with your pro* 

gress ? 
I am very much pleased with it. 
Is your servant exact in fulfilling 



214 



LESSON LXXIX. 



Avez-vous rcmpli dc vin cctte boa- 
teille 1 

Avez-vous rempli d'argeut votrc 
be v. - 

Je I'en ai rempfie. 

II est trfes facile de blamor les ac- 
tion* d'autrui. 

lorienx de moarir ; 
patrio. 

II ot plus agrtable do voyager en 
. i 'en liiver. 



Have you filled that bottle iritnitine^ 

■ filled your purse icilA 

I have filled it irith it. 

to blame L'^e actions 

one's e o u mtif . 

I! is more agreeable to travel in sum- 
mer than in winter. 



153. 

Abatt-re, 4. ir. to cut Bois-a-brQler, in. ^re-Nettoy-er, 1. 1 

People, in. . 
chase; Chi Pommier, m. ap pl e t rm j 

I to pull Encie. f. ink ; Prunicr. in plum 

Fein!; | l; ■■.!.: 

Bci ' 
Liberie, f. liberty; Tonnean, cask. 

t de la gloire ? 
2. II en t-iaii amoureux. 8. Ce r..i n'e'tait-il pas chferi d 
peuplel -i. 11 en 6tai1 ohen. 5. C its ne Bont-ila pas 

■• Qta. 7. Yctes- 
;. r .' S. J\n ulna 

ampli ce tonneaa ? 
10. II l'a rempli de vin, 11. mplii cette 

Bill BSl drj.'l 

r I'ait ahattre 
. car ila n'< taierU km ft 

W. IT. K-t-il possible 

18. ll eel j — ible de le fmdre. 
19. i. 

81, D 32. .!«• l"ai reinplie 

irolerl 
24, i; is pas reeoniu 

des sir 

■ 

I that I hare teal my pi r H tint 

.ry to 

r fire- wood 

tawed. 7. Your garden is tou small, is it not necessary to have eome 



LESSON LXXX. 215 

plum-trees pulled out ? 8. It is necessary to have some plum-treea 
cut down. 9. Have you filled your friend's purse with silver? 10. I 
have filled it with gold. 11. Are all your bottles filled with -vine? 
12. Thpy arc all filled with ink. 13. Are you sorry to have filled 
your bottles with ink ? 14. I am glad to have filled them with ink, 
for I want ink. 15. Are you pleased with this book? 16. I am 
pleased with it. 17. Is that land good for any thing ? 18. It is good 
for nothing. 19. Is that lady beloved by her children? 20. She is 
beloved by her friends and by her children. 21. Are you grateful 
for those services ? 22. I am> grateful for them. 23. Is it not possi- 
ble to split that piece of wood? 24. It is not possible to split it. 
25. Is it agreeable to travel in winter ? 26. It is not so agreeable to 
travel in winter as in summer. 27. It is easy to blame others. 
28. Is it not glorious to die for one's country ? 29. It is glorious to 
live and to die for one's country. 30. Have you filled the inkstand 
(encrier) with it? 31. I have filled it with it. 32. Would it not be 
necessary to pull up ail those trees ? 33. It would not be necessary 
to pull them all up, for my garden is very large. 34. Henry the 
fourth (quatre) was beloved by his people. 



LESSON LXXX. LEgON LXXX. 



GOVERNMENT OF PREPOSITIONS, ETC. 



(5 139.) 



1. Some prepositions govern the nouns which follow them, without 
the aid of other prepositions. Avant, before (at an earlier period), 
[§ 142, (1.)] devant, before (opposite place), [§ 142, (1.)] derriere, 
behind; chez, at the house of; concernant, touching ; excepte, except; 
outre, besides ; selon, according to ; voici, here is ; voila., there is, etc 
[} 139, (1.)]. 

2. Others, being rather prepositional phrases, govern their objeci 
by means of the preposition de : — hors de, out of; loin de, far from, 
a flour de, even with ; a force de, by dint of; a l'egard de, with regard 
to ; a l'insu de, without the knowledge of, unknown to ; a raison de, at 
(he rale of; au dega de, this way of; au dela de, thai way of [§ 139, 
2.]. 

3. Others take a — quant a, as far ; jusqu'a, as far as, etc. [§ 139, 3.]. 

4. Two or more verbs, adjectives, or prepositions may in French 
nave a regimen in common, provided they govern in the same manner 
or case [{ 92, (1.) (2.) J 140, and $ 133.] :— 



216 LESSON LUX. 

Nous aimons et nous louons nos Wc love and praise our children. 

enfants. , . , , ,, 

Ce jardin est utile et agreable a That garden is useful and agrcecM* 

notrepere. to our father. 

Au dedans ou au dehors du roy- Withtn or without the kingdom. 

auuie. 

5. When, however, two or more verbs, adjectives or prepositions 
coming together in the same sentence, do not govern their regimen 
n the same manner, they cannot have a regimen in common. The 
regimen must be repealed, or replaced by a pronoun, or another turn 
must be given to the sentence. The following sentences could not, 
fore, be translated literally into French : — 

That man is useful to and loved by his famUf—I writt to and 
letters from my brothers— To be exposed f from the rain. We 

must say : — 

Cet homme • :■■ fimily, and 

aim6. 

i -. and re- 

■'■ ' lui - , * 

to the rain, or to bt 

bit *'k ;? 

cpose and a l'abri, take dif- 
ferent : 

U'LES. 

, s arrives avant la ba- I» !*■ hattlf. 

. . . 
51/ or/ore 

im-i. 

\i mil sons la chaise ou des- 
crc notre mai- 



' them upon the table 1 
I hit re . ''" - t&mk or 

Ik hi nd our home. 



■■ une chambre ' ro f m - 

• Jront of the house. 

son. , , • , i 

fcl rencontres derrisre ■ ■ I i.-hmd your garden. 

Vous area achett oette tern- a I 



1 Inso ill- v. >i . . 
J'ai i avc ce janlinier a raisou de 
d"»« franca par jour. 



> your father. 
j n'xer ai the robe of two 

francs per day. 



Buutuui L57. 

•e. f. plate; vn ' kr > und " 

. re, m. back ; 
Dedans,' insuie, unthin , DOT Dwsoa, above, upon U , 



LESSON LXXX 217 

S'enrich-ir. 2. to become Hors, out ; Pomme-de-terre, f. po- 

rick; Plat, m. dish ; tato; 

Hectolitre, m 100 litres; Sur, upon, aboiit. 

1. N'ave'z-vous pas ferme la porte de devant? 2. Nous l'avona 
fermee, roais nous n'avons pas ferme la porte de derriere. 3. Qui 
est arrive avant moi? 4. Le monsieur qui est assis de vant la fen£tre. 
6. Qui demeure derriere votre maison ? 6. II n'y a point do maison 
derriere la notre. 7. Ne pensez-vous pas qu'a force de travailler, il 
e'enriehira?, 8. Je ne crois pas qu'il s'enriehisse, s'il vend ses mar- 
chandises a si bon marche. 9. Apprend-il la musique a. Tinsu de ses 
parents? 10. II l'apprend a leur insu. 11. Vous etes vous marie 
a l'insu de votre soeur? 12. Je me suis marie a son insu. 13. 
Notre ami n'est pas dans la maison, il est dehors. 14. II n'est pas 
hors de la ville, il est dedans. 15. Avez-vous de l'argent sur vous.' 
16. Je n'ai pas d'argent sur moi. 17. Demeurez-vous sur le der- 
riere on sur le devant de la maison? 18. Nous demeurons sur le de- 
vant. 19. La euisiniere a-t-elle mis les assiettes sur la table ou 
dessous ? 20. Elies a mis les assiettes, les plats, les cuilleres et les 
fourchettes sui la table. 21. Combien ces po tnmes-de-terre vous 
coutent-elles ? 22. Je les ai achetees a raison de cinq francs l'hecto- 
litre. 23. Avez vous fait reparer le dedans ou le dehors de la mai- 
son ? 24. J'ai fait reparer l'interieur et l'exterieur. 

Exercise 158. 

1. Have you bought that house without your father's knowledge? 
2. I have bought it without his knowledge. 3. Have you forgotten 
to shut the front door ? 4, I have shut the front door and the back 
door. 5. I have brought all my books except two or three. 6. Does 
your brother occupy the front of your house ? 7. He occupies the 
back. 8. Whom have you met behind that house ? 9. I met nobody 
behind the house. 10. Does that gentleman live behind your house ? 
11. Nobody lives behind our house. 12. There is no house behind 
yours. 13. Have you a knife about you ? 14. I have no knife about 
me. 15. Do you carry a knife about you? 16. I never cairy a 
knife about me. 17. Has not your brother money about him ? 18. 
He has no money about him. 19. Will you put these pencils upon 
the table, or under it? 20. I will put them in the drawer (tiroir). 
21. How much have you given for that wheat? 22. I bought it at 
the rate of twenty-five francs the hectolitre. 23. Is that 1 ady's house 
out of the city ? 24. It is not out of the city ; it is within. 25. Has 
not your sister placed the plates upon the table ? 26. She has put 
the plates upon the table, and the spoons under it. 27. Have you 
10 



218 LISBON LXXX1. 

had your house repaired ? 28. I have had the inside repaired, but 
not the outside. 29. How much does that silk cost you ? 30. 1 
have bought it at the rate of rive francs the metre. 31. Did you 
marry without your fathers knowledge? 32. I married without his 
knowledge. 33. Have you sold my books without my knowledge! 
34. I sold them without your knowledge. 35. I sold them without 
my sister's knowledge. 



LESSON LXXXI. 

THi: DEMONSTRATIVE PROXOl'N, OH. ($ 108.) 

1. The pronoun ce answers to the English pronoun it, used before 
the verb to be, in such sentences as, it is 1, it is thou, &c. The latter 
pronouns (/, thou, &C.) are rendered byoioi,toi, lui, die, nous, vous, 
eux, in., dies, f The veil, remains in the singular, except when tho 
pronoun following it is in the third person plural; in which ease it 
Bay I"- nut in the plural or in the singular [; 1 10, (2.)]. If the 
pronoun is followed by gut, the verb is better in the plural, and, if 
followed by que, in the singular : — 

C'c-' • He. // tl I it it he, it is she. 

- qui |>arlcnt. / > fpcak. 

1 // •> 

2. If thfl relative pronoun qui and another verb follow lire, thia 
second verb mu-t agfM in number and jktsou with the pronoun 

• "-' : — 
:> qui &vo7. f.i • that. 

C'est nous qui avona dechire cetto Jt is ice icho hare torn thai silk. 
Boie. 

3. Ce also renders the English pronoun it, used absolutely, but 
not unipersonallv before the verb to be [\ 108, (5.)] : — 

Co fut en AUuuin.Tio qnH trouva I <• nuny that he found \u 

sou ami. 

4. Celui qui, celle qui, ceux qui, in., celkfl qui, f, arc equivalent t( 
the English pronouns, Ac who, she who, they who— celui que, cclie que 
ceux que, cellos que, render he whom, .. 

Celui ou cello qui chante. He or she vho sings. 

:i'LES. 

Est-cc vous qui nous avea averti do I Is il you v\o have vunuil us of this 7 
celal 



lesso: 



219 



C'est nous qui vous en avons averti. 
Est-ce vous, mesdames, que nous 

avons rouconti ces ? 
Co n'est pas nous, c'est eux que 

vous avez vus. 
Ce n'est pas vous, ce sont eux qui 

ont fait cela. 
C'est en Angle terre que jc vous ai 

vu. 
Connaisscz-vous ces deux Portu- 

gais? 
Je connais celui qui parle a M. L. 



It is vie who havt warned yon of it. 
Is it you, ladies, whom we have met? 

It is not we; it is they whom yon have 

seen. 
It is not you; it is they who have doix 

that. 
It is in England that I saw you, \ 

Do you knoio those two Portuguese ? 

I know him who speaks to Mr. L. \ 



Exercise 159. 

Connaissance, f. acquain-De temps en temps,/'/-OT7» 
lance; time to lime; 

Expl iqu-er, 1 . to explain ; No- number ; 

Guerre, f. war; Phrase, f. sentence; 

De-jour cn-jour,/fo??i<te7/Prclud-cr, 1. to prelude, 
to day; 



Appel-er, 1. to call; 
A-toute-force, by all 

means ; 
Avert-ir, 1. to warn; 
Blessure, f. wound; 
Coinbl-er, 1. to over- 

Viliclm ; 

1. Est-ce vous, Madame, qui avez appele votre domestique ? 2. Ce 
n'est pas moi qui l'ai appele. 3. Est-ce vous mon ami qui voulez 
a toute force aller en Espagne ? 4. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est mon cousin. 
5. N'est-ce pas lui qui a averti ce matelot de son danger ? 6. Ce n'est 
pas lui, c'est moi qui Ten ai averti. 7. Est-ce nous que vous atten- 
dez de jour en jour? 8. Ce n'est pas vous, c'est eux que j'attends. 
9. Est-ce vous, Madame, qui nous avez comblees debienfaits? 10. 
Ce n'est pas moi, Madame. 11. N'est-ce pas en Italie que vous avez 
fait connaissance avec lui ? 12. Ce n'est pas en Italie ; c'est en Russie. 
13. Est-ce vous, Mesdames, ou vos cousines que nous avons vues au 
bal? 14. C'est nous, ce n'est pas nos cousines que vous avez vues, 
15. Ne connaissez-vous pas ces deux messieurs? 16. Je connais celui 
qui parle a Madame L. 17. Est-ce vous qui avez recu une blessure 
a. la guerre? 18. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est mon voisin. 19. N'est-ce 
pas vous qui nous avez explique cette phrase? 20. Est-ce vous, Mon- 
sieur, qui demeurez au N°- 18? 21. Ce n'est pas moi qui y demeure. 
22. Entendez-vous ces musiciens? 23. J'entends celui qui chante. 
24. Je n'enteuds pas bien celui qui joue. 25. Nous entendons ceux 
qui preludent. 

Exercise 160. 

1. Is it you, my friend, who have warned me of ray danger? 2. It 
is not I who have warned you of it. 3. Is it they whom you expect 
from day to day? 4. It J3 not they whom we expect. 5. Is it you 
who have done this? 6. It is not wo ; it is you who have done it 



•220 LESSON LXXXII. 

7. Was it in England that you bought this hat ? 8. It was not in 

England; it was in Germany- 9. Was it not in Russia that you be- 

came acquainted with him? 10. It was not in Russia; it was in 

Italy. 11. Was it you who were calling us? 12. It was not we; it 

was he. 13. Are you not acquainted with the two Poles who are 

reading ? 14. I know the one who is near you. 15. Is that (esl-ce ii) 

the lady whom you expected? 16. It is not (she). 17. Is .t you, 

gentlemen, who have loaded my brother with kindness? 18. It is not 

; we have not the pleasure of knowing him. 19. Js it you 

who have been wounded in the (au) arm ? 20. It is not (1). 21. Do 

you not hear those two ladies? 22. I do nol bear the one who sings. 

23. I hear the one who plays, 2t. Was it you who came to our 

house this morning 1 36. It waa not 1 : 1 was in London then (alors). 

!. Sir. who did us that favor.' 27. It was not (I); it 

28. Was ii your son who wished by all means to go 

lonl 29. It was not he : lie i> now in Germany. 30. 1- it you 

; ' 31. We have written no letter. I 

33. 1 live there ,,•".>/ vu,i). 34. Is it we whom 

you have seen? 35. It was not you whom I saw. 



LEBSOH l-xxxii. LBgON :.xxxn. 

]. The ptVBOOna and not the pronouns must be 

u „.,l ,-,, r - before the verb CO /><•. whoa that verb ia 

Bd Mil.siantivrly, ]■■■■■ 

of 0*9 understood, or by ■ or itm m< 

\\ ben the word need in apposition with as m plural, 
and in the third pOMon, the verb IS put in the plural, although ce re- 
B >J:— 

" '' ''• , . 

r i- ■ ■■»■ 

Be dame qui m'a pari* dV I '.'•■*' ic mrofytm. 

i as the nominative of the verb < tre. iu sentences li.e 

wing, and the conjunction que i- need idiomatically after \L 

The verh in I "' l'»t '» ,! "' P ,,lr:i1 :_ 

Qu'.-t-c-.' m"- H "*"' ren? 

yuV.st-.-.-.|ii.- I'll I '■'. 

ce-que lojard H rntng? 

3. Que is aaed idiomatically in ■ nnmber <»f sentence*. In tht 
following it ghrea greater force to the expression: — 

• ,ie bona Uvrea qut lea vol I - ••Ijooki. 

it dia que oui ; je crois que uon. I y yes ; I belter* net 



LESS ON LXXXII. 221 



Resume of Examples. 



Qui sont ces m essieurs qui parlent 

a. M.L.I 
Ce sont mes cousins, qui viennent 

d'arriver. 
De quel pays sont ces marchands 1 
Ce sont des Polonais ; ils viennent 

d'arriver. 
Ils ne sont pas polonais; us sont 

russes. 
Ce ne sont pas des Polonais ; ce sont 

des Russes. 
Qu'e'st-ce que la Touraine 1 
C'est le jardin de la France. 
Votre fenetre ne donne-t-elle pas 

sur la rue 1 
Non, c'est sur la cour qu'elle donne. 
Je crois que oui ; je crois que non. 



Who are the gentlemen whi speak to 
Mr. L. ? 

They are my cousins, who are just 
arrived. 

Of what country are those mo chants? 

They are Poles; they are just ar- 
rived. 

Tliey are not Poles ; they are Rus- 
sians. 

They are not Poles ; they are Rus- 
sians. 

What is Touraine? 

It is the garden of France. 

Does not your window look on the 
street ? 

No, it looks on the yard. 

I believe w ; / believe not. 



Exercise 161. 

Bris-er, 1. to break; Etranger, e, foreign; Soieries, f. p. silk stuffs; 

Charron, m. wheehorighi; Fenetre, f. window; Sucre, m. sugar ; 

Confitures, f. p. pre- Lyon, Dyons; Suisse, Swiss; 

serves ; Mouchoir, m. handker- Surprend-re, 4. ir. to 

Donn-er, 1. to give, look; chief; catch, surprise ; 

Ecossais, e, Scotch ; Roue, f. wheel ; Vol-er, 1, to steal. 

1. Connaissez-vous ces etrangers? 2. Oui, Monsieur, ce sont les 
freres de notre voisin. 3. Ne sont-il pas ecossais ? 4. Non, Mon- 
sieur, ils sont suisses. 5. Ne sont-ce point des Ecossais qui vous 
ont fait present de cette casquette ? 6. Non, Monsieur, ce sont des 
Suisses. 7. N'est-ce pas votre domestique qui vous a vole du vin ? 
8. Ce n'est pas lui, c'est son frere. 9. N'est-ce pas lui qui a pris vos 
confitures? 10. Ce n'est pas lui; ce sont ses enfants. 11. Ne 
sont-ce pas la. les enfants que vous avez surpris a voler votre sucre ? 
12. Ce sont leurs freres.. 13. Ne sont-ils pas cousins ? 14. Ils ne 
sont pas cousins; ils sont freres. 15. Qu'est-ce-que ces soieries? 
16. Ce sont des marchandises qu'on vient de nous envoyer. 17. 
N'est-ce pas une belle ville que Lyon? 18. C'est une grande et 
clle ville. 19. N'est-ce pas la le mouchoir que vous avez perdu? 
20. Je crois que oui. 21. N'est-ce pas sur le jardin que donnent vcs 
fenetres ? 22. Oui, Monsieur, c'est sur le jardin qu'elles donnent. 
23. N'est-ce pas notre charron qui a fait cette roue ? 24. Ce n'est 
pas lui qui l'a faite. 25. Ce sont nos amis qui l'ont brisee et c'est 
le menuisier qui l'a faite. 

Exercise 162. 

1. Is that lady your friend's sister? 2. No, Sir, she is a btranger 
8. Who are the two gentlemen who are speaking to your sister ? 4. 



222 LESSON L X X X I 1 1. 

They :ire Swiss gentlemen. 5. Are those the gentlemen whom vou 
have invited? j. It is they (eux). 7. Do you not knew that man 1 

8. I know him very well; he is the man who has stolen my wine. 

9. What is Italy? 10. It is the garden of Europe. 11. Is not that 
the letter which you intended to carry to the post-o'.hce ? 12. No, 
Sir, it is another. 13. Is the city of Havre line? 14. Ves, Sir 
Havre is truly a large and beautiful citv. 15. Is not that the ma 
whom you have caught stealing your fruit? 1G. It is not, it is an 
other. 17. Is not this the cap that you have bought? 18. Vcs, Sir. I 
believe so. 19. Do not the windows of your room look on the street? 
20. No, Madam, they look on the garden. 21. Do not the windows of 
your dining-room look on the yard (eour) '. 22. No, Sir, they look 
on the lake (lac). 23. Is it that litli child who has taken your pre- 
serve .' 2-1. It is his brother or his sister. 25. What are those en- 
gravings? 2<>. They are engravings which I bought in Germany. 
27. Arc thOM gentlemen Scotch? 2S. They arc not Scotch; they 
are IlalLn. 29. Are those ladies Scotch? 30. No; they are the 
Italian ladies who came yesterday. 31. What is Marseille? 32. It 
is one of tin- finest cities in (<lr) France. 33. Is it not yum tailor 
who made that coat? 34. It is not he; it is an English tailor who 
made it. 35. It is your friend who broke my watch. 



5SOH I.XXXIH. LEgON LXXXIII. 

1. In French, as in other languages, y, lien a verb has two subjects 
in the singular, it is generally put in the plural [} 114, (2.)]: — 

uncle and aunt are arrived. 

2. When a verb has two or more subjects of diU'erent persona, it 
is put in the plural, and assumes the termination of the lirst person 

rathe! than that of the second <>r third, and the termination of the 
second in preference to that of the third : — 

V..r.sit mol irons domain a la chaasc. Ymt ami I mil go hunting te^mrrew, 
Vuus et lui ircz domain 1 b-swmtsr. 

/ written Hud 

CcttO lcltre. 

3. The above examples will show, that, when a verb has 

I, sil of them pronouns, or partly pronouns and partly nouns, 
the words moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead ofje, to, il, lis. A pro- 
noun recapitulating the other-, may, as in the last example, be placed 
immediately before the verb [\ 33, (10.) (11.)]. 



LESSON L XXXI 1 1. 



223 



4 For further rules on this subject, see § 114 and 115, and also 
Hjj next lesson. 

5. Gener corresponds in signification to the English to trouble, to 
incommode, to disturb, to be in the way, and to hurt (in speaking of 
shoes and garments), Se gener means to constrain, or trouble onJs 
self:— 

Est-ce-que je vous gene 1 Am I in your way? 

Resume of Examples. 



Oil irez-vous, votre frere et vous 1 

Lui et moi irons en Angleterre. 
Vous, elle et lui, vous aclietorez du 

ble. 
Eux et moi, nous sommcs fait mal 

a la tote. 
Vous et lui. vous devriez vous pre- 

ter aux cireonstances (se preter). 
Lui et moi, vous generous sans 

doute. 
Ma cousine et moi, nous craignons 

de vous gener. 
Je ne me gene jamais chez nes 

amis. 
Ne vous genez pas ; mettez-vous a 

votre aise. 
Nous n'airuons pas a gener les au- 

tres. 
Nous n'aimons pas a. nous gener. 



Wliere will you go, your brother and 

you ? 
He and I will go to England. 
You, she and he will buy 



They and I have hurt our heads. 

You and he should adapt yourselves 
to circumstances. 

He and I will without doubt incom^ 
mode you. 

My cousin and I fear to be in your 
way. 

I am never under constraint with my 
friends. 

Be under no constraint ; place your- 
self comfortably. 

We do not like to incommode others. 

We do not like to incommode our- 



Exercise 103. 

A perte, at a loss; Nullcment, by no means; Prodigue, prodigal, lav- 

A profit, with a profit ; Pardon, excuse me ; ish ; 

Bras, arm; Persist-er, 1. to persist ; Societe, f. company, so- 

Derang-er, 1. to disturb; Place, f. room ; ciety ; 

Econome, economical; Tous deux, both. 

1. Si nous restions plus longtemps ici, nous craindrions de vous 
gener. 2. Vous ne nous genez nullement ; votre societe nous est 
tris agreable. 3. N'avez-vous pas ete trop prodigues, vous et votre 
fike? 4 Lui et moi aii contraire, nous avons ete tres economes. 
5. N'avez-vous pas tort de gener ce monsieur? 6. Nous n'avons 
nullement envie de le gener. 7. Est-ce-que mon bras vous gene, 
Monsieur? 8. Non, Monsieur; nous avons assez de place, vous ne 
me genez pas. 9. Ne devriez-vous pas vous preter aux circon- 
Btances'? 10. Nous faisons, elle et moi, notre possible pour nous y 
preter. 11. Ce jeune homme persiste-t-il dans sa resolution 7 12. 
Nous y persistons, lui et moi. 13. Persistez-vous tous deux a res. 



■2- i LESS O N LXX X I V. 

ier ici .- 14. Nous y persistans tous deux. 15. Cet homme est-i 
gene dans ses affaires {uncomfortably silua'eJ, badly off)"*. 16. X. 
Btait gene dans ses affaires il y a un an. 17. Ne vous gonez pas. 
Monsieur. 18. Je ne me gvna jamais, Monsieur. 19. Est-ce-quo 
mon frere vous derange ? 20. Non, Monsieur, il ne me derange pas. 
21. Je ne voudrais pas vous deranger. 22. Pardon, si je vous de- 
range. 23. Vous et voire associe avez vendu vos mareliandises a 
• t moi nous vendons toujours a profit. 25. Votre 
rotre frere et moi nous avons aehete des mareliandises. 

104. 
I. Di> we incommode you, my brother and I.' 2. No, Sir; you 
do not incommod .1 to Bee you. 3. Are you not 

afraid to disturb your friend .' 4. We are afraid to disturb him; lie 

ur way, Sir .' 6. .No, Sir ; your 

1. Will yon and your brother go to Ger- 

i there, he and I. 9. lie. you 

[, should write < .10. Should you not, you and your 

nces ' 1 1. We should do so, 

if it \. 13. You do 

. ] ■ J my little boy disturb 

nrba nobody. 17. 

-. Be never sells at 

il at a profit, 90. Do you persj 

i r r. ralution. 
Be under do 

; i i\ wrong to in- 
itend to Incommode tWo, M. Wo 
I out of the 
I will, perha] . 
v>. Sir ; wi Do I dia*orb 

. 1 disturb your ffetherl 
disturb no i use me, Sir, If I iitiurb 

mi. Sir j I uoure 

ou, that your ■ inieal. 



. . .;v. 

I. Wbe • boojm eted by ./, 

>me way 
la, or the l 



LESSON L X X X 1 V. 



225 



Son amour, sa tendresse pour ses His love, his tenderness for his chiir 

enfants est connue de tout le dren, are known to every bcdy. 
monde. 

Vos amis, vos parents, Dieu vous Your friends, your relatives, God 

recompensera. will reward you. 

2. When two or more nouns are united by the conjunction ou, the 
rerb agrees with the last only : — 

Charles ou George ecrira a votre Charles or George will write to your 
ami, friend. 

3. When a noun and a pronoun, or two or more pronouns (not be- 
ing all in the third person), are joined by ou, the verb is put in the 
plural : — 

Vous ou moi partirons demain. You or I will go to-morrow. 

Votre sceur ou vous irez a l'eglise. Your sister or you will go to church 

Vous ou lui avez pu seuls commettre You or he alone have probably com- 

cette action. mitted this act. 

4. When two nouns are joined by ni repeated, or when ni Vun ni 
I' 'autre is used as nominative to a verb, the verb is put in the plural, if 
the two nouns, or the two persons represented by ni fun ni Vaulre, 
perform or may perform the action together : — 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne liront. Neither the one nor the other will read. 

5. When, however, only one at a time can perform the action, the 
verb is put in the singular : — 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera nomme Neither the one nor the other will be av~ 
prefet de ce department. ' pointed prefect of that < " 



Resume of Examples. 



Ni l'un ni l'autre n'ont trouve le vin 
bon. 

L'un et l'autre ont trouve le diner 
mauvais. 

Comment se trouvent Messieurs vos 
freres 1 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne se trouvent bien. 

L'un et l'autre se trouverent au ren- 
dezvous. 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera elu presi- 
dent. 

L'un ou l'autre y trouvera a redire. 

Lui ou vous avez trouve quelque 
chose a redire a notre conduite. 

Ni lui ni moi n'avons trouve a redire 
a la conduite de vos enfants. 



Neither the one nor tlie other found the 

wine good. 
Both found the dinner bad. 

How do your brothers find themselves ? 

Neitlier find themselves well. 
They both found tliemselves at the ren- 
dezvous. 
Neither will be elected president. 

One or the other will find fault with it. 
He or you have found something to 

blame in our conduct. 
Neither he nor I have found any fauti 

with your children's conduct. 



Auteur, m. author; 
Devoir, m. duty ; 
tScriiure, f. writing ; 



Exercise 165. 

Eli-re, 4. ir. to elect; 
Espos-er, 1. to expose; 
Iateret, m. interest; 
10* 



Plutot, rather ; 
Rempl-ir, 2. to fulfil 
Roti, m. roast meat ; 



2!20 LESSON LXXXIV. 

Secretaire, ra. secretary ; Se trouv-er, l.ref. to find Yciller, 1. to watch; 
Trouv-er, 1. to find, U ones self; to be prcs-Yic, f. life, 
like, to fancy; ent. 

1. Remplissez-vousbien votre devoir? 2. Nous ne le rcmplissons 
ni Tun ni 1 'autre. 3. Cherchent*Hs I'un et l'autre a s'exposerl 4. Ni 

Tun ir l'autre ne cherehent a exposcr leur vie (La Bruyeke). 5. M. 
votre pere et M"* votre more, se trouvent-ils mieux aujourd'hui ? 6. 
Ni Fun ni l'autre ne se trouvent mieux. 7. Avez-vous trouve k re* 
dire a mon eeriture ou a celle do mon secretaire? 8. Je n'ai trouv6 
•i redire ni a l'une ni a l'autre. 9. Cot auteur ne trouve-t-il pas a 
redire a tout? 10. II trouve a redire a tons les livres. 11. Y 
trouvez-vousquelque chose a redire ? 12. Ni lui ni moi n'y trouvons 
rien a redire. 13. Lui ou moi, nous veillcrons a vos interets. 14. 
Ni lui ni moi ne cesserons dc veiller a la conduite de votre fils. 15. 
Nous y veillerona plutol que d'y trouver ;i redire. 16. Lui et moi 
nous trouvaines ensemble an rendezvous. 17. Vous y trouverez 

i'un ou l'autre? 18. Nous nous y trouverons 1'un ou l'autre. 
19. L'un ou l'autre sera-t-il ihi president ? 20. Ni I'un ni l'autre 

;.i i'lu. 21. Comment trouvez-vous ce rOti 1 22. Je le trouve 
excellent. 23. Je trouve 00 livrc bon. 2!. Je ne le trouve pas bon 
25. Je trouve cela bien fait. 

1GC. 

1. Bow do you like that book ? 2. Neither my sister nor I like 
it. 3. Did your brother* find the dinner goodl -1. Both found it 
or find fault with your conduct! 6. 
II QOl find fault with it. 7. Neither lie nor my father find 

fault with my eonduet. 8. Do they both watch over your conduct? 
'.' They both watch over my conduct and over my interests. io. 

Mil both fulfilled your duty.' 11. We have fulfilled it. 12. 

Have you not both criticised my writing .' 13. Neither has criticised 
it. L4 Do not your two sisters find themselves better to-day 1 15. 
One finds herself better. Hi. The other does no' find beraalf so 

well. 17. Do not those ladies find fault with every thing? 18. They 
find fault with nothing. 19. Will either ! Tret of the 

Department 1 20. Neither will be elected. 31. How do you like 
thia bread 1 22. I find it very l: I. r two friendaar* 

in time at the appointed place ? 24. Neither was there I 

time. 28. I'" vnii find fault with : 26 I do not find 

fault wiili it (y). 27. Will you both > Kpose yourselves to this dan- 

28. We will not expose o 29. Do you find fault 

with my secretary's conduct ? 30. I do not find fault with it 81. 



LESSON LXXXV. 227 

Do you fini fault with his writing? 32. I find fault with it; for it 
is very bad. 33. Will you not watch over my interests ? 34. Mv 
brother and I will watch over them. 35. We will not cease to watch 
over vour interests. 



! LESSOR LXXXV. LEgON LXXXV. 

1. A verb having, as its subject, a general collective noun [§ 3, (6.)] 
|Teceded by the article, agrees with the noun [§ 115, (1.)] : — 

La foule des pauvres est grande. The crcncd of the poor is great. 

2. A verb preceded by a partitive collective [§ 3, (6.)] takes the 
number of the noun following the collective, unless attention be par- 
ticularly directed to the collective itself \_\ 115, (2.)] : — 

Une foule de pauvres ref oivent A crowd of poor people receive assist- 
des secours. ance. 

3. The words, la plupart, most ; un nombre, a number, &c., and 
the adverbs of quantity, peu, assez, beaucoup, plus, moins, trop, tant, 
combien, belong to this class. 

4. Rester is often used unipersonally in the sense of to have left. 
The adverbial expression de reste is often used in the same manner 
as the English word left: — 

Ii me reste deux francs. I have two francs left — or literally 

There remains to me tvjo francs. 
Nous avons cinquante ecus de reste. We have fifty crowns left. 

5. Devenir (2. ir.) to become, with etre as an auxiliary, corresponds 
in signification to the English to become, followed by of. It is also 
Englished by to become, or simply to turn : — 

Qu'est devenu votrc frcre 1 What has become of your brother ? 

II est en France, ct est devenu He is in France, and has turned laje- 
avocat. yer. 

Resume of Examples. 

Most of my hours are devoted to labor. 



La plupart de mes heures sont 

consacrees au travail. 
La foule des humains est vouee au 

malheur. 
La plus grande partie des voyageurs 

le diseut, et le repctent. 
Ne vous reste-t>il que cela 1 
Voila tout ce qu : il me reste. 
Je ne sais ce qu'ils sont devenus. 

Je ne sais ce que vous deviendrez. 



The mass of mankind is devoted to 

misfortune. 
The greatest number of travellers 

say it, and repeat it. 
Have you only that left ? 
That is all that I have left. 
I do not know what has become of 

them. 
J do not know what will become of you 



223 LESSON LXXXV. 



Exercise 167. 

S'appliqu-er, 1. rcf. to Chcmin, m. way, road; Habile, skilful i r 

apply; Desol-er, 1. to desolate; Maigre, thin, lean; 

Apprei.t'i m. apprentice ; Egar-er. 1. to mislay; Naissance, f. birth ; 
AvouHc Emplettes, f. p. purcha- Rue, f. street ; 

Bagatelle, f. trifle; , Savant, e, learned. 

Boiteux, se, lame ; Etat, m. trade ; 

1. La plupart de vos parents ne sont-ils pas venus vous voir? 2. 
Beaucoup sont venus. 3. Que sent devenus les autres ? 4. Je n« 
Kiurais vous .lire 06 qu'ilB sont devenus. 5. Que deviendra ee jeune 
homme s'il ne B'applique pasal'etudel 6. Je ne sals pas ee qu'il 
deviendra, 7. Je Baia qn'il ne deviendra jamais savant. 8. Coinbien 
,] t . tV: 9- 11 Qe me reste qu'un franc. 10. 

Lea vous restera-t-il qtiand VOUSaurez fait vos emplettes? 11. 
11 ne me restera qn'nne bagatelle, vi. Cet apprenti est-il devenu 
habfle dans son .'tat? 13. 11 y est devenn habile. 14. Ce monsieur 
I'est-U devenu '. 15. II Test devenu. 
Hi. Savez-vouB ee qne sent devenna cea jea 17. Da Bont 

, e que Bont devenus mea 

- »na paa boitevx si 

I maigre, 22, La 

■■.;. La foule s\ eat 

One nu e de berbarea 

| • oio \ ens ruinrs, 
w.z.) 

,; jronr friend - 3. Moat of (hem 

tome learned? 

' ' the Amen- 

i:, but 

7. Can you 

: | ", voa 

w j ml r brother blind by birth 

'• n - 

ya). 13. Are. not most of your I. ■'»•)* 

DOfa Of your 
17. 

I 

21. I shall only ' 



LESSON LXXXVI. £29 

I have made my purchat.-es. 22. What has become of your grami 
mar 1 23. I have mislaid it. 24. Do you know what has become 
of my hat ? 25. You have left (laisse) it upon the table. 26. Will 
not that gentleman become blind? 27. He will not become blind, 
but lame. 28. Has your son become skilful in his trade ? 29. He 
has not become skilful in it. 30. What has become of him ? 31. 
He has lost his way in the wood. 32. Did the crowd lose its way ? 
33. Most of the soldiers lost their way. 34. A cloud of locusts 
(sautereUes) desolated our country. 



LESSON LXXXVI. LECON LXXXVI. 

1. The article, the demonstrative and the possessive adjectives, 
must be repeated, as before said, before every noun or adjective used 
substantively, which they determine [§ 80, 93, 21]. 

2. The prepositions &, de, and en, are repeated before every word 
which they govern [§ 141]. 

3. The verb quitter, to leave (to quit), is said of persons and 
places, and also of things in the sense of to abandon, to give up : — 

Vons avez quitte vos parents et vos You have left your relations ana 

amis. friends. 

Nous avons quitte nos etudes. We have discontinued our studies. 

4. Laisser, to leave, to let, is generally said of things. It is, how 
ever said of persons in the sense of to suffer to remain : — 

Vous avez laisse votre livre sur la You left your book upon tlie table, 
table. 

The examples below will illustrate the use of those two verbs. 

Resume of Examples. 

Have you not left your house ? 



N'avez vous pas quitted votre mai- 
son'? 

J'ai quitte mon pays et mes parents. 

J'ai laisse ma biblotheque en Eu- 
rope. 

Ne voulez-vous pas laisser votre fils 
ici 1 

3e n'aime pas a le quitter. 

J'ai laisse votre lettre a son domes- 
tique. 

Mon pere m'a laisse cinquante mille 
francs. 

Le» avez- vous laisses tranquilles 1 



I have left my country and ? iuation 
I left my library in Europe. 

Will you not leave your son he?e? 

I do not like to quit him. 

I left your letter with his servant. 

My father left me fifty thousand 

francs. 
Have you let them alone ? 



230 LESSON L XXX VI. 



Jc leur a» lausc le cliamp libre. 

Ce malade a quitt>; le lit. 
Votre frere a quitte le barrcau. 
Je vous laisserai ce cbapeau a ce 
piix. 



/ ha ve left them a free choice {fret 

Tiiat sick man has left his bed. 
Your brother has left the bar. 
I will let you hare that hat at thai 
price. 

Exercise 1C9. 

A bon compte, cheap ; Mauvais, e, bud ; Pension, f. boarding' 

Carte, P. card ; Afoina, less; 

fipee, f SWOrd, army (fig- Noyau, m. fruit-stone ; Portier, in. porter ; 

uratively). Pounpioi. why; Prix, m. price ; 

Habitude, € habit; Pavie, m. clingstone- Robe, t.g oton ,• 

Jugc, m. peach; Service, in.; service, army. 

1. Vos oncles, vos cousins ct vos ncveuw ont-ila quitte le coin. 
Dense) 2. Da ont quitte le commerce, ct Boot devenua medecina. 
3. Le capitaine (I. n'a-t-il pas quitte le Bcrvice .' i. II a quitte la France, 
mais il n'a pas quitte le Berviee, 5. OH avez-voua laiase voire Rial 
6. Je I'ai laiase dana one pension. 7. Est-il tropjeune pour quitter 
leal 8. II est trop jeune j il n'a que douze ana. 9. Aquiaveic- 
vous laiase votre carte de vieitel 10. .Ic I'ai laiaaee chez le portier. 
11. Poarquoi ce le lai - parler? 12. Parce qu'il eat temps 

gne noua voua quittions. 13. BdEe permettez-voua de lui communiquer 
L Je roue laiase le champ libre .1 eel egard, 15. Ce jeune 
homme n'a-t-il pas quitte aea mauvaisea habitudes? ig. 11 lea ■ 

17. ML L u'a-:-iI pas quitte la robe pour I'ep'c? 18. Oui. 
'! r: il n'est pi : ■• eapitaine. 19. < tea p.'ehes cjuit- 

tent-ellea facilement le 10. -Non, Monsieur; cc aont dee pa. 

ir cinquante franca. 83. A 
quel pri.v me le Je voua le laiaaerai pour dix francs. 

24 J'' \ous le laiaae a b< a compte; j'' ne aauraia vuus le laiaaer a 

BOIBR 1 TO. 

l. The BOB,daughti Paria 2, My father, 

and sister, |ave left me here. 3. I>o you like to leave your 
country.' 4. I do Dot like to leave my frienda and country. 
parents do not like to here; I am too young. & Why 

your brother let his son Bpei '. I. ''7. I.,.' 7. Becauae he 

haa nothing to aay. B. Have you let him alone.' 9, I have let him 

10. Why do you not let me alone ! II. 1 will let them alone. 

19 Rat your friend lefl his bed! 13. He has not ye! left his bed 

he is yet very siek. 14 Has Captain G. left the army? 15. He has not 
left the army. 16. Has not that gentleman left the army for the bar! 
17. He has n;>t left the army. 18. My friend has left the bar. 19. A*. 



LESSON LXXXVI I. 231 

What price will you let me have this silk ? 20. 1 will let you have it at 
two francs a yard. 21. Can you not let me have it for less? 22. I let 
you have it cheap. 23. Will you let me have that book for twenty 
franqs. 24. I will let you have it for twenty-two. 25. I could not let 
you have it for less. 26. With whom (d qui) have you left my book] 
27. I left it with your sister. 28. Why did you not leave it w th my 
servant ? 29. Because he had left your house. 30. Do you like to 
leave your friends? 31. I do not like to leave them. 32. Where 
, have you left your book ? 33. I left it at my father's. 34. Has that 
merchant given up commerce ? 35. He has not given it up. 36. These 
peaches do not part easily from the stone ; they are clingstone peaches. 



LESSON LXXXVIL LEgON LXXXVII. 

1. The nominative pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, elles, 
must be repeated, when the first verb of the sentence is negative 
and the second affirmative, when the verbs are in different tenses, 
and when the different propositions are connected by conjunctions 
other than et, ou ni, mais [§ 99. 2.] : — 

II ne lit pas ; il ecrit. He does not read; lie writes. 

Ellc ne viendra pas ; elle est partie. She will not come ; she is gone. 

2. The pronouns of the third person are often omitted before the 
second verb in cases not coming within the above rule. The other 
nominative pronouns are also, sometimes, omitted. We should, 
however, not advise the student to omit the latter pronouns. It is 
always correct to repeat the nominative pronouns. 

3. The student will bear in mind, that the objective pronouns must 
always be repeated. 

4. Connaitre a answers to the English expression, to know by : — 
Je le connais a. sa demarche. I know him by his walk (carriage). 

5. Connaitre de nom, de visage, de vue, mean, to know by name, by 
sigh'., 

6. Se connaitre a. quelque chose, or en quelque chose, corresponds 
in signification to the English expression; to be a judge of something. 
Vous vous eonnaissez en pierreries. You are a judge of precious stones. 

Resume of Examples. 



Je le connais, je l'aime, et je lui 
rends justice. Gresset. 

tl s'ecoute, il se plait, il s'adonise, 
il s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. 



/ knmo him, love him, and do justice 

to him. 
He listens to himself, is pleased with 

himself, adorns himself, loves him- 



232 



LESSON' LXXXVII. 



A qnoi connaissez-vous cc mor 

sieur 1 
Je le connais a son habit noir. 
Je le connais de roe. 
J'ai reconnu ma mure a la voix. 
A qnoi vous eonnaissez-vous ? 
Je me connais en merchandises. 
Je ne my ootmais pas. 
II ne s'y commit point du tout. 

matt mieux que moi. 

Jo my esamala anal Men qua lui. 



By what do you know that genlne* 

man ? 
J know him by his black coat, 
m by si? hi. 

ij mother by her voice. 

lame I (of t'len). 

II ~ it (of 

them). 

'vttcr judge of it (of them,), 

than I. 
I am as good a judge of it (of them) 

as he. " 



Exercise 171. 

''is of alt kinds; Grain, m. gram; 
Blond, e int, m. manufac-Orftvtt,m.geldmit*, 

turer ; O.-uvre. f. 

Oherelnre, t hen ; Poaaie, £ jm*#jh 

hair ; 

Chevenx, m. p. hair; Qra 

l. Ne recoi - point voire amiel 2. Je la reoonnak a 

aaehevelnre blonde, B. I qnoi r ona eette demoiselle 1 

4. Je la i i di marohe graciense. 5. Yaurie/.-vous point 

connii vnire ami a la i inn, 7. ft L'omvtc 

LaF ■ : mn s . Ne le reconnaltrex-vooe point 

Itrai i". Ci I oi-f ne i 

. oonnah point ilu tout I 

; qne leforgeron! 18, J<- aVyoonnaia 

a qne lai 11 Ne voua connaiasez-vona point en 

15. I M eoiinait- 

q .' it. II se connait beaueonp 

-... qu'a celolei 18. Ne connaic ■ ee mon- 

si.-nr a aea geetea veiiementa 1 19. Je le connais & -os ohevetu 

,'./ your name | ' 

a (ait connall oua ferona-noua p 

naltrel _:'•. Vqub vGus ferez connnitre, 24. lis se (eront eoajiattvi 
par leura rertua I 



i 72. 

I. |>0 yon no! !;•'■ tl tmai _'. Jf< -. N r; [ 1 now him bv his 

large (grand) hat. 3. 

; by your walk. 5. my Friend by 

I \ . - : [ j ttize him by his b 
know him well I s. I know bim by sight, bn( I r spoUan 



LESSON LXXXVI1I. 233 

to hira. 9. Are you a judge of iron ? 10 No, Sir; the blacksmith 
is a judge of iron. 11. By what will you ^now your book ? 12. 1 
shall know it by those marks. 13. Have you not known your friend 
by her voice? 14. No, Madam; I knew her by her light hair. 15. 
Have you told your name? 16. I have not told my name. 17. Did 
you know your sister's friend by her curled hair? 18. I knew her 
by it. 19. Is the merchant a good judge of cloth ? 20. Heis-abet 
ter judge than I. 21. Is he a better judge of it than the manufac 
tu er ? 22. He is quite as good a judge as he. 23. Is not the gold- 
smith as good a judge of precious stones as you? 24. He is a better 
judge of them than I. 25. Of what are you a judge? 26. I am a 
judge of nothing. 27. Are not your sisters good judges of poetry ? 
28. They are not the least judges of it. 29. Do you not know that 
young .ady by her dress (robe) ? 30. I know her by her graceful 
carriage. 31. Have they made themselves known ? 32. They have 
made themselves known by their merit (merite). 33. Is not the 
workman known by his work ? 34. The workman is known by his 
work 35. He is a judge of it. 



LESSON LXXXVllI. LEQON LXXXVIH. 

1. Quelque, whatsoever, however, some, any, followed by a noun 
tanes the form of the plural. It is invariable, when it is followed 
by an adjective or an adverb [§ 97, (1.) 2. 3.] : — 

Quelques livres que vous ayez. Whatever books you may have. 
Quelque bons qu'ils soient. However good they may be. 

2. Quel que, followed by a verb, is written as two words, the first 
{quel) agreeing in gender and number with the nominative of that 
verb [§ 97, (1.) 1.] :— 

Quelles que soient vos vertus. Whatever your virtues may be. 

3. The above examples show that quelque — que and quel — que 
govern the subjunctive. 

4. Tout meaning entirely, quite, nothing but, though an adverb, 
varies through euphony before a feminine word commencing with a 
consonant or an h aspirate : 

L'esperance, toute trompeusc qu'elle Hope, deceitful as it is, serves at least 

est, sert au moins a nous mener a to conduct us to the termination of 

la fin de la vie par un chemin life by an agreeable road. 
agreable. (La Bruyere.) 



234 LESSON LXXXVIII. 

5. The \ntrd gre signifying consent, will, meaning, cf-c. forms 4 
number of idioms : — 

Jehii sais [savoir, 3. ir.] bon gre de / am thankful to him (i. c. owe him 

cette action. good-will) for thai action. 

D uous suit mauvais gre de cela. He is displeased ictlJi tusfor thai. 

Resume of Examim.es. 



Ne lc fcrez-vons p.os dc bon gro 1 
II sVsi marie OODtTO le gre de ses 

parents. 
8a cli .-velure voltige au grede vent. 

Je sals mauvais grf ; \ votre frerede 

vouloir bo 1 affaires, 

Jc lui en saia be 

me Banrex pas 

mauvais grt, bJ je ne rotu ecria 

pas. 
C'est a 1110:1 gre le meilleur enfant 

du luonde. 



117// you tint do it willingly? 

If married against the will of his 

parents. 
His hair flutters at the will of the 

wind. 
I am displeased with your brother for 
with mil affairs. 
I am thankful to him, for it. 
I h<> i>c thnl 11. hi will not Ik displeased 

with vie, if Ida ujiI write to ijou. 

my (Minting, tlic Lest chila 

in the : 



Exercise it.:. 

Bon gre. mal gre, willing Men-er, 1 . ; . m. srerr/ ; 

or not : - lenoe, m. silence ; 

Chambrc, I Suite, f. consequent! 1 

1. to keep; Ofl Voler, 1. tojlij. 

Lit, 111. bed 1 . i • re- 

in spite ofi 

06 < 1 n'il a ilit ? 2. Je 
no lui en nil aucun mauvais gre (VOLTAIRE). 3. Ne me saurioz- 

l.oii gre si je voiis men. lis avec nidi .' I. Je VOW en saurais 
lemeilleu 1a pas bon gre <l"a\«.ir 

gard6ce I'nvofr garde. 7. Ne 

\oiis pai recommande' tie garder le silence ? 8. Jeleurai 
recomma irder. 9. Ce mal.nl'' garde-t-il encore le lit ? 

10. II ne garde plus le lit, maia il est encore oblige de garder la 
ehambre. 11. Votre chevelure est-clle b 

sieur, elle < otrc domestique 1 

14. Je le garderaijil fait tout a mon gre. 15. Quelquea oflres qu'on 

il ne \eut pan me quitter? 16. Quclque bonnes quo soient 
oe* tl. nnes, elles ne sont pas it. Quel lea que soient lea 

affaire, je \ 1 tentiona '! 

1**. Tout* belle qu\ lie est, elle n'cal pas •■ nun: 
f.iit inalgre VOUal 9 ; je I'ai fait ile ! 

. il partira. 22. Me garderez voua 1 
23. Je vous le garderai. 21. 11 change d'opioiOD nu gni dca e\ cno- 
ments. 



LESSON LXXXIX. 235 

Exercise 174. 
1. WW je marry against his father's consent? 2. He wil* not 
marry ag*Jlist his: parents' consent. 3. Why are you displeased ivith 
me ? 4. I am not displeased with you. 5. Is your little girl's hair 
tied ? 6. Y, is iy»t tied ; it waves (Jlotte) with the wind. 7, What 
do vou thi::k of my book ? 8. It is, in my opinion, the best book 
thai I havo rend [L. 74. 3, 4]. 9. Will you not be displeased with 
me, if I do r.O <.ome to-day? 10. I shall not be displeased with you. 
11. Will yew rot read that letter? 12. However well written it may 
be, I will net mid it. 13. Are those ladies handsome ? 14. However 
handsome anl good they may be, they do not strike my fancy. 
15. Are you displeased with my brother? 16. No, Sir, I am thank- 
ful to him for his intentions, whatever may be the consequences of 
his conduct. 17. Will you keep this secret (for me)? 18. I will 
keep it willingly. 19. Does your sister keep her bed willingly? 
20. She does not keep her room willingly. 21. Willingly or not, 
she must keep her room, when she is sick. 22. Will you keep silent 
on this point? 23. I will willingly. 24. I am thankful to you for 
your good intentions. 25. Are you thankful to him for this (de 
cela) ? 26. I am thankful to him for it. 27. Will the judge keep his 
servant? 28. He will keep him. 29. Does he do his work to his 
fancy? 30. He does it to his fancy. 31. Is your brother obliged to 
keep in the house ? 32. He is obliged to keep his bed. 33. Has he 
not left his room ? 34. He has not yet left his room ; he is too sick 
to leave it. 35. I should be under the greatest obligations in the 
world to you, if you would do this. 



LESSON LXXXIX. LEQON LXXXIX. 

1. Servir [2. ir.] is used in French in the sense of the English 
expression to help to : — 

Que vous servirai-je 1 To what shall I help you ? 

Vous sevvirai-jc ck; la soupe 1 Shall J help you to some soup ? 

Vous n'avez pas servi monsieur. You have not helped that' gentleman. 

2. Jo vous remercie, I thank you, said in answer to an offer, is in 
French always a refusal. This phrase is never employed like the 
English expression, I thank you for (this or that), to signify a request. 
The French make use of other forms: — Oserai-je vous prier do . . . 
Oseiai-je vous demander . . . Je vous prie de . . . Je vous prierai 
io . . . :— 



236 



LESSON LXXIIJ. 



Oserai je vous demander tine ailo I vill tJiarik vou for a wing of thai 
de cette volatile, un niorceau do fowl, a du* o) ' uuit roast meat 

ce roti 1 

3. S'il vous phut, corresponds to the English, if you please. The 
verb is used unipersonally in that sentence and in the following:— 

Gemme il vooa i>laira. As you 

II ne me plait pea d'y aller. I or plea* me to go then. 

Que vow plait-fl ? What would you pUosj to 4 

■1. Aii plaisir de vous revoir, au revoir, adieu, josqrfaa revoir, mean 
till I have (he pleasure of seeing you again, till I see you again, &c. 

Mi Of KXAMI'LES. 



Qu'aurai-je le ptaWrda vou- 

demandera] uumorceau de 
mbon. 
Vous oflrirai-je un morcM 

• "r; Je 
prendrai de preference una aue 
•[<• volatile. 

Je \..ii> aonhail 

. 
trer. 



To irhat shall I have the pleasure of 
hflping you ? 

■i <>r / 'rill trouble you 

ft hiim. 

S / .a slice of this roust 

meat ? 
I 8 ■ ; I would prefer a 

wing of that fowl. 

Is not the dinner yet on the table ? 
J irish you go 

I have wished the lady a good tnorn- 

II tn to sit dawn. 

idncss to walk 



Prt-er I 
•i in. hnm; aerciment,m 

Att.n.l • i: 

Bonilli, m. boUt 

sti 4 S-.it : ;v. suf. 

r. rdrix, f. pari be, f. slice. 

i. MuM-iiMir, c|u':nir:ii.jf !<• plaiair de Tooa aervirl -. Je tone do* 
manderai one tranche «!»• oejambon. .'5. Je voni prie de aetvir eea 
i je vi. us demander an moroeea de oe boafllil 

".iTrirai-ie line tranche de ce rotil t;. Jevonawdi 
1 irj j'en ai roffiaamment 7. M 

near da vous tervir ane alle de cette perdrix .' 8. J'' vona ■ 

ir; jeprendraidepreferenei B Monsieur, 

vous i-nverrai-je de la aonpel 10. Madame, je v. .us pria i 
MadameieaHaj, II. 1 lemanderai aprea. IB. Jean, prA- 

i Monsieur. rumei ftont di 



LESSON XC. 237 

14. Monsieur, je suis bien aise que vous les trouviez bons. 15. Mon- 
sieur, ne voulezwous pas vous asseoir? 16. Mille remerciments, 
Monsieur, mon pere m'attend a la maison. 17. Ne leur avez-vous pas 
souhaite le bonjour? 18. Je leur ai souhaite le bon soir. 19. Leur 
avez-vous dit adieu ? 20. J'aidit adieu a mon frere. 21. J'ai pris 
conge d'eux. 22. Les avez-vous pries d'entrer ? 23. Je les en ai 
pries. 24. Messieurs, on a servi. 25. Ayez la complaisance de 
vous mettre ici. 

Exercise 1*76. 

1 . Madam, to what shall I help you ? 2. I will trouble you for a 
slice of that ham. 3. Shall I send you a wing of this fowl ? 4. No, 
Sir, I thank you. 5. I thank you, Sir (sHl vous plait, Monsieur). 

6. Sir, shall I have the pleasure of helping you to a slice of this ham ? 

7. I thank you, Sir, I would prefer a slice of the partridge. 8. Shall 
I offer you a little of this boiled meat ? 9. I thank you, Sir ; I have 
some. 10. Madam, shall I send you a little of this soup? 11. Much 
obliged to you, Sir [see No. 16, in the above exercise]. 12. Sir, will 
you have the goodness to help this young lady? 13. With much 
pleasure, Sir. 14. John, take this soup to the gentleman. 15. These 
ortolans are delicious. 16. I am very glad that you like them. 17 
Is the dinner on the table ? 18. No, Sir; it is not yet on the table. 
19. It is too early. 20. Does it please you to go there ? 21. It does 
not please me to go to his house ; but I will go, if you wish it. 22. 
Shall I go with you ? 23. As you please. 24. Will not your friend 
sit down ? 25. He is much obliged to you ; he has not time to-day. 
26. Have you wished your friend a good morning ? 27. I wished 
him a good evening. 28. Have you not bid him farewell ? 29. I 
have bid him farewell. 30. Have the goodness to sit down here. 
31. I have taken leave of them. 32. I have taken leave of all my 
friends. 33. Madam, have the goodness to walk in. 34. We are 
much obliged to you, Sir. 35. Our father is waiting for us at home. 



LESSON XC. LEQON XO. 

1. The verb tenir [2. ir.], to hold, often corresponds in signification 
to the English verb to keep ; tenir un hotel, to keep a hotel ; tenir table 
ouverte, to keep opt,i table ; tenir sa chambre propre, &c, to keep one's 
room clean ; tenir la porte, les fenetres ouvertes, to keep the door, the 
windows open ; tenir les yeux ouverts, femes, to keep one's eyes opened, 



238 



LESSON X C. 



shut ; tenir la t£te droite, &c., to keep one's head upr'.ght ; tenir sa 
parole, to keep one's word ; tenir conipagnie a quclqu'un, to stay 01 
remain with some or any one. 

2. Tenir un langage singulier, tenir des propos . . ., des discours . . ., 
would be rendered in English by to make use of singular language 
to use peculiar expressions, to advance things, tiic. 

Ce jei.ne liommc tient des propos That young man says foolish things. 
inst-:.- 

3. Tenir is also used in the sense of being attached to, to le tena- 
cious of: — 

Je tiens a mon argent, a la vie. / value (i. e. hold to) viy money, in* 

Jc tiens a mon opinion. 1 am tenacious of my opinion. 

4. Tenir is also used ofa color which 16 fast or not: — 

Cotte conlent tiendra on ne tiendra This color is fast (i. e. holds) or not. 
pas. 

5. Fain tenir is used in the sense of to foncard, to send: — 

Failes-liii tenir cet argent, cettc Forward him (his money, this ktlcr. 
kllre. 

lenir, or sVn tenir, conjugated reflectively, may often be 
rendered by to remain, to abide by, to be satisfied with : — 

II bo tienl debonl U it mains standing, seated. 

Je n'en tiena a rotre opii I am satisfied with your opinion. 

MPLK8. 



iri un hob 1 superb©. 

; lite fill.- lie liellt J«13 Sa 

ebambri Wen propra 
Pourqnol tesca-vona lee portcs ou- 

11 i.iit si chaud epic n«us tenona 

toutea lea fenotrea ouvertea. 
Tenez In hate droits et lea yens 

CUVelts. 

Ponrqaoi ne tenes-Tona pa 
parole ! 

Tene/. compngnic a votre sour; 

elle eat malade. 
1 ami tient <i' i 

La conlenr de votre drap ti udra- y 

t-,l!e ? 



M I. IxepS a .-><}>rrb hotel. 

Yiiu r lit . I /.rip her room 

1 1 i iii i u keep the doors open ? 

It is so warm that ire keep all the win- 

i loir} . 

r head upright and your 
pen. 
H you not b tp your word? 

sister ; she is sick. 

Your fiit ml makes use of very single 

You use very light Inmrua^e. 



Lui avea-vona (kit tenir ce livrcl 
A quo! voua en tiendrez-vona \ 
Je in en dendral ;i cc que j'ai dit. 
ponrqno) M bVant-U tonjoun de- 
bout 1 



H ' '.;?i that look? 

1 1 teisiemt 

1 shall abide bit ir'iat I halt said. 
Why ■lots he always remain 



LESSON zc. 239 

L'incredule s'en tiendra-t-il au pre- | Will tlie unbeliever be satisfied with 
sent, qui doit fiuir demain 1 the present, whuh is to end to-mor- 

Massillon. I row? 

Exercise 177. 

Cocher. ra. coachman; Gens, pi. people; Recommand-er, 1 to 

Pebout standing; Indispose, e, indisposed ; recommend; 

Defend- re, 4. to forbid; Insolent, e, insolent; Regard-er, 1. io look; 
De pres, closely ; Lieu, place ; Rue, street -, 

En dehors, out, outside; Malade, sick ; Sav-oir, 3. ir. to know; 

S'enrhumer, 1. ref. to get Parfaitement, perfectly ; Vie, life. 
a cold; Prcfer-er, 1. to prefer ; 

1. Quel hotel votre frere tient-il? 2. II tient l'hotel de l'Europe, 
rue de . . . 3. Votre petit garcon se tient-il bien propre ? 4. II se tient 
bion propre. 5. A quoi vous en tiendrez-vous ? 6. Je nren tiendrai 
a ce que je vous ai dit. 7. Ne savez-vous pas a quoi vous en tenir? 
8. Je sais parfaitement a. quoi m'en tenir. 9. Pourquoi vous tenez- 
vous debout? 10. Parceque nous n'avons pas le temps de nous 
asseoir. 11. N'avez-vous point defendu a ces jeunes gens de tenir 
de tela propos? 12. Je le leur ai defendu. 13. Votre cocher n'a-t-il 
pas tenu un langage bien insolent? 14. N'avez-vous pas peur de vous 
enrhumer, en tenant les portes ouvertes? 15. Nous prefererions les 
tenir fermees. 16. Votre maitre vous recommande-t-il de tenir la 
tetedroite? 17. II me recommande de tenir les pieds en dehors. 18. 
Pourquoi votre ami ne vous tient-il pas compagnie? 19. Sa soeur est 
indisposee; il est oblige de rester avec elle. 20. Votre oncle ne 
vous a-kil pas tenu lieu de pere? 21. II m'a tenu lieu de pere et de 
mere. 22. Regarderez-vous de plus pres a cette affaire? 23. Non, 
Monsieur; je m'en tiendrai a ce que j'en sais. 24. Ce medecin ne 
tient-il pas a son opinion ? 25. II y tient plus qu'il ne tient a. la vie 
de ses malades. 

Exercise 178. 

1. Does that gentleman keep open table? 2. He keeps a hotel in 
Paris. 3. Why do you keep the windows open ? 4. We keep them 
oper. because we are too warm. 5. Has not your friend kept his 
word, 6. He has kept his word; he always keeps his word. 7. Have 
you :iot told your scholar to keep his head upright? 8. I have toll 
him to keep his head upright and his eyes open. 9. Why do you 
not stay with your sister? 10. Because I have promised to go to my 
cousin's this morning. 11. Have you forbidden your little boy to 
make use of these expressions? 12. I have forbidden him. 13. Does 
he make use of insolent language? 14. He does not. 15. What cviU 
be your decision? 16. I will abide by what I told your father. 17 



240 LESSON XCI. 

Have you forwarded that money to your friend ! 18. 1 have not yet 
forwarded it to him. 19. Will you forward it to him to-morrow? 
20. I will forward it to him, if I have an opportunity. 21. Why do 
you not keep standing ! 22. Because I am weary. 23. Do you think 
that the color of your eout is fast .' 24. I think that it is fast; it {elk) 
appears very good. 25. Will you not look closely into your brother's 
affairs ? 96. I shall not look closely into them. 27. I will be satisfied 
with vour opinion. 18. Are you n"t tenacious of your opinion J 
n,, j ' am ,,„, | , s L) f it. 30. Docs not your physician ad- 

here too tenaciously to his opinion .' 31. He adheres to it. 32. Does 
that lady hold your mother's place ! 33. She is a mother to me. 34. 
Our cou-in is a father to us. 35. That physician does not value the 
life of his patient. 



LESSON KCL LEgON XCL 

1. The v.-rb .'ire forms a gnat many idioms be s ides those which 

already raeatioaed : tea en retard, to !»• brie, /« fcrrj ; etre 
trees peine de, toes uneasy about ; 

:.inin pour, to U M ihc way 

■ ■irant <le. to U familiar with ; rtre 1 la veille de, 

:-,. de trop. • ''- in the way; 

on good term* with ; etre brooille area, to be on 

■> TVftWt, quarrel or 

I,. .17. ;,. . is used in the sense of appar- 
tenir, t» behng. It is alao employed in the aense of to aahefl 

caw . tnthe v th'' prrpositioiw/e before 

another verb: — 

Est-ce a ' 'rast (male) re 

proi ' I BJWB him ? 

C'est a. vous d parler. // U fOW turn to speak. 

3. V etre H often Bead for to be at home, to be in: — 

Votrc pi re y I I ur father at home ? 

WLK8. 



Nft sommes-nous pas do trop id 7 
Nous m Hmmea pea U 

tn-nts. 
N»us Bommee au coorant de tout 
ccU. 



I - 4 in thr wiy here? 

II ftti terms with <mr r» 

it .miliar with all that. 



LESS OK XCI. 



24) 



Je suis a mcme de satisfaire a. sa 

demando. 
Nous sonmies brouilles. 

Ma socur est a la vcille de se 

marier. 
Nous sorames d'avis que vous 

alliez lui faire des excuses. 
Cc n'est pas a lui de nous re- 

procher notre bonte. 
A qui est-ce a lire 1 
C'cst a ma socur a lire ce matin. 

Cctto maison est a lui et a moi. 
Elle est a moi, ellc est a lui. 
Ces souliers ne sont pas a nous, 
lis appartiennent a notre frcrc. 
lis lui appartiennent. 
Monsieur* n'y est pas. 
Madame y est. 



/ am able to satisfy Ids demand. 

We a?e not on good terms; we are at 
variance. 

My sister is on the eve of licr mar- 
riage. 

It is our opinion that you should go 
and apologize to him. 

It docs not become him to reproach us 
with our kindness. 

Whose turn is it to read ? 

It is my sister's turn to read this 
morning. 

That house is his and mine. 

It is mine, it is his. 

Tlicse slwes are not ours. 

They belong to our brother. 

Tltey belong to him. 

The gentleman h not at home. 

T/ie lady is in. 



Exercise 179. 

Achet-cr, 1. to buy; Gravurc, f. engraving ; Part-ir, 2. ir. to start, set 

Arnv-er. 1. to arrive ; Hote, m. host; out; 

Correspondant, corns- Libraire, m. bookseUer ; Proprietaire, m. land- 

pondenl; Mois, m. month ; lord; 

Cvaind-re, 4. ir. to fear; Montre, f. watch ; Punir, 2. to punish ; 

Dev-oir, 3. to otcc, be oblig- 'Movt, p. yt. from mourir, Veille, f. eve, day he- 
ed; to die; fore, 

Embarqu-er, (s') 1. ref. 
to embark ; 

1. Y a-t-il longtetnps que vous etes brouilles? 2. II y a plus d'un 
mois quo je suis brouille avec lui. 3. Votre ami est-il encore en vie? 
4. Non, Monsieur; il ya dix ans qu'il est mort. 5. Votre corres- 
pondan" est-il en chemin pour Paris? 6. Je crois qu'il doit etre 
arrive. 7. Ce jeune homme n'est-il pas en retard? 8. Oui, Mon- 
sieur; il ne vient jamais a temps. 9. Ces gravures sont-elles a vous 
ou a votre libraire? 10. Elles sont a moi ; je viens de les acheter. 
11. Ne craignez-vous pas d'etre de trop ici ? 12. Nous sommes trop 
bien avec notre bote pour craindre cela. 13. A qui est-ce -a aller 
cbercher les livres? 14. C'est a moi a les aller chercher. 15. Est-ce 
a vous de le punir, quand il le merite? 16. C'est a moi de le punir, 
car je lui tiens lieu de pere. 17. Ces maisons n'appartiennent-elles 
pas a notre proprietaire? 18. Elles ne lui appartiennent pas. 19. 
Elles sont a notre correspondant. 20. A qui sont ces lettres ? 21. 
Elles ne sont point a moi, elles sont a ma cousine. 22. Cetle montre 



* Monsieur, Madame, not followed by a name, are generally understood 
to mean the master and mistress of the bouse, the heads of the family. 
11 



242 LE8S0N X C 1 1. 

est a lui. 23. N'etes-vous point a la veille de partii pour Londres' 
24, Nous sommes a la veflle de nous embarquer pour Cadiz. 2f». 
II y a longtemps, que nous sonicaes rax prises. 



Exercise 180. 
Are you able to pay him ! 2. I am not able to pay 



him ; I hart 

not received mv money.' 3. Are you on good terms with your book- 
seller? 4. I am N rms with him. 5. I am on bad terms 

with him. G. How long have you been on bad terms with him 
It hi mON than a month. 8. Are you not able to satisfy my friend's 

ndl 9. I an • '"■ Al " 

- :■: 1 am 00 my way to Rome. 
12. Is nol font physician on the eve of starting for Montpellierl 13. 
H ,. 1 I. Am 1 in the way here? 

,.-, \ ...not in the way. 16. Whose turn is it to &p 

]T |. jg , ' ; | , ; . . ; .., .;. . id to i ad. 18. Is ii my place (.i mot) 
toul:; to himl 19. It is your brother's place to apolo- 

gise to him. -"• Does it become you to punish that child .' 2 
infch him. -2± Do you hold the place of a • 

of a father towards him. 24. 
No, Sir; il 
openly with him.' -J7. We have been quar- 
relli. yours! 29. Wo, 

your 

b him with his kin.'. 

hi,„ • !hthel t<s 

It j_ ,!, them. 84 ntleman in? 

35 _ N man is not in; but the lady (of the h 

is in. 



xcn. [Jescon xon. 

i Avaneer, retarder, correspond tot! rbato£are,af 

i or clock, &c 

the vari- 

at ion : — 

Ma norm* retarde d'nne ■' 
henre. 

dm avancc d*un quart 

Jai avanc6 cetto horloge d'uDO I te that clock half an hour fcrvmr a. 
demi-hcure. 



LESSON X C 1 1. 



243 



Retardez votre montre de cinq Put your watch five minutes back. 
minutes. 

2. Metlre [4. ir.] a. l'heure, means to set right, to put right, to 
set :— 

Mettez cette montre a l'heure. Set that watch right. 

3. S'accorder, to agree, is said also of clocks, watches, &c. 



Resume of Examples. 



Votre montre va-t-elle bicn 1 
Elleretarde d'une denii-heure par 

jour. 
Elle avance d'un quart d'heure par 

semaine. 
De combien avance-t-elle 1 
Je viens de mettre ma montre a, 

l'heure. 
Si votre montre retarde, pourquoi 

ne l'avancez-vous pas 1 
Ma pendule avance ; je viens de la 

retarder. 
Quelle heure est-il a votre montre 7 
Mon hoiioge Sonne les heures et les 

demies. 
J'ai oublie de la monter (or remon- 

ter). 
Votre montre est derangee. 
II faudra la faire nettoj^er. 
La sonnerie en est derangee. 
Votre pendule et ma montre ne 

s'accordent pas. 
Les pendules a ressort vont mieux 

que les pendules a poids. 
L'horloge a sonne deux heures. 



Does your watch go well ? 
It loses half an hour a day. 

It gains a quarter of an houi a week. 

How much has it gained ? 
I have just set my watch rig it. 

If your watch loses, why do you not 

set it forward ? 
My clock gains ; I have just set it 

back. 
What o'clock is it by your watcn. ? 
My clock strikes the hour and th. half 

hour. 
I have forgotten to wind it up. 

Your ivatch is out of order. 
It, will be necessary to have it cleaned. 
The striking part is out of order. 
Your clock and my watch do not 

agree. 
Spring clocks go better than weight 

clocks. 
The clock has struck two. 



Exercise 181. 

Aiguille, f. hand; Droit, e, straight; Ressort, (grand) m. 

Arret-er, (s') 1. ref. to Fele, e, cracked ; main-spring ; 

stop ; Juste, right, correct ; Secondes, (montre a) 

Balancier, m. pendu- Matin, m. morning ; watch with a second 

lum ; Perfection, f. perfection ; hand ; 

Boite, f. watch-case ; Plat, e, flat, thin; Timbre, m. bell of o> 

Cadran, to., face, dial; Regl-er, 1. to regulate; clock; 

Cass-er, 1. to break; Repetition, (montre a) Vite, quick, quickly. 
Double, double; f. repeater; 

1. N'avez-vous pas une montre a. repetition? 2. J'ai une montre 
cTor, a double boite. 3. Va-t-elle mieux que la mienne 1 4. Elle ne 
va pas bien, elle retardo d'une heure par jour. 5. Est-ce une montre 
a. secondes ? 6. C'est une montre a. secondes et a cadran d'or. ?. 
Votre horloge ne sonne-t-elle pas'? 8. Elle np. sonne plus, le timbre 
en est casse. 9. Pourquoi ces pendules ne s'accordent-elles paa? 



244 LESSON XOIL 

10. Pareequ'j Tune avance et l'aulre retarde. 11. PJTavez vous point 
Basse It- grand ressort dc votrc montre ? 12. Je I'ai easel en lu re- 
montant. 13. Votre pendule est elle juste 1 14. Oui, Monsieur 
ello est juste; je viens de la faire regler. 15. La sonuerie de «.otte 
pendule est-eile deranged 1 16. La Bonnerie en est derangeeet lo 
timbre en est ft-1 '-. 17. La petite aiguille de ma montre plate est 
18. Le balancierde votre horloge n'est pas droit? 19. Do 
combien votre pendule avanee-t-elle ? 20. El!e avanee de Otnq mi- 
nutes par jour. 91. La perfection dune pendule n'est pasd'aller vitc, 
:rc regies (DbulLB). 22. Votre montre s'arrete-t-clle 
souvent? 26. Eile s'arrctc tous les matins. 2-1. Votre pendule 
b'est arretee. 

Eurcui 1S2. 

1. Does your watch gain or lose? 9. It does not lose; it goes 
very well. 3. It loeefl twenty-live minutes a day. 4. Dees vmir 
clotk gain mueli ? 5. It gains one hour a week. 6, How much 
does your ton's gold watch lose? 7. It loses much ; it loses one 
boor in (en) twenty-four (ASttnet). B. I have put it forward one 
hour. 9. I will put it hack half an hour. 10. Dott not your clock 
strike the half hour '. 11. No, Sir; it only strikes the hour. 12. 
Have vou (0fg9tt6fl to wind up your repeater 1 13. I have forgot- 
ten tu wind it up, and it has stopped. 1 I. Il your silver watch out 

;t of order, and it will be necessary to have it 

cleaned. |& What o'clock is it by you.- watch .' 17. It is three 
O'clock by my watch; hut it gains. 18. How much docs it gain a 

week? 19. It gains more than five minutes a day. 90. layottf 

watch ritfht ? 91. No, Sir; il is not right; it is nut of order. 22. 

u r clock strike right 1 98. It does not strike rij,'lit ; tho 

striking part is out of order. 94 Have you broken the band* of 

your clock ? 25. I have broken the hour hand and the dial. 26. 
lias the clock strnek three? 27. It has struck twelve. 28. It has 
■topped. 99. Does' it stop every morning 1 30. It does not stop 
every morning ; it stops every OTOning. 31. Vour watch does not 
cgree with mine. 32. Have you not broken the main-spring of your 
Mother's Watch 1 33. He has broken il iii winding it up. 31. M? 
brollii r's watch is right ; he has had it cleaned and regulated- 



LESSON XCIII. 



245 



LESSOR xcm. 



lecon xcm 



1. Se demettre [-1. ir.] le bras, le poignet, corresponds to Die 
English expression to dislocate one's arm, wrist, to put ones arm, wrist 
out of joint. In this sense se demettre takes no preposition before 
its object: — 

Je me suis doinis l'epaule. I have dislocated my shoulder. 

2. Se demettre, used in the sense of to resign, to give up, takes 
the preposition de before its object : — 

11 s'est demis dc sa place. lie has resigned his place. 

3. S'emparer, to seize, to lay hold of, takes de before its object : — 
II s'est empare de ce cliapean. He seized upon this hat. 

4. S'empecher, to prevent one's self, to forbear, to help, takes de be- 
fore another verb : — 

Je ne puis m'empecher de rire. 
Je ne puis m'en empecher. 

5. S'inquieter answers to the English expression, to be or become 
uneasy, to trouble one's self; it takes de before its object, be this ob- 
ject noun, pronoun or verb : — 

Je ne m'inquicte pas de cela. lam not uneasy about that. 

6. Se comporter answers to the expressions to behave, to deport 
one's self. 

7. S'attendre means to await, to expect. It takes d before its ob- 
ject - 

Je ne m'attendais pas a. cela. / did wl expect thai. 

Je ne ra'y attendais pas. 1 did not expect, it. 

Resume of Examples. 



I cannot help laughing 
1 cannot help doing so. 



Vcni.s etcs-vous demis l'epaule 1 

Je me la suis demise [L. 45. 2. 
§ 135]. 

Cette demoiselle s'est demis le poi- 
gnet. 

Qui le lui a rcmis 1 

Le Dr. L. a rcmis lepaule a ma 
soeur. 

Vous etes-vous demis de votrc 
place 1 

Je men suis demis [(> 135. 7]. 

Nous ne pouvions nous empecher 
de souiire pendant ce veeit. 

Vous etes-vous empare de ce livre'? 

Je m'en suis empare. 

De quoi vous intpiietez-vous 1 



Have you dislocated your shoidikr? 
I dislocated it. 

That young lady dislocated her tens' , 

Wlio set it for Iter? 

Dr. L. set my sister's shoulder. 

Have you resigned your situation? 

I have resigned it. 

We could not help smiling during 

that narration. 
Have you seized that book? 
I laid hold of it. 
Why do yon trouble y out self? 



246 LKSSON X C 1 1 T. 



Jc no m'inqui&te <le rien, 
Comment ce jetme homme - 

t-il ! 
II Be coraporte comme il but 

ie telle 



. j attendab rrallement 



'about nothing. 
, rung man bchavt? 

I an answer. 



I did not :>i means. 

188. 



A l'avenir, in future t Ganche, Paysan, m. peasant i 

Pruase, P. Prussia ; 
Monde (tout le 8 ur m. .-'"//,• 

body; Traitemeat, in. trrat- 

auch ; Villa, i 
E 

l. \, oua pas demis 2. Je •■ me I'etaia pal 

demis; je me l 1 Ami rique, voua dfV 

: i'en demottre I 

d< mis de la aienne ? 

6. II v a mi moia qu'il L\ anemi B'est-il empare de 

la vilk- ? 6. II >Vn eat empare. comportera-t41 

in parvil tr titemenl de aa 
• 

omme il Pant 15. PourqnoJ 
.a empe- 
i empare- 
i ]•> \ otre i 

remia le pi 89. Le Dr. 

(i. le Id l« btaa 

: atin I 24. 1 

I li j .11 

. 6. 1 

rm .' 7. I le 

i 
d 

DV n. I I. Will 

not some one lay hold of your tot, it' you leavi 



LESSON XOIV. 247 

one will lay hold of it. 16. How has your son behaved this morning! 
17. He behaved very well. 18. He always behaves properly. 
19. Do you not trouble yourself uselessly (inutilement) ? 20. I do 
not trouble myself at all (du lout). 21. Did you expect such treat- 
ment from (de la part de) your son 1 22. I did not expect such 
treatment from him (de sa part). 23. Does that young lady behave 
well towards her mother? 24. She behaves well towards every 
body. 25. Will you behave better in future ? 26. We will behave 
well. 27. Have you broken your fmger (doigl) ? 28. I have broken 
my thumb (pouce). 29. Could you help going to sleep (de dormir) 1 
30. We could not help smiling. 31. My sisters could not help 
laughing. 32. Why are you uneasy? 33. Because (parceque) my 
son does not behave well. 34. Did your father expect to be well 
treated ? 35. He expected to be treated properly. 36. We did not 
expect such an answer. 



LESSON XCIV. LEQON XC1V. 

1. N'importe, an ellipsis of il rCimporte, answers to the English 
expression " no matter" it does not matter, never mind : — 

Donnez-moi un livre, n'importe le Give me a book, no matter which. 
quel. 

2. Qu'importe ? answers to the English phrase what matter ? 
What does it mailer 1 When that expression is followed by a plural 
subject the verb importer is put in the plural : — 

Que nous important leurs mur- What do we care for their murmurs 7 
mures 1 

3. N'est-ee pas ? corresponds to the English expressions, is it not < 
is lie not, <f 'C. 1 do they not 1 following an assertion : — 

II fait froid ; n'est-ce pas % It is cold ; is it not ? 

4. N'est-ce pas 1 frequently precedes the assertion : — 

N'est-ce pas que votre frere est Your In-other is come ; is he not ? 
arrive 1 

5. Regarder, to look at, is used in the sense of to concern : — 

Cela regard e votre frere. That concerns yuw brother. 

6. En voul-oir (3. ir.) a quelqu'un, a quelque chose, means to have 
a design, against or upon ; a grudge against any one ; to be angry with 
sneon account rf something : — 

II en veut a notre vie. He lias a design against our hfe. 



248 



LBSSOS X C I Y. 



R&ST7M& OF Ex.Uiri.ES. 



Ponrvu qnc rons veniea, n'importe 
par quel cheiuin. 

a'importe 

A] 

n'importe. 
•.islail; qa'iflO] 

: qu'importo 1 

1 

B 

■ 

I 



'jome x no ■mailer reJtitk 
trail. 

he does it, no matter hoi?. 

Bring mc something, no metier w.'uJ. 

I shall die through it; nommtkr, 

; ichai 
matte 

pretexts ; lchal does U 

»r* for that a fair? 
i ; i < rritai to us I 

■-it mc ? Js that cry 

'."■■! is no- 

p r o p e rt y, 
. friends, 

,:r business/ 



.' 



tar. to be 



Ponr-olr, 3. 

i 

■ 

. lett i 

< 

; cc quo 
porter du 

• 

I'impurto 

7. Vbai 
i 

i lutisftut; 

qu'importa I 11.11 | ; n*inpoilt 

lo public 

■ 

moi. 17. Vow krai 

' 

I A qui en 

ne voui 



lesson xcv. 249 

en vouhms pas. 22. Vous m'en voudrez; n'est re pas? 23. En 
voulez vous a la vie de votre ami ? 24. Je n'en veux pas a sa vie. 
25. II m'en veut; qu'importe? 26. Va, Cesar est bien loin d'en 
vouioir a sa vie ! (Voltaire). 

Exercise 186. 

]. Which way will your brother come? 2. Provided he comes to- 
morrow, it does not mattei which way. 3. Will he write to your 
brother? 4. He will not write to him; but it is no matter. 5. 
Will you not lend me a book? 6. Which book do you wish to 
have ? 7. No matter which. 8. Shall I bring you some silk from 
Paris? 9. Bring me what you can; no matter what. 10. Does 
that concern your brother? 11. That does not concern him, but it 
concerns me. 12. Does he refuse to write to u's? 13. He refuses 
to (de) write; but what does it matter? 14. Bring me a book, no 
matter which. 15. Your brother will come, will he not? 16. Has 
he been willing to receive your brother? 17. He has refused to re- 
ceive him, but no matter. 18. He is pleased, is he not? 19. He is 
not pleased, but it is no matter. 20. Is that your business? 21. It 
is my business. 22. It is my brother's business. 23. I have told 
you that it is nobody's business. 24. Has that man a design against 
your father's life? 25. He has no design against his life ; but he 
has a design upon his property. 26. Are you angry with us on that 
account? 27. I am not angry with you for this. 28. Have you a 
grudge against my friends? 29. I have no grudge against them. 
30. That concerns you, does it not? 31. That concerns me. 32. 
Is that your business? 33. It is very warm this morning; is it not 1 * 
34. My sister will come this afternoon; will she not? 35. If she 
does not come, it does not matter. 36. What is her coming to us ? 



LESSON XCV. LEgON XCV. 

1. The word monde, world, is often used in French in a restricted 
sense. It has then the meaning of people, company, retinue, servant^ 
&?. 

Y avait-il beaucoup de monde a Were there many people at church? 

l'eglise * 
Be mettant alatete de son monde, il Placing himself at the head, of his 

ouvrit lui-meme la porte. people, he himself opened the door. 

VOLTAIEE. 

2, The word gens also means people, and is of the masculine geiu 

11* 



250 



LESSON ICV. 



dcr : but, by anomaly, the adjectives which precede gens 

arc put in the feminine, wliile tlio^e which follow it must be in the 
tnasculin 

1 
Ceagens jereux. 

3. The n in, not preceding immediately 

the v re put i;i the masculine, except when the word 

coming between is an adjective having ;•. different termination in the 

- : — 

11 al ■'. 

:><ople are fix 

1 J i; 

put in the feminine when 
immediately the word gens, or are separated from it 
e having a different termination in the feminine: — 

ii 
n 

l; 



If de tout !•• 

i 
\ 

LaBi 

I 



l 

// 

' 
/• 
T 
II 

'! ' i crew. 

II ..' gOOd ptopi* 



II 



•' 






I 

i>n board; 9* S*h*t 



LESSON XCV. 251 

Perd-re. 4. to lose • Reven-ir, l.ir. to return; Voyager, 1. [§ 49.] ?o 

Easseiubl-er. 1. to 5/-J% Salon, m. drawing-room; travel; 
together; ' Serv-ir, 2. ir. to serve; Terre, £. land, sliore. 

1. Avez-vous rasseinble beaucoup de monde chez vous? 2. II n'est 
venu que peu de monde. 3. A quelle heure servira-t-on le diner au- 
j o u ra 'h ui ? 4. On le servira des que notre monde sera venu. 5. Le 
( apitaine a-t-il tout son equipage a bord? 6. Non, Monsieur, il a en- 
roye du monde a. terre. 7. Vos gens se lcvent-ils de bonne heure *■ 
8, II faut que tous les jours j'eveille tout mon monde (Moliere). 
9 Lcs Moscovites perdirent trois fois plus de monde que les 
Sueclois (Voltaire). 10. Ou est Madame votre mere? 11. Elle est 
dans le salon, il y a du monde avec elle (company). 12. Tout le 
monde peut voyager com me moi (X. de Maistre). 13. Ainsi va le 
monde. 14. Elle attend pour quitter le monde, que le monde l'ait 
quittee (Flechier). 15. Vos gens sont-ils revenus de la campagne? 
16. Nous attendons nos gens aujourd'hui. 17. Y a-t-il iciune societe 
de gens de lettres ? 18. Non, Monsieur; il n'y a qu'une societe de 
gens de robe. 19. Connaissez-vous ces bi'aves gens'? 20. Je crois 
que ce sont des gens d'epee. 21. Tels sont les gens aujourd'hui. 
22. Telles gens, tels patrons (La Bruyere). 23. Tous mes gens 
sont malades. 24. II faut savoir s'accommoder de toutes gens 
(L'Academie). 25. Q,ue pouvez-vous avoir a. demeler avec de 
telles gens ? 

Exercise 183. 

1. Are there many people at your brother's? 2. There are not 
many people there. 3. Does that young man slander every body ? 
4. He slanders nobody. 5. Have you brought many people with 
you ? 6. We have brought but few people with us. 7. Is there com- 
pany with your mother? 8. There is no company with her. 9. Who 
has told you that ? 10. Every body says so. 11. Is the company come ? 
12. The company is not yet come. 13. Has your mother discharged 
twc servants (domesliques) ? 14. She has discharged all her people. 
15. Do you know those people? 16. I know them very well; they 
are very worthy people. 17. When he travels, he stops always with 
good people. 18. Are there foolish people here? 19. There are 
foolish people everywhere (partout'). 20. Do you awake your people 
every morning ? 21. Yes, Sir; I must awake them everyday. 22. 
What can your brother have to settle with those people ? 23. They 
are the best people in the world. 24. Were there many people at 
church this morning? 25. There were not many people there. 26. 
Are your people sick? 27. Yes, Sir; all my people are sick. 28. 



259 J.ESSON XCTT. 

There is here a society of learned men. 29. There are in Paris 
Kfrera] societies of lawyers. 30. What worthy people ! Si. What 
good people ! 3J. 1> . . 33. We ox 

peet them this • 3j. lias your cap- 

. his crew o;; I 



XCVL LE£ON XCVI. 

- inanimate, 
. halve pronoun 
.:- 
V a fin* tree; its fruit is excel- 

vlvit, the inanimate possessor \- the subject of the 
1 I.)] : — 

.-.'-nil/. It 

-- 

. rtmeaoa 
i before 

pronoun f/:— 

J ' 
1 

.^.h, to make one's self 
- 

'■'■ 

one's self. So Udre. 
ref, .' 

-nous. '.".gue). Let us 

I 



U 

iacs. 



ic.hv • 'at j mill. 

Cent. :!j trees 
'■ ulitstr 



LESSON XCTI. 



253 



Entendez-vous bien le latin 1 

Cet avouc n'entend rien aux affaires. 

II ne s'y entend pas. 

Je lui ai donnc a entendre, qu'il 

etait dc trop ici. 
Qu'ente.idez-vous par la.1 
II y avait tant de bruit, que nous 

n'avons pu nous faire entendre. 
Taisezle premier, ce quo vous vou- 

lez qu'on taise. Latin Maxim. 
Pourquoi nevous taisez- vous pas'? 
Nous l'avons fait taire. 



Do you understand Latin well ? 

That attorney has no knoiclcdge of 
business. 

He is not expert in this. 

I gave him, to understand thai he 
was in the way here. 

What do you mean by that ? 

There was so much noise, that we 
could not make ourselves heard. 

-Keep to yourself that which you would 
wish to have kepi secret. 

Why are you not silent? 

We made him hold his tongue (si- 
lenced him). 



Exercise 189. 

Agrement, m. pleasure; Chirurgien, m. surgeon; Mancbe, f. sleeve ; 

Avantage, na. advan- Consent-ir, 2. ir. to con- Mel-er, 1. to mix ; 

tage ; sent ; Muet, te, dumb, mute ; 

Basque, f. skirt of a Court, e, short; Pays, m. country, 

coat ; Force, f. force, power ; Raison, f. reason ; 

Brave, worthy, Fort, very, Reuss-ir, 2. to succeed. 

1. Est-ce un habit neuf que votre fils porte? 2. C'est un habit 
neuf, le drap en est tres fin. 3. Les manches n'en sont elles pas trop 
courtes ? 4. Je crois que les manches en sont trop courtes et les 
basques troplongues. 5. La campagne n'a-t-elle pas ses avantages? 
6. J'aime la campagne ; j'en connais les avantages. 7. Paris a ses 
agrements. 8. J'aime Paris; j'en connais les agrements. 9. Ce chi- 
rurgien s'entend-il a. la medecine? 10. II n'y entend rien du tout. 
11. Entendez-vous la medecine. 12. Je ne m'y entends pas. 13. Je 
ne l'entends pas. 14. Je n'y entends rien. 15. Avez-vous reussi a 
vous faire entendre ? 16. Nous n'y avons pas reussi. 17. Mon voi- 
sin est un brave homme et je m'entends fort bien avec lui. 18. Fahe 
taire certaines gens est un plus grand miracle que de faire parler les 
muets (Balzac). 19. Savez-vous de quel pays est cet homme? 
20. II tait son pays et sa naissance. 21. Par la force de la raison, 
elle apprit l'art de parler et de se taire (Flechier). 22. Voulez- 
vous vous taire impertinente, vous venez toujours meler vos imper 
tinerces a toutes choses (MoliEee). 23. Qui se tait consen 
(Proverb). 

Exercise 190. 

1. Have you a very good garden ? 2. We have a very large one, 
but its soil (tsrre, f.) is not good. 3. Is your brother's coat new? 
4. He has a new coat, but its sleeves are too short. 5. Are not ita 
ekirts too long? 6. No, Sir; its skirts are too short. 7. Have you 
Hot heard that preacher (predicateur) ? 8. There was so much noise, 



254 LESSON X C VI I. 

that I could not hear him. 9. Docs not the country have its plea 
Bores'! 10. The country has its pleasures. 11. Does not your bro. 
ther like the city ! 12. He likes the country : he know s i;s pleasures. 
13. What does your brother mean by that .' 14. lb means what lie 
jrour father expert in business ? 16. My father has no 
je of business man understand Engp 

lish well? 18. lie understands French i rery well. 19. 

ler is an honest 

i well with him. 21. Does that young 

man conceal hii and his country. '23. 

licine ! 24. He does not under- 

ilent, my child. 

that child I 
Will you '■ What hai him to under- 

■ him to undi its charm*, 

silenced him. 31. 
T.-'.l hio ) told him 

lent lent 



VII. I VII. 

nir. 

- 
I M.lcre.l int" ■ 
rendered by the | r bj the 

, ' pronoun. T 

! 84.] 
i . ■ 

| 

qualities, 

a verbal 

and number of 

■ 
R 

4. The verbs entendre, to hear ; (aire, to cause, (•> make ; laisser, to let.. 



LESSON XCVII. 



255 



&c, followed by another verb completing their meaning, are not in 
French separated from that verb. In the corresponding sentences in 
English, the two verbs are usually separated by other words: — 



J'ai laisse tomber mou couteau. 
J'ai entendu dire cela. 



I have let my knife fall {dropped). 
I have heard that said. 



Resume of Examples. 



Je connais cles personnes dormant 
d'un sommeil si profond, que le 
bruit de la foudre ne les reveille- 
rait pas. Beschee. 

Les eaux dormantes sontmeilleures 
pour les chevaux que les eaux 
vives. Buffon. 

Nous avons trouve cette femme 
mourante. 

Cette femme mourant dans la crainte 
de Dieu, ne craignait point la 
mort. 

On est heureux en se contentant de 
peu. 

Avez-vous laisse passer ce voleur 1 

Je l'ai laisse passer. 

Pourquoi avez-vr»u3 fait faire un 
habit 1 

Je n'ai pas fait faire d'habit. 

J'ai lasse tomber quelque chose. 

Lui avez-vous entendu dire cela 1 

Je le lui ai entendu dire. 

Je l'ai entendu dire. 

Je l'ai entendu dire a ma scenr. 



Iknoio persons, sleeping (who sleep 
so profoundly, that the noise ofthun* 
der would not awake them. 

Sleeping (still) waters are better for 
horses than living vjaters. 

We found that woman dying. 

That woman dying in tlie fear of 
God, did not fear death. 

One is happy in contenting one's self 

with little. 
Have you let that thief pass? 
I let him pass. 
Why have yon had a coat made ? 

I have had no coat made. 

I let something foil. 

Have you heard him say that ? 

I heard him say it. 

I heard it said. 

I heard my sister say it. 



Exercise 191. 

Appliqu-er, (s') 1. ref. Hat-er (se), 1. ref. to Prevenant, e. obliging ; 

to apply ; hasten ; Preven-ir, 2. ir. to an- 

Besoin, m. want; Lecture, dreading; ticipate; 

Changeruent. m. altera- Obligeant. e. obliging ; Repet-er, 1. to repeat; 

_ lion ; Plai-re, 4. ir. to please ; Suivant, e, following; 

Emouss-er, 1. to blunt; Pointe, f. point; Suiv-re, 4. ir. tc follow ; 

Empecher,l. to prevent; Pleuv-oir, 3.ir.fo rain; Voyant, e, bright, sh-jisy. 
Essayer, 1. to try; 

1. Ma cousine est-elle aussi obligeante que la votre ? 2. Elle est 
aussi obligeante, et bien plus charmante que la mienne. 3. Vos en- 
fants sont-ils prevenants 1 4. Mes enfants, prevenant tous mes be- 
Boins. ne me laissent rien a desirer. 5. Lisez bien attentivement los 
pages suivantes. 6. Ces demoiselles, suivant l'exemple de leur mere, 
s'appliquent a la lecture. 7. Les couleurs voyantes ne me plaisent 
point. 8. Mes scaurs voyant qu'il allait pleuvoir, se haterent de re- 
venir. 9. Qu'avez-vous laisse tomber? 10. J'ai laisse tomber ma 



256 LESSON XCVIIL 

plume; la pointc on est emonasee. 11. Les avez-vottt fait pari er! 
li.'. Je les ai fail parler, mais avec difficulte. 13. Avez-vous fait faire 
des rhangements dana voire maisonl 14. Jyen ai fait faire. 15. A 
quoi en avez-vous fait faire ? 16. Pen ai fait faire '. la salle a man- 
gcr et au sal* 17. A er cet homoie ? 18. Je 

n'ai p .-. 19. A qui (idiom avez-voua cn> 

lenda d i re eelal 20. Je l*ai entendudire .\ mon pere. 21. Je le lui 
22. D vona i'a entenda dire. 23. II vous a vu 
faire eclx 21. II vous i'a vu I'airc. 25. Jc l'ai vu p 

l. Bujfoo say-', tliat they are 
better for horses than living waters. 3. Are your sisters cautions 1 
4. They art' not wry cautious. 6. My Bisters, foreseeing that it was 
going to rain, brought their umbrellas, <>". What have you let fall? 
7. I have let my knife and book fall. s. Do very bright colors please 
your brothei Be him. !<>. Have 

yon read the following pagesl 11. II re you Been the dying wo- 
man ' IS. Yum- - I, was very happy. 

. pplir herself to study. 
14 Have yon made them read? 16. I made Ihem read and write, 

10, [ made my brother write, it. [ have had a 1 k bound (r 

ide in his house ! 19. He lias 
had soma n '■ - he hi d some made? 

•j I. I i Whom have 

. ; Have yon 
Have you 
i have 
81 Do not 
let it fall. 82. What has your 1 i 83 He has dropped 

nothing. 3t. Whom have you beard say lhati 86. I hoard 
brother say it. 86. rd you repeat it. 37. We ban 

you do tliat. 



LESSON X« viii. \' XCVUL 

ri'.ACTH ■ "'«-K. L 

The paitieiple past ia vabiablb under any of the following con. 

ditions: — 

1. When en | i which casfi it agrees to 

gender and number with the noun which it qualifies : — 



tsssow xotiii. 257 

Des livres iroprimes. Printed books. 

Ces femmes paraissent bien abat- Those women appear very dejected. 
tues. 

2. When used in the formation of the tenses of passive verbs; 
when it always agrees with the subject of the proposition : — 

Elles sont bien rccues de tout le They are well received by every 
monde. body. 

3. When employed in forming the compound tenses of neuter 
verbs having tire as an auxiliary ; in which place, as in the preced- 
ing case, it agrees with the subject or nominative : — 

Votre soeur est partie ce matin. Your sister went away this morning. 

4. When employed in forming the tenses of active verbs having 
avoir as an auxiliary; in which connection it agrees not with the 
subject, but with the direct object or regimen, provided that object 
precedes it : — 

Lcs maisons que ncus avons ache- The houses which we have bought. 
tees. 

5. When used along with tire in the formation of the compound 
tenses of reflective verbs, wherein the reflective pronoun is the direct 
object; in which position it agrees with that pronoun or direct 
object : — 

Ces dames se sont flattees. Tiwse ladies have jlallcred tlwvisches. 

6. When used along with tire (as in Rule 5.) in the formation of 
the compound tenses of those reflective verbs, in which the reflective 
pronoun is not the direct, but the indirect object of the proposition; 
in which event it agrees with the direct object, provided (as in Rule 
4.) that object precedes it : — 

Les histoires qu'elles se sont racon- T/i£ stories which they related to each 
tecs. other. 

7. When forming part of a compound tense of a verb governing a 
Bucceeding infinitive, it is at the same time preceded by a direct ob 
ject which is represented as performing the action denoted by the in 
Cnilive ; in which condition it agrees with that direct object: — 

Les dames que j'ai entendues ch'an- The ladies whom I heard sing fusing- 
tcr. ing). 

8. When in a sentence containing the pronoun en, the participle is 
preceded by another object or regimen which is direct ; in which case 
it agrees with that direct object: — 

Je les en ai avertis. / have warned them of it. 

Vous les en avez informes. You /tave informed them of it. 



258 



LESSON X C V 1 1 1. 



OF Examples. 



v.-z drs lirres bien relies. 

at bien labourites. 
Bies roisines Bont tomb6es d'ac 

tret, 
que doub avoi 

lata quoj'ai ■ 

as som- 



books 

Your da . 

n- ii ploughed, 
ibart have come to an u%- 

to us. 

^,'iited. 

The fields which you have ploughed. 
| you) of ijohi 
fault. 

S 

/ 

/ heari 









which I bro:. 



I 
I 

h 

I | ;• 

2. EU« 
est fiatigi 

Bile e-t 

■ 

q tmuveei 

| 



LESSON XCIX. 259 

rous vus rire? 2L Je les ai vus sourire. 22. Les avez-vous vus 
voler des fruits? 23. Je les ai vus voler des pomrnes. 24. Les avez- 
vous avertis de lturs fautes ? 25. Je les en ai avertis. 26. Je ne les 
en ai pas avertis. 

Exercise 194. 
1. Are your books well bound? 2. They are well bound, and 
well printed. 3. Did not your little girl find herself discouraged ? 
4. She found herself tired, but not discouraged. 5. Have your sis- 
ters come to an understanding ? 6. They have not come to an un- 
derstanding. 7. My brothers have come to an understanding. 8. 
Who came to you ? 9. Your friends came to us. 10. Is not your 
sister gone to church? 11. My sister is gone to church as usual. 
12. Did your sister return sooner than usud ? 13. My sister re- 
turned later than usual. 14. Are the fields which you have ploughed 
large? 15. The fields which I have bought are very large. 16. 
Where are the gentlemen whom you saw pass? 17. The ladies 
whom I heard sing are in their room. 18. Did your poor sister fall? 
19. Did that poor sick woman fall in the mud? 20. Did your sister 
succeed in reading that book? 21. She succeeded in reading it. 22. 
Have you warned your sisters of their danger? 23. I have warned 
them of it. 24. I have not warned them of it. 25. What pen has 
your mother used? 26. She has used mine. 27. Have not those 
young ladies used my book? 28. They have not used it. 29. Has 
your mother been well? 30. She has been perfectly well. 31. 
Has she remembered her promise? 32. She has remembered it. 33. 
Have you seen those boys laugh? 34. I have seen them smile. 35. 
Have you seen them play ? 36. I have heard them play. 



LESSON XCIX. LEgON XCIX. 

PRACTICAL RESUME OE THE RULES ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE.— -IL 

The participle past is invariable .: — 

1. In active verbs, when the direct regimen follows the participle : — 

Mes nieces out etudie leurs lecons. My nieces nave studied 'heir lessons. 
Ellcs out neglige leuvs etudes. They have neglected their studies. 

■ 2. In neuter verbs conjugated with avoir : — ■ 

Mes cousines ont disparu. My cousins have disappeared. 

I»es cinq heures qu'elles ont dormi. The five hours which tliey have slept. 



200 LXSSOX XC IX. 

In the latter sentence, the word pendant is tmderstood nftci 
heures : — 

Lcs cinq heures petulant ks qucllcs The five hours during which th 
elles on: donm. 

3. In anipersonal verbs, whether conjugated with etre or \vi 
avoir : — 

■ teura qui] a fait ectto anuee. 71« heal there has Ixen this war 
arrive' blendes maQienn. Many misfortuna have haj>pcne 

4. In reflective or pronominal verbs, of which the second pronou 
is an iodireet regimen, when no direct regimen precedes: — 

Ellc lo partir. She proposed ta kersdf ia kmet. 

5. When the participle precedes an infinitive, and is preceded by a 

gimen, and this direct regimen ctor, but the <>b- 

cd upon, In t - generally rendered in 

Q : — 

L [ue j'ai entendn chan> I -,/ (Icing) 

en the direct regimen preceding a participle is not the object 
of this participle, but of a verb following: — 

I / 

d by an infinitive, is always 
Is: — 
j. : / 

• in, at, when no direct regimen precsdi 

I ' 

[tem ) of then 

I; si 

:,'.vicf. 



£ do hons con- 

1 i c|u ii a conru. 

n£cs quo a - 

La belle Journee qu'il ■ (ail l.ii t ' 



- se i>oiit nui. 



. hr ran. 
T i hart 

I thai there hat 

' ietutt, 

cil on* 

The A Uies have motif the e.luccium 
d'ait da ledii' . .ant a kind if art. 

pliant. Bliiun. , 



LESSON XCIX. 261 

Elle s'est imagine l'idee de pouvoir | She conceived the idea, that she might 
reussir. i succeed. 

Les fruits que j'ai vu volcr. 

Les soldats blesses quo j'ai vu por- 
ter. 

La chanson que j'ai entendu chan- 
ter. 

Les pomracs que je vous ai defendu 
de manger. 

Je les ai fait partir. 

Elles m'ont apporte des oranges. 

Elles m'en out apporte. 



The fruits which I snu being stolen. 
The wounded soldiers w.'iom I saw 

{being) carried. 
Tlie song which I heard sung. 

The apples which I forbade yov, to 

eat. 
I obliged them to leave. 
They have brought me oranges. 
Tliey have brought me {some) of them. 



Exercise 195. 

Auberge, f. inn; Jou-er, 1. to play ,• Piece, f. piece: 

Bien. m. good; Habill-er, 1. to dress; Racont-cr, 1. to relate; 

Dernier, e, last; Donn-ir, 2. to sleep; Reven-ir, 2. ir. to re- 

Disparait-re, 4. ir. to dis-IAon d'Or, m. Golden turn; 

appear ; Lion ; Soieries, silk goods. 

Euterr-er, 1. to bury; Mort, e, dead; 

1. Quelle auberge vous a-t-on recommandee ? 2. On m'a recora- 
mande l'auberge du Lion-d'Or. 3. Quelles nouvelles avez-vous 
apportees ! 4. J'ai apporte des nouvelles agreables. o. Vos voisines 
sont-elles habillees ? 6. Elles ne sont pas encore habillees. 7. Ont- 
elles bien dormi la nuit derniere? 8. Elles n'ont pas bien dormi. 
9. Quand sont-elles arrivees? 10. Elles sont arrivees a quatre 
heures et demie. 11. Ont-elles dormi plus de cinq heures? 12. Les 
six heures qu'elles ont dorrai leur ont fait beaucoup de bien. 13. Vos 
soeurs se sont-elles amusees ? 14. En jouant elles se sont fait raal 
au bras. 15. Se sont-elles raconte notre conversation? 16. Elles 
se la sont racontee. 17. Vos amies ont-elles disparu] 18. Elles 
n'ont pas disparu ; elles sont revenues chez elles. 19. Les soldats 
que vous avez vus partir; sonl^ils revenus? 20. Us sont morts; 
je les ai vu enterrer. 21. Ne les avez-vous pas fait etudier? 22. Je 
les ai fait lire. 23. Avez-vous apporte des soieries ? 24. Je n'en ai 
pas apporte. 25. Les soieries que j'en ai apportees sont superbes. 

Exercise 196. 
1. Have you not recommended my nieces ? 2. I have recommendev. 
them. 3. Have you brought me good oranges ? 4. I have brought 
you some. 5. Have you given any to my two daughters .' 6. I have 
given them some. 7 I would have given them some, if I had had 
many. 8. Have you not neglected your studies? 9. I have not 
neglected them; I never neglect them. 10. The years which that 
church has lasted, speak in favor {en faveur) of the architect. 
11. The ten miles which he has run, have fatigued him. 12. Have 



262 LESSON c. 

iters Injured each other ? 13. They have flattered themselves 

15. There came three of 

7. They conceived the 

Have you seen them (m., 

I your peat 

23. The 
our room 

. 

; L 31. H 

I have broogtt 
from tf>«* ph«i 



LEgON C. 

■ 






;<j, im- 



■ 

* <ttdm> it 



IESSON C. 



Voila les perils, voici le moyen de 
les eviter ; car entin, le bras de Dieu 
n'est pas raccourci. Massillon. 

Le peuple se figure une felicite 
imaginaire dans les situations ele- 
vees, ou il ne peut atteindre, et il 
croit (car tel est l'homme) que tout 
ce qu'il ne pent avoir, -c'est cela 
mcme qui est le bonheur qu'il 



cherche. 



Massillon. 



comme- 
Comme l'ambition n'a pas de 
frein, et que la soif des richesses 
nous consume tous, il en resulte, que 
le bonheur nous fuit a mesure que 
nous le cberchons. Th. Corneille. 
La reconnaissance est le plus 
doux, comme le plus saint des de- 
voirs. Thomas. 

Comme il sonna la charge, il 
sonne la retraite. La Fontaine. 



Those are the davgers, thin is the 
way of avoiding them ; for finally, 
the influence of God ir. not less 
powerful. 

The people picture to themselves 
an imaginary happiness in elevated 
stations which they cannot reach, 
and they believe (for such is man) 
that all that which they cannot ob- 
tain, forms that very happiness 
which they seek. 

—QUE. 

As ambition has no limits, and as 
the thirst of riches devours us all, 
the result is, that happiness avoids 
us, as we proceed in our search after 
it. 

Gratitude is the siveetest as well as 
the holiest of duties. 

As he sounded the charge, so he 
sounds the retreat. 



Votre maitre vous aime ; done, 
vous devez l'aimer. 

Je suis, done, un temoin de leur 
peu de puissance. Racine. 

Et dou peut done venir ce 
changement extreme ? Voltaire. 

Si ce n'est toi, c'est done ton 
frere. — Je n'en ai pas. — C'est done, 
quelqu'un des tiens. La Fontaine. 

Allons done! repondit on, et la 
transaction n'eut pas lieu. 

De Cussy. 



Your master loves you ; therefore, 
you should love him. 

I am, therefore, a ivitness of their 
want of power. 

Whence, therefore, can this extreme 
change proceed? 

If it is not you, th;n it is your 
brother. I have none. Then it must 
be some one of your family. 

" Well done!" replied they, and 
the affair did not take place. 



DE MEME QUE. 

De m£me que le soleil brille sur I As the sun shines upon the earth, 
la te'rre, de meme le juste brillera so will the just shine in heaven. 
dans les cieux. L'academie. 



C'est etrs faible et timide que 
d'etre inaccessible et tier. 

Massillon. 

Une famille vertueuse est un vais- 
eeau tenu pendant la tempete par 
deux ancres, la religion et les mceurs. 

Chateaubriand. 
Quel carnage de toutes parts ! 
On egorge a la fois les enfants, les 

viefllards, 



To be inaccessible and proud, is to 
be weak and timid. 

A virtuous family is a vessel 
strengthened during the tempest by 
twp anchors, religion and morals. 

What carnage on all sides ! 
They murder at once the children, 
the old men, the sister and the broth- 



264 



LEEBON C. 



Et la prrur ct le frere, | er, (he daughter and the mother, ih* 

Et la tille et la mere, | son in (he arms of his father. 

Le fils dan^ 1 . I *tc. 

for. 

RJI — Qf.WP. 

Lorsquc l'ininKonec habUait la When innocence inJiabited iht 

tore. 

Qnand /.. ji- ne m'en (f nwa you hated me, I \coula so. 

plaindra '-.in. 

|u'au If lered merely the 

n tee had 

i |M.int cTaatre interet i>-i- nootker inter** here than to yrc- 

' 

i lit, t<> jirereut 

■ 

taut • y violent i tmiimtk 

-iLLO.V. I 



impe*- n vat a'r 
rialc ai. • teen Mr 

M n/ if the. 
j (AM r'</«i/, 6u< 

(Ay, 

I'll: 

<>>i/r/ strike 'A* 
rni-nt 1 1 ear, but the mind. 

t it a wt 

ma 



I.\ I:. 
II i 

: 



'it it not :h» 
iiant. 

Thrrr it HO ' but' in the | 

I my daughter to a 

mute. 



HraiVai r.-lui qt.i 
■ 

ni par 
h 

hilJS III 

meUtetm ni plus bal 
On d'< 

! 

Li K'" in Wtt 

in ii. be, ni noble, ni i 

ni mam- Mwmli.'i.v. 



If,ij i content him- 

, \itth ' J! 

f by ii. r-,*r. i! <>r by 

thr shameful deeiret ofmewrim, 

■i the eonJU 

l ■ 

We are tirrrr M /< IMgf nor so tin- 

l.lCIJ. 

That holy /fir ibioir* HO 



nous k lou»n»g« A, l- (fen, M us go to vork 



LESSON C. 



265 



O 9a, Gil Bias, me dit il ua jour, 
le tnmp3 de ton enfance est passe. 
Le Sage. 



" New, then, Gil Bias," said he to 
me one day, " the time of your child- 



la, fortune, soit bonne ou mau- 
vaise, soit passagere ou constante, 
ne peut rien sur Tame du sage. 

Haemontel. 
La liberte de publier ses pensees, 
ou la liberte de la presse, doit etre 
regle"e sur la liberte meme d'agir.. 
B. de St. Pieeee. 



Fortune, be it good or bad, be it 
transient or constant, has no power 
over the soul of the wise. 

The liberty of publishing one's 
thoughts, or the liberty of the press, 
should be regulated upon the liberty 
of action itself. 



Les grands hommes entreprennent 
de grandes choses parcequ'elles 
Bont grandes, et les fdus parcequ'ils 
les croient faciles. Vauvenaegues. 

La tout est beau, parceque tout 
est vrai J. J. Rousseau. 



Great men undertake great things 
because they are great; and fools, 
" '.y believe them easy. 



Le style le 
tant sa noblesse. 



Every thing there is beautiful, be- 
cause every thing is true. 

POUETANT. 

noble a pour- 1 The least elevated style lias, never- 
Boileau. J theless, its elevation. 



PUISQUE. 



Pourquoi le demander, puisque 
vous le savez ? Racine. 

Ne vous lassez jamais d' examiner 
les causes des grands changements ; 
puisque rien ne servira jamais tant 
a votre instruction. Bossuet. 

Puisque vous le voulez, je vais 
changer de style. Boileau. 



Why ask about it, since you know it ?' 

Never be weary of examining into 
the causes of great changes; for 
nothing will ever be of so much ser- 
vice to your instruction. 

Since you will have it so, I will 
change my style. 



Jamais on ne vit un si grand exem- | Never was such a striking exam- 



ple, que le corn-age n'est point in- 
compatible avec la. mollesse. 

Voltaiee. 

Nous n'avons que peu de temps a 
vivre, et loin d'en profiter, nou3 ne 
cberchons qu'a le perdre. Laveaux. 

A quoi vous servira d'avoir de 
l'esprit, si vous ne l'employez pas, et 
que vous ne vous appliquiez pas ? 



Toutefois que sert-il de me justi- 
fier ? Racine. 

Qu'il fasse ce qu'il lui plaira. 

Que le raonde est grand ! Qu'il 
est maguifique ! Massillon. 

Que de beaux jours n'ont pas de 
beaux soirs 1 Boiste. 

Sais tu quelque chose de plus ? 

Oh ! que oui. Beuets, 

12 



pie seen, that courage is not incom- 
patible with effeminacy. 

We have but little time to live, 
and instead of improving it, we only 
seek to waste it. 

Of what use will be your wit, if 
you do not employ it, and do not ap- 
ply yourselves ? 

However, what is the use of justi- 
fying myself? 

Let him, do what he pleases. 

How great is the world! How 
magnificent ! 

How many fine days have not 
beautiful evenings ! 

Do you know any thing more f 

That Idol 



26« 



LESSON C. 



Cest une maladie d' esprit, que de 
aoubaiter des choses impossibles. 
Fknf.lon. 

II n'y aura jamais de meilleur di- 
recteur que l'Evangile. 

GaNCASELLI. 

La veritable conversion du cceur 
fait autant aimer Dieu qu'on a aime 
Pascal 
- tu que dans son ccrur, il ait 
mart f 
Ofl nfatl mm qpe y 

m \ MilE. DE Si . : 

II a f.iilu OM DM lnu'iluui 
instruit. j«>ur n'apprandn M que je 
n« voulaia pas aon 



Wishing for impossible things, is 
a disease of the mind. 

There will never be any better 
guide than tlu Gospel. 

The true conversion of the heart 
makes us love God as much as w* 
luive loved the creatures. 

Do you believe that he has sworn 
mth in his heart.' 

It is not that 1 might havi don* 
Utter tli ■• 

It was tucessary that my misfor- 
tunes should instruct me, to teach 
me what I would not believe. 



qp a us c a — yi'oi . . . qnc 



Quoique Dion ct la nature aient 
i Again en Lm 

formant dTOM BktaDC bcoa, b WKOHi 

humaine nc peut eouft'rir I 

lite. 

vitez la 

hMMMfc LU ■ 

Quoi que co noit quelle di-e, ill.- 
oe me pcrsuadera paa, 

GliALLT-Dl'VIVUPL 



:.,h </<*/ ami twhtr* have 
made all men equal in forming them 
.-arth, human vanity 
cannot bear that equality. 

Whatever you may write, avoid 

Whatever she may say, she will 
not persuade me. 



St Tout le Toulicz, nous parUru.na 
BBMBU& 

8i vou» le prencz sur ce ton, je 

N,;l ompire nV«t sQr, Vfl na 
lamom pour bate. Kaunk. 

Bra k hat, am p ai th orn, 
Yutrc anvil :i loujw » n rdserre 

quelque ei, qu.lque maia. 



If yon wished it, we would go to- 

qethrr. 

1/ you go on in this way, I Kith- 
draw. 

y,, empire, is safe, unlet* it Ml 
affection for its bonis. 

If it must b* so, we will go. 
Ymm mind lots olways in 
sotne ' if.' smns ' but' 



lis r.'-pomlirrnt, qu'il f.dlait n'- 
tablir ranalibre europejeo raapa, 
qu'il follait le n'-tablir HDOD 101 U 
continent, oil il 6teU t. nit a 
detruit, au moina sur l'Oc^an. 

Tineas. 



f.iit 



They replied, that it was i 
UtoUt* the disturbed 
pean balance ; tluit it imi necessary 
to restore it, if not on the continent, 
miirely destroyed, a* 
least on the Ocean. 



aorr. 
Soit qu"d le (awe, eoit qu"d ne le 



8oit la hardieaso de lentrcprise, 
eoit la eculo pr6eence de ce grand 



Whether he does it, whether he 
does il not. 

Be it t/ie boldness of the enter- 
prise, b* it the present* alone •/ thi* 



LESSON C. 



267 



homrae, soit hi protection visible du 
ciel, il etonne par sa resolution. 
Flechiee. 

Soit en bien, soit en mal, mon ami, 
la prudence dit, qu'il faut rarement 
juger sur l'apparence. Cheeon. 

Vous le voulez ? ainsi soit il ! 

Un mal funeste et contagieux se 
repaudit dans les principales villes 
de la Normandie ; soit que l'intem- 
perie des saisons eat laisse dans les 
airs quelque maligne impression, soit 
qu'un commerce fatal eut apporte 
des pays eloignes, avec de fragiles 
richesses, des semences de maladie 
et de mort, soit que l'ange de Dieu 
eut 6tendu la main pour frapper 
cette malheureuse province. 

Flechiee. 



great man, be it the visible protec~ 
tion of heaven, he astonishes by his 
resolution. 

Be it for good, be it for evil, my 
friend, prudence says, that toe must 
rarely judge from appearances. 

You will have it so ? So be it ! 

A fatal and contagious disease 
spread in the principal cities of 
Normandy; be it that the inclemen- 
cy of the season had left in the air 
so?ne malignant impression, be it 
that a fatal commerce had brought 
from distant countries, with perish- 
able riches, the seeds of disease and 
death, be it that the angel of God 
had stretclied forth his hand to smite 
that unfortunate province. 



EXERCISES IN COMPOSING. 

The words in the following lists are given, as before intimated 
(page 59), as suggestive of thought. In conducting the exercise, the 
Teacher selects a particular word, as Relieur (Bookbinder), and re- 
quires each pupil to compose a French sentence containing this term. 
The pupil is duly notified, that he is at liberty to take any thought 
suggested by the word, and to produce a sentence of any form found 
in any of the foregoing Lessons : regard being had all along to all 
the Rules, Notes, Exceptions, &c, that may bear upon the case. 
Thus, adopting as a model the sentence, Voire marchand est bien obli- 
geant (Lesson 17, Resume), or, Le Danois a-t-il quelques pommes? 
(Lesson 18, R. 7) &c. &c, let him endeavor to produce others of the 
like kind. 

A little practice will render the exercise both easy and interesting. 
It will soon come to be easy to incorporate not only one, but two, 
three, or more of the words taken from the lists. 



L — Peofessions et Metises, 
Aoteur, m. actor. 
Apothicaire, m. apothecary. 
Artiste, m. artist. 
Aumonier, m. chaplain. 
Auteur, m. author. 
Barbier, m. barber. 
Bijoutier, m. jeweller. 
Blancnjb5 o use, f. washerwoman. 
Boucher, m. ouicher. 



Peofessions and Teades. 
Brasseur, m. brewer. 
Brodeuse, f. embroiderer. 
Charbonnier, m. coal-man. 
Charlatan, m. quack. 
Charretier, m. cartman. 
Chaudronnier, m. coppertmith. 
Chirurgien, m. surgeon. 
Cordier, m. ropemaker. 
Corroyeur, m, currier. 



268 



LIST 07 WORDS, 



Coutelier, no. aitler. 
Couttiriere, f. seamstress. 
Couvreur, m. staler, tiler. 
Cure, in. vicar. 
Dentiste, m. dentist. 
Drapier, in. diaper. 

' -ia^tique, m. clergyman.- 
Epieier, ra. grocer. 
Eveqiie, m. bishop. 
Faucheur, m. 
Fripter, m. f r ip peror . 

Fruiticre, f. fruit -woman. 
Gantier, ru. glover. 

reur, in. tn anm tr. 
Horloger, ul etoekamd watch maker. 
Inslituteur. nx, Iustitutrice, f., school' 

master, mistress. 
Imj)rimeur, in. printer. 
Joaillier, in. jexceller. 
IfftCOD, in. mason, bricklayer. 
Maitre d'ecole, in. schoolmaster. 

i ri«T, m. day ■ 
Manlianl'lf uheVBUX, niaquignon, 
m. horse-dealer. 

btJ iVrr.int, in. farrier, shoe- 
nit h. 
Mareehal, in. blacksmith. 

Or-UBOMMM. 

Ance: store. 

Allien real -grandson. 

.;:-, in. sun in /aw, stepson. 
Ben . 'fr inlaw. 

thrr. 

Belle tille, f. daughtcr-tn law, step- 

'iter. 
Belle -mere, f. mother-in-law, step- 
moth-r. 

rur, f. sister-in-law. 

r.indfatlier. 
Bru, f. daughter-in-law. 

■ cendauts. 
Knf.ince, f. childhood. 

f.|M>:; 

I'amillo, t f a mily . 
Fern rue, f. woman, trife. 
Fianijaillcs, f. p. betrothing. 
FiiiinV-, m., naneiV, {., betrothed. 
Futur, ra. bridegroom. 

III.— Le roars humain. 
Arterc, f. artery. 
Bubo, t beard 



Moissonneur, m. reaper. 

Musicien, m. musician. 

Naturaliste, in. naturalist. 

Orateur, in. orator. 

Orfevre, in. gold and silver smith. 

Pape, m. pope. 

l'atre, in. shephera, herdsman. 

Perruquier, in. hairdresser. 

Philoeophe, in. philosopher. 

Poiaaoiioier, in., l'uissonniere, UfisK 

monger. 
IViuicatiur, ra. preacher. 
Pre! re, m. priest. 
Raffioeur da sucre, de sel, sugar 

salt r 
Raini«neur dc cherainecs, m.chimney 

Kelieur. in. bookbinder. 
Savitur, m. cobbler. 
Sculpteor, m. sculptor. 
Bellier, in. saddler. 
Somirier, in. locksmith. 
Tapaner, in. upholsterer. 
'IVinturier, m.dger. 

TSaMnod) ul m 

Tonnalier, ra. cooper. 

Yitrier, in. glazier. 

Max. 

Future, f. bride. 
Qaocbre, DL sun in-law. 
Gland pare, DL grandfather. 
(irand'mere, f. grandjuother. 

Jama homma, in. young man. 

:11c, f. young tcoman, girL 
8, I*. youth. 
DX, juinclle. (., twin. 
M.irraine. I ij-ihr.'Ahtr. 
Mari, in. hvtbmd, 

•', f. birtk 
Nouirioe, f. nurse. 

. iiKUH'. bridegroom. 
Noiivt-lle iiiarnc, briU. 

Orphelin, to, orphelkia, f., orphan. 

Pariain. in. g<*lf'athcr. 
IVtn iil«. qrandfin. 

i; grand daughter. 

V'uf. in. vid"wrr. 

idoW. 

<•, f old age. 



Tick ihmax vodx 



Boucho, f. 
Bras, m. a 



LIST OF WORDS. 



260 



Cervelle, £ brain. 
Chair, t flesh. 
Cils, in. p. eyelashJS, 
Ccfiur, m. heart. 
Corps, ra. body. 
C6te, m. side. 
Cftte, f. rib. 
Cou, m. neck. 
Coude, m. elbow. 
Crane, m. skull. 
Cuisse, f. thigh. 
Doigt, m. finger. 
Dos, m. back. 
fipaule, £ shoulder. 
6pine (du dos), f. spine. 
Favoris, m. p. whiskers. 
Foie, m. liver. 
Front, m. fovehead. 
Gencives,/. p. gums. 
Genou, m. knee. 
Gorge, f. throat. 
Hanche, f. hip. 
Jambe, f. leg. 
Joue, f. cheek. 
Langue, f. tongue. 
Levre, £ lip. 
Membre, m. limb. 

IV. — Maladies, infiemitks, etc. 
Attaque, f. attack, fit. 
Baunie, m. balsam. 
Begaiemeut, m. stammering. 
Blessure, f. wound. 
Cecite", f. blindness. 
Chancre, m. cancer. 
Cicatrice, f. scar. 
Colique, £ colic. 
Contusion, £ bruise. 
Crampe, £ cramp. 
Dislocation, f. dislocation. 
Eme"tique, m. emetic. 
Enflure, f. swelling. 
Enrollment, m. hoarseness. 
Entorse,. f. sprain. 
Epilepsie, f. epilepsie. 
Evanouissemcnt, m. fainting. 
Fievre, f. fever. 
Fievre nerveuse, f. nervous fever. 

V. — Habillements. 
Agrafe, f. clasp. 
Aiguille, f. needle. 
Aiguille de chevcux, f. hair-pin. 
Bague, £ ring. 
Baa, m. stocking. 



Menton, m. chin. 

Moelle, f. marrow. 

Moustache, f. moustache, moustachia. 

Muscle, m. muscle. 

Nerf, m. nerve. 

Nez, m. nose. 

Ongle, m. nail. 

Orteil, m. toe. 

Os, m. bone. 

Palais, m. palate. 

Paupiere, f. eyelid. 

Peau, f. skin. 

Pouce, m. thumb. 

Poumon, m. lungs. 

Prunelle, f. pupil of the eye 

Rate, £ spleen. 

Reins, m. p. loins. 

Sang, m. blood. 

Sein, bosom. 

Sourcils, m. p. eyebrows. 

Squelette, m. skeleton. 

Talon, m. heel. 

Teint, m. complexion. 

Tempes, £ p. temples. 

Trait, m. feature. 

Veine, £ vein. 

Visage, m.face. 

Maladies, Infiemhtes, etc. 
Fievre scarlatine, £ scarlet fever 
Gudrison, £ cure. 
Goutte, £ gout. 
Hydropisie, £ dropsy. 
Indisposition, f. indisposition. 
Louche, adj. squinting. 
Malaise, m. indisposition. 
Mutisme,m. dumbness. 
Ordonnance, £ prescription. 
Onguent, m., pommade, £, salve, 
Petite-ve>ole, £ small-pox. 
Pulmonie, £ consumption. 
Remcde, m. remedy. 
Rhume, m. cold. 
Rougeole, f. measles. 
Surdite, £ deafness. 
Toux, £ cough. 
Ulcere, m. ulcer. 
Vertigo, m. dizziness. 

Articles of 
Basin, m. dimity. 
Batiste, £ cambric. 
Bijouterie, £ jewelry. 
Bonnet, m. cap. 
Boucle, £ buckle. 



LIST OF WORDS. 



Bouclc, f. lock of hair curl. 
Boucles d'oieille.?, f. p. ear-rings. 
Bourse, £ purse. 
Bracelet, in. bracelet. 
Bretelle-, f- p- braces, suspenders. 
Brosse, f. brink. 
Brossea-dents, f. tooth-brush. 
OaleoOBk m. 8. dratcers. 
Ceinture, £ sash, belt, band. 
-. hi. p. socks. 
in. blacking. 
Ciseaux, DL p. I 

r. hea d dr am 

in. collar. 
in. necklace. 

"un. 
rat. 

Orepe, in. ■ 
Diamant, m, diamond. 

I". lace. 
ire, f. lining. 

::.. r.id-!. jewel -box. 

*icord 
.-. no. p. spurt. 
Epingle, Coin. 

]■ l.-ir. n. m. am. fling-bottle. 

■ <'ur. 

... dress-coat. 

VI.- MAIRO*. ETC. 

Anlichamlin-. f. antechamber. 

■ | bench, scat. 

BibUc ""V. 

r,ttu/h, anal I town. 
(. exchange. 

• . f. capital dtp mttnpoUM. 

:.. in. r/.iW v/ bells, 
rrack. 
OftTB, I 

Obambre, f. eAamJsr, room. 
Ohambrc •*> concher, f. bnlroom. 
lie, f. rAopc/. 

n. in. emnilry-house, villa. 
icre, f. Aerf, cyrta?*'. 

I". /|W. 

("In inin^e, f. chimney. 

DDL burying-ground, 
eJhtrt 
ClncLe. C J*// (large), cAur cA ktf, d*. 



France, {.fringe. 
Garniture, £ trimming. 
Gilft, in. pest, icau^coat 
Grenat, ru. garnet. 
Qaetree, f. p. gaiters. 
Habit, in. coat. 
[voire, E ivory. 
Linge, m. linen. 
Lunettes, f. n. spectacle*. 
Blanche, f. hmm 
nfousaeline. f. muslin. 
Pantolon, in. sing, pantaloon*. 
Parapluie, m. umbrella. 
Parasol, m. |iiiinarf 
Peigne, in. camtL 
Pendants-d'oteiBfliL nx p. 

dants. 
Perle, f. /i^r/. 

Poche, i | 

Potnmade, f. pomatum. 

Redingote, C yrea ta aa t 

Robe, t stress, reea 

Robe de chambra, f. dressing-gown. 

Satin, in. satin. 

Bote, f. ai/fc 
Tablier.m, apron. 
Taffetas, m taffeta. 

. in. sweat 

C stat 

i. soil 

Town, House, to 
CWlirr, m. church steeple. 
. f. moil /*//. 

scrA 

t, III. e,,tirent. 
CutStne, f. kltelten. 

em! urn- house, 
Ecurie, t 

Environs, m. p. environ*. 
hood. 

j, floor. 
r, in. Horn. 
-. m. suburb. 
, /'.n-m. 

u/aift, veil 

Oouttiere, C ontfsn 

~ , « [ m. AiaAtse* 
Orand route, \ ■ * 

Orange, f earn. 
i Irenwr, in. garret 
Hale, f. W</e. 
llameau, m. hamlsL 



LIST OF WORDS. 



271 



Hopital, m. hi spited. 
Hotel-de-ville, town-house, city-house, 

guild-hall, city-hall, town-hall. 
Meiible, m. piece of furniture. 
Meubles, m.p. furniture. 
Monnaie, f. mint. 
Mortier, m. mortar. 
Mur, m. ) „ 
Muraille, f. \ WaU ' 
Palais, m. palace. 
Paroisse, f parish. 
Pave, m. pavsment. 
Pepiniere, f. nursery of trees. 
Persienne, blind, open s/attters. 
Plafond, m. ceiling. 
Planche f. board. 
Plancher, m. floor. 
Poele, m. stove. 
Pompe, f. pump. 
Pont, m. bridge. 
Porte, f, door, gate. 
Poste, f. post, post-office. 
Poutre, f. beam.: 
Prairie, f. 
Pre, m. 

VIL — Meubles. 
Allumette, n. f. match. 
Allumette chimique, f. friction- 
match. 
Amadou, m. tinder. 
Armoire, f. cupboard. 
Baril, m. cask, barrel. 
Bassin, m. bowl, washbowl. 
Bassinoire, f. warming-pan. 
Berceau, m. cradle. 
Boite-a-fusil, f. tinder-box. 
Bougie, f. taper. 
Bouilloire, f. kettle. 
Briquet, m. fire-steel. 
Cadre, m. frame. 
Candelabre, m. chandelier 
Casserole, f. saucepan. 
Cassette, f. box, casket. 
Chandelle, £ candle. 
Charbon de bois, m. charcoal. 
Charbon de terre, stone coal. 
Chaudiere, f. boiler. 
CofFre, m. chest. 
Commode, f. chest of drawers. 
Corbeille, f. basket. 
Crible, m. sieve. 
Cruche, f. pitcher. 
Cuvier, m. tub. 
Drap, m. sheet 



Prison, £ prison. 

Puits, m. well. 

Quartier, m. quarter 

Rampe (d'escalier) balustrade of a 

staircase. 
Rez-de-chaussee, m. ground-floor. 
Sacristie, f. vestry. 
Salle, f. parlor, sitting-room. 
Salon, m. drawing-room, hall 
Serre, f. conservatory. f 

Serre-chaude, f. hot-house. 
S err ure, f. lock. 
Sonnette, £ bell. 
Theatre, m. theatre 
Tolt, m. roof. 
Tour, £ tower. 
Tuile, f. tile. 
Verger, m. orchard. 
Verrou, m. bolt. 
Vestibule, m. hall, entry. 
Vigne, £, vignoble, m., vineyard. 
Village, m. village. 
Volet, window-shutter. 
Voute, £ vault. 

Fdrnitoek, 
6cumoire, f. skimmer. 
Entonnoir, m. funnel. 
Essuie-main, m. towel. 
Fer a repasser, m. iron. 
Fourgon, m. poker. 
Foyer, m. hearth. 
Lampe, £ lamp. 
Lanterne £ lantern. 
Lit, m. bed. 

Lit de plume, m. feather bed. 
Lumiere, £ UglU. 
Lustre, m. sconce. 
Marchepied, m. footstool. 
Mouchettes, £ p. snuffers. 
Mortier, m. mortar. 
Moutardier, m. mustard-voL 
Nappe, £ tablecloth. 
Oreiller, m. pillow. 
Panier, m. basket. 
Paravent, m. screen. 
Peinture, f. painting, picture. 
Pelle, £ shovel. 
Pierre a fusil, £ flint. 
Pincettes, £ p. tongs. 
Poele, m. stove. 
Poele, £ frying-pan. 
Poivriere, £ pepper-box. 
Pot, m. kettle. 



272 



LIST OF WORDS. 



Pupitre, in. desk. 
SaLere, f. saltcellar. 
Savon, m. soap. 
Sean, m. pail. 
Serviette, f. napkin. 
Sofa, m. sofa. 
Soufflet, in. follows. 
Sutij'icre, f. soup-tut ten. 
•Sucrier, m. sugar-disli. 

VII L— Plats, cm 
Ba>uf, i:. 

Bouilli, nx ioiVrJ 6^, 6oi7«f meat. 
Bouillon, m. broth. 

p. preserves. 

!'tj of mutton. 
D 

.'.'OJk, 

IX. — 

. yarlic 
. rajus. 
a 

i 

I rot 

I 

1 

• >r. 
Crc*«< • 

X. — Arches raurnzM, mm 

Amandier, m. alt I tree 

ion. 



Tableau, m. picture. 
Tablette, f. shelf. 
Tapis, m. carpeL 
Tire-bouchon, m. corlt 
Tiroir, m. drawer. 
Travertin, m. bolster. 

cuisine, m p. kitchen 
utensils. 
Verre, in. glass. 

Disiies, Era 
Rafraichissemcnts, m. p. refnsJ* 
tnents. 

. roast meat. 
-.sage. 

I -i>Up. 

■ . L vegetable soup. 
■ tart. 

Hi. in. vermicelli. 
VuLnlle, (.f^wl. 

Vkgltablks, Giud, era 
Millet, m. millet. 
in. turnip. 
;.). onion. 

'•tip. 
CO. yirsley. 

pUmL 

■ft (turnip), 
i.'otig). 

: tag*. 

tU<rme. 
■ ruffle, 

Taam, Farm. 
ipbtny. 

rry. 



Noi-i •(!■■, 



/•nut 



LIB* OB" WORD! 



278 



Poirier, m. pear tree. 
Pomme, £ apple. 
Pommicr, m. apple-tree. 
Prune, f. plum. 

XI. — Arbres Forestiebs. 
Bouleau, m. birch. 
Chene, m. oak. 
Ecorce, f. bark. 
Erable, m. maple. 
Frene, m. ash. 
Hetre, m. beech. 
Melese, m. larch. 
Orme, m. elm. 

XIL — Fleurs, eto. 
Auricule, f. auricula. 
Chardon, m. thistle. 
Chevre-feuille, nx honeysuckle. 
Giroflee, f. gillyflower. 
Jasmin, m. jessamine. 
Lis, m. lily. 
Marguerite, f. daisy. 
Mauvaise herbe, f. weed. 
Mjrte, m. myrtle. 
(Fillet, m. pink. 

XIIL— Oiseaux. 
Aigle, m. eagle. 
Aile, f. wing. 
Alouette, f. lark. 
Autour, m. hawk. 
Autruche, f. ostrich. 
Bee, m. beak. 
Becasse, f. woodcock. 
B£cassine, f. snipe. 
Bergeronnette, f. wagtail. 
Caille, f. quail. 
Canard, m. duck. 
Canari, m. canary-bird. 
Chardonneret, m. goldfinch. 
Chauve-souris, f. bat. 
Cigogne, f. stork. 
Colornbe, f. dove. 
Corbeau, m. raven. 
Corneille, £ crow. 
Coucou, m. cuckoo. 
Cygne, m. swan. 
Dindon, m. turkey. 
Faisan, m. pheasant. 

XIV. — QuADRUPBDES. 

Agueau, m. lamb. 
Blaireau, m, badger. 
Castor, m. beaver. 
Cerf, m. stag. 

12* 



Prunier, m. plum-tree. 
Raisin, m. grape. 
Vigne, f. vine. 

Forkst Trees. 
Peuplier, m. poplar. 
Eameau, m. bough. 
Sapin, m. pine. 
Saule, m. willow 
Tilled, m. linden-tree. 
Tremble, m. aspen. 
Tronc, m. trunk. 

Flowers, Era 
Ortie, £ nettle. 
Pavot, m. poppy. 
Pens^e, f. forget-me-not. 
Pied d'alouette, m. larkspur 
Primevere, f. cowslip. 
Rose, f. rose. 
Tournesol, m. sunflower. 
Tulipe, f. tulip. 
Violette, £ violet. 

Birds. 
Geai, m. jackdaw. 
Grive, f. thrush. 
He"ron, m. heron. 
Hirondelle, f. swallow. 
Linotte, f. linnet. 
Merle, m. blackbird. 
Oie, f. goose. 

Oiseau de proie, m. bird of prey, 
Paon, m. peacock. 
Passereau, m. sparrow. 
Perroquet, m. parrot. 
Pcrdrix, £ partridge. 
Pie, £ magpie. 
Pigeon, m. pigeon. 
Poule, f. hen. 
Poulet, m. chicken. 
Roitelet, m. wren. 
Rossignol, m. nightingale. 
Rouge-gorge, m. redbreast 
Serin, m. canary-bird. 
Tourterelle, £ turtle-dove. 
Vautour, m. vulture. 

QUADRDPEDB. 

Chamois, m. chamois. 
Chfcvre, £ goat. 
Chevreuil, m. roebuck. 
Ecureuil, m. squirrel. 



274 



LIST 09 WORDS. 



Furet, m. ferrtL 
Hi-ris^on, ra. hedgehog. 
Lupin, rabbit. 
Licvre. DL hare. 
Lion, m. lion. 
Lonp, ra. irolf. 
Mule, £ mule. 

XV.— Poissohb. 
An^uillc, f. eel. 
BaleDM, f. whaU. 
■ r ike. 

', rimp. 

iwfish. 

DDL sturgeon. 

rrina. 

--<i herring. 
:. m. lobster. 

XV [.— Insects*, nc, 

| i'oVt. 
ci.i-miIIo. t". omUrpillmr. 

I :. , ; ras*lmpper. 

-. ider. 

toad. 

. f. an/. 

in. cricket 
..;!.•, {.frog. 

: u-a»/>. 

TTTT Owm 

I", ar/. 

: »D<iaV. 
. . f. Irtish. 
tr, f. ir/»/rft<irrat» 

. :'. „'//u<\ 

<•, ra scoff old 
:ne, f. annV. 

:i. rirr. 

Ha, £ tieUa. 

Faux, f. tej/lhe. 
Flea". m./aii. 
Funl, m. ^w». 



Onra, m. bear. 
Poulnin, ra. colt 
Pourccau, ra. hog, Mtn* 
Record, m.fiox. 
Binge, DL monkey. 
Tuupe, f. mole. 
Tigre, dl t7o*r. 

FlSBX*. 

Merlaii, BL whiting. 
Morne, f. codfish. 
Perdie, f. perch. 

Ki'Huin, in. shark. 
S;uiiiu>n. ni. salmon. 

kle, f- ioIil 

Tiindio, f. f<Wi. 

Torino, f. turtle. 

Truito, f. trVDt 
Turbot, m. turboL 

Insect*, 6* 
in lizard, 

Lunacoo, in. *na»/. 
Iloacm, i-fiy- 
PaptUoa, DL butterfly. 

Panaiae, f. Any. 

He, f. /i>cu*t 

in. serpent 

■ 

Tools. 

Uncho, f rtf. 

in. fish-hook. 
irrow. 
/toe. 
■ line. 
I file. 
Motile, ('. nrindiion*. 

i. BL ie«r"#r 
PoUe, f. 

BL '.rici/i, I 
/■ul lei/. 
I Jane. 
BL r. «//«■. 
. f. M* 

f /orJt. 
f. ]>. />i« 
Truellc, f. trowel 
Vu,f. 



Y*! 



ABRtfVIATIONS. 

A. P. A protester. 

A. S. P. Accepte sous protfit. 

A. S. P. C. Accepte sous protfit pour 
a-compte. 

B DD - Baron. 

C er - Chevalier 

C te - Comte. 

Qiesse. Comtesse. 

D r Docteur. 

D r - M n - Docteur-medecin, 

E. Est. 

J.-C. Jesus- Christ. 

LL. AA. II. Leurs Altesses Impe*- 
riales. 

LL. AA. RR. Leurs Altesses Roy- 
ales. 

LL. AA. SS. Leurs Altesses Sere- 
nissimes. 

LL. Em. Leurs Eminences. 

LL. Ex. Leurs Excellences. 

LL. HH. Leurs Hautesses. 

LL. MM. Leurs Majesty's. 

LL. MM II. Leurs Majesty's Impe*- 
riales. 

LL. MM. RR. Leurs Majestes Roy- 
ales. 

M. ou M r - Monsieur. 

M' ,re - Maitre. 

M. A. Maison assuree. 

M. A. C. I. Maison assuree contre 
l'incendie. 

M a - Marchand. 

M ,,c - Marcliande. 

M lle - Mademoiselle. 

M= r - Monseigneur. 

M is- Marquis. 

M ise - Marquise. 

MM. Messieurs. 

jjme. Madame. 

Mst. Manuscrit. 

N. B. Nota bene. 

N.-D. Notre-Dame. 

N.-N.-E. Nord-nord-est. 

N.-N.-O. Nord-nord-ouest 

N l - Negociant. 

jfie. Negociante. 

N°- Numero. 

N. S. Notre-Seigneur. 

N. S. J.-C. Notre-Seigneur J6sus- 
Christ. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

To be protested. 
Accepted under protest. 
Accepted under protest on account. 

Baron. 

Chevalier, knight, sir. 

Count. 

Countess. 

Doctor. 

Doctor of medicine. 

Bast. 

Jesus Christ. 

Their Imperial High 



Their Royal Highnesses. 

Their Most Serene Highnesses. 

Their Eminences. 
Their Excellencies. 
Their Highnesses. 
Their Majesties. 
Their Imperial Majesties. 

Their Royal Majesties. 

Sir, Mr. 

Master. 

House insured. 

House insured against fire. 

Dealer, shopkeeper, m. 

Dealer, shopkeeper, t 

Miss. 

My lord. 

Marquis. 

Marchioness. 

Messrs. Gentlemen. 

Madam. Mrs. 

Manuscript. 

Nota Bene. 

Our Lady. 

North-north-east. 

North-north-west. 

Merchant, m. 

Merchant, £ 

Number. 

Our Lord. 

Our Lord Jesus GhnU. 



Q76 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



O. Ouest 
•/o Poor cent 
O.-N. Onest-norA 
O.-S. Ouest-suiL 
P. S. Post-ecriptum. 
R. P. Re"vt:rcnd pcre. 

L Son Altcsse Imperiale. 
S. A. U. Son Altcsse Roy ale 

9L Son Altease Sereoiseime. 
.1-esL 
- .n Eminence. 

I Grarvk'iir. 
9a Hauteeae. 

que. 
S. M. B. Sa Ma 

TreaFiJcle. 

Sainta Pete*. 

.•I -eat 
i. Sud-aud- 



Wett. 
Per cent. 
West-north. 
West-south. 
Post scriptwn. 
. \ittur. 

His or Her Imperial Highness. 

i! Highness. 
His Most Serene Highness. 
tst. 
•nee. 
irncy. 
His Grace (to* a Bishop). 
Wis Highness (the Turkish Empet 

His or Her Majesty. 

• Htr Britannic Majesty. 

His lm, 

Majesty. 
His M^t Faithful Majesty. 

rst. 

flier. 

her ». 
His Holiness. 
S«u!h-soMth-tasL 
iy>\Uh south-vest. 



NEW FRENCH COURSE, 

PART SECOND. 



§ 1.— -Parts of Speech. 
(1.) There are, in French, ten sorts of words or parts of speech . 
Nouns or Substantives, Participles, 

Articles, Adverbs, 

Adjectives, Prepositions, 

Pronouns, Conjunctions, 

Verbs, Interjections. 

(2.) These are divided into variable, and invariable words. 
(3.) The variable words are those the termination of which ad- 
mits of various changes ; by these changes various modifications of 
meaning are expressed. The variable words are of six kinds : 
The Noun, The Pronoun, 

The Article, The Verb, 

The Adjective, The Participle. 

(4.) The invariable words are those the termination of which 
never changes : 

The Adverb, The Conjunction, 

The Preposition, The Interjection. 

(5.) All variable parts of speech have two numbers : the singular, 
which denotes but one, and the plural, which denotes more than one. 
(6.) All variable parts of speech, except the verb, have two gen 
ders: the masculine and the feminine. 

§ 2.— Cases. 

The cases adopted by French grammarians are : 

(1.) The nominalif or sujet : answering to the nominative or sub- 
ject of the English, and to the nominative of the Latin. 

(2.) The regime direct, or direct object of the English, accusative 
of the Latin. 

(3.) The regime indirect, indirect object of the English, answers to 
the oblique cases of the Latin, the genitive, dative, and ablative. 



278 OEXDER. § 3, 4, 5. 

§ 3. — The Nocn or Scbstantive. 

(1.) The noun or substantive is a word which serves to 
person or a thing; as, Jean, John; maison, house. 

(2.) There are two Hurts of nouns: proper and common. 

(3.) A proper noun is applied to a particular person, or thing; as, 
Napoleon, yapoleon ; Paris, Paris. 

(4.) A common noun belongs to a whole class of objects; as, livre, 
book ; homme, man. 

(5.) Some common nouns, although singular in number, present 
mind the idea of several perattM «>r things, forming a collec- 
tion : they arc for this reason denominated colUctiie nouns ; as, troupe, 

(6.) Collective i or partitive: genera^ wllen tne y 

represent an entire c«>l ';■ nnee dee FVaneaia, the army of 

B partial collection; as, 

one troupe de eoldsi I i -h toldiert. 

(7.) A common noon com . ~, chcf-d'a'uvre, 

master}! - ailed a compound noun. 

(8.) Of the two propertil and number, we shall 

oomntea 

(1.) There arc, in PO genders: the 

minine. 

men, and animals of the male kind 
. 
(3.) T. : belonge to women, and animals of the 

kind ; a-, B S "•««. 

(4.) Through imi: eosnt of derivath 

;t any real i ine and feminine genders have 

Sett, to (lie nanus of inanimate objects: thus, pa- 
ne, and phi: . ..nine. 

\MNQ. 



(1.) Male beings; as, homme, 
TTKTi ,• lion, {ton. 

■2.) ' ich male «jtia- 

re attributed : 

(3.) The name* • i 

lc printemps, the tpn 

of the months, Janvier, January; 

terrier, r>'jruary, &,c. 

(4.) The days of the week: 



(I.) I -:as,femme, 

; lionne, Honest. 
ts to which ferns e 

qualities are attributed : t\e,/airy; 

lone, ' 

(3.) Virtues: la charlts, Jew to : 
except courage, courage ,• nurite, 
mrrxt, whieh an 

(4.) Vieee: la mechancete, wxtkf 
tdni.ts: except l'orgucil, pria^ 



GENDER. — § 5, 



219 



Masculine. 
.undi, Monday; mardi, Tuesday, 



(5.) The names of the cardinal 
points and the winds : as, Test, the 
East; l'ouest,/7ie West,&c. [See 
exceptions opposite.] 

(6.) The names used in the 
v French decimal system : as, cen- 
time (hundredth part of a franc) ; 
kilogramme (1000 grammes, about 
two founds) ; metre, &c. 

(7.) Metals : le fer, iron ; l'acier, 
steel, &c. 

(8.) Colors: le vert, green ; le 
jaune, yellow. 

(9.) The names of empires and 
kingdoms when ending with a con- 
Bonant: le Danemarc, Denmark; 
e Bresil, Brazil. 

(10.) Mountains : le Jma,Mou7it 
Jura , le Puy-de-Dome, (*) the 
Puy de Dome ; le Cenis, le St. Ber- 
nard, MountCenis, Mount St. Ber- 
nard. 

(11.) The names of rivers when 
ending with a consonant : le Rhin, 
the Rhine; le Nil, the Nile. 



(12.) Trees, shrubs: le chene, 
the oak ; le frene, the ash ; le rosier, 
the rose-bush. [Exceptions op- 
posite.] 

(13.) The name of a language : 
as, le francais, French ; l'alle- 
mand, German, &c. 

(14.) The letters of the alpha- 
bet : un a, an a ; un z, a %. 

(15.) Compound words formed 
of a verb and of a noun, either 
masculine or feminine, or of a 
pronoun and a verb : porte-feuille, 
pocket-book ; rendez-vous, rendez- 



Feminine. 

(5.) Festivals : la Saint Jean, i.e. 

la fete de St. Jean, St. John's 

day; la Chandeleur, Candlemas. 

except Noel, Christmas, masc. 

Bise, a 'poetical term for North 
wind. Tramontane, a term applied 
on the Mediterranean to the North 
wind. Brise, breeze; moussons, 
trade-winds. 



(5.) The names of countries 
when ending in e mute : la France ; 
l'Espagne, l'Amerique, &c. 

Exc. Bengale, Hanovre, Me- 
xique, Peloponese. 

(6.) Chains of mountains in the 
plural: les Alpes, the Alps; les 
Pyrenees, the Pyrenees; les Vo- 
ges, les Cevennes, &c. 

(7.) The names of rivers when 
ending with e mute : la Seine, the 
Seine ; la Loire, the Loire. 

Exc. Le Rhone, the Rhone; le 
Danube, le Tibre, le Coeyte, masc. 

(8.) Aubepine, hawthorn ; bour- 
daine, black alder; epine, thorn; 
hieble, dwarf-elder ; ronce, brier ; 
yeuse, ilex. 



(9.) Garde-robe, wardrobe; 
perce-neige, spring-crocus ; perce- 
feuille, hare^s-ear. 



• The word Puy, from the Celtic puech, mountain, is applied to a number of placet 
In France: Puy-en-Velay ; Puy-notre-Dame, &c. 



280 



GENDER BT TH 



B TSRMISATIOJ. § ft. 



(10.) Moitie, half; and all num- 
bers ending with aine : douzaico, 
dozen; centaine, hundred, Sic 



Masculine. Feminint 

(16.) Nouns, pronouns, verbs, 
Sic, used substantively : le boire 
et le manger, fating and drinking. 

(17.) Numbers— cardinal, ordi- 
nal, and proportional — used sub- 
stantively : le dix, the tenth ; lo 
neuvieme, the ninth; le tiers, the 
third. [Exceptions opposite.] 

§ 6. — Gender, by the termination-. 

(1.) The exceptions t<> the masculine will be found opposite the 
termination, in toe feminine column; and the exceptions to the fem- 
inine, in the masculine column, also opp 

(2.) Consonants. 

B 

Masculine Terminations. Feminine TermiiuUions. 



sr ■-•** 


r\|fffi 


Trrmim- 
alien. 


Kiamfit. Englui. 


n Horeb, 


MoUHi Iforrb. 






vn nuloiih, 


e a ihip. 






MB plumb, 


lead. 

( 






AC MC, 










beak. 






ic m 


putty. 






oc hoc. 


. I hare. 














KC tr 


trunk. 






rc el 


clerk. 






sc fisc, 


P4MMM 

I 


) 




ed pied, 


foot 




. 


ID nid, 


nrst. 






od tripod, 


tripod. 






ud Talmud, 


Talmud. 






KD marchand, 


merchant. 






rd bord, 


border. 

] 


P 




ir chef, 


Chirf. 




Exc— clef, key ; nef, stop, 


IT snif, 


tallow. 




nave ; soif, thirst 


ur oeuf, 








bf cerf, 


stag. 

c 


J 




no rang 


rank. 


! 




CK arack. 


arrack. 







GEXDER BY THE TERMINATION. — § 0. 



281 



Masculine Terminations. 



Feminine Terminations. 



AL 


bal, 


ball. 


EL 


sel, 


salt. 


IL 


soleil, 


sun. 


OL 


sol, 


soil. 


TIL 


calcul, 


calculation. 


AM 


Adam, 


Adam. 


EM 


harem, 


harem. 


IM 


dahn, 


deer. 


OM 


nom, 


name. 


UM 


parfum, 


perfume. 


AN 


cadran, 


dial. 


EN 


examen, 


examination. 


m 


l ,'->in, 


grape. 


ON 


not preceded by is or gi, 




si, ti, xi 






baton, 


stick. 




gazon, 


turf. 




blason, 


blazon. 



M 



bison, bison; horizon, ho- 
rizon; oison, gosling; 
poison, poison ; tison, 
firebrand ; 

bastion, bastion; bestion, 
figure-head of a ship. 



Exc. — faim, hunger; male- 
dim, excessive hunger. 



Exc. — -fin, end ; main, hand. 

Exc. — chanson, song; cuis- 
son, baking ; contre- 
facon. counterfeiting ; 
facon. mode; moisson, 
harvest; moussons, trade- 
winds ; rancon, ransom 
ison maison, house. 

Exceptions opposite. 

gion region, region. 

sion pension, pension. 

tion question, question. 

xion reflexion, reflection. 



ap drap, cloth. 

op galop, gallop. 

up coup, blow. 

oq coq-d'Inde, turkey. 



ar char, 
£R fer, 



car. 
iron. 



ir plaisir, pleasure. 

or or, gold. 

or not preceded by e, 
azur, azure. 

bonheur, happiness ; coeur, 
heart; choeur, chorus; de- 
nominateur, denominator ; 
deshonneur,dishonor; equa- 
teur, equator ; exterieur, 



Exc. — cuiller, spoon , me^ 

sea. 
chair, flesh. 

Exc. — tour, tower. 

eur chaleur, heat. 
hauteur, height. 
Exceptions opposite. 



282 



GENDER BY TttE TERMINATION. — § 6. 



Masculine Terminations, 
exterior; honneur, honor; 
intOrieur, interior; labour, 
labor; malheur, misfor- 
tune; multiplicateur, mul- 
tiplier; pleura, tears; re- 
gulateur, regulator ; venti- 
lateur, ventilator. 



R — Continued. 

Feminine Terminations. 
eur — Continued. 



Exceptions opposite. 



AS 


bras, 


arm- 


LS 


gres, 


sandstone. 


■ 


souris, 




n 


09, 




n 


bloen0| 


blockade. 


rs 






KS 






AT 


climat, 


climate. 


R 


arret, 




IT 


lit, 




or 


rai-liot, 


i 


VT 


built, 


end. 


NT 


pout, 


bridge. 


it 


tort, 


tcrong. 


AX 


elimnx, 


climax. 


IX 




stV-r. 


IX 


prix, 


price. 


TX 


courroux, 


anger. 


NX 


lynx, 


lynx. 


AZ 


P™. 


gas. 


u 




nose. 


B 


rix, 


rice. 



(3.) 



amaryllis, amaryllis ; bre 
bis s'heep ; foia, time : sou- 
ris, mousr ; vis., screw ; oa. 
sis, oasis. 



foivt, 
nuit, 
dot, 



forest. 

night, 
dower. 



A 



a nencia, 



dent, tooth i gent, people, 

jnment, mare. 

port, >!u:re; la plupnrt, the 

most. 



Exc. — croix, cross ; noix, 
nut ; paix, ycic- ; roix, 
, 1'inlrix, partridge, 
poix, pitch. 

Exc. — diaux, /i'm« ; faux, 
$ry/A« ; toux, cough. 



' inula, a sort of cat- 
irpiliar ; m-pia, sepia. 



A complete classification of noona ending in « inuto (a mnjority of 
«Wcfa are feminine would be, from it.-, length, of little practi. 
the student, who would timl it easier to apply to his dictionary than to 



GENDERS BY THE TERMINATION. § G. 



283 



eucli a list. We will give here the principal terminations, classing them 
according to their gender, and placing the exceptions under the examples 
given for the terminations, instead of putting them, as hitherto, in the 
opposite column. 



Masculine Terminations. 
aee astrolabe, astrolab. 

Exc. — Souabe, Suabia ; 
; syllabe, syllable. 

acle miracle, miracle. 

Exc. — debacle, breaking 
up of the ice ; made, a 
mineral. 
acre sacre, consecration. 

Exc. — nacre, mother of 
pearl. 
age courage, courage. 

Exc. — \mage,image ; rage, 

rage; page, page of a 

book ; cage, cage ; nage, 

swimming; plage, beach. 

at»e salaire, salary. 

Exc. — affaire, affair ; aire, 
floor; glaire, white of 
egg ; grammaire, gram- 
mar ; paire, pair ; jugu- 
\alrefugular-vein;ha.ire, 
hair-clolh; chaire, pul- 
pit; serpentaire, snake- 
root; parietaire, pelli- 
tory, and a few other 
names of plants. 
are hectare, hectare (a 

measure). 
Astre cadastre, register. 
aume chaume, thatch. 
Exc. — paume, tennis. 
e . not immediately preceded 
by t or ti: abrege, 
abridgment. 
ege college," college. 

Exc. — Norvege, Norway. 
eme careme, lent. 

Exc. — creme, cream ; 
breme, bream ; bireme, 
trireme, galley loiih two 
or three rows of oars. 
etre pretre, priest. 

Exc. — fenetre, window ; 
guetre, gaiter. 
jurre beurre, butler. 

ibre cidre, cider. 



ADE 



AIE 
ANCE 
ANSE 



IEEE 

INE 

IQUE 

ive 

ISSE 
LLE 



Feminine Terminations. 
ace grace, grace. 

Exc. — espace, space. 
parade, parade. 
Exc. — stade, stadium 

grade, grade. 
haie, hedge. 

importance, importance. 
danse, dance. 

asse masse, mass. 

Exc. — Parnasse, Par' 
nassus. 
ee nuee, cloud. 

Exc. — apogee, apogee ; 
athee, atheist ; camee, 
cameo ; colisee, coli- 
seum; coryphee, cory- 
pheus ; empyree, highest 
heaven; lycee, lyceum; 
mausolee, mausoleum ; 
musee, museum; hy- 
menee, marriage; pe- 
rigee, perigee ; pygmee, 
pygmy; trochee, trochee ; 
trophee, trophy; spon- 
dee, spondee; scarabee, 
scarabee. 
eike baleine, whale. 

ence cadence, cadence. 

Exc. — silence, silence. 
enne antienne, anthem. 

Exc. — renne, reindeer. 
ense offense, offence. 

esse tristesse, sadness. 
ie charpie, lint. 

Exc. — genie, genius; peri- 
helie, perihelion ; incen- 
die, conflagration ; para- 
pluie, umbrella; pavie, 
clingstone peach. 
chaudiere., boiler. 
doctrine, doctrine. 



pratique, 
rive, 
coulisse, 
paille, 



practice, 
shore, 
sliding-shutler. 
straw. 



Exc. — intervalle, interval j 



264 



SKSD1R. g 1. 



Masculine Terminations. 



ISME 
ISQUE 



UGE 

ffaxs 



prism, 
risk. 



pnsme, 

risque, 

Exc. — bisque, soup. 

ebtniste, cabinet-maker. 

Exc. — batiste, cambric ; 

liste, list; piste, track. 
refuge, refuge. 

arbuste, shrub. 



Feminine Terminations. 

libelle, libel; verraicelle. 
vermicelli ; violoncello, 
violoncello ; clievre- 

feuille, honey-suckle; 
portefeuille, pocket-book; 
vaudeville, vaudeville, 
bunch. 

Exc. — colosse, colossus ; 
carrosse, coach. 

nappe, table-cloth. 

not preceded by u. 

terre, land. 

Exc. — lieixe, ivy , parterre, 
flower-garden ; tonnerre, 
lh u ndcr ; pa rato n n t rro, 
lightniruj-rod ; verre, 

ami tie, friendship. 

Eat to, jiaw. 

'JOB, — amniotic, amulet; 
Bqnelettei skeleton. 
URE nature, nature. 

use excuse, excuse 

uve cuve, tub. 



osse bosse, 



tpe 

KRE 



Tl4 

TTE 



midi, noon. 

Exc— foi, faith ; fourmi, 
atU ; aiir^H-iiuili, af.er- 
noon ; loi, law ; merci, 
merry. 



U 



revenu, rw 

-bru, daughter-in- 
law ; vertu, virtue ; glu, 
bird-lime; cau, water; 
pcau, sii/i ; tribu, /rite. 



\*l. — Nouns Masculine is one acceptation, and FxMiNiira 



IN THE OTHER. 



Masculine. 



Aigle, 
Auno, 
Baft* 

Curtouche, 

Couple, 

Dcbco (ting.), 



taqle. 
alder. 

U.irhar;/ horse, 
tcrist (au 
ornaments {sculp- 
ture). 
male and female, 
crape. 
deliglU. 



Feminine. 



Aigle, 

Anne, 

Barb*, 

Ohm 

Cartouche, 

dxijilc, 
Crepe, 
Delicc (pi), 



r.tn.Ltrd 

ell. 

beard. 

carp. 

cartridge. 

a pair, a '/roc*, two. 
pin cake. 
delight*. 



FLURA1 OW HOUNB. — § 8. 



285 



Masculine. 




feminine. 


Espace, 


space. 


Espace, 


leading (in pri 

ing). 
writing-copy. 


Exemple, 


example. 


Exemple, 


Faux, 


forgery. 


Faux, 


scythe. 


Foret, 


drill. 


Foret, 


forest. 


Greffe, 


office of clerk of a 
court. 


Greffe, 


graft. 


Heliotrope, 


sunflower. 


Heliotrope, 


a mineral 


Hymne, 


classical chant. 


Hymn, 


Christian hymn. 


Line, 


book. 


Livre, 


pound. 


Manche 


handle. 


Manche, 


sleeve. 


M^moire, 


memoir, bill. 


Memoire, 


memory. 


Mode, 


mode,(grammar,) 

system, 
mould, model. 


Mode, 


fashion. 


Moule, 


Moule, 


shell-fish. 


CEuvre, (m. &• f.) work. 


GSuvres, 


literary works 


Office, 


divine service. 


Office, 


pantry. 


Ombre, 


a game. 


Ombre, 


shadow, spectre 


Orgue (smg.), 


organ. 


Orgues (pL), 
Palme, 


organ. 


Palme, 


hand, a measure. 


the advantage. 


Panache, 


plume. 


Panache, 


pea-hen. 


Parallele, 


comparison. 


Parallele, 


parallel line. 


Pendule, 


pendulum. 


Pendule, 


clock. 


Periode, 


acme, height. 


Periode, 


period, epoch. 


Pivoine, 


a bird. 


Pivoine, 


aflower. 


Plane, 


plane-tree. 


Plane, 


joiner's tool. 


Platine, 


platina. 


Platines, 


small: metallic 

plates, 
frying-pan. 


Poele, 


stove, pall. 


Poele, 


Poste, 


place, office. 


Poste, 


post-office. 


Pretexte, 


pretence. 


Pretexte, 


a Roman robe. 


R6gale, 


organ-pipe. 


Regale, right 


of receiving the ret 






enues of a 


vacant bishopric. 


Remise, 


hackney-coach. 


Remise, 


carriage-house. 


Serpentaire, 
Solde, 


constellation. 


Serpentaire, 
Solde, 


dragon-wort. 


balance of account. 


pay. 


Somme, 


nap, sleep. 


Somme, 


sum. 


Souris, 


smile. 


Souris, 


mouse. 


Tour, 


tour, turn, trick. 


Tour, 


tower. 


Vague, 


space, emptiness. 


Vague, 


wave. 


Vase, 


vase, vessel. 


Vase, 


mire, slime 


VoUe, 


veil. 


Voile, 


sail. 



§ 8. — Formation of the Plural Nouns. 
(1.) The plural in French, as in English, is formed by the addition 
of s to the singular : 

Singular. Plural. 

maison, house ; maisons, houses. 

ville, town ; villes, towns. 

(2 ) First exception. — Nouns ending in the singular with s, *, or *, 
have the same form in the plural : 



286 PLURAL Or SOU5S. — § 8. 



Singular. 


Plural 


fils, son ; 


fib. *()>»«. 


voix, voice ; 


voix, voices. 


nez, nose ; 


nez, »o5rt. 



(3.) Second exception.— Xouns ending in the singular with au and 
cu, take x in the plural: 

Singular. Plural. 

:, hat ; chapeaux, hats. 

k\L,jire ; feux. /re* 

(4) Third exception. — The following nouns ending in ou take* 
in the plural: 

Singular. PhtraL 

'u*l ; Ujonx., jncel*. 

cailluu. jxOble ; caiUoux, /W»A/e* 

choux, cabbages. 
genou penmix, knee*. 

.. ami; utboux, <>*•/* 

joujou, plaything ; joujoux, playthings. 

(5.) Fourth exception. — The following nouns ending in ail, change 
th it termination into oux in the plural : 

u'ar. Plural. 

bail, I '.«*•#. 

:x, corals. 
\. enamel i. 
aoup;? sotipirnux, airholes. 

am; i4*; sous baux, under-leases 

travail, la '■ travmux, labors. 

(6.) Fifth excrpt ion.— The follr.u nn their plural irreg. 

Ularlv : 

Singular. Plural 

ail. garlic ; nnx. 

beta*!, cattle. boatiaux. 

baa no p'ural. 
(7.) Sixth MHtption. — Nouns ending in tlie. singular with al, ch&nga 
that termination into mix in the pi . 

■ilmr. mat 

I il, gmeral ; • i-ix, generals, 

' liorte ; .uix, horses. 

mal, rrt'/ ; maux, <ti7* 

(8.) Ciel, ail. steal, travail, liave two plan 

T'/ura/. 
ciel, /<• cieux, heavens. 

. . ( /«^r of a bed; . , ( ^Wrrj 

OCl | j aUtl of pictures. 

• BsA.bAll; c&TTUXYtx), carnival ; chmcsA, jaelal ; rrgnl. f*aaf, folic w the 
gaocral rulo 



PLURAL Or COMPOUND NOUNS. — § 9. 287 

ceil, eye; yeux, eyes. 

CBil de-bcEuf, cval toindow ; ceils-de-bceuf, oval windows. 

aieul ancestor ; aieux, ancestors. 

aleul, grandfather ; aleuls, grandfathers. 

travail, labor; travaux, labors. 

travail, trave; travails, traves. 

§ 9. — Plural of Compound Nouns. ■ 

(1.) When two nouns form a compound substantive, both take the 
plural ending : 

Singular. Plural. 

chef-lieu, chief place ; chefs-lieux, chief places. 

lieutenant-colonel, lieutenant' lieutenants-colonels, lieutenant- 
colonel. colonels. 

(2.) When a compound noun is formed of two substantives joined 
by a preposition, the first only takes the plural ending : 
Singular Plural. 

arc-en-ciel, rainbow ; arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. 

chef-d'oeuvre, masterpiece ; chefs-d'oeuvre, masterpieces. 

The words tete-a-tete and coq-a-l'&ne {an incongruous discourse), remain 
unchanged in the plural. 

(3.) When a noun and an adjective form a compound noun, botn 
are varied in the plural : 

Singular. Plural. 

gentilhomme, nobleman ; gentilshommes, noblemen. 

porte-cochere, carriage-door; portes-cocheres, carriage-doors. 
basse-cour, poultry-yard ; basses-cours, poultry-yards. 

(4.) For the sake of euphony, the mark of the plural* is emitted 
il. the adjective of the following compound words : 
Singular. Plural. 

graud'mere, grandmother ; grand'meres, grandmothers. 

grand'niesse, high-mass ; grand'messes, high-masses. 

(5.) The words, Monsieur, Sir, Mr., gentleman ; Madame, Madam, 
or Mrs. , Mademoiselle, Miss, form their plural as follows : 
Singular. Plural. 

Monsieur, Sir, etc. ; Messieurs, sirs, gentlemen. 

Madame, Madam, etc. ; Mesdames, ladies, etc. 

Mademoiselle, Miss, etc. ; Mesdemoiselles, young ladies, etc. 

(6.) In words composed of a noun and a verb, a preposition, or an 
adverb, the noun takes the form of the plural ; provided, however 
there is plurality in the idea. 

Singular. Plural. 

passe-port, passport ; passe-ports, passports. ' 

avant-garde, vanguard; avant-gardes, vanguards. 

* The mark of the feminine also. 



288 



PLURAL OF NOUNS. § 10, 11, 12. 



(7.) Compound nouns of which the second word indicate* plo. 
rality, take s in the singular and plural : 

Singular. Plural 

cure-dents, a tooth-pick ; cure-dents, tooth-pick*. 

caste-noisettes, nut-crackers ; caste-noisettes, ti'ut -crackers. 
(8.) Words composed of two verbs, or of a verb joined to an ad- 
verb, or 8 preposition, arc invariable : 

■dar. Plural. 

passe i rkcy; pSflBS-partoat, master- keys. 

pour-boire, coachman's fee ; j»>ur-U>ire, coachman's fees. 

§ 10. — Nbum which have no Plural. 
(1.) The nouns <>f metals considered in themselves: as, or, gold, 
ardent, filter; plomb, lead; etain, pewter; fer, iron; cuivre, copper ; 

-ueh a- baume, balsam ; encens, incense, &.c. 
(3.) The names of virtues and vices, and MOM names relating to 
pinsieal ;md DOffll man : is, la jetuesss, youth; la beaute, beauty ; ia 

: 

: substantively : as, lc beau, the beautiful ; l'utile. 

'he useji 

§ 11. — HToUm WHICH IIAVK M> SlVOCLAB IN Tire 6ENSE HERB 

1 Jit I.. 

Piancsfllse, 

FonsraiDsSj 



Appaa, 

arr 
Arr*t* (etre tux), to be under arrest. 



earnest money, 
an n al m. 
charms. 



ASBWSSj 

■ 






bviroos, 



SSBMSa 

brushuood. 

confnrs. 



rows 



I 
Yitrnux, 



difficulties, 
betrothing, 
funrral. 
erpenses, costs, 
wages. 

wits 

manners, 
snuffers, 
jetrels, diamond*. 

tears. 

■ tim*. 
darkness, 
jiincers. 
vindov-glau. 



§ 12. — PbOPZB Nam 

(1.) Proper names, wbsn DOl iis,d liirurative'y, are invariable, even 
when preceded by the plural article, 1oh.(*) 



papne j'honore d'nvoir DVS> 

atari lc- deux S 

ItAT*ouAan. 



Sj>ain priiles itself on havinf 
givm Kris to the tvo Senecas. 



• Oft*n u*ed by the French bsfiM Ihi i 



of celebrated indmduaU 



THE ARTICLE. — § 13. 289 



Locke, Montesquieu, J. J. lions- 
seau, as they arose in Europe, called 
upon modem nations to claim their 
liberty. 



Les Locke, les Montesquieu, les 
J. J. Rousseau en se levant en 
Europe, appelerent le3 peuples 
modernes a la libertc. 

Chateaubriand. 

(2.) When proper names are used figuratively, they take the form 
of the plural. 
t La France a eu ses Cesars et ses I France has had its Ccesars and 

Pompies. Noel et Chai'SAL. j Pompeys. 

\ That is, generals like Pompey and Cajsar. 

Un coup d'oeil de Louis enfan- I A glance from Louis produced 
taits des Gomeilles. Delille. | Comedies. 
That is, poets like Corneille. 

§ 13. — The Article. 
(1.) The article is a word prefixed to a noun, or to a word used 
substantively, to determine the extent of its signification. 

(2.) Modern French grammarians recognize only one article, le. 
(3.) This article, contracted with the preposition de, is often used 
before a word in a partitive sense. [§ 78.] 

(4.) The words an, masc, one, fern., answering to the indefinite 
article a or an in English, are now very properly* classed with 
the numeral adjectives. We shall, however, for the sake of conven- 
ience, devote a few lines to them under this head. 

(5.) The article le, the, is la for the feminine, and les for the plural. 
(6.) The article is subject to two kinds of changes: elision [§ 146] 
and contraction. 

(7.) Elision is the suppression of the letters e, a, which are replaced 
by an apostrophe [ ' ] before a vowel, or an h mute [seeL.3 (11)] : thus, 
l'esprit, the mind, instead of lc esprit, 

l'amitic, the friendship, " la amitie\ 

l'homme, the man, " le homme. 

l'humanite, humanity, " la humanitc". 

(8.) Contraction is the union of the article le, les, with one of the 
prepositions, a, de. Thus, we say by contraction : J 

au livre, to the book, instead of a le livre. 

aux fruits, to the fruits, " a les fruits. 

. du livre, of the book, u de le livre. 

des flruits, of the fruits, " do les fruits. 

(9.) The contractions au, du, are not used before masculine words 
commencing with a vowel, or an h mute, nor before feminine words : 



* No difference can be made in rendering English into French, between 
a and one, so that in French un homme means a mail, or one man. Tha 
crtbjcr numeral adjectives might with as much propi iety have be? n called 
irtirlee as this, wofd un. 

13 



£90 



Tni ARTICLE. S 13. 



ii l'liomme, to the man, 

a l'anji, to the friend. 

de rimiumc, of the man, 

de l'aini, of the friend 

(10.; Tre nrtk le used before words taken in ■ partitive sense [) 78 
(1)], comes in connection or contraction with the preposition de; it ia 
rendered in E <\c or any, expressed or understood: 

i. m. some, bread or of the bread (a part rf\ 

:it, m. moneij, some money, of the money (a part of) 

i !i\ f. -\ tome meat, if the meat (a ;xir/ o/'^ 

.;■ ri< , f. tt/ver vimte, mnmw/i er^plate, o/*<A« silver plate(aperte/> 

books, some books, of the books (a part of ). 

(11.) T indefinite article, at or on* is rendered in French 

i"r tiic feminine; when those tronhi 
are connected with the utepositioo da, the e of the preposition ia 
elided. 



Masculine. 
nn liiiinmo, a man. 
d'un hoiniuc, of or from a man, 
X Dfl li-mnuc, at or to a man. 



Feminine. 
tine fetUDttj «i wowan 
d'una famine, of or from « 

ami , ..: go t» a •*»*/«*. 



ObtervafiofM. 



re n ma.«culine word, commencing teith 

la, befi re -i fi minine word) 

commruehit) teith 
ml or h i-iute, 

mmnuinp vith' 
de Ia, betel :i I imiihik- erard, ( <i mimhmii^ 
do r, before ■ weed aaatawnui wlA 

:• r, ^ anata, 

da*, for the plural, >» a// ra»<«. 

re a masculine *JSSa\ a-mmencina *v7A " 

'UN/, 

a 1'. \- '. I either commteneiHo with 

i'-r, J a voir*/ or h mute, 

aux, far the plural, in all m 
noun, 
; re a i minine noun, 
d'un, I dine iimm, 

i 

a on, 1 aline noun, 

a uue, beeVa ■ fti— iiiiiaai noma, 

I.e p<r HO* <tm d*- I 7"A* /fl/A^r a«</ mother art \ 

•rspoir. R N Bd I'iurre. | despair. 

M im Friendship pours a peaceful A--» 
bonhetn piuns into our hearts. 

/.'iKiiiiii-ur auj treada M mow is dearer than life fvm V 

plu» ah 

fee iil ee OteW aereena chantOTHit The boys and girls mmg in eft* » | 
ea chojur. 11 us St. l'tuiaa, I 



the. 



Of the, 
from the, 
Some, 
any. 



at or to the. 



a, (in, one. 



of or from a,a~,on 
at or to a, a:i, one. 



THE ADJECTIVE.— § 14-1, § 14-2. 291 



Sur let rives du Gange on voit 
fleurir /ebene. Deulle. 

La violetto se cache timidement 
au milieu des filles de /'ombre. 
Deleuze. 

Le remords se reveille au cri de 
la naturs. De Bellot. 

La moitie des humains vit aux 
depens de /'autre. Destouches. 



On the banks of the Ganges vcc tee 
the ebony in bloom. 

The violet conceals herself timidly 
in the midst of the daughters of the 
shade. 

Remorse is aroused by the cry of 
nature. 

The half of mankind lives at the 
oftl 



expense of the other. 
§ 14-1. — The Adjective. 

(1.) The adjective serves to denote the quality or manner of being 
of the noun. 

(2.) Adjectives are of two sorts : qualifying adjectives and determin- 
ing adjectives. 

(3.) We call qualifying adjectives those which add to the idea of the 
object, that of a quality proper to it; as bon, good; noble, noble; 
courageux, courageous. 

(4.) Determining adjectives are those which add to the idea of the 
object, that of a particular limitation or determination ; as quelque, 
some ; tout, all ; autre, other ; mon, my ; nul, no ; un, one ; deux, two. 

§ 14-2. — Qualifying Adjectives. 

(1.) These adjectives may express qualities: 1. Simply; 2. With 
comparison ; 3. Carried to a very high degree. Thence the three de- 
grees of qualification : the positive, the comparative, and the superla- 
tive. 

(2.) The positive is nothing but the adjective in its simplest signi- 
fication : 

Moi, je suis a Paris, triste, pauvre, | At Paris I am sad, poor, and te- 
reclus. . . Boileac. j cbided. 

(3.) The comparative is the adjective expressing a comparison be- 
tween two or several objects. There is, then, between the objects 
compared, a relation of equality, superiority, or inferiority. 

(4 ) The comparison of equality expresses a quality in the same de- 
gree in the objects compared ; it is formed* by placing aussi, as, or 
autant, as much, before the adjective, and the conjunction que, as, 
after it : 

Germany is as populous as France 



L'Allemagne est aussi peuple"e 
que la France. Voltaire. 

A leur tete est le chien, superbe 
autant qii utile. Delille. 



At their head stands the dog, as 
noble as useful. 



• In French, adjectives cannot be compared, as in English, by means of 
changes in the termination : with the exception of meilleur, better ; moin- 
dre, less ; and pire, worse, all comparisons must be firmed by means of 
tdverba 



292 QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. § 1 i-5. 

(5.) Th? relation or c>rnparison of superiority expresses a quality 
ji a higher degree in one object than in another; this comparison ia 
formed by placing plus, mure, before the adjective, and que, than, 
after it : 

Lcs notions sont plus sinc6res que Actions arc more sincere than 
ies paroles. Mlls. »s Soobsst. vorJ*. 

Lepssdds serf sat s*ieM*£sitqoa The foot of '.he staff is better 
ctlui du boeuf. BofVSOL formed than that uf the "jr. 

(fi.) The comparison of inferiority expresses a quality in a lower 
degref in one object than in another; it is formed by placing moins, 
re the adjective, and que, than, after it : 



Shipwreck and death are teat fatal 

titan those pleasures which attack 
virtue. 



Le nanfrsge el Is mart not mojna 

:i atta- 
quciit la vertu. l'V\> l on. 

7 We have only three sdjectives which are comparatives of them- 
| 
Meillcur, instead of plus bon, which is never OSed in the sense of 
helter : 

II a'sat meil/eur ami ni parent I We ham M better ftiemd, no bet- 

La 1'r'MMM. I tor relation than •> 
J'ire, instead of jlus mmuais, whicli may however he nasd: 

[OS k I Tit' remedy is at times tmrse than 
m.il. \ the evil. 

Ifoindre, Instead of phu petit, an expression also i 

• DM MlS jxtit OSS d'iMrc I Bains Us* than great is not being 

i grand. Dots is. | small. 

. or third degree of qualification, exprs 

quality carried to a very high, or t (l the highest degree; thence there 

are tw.. sorts, of superlatives: the relative and the ah* 

* Mi<-nx. better; pi-, irr.rie ; moin«. fete. The English words ratter, 
pons, lass, :>r.- snmetimss adverbs, and when they ar.- so, thooid !»• r.>n- 
dsrsd bj the serersJ words placed at the commencement of this note. A 
r determining the nature of those words m Englisti i- \ 

1. To change the word better into the expression "is a better manner." 
If tins ehange may !><• mads without changing the *en.«c, the word better 

if an adverb and inu-t bfl r . 1 1 I • n- 1 t>\ I ,• 

He r<<i./» better li» a better man- I II lit missal que son frtre. 
Her) than kit brother. 

•1. If you can change worse into " in a worse manner," it should be trnns- 
«. or, more elegantly, /.'«.« >;«i/ .- 

He read" worse (in a worse man- I II lit pis (plus mal) quo sor 
tier than his brother. 

r. Winn you may substitute "a smaller amount or quantity" for the 
Void Kssf, it Khould he rep I 

He reads /«•** (a smal'er amount) I II lit moine quo »M frare. 
<Ajr» htt brotlur. 



FEMININE OP ADJECTIVES. — S 15, 16. 



293 



(9.) The superlative relative marks a very high or the highest de- 
gree relatively, or with comparison: it is formed by placing le^ la, les, 
lite ; mon, my ; ton, iky ; son, his ; notrc, our ; votre, your ; leir, leurs, 
their, before the comparative of superiority or inferiority : 

A benefit received is the most to- 



TJn bienfait recu est la plus sacree 
de toutes les dettes. Mme. Necker. 

La probite reconnue est leplus sur 
de tous les serments. (Tub same) 



cred of all debts. 

Acknowledged probity is the most 
secure of all oaths. 

(10.) The words le plus, le moins, must be repeated before every ad- 
jective : 



Ce sont les livres les phis agre- 
ables, les plus uuiversellement lus, 
et les plus utiles. 

Bkrnardin de St. Pierre. 



These books are the jnost agree- 
able, the most universally read, and 
the most useful. 



(11.) The superlative absolute expresses also a very high degree, 
but, absolutely, without comparison : it is formed by placing before 
the adjective one of these words, Ires, fort, infinimenl, exlremement, &c. : 
There are in cities, as elsewhere, 
very silly people. 



II y a a la ville, comme ailleurs, 
de fort sottes gens. La Bruyere. 

Je vous prie de croire que je ne 
Bonge qua vous, et que vous m'etes 
entremement chere. 

Mme. de Sevigne. 



/ beg you to believe that you are 
my only thought, and that you are 
extremely dear to me. 



§ 15. — Gender and number of Adjectives. 

(1.) The adjective has, of itself, neither gender nor number ; it must 
assume the gender and number of the noun to which it belongs. 

(2.) The termination of the adjective varies according to the gender 
and number of the noun which it qualities or determines : 



TJn homme prudent. 

A prudent man. 
Des lionimes prudents. 

Prudent men. 



Une femme prudente. 

A prudent woman. 
Des femmes prudtntes. 

Prudent women. 



§ 16. — Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives. 
(] .) All adjectives ending with e mute, remain unchanged in the 
feminine : 



Masculine. 
TJn homme agreable. 

An agreeable man. 
TJn mur solide. 

A strong wall. 



Feminine. 
TJne femme agreable. 

An agreeable woman. 
TJne maison solide. 

A strong (well built) house. 



(2.) Adjectives not ending in e mute form, their feminine by tho ad. 
ftition of e: 



Masculine. 
Un garden diligent. 

A diligent boy. 
TJn homme poli. 

A polite man. 



Feminine. 
TJne fille diligente. 

A diligent girl. 
Une dame polie. 

A polite lady. 



204 



FEMININE OP ADJECTIVES. § lb. 



(3.) Exceptions : 



Adjectn es 
endiu'' in 



Change those 
ttrunnationa 

ON f for the fcmi- 
F I nine into 



ELLE, 

KILLS, 



ETTE, 

onxk. 



Jfas. 
tel, 
parefl, 

aueien, 

llHR't, 

bon, 
ncuf, 



Fem. 

telle, twK 

pareille, like. 

ancieune, ancieni 

muette, mute. 

bonne, good. 

neuve, neic. 

RMHk fat. 



si:, hcuieux, lieureuse, happu. 
(4.) The following, although ending with these termiiiations,tbrq 
their feminine otherwise: 
oomplet, 

diacrat) 

inijiiK't, 

replet, 

niauvai.s 

n..'s. 

raa, 

doux, 

faux. 

pr.rix, 

tOOX, 

II'T', 

(5.) Adjectives ending in cur, as also some substantives of tho 
panic termination, have three several modes <>f forming the feminine: 
rived from tin- participle present of a 
French \erb by dropping an!, and substituting >ur, change the fmai 
■ 
PpK Part, n'.ine. Feminine. 

dansarif, whence d*Mfvr; and thence dsMMMfc 
tninip.nif, " llOBUCHf; " trompcusr. 

H.rc, however, note that chan!>-ur, when signifying a ;>/v 

kes for the feminine container. Like anomalies appear in 

the following: 




make in the feminine 

follow the general rule 
onj 7/iake in the- 
ftni nine 

make in tin feminine 



" complete. 

concrete. 
discrete, 

itxpiictc. 
Mi i.-te. 

k replete. 

tnauvaiso. 
niaise. 

r douco. 

prctixe. 
roQBMi 

t ierce. 



1 !cur, ambassador, 
bailleur, lessor, 
hunter, 

demandeur, ylaintiff, 

defcndeur, defendant, 


make in the 


adrice. 

1 aiilcresse. 

dirnanderesee. 
, ili'fendereaee. 


devineur, gursser, 
enchanteur, tnek 


feminine 


'■levinereflM. 
enchai 


guuTenx 

jxcliiur, tinner, 
a, st riant, 




unto. 

I'< i li.n»»e. 
ner\ ante. 



•2J. Those ending infruraud derived from the Latin, and, consequent* 



FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES.; — § 16. 205 

y, not falling under the rule (Isl) just given, form the feminine by 
changing teur into trice; as, 

Masculine. Feminine. 

acteur, actor, actrice, actress. 

admirateur, admirer, admiratrice, admirer 

Exceptions to this, however, are the following: 

debiteur, debtor, *j f de"bitrice. 

executeur, executor, I . . ., executrice. 

inspecteur, inspector, > . . . < inspectrice. 

inventeur, inventor, I * j inventrice. 

persecuteur, persecutor, J \ persecutrice. 

3d. Those ending in erieur. also majeur, mineur, meilleur, follow 
the general rule, that is, add e to form the feminine ; as, 

exterieur, exterior, ~\ f exterieure, 

superior superior, k {n ^ supeneure 

majeur, of age, major, V feminine ^ m ?J eure - 

mineur, minor, I J J mineure. 

meilleur, better, J {meilleure. 

(6.) Adjectives, as also nouns, indicating occupation chiefly exer- 
cised by men, are alike in the masculine and the feminine ; as, 
auteur, author ; litterateur, literary person. 

(7.) The following adjectives having two forms for the masculine 
form their feminine as follows: 



Masculine before Masculine before 






a consonant. a vowel or h mate. 


Feminine. 




beau, bel, 


belle, 


handsome. 


fou, fol, 


folle, 


foolish. 


mou, mol, 


molle, 


soft. 


nouveau, nouvel, 


nouvelle, 


new. 


vieux, vieil, 


vieille, 


old. 


Irregular Adjectives. 




(8.) The following adjectives form their feminine 


ii regularly . 


Masctdine. 


Feminine. 


absous, absolved, 


absoute. 




benin, benign, 


benigne. 




blanc, white, 


blanche. 




caduc, decrepit, infirm, 


caduque. 




coi, quiet, 


coite. 




dissous, dissolved, 


dissoute. 




favori, favorite, 


favorite. 




frais, fresh. 


fraiche. 




franc, free, frank, 


franche. 




gentil, pretty, genteel, 


gentille. 




grec, Grecian, Greek, 


grecque. 




hebrew, Hebrew, 


hebrai'que, 


used only of ths 




Hebrew 


tougue. 


jouveuceau (obsolete), a stripling, jouvenceile 





296 IBREGCLAR ADJECTIVES. §17. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

{'nrucau, twin, iumclle. 

oog, long, *' ow < Tongue, 

malt re, matter, tn i mattresso. 

malin, cunning, malignant, maligne 

mulatre. mi lmihitre or mulati 

muscat, nm muacade. 

nul, null, w»ir t nullc. 
obi' a _• 

public, puUiqua 

• 7, changed, lvsolue. 

4m, barren, tvcho. 

sot, till;/, potto. 

traitor, treacherous, trar.r 

rkish, tarqua 

vkillot, oldish, vieiilotte. 

r> . The foUowia \ ' ire no :'"ninine : 

■piu*. partitan, partisan. 

chetata, eh'snut color. timoin, witm 

i Hum, 

§ 17 N 01 Tin: Pukai I YES. 
(1.) (7. B .— The plural of adjectives is formal by the ad- 
dition of i to the MolinO|Or to the feminine termination: 



:<ir. Plural 

petit, *mall, pctita; 



J\ mini ne. 
Singular, Plural. 

graadea 



I '..la rule has i ptiona ivith regard to the feminine tor- 

(3.)^ ;',i:..r.i..n, it ia subject to the 

: with s or x, do 
not change their form in the plural \ 

iar. Plural. 

■ ax, happy, i ax, 

doux, street, toft, dome 

Second Exr i | he singular the termina- 

tion eau, form their plural tfl of C .' 

Plural. 
■ fifnl, 

JUIM' 

1 1 aux. 
Third E y ling in al, form their plural maa> 

online bj 

Plural. 
lib-Vault. 
nation n.itmnaaz. 

rural, rural, ruraux. 



AQREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. — 8 18. 



297 



We quote from Bescherelle's Grammaire nalionale. the adjectives 
which form their plural in als: 

Singular. Plural, 

amic&l, friendly, amicala. 

bancal, bandy-legged, bancals. 

fatal, fatal, fatal.?, 

final, final, finals, 

frugal, frugal, frugals. 

filial, filial, filials. 

glacial, frozen, icy, glacials, 

initial, initial, initials, 

labial, labial, labials, 

matinal, early, matinals. 

medial, medial, medials. 

naval, naval, navals. 

pascal, paschal, pascals, 

penal, penal, penals. 

theatral, theatrical, theatrals. 

§ 18. — Agreement of Adjectives witii Nouns. 

(1.) The adjective must agree, in gender and number, with the 
noun or pronoun which it qualifies : 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

le beau jardin, les beaux jardins; la belle maison, les belles maisons. 

the fine garden, the fine gardens ; the fine house, the fine houses. 

le grand livre, les grands livres ; la grande carte, les grandes cartes. 

the large book, the large books ; the large map, the largetnaps. 

(2.) This agreement must take place, not only when the adjective 
immediately precedes or follows the noun or pronoun, but also when 
it i3 separated by other words : 

Feminine. 
Singular. — L'honneur de passer 
pour bonne l'empechait de se mon- 
trer mauvaise. Marivaux. 

The honor of passing for good pre- 
vented her showing herself bad. 

Plural. — Loin de nous raidir con- 
tre les inclinations qui sont bonnes, 
il faut les suivre pour servir Dieu. 
Mme. de Maintenon. 
Far from resisting our good incli- 
nations, we should follow than in 
order to serve God. 



Masculine. 

Singular. — Plaise a. Dieu de te 
rendre assez bon pour me'riter la vie 
heureuse ! Fenelon. 

May God render thee siifficiently 
good to deserve the blessed life. 

Plural. — Jamais, en quoi que ce 
puisse etre les mediants ne sont 
bons h. rien dc bon. 

J. J. Rousseau. 

The wicked are never, in any cir- 
cumstances, fitted {good) to perform 
any thing good. 

(3.) When an adjective relates to two or more substantives, 
whether in the singular or the plural, and all of the same gender, it 
must agree with the nouns in gender, and be put in the plural : 

Leriche et X indigent, l'imprudent et I The rich and the poor, the twt- 
Ut «age, prudent and tht -oise, bring 

13* 



298 adjectives.— § 19, 20. 

Sujets a ni#me lot, subi-sent ra«me ' Sul-jeet to the same law, itper%enet 
sort. J. B BoCBBSifl, | the same /ale. 

(4.) When the words which the adjective qualities are of different 
genders, the adjective must be put in the masculine plural: 

he de rcndrc Ararat?, ma / try to render happy, my wife, 
•. mime mon my child, and even my eat and m« 
chat i- dog. 

!'ii:rre. 
.it.'- publics ne ft '.:- Public order and ut'lity cannot be 

le fruit du crime. the fruits of crime. 

Massillon. 

- special rules on tills point, see { 83. 

§ 19. — Determining or Di.tiuminative Adjectives. 
There tennining adjectivea — the demonstrative! 

the possessive, the numeral, and the indefinite. 

(1.) The demonstrative adjective* IN used, when nn object is to 

be particularly specified -t pointed "ut. They are never, in French, 

..it is, without the nouns which they determine: 

!ar. 

Maseutine — O, (Ml or (I . mencing with a 

commencing with a 
• : .irsi <<r an h mute. 

Feminine.— Cvttc, this H t*U sorts of noun*. 

Ccafor both gender*. 

M'LES. 

Masculine lingular. Feminine singular. 

ce toldat, ttiii or that sn/dier. ectte fcmrtie, this <>r that woman. 

cet ami. that or this friend. ' ct U«- crw'-e, that or this orord. 

Cct liummr, this or that man. this or that harp. 

Plural. 

dn torn- 

■ fut un sommeil, <t *a tombo 
m U-rceau. :.ul 



On tdmirmble don, 



It butterfly escaped from the 
tomb ; his death ir<ii a slumber, and 
his tomb a cradle. 



nttintt, it 



L'in-tinct, nam doute 'i majestic rea- 

Tuugu'tc raJeotL in sam 

y>, tusttm J— m phut* en vase dis- There tha' ..' prepared 

as a :he dew \n it* 



Daw aa coupe elegante acrucillc la elegant cup. 
ra»«v iTiiaaaxa.) 



POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. — § 21. 



299 



*7« honneurs que le vulgaire ad- 
mire, 

ReVeiilent-ils les morts au sein de 
monuments ? Soulie. 



Do these honors, admired by the 
vulgar, awake the dead from their 
sepulchres ? 



(2.) When it is necessary to make, in French, a difference similar 
to that existing between the English words this and that, the adverbs 
ci and la must be placed after the nouns: 



ce livre-ci, this book (here), 
ces livres-ci, these books, 



ce livre-la, that book (there), 
ces livres-la, those books. 



§ 21. — Possessive Adjectives. 

(1.) The possessive adjectives, which are always joined -to a noun, 
relate to possession or property; they are: 

Singular. Plural 

Masculine. Feminine. for both genders. 

ma, mes, my. 

ta, tes, thy. 

ea, ses, his, her, its. 

notre, nos, our. 

votre, vos, your. 

leur, leurs, their. 

(2.) In French, these adjectives take the gender and number of 
the object possessed, and not, as in English, those of the possessor* 

Masc. sing. Fern. sing. PI. both genders. 

mon frere, my brother, ma soeur, my sister, mes cousins, my cousins. 
ton livre, thy book, ta plume, thy pen, tes maisons, thy houses. 

son papier, his or her sa table, his or her ta- ses habits, his or her 

paper. ble. clothes. 

notre cheval, our horse, notre vache, our cow, nos prairies, our meadows. 
votre lit, your bed, votre chaise, your chair, vos crayons, your pencils. 

leur foin, their hay, leur paille, their straw, leurs fermes, their farms. 



mon, 

ton, 

son, 

notre, 

votre, 

leur. 



Sobri6te dans toute chose, 
Mon ami, c'est l'art de jouir. 

Du Tremblay. 

Ma main de quelque fleur es- 
qnisse la peinture. Castel. 

Mes sens sont glaces d'effroi. 

J. B. Rousseau. 

De son propre artifice on est sou- 
vent victime. 

Colin d'Harleville. 

A sa vocation chaque etre doit 
repondre. Fr. de Neufchateau. 

II faut de ses amis enrlurer quel- 
que chose. Moliere. 
Notre vie est une maison, 
Y mettre le feu c'est folie. 

KlVKUNAIS. 



Sobriety in all things, is, my 
friend, the true enjoyment. 

My hand sketches the picture oj 
some flower. 

My senses are frozen with fear. 

One is often the victim of his own 
artifice. 

Every being should fulfil his vo- 
cation. 

We must bear something from our 
friends. 

Our life is a house; to set it on 
fire is folly. 



300 



HUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 22. 



Yos maOles se rompront sous la I Tour meshes will break under tht 
clinrye pe=p.nte. CasTO. hear;/ burden. 

fleure suimmt i n will follow my slept 

t6cvi ant rca vuo. (Thk same.) | andpletue my tight. 

(3.) The adjectives mon, my; ton, thy; bob, his or her, are used m. 

linine words commencing with a vowel 

or an h mute, in order to prevent the meeting of two vowels, or of a 

Vowel «.nd an h mute; thus we say: 

ruon dper, my sword, and never ma e'pce. 

. i |K>use. 

mee, hi) arm;/, bv.t Ml i r s.i ariuee. 

Ccn est (kit, »ion hcurc est venue. I All is over, my hour is evme. 
BODJUB. 

(4.) The po9scsaivo adjectives must be repeated before evert 
noun: 

Mon fn're. ma 8o?ur et mes cou- ! My brother, sister, and cousin* art 
tjhm sont 4 I'.\ri.~. I a* Paris. 

.:. .\!>.inCTTVES. 

(1.) T. of numeral adjectives: the cardinal and 

rial. 

Una! numlu ; iply tho number or quantity, 

without 

(3.) The ordinal munben marl. I r rank which persons 

and things oecopy: • Ac. 

the cardinal and 
ordinal inimi 



teJ Xumbers. 




(5.) Orlinal Xumbrr*. 


xxn./eininint une, 


OHf. 


uint 


re, first 






■ 


d,/.secondo, 2d. 


' 








quntrc, 


4 


quatrii 


4 th. 




6 




Kfc, 


•IT, 


8 




Cth. 


halt, 


7 




7 th. 


8 




lib 


■ 


9 




90s, 


d.r, 






loth, 




11 




11th. 




IS 




12th. 


' 






1 8th. 




11 




14th. 




15 




16th. 








Ifth, 




n 


'•mo, 


17th, 


dix-hmt. 


18 


diz-buil 


18th. 


ilix iieuf, 


1 1 




Ifth, 








■Otk 


Tinjft-et-un, 


21 


.i nit me, 


tlst 



1CUMERAL ADJECTIVES. — § 28. 



301 



Cardinal Numhei s. 


Ordinal Numltrt. 


vingt-deux, &c, 


22 


vingt:deuxieme, <&c, 


22d. 


trente, 


SO 


trentieme, 


30th. 


trente-et un, &c, 


31 


trente-et-unieme, 


31st. 


trente-de ux, 


32 


trente-deuxidme, 


32d. 


quaraate, 


40 


quarantieme, 


40th. 


quarante-et-un, As, 


41 


quarante-et-unienae, 


41st. 


quarante-deux, 


42 


quarante-deuxieme, 


42d. 


cinquante, 


50 


chiquantieme, 


50th. 


cinquante-et-un, 


51 


cinquante-e t-unieme, 


51st. 


cinquantc-deux, 


52 


cinquante-deuxienie, 


52d. 


soixante, 


60 


soixan tieme, 


60th. 


Boixante-et-un, 


61 


soixante-et-unieme, 


61st. 


soixante-deux, <fec. 


62 


soixante-deuxieme, 


62d. 


soixante-dix, 


70 


soixante-dixieme, 


70th. 


Boixaate-onze, 


71 


soixan te-onzieme, 


71st. 


eoixante-douze, 


72 


soixante-douzieme, 


72d. 


Boixante-treize, 


73 


soixante-treizieme, 


73d. 


Boixante-quatorzc, 


74 


soixante-quatorzieme, 


74th. 


Boixante-quinze, 


75 


soixante-quinzieme, 


75th. 


soixante-seize, 


76 


soixante-seizieme, 


76th. 


soixante-dix-sept, 


77 


soixante-dix-septieme, 


77th. 


soixante-dix-huit, 


78 


soixante-dix-huitieme, 


78th. 


soixan te-dix-neuf, 


79 


soixante-dix-neuvieme, 


79th. 


quatie-vingta, 


80 


quatre-vingtienie, 


80th. 


quatre-vingt-un, 


81 


quatre-vingt-unieme, 


81st. 


quatre-vingt-deux. 


82 


quatre-viugt-deuxieme, 


82d. 


quatre-vingt-dix, 


90 


quatre-vingt-dixieme, 


90th. 


quatre-vingt-onze 


91 


quatre-vingt-onzieme, 


91st. 


quatre-vingt-douzc, 


&C, 92 


quatre-vingt-douzieme, 


92d. 


cent, 


100 


centicme, 


100th. 


cent-un, 


101 


cent-unieme,. 


101st. 


deux-cents, 


200 


deux-centieme, 


200th. 


deux-cent-un, 


201 


deux-cent-unieme, 


201st. 


trois-cents, 


300 


trois-centieme, 


300th. 


trois-cent-un, 


301 


trois-cent-unieme, 


301st. 


mille, 


1000 


millieme, 


1000th. 


deux-mille, 


2000 


deux-millieme, 


2000th. 


deux-mille-cinquante, 2050 


deux-mille-cbquantieme, 


2050th. 


un million, 


1,000000 


millionieme, 1,000000th. 


§ 23. — Variations of the Cardinal Numbers. 


(1.) The following cardinal numbers vary: 




(2.) Un, one, a or 


aji, takes the gender of t" le noun to which it i 


prefixed : 






un 


ivre, a book ; une feuille, a leaf. 




When used substantively, un takes, at times, the form of tht 


plural. 






Masc. Lea uns et les autres, These and those, 




Fern. Les unes et 


les autres, (The ones and the others). 


(3.) Vingl and cent, when multiplied by one number, and not fol- 


lowed by another, take the form of the plural : 




quatre-vm^s, 


eighty; 


■six tents, six hvndretL 



302 JTCMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 21. 



I/boiome vit quairevingts an?, 
le cliien nun vit que lix. ovnos. 
On m'apn >::a chci in<>i, duuze 
J. J. 1. 



Mon Lies eighty years, the dog 
on/;/ tin. 

They brought me, at my house, 
ticeli'e hundred francs. 



(4.) Vingt and . ait, however, when multiplied by one number, and 
. by another, <>r, it" not followed by a number, used to indi- 
te the form of the plural. 

quatre i /n^-cinq h o mmea, eighty-five men. 

.x hommea, tdrsd and two men. 



Cb;u 

.iiit, lc jour d 

V.iLTAIUL. 



Char' in*-/ 'limed em- 

f the West, Christmas-day, 
in the year sight hundred. 



Mille — (thousand.) I of the year, reckoned from 

the coiui: tan era to the year two thousand 

of the ■ !, mil. 

L'an mil huit cent cinquanto, The >rar one thousand eight kun- 

I f ' r ' ■ 

• which have preceded our era, and 
deh will follow our present thousand, we write the full form, 
mille. 

■ 



The first irruption of the (.'mils 

I of l'\r- 

OKin, ab-ut the year of the world 



(7.) Million, billion take the plural form. 

II TO C VKDINAL 

i.na. 

(1.) In French, in computing from twenty to thirty, thirty to forty 
- number unM always pn In. We mat 

not aay, as often in Bngliah, one and twenty, but always vingt-et-un, 
• 

nly used Wforo 
tin: thus, we say vingt-et-un, tvrtnty (and; one, and simply vinyt-deUA, 
twenty-!' 

- in Eugliflfl tne words hun- 
dred and ikoutand; it mual i red in Prencn. We aay: 
mille hommea, on' thousand ma 

cci.t : one hu.iirrd francs. 

(4) When the words cent and mille nre Uaed Bubotaotivelj 

the name l by the hoi 

!. in num >er or in weight, the word un may be placed before 
theni ; the name of the object being preceded by the prcpow- 

tion it : 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. — § 25. 303 

Un cent, un mille (millier) de briques, 
One hundred, one thousand (of) bricks. 
Un cent (un quintal) de sucre, 
One hundred (weight) of sugar. 
(5.) The words septante, seventy; octante, eighty; and nonante, 
finely, are now nearly obsolete, being used only in a few provinces 
of France. They are, as may be seen in the preceding table, replaced 
by awkward expressions soixante-dix, sixty-ten ; quatre-vingts, four- 
twenties (four score) ; quatre-vingl-dix, four-score-ten, &c. 

(6.) Before the words onze, eleven, and onzieme, eleventh, the arti- 
cle is not elided. We say le onze, le onzieme, la onzieme. In pro- 
nunciation, the s of the plural article les is silent when this artieJe pre- 
cedes onze or onzieme. 

§ 25. — Observations on the Ordinal Numbers. 
(1.) It will be seen that the ordinal numbers, with the exception of 
premier and second, are formed from the cardinal — 

1. By the change off into vieme in neuf; 

2. By the change of e into vieme in those ending with that vowel ; 

3. By the addition of vieme in those ending with a consonant : 

4. Cinq requires uieme to make cinquieme, fifth. 

(2.) All ordinal adjectives may take the form of the plural. 
(3.) Premier and second alone vary for the feminine, and make 
premiere, seconde, &c. 

(4.) Unieme (first) is only used in composition with vingt, trente, &c. 
(5.) Second, deuxieme, (second) — Deuxieme supposes a series, a con- 
tinuation ; second merely indicates the order : 

1st. We may say of a work which has four or more volumes : 
J'ai le deuxieme (or le second) to- I / have the second volume of that 
lume de cet ouvrage. | work. 

2d. In speaking of a work which has only two volumes, we should say • 
J*ai le second (not le deuxieme) I I have the second volume of Bes- 
rolume du dictionnaire de Bescher- cherclle's dictionary. 
elle. I 

3d. Under the ordinal numbers may be placed the following words, 
vhick are often used substantively : 

Trentenaire, thirty, of thirty years' duration ; 

Quarantenaire, forty, of forty " " 

Cinquantenaire, fifty years old, of fifty " 

Sexagenaire, sexagenarian, of sixty " " 

Septuagenaire, septuagenarian, of seventy " " 

Octogenaire, octogenarian, of eighty " " 

Nonagenaire, nonogenarian, of ninety " " 

Centenaire, centenarian, of one hundred 

4th. Trentenaire and quarantenaire are law terms : 
Possession trentenaire, quar ante- ] Thirty, forty -years' posieition. 



304 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 8 26, j.1. 



5th. Of the others, sexagenairc, scptuagenaire, and octogenairo only «r« 
in frequent use : 

Un octog&iaire plantait, Aw A man eight jy years oid u is plant 

La 1'oxTAixr. I inp trees. 

(1.) In speaking of the days of the month, the French use the car- 



le Jnix man, 

le £t-*ept aviil. 

L'ouvorture ■ !■•- EtaU g£neraux 
cat lii-u le etng mai, I 

(2.) We must, however, 

lu premier (not fun) juin. 



f/ir second of ,\far(h. 
(he aeeentaenth of April. 
The opening <■/" the $latr*-<irncral 
took place on'thi ffth of May, ITS* 



the first of June. 



(3.) The cardinal DOmben are alao employed in speaking of sove» 

- 



< the Truth. 

tenth. 

■ nth wan thirty-eight 
W tli* 

• the Seventh 

hick he 

had ki\ 



Jlenru the First. 



Louis dix-huit, 
Loun OHM avait tnntr i 

quand il brdne. 

La ii 
gnu pa* la f. . iHum& 

- 
(•t.) \ ■ rer: 

■ ■er, 
(5.) Drux and taaond sre, in this case, Qaed Indifferently ! 

Char ,nd, 

fJB.)Il ! C.nnanv, and of the Pop* 

Sixtus the Fiflli, t!.. r.l quint (nil 

■ ■■/uitit, Charles the Fifth. 

BisU 
all, in order to render n " v mc ob- 

•ervatiuns on noun.s rin<l adverba of number. 

■ 
(1.) The nnmera] nouns in u->o with the French arc: 



unit*. 


unit ; 


, I'.iiro, 






trio. •'■ 


ittaaine, 




















dooaaino, 






fifteen,/ 


▼ .. '1.-LW. 


sere, ;.. 





thirty; 


qnaraal 


ore ; 


cmqaant 
















' 


tared ; 




Hand; 


licm, 


lvr-> (!. 


1 mi i . 


a myriad ; 


1 iiiiliiun. 


m milUa$h 



IKDBFIHITE ADJECTIVES. — § 28, 29, 30. 



303 



(2.) The termination aine signifies nearly, and when added to words 
©f number i3 equivalent to the English some, in cases like the follow- 
ing : I have some twenty hooks, i. e. about twenty books. J'ai une 
vingtaine de livres. 



§ 28. — Fractional Numerals. 



un quart, 
deux quarts, 
trois quarts, 
le tiers, 
deux tiers, 
la moi tie, 



one quarter ; 
two quarters; 
three quarters ; 
the third; 
two thirds; 
the half; 



un cinqaidme, 
deux cinquifcmes, 
un sixifcme, etc., 
un dixieme, etc., 
un centifcme, 
un millieme, 



one fifth ; 
two fifths; 
one sixth, etc. ; 
one tenth, etc. ; 
one hundredth ; 
one thousandth. 



(1.) It will be seen that, with the exception of tiers, quart and moi- 
tie, these numbers take the form of the ordinal numerals. They may, 
therefore, take the form of the plural when necessary. 

(2.) The word demi, when used adjectively and preceding the noun, 
is invariable : 

tine cfoni'-heure f., half an hoar; 

une demi-anne f., half an ell. 

(3.) When coming after the noun to denote an additional half, it 
agrees in gender with the noun : 

une heure et demie, one hour and a half; 

une aune et demie, one ell and a half. 

(4.) When used substantively, demi may take the form of the plural: 
Cette horloge sonne les heures et I This clock strikes the hours and 
lea demies. | the half hours. 



(1.) Premifcrement, 



Deuxiernement, 

Secondement, 

Troisiemcinent, 



§ 29. — Ordinal Adverts. 



first ; 

in the first 

place ; 



Quatriomcmcnt, 

Cinquiemement, 

Sixieraemcnt, 

Scptiemenient, 

Dixiemement, 



fourthly ; 
fifthly; 
sixthly ; 
seventhly; 
tenthly. 



secondly ; 
thirdly ; 

(2.) These, like adverbs of manner, are formed by the addition of 
ment to the feminine form of the adjective 



§ 30. — Indefinite Adjectives. 
(1.) The indefinite adjectives are used when any thing is to be 
represented or referred to in a general or indefinite manner. They 
are, — 

what : 



aucun, not any, not one, 

cbaque, every, each; 

memo, same; 

nul, no ; 

plusieurs, several; 



quel, 
quelconque, 
quelque, 
teL 

tout, 



whatever ; 
some; 
such; 
all 



306 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE S. § 30. 



(J) Auct;s is crcnerally followed by ■ noun, with which it must 
agree. It is followed by M when it comes before ;i verb: 

ctucun honinie, no nan ; aucune feinine, no \coman. 



N chemin do Bean ne conduit 

•i:v. Li Poxtaimk 

I I f.'ullt 



Xojloicery path leads to glory 
All tkote vl,o have no virtue ar* 



They can bear ,w leyiti,,, 
minion, tet ho bounds to'tlieir crimes. 



MKMMTertu L\ RooasvouoAULa J •. 
(3.) 1mm is by the Preach authors sometimes used in the plural 
Trir nucun eni- 

ElUCUIICf 
ornc* a law 

I I and RHl should be put in the plural only before such words 
BMd in the alllgelar, or have in fa lingular ft dilVerent 
iion. 

BAfljOT h ■ •!' . and Is used only la tho atnjwHn 

It always preeedea the noun, and cannot be separated from it by aa 

■ prepo-ition. ever be aaod without i 

noun: 

its pleasures every 
Hat ■ 

( 5 of mm . in 

. 
::.n be rendered by the word 
■mm* m an ke the form of the plural, but 

does i. . i, r : 

vertli; v.-rtu vihne ; 

it i- ue. 

1 ' ' B'oOt ni The pmplt and the qreat ha, , 

* c **" i/asai aaraWaaaw 

Vaotbbaboi i v 

U ///«• t.f- 7.i/,/r* (| in 

' tks 
Puree 

(fi.) It is at times difficult todistin , f rom 

mime an adverb, which ia invariable. ■ (3.)] 

i . re< i In gendet 
umber with tl ; , ii qualifies. Llk< 

i 
■ 

- Pfbj If" Imipi.-; .1 '■■ iwpwns; hemit 

■ ■■ fuit. RaOUCU , it, it asjoitUkim. 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. § 30. 



307 



(8.) Nul is sometimes used alo.ie, in the sense of no one: 

Nul n'est content de sa fortune, | No one is pleased with his fortune, 
ni mecontent ile son esprit. | nor displeased with his own wit. 

Mme. Deshoulieres. 

(9.) Plusieurs is, of course, always in the plural. It does not 
vary its form : 



T ! faut bien qu'il y ait plusieurs 
"aisons d'ennui, quand tout le monde 
«?st d'accord pour bailler. Florian. 



Tliere must necessarily be several 
reasons for ennui, when all agree in 
yawning. 



(10.) Quel takes the gender and number of the noun to which it 
I -dates. It is sometimes immediately followed by its noun, from 
which it may be separated by one or several words : 

What a delightful picture the 



Quel tableau ravlssant presentent 
les campagnes I Delille. 

Quelle invisible force a sounds 
I'univers ? L. Racine. 

Quels sons harmonieux, quels efforts 

ravissants, 
De la reconnaissance egalent les 

accents ? 



country offer' ! 

What invisible hand lias con- 
quered the universe? 

What harmonious sounds, what 
ravishing strains, equal the voice of 
gratitude i 



(11.) Quelconque is always placed after the noun, and varies only 
for the plural : 



Toutes les jouissances sont pre- 
Cedees d'un travail quelconque. 

Mme. Campan. 

Deux points quelconques etant 
doanes The Academy. 

(12.) Quelque in the sense of. 
agrees in number with the noun: 

II y a du merite sans elevation, 
mais il n'y a point d'elevation sans 
quelque merite. La Rochefoucauld. 
Quelques vains lauriers que pro- 

mette la guerre, 
On peut etre heros sans ravager la 

terre. Boileau. 



All enjoyments are preceded by 
some sort of exertion. 

Two points of some kind being 
given 

me (a certain numher), or whatever, 

There is merit without elevation, 
but there is no elevation without some 
merit. 

Whatever vain laurels war may 
promise, one may be a hero without 
ravaging the earth. 



(13.) Quelque having the sense of about or some or however, is in- 
variable : 



Quel age avez-vous ? Vous avez 
bon visage ! Eh ! quelque soixante 
ans. Racine, les Plaideurs. 

Alexandre perdit quelque trois 
cents Luiiimes, quaud il vainquit 
I'orus. D'Ablaxcourt. 

Quelque mediants que soient les 
homines, ils n'oseraient paraitre 
ennemis de la vertu. 

La Rochefoucauld. 



How old are you ? You look well. 
Oh ! some sixty years. 

Alexander lost some three hundred 
men when he vanquished J-'orus. 

However' wicked men may be, they 
do not dire to appear ennnies of 

virtue. 



S08 THE PRO.VOCK.- § 31, 32. 

(14.) Tel makes in the feminine telle; in the plural m.wuliro, 
le!s ; in tlio plural feminine, telle*. It agrees with the noun which it 
qualities: 

td livre, man book ; telle httre, mdl let!>r ; 

tel* livrcs, such books', ttuh lifters. 

(15.) TOOT meaning every, is of course always in the singular, 
but varies for the feminine: 



Tout ritoyen doil Mrvir km pays; 

'.re ile 
Bon zele. \.\ Ifom, 

Kn toute chose, il faut BOOtideter 

U tia .funk. 



Aery citizen should serve his 
country ; the toldUf with his blood, 
the prittt irith his zeal. 

In every tiling tee must consider 
the end. 



(16.) Tou' % in the - . . greea in gender and number with 

in to which i: re!al 
tout Pargeoij '»'.' Urn m ■ la tofla, a'l the cloth. 

11 <'tnit BBHiaaana d« t<ots ces ! Jfr irai n!><»r all thotr rain ol>ject4 
' I i-!t irhirh form al! the ilcsircs and all tk* 

I CM. 

! if leant hit 

97 (5). 

(1.) The pronoun, In French, aa i;i other I k a word 

i rder t<> prevent Ita tuo frequent 

the parta which each 
j part ia called | 

(3.) There arc three pen '■ Or that which speaks; the 

r thai apokan o£ 

(3.) T 

The p i The demonstrative ; 

TllC J HI.1..C • 

The iu !i unite. 

■ . 
(1.) Tl pronouna are so called because they seem to 

lly than the other pronouna. 
DOOna are : 





inative 


Form. 


Relative 


i'orwi. 




■-. \r. 


Plural. 




rVarat 


1 

3 


je, ' tl 

t u, ' 
I il. he, it, m. 

1 cUe, she, it, L ; 


cllct, t tliey. 


me, i 
[him 


HrMraafj 

N, "temulves. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS,— § S3. 809 

(2.) Direct regimen, or Accusative. 
When pi iced before the verb. When placed after a verb. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

1. mo, vie, nous, its; moi, me ; nous, us; 

2. te, thee ; vous, you ; toi, thee ; vous, you ; 

(le, him.it.ra.;, .-, (both le, him, it, m. ; . , ; m \ both. 
3 '|la, her, iil-; les ' ihem '\ gend. la, her, it, I ; le3 ' < /tew ' } gender*. 

(3.) Indirect regimen, or Dative. 

When placed before the verb. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. me, tome; nous, to us ; 

2. te, <o thee ; vous, to vow ; 



£o /ter; 
to it; 



leur, <o </*«»; 
lui « < t0 her >- (both genders). 



When placed after the verb. 

Singular. Plurals 

tooi, a moi, to me ; nous, a nous, to us , 

toi, a toi, to thee ; vous, a vous, to you ; 

(4.) Indirect regimen ; Genitive and Ablative. 
Always placed after the verb. 

Singular. Plural. 

de moi, of or from me ; de nous, of or from us; 

de toi, " thee ; de vous, " you ; 

de lui, " him ; d'eux, " them, m. , 

d'elle, " her ; d'elles, " them, i. 

§ 33. — Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. 

(1.) The French, as well as the English, use the second person 
plural for the second person singular, in addressing one person. 

(2.) The second person, however, is used, as in English, in address- 
ing the Supreme Being: 

Grand Pieu! tes jugements sont I Great God! thy judgments are 
remplis d'6quite. Des Bahreaux. | full of equity. 

(3.) It is also used in poetry, or to give more energy to the diction. 

my sovereign king ! 
Here I am, trembling and atom 
before thee. 

(4.) It is used by parents to children, and also among intimate 
friends. 

(5.) The pronoun il is used unipersonally, in the same manner as 
the English pre noun it, 

il pleut, it rains; il gele, it freezes. 

(5.) Observe that the personal pronouns of the third person are 
not need for the indirect regimen to represent inanimate objects, 



O mon souverain roi ! 
Me voici done tremblante et seule 
devant toi. Racine, Esther. 



310 personal rnoKOrxs. — § 83. 

The relative pronouns E*, of or from il [) 39 (17)], T, to it [) 39 (18)] 
are Used instead of the personal pronouns. Thus, in speaking of u 
house, we ilo n<>t say, Je tui ajouterai une aile, / trill add a wing U- 
U. We inn-' 

J'v iijouterai une aile ; / trill add a wing to it {thereto). 

In spe&king Of SO author, we may say : 

Que peosearsoaa de lui i Who' do you think of himf 

But in Speaking of hi-* iOOk, we should say : 

What do >iou think of it (th'rtnf)! 
(6.) Tin- word mime, plural mimes, may be u-eil after the pronoun 

le r>i lui -.it- the kin : / himself 

l.i r. : the q 

!• - : net, the ),rinr,s thniiselvrs. 

UN prinOSSSSS *Ht* ■ the yrincettet themselves. 

(7 The prOnOUM una. toi, lui, ru.r, are often used after the verb, 

greater feme to ■ nominative pronoun of the mum person, 

where the emphasis is placed on the nominative in 

English, or where the Auxiliary do is used. 

y le d "i, or / do *a;i so. 

lit, l*i, he tayy M, or JM dors SSJf *o. 

(8.) T. . »ioi, tm, /hi, r;/.r, are BMJ instead of tho 

nominati\e pr. \-\\ pronouns, J, thou, 

he, they, when r | I , rl> in an 

\heii they are used by ' li.i\r a \erb under- 
stood after then : 

vin» M.>L Who arrived thit morning f I. 

lie and I. >'■•« tud thei/. 
VotU lui. r.ie letter than he. 

Tom ri id at well a* I. 

me pronouns are need in exclamationo, and in thone 
tab pronouns, /. 1 1 d by tno 

relative pronoon H 

Eur allsr I Lob hi ' ndont 

Is.. ■ OM *irk . . . 

i'niiT. lie tr/„, it an officer. 

Kn fits. The,/ irhn are learned 

I ; it {• he. 
It il the,/. 

r#n61opc, w» f e rn s, at mc* q«J P sndapt kit wife, and I n\o mm 
*aw »nti hi*, boos svona perdu 1 i .,.<• j 

f>nvnce de le rSToir. 

flu. ne pronouns sad of the 

natives,/*! tUf dui, when the verb km several aubjocts vnfal ore all 



Your father tnd I were a long 
time enemies. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. — § 34. 31] 

pronouns, or partly nouns and partly pronouns. The vert may then 
be immediately preceded by a pronoun in the plural, representing in 
one word all the preceding subjects. 

Votre pfcre et moi, nous avons 
6te longtemps ennemis l'un de 
l'autre. Fenelon. 

Rica et moi sommes peut-etre les Rica and I are, perhaps, tJie first. 
premiers. Montesquieu. 

(11.) The recapitulating pronoun and the verb sometimes come 
tirst in the sentence. 

Nous avons, vous et moi, besoin I You and I have need of tolerance. 
de tolerance. Voltaire. 

(12.) The reflective pronoun se, himself, &c, is used for botli 
genders, and for both numbers; for persons and for things; and 
always accompanies a verb. 

Les yeux de l'arnitie se trompent I The eyes of friendship are seldom 
rarement. Voltaire. | deceiued {deceive themselves). 

(13.) The same pronoun has sometimes a reciprocal and sometimes 
a reflective meaning, according to the context : 

ils se flattent, they flatter themselves. 

ils se flattent, they flatter one another, each oilier. 

(14.) Soi, himself, itself, &c, is of both genders and numbers, 
and is applied to persons and things. It is used in general and inde- 
terminate sentences; having commonly an indefinite pronoun for the 
nominative : 

We have often need of one more 
humble than ourselves. 

It is always in our power to act 
honorably. 



On a souvent besoin d'un plus 
petit que soi. La Fontaine. 

II depend toujours de soi d'agir 
honorablement. Girault-Duvivier. 

Etre trop me*content de soi est 
une faiblesse. Mme. de Sable. 



To be too much displeased with 
one's self is a weakness. 

For additional rules on the personal pronouns, see Syntax, $ 98, 
and following. 

§ 34. — Possessive Pronouns. 

(1.) The possessive pronouns, which are formed from the personal 
pronoui:&, represent, in the radical part, the possessor, while in termina- 
tion they always agree with the thing possessed. Some relate to one 
person, some to several. 

(2.) POSSESSIVES RELATING TO ONE PERSON : 
The object possessed being in the — 
Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. 

1. le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, mine; 

2. le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine; 

8. le sien, la siennc, les siens, les siennes, his, hers, iit 



312 



POSSESSIVE PBOK0rK6. § 35. 



(3.) Two or more Persons: 
77i* object possessed being in the— 
Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Frminint. M:s. and Fern 

le n6tre, la rnttrc, lai nOtiee, ours; 

le v6tre, la v«">tro, lcs v6trea, yours; 

le lcur, la leur, le* lcurs, theirs. 

§ U. — l: -tvE Pronouns. 

(1.) It may be Men from the above table that, as before said, the 
termination of the poeooenWe pronoun agrees in gender and numbe* 
with the 



re plume- et el la mienne. 

I t/IIM<\ 

BUI ct lee miennes. 
•- sisters and mine. 

i 'fortunes of other* 

tnut*r$ of the king feel that 
ry, lit* his own, is in na- 

j'iness. 



pttd b nl/ le and mine. 

Vos ! 

I rvthers and mine. 

On voit I.- maox d'autnu, <l\m 

nutri- oil QtH 

leur i: 

dans le Umlu-ur net) 

. Dalj expressed 
: In mercantile correepondenoe; 

/ received yours dated the, dc^ 

in Inoorreei It ehoa 

J'ai race v..tr«- lettll en >lite do, I your letter dated, de. 

(3.) T itely when we 

or intimate friends ; 

: let miens, la r.nir. I 

pit- .i oootentar. I 

Halaonreni .... qni porte ches lee 
tin\s le glaive et lei flambeaux. 

rrimc." del notre*. 



I have my family or friends, th$ 

court, .'.. • leaea 

Wretched is he who carries among 
his fel lo w e itiamt the sicord and th* 

II > mult bear the penalty of th 
crime* of our family or j 

(4.) /. need ebeolntely as the words mint 

and thine in Bngtieh, in the eenee of posaeeaion, ptoyeitF ! 

And mine and thine, t%H> punctilio 

ous brothm. 



Y.\ le mien at U tieu, dens fi>rr« 
pointillcux. I'.'Ii.iai. 

/.<• lien <t !■ 

de unite* lee diTiawm 

rullea. Uulailt Diviviu. 



and thine (mrum and (uurt) 
are the sources of alt divisions and 
ouarrslt. 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. § 30, 37. 



313 



§36.— 


Demonstrative Pronouns. 




Singular. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

celui, celle, 

celui-ci, celle-ci, 
celui la, celle-la, 


Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

{ mat, ceux - celles > _ 

this, ceux-ci, celles-ci, 
that, ceux-la, celles-la, 
ce. it, they. 


111?' 


Absolute Demonstrative Pronouns. 




ceci, 
cela 


this, ) not used in the 
that, ) plural. 





§ 3*7. — Remarks on the Demonstrative Pronouns. 
(1.) The demonstrative pronouns celui, celle, &c, assume the gen- 
der and number of the nouns which they represent : 



Je ne connais d'avarice permise 
que celle du temps. 

Stanislas Leczinsky. 

Les seules louanges que le coeur 
donne, sont celles que la bonte s'at- 
tire. Massillon. 



Methinks no avarice is allowable 
unless it be that of time. 

The only -praises which the heart 
gives are those tohich goodness de- 
serves. 



(2.) These pronouns are sometimes used absolutely before qui, que 
dont, etc., in the same manner as the English personal pronouns he, 
they, &c, before who, whom, &c. : 



Celui qui rend un service doit 
1'oublier, celui qui le recoit, s'en sou- 
venir. Barthelemy. 

Aimer ceux qui vous haissent ceux 

r" vous persecutent, c'est la charite 
chretien, c'est l'esprit de la reli- 
gion. BOURDALOUE. 



He who renders a service should 
forget it ; he who receives it sltould 
remember it. 

To love those who hate you, those 
who persecute you, is the charity of 
the Christian ; it is the spirit of re- 
ligion. 



(3.) Celui-ci, celle-ci, etc. ; celui-la, celle-la, are used when it is de- 
sirable to denote the comparative proximity or remoteness expressed 
tn English by the words this and that : 

celui-ci, i'iis one. celui-la, that one. 

(4.) Celui-ci, celui-la, etc., are often used to express contrast or 
comparison. They are then equivalent to the English expressions 
the former, the latter ; this one, that one : 

Un magistrat integre et un brave 
ofiicier, sont eeralement estimables : 



celui-la fait la guerre aux ennemis 
domestiques, celui-ci nous protege 
contre les ennemis exteYieurs. 

GlRAULT-DuVXVIER. 

Tel est l'avantage ordinaire 
Qu'ont sur la beaute" les talent3 : 
Ceux-ci plaisent dans tous les temps ; 
(JtUe-ld n'a qu'un temps pour plaire. 

VOLTAIRE. 



An upright magistrate and a brave 
officer are equally estimable: the 
former makes war against domestic 
enemies, the latter protects usagaintt 
foreign enemies. 

Such is the ordinary advantage 
which talents possess over beauty: 
the former phase at all times ; th» 
latter has but one time to pleant. 



314 RELATIVE I'RONOCNS. £ 38, 39. 

(5.) Oct, ccla, have no plural, ami are u^ed only of things. They 

do not refer to a w on! expressed before, but serve to point out objects: 

prenez c».-i, take thi*. donnez-moi eela, en seal that. 

J'ai deja (lit cc qu'il faut tVire, 1 have already said vfiat should b* 

■Mad cu eiif:uit veut avoir fri it done tcheii a child trill have '.hit and 

tela. J. J. 'hat. 

(6.) O, a pronoun, must n<>t bo confounded with the demonstra- 
tive cc. The pn<n>>un OS is often used without an antece- 
dent, as the nominatr. rb i:rc in the same manner M the 
pronoun ii ■ 

moi. It k I. roe*, •'/ it you. 

. um> flamroc | // is n-> h ngm the tfm 
unteorthi/ flame. 

Um; II b fA« son and 
rival d'Achille. tt. i the rival of Achillet. 

For particular rules on this pronoun. 

§ 38. — BfJ 

(J.) The relative pronouns are so named on account of the inti- 
itkm whieh they have to a noun or pronoun whieh precedes, 
and of whi.-h :' Idee. The nOOJ) or pronoun so pteeOoV 

inj,' the n latrre aroooen la celled the antecedent 

T.\n: I Of Tiir Kri tiff] 1 

qui, *Jk/», ■Hal / '■"*' ,n,B 

que,«*<" .n»A«ii;V ^'alfcX? 

wAirA ; ) 

a qui, to vhrrm ; (regime indirect, <l.itire.) 
', «•*©, wAtVA ; cmnp«*od of the article and quel 
Sinrrular. I'!"- 

MttmmMm. »•.».»«. Ja*ava*k» Mate** 

Irqucl, taquclle. Ic«pjcl\ ! i?t<\ trhich ; 

•luipiel, de laqnelle, ■ !■ f,fnm vhich ; 

auquel, u la •. to which. 

f them, etc 

■ 

'.AUKS ON Till KlI.ATIVK PkoNOUKS. 

1 1 ; Qfi, aflfc Ot nominative. It \s 

o«rd for both penders and DUnbl r M and for thing*, (See 

(9.) When u«e.l for ttttnge, qui eenuttt be preceded bye 

tion. Its use, in thi-' the nominative. 

(3.) It is used relatively and aboo**«al?. 
(4.) It is used relatively when it bee an antecedent cxr 



RELATIVE PRONOUN! 



39. 



315 



Le piainier qui fut roi, fut un 
pere adore. Aubeet. 

L'amour avidement croit tout ce 
qui le flatte. Racine. 



The firs! who became king, was an 
adored father. 

Love believes eagerly all that fiat' 
ters it. 



(5.) It is used absolutely when it has no antecedent expressed. 
It then offers to the mind a vague and indeterminate idea. It is ren- 
dered in English by he who, she who, they who. 

Who (he who) wishes to speak on 



Qui veut parler sur tout, souvent 
parle au hasard. Andeieux. 

Lache, qui veut mourir, courageux 
qui peut vivre. Racine, Jun. 

Qui ne fait des keureux,n'est 
pas digne de Ictre. 



every subject, speaks often at random. 
He who wishes to die is a coward; 

he who can support life has courage. 
He who does not render other* 

happy is not worthy to be so. 

(6.) Qui is also used absolutely when it is interrogative. It may 
then be nominatif or regime : 

. qui parle ? who speaks ? qui voyez-vous ? whom do you see ? 

(7.) Que, whom, what, which, stands generally for the regime direct 
This pronoun is used for persons and things. It is of both genders 
and numbers : 

les lettres que j'ai, 

les hommes que j'ai vus, 

(8.) It is relative when it has an antecedent : 

Glory lends a charm to the horrors 



the letters which I have, 
the men whom I have seen. 



La gloire pr6te un charme aux 
horreurs ^w'on affronte. 

Delavigne. 

Des lois que nous suivons, la pre- 
miere est 1'honneur. Voltaiee. 



which we face. 

Of the laws which we follow, the 
first is honor. 



(9.) It is absolute when it has no antecedent, and signifies quelle 
chose ? what thing 1 quoi ? what ? 



que voulez-vous ? 
que dit-on? 



what will you (have) ? 
what do people say ? 



It may 



(10.) Quoi, what, is invariable, and said only of things. 
be used absolutely and relatively : 

j'ignore ce a quoi il pense, I am ignorant of what he thinks. 

In the above sentence it is relative, being preceded by its ante- 
eedent ce. 

(11.) Quoi, when absolute, means quelle chose ? what thing? and is 
used mostly in interrogative and doubtful sentences : 

II y a dans cette affaire je ne sais I There is in that affair I know not 
quoi, que je n'entends pas. what, which I do not understand. 



L'academie. 
H y avait je ne sais quoi dans ses 
yeux per cants, qui me faisait peur. 
Fenelon. 



There was I know not what in his 
piercing eyes, which inspired me with 
fear. 



316 RELATIVE PRONOUNS.— § 39. 

(12.) Doxt, of whom, of which, whose, is used for Loth genders and 
numbers; fop persona and fur tilings. It is always employed rela- 
tively, and is therefore, always preceded by an antecedent: 

A pleasure of which we are sure 
to repent, can never be a peaceful 

one. 

We mutt pity the file of that un- 
fortunate prince, whose harden* A 
luart has never forgiven. 



On plai-ir </■»/ en est assure' da 

ntirne peut jamais etrs tran- 

quill.'. mux. pi La Valusbx 

II (ant plaindrs Is sort tin prince 
jnfiirtnae, doni Is ooenr endord r.'a 

j.ini;n.-. p.ml-.ime. "■*■■— 



C 13.) 1 ' rable to de qui, of whom, and duqucl, <f which. 

Wln-n, h o wever, the prononn has the sense of from whom, i. e., when 
■ denote ■ transfer, de qui is better: 

I.c lihraire de qui j'ai recu ces I The bookseller from whom I have 
livrcs. / these books. 

(14.) Leqnel, taqnelle, leeqneUes, wh<>, which, should only bo used 
b the nominative, and in the direct regimen, in order to avoid am- 
biguity. They may relate to pereona or things: 

< ". -t mi iiTit dfl la dirins Prori- It is an act of divine Providence, 
denes, fag WSJ attire radmiration <le which (act) attracts t/ie admiration 

tuut le monde. Hi ■(•Ham tin. of tverjf one. 

(15.) h :>;■■'. preeeded by a preposition — that is, duqwi, auquri, dans 
Uquel, &<•., must always !»■ osed for things in the indirect regimen, 

TIM word qui, as has been mentioned above, cannot relate to things 
in the oblique cases: 

That would l>e a curious book in 
which nor a falsehood if- re fntinL 



I'll ! ' li dSMI 

in men- 

Nai • 

Li Seine, dana !■■ lit d 
riennsot as Jeter [Tonne, Is Hams, 



n theoodofwkieA the 

Tonne, the Mowme, and the (hie 

empttj themselves. 



I ..•quel, in all its moditi. 1 absolutely or 

toterrogairvely: 

leqnel \ which onct dnqnel ? of whieh onet 

(S0SMJ voyez-VOUS I whieh one do you see t 

(17.) En, of U, of ikon. This pronoun is of both genders and 
numbers, and relates almost always to animals and things, II is often 
need t"..r the English words, some, any, when employed absolutely, 

..r e\.n when understood. It is alao nsed as an indirect regimen 
in relation to things, and sometimes, hut not often, in relation to 
persons [} 92 (2)], instead of the personal pronouns lui, ellcs, eux, 
[\ 103, Rule 1.] 

>t speak of it. Ten ni, / have some of it. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 40, 41. 



317 



La fortune a son prix : l'imprudent 

en abuse, K 

L'hypocrite en medit, et l'honnfite 

hoinrne en use. Delille. 

Les limites des sciences sont com- 
me l'horizon ; plus on en approche, 
plus elles reculent. Mme. JNecker. 
La vie est un dep6t confie par le 

ciel ; 
}ser en disposer, c'est 6tre crimineL 
Gbesset. 



Fortune has its worth : the im- 
prudent abuses it; the hypocrite 
speaks evil of it, and the worthy 
man uses it. 

The limits of science are like the 
horizon, the more we approach 
(them), the more they recede. 

Life is a trust confided by heaven : 
to dare to dispose of it, is a crime. 



(18.) Y, to it, to them, thereto, of it, &c. This relative pronoun, of 
both genders and numbers, is used instead of a lui, a elle, en lui, &c. 
It is used of things, and also adverbially in the sense of there. 



J'y pense, / think of it. 

J'ai connu le malheur, et j'y sais 
compatir. Guichabd, 

N'y songeons plus, cher Paulin ; plus 

j'y pense, 
Plus je sens chanceler ma cruelle 

Constance. Racinc 

Vous avez peu de Hen ; joignez 
y ma fortune. Doeat. 

En quelque pays que j'aie 6te, j'y 
ai vecu comme si j'eusse dfr y passer 
ma vie. Montesquieu. 



J'y donne mes soins, I devote my 
care to it. 

I have known misfortune, and J 
can sympathize with it. 

Let us think no more of this, dear 
Paulin ; the longer I think of it, the 
more I feel my cruel constancy waver. 



You have but little property ; join 
my fortune to it. 

In whatever country I have been, 
I lived (there) as if I was to spend 
my life in it. 

(19.) Although numerous instances may be found in which French 
authors have used y with regard to persons, these are licenses which 
it is not desirable to imitate. 

§ 40. — Indefinite Pronouns. 

(1.) The indefinite pronouns indicate persons and things witl »ut 
particularizing them : they are — 



autrui, others. 

chacun, every one. 

on, one, people, they. 

personne, no one, nobody. 

quelqu'un, some one, somebody. 



quiconque, 
l'un l'autre, 
l'un et l'autre, 
tel, 
tout. 



whoever. 

one another. 

loth. 

such. 

every thing, \Aol« 



§ 41. — Remarks on the Indefinite Pronouns. 

(1.) Autrui, others. This pronoun is applied only to persons. It 
has no change of form for gender or number, and is used only as an 
indirect regimen. 



L'honnfite homme est discret ; il 
remarque les defauts d! autrui, mais 
il n'en parle jamais. St. Evremond. 

Ne fais point a autrui ce que tu ne 
roudrais pas qu'on te fit. 



The gentleman is discreet ; he ob- 
serves the defects cf others, but never 
alludes to them. 

Do not unto others that which thou 
wouldst noftike to be done unto thee. 



318 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 41. 



(2.; Chacus, every one, each one. When this pronoun is absolute, 
and means err ry one, everybody, it is invariable : 



Common sense is 



no common 
believe* he 



Le sens commun nest pas chose 

commune, 
Chocun pourtant, croit en avoir 
Valaincoubt. 

Ckanm est prostenie dcvant les 
gens heureux. -ithes. 

(3.) When chacun is used relatively it may take the form of the 

feminine: 



thing, though every one 
hat enough of iL 

Every one bows be/ore the for 
tunaie. 



Cluieune de noua (des ferames) se 
pret.ruliut nperieurfl aux;. . 

Movtssqdisd. 



Every one of us (women) thought 
herself superior in beauty to the 
others. 



(4.) Os (one, pc ways in the nominative ; and although 

always construed with a verb in the third person singular, it conveys 
most penerally the idea of plurality. It is commonly need in indefinite 
8enU?i:» 



On dit, people say, they say, it is said. 

DBOffdi ce qu'on 
acquiert .'ana crime. OOUOTUA 



On relit toot RadM : M 
dans Voltaire Delillk. 

On no Burmontc lo riciTqu'en le 
fujant. 1». 



On parle, somebody speaks, <fcc 
W* hu, people) krrp without re- 
morse that tchich toe (one, people) 

aemwra without crime 

i-rciilc, tlmi) read again and 
again all Ka?inr :' we (dr.) select in 

Wi conquer vice only by avoid- 
ing it. 



(5) On, t after the words el, si, on, que, and qui, 

i bj the art;. r euphony: 



That which one understands well, 

raises. 
It is from a king that we derive 
this augunt maxim, that one is only 



Co que ran eonfott Wen, s'ex- 
prime i lain incut. i.rac. 

. ;d rui que Fon tin 

maximc ai: | 
Quej.i: r.m ••l.qn'antant gnat in proportion as he is just 

quo Tom est juste Bo: 

(6.) pF.nsoN.sr, nu one, noooiy, used aa an indefinite pronoun, is 
alw.-ns masculine and singular. When used as nominative to a verb 
expressed, it is followed I 

II nV-t pormmsu qui ■ There it no one who doss not seek 

Be r.ndre heureux.— Ch to render hi 

(•4m to be pitied on 
■«• ^ rr ' Vaivi x.m:, .,.» <jf fog mistakes. 

Notk. — Tho word personne, used as a noun, and meaning a particular 
person, is of the feminine gender. 

(7.) Quelcju'un, Anebody, some one, any one, anybody, used abso- 
lutely, is invariable : 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. §41. 



»19 



quelqu'un c'est s'avouer 

son inferieur. Mlle. de L'Espinasse. 

Quelqu'un a-t-il jamais doute 

ee'rieusement de Vexiatence de Dieu? 

GlRAULT-DuVIVIER. 



To envy any one is confessing one't 
self his inferior. 

Has any one ever had seriou* 
doubts on the existence of God? 



(8.) Quelqu'un, used relatively, changes for gender and number. IS 
has then the sense of some of, some one of: 

Connaissez-vous quelqu'une de ces 
daines quelques-uns de ces mes- 
sieurs ? GlRAULT-DuVIVIER. 



Bo you know any one of thos 
ladies, any of those gentlemen? 



(9.) Quiconque, whoever, whosoever, is generally masculine, and has 
no plural. It is only said of persons : 



Quiconque flatte ses maitres, les 
trahit. Massillon. 

Quiconque est capable de mentir, 
est indigne d'etre compte au nombre 
des homines. Fenelon. 

Quiconque est soupgonneux, invite 
la trahison. Voltaire. 



Whoever flatters his masters be- 
trays them. 

Whoever is capable of falsehood is 
unworthy to be counted among the 
number of men. 

WJioever is suspicious, invites 
treachery. 



(10.) L'un l'autre, one another, each other, the one and the other. 
This pronoun makes in the feminine Tune l'autre, and in the plural 
les uns les aulres, les unes les aulres : 



Tout le monde se confiait Fun a 
l'autre cette confidence. Rulhieres. 
• Tout le peuple suivit Virginie, les 
U7is par curiosite, les autres par con- 
sideration pour Icilius. Vertot. 

II y a deux sortes de ruines ; Vune 
I'ouvrage du temps, V autre l'ouvrage 
des houimes. Chateaubriand. 



Everybody confided one to another 
this communication. 

All the people followed Virginia, 
some through curiosity, some through 
respect for Icilius. 

There are two sorts of ruins ; one 
the work of time, the other the work 
of men. 



(11.) L'un et l'autre, les uns les autres (both). This expression 
may be used of persons and things : 



La Condamine a parcouru Tun et 
V autre hemisphere.* Buffon. 

L'un et l'autre consul suivaient 
ees etendarts. Corneille. 

Sous Vune et l'autre epoque, il 
p6rit un tres grand nombre de ci- 
toyens. Barthelemy. 

lis se rc"unissaient les uns et les 
Rutre3 contre l'ennemi commun. 
Girault-Duvitier. 



La Condamine travelled over both 
hemispheres. 

Both consuls followed his stand- 
ards. 

At both epochs a large number of 
citizens perished. 

They united with one another 
against the common enemy. 



(12.) Tel, telle, feminine, such, many a person, many, is an indefinite 
pronoun in the following and in similar sentences: 



* The noun is in the singular, because the •word 
etood after the word l'un. This rule is observj 
tathors. 



Drditpu' 
\j#by 



■)htre is under- 
le best French 



320 



-S 42. 



Tel ilonnc, a pleinea mains, qui 
n'oblige personne. Cohneille. 

Tel brill c au second rang, qui 
e'eclipse au premier. Vui.t.ui:;:. 

Tel est pris qui crovait prendre. 
La Fontaine. 
. sans aticun at trait pour la 
retraite, Be couaacre au Seigneur par 
pur.' hVrte. Mnptattjoa. 

T'h que ton emit rTiirotfli 
Dana i lent ill' Ih.us 

Uol'K.«Al LT. 



Many a one mag give bojmifulli 
tcil/iout obliging any one. 

Many a person mag shine in tht 
peed in the 



are caught ichilf attempting 
to catch others. 

Man;/ \a nun] for tcJtom retreat 
has no attractions, consecrates fur- 
self to the Lord through mere pride. 
.'■ trhom tr> think use- 
less render us, in our need, valuable 
es. 

(13.) Tel, in connection with Monsieur, Madame, &c, a.s Monsieur 

vn t'l, Madame une .'•:•, Mr.. Mr-. BUch-a-one, it used substantively. 

(14.) Tout) • 'hing. This word, employed absolutely, 

I 



is Invariable. 



A la tenia vertu, mhi *ur quo 

tout ]>r N ! V>' ii a 1 1 u\ 



I L'i I 

Tout D'esl paa Oaumart 

Bon grand genie embraaaall tout. 
Bmh i.r. 

1 _S *«.— VsUfl 



wured that it it with virtus 
alone that every thing prospers. 

one is not Caumartin, 
Bmncn, nor d'^lguesscaH. 

Hi* great gmius embraced every 



pari "f Bpeech which n lotion 

simply indieatea the condition oJ 



(1. 
done 01 
tile Mb 

• r nominative of a verb is the person or thiOg 
doing tin- action, or being in tin- condition expre wed by the verb. It 

replies : 'lis; and (jursl- 

cr qmi I 

I and the 

t. is that which eom- 

i a direct in:: that 

without the aid of any other int< i L Ir answei 

in '/«i.' whom? for | what .' tor thll 

(5.) Tl that which complete* 

ification of ; ; tiate word, nah 

as the prepoail . —a qui I to whom ! ile ipii? 

■.V! t pour qui ! for ■ oi ' 8lc, for : 
' 8 .. fori 

(6.) Verbs, are regular, irregular, or d 1 1 (2). 



VERBS. § 43. 



*^^^ 321 

ilH ^Reflective 



§ 43. — Different Sorts of 

(1.) There are five sorts of verbs: active, pas' 
or pronominal, and unipersonal. 

(2.) The active verb is that which expresses an action performed by 
the subject, and having some person or thing for its object. This ob- 
ject is the direct regimen of the verb. 

(3.) Every French verb after which quelqifun* some one, quelque- 
chose, something, may be placed, is an active verb. Thus, in the fol- 
lowing sentences, proteger, changer, chanter, &c, are active verbs, be- 
cause we may say proteger quelquhm, to protect some ono ; changer 
(uelquechose, to change something : 



Dieu protege l'innocence. — Racine. 
L'habit change lea mceurs. 

Voltaire. 
Les cygnes ne chantent pas leur 
toort. Boston. 



God protects innocence. 
Dress changes the manners. 

Swans do not sing their death. 



(4.) The passive verb is the contrary of the active verb. The active 
verb presents the subject as performing an action immediately directed 
towards an object; whereas the passive verb presents the subject as 
suffering or receiving an action. The passive verb i3 composed of 
the T^St participle of an active verb and the auxiliary etre, to be. 
(See § 54.) 



Nos cainpagnes sont fertilisees par 
la pluie. L'academie. 

II etait guide par la force de son 
genie. Massillon. 

Les petits esprits sont trop blesses 
des petites choses. 

La Rochefoucauld. 



Our Jields are fertilized by the 
rain. 

He was guided by the force of his 
genius. 

Little .minds are too much vexed 
with trifles. 



(5.) The neuter verb marks, like the active verb, an action per 
formed by the subject ; but this action can only reach the object in- 
directly ; that is, by means of a preposition. Hence it is that the neu- 
ter verb never has a direct regimen, and that the words quelqu'un and 
quelquechose cannot be placed after it. A neuter verb can never 
be used in the passive voice. 



Socrate passa le dernier jour de 
sa vie a discourir de l'inimortalite 
de Tame. L'Academie. 

Le feu qui semble eteint, dort 
eouvent souk sa cendre. — Corne^lle. 

Les Plateens citerent les Jijtcode- 
tnoniens a comparative devant les 
Amphyctions. xj^ Gendre. 



Socrates spent the last day of hit 
life in discoursing upon the immor- 
tality of the soul. 

The fire which seems extinct sleeps 
often under its ashes. 

The Plateaus cited the Lacedemo- 
nians to appear before the Ampkye- 
tions. 



(6.) The reflective or pronominal verb is conjugated with two pro- 
14* 



322 

nouns 
aft (8 

Je me 



^^j^^L a atio: 
fl In ■-■■:>■ 

^ w 



CATIONS OF VERBS. § 44, 45. 

erson; je me, tu te, il sc, nous nous, vous vous, Hi 



H ne faut pas sr falter, lcs plus 
pxperimentea <>nt fait dee Grates oa- 
Bo.— 

Lea people* te/Uieiteroni d'aroir 
mi roi qui lnl i 

■ MI.OX. 

11 no fact pas p*»rmettrea Illumine 
de te mipriter 

Bo—ma. 



Vow vow fclicitez, you congratu 
late yotm 

We should not flatter ourselves : the 
h rieneed hare committed cap- 
ital err' 

The nations will congratulate them- 
selves upon having a king who re- 
I MM. 
We thould not allow a man to de 
self entirely. 



! verb can only be need in the third person sin- 
gular: II pleat, U rains; u . »; il tonne, it (Atmofer*. 



]'.>i:r bin jugea lea grand*, il faut 
let approcher. b\obbk 

■ rendre meuleur te pauvrc 

qu*on eoulage. Saint-Lajhikkt. 



To judge properly of the great, it 
is tMceuary to approach them. 

We ehoutd(U is necessary to) im- 
],r->v tfu poor whom we rei: 



• verba called auxiliary, because they 
They axe — avoir, to have; and etre, to be. 

■fj 
w 
(1.) The French verba are divided Into four I or conju- 

■ at of the 
infinitive end* in aa; aa parlerj to speak- .• aimer, 

Id. The too I" which the infinitive 

cn<U in la ; B* i-hi'rir. i .mr. fa punish, A,\ 

il] the verba which, in the infinitive, 
and in on ; an ; ivoir, to be d 

4th The fourth conjugation comprise* all the verba terminating with 
rk in the infinitive ; aa rendre, to rm.i r ; prendre, /■> fa 

e verba are again divided into regular, irregular, and defec- 
tive : 

l.-t. The regular vari jch, in all their teneee, nre conjugated 

lili*' thi :..n tu which they hnlong 

2d The irregular verba arc those which ere not conjugated liko the 

Sd. The defective verb* are those which wont certain tenses or persons 



£ •!.-). — Modi 






(1.) There an i: the indicative, the conditional, 

prrntivr. the subjunctive, the infinitive, and llia^articiplc : 

1st. The indicative, whatever may be the ten*., indii 
in a positive, absolute manner: j'ahand.mne, I abandon ; j'ai abaodonne, 
I hate c.hn~doncd; j'abandonueraJ, I will abandon. 



MODES AND TENSES. § 45. 



323 



2d. The conditional indicates a condition or a supposition : j'abandon- 
nerais si ... . I would abandon if ... . 

3d. The imperative js used to express a command, prayer, or exhorta- 
tion : abandonnez cet enfant, abandon that child. 

4th. The subjunctive is used after propositions expressing doubt, con- 
tingency, or necessity : ii est douteux que je l'abandonne : it is not certain 
that I may abandon him. 

5 tli. The infinitive presents the signification of the verb in an unlimited 
manner : abandonner ses enfants, to abandon one's children. 

6th. The participle', while retaining the power of the verb, at the same 
time partakes of the nature of an adjective : abandonnant ses parents, 
abandoning his relatives; abandonne de ses enfants, abandoned by hi* 
■thildren. i 

(2.) The indicative has eight tenses : 

1st. The presea: : je parle, I speak ; je donne, I give. 

2d. The simultaneous past, or imperfec^: je parlais, I%as speaking. 

3d. The past definite: je parlai, I spoke, I did speak. 

4th. The past indefinite : j'ai parle, I have spoken ; j'ai donne\ Ihave given. 



5th. The past anterior. 
6th. The pluperfect, 
*7th. The future absolute. 
8th. The future anterior, 
or future perfect, 

(3.) The conditional has two tenses : 



j'eus parle, 
j'avais parle", 
je parlerai, 

j'aurai parle", 



1st. The present or future, 
2d. The past, 



je parlerais, 
j'aurais parle, 



/ had spoken. 

I had been speaking. 

I shall, will speak. 

I shall have spoken. 



I should, would speak. 
I should have spoken. 



(4.) The imperative has one tense : 

parle, 

(5.) The subjunctive has four tenses : 

que je paflfe, 

que je parlasse. 

que j'aie parle, 

que j'eusse parle 1 , that Imight have sp jken, 

(6.) The infinitive has two tenses 

1st. The present relative, 
2d. The past, 

(7.) The participle has three tenses 



1st. The present or future. 
2d. The imperfect, 
3d. The paj| indefinite, 
4th. The pluperfect, 



parler, 
avoir parle, 



speak. 



that I may speak. 

that Imight speak. 

that I may have spoken. • 



to speak. 

to have spoken, 



1st. The present relative, 
2d. The past active, 
8d. The past or passive, 



parlant, 
ayant parlS, 



speaking, 
having spoken, 
spoken. 



(8.) Tenses are simple or compound. 

1. Simple, wien they are expressed in a single word: je parle, 1 
tpeak. * 

2. Compound, when they require the assistance of the verb avoir or 
fetre: j'ai parle, Lhave spoken; je suis arrive, lam arrivsJ. 



324 CSS OF THE AUXILIARY VKRBS. § 46. 

g 40. — Use of the Auxiliary Verbs avoir and etre. 
(1.) The auxiliary avoir is used : 

1. In the conjugation of its own compound* ten.>cs : j'ai eu, I havt 
had. 

2. In the conjugation of the compound teases of the verb etre: 

/ have be&u 

3. In the compound tenses of the active verbs : j'ai aimo, / liavc 
. 

1. In the compound tenses of most neuter verbs expressing an 
: : j'..i marche, Hunt walked. [See exceptions to this rule (3) 

below.] 

6. k [a ilao Deed is the conjugation of verbs which are always 
il a phi, it has rawed; il a grele, it has hailed, &.c. 
I | ligation of: 

l. All the tenses of past - aime, I dm I 

■j. Th oompoond tenses of all reflective oj pronominal verbs: jeme 
Mii.^ flatte, / ftioe, - promen6, I have ma 

3. The compound tenses nf the following neuter verba, though tha 
same, 61 1 

to be born ; 
to fail; 
t<> come ; 
to MiM 
to become; 

4. A few udpenona] verbs, which are not alway* bnl occasionally 
such: il loi eat arrive un malhcur, a misfortune has harmed to him. 

(3.) A certain number of in 'iter verbs: SS — 
nccourir, to r<,- t<> rutit ; 

!■• i"iW; 

irt ; 

jrfrir. riek: vicillir, to g ro w oidi 

r. /■■ ,'■■ 

.Ire, to no down ; nn, to duell, 

I Bomettmea i * 

I. They tab <• have in view the action expn 

rbj 

i iire when situation or condition is the principal idea which 

1" x \v, 
H'/fA avoir, riir. 

Kilo a di.-paru MlbttV - quint* 

She disappeared ttiddmlii. Shi 



alhr, 








. 




■ 


■.11; 


vniir. 






panrenir, 




to die ; 


diviiiir, 






■urn. 



USE OF THE AUXILIARY VER] 



-§46. 



325 



La fi&vre a cesse" hier. 
77ie fever ceased yesterday. 

Le barometre a descendu de 
plusieurs degres en peu d'foeures. 

The barometer went down several 
degrees in a few hours. 

II a passe" en Amerique en tel 
temps. 

He went to America at such a time. 

Le trait a parti avec impetuosite. 
L'academie. 

77ie dart went with impetuosity. 

Le sang avail cesse de couler. 
Boiste. 
The blood had ceased to flow. 



La fievre est cesse"e depuis quel- 
que temps. 

It is some time since i'xe fever 
ceased. • 

II est descendu depuis une heure. 

He has been down one hour. 
Les clialeurs sont passees. 

The heat is past. 

Les troupes sont parties depuis 
six mois. L'academie. 

The troops have been gone six 
months. 

Ce grand bruit est cesse. 

Mme. de Setigne. 

That great noise is over (has 
ceased). 



(4.) Rester and demeurer, meaning to dwell, to reside, take the 
auxiliary avoir; when they me^an to remain, to be left, they take elre: 

ETEE. 

Elle donnerait pour vous sa vie, 
le seul bien qui lui soit reste. 

Maemontel. 
She would give, for you, her life, 
the only possession which remains to 
her. 

Deux cents hommes sont de- 
meures sur le champ de bataille. 
L'academie. 

He lived (dweltf two years in the Two hundred men remained on 
tountry. the field of battle. 

(5.) ilchapper, to escape, to pass unnoticed, to be forgotten, takes the 
auxiliary avoir. In the sense of, to say inadvertently, it takes etre. 

AVOIE. • ETEE. 



avoir. 
J'ai reste" plus d'un an en Italie. 
- . . . Mostesquieu. 

I resided more than a year in 
Italy. 

II a demeure" deux ans a la cam- 
L'academte. 



Cette difference ne m'a pas 6chap- 
pe. . Rousseau. 

TJiat difference has not escaped 
me. 

^ J'ai retenu le chant, les vers 
VQLont echappe. Voltaiee. 

/ retained the tune, but the verses 
}>ave escaped my memory. 



Ce mot m'est echappe ; pardoiinez 
ma franchise. Voltaiee. 

That word escaped my lips ; excuse 
my frankness. 

Excusez les fautes qui pourront 
m'etre echapp6es. Boileau. 

Excuse the faults which I may 
have committed inadvertently. 



(6.) Oonvenir, to become, to suit, takes avoir. When it is used in 
the sense of agreeing, or, settling upon a price for an article it takes 
itre. 

Cette maison m'a convenu. Nous som vies convenus du prix. 



That house suited me. 



L'acadbmie. * .^ 
We agreed upon the price. ,\s~*~^jt 



126 



AUXILIARY VER 



$ 47. 



&. 



§ 47. — Paradigms of the Auxiliart Verbs. 

To familiarize the s^jdent with the frequent use made by the 
French, of the indefinite pronoun on [} 41, (4.)j, we have introduced 
It in our conjugation of the verbs. 

(1.) AVOIR, TO //.41'^,-AFFIRMATltELY. 

Ixdicative Mode. 

simple tenses. compound ten8e8. 



/ 








PRESENT. 


PAST 


INDEFINITE. 


J'al, 


/ Am 


J'ai eu. 


I Have had 


Tu as, 


(Im Im 


Tu ft- 1 


thou hast had 


Ha. 


he has 


11 a en. 


hehashad 


On a, 


one has, people hare 


On ft <-u. 


one has had 


ivona, 


ice have 


i...ns cu, 


ire have had 


mm, 


you hair 


Vou ■ i 


t. Mi have had 


Da out, 


1 


lis out en, 


they have nod 




• 


• 




IMPERFECT. ri.UPERFECT. 


I had 


, vas hr.i ■ 1 


J'avais eu, 


lhadhtui 




to hare 




• 


Tn avaU 


thou hadst 


Tu avais eu, 


than hadst had 


11 avait. 


he had 


11 avail ni, 


he had hail 


On avait. 


one had, people had 


t eu, 


one had had 


11 inn!', 


wehad 




, we had had 




■M w 


:•/. eu, 


vou had had 


llfl ava 


theyhad 


ills avaient eu, 


hey had had 

• 


past definite, past 


ANTE«IO«. 


J'cus. 


I had, or did hare 


Ij'cus cu, 


Jhadhad 
Hum hadst had 




thou hadst, etc. 


Tu lu- 


11 eat, 


he had\ 


ll rat'eu, 


he had had 


<>n tut. 


one hail, etc 


On 'lit eu. 


one V 


lmcr 


i/y he! ; 


' 


ire had \a*l 




vou hail 




vou \ad had 


Us eureiit. 


they had, 


lis eurelit ell, 


Ud hat 

m 




FUTURE. FUTURE 


ANTERIOR. 


Taural, 


I shut I or w 


J'anrai cu, / shall, trill \ 


Tu auras, 


th/>u in It have 


Tu auras eu, 


thou shaft hare had 


11 aura, 


he in// hui-f 


11 aura 00, 


he trill hare had 


On aura, 


one mil hair 


On aura ML, 


one will hare had 


l ! rons, 


we shall hare 


N'i.ns urOM r\\ 


will hare had 


Votis aur«?x, 


you will hare 


Vuus mom <u, 


yon will have had 


(la airont, 


they will hare \ 


lis aurout eu, 


then will have had 



auxiliary verbs. § 47. 

Conditional Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tenses. 



327 



J'aurais, 
Tu aurais, 
11 aurait, 
On aurait, 
Nous aurions, 
Vous auriez, 
Us auraient, 



J should have 
thou couldst have 
he would have 
one would have 
we would liave 
you would have 
they would have 



PAST. 

J'aurais eu, . I should have had 
Tu aurais cu, thou wouldst have had 
II aurait eu, lie should have had 

On aurait eu, one should have had 
Nous aurions eu, we slurnld have had 
Vous auriez eu, you slurnld have had 
Us auraient eu, tliey should have had 



Imperative Mode. 



Aie, 

Qu'il ait, 
Qu'on ait, 
Ayons, 
Ayez, 
Qu'ils aient, 



have thou 

let him have 

let one, people, them, have 

let us have 

have ye or you 

let them have 



Subjunctive Mode. 



Que j'aie, that I may~\ 
Que tu aies, that thou maycst I 

Qu'il ait, that he may | « 

Qu'on ait, that one may y § 

Que nous ayons, that we may ^ 

Que vous ayez, that you may \ 

Qu'ils aient, that they may) 



Que j'aie eu, that I may 

Que tu aies eu, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait eu, that he may 

Qu'on ait eu, that one may 

Que nous ayons eu, that we may 
Que vous ayez eu, that you may 
Qu'ils aient eu, that they may 



IMPERFECT. 



Que j 'eusse, that I might ' 

Que tu eusses, that thou mightest 



Qu'il eut, that he might 

Qu'on eut, tltat one might [ § 

Que nous eussions, t/iat we might \ 4s 



Que vous eussiez, that you might 



Qu'ils eussent, that they mighty 



PLUPERFECT 

Que j'eusse eu, that I might 
Que tu eusses eu, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut eu, that he might 

Qu'on eut eu, that one might 
Que nous eussions eu. that loe 

might 
Que vous eussiez eu, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent eu, that they migfbt^ 



Infective Mode. 



Avoir, 



Ayant, 



to have \ Avoir eu, 
Participle. 



Eu, 



having | Ayant eu, 
past or passive. 



to have had 



C IMPOUND. 



having had 



had 



AUXILI AR Y V ERB 8. $ 41. 

(2.) AVOIR, TO HAVE: CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY 
Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 


COMPOUND TENSES. 




PRESENT 




PAST INDEFINITE. 




Je n'ai pas, 


I have not 


Jo n'ai pas en, 


Ihavt 




Tu n 'as pas, 


thou hast not 


Tu lias pas eu, 


thou hast 




11 n'a pas, 


he has not 


II n'a pas ou, 


he has 


i 


<>u n'a pas, 


one has not 


On n'a pas eu, 


one has 


* 


Nous n'avons pas, 


we have not 


Nous n'avons pas cu, 


trc have 


8 


Vous n'avez | 


you have not 


Vous n'avez pas eu, 


you have 




lis n'ont pas, 


they have not 


lis n'uiit DM BO, 


they have^ 




IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 




Jo n'avais pas, 


1 


Je n'avais pas eu, 


Ihad" 




Tu n'ava - 


thou hadst not 


To a'ATaJa p. is cu, 


thou hadst 




11 n'ava 


he had not 


II n'avait pas eu, 


he had 


.3 


On n'avait DM, 


one had not 


• in n'avait pas eu, 


one had 


Nmis n'OYiOM pas, 


we had not 


Nuns n'ariona pas ou 


ire had 


l 


Vous n'avi./ |>as, 


you hod not 


Vous n'avio/. pas BO, 


you had 


lis n'avaicnt pas, 


May had not 


ILsn'avaieiit pas BO, 


they had. 




PAST UUIIIH 


PAST ANTERIOR. 




Jo B'ena pM, 


I Lid not 


Jo n'eOI I>as eu, 






Tu n'< I. 


■ 


Tu n'eus pas eu, 


thonhailU 




11 n'lii: 


he had not 


II n'-'iit | 


hehad 


3 
1 


On nVut pas, 


one had not 


<in n'ent dm bo, 


one had 






Nells ll . - ll III. - 


, toe had 


Vous v. , 


.</ not 


VOfU • 


vov. had 




lis D'ean 


they had not 


lis n Borent p i 


they had 





Jo n'aur i I shall not' 

Tu n'auras j>as, Dm trill not 

11 n'aui.i he will not 

«»n n'aura ; M will not 

Nous n'rarooa paa, i •-• shidt not 

Vous n'aure/. pa\ BOM shall not 

11* n'auront pas, thm mil Mi 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

Je n'aurai DM cu, I shall 

Tu n'auras juia eu, thou shall 

II n'aura pa-, u hi trill 
On n'aura pas eu, 

Nous n aurons DM BO, Ml trill 

Nous n 'aur-v. pas cu, you, will 

lis n'auront pas eu, they will. 



Conditional Mode. 



Je n'anr.i 

Tu r.'aii! I 

II n'aurait pas. 

On n'aurait pas, 

Nous n'aurions pas 

Vous n'auriez pas, 

Us n'auraient pas, 



/ 
thou trou Ids' 
he tr 
one wm 
ire. H 
you would 
ttev tmtU 



Je n'aurnis DM BO, I should' 
Tu n'ourais DM eu, thou shouldst 

II n'aurait |>as eu, he \rouLl 

<»n n'aui 

: Wt trould 
Voiisn'auri.z pa 

lis n'auraient pa; eu they wonid j 



AUXILIARY V: 



§ 47. 



329 



Imperative Mode. 

N'aie pas have not 

Qu'il n'ait pas, let him not have 

Qu'on n'ait pas, let one not have 

N'ayons pas let us not have 

N'ayez pas have not ye or you 

Qu'ils u'aient pas, let them not have 

Subjunctive Mode. 

compound tenses. 



SIMFLE TENSES. 
PRESENT. 

Que je n'aie pas, that I may ""j 
Que tu n'aies pas, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il n'ait pas, that he may 

Qu'on n'ai-t pas, that one may 
Que nous n'ayons pas, that we )■■<■ 

may I g 
Que vous n'ayez pas, that you \ ' 

may I 
Qu'ils n'aient pas, that they may 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas, that I might' 

Que tu n'eusses pas, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il n'eiit pas, that lie might 
Qu'on n'eiit pas, that one might 

Que nous n'eussions pas, that 

we might 
Que vous n'eussiez pas, that you 

might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas, that they 

might 

Infinitive Mode. 
present. past. 

Na pas avoir, not to liave | N'avoir pas eu, not to have 

Participle, 
present. compound. 

N'ayant pas, not having | N'ayant pas eu, not having 

Past or Passive. 
Pas eu, Not had 



Que je n'aie pas eu, that I may 
Que tu n'aies pas eu, tliat thou 

mayest 
Qu'il n'ait pas eu, that he may 
Qu'on n'ait pas eu, that one may 
Que nous n'ayons pas eu, that 

we may 
Que vous n'ayez pas eu, that 

you may 
Qu'ils n'aient pas eu, that they 
may 

PLUPERFECT 

Que je n'eusse pas eu, that 1 

might 
Que tu n'eusses pas eu, that 

thou mightest 
Qu'il n'eut pas eu, that he might 
Qu'on n'eut pas eu, that one 

might 
Que nous n'eussions pas eu, that 

we might 
Que vous n'eussiez pas eu, that 

you might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas eu, that they 
might 



li 



had 



330 



AUXILIARY VERB8. 8 47. 



(3.) AVOIR.-INTERROQATIVELY. 
Indicative Mode. 

6rMrLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



Ai-je? 
As-tu 7 
A-t-il !(*) 
A-t-on ?(•) 
Avons-nous 1 
Av.z-voubI 
Ont-ils 7 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

hare I? | Ai-je cu 1 hare /^ 

hast- thou ? As-tu eu 7 hast thou 

has he ? A-t-il eu 7 has he \ 

has one ? A-t-on cu 7 has one \ 

have km ? Avons-nous en? have we I 

hare you ? Aw/.-vous eu 7 have you 

hare they 1 \ Ont-ils eu 7 hare then \ 



IMPERFECT. 



PLUPERFECT. 



Avais-jc 7 
tu? 
Avait-il 7 
Avait-on 7 

Avi.>ns-nous7 
Aviez-voiis 7 
Avaient-ils 7 

FAST DEFINITE. 

Bos-Jt 7 

Kiis-iu 7 
Ktit il ] 
Kut..n ] 
Mam dom 7 

Bnrenl I 



had /.' Avais-je eu, 

• ivais-tn cu, 

hatlhe ..' Avait-il eu. 



hail onr J 

had ice ? 

h.itl you J 

hatl they J 



Avait-on eu, 
Avions tioiis eu, 
Aviez-vous 8Q, 
Avaient-ils eu, 



had 71 

hadst thou 

had he 

had one 

had ire 

had you 
had they 



1 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



had I ? Eusje eu) had I 

hadst th.'u ' Bui tu eu 7 hadst thou 

had h<-? Kut-il eu 7 luvl he 

had mu .' Bat-00 eu 7 had one 

hatl irr .' Kuines-nous eu 7 had ire 

had mm / Bates-row bo > had vou 

had thru : Kureut ils eu 7 had they 



3 



FITIRE ANTEniOR. 



Aurni je 7 
Anras-tu 7 

• il ? 
Aura ' 
Aurons nmis ? 

Auras-Tow I 

Aurunt-iK I 



shall I have? 
shall thou ha M ■' 
irilt 

shall r 

mill one ha re 1 

shall 1 I 



Aurai.je eu ! 
Auras lu eu ! 
Aura til eu 7 
Aura ton eu 7 
Auroiis-ii.ius eu 7 

us eu 7 

Aunnit-ils cu ? 



shall n 
shall them 
shall he 

shall ire 
shall KM 
shall they) 



I "N.u. Mom:. 



Aurai- j.' 7 

tU ! 

Atiraitil 7 
Aurait-oii I 

AnrionMioaa 7 

<*^rio7.-vous 1 
/ araient-ils 7 



s toi 

shoitldst thou have > 

irouid they have? 



|fl eu7 

Aurais-tu Bfl 7 
Aurait-i! eu f 
Aurait ..n eu 7 



would m- hetoet Aariow-now tm 7 

should vou hovel Ami. / v.mis eu? 
shouLl they have.' Auraient ils eu 7 



should I 

tCOilldst thiru 

Voiild he 

shnulil „>ir 

should ire 

should KM 

they 



(*) 8eo Lesson 4, Rule G. 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 8 4Y. 



331 



(4.) AVOIR,— NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. 

Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



N'ai-je pas 1 
N'as-tu pas 1 
N : a-t-il pas 1 
N'a-t-on pas 1 
N'avons-nous pas ? 
N'avez-vous pas ? 
N'ont-ils pas 1 



have I not ? 

hast thou not ? 

has lie not ? 

has one not ? 

have we not ? 

have yon not ? 

have they not ? 



IMPERFECT. 



N'avais-je pas 1 
N'avais-tu pas "? 
N'avait-il pas 1 
N'avait-on pas 1 
N'avions-nous pas 1 
N'aviez-vous pas 1 
N'avaienMls pas 1 



had I not ? 

hadst thou not ? 

had lie not ? 

had one not ? 

had we not ? 

had you not ? 

had l/icy not ? 



PAST DEFINITE. 



N'eus-je pas'? 
N'eus-tn pas 1 
N'eut-il pas 1 
N'eut-on pas 1 
N'eumes-nous pas ? 
N'eutes-vons pas? 
N'curent-ils pas 1 



had I not ? 

hadst thou not ? 

Iiad he not ? 

had one not ? 

had we not ? 

had you not ? 

had they not ? 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

N'ai-je pas eu 1 have P 

N'as-tu pas eu 1 hast thou 

N'a-Ml pas eu 1 has he 

N'a-t>on pas eu 1 has one 

N'avons-nous pas eu 1 have we 

N'avez-vous pas eu 1 have you 

N'ont-ils pas cu 1 have tlicy __ 

PLUPERFECT. 

N'avais-je pas eu 1 had P\ 

N'avais-tu pas eu 1 hadst thou 
N'avait-il pas eu 1 had he 

N'avait-on pas eu 1 had one 
N'avions-nous pas eu 1 had we 
N'aviez-vous pas eu 1 had you 
N'avaient-il pas eu 1 had they ^ 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

N'eus-je pas eu 1 had I 

N'eus-tu pas eu 1 hadst thou 
N'eut-il pas eu 1 had k* 

N'eut-on pas eu 1 had one 

N'eumes-nous pas eu 1 liad we 
N'eutes-vous pas eu 1 had you 
N'eurent-ils pas eu 1 had they j 



U 



N'aurai-je pas 1 
N'auras-tu pas 1 
N'aura-t-il pas 1 
N'aura-t^on pas 1 
N'aurons-nous pas 1 
N'aurez-vous pas 1 
N'auront-ils pas 1 



shall I 

shalt tlwu 

sliall he 

shall one 

shall we 

shall you 

sliall they _ 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

N'aurai-je pas eu 1 shall JT\ 

N'auras-tu pas eu 1 shall thou 
N'aura-t-il pas eul shall he 
N'aura-t-on pas eu 1 shall one 
N'aurons-nous pas eu 1 shall we 
N'aurez-vous pas eu 1 shall you 
N'auront-ils pas eu 1 shall they _ 



Conditional Mode. 



N'atirais-je pas 1 should I' 

N'aurais-tu pas 1 slwuldst thou 
N'aurait-il pas 1 should he 

N'aurait^on pas 1 should one 
N'aurions-nous pas "? should we ^ 
N'auriez-vous pas 1 should you 
N'auraient-ils pas 1 should they 



N'aurais-je pas eu 1 should r 
N'aurais-tu pas eu 1 shouldst thou 
N'aurait-il pas eu 1 slwuld he 
N'aurait-on pas eu 1 slwuld one . 
N'aurions-nous pas eul should we ' 
N'auriez -vous pas eul should you 
N'auraient-ils pas eu"? should 
they 



332 



AUXILIARY V ER 



§ 47. 



(5.) etre, TO Z?£,-AFFIRMATIYELY. 
Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 





PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 




„L> suia, 


I am 


Pal etc, 


/ lave been 


" 


thou art 


Tn as 6t6, 


thou hast been 


11 est, 


he is 


11 Sit*, 


he has been 


1)11 est, 


one is 


On a 6t6, 


one has been 


nines, we are 


Nous avons ct&, 


toe hare been 




ye or you are 


Vous ares etc, 


you have been 




ihey arc 


lis out etc, 


they have been 




MPF.RFECT. PLUPERFECT. 




1 was or I used to be 


J'avais 6t«\ 


I had been 


'I'll ItSiS, 


thou wast 


Tu STSJ 


thou hajlsl been 




he was 


11 avail 


he had been 


On . t:iit. 


one was 


on avail 


one hatl been 


N.'iis ItfoOS, 


we wrre 


Noils avions t'-tc, 


we had been 


• 


you were 


Vous avicz 6t6, 


you had been 


lis ctnioiit, 


they were 


lis anient etc, 


they had been 


PF.FISITE. TAST ANTERIOR. 


] 


1 iflsslj'eafl 6t6, 


I had been 


Tu (US, 


I.Wm w-i.t Tu i us 6t6, 


thou hatlst been 


11 Ibt, 


tea* 


he had been 




r>n« i/a.5 On tut 6U5, 


one had been 


Nous fames, 


irv I 


we had been 


Vooi Mtus, 


you men v*ooi eol 


you had been 


lis fortiit, 


•i! 6t«S, 


they had been 




FTTLRK. FUTCRE 


ANTERIOR. 




/ SUB ; 


J'anrai 6te, 


I shall' 






fctau will be 


Tu auras etc, 


thou shall 


i 
'I 




he shall b>- 


11 aura • 


heshaU 


1 


xall be 




one shall 


' 


hull be 


Nous ani 


we shall 


v.nis teres, 


Vou shall be 


Vous aa 


MM will 




they shall be 


li.s aoront ita, 


ihry wiU j 






Conditional Mode. 






PRESENT. PUT. 




/ 1 1 


- III. 


I should' 






' 


Tu aur.i: 


thOU Shouldst 


i 

'J 




he would be 


II uurait £16, 


kt MMaM 


On Bcrsit, 


one should be 


On aurait dtd, 


one wmdd 


Nous sorions 


we wmiLl be 


' 


we should 


Vous eerlea, 


you should be 


Voua am 


tou • 


DsssrsJsot, 


they would be 


lis aura ;■ 


thy should. 





AUXILIARY VB1 



§ 47. 



Imperative Mode. 



Sois, 


be thou 


Qu'il soit, 


let him be 


Qu'on soit, / 


let one be 


Soyons, 


let us be 


Soyez, 
Qu'ils soient, 


be ye or you 
let them be 



Subjunctive Mode, 
simple tenses. compounr tenses. 



Juo ja sois, 

i,VLQ ttt SOiS, 

Qu'il soit, 
Qu'on soit, 
Que uous soyons, 
Que vous soyez, 
Qu'ils soient, 



that I may be 

that thou mayest be 

that he may be 

..■-, that one may be 

that we may be 

that you may be 

that they may be 



Quej'aieete, that I may 

Que tu aies ete, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait ete, that he may 

Qu'on ait, ete, that one may 
Que nous ayons ete, that we may 
Que vous ayez ete, that you may 
Qu'ils aient ete, that they may 



IMPERFECT. 



PLUPERFECT 



Que je fusse, 
Que tu fusses, 



that I might be 
that thou mightest be 



Qu'il fat, that he might be 

Qu'on fut, that one might be 

Que nous fussions, that we might be 

Que vous fussiez, that you might be 

Qu'ils fussent, that they might be 



W\ 



Que j'eusse etc, that 1 1 
Que tu eusses 6te, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut ete, that he might 
Qu'on eut ete, that one might 
Que nous eussions ete, that we 



Que vous eussiez ete, that you 



Qu'ils eussent ete, that they 
might 



Infinitive Mode. 



to be J Avoir ete, 
Participle. 



to have been 



fitant, 



being | Ayant ete, 
Past or Passive. 



fit* 



having been 



334 



BEGULAR VERBB, 



§48. 



g 48. — Regular Verbs. 
FIRST CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN ER. 

MODEL VERB. 

CHANTER, TO SING. 
Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES 

PRESENT. «« 1NDEFr 

Jo chante '**"* ! J ' ai cha° tf i 

Tnehantos, tarn tinge* ^aachant*. 

B chante, ** **«' H a chante. 

one sings On a chante, 
we ring Nona awna chant* 

\ iOB ave/. chante, 
Qa oat chante, 

I'M PERFECT 



On chant.', 
Nuns chantona 
Vona chantea. 

Us chantcut, 

JMrF.RFECT 

Jc chantais, / 001 



I have sung 

iheu host sung 

he /ins sung 

one has sung 

tec have suns 

you have sung 

(key have sitng 



Tu chantais, 
II cliantait. 
On cliantait, 

Nona chantiona, 

VotU ehantie/., 

Pi chantaieiit, 



or J 
' ringing 

singing 
re singing 



J'avais chante, 



/ had' 



Tu avais chante, 
1! avait chante, 
On avait chant.'-, 
NOUB avians chante 

Vona avlea chant*, 

lis avaient chante, 



TA8T DEFINITE. 

Ja chantaJL / mug or did ring Jena chante 

Tu .-us chant* 

1! eat chante 



thou hadst 
he had 
one had 
ice had 
you had 
they had 

r-AST ANTERIOR. 



II i hanta, 

im cha 

Nous chantlmnw, 

Vona chantltRW] 

lb chantcrcnt, 



Ft TIRE. 



I had sung 

thou hadst sung 

he had sung 

, ,.„, ,.|ianh-. one hod sung 

Nous eomea chant*, wt had sung 

you son- Vona eotea chant*, you had sung 

lb curcnt Chant*, t'iry had Sting 

FLTLRE ANTERIOR. 



Jo ehantcrai, 
Tn chanteras, 
11 ehanter.i. 

On chantera, 
Nous chantcrona 
Voiis chantorez, 

lb chanteront, 



/ shall or mill sing I J'aurai chante, 
Ikou irilt ring Tn auras chante, 

ii aura chant*, 
one will ring <»n aura chant*, 

\ aa aurora chant*, 
\ . :,- aarea chant*, 
I aoront chant*, 



I id in 
thou shall 

hr vill 

ve shall 

you trill 



Conditional M<oi.. 
pre8ent. past. 

Jo chantorais, I should, would ring \3'*\m\B chanW I '"' uld i ) 

Tu cha, tcrab, ' "" l™"'' 1 "'. * 

11 chaniorait he should rin 4 II aurait CD *• "•"'"' | 

On chanter ait one should sing I In aurait chante. one would N- 

Nous chantorions, wewouldsing Noua anriona chant*, w ir,mA/ - 
Vom chantcrles, you would sing Voua auricz chant6, you 

.,,j would sing naanralenti mmil 



REGULAR V E: 



§48. 



335 



Imperative Mode. 



Chante, 
Qu'il chante, 
Qu'on chante, 
Chantons, 
Chantez, 
Qu'ils chantent, 



sing t/wu 
let him sing 
let one sing 
let us sing 
sing ye or you 
let them, sing 



Subjunctive Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TEXBE8. 



Que je chante, that I may sing 

Que tu chantes, that thou mayest sing 

Qu'il chante, that he may sing 

Qu'on chante, that one may sing 

Que nous chantions, that we may sing 

Que vous chantiez, that you may sing 

Qu'ils chantent, that they may sing 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je chantasse, that I might sing 
Que tu chantasses, that thou mightest 

sing 
Qu'il chantat, that he might sing 

Qu'on chantat, that one might sing 
Que nous cnantassions, that we might 

sing 
Que vous chantassiez, that you might 

sing 
Qu'ils chantassent, that they might 

sing 



Que j'aie chante, thatlmay^ 
Que tu aies chante, that thou 



Qu'il ait chante, that he may 
Qu'on ait chante, that one may 
Que nous ayons chante, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez chante, that you 

may 
Qu'ils aient chante, that they may A 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse chante, that I might 
Que tu eusses chante, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut chante, that he might 
Qu'on eut chante, that one might 
Que nous eussions chante, that I 

we might 
Que vous eussiez chante, that 

you might 
Qu'ils eussent chante, that they 
might 



Infinitive Mode. 



past. 



Chanter, 



Chantant, 



to sing | Avoir chante, to have sung 

Participle. 

compound. 
singing \ Ayant chante, having sung 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Chante, swig 



336 riCULIAR verbs. — §49 



§ 49. — Remarks on the Peculiarities of some Verbs 
of the First Conjugation. 

(I.) In verbs ending in ger, in order to retain the 6oft pronuncia. 
tion of the g,* the e of the infinitive is preserved, whenever the g 
would come before a, or o : 

Nous mangeons, ire eat ; instead ©f nous mansions ; 
Je mangcai, I did cat ; " jemangai; 

Jugcant, jmlging ; " jugant. 

(2.) In verbs ending in yrr, the y is changed into t, before e, es, ent y 
and e (not accented), followed by r, and one or more vowels: 

Je ; 7/"7i/; instead of je j 

• lii'iit, " vent; 

Je paicrai, Iicilipny; " jepaycrai. 

(3.) In verbs terminating in eeryf to preserve to the c its soft pro- 
nunciation, a cedilla (<;) is put under it, when it comes before aoro: 

Conimenrant, ttmmmcingi instead of cemmtmomtt 

NOV pi tee }<!<■ .• n»us placons. 

(4.) In verbs ending in eter and »/<r, the t or I of the infinitive is 

doubled, when it i ies before r,rs,nit and r (not accented), followed 

by r, and one or more rowels : 

Jap; . Instead of fampdti 

Je j.tdrai. / Tai; 

J epp / " fnppeltrait. 

(5.) Thfl following verbs form exceptions to the last rule : 

DeooOeter. !■> uneovcr the thro X; 



t.i buy ; 

Bonrreler, to ft 

Oongeler, 

OoUeter, 

tor, 

1 1 
Degeler, 



Etiqueter, i<> tirkct ; 

Geter, to freeze; 

Haroeter, to tnizr ; 

Peter, to peel; 

Boraohi to over but/. 



In the above verbs, wlien the t or / eomes before e, es, cnt, or e (nor 
accented) followed by r and one or more vowels, a grave accent (*) 
is put over the r, which precedes the / or /: 

Je pale, /« rai, /«•<.'.' 

J'a. : 7£i/y; J'achet. 1 trill b%f. 

(6.) A grave accent is also need in verbs ending in 
ccer, emer, ener, 

L 3. 9. 
t This rule a] an.l m in verbs of the third conjugation, 

ending in etoir, Je ncoJl, / rwutvtf J'apcr;oia, / percziu. 



RBOULAR VERBS. S 50. 



337 



and the acute accent of the infinitive of those ending in 

Seer, egler, eler, erer, 

ebrer, egner, emer, eter, 

echer, egrer, ener, etrer, 

edcr, eguer, equer, 

fs changed into a grave one, when the consonant following the first 
e of these terminations, comes before e, es, ent, and e (not accented) 
followed by r and one or more vowels : 

Je serae, I sow ; Je mene, I lead; 

Je celebrerai, I will celebrate ; II regnera, he will reign. 

(7.) In the tables of peculiar, irregular, defective, and unipersonal 
verbs, we will place a model verb of each class embraced in the pre- 
ceding remarks, and also include in the same table the names of the 
principal verbs coming under these remarks, with references to the 
models. 

§ 50.— Regular Verbs. — Continued. 
SECOND CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN IR. 

MODEL VERB. 

FINIK, TO FINISH. # 

Indicative Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tenses, 

present. past indefinite. 



Je finis, 

Tu finis, 

II finit, 

On finit, {IJ 

Nous finissons, 

Vous finissez, 

lis finissent, 



Ifinish 

thoufinishest 

he finishes 

one finishes 

we finish 

you finish 

theyfinish 



J'ai fini, 
Tu as fini, 
II a fini, 
On a fini, 
Nous avons fini, 
Vous avez fini, 
lis ont fini, 



; I have finished 

thou hast finished 

he lias finished 

one has finished 

we have finished 

you have finished 

they have finished 



IMPERFECT. 



Je.finissais, I was finishing, or used 
to finish 
thou wast finishing 
he wasfinishin. 



Tu finissais, 
II finissait, 
On finissait, 
Nous finissions, 
Vous finissiez, 
lis finissaient, 



one was finishing 

we were finishing 

yon were finishing 

they were finishing 



PAST DEFINITE. 

Je finis, I finished, did finish 

Tu finis, thou didst finish 

II finit, he finished 

On finit, one did finish 

Nous finimes, we finished 

Vous finites, you finished 

Ds finirent, they finished 



PLUPERFECT. 

J'avaisfini, I had finished 

Tu avais fini, thou hadst finished 

II avait fini, .' he had finished 

On avait fini, one had finished 

Nous avions fini, we had finished 

Vous aviez fini, you had finished 

lis avaient fini, ihey had finished 

PAST ANTERIOR. 



J'eus fini, 
Tu eus fini, 
11 eut fini, 
On eut fini, 
Nous eumes fini, 
Vous eutes fini, 
lis eurent fini, 



15 



/ had finished 

thou hadst finished 

lie had finished 

one had finished 

we had finished 

you had finished 

they had finished 



338 



REGULAR VERBS . — 8 50. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



FUTURE A>TTERIOE. 



Je finirai, I shall finish J'iiurai flni, 

Ta flniras, thou wilt finish Tu auras fiui, 

II tinira, he will finish 11 aura flni, 

On finira, one mil finish On aura flni. 

Nous finirons, we shall finish N.>us aurons tini. 

Vous flnin-z, you wi'J finish Vous sural flni, 

lis finiront, they iciltfinis.h lis auront flni, 

CONDITIONAL MoOE. 



J shall ha vc ~\ 
thou will have 
he shall have | 13 
one will have Vg 
we shall hair ,£ 
you will have 
they shall have ) 



Jo finirais, / 'finish J'aurais fini. 

Tu flnirai.s, thou tkouldst finish Tu aurais fiui. 

II flnirait, he would finish II aurait flni. 

On flnirait, I to aurait tini. 

Nous finirions, N iOJ aurions flni. 

Ton Onirics, you night finish Voosmtmi BaL, 

lis flnirai'iit, tseysi Da aur-iirnt flat, 



• nva MODS. 



I 

tju'il li- 

(ju'oii flnisse, 

P 

I 



/ should 

liou woulilst 

he might 

one should 

tot kmM 

1/oh might 
thai should 



finish ' 
let him finish 
lit unejinish 
let us finish 
finish ve or Vov 

'let thrtnfinifh 



Srajus'TivF. Mods. 



Quo ji- Hi that I may 

Qii-- tu BaiMM, thai t.hi'u mmfest 

Qu'il tiniH.se, that he may 

Qu'nn IsfaSO, that one may 

Qu<- D01M Bo lotions, / 
(Jw v.)iis BAMM8S, r:.it you may 
Qu'ils finissout. that they may J 



Qic j aic fiui, that I may' 

Quo in ai.vs fin!, thai thou mnytst 
(Ju'il ait lini, that he may 

Qu'OD ait flni. thai one may 

Que Dooisyoos flni, them wr may 
Que TOM SJSS fiui. /W t/oumay 
nt flni, M/j/ Mry m*y 



IMPKRKfXT. 



n.Lrr.RrKCT. 



Qu''.i<- fuii-v. / • / 
Qurtu fini 

Qu'il flnit. that he might 

Qu'on flnit. that 
Quo nous flnissiuns, the •' 

Que voui Bniisi 

Qu'ili finbsent, thai they might 



that I might 
QUO tu ruvM* fli.i, | 
ID 

Qu'il cut fini, fAa/ A* might 

Qu'on out fini, /Ao/ m 

■ rontons fini nsi we 

might 
Quo toub eussloz flni. i 

might 
Quils ousseut flni/ W / ' 



RE OU L a: 



.—§ 51. 



339 



Infinitive Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



Finir 



io finish | Avoir fini, 
Participle. 



to have finished 



COMPOUND. 



Fini. 



finishing | Ayant fini, 
Past or Passive. 

finished 



having finished 



§ 51. — Regular Verbs. — Continued. 
THIRD CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN OIR. 

MODEL VERB. 

RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. 

Indicative Mode, 
present. past indefinite. 



Je refois,* 
Tu re^ois, 
II refoit, 
On refoit, 
Nous recevons, 
"Vous recevez, 
lis reijoivent, 



I receive 

thou receivest 

he receives 

one receives 

we receive 

you receive 

they receive 



J'ai refu, 
Tu as re9U, 
II a refu, 
On a refU, 
Nous avons re9U, 
Vous avez re^u, 
lis ont re^u, 



I have received 
thou hast received 

lie has received 

one has received 

we have received 

you have received 

they have received 



IMPERFECT. 

Je recevais, / was receiving, or / 

used to receive 
Tu recevais, thou wast receiving 
II recevait, ., he was receiving 
On recevait, one was receiving 

Nous recevions, we were receiving 
Vous receviez, you were receiving 
Is recevaient, they were receiving 



PAST DEFINITE. 



Je refus, 
Tu re9us, 
II re9ut, 
On re9Ut, 
Nous re9umes, 
Vous refutes, 
lis re9urent, 



I received or did receive 

thou receivedst 

he received 



we received 
you received 
they received 



PLUPERFECT. 

J'avais re9U, J had received' 

Tu avals re9U, thou hadst received 
II avait re9U, f he had received 
On avait re9U, one had received 
Nous avions re9U, we had received 
Vous aviez re9U, you had received 
Us avaient re9U, they had received 

past anterior. 



J'eus re9U, J had received 
Tu eus re9U, thou hadst received 

II eut re9U, he had received 

On eut re9U, one had received 

Nous eumes re9U, we had received 

Vous eutes re9U, you had received 

Us eurent re9U, they had received 



* See note f ' 



(3.) Also, $62. 



REGULAR VERBS. § 51. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
FUITRE. 



COMPOUND TEN8E8. 
FUTURE ANTERIO». 



Je recevrai, / shall receive , J'aurai re^u, / shall have 

Tu recevTas, thou wilt receive Tu auras re^u, thou wilt have 

11 raeem, he shall receive II aura re^u, U trill have 

On rccevra, one m I aura reeu, one will have 

Wam n-cevrons, tee shall receive Nous aurons re$u, tee shall have 

Vi.iis n-o-vri.-/., you ir; VaOB aurez n\u, you will have 

lis ncevront, Miy tn// nccivc , lis aurout rc^u, *Afy jAo# Aanr j 

Conditional Mode. 



mil, 

Tu r-Tovrais, 
11 n-'-'-vrait. 
••rait, 

Nous reoernoos, 
I 

i talent) 



/ should receive 
tlum would st receive 
he sho'. 

they should receive 
l.Mrr.KATi\. 



.Vaurais reeQ, 
Tu aurais rafU, 
11 aurait ro.,u, 
On aurait ro<,u, 
HooSMtrioU n-ru, 
Vuus aurii'z n'cu, 
Dl auraicnt ro^u, 



B 

CJu il p 
Qu'i.n ri 
•tu, 

I 

Qu'ila n 



falMtfl 

/ hou wouldst 

he might 

MM MPaU 

ire should 
vou might 
they should 



t Sou 

let him receive 
M one • 

ht us n 

recett>€ 






Que jo ro^oivo, that I man 

Qu>' (it r< ■■, "ivi-», that thou mai/rst 

yu il reeoifv, 
Qn'oo it 

CJur MM noviona, thai we may 

• i/ou may 
Qui!* n-.,<'iv.nt, that they may 

IMPF«rECT. 

Qu<- j." r. / 

Que tu re^usses, 

htest 
Qu'il r that he might 

Qu'on n- 
Que nous refusion* 

;s roftissiez. 

Qu'ilsrerusaent, that they might 



r.-.-u, thai 1 may 

(Jur tu ;ib* n-cu^hat thou mayesl 
Qu il nit rveu, that he may 

Qq'oD ait recU, thai one may 
Quo nous ayona rc^u, that we 
may 
■ -en, that you may 
Qui'.* ai.nt rc^u, that lAey may 

Kvmnor. 

•e refu, thut I 
um reev, 'Aa/ Mim« 

Qu'U cut reru, Odi 

.t r.-.u. thai one might 

mixht 
Qu'ila cus»ent rc^u, thai they 
might 



REGULAR VERBS. § 52,53. 



341 



Infinitive Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tentjes. 

present. past. 

Recevoir, f ^ to receive | Avoir refu, to have receited 



f<: 



Participle. 



compound. 



Recevant, 



having received 



receiving | Ayant refu, 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Re9U, received 

§ 52. — Remarks. 

(1.) In the verbs of this conjugation, ending with cevoir, in order to 

preserve to the c its soft pronunciation, a cedilla (5) is put under it, 

when it comes before a, o, u : — 

Je re$ois, J receive ; J'aperfois, I perceive, 

(2.) There are only seven regular verbs in this conjugation. They 
are: — 

Percevoir, to collect duties, taxes ; 



Apercevoir. 
Concevoir, 
Decevoir, 
Devoir, 



to conceive ; 
to deceive; 
to owe; 



Recevoir, 
Redevoir, 



to receive; 
to owe again. 



§ 53. — Regular Verbs. — Continued. 
FOURTH CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN RE. 

MODEL VERB. 
VENDRE, TO SELL. 

Indicative Mode. 



PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 


Je vends, / sell 


J'ai vendu, 


I have sold 


Tu vends, thou sellest 


Tu as vendu, 


thou hast sold 


H vend, he sells 


11 a vendu, 


he has sold 


On vend, one sells 


On a vendu, 


one has sold 


Nous vendons, we sell 


Nous avons vendu, 


we have sold 


Vous vendez, you sell 


Vous avez vendu, 


you have sold 


JJs vendent, they sell 


lis ont vendu, 


they have sold 


IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 


7e vendais, / was selling, or used to 


J'avais vendu, J had sold or been sell- 


sell 




ing 


Tu vendais, thou wast selling 


Tu avais vendu, 


thou hadst sold 


II vendait, he was selling 


11 avait vendu, 


he ho.d sold 


Qn vendait, one was selling 


On avait vendu, 


one had sold 


2Ious vendions, we were selling 


Nous avions vend! a, 


we had sold 


Vous vendiez, you were selling 


Vous aviez vendu, 


you had sold 


Us vendaient, they were selling 


lis avaient vendu, 


they had sold 



342 



REGULAR VERBS . S 54. 



SIMPLE 


TENSES. 


COMPOUND TENSES. 


PAST DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 


Je vendis, 


I sold or did sell 


J'eus vendu, / had sold 


Tu vendis, 


thou soldest 


Tu cus vendu, thou hadst sold 


11 vendit. 


he sold 


11 cut vendu, he had sold 


On vendit. 


one sold 


On eut vendu, one had sold 


Nous vendimes, 


trr ■ i | 


Nona oumes vendn, ice had sold 


•i dites, 


you sold 


V ma rates vendu, you had sold 


lis vendirent, 


( :■!/ | U 


lb event vendu, they had sold 


future. 


FCTt'RE ANTERIOR. 


Jc vendral, 


/.< 


.7 'aura i vendn, / shall have sold 


Tu vendras, 




Tu mum vendn, thou vilt have sold 


Ira, 


he will sell 


11 aura vendu, he shall have sold 


Ob ren 


one will sell 


On mini vendu. one will have sold 


Nous vend rons, 


nil sell 


. ma vendn, we shall have sold 


Yoll- VI ' 


i/ou irill sell 


You* aniea vendu. »/<** will have sold 


lis vondn.iit, 


they will sell 


Us auront vendu, / vv shall have sold 



CoHDITK'XAI. 



irais, 
Tu -••ndraia. 
11 vendreft, 

lrait, 
•idrionji, 
n dri aa 1 

lis vendraient, 



I should sell 

hem 

Minbtnl 
m might adl 

they would sell 



■■< ndu, I should* 

Tu aur.iU vi-ndu, /A/>u wouldest 
II iiuniit vendu, he might 

On aurait vendu. one should 
Nona anriona vendn, ire should 
Vousauri <u should 

IN auraicnt vendu, they should 



Imii:i:ative Mode. 



■ 

Qu'il v. 
Qu'on | 

■ 

Qu'ils i 



aaBUae 

fat Aim *« 
fa< on* *rtf 

or you 
let them sell 



SOBJUSCTIVF. 



/ may sell 
Que tuvendes, that thou m 

thai he may sell 

nay sell 

Quo nor. ,u tee may sell 

•it you may sell 

Qu'ils vendent, that they may sell 



Quo j'ai.' vendu, that I 

(Jin- t . In, that 

may* 

I vendn, that ht 

Qn'on ait vendn, that one 

Qne ii'U.m ayons vendu, thai 

m» 

Que vous ayex vendn, thai 

Qu'ils aicnt vendu, that they 




PASSIVE VERBS. — §54. 



343 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES, 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je vendisse, that I might sell 
Que tu vendisses, that thou mightest 

sell 
Qu'il vendit, that lie might sell 

Qu'on vendit, that you might sell 
Que nous vendissions, t/iat we might 

sell 
Que vous vendissiez, that you might 

sell 
Qu'ils vendissent, that they might sell 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse vendu, that Im-'ght' 
Que tu eusses vendu, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut vendu, that he might 
Qu'on eut vendu, that one might 
Que nous eussions vendu, that 

we might 
Que vous eussiez vendu, that 

you might 
Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they 
might 



Infinitive Mode. 



PAST. 



Vendre, to sell | Avoir vendu, 

Participle, 
present. compound. 

Vendant, selling \ Ayant vendu, 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Vendu, sold 

§ 54. — Conjugation of a Passive Verb, 

etre aime, to be loved. 

Indicative Mode. 



to have sold 



having sold 



Je suis aime, m. aimee,/. J am loved 

Tu es aime or aimee, ' thou art loved 

II est aime, he is loved 

Elle est aimee, she is loved 

On est aime, one is loved 

Nous sommes aimes or aimees, we are loved 

Vous etes aimes or aimees, you are loved 

lis sont aimes, m. they are loved 

Elles sont aimees, /. they are loved 



IMPERFECT. 



J'etais aime, m. aim6e,/. 

Tu etais aim6 or aimee, 

H etait aime, 

Elle etait aimee, *> 

On etait aime, 

Nous ctions aimes or aimees, 

Vous etiez aimes 

Us etaient aimes, m. 

Elles etaient aimees,/. 



I was loved, was being loved 
thou wast laved, wast being loved 
he was loved, was being loved 
she was loved, was being loved 
one was loved, was being loved 
we were loved, were being loved 
you were loved, were being loved 
tliey were loved, were being loved 
they were loved, were being loved 



PASSIVE VERBS. § 64. 



past definite. 

Je fus aime, m. aimee, /. I tf as Unri 

Tu fus aim6 or aimee, thou wast loved 

1 1 fut aime, he was loved 

"Hie fut aimcc, sJie was loved 

On fut aime, one was loved 
Nous fumes aimes or aimees, * loved 

Vous fiites aim6s or aim6es, you were loved 

] la fiirent ainv they were loved 

tiles fure:it aimOes,/. they were loved 

PAST INDEFINITE. 

J'ai £te aimd or aim.'-\ / hav been lovtd 

Tu as »te aiinu or aiinco, thou hast been loved 

11 a etc- I he has been 

niee, she has been l e nd 

liim'-. one h/is been loved 

.limes or aim6es, we have been loved 

- aimees, you hnve t»rn loved 
they taw ten loved 

Ellcs out ( they hove been loved 

PAST ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

• • aime, r;i. aii. I I he 

hf ha*! fxrn loved 

I /*v;i lored 

one ha,l bern loved 

loved 

you had been loved 

■■■ aim6s, m. ' bttn loved 

they had been loved 

Kmmor, 

hnto, I toetd 

dm6 or aimee, rW tab! h 

II avail iti aim.', A/- h< 

I'.llr a\ .'A/- A/;..' !■■-, r\ UfVtd 
one ha,! b*M lovtd 

I m ainu'i'S, m \ad b*n loved 
OT aimers, i //wrf 

v m. M<->/ hod bren loved 
Biles an t hem loved 



+ 



Je serai aime, M, ain / .7 or will be loved 

s aime or aio OT in'// i* /<»r«i' 

alm6, he loved 

■ r will be loved 
' .ill or will l- 
imiea, 

or - ,7 V /,»rW 
Jinrwilll 
I ktaeea, f. r iciflfc /or»'< 



PASSIVE VER] 



-§ 54. 



345 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



J'aurai ete aime, m. aimee, /. 
Tu auras ete aime or aimee, 
II aura ete aime, ( 

"Elle aura ete aimee, 
On aura ete aime, 
Nous aurons ete aimes or aimees, 
Vous aurez ete aimes or 
lis auront ete aimes, m. 
EUes auront ete aimees,/. 



I shall, will have been loved 
thou shall, wilt have been loved 
he shall, will have been loved 
she shall, vnll have been loved 
one shall, will have been loved 
we shall, will have been loved 
you shall, will have been loved 
they shall, will have been loved 
they shall, will have been loved 



Conditional Mode. 



Je serais aime, m. aimee,/. 

Tu serais aime or aimee, 

II serait aime, 
v Elle serait aimee, 

On serait aime, / 

Nous serions aimes or aimees, 

Vous seriez aimes or aimees, 

lis seraient aimes, m. 
^Elles seraient aimees,/ 



PRESENT. 

J should, would, could, might be loved 

thou shouldst, couldst, migktest be wvea. 

he would or might be loved 

she might be loved 

one could be loved 

we should or would be loved 

you would or might be loved 

they might or should be loved 

they might, could, should be loved M 



J'aurais et6 aime, m. aimee, /. 

Tu aurais ete aime or aimee, 

II aurait ete aime, 
^Elle aurait ete aimee, to 

On aurait ete aime, 

Nous aurions ete aimes or aimees, 

Vous auriez ete aimes or aimees, 

lis auraient ete aimes, m. 
-Elles auraient ete aimees, / 



I should, xoould have been loved 

thou wouldst have been loved • 

he would have been loved 

she would have been loved 

one would have been loved 

we might have been loved 

you would have been loved 

they might have been loved 

they should or might have been lived 



Sois aime, m. aimee,/ 
Qu'il soit aime, 
Qu'elle soit aimee, 
Qu'on soit aime, 
Soyons aimes or aimees, 
Soyez aimes or aimees, 
Qu'ils soient aimes, m. 
Qu'elles soient aimees, / 



Imperative Mode. 

be thou loved 
let him be loved 
let her be loved 
let one be loved 
let us be loved 
be ye or you loved 
let them be loved 
let them be loved 

Subjunctive Mode. y\^ 






Que je sois aime, m. aimee, / 

Que tu sois aime or aimee, 

Qu'il soit aime, 
\Qu'elle soit aimee, 

Qu'on soit aime, 

Que nous soyons aimes or aimees 

Que vous soyez aimes or aimees, 

Qu'ils soient aimes, 
N Qu'elles soient aimees, 



PRESENT. 

that I may be loved 
that thou mayest be loved 
that he may be loved 
thai she may be loved 
that one may be loved 
that we may be loved 
that you may be loved 
that they may be loved 
that they may be loved 
15* 



S46 



PASSIVE VERBS. §54,55. 



IMPERFECT. 



Que je fusse aiue, m. aimee,/. 

Que tu fusses aim6 or aimee', 

Qu'il fut aim6, 
vQa'elle tut aimee, 

Qu'on fut aime, 

Que nous fussions aimes or aimees, 

Qos voiis fussiez aimes or aimees, 

Qa'flfl fussent aimes, m. 
s Qu'elles fussent ainu 



thai I might be loved 
that thou mightest be lovi 
thai he might be laved 
that she might- be loved 
that one might be loved 
that voe might be loved 
that you might be loved 
that '.hcu might be loved 
that they might be loved 



aimee./ 
yu • to ilea ct<- aime or aimee, 
Qu'il ait etc ainu"-. 

imee, 
U 6tfl aime, 
Qui- DOOfl STOU (•!,• aimi's or aimers, that ir<- mail hare been 
QUA TOT - that von m in/ hare been loved 

Qu'flj 6a, m. v man have been loved 

<ju Vll, g 'eea,/. that the}/ may have been loved 

PLSTOJ •: 



PAST. 

I laijhare been lored 
that thou, may est have been loved 
that he may hare been loved 
that she may have been loved 
that one may hare been loved 



that I might have fxen loved 
that tiou mightesi hare been loved 
that he might have been loved 
that she might hare been loved 



Qui- feuase < t<- thai, m. aii 

(Jut : 
Qu'il • i ■ 
v Qu'dUe eft i 
Qo'on • 

I iik olmds or th-r <bcenlo\ 

aim 
Que torn eussiez etu aim£s or that you might ha; 

hare been 
tare been I 

MiMiivr. Mode. 



Qn'eU 



Eire aim. f . 

PAKTicirr.E. 

PEESENT. 

Jjtant aime, vi. aimcc./. 

COM I 

U aime. 77i. a:i 

run. 

Avoir etc thai, v- a:: 



to be lored 

u*ved 
ha ring been loved 
to have been loved 



§ 55.— It- 
There is only one conjugation for passive verbs. It la formed of 
the auxiliary Um in all its tenses, limplc sod OOOpoasd, and the par- 
MR) of the active verb which W9 wish to conjugate in the pas. 
bivo roke. See $ 43, (4.) 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. — §56. 347 

§ 56. — Conjugation of Reflective Verbs [§ 43, (6.)]. 

model verb. 

SE FLATTER, TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF. 

Indicative Mode. 



I flatter myself- 

thou flatterest thyself- 

he flatters himself' 

one flatters himself or one's self 

we flatter ourselves 

you flatter yourselves . 

they flatter themselves . 



IMPERFECT. 



J was flattering or used tofiv&tei my* 

self 
thou wast flattering thyself 
he was flattering himself 
one was flattering one's self, himself 
we were flattering ourselves 
you were flattering yourselves 
they were flattering tliemselves 



PAST definite. 



Je me flatte, 
Tute flattes, 
II se flatte, 
On se flatte, 
Nous nous flattons, 
Vous vous flattez, 
lis se flattent, 



Je me flattais, 

Tu te flattais, 
II se flattait. 
On se flattait, 
Nous nous flattions, 
Vous vous flattiez, 
Us se flattaient, 



Je me flattai, 

Tu te flattas, 

II se flatta, 

On se flatta, 

Nous nous flattames, 

Vous vous flattates, 

Us se flatterent, 



J e me suis flatte, to. flattee,/. 

Tu t'es flatte or flattee, thou hast flattered tHyself 

II s'est flatte, he has flattered himself 

Elle s'est flattee, she has flattered herself 

On s'est flatte, one has flattered himself ox one's self 

Nous nous sommes flattes or flattees, we have flattered ourselves 

Vous vous etes flattes or flattees, you have flattered yourselves 

Us se sont flattes, m. they have flattered themselves 

Elles se sont flattees,/. ' they have flattered themselves 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

Je me fus flatte, m. flattee,/. I had flattered myself 

Tu te fus flatte or flattee, thou liadst flattered thyself 

II se fut flatte, he had flattered himself 

Elle se fut flattee, she had flattered herself 

On se fut flatte, one had flattered himself one's self 

Nous nous fumes flattes or flattees, we had flattered ourselves 

Vous vous fates flattes or flattees, you had flattered yourselves 

Us se furent flattes, m. they had flattered tliemselves 

Elles se furent flattees,/. they had flattered themselves 



I flattered or did flatter myself 

thou didst flatter thyself 

he flattered himself 

one flattered one's self himself 

we flattered ourselves 

you flattered yourselves 

they flattered themselves 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



S48 



REFLECTIVE VERB S. — § 56. 



PLUPERFECT. 



Je m'etais flatte, m. flattec,/. 
To t'etais flatte or flattie, 

: llatte, 
Elle s'etait flattec, 
On s'etait flatte, 
Noui nons etions flatt6s or flatties, 

mi etiez flattes or flattees, 
lis s'ctaimt flat 

Otaient flattica,/ 



I had flattered myself 
thou hadstflaUeicd thyself 
he had flattered himself 
she had flattered herself 

•flattered hims>!fl one's stif 
ire had flattered ourselves 
you hail flattered yourselves 
'they had flattered 'themselves 
they had flattered themselves 



Jo mo flatteral, 
To t«- Bal 
11 se flattcra, 
attera, 
Nona boob fl atte ro na. 

Us se tlatteront, 



/ shall or will flatter myselj 
thou shalt or ir Ht flatter thyself 

I r Wtfl flatter himself 
one trill flatter 'hi mse If one's self 

.'Her ourselves 

r tktmmhm 



Fl'TURE ANTKRK'R. 



Jc mc serai flatto. ri. fiattcV./. 

11 se sera tlatt*, 

atec, 

lit.'-. 
Nooi D tlattecs, 

m Battet «r : ; 

■ Mront ilatt. - 



■•■■- flattered myselj 

tve flattered thi/self 
' ,ire flattered himself 
v./iv flattered herself 

i , flattered himself 

■,: ourselves 
\ rilves 

red themselves 
red themselves 



CONDH : 



Jc mo flatterais, 

Tn t.' (!.itt.-r»is, 

•••rait. 
On so flalt<-rait. 

• us ihttrrions, 
ttariea, 
aient. 



/ • ' ', could, might flatter 

"i uself 
■ umse'lf 
Hotter himself, one's self 

■ ttti r our, 
■' Uter yourselves 
".■r 'themselves 



Jc rue serais flatte, m. flattec,/. 
rail Hatt6 or flattec, 

■ 

Nooi nuns wrions flattes m 

■ !• | Halt, s M 

• Qattea, m. 
Elles se scraient flattees,/. 



jrauld, could, might M 
i-isclf 
',/.;/ have flattered thyself 
■are flattered himself 
' herself 
: kave Mattered 

ire WUgkt have flattered ourselves 
vou irould have flattered ytnmeive* 
uld have flattered tkemsehsU 
aid have flattered \" 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. — § 56. 



349 



Flatte-toi, 
Qii'il se flatte, 
Qu'on se flatte, 
Flattons-nous, 
Flattes-vous, 
Qa'ils ee flattent, 



Imperative Mode. 



flatter thyself 

let him flatter himself 

let one flatter one's self, 

let us flatter ourselves 

flatter yourselves 

let them flatter themselves 



Subjunctive Mode. 



Que je me flatte, 
Que tu te flattes, 
Qu'il se flatte, 
Qu'on se flatte, 
Que nous nous flattions, 
Que vous vous flattiez, 
Qu'ils se flattent, 



Que je me flattasse, 

Que tu te flattasses, 

Qu'il se flattat, 

Qu'on se flattat, 

Que nous nous flattassions, 

Que vous vous flattassiez, 

Qu'ils se flattassent, 



that I may flatter myself 
that thou may est flatter thyself 
that he may flatter himself 
that one may flatter himself 
that we may flatter ourselves 
that you may flatter yourselves 
that they may flatter themselves 



IMPERFECT. 



that I might flatter myself 
that thou mightest flatter thyself 
that he might flatter himself 
that one might flatter himself 
that we might flatter ourselves 
that you might flatter yourselves 
that they might flatter themselves 



Que je me sois flatte, m. flattee, /. 
Que tu te sois flatte or flattee, 
Qu'il se soit flatte, 
Qu'elle se soit flattee, 
Qu'on se soit flatte, 
Que nous nous soyons flattes 01 
flattees, 



that I may have flattered myself 
that thou mayest have flattered thyself 
that he may have flattered himself 
that she may have flattered herself 
that one may have flattered himself 
that we may have flattered ourselves 



Que vous vous soyez flattes or that you may have flattered yourselves 

that they may have flattered themselves 
that they may have flattered themselves 



Qu'ils se soient flattes, m. 
Qu'elles se soient flattees,/. 



PLUPERFECT. 



Que je me fusse flatte, m. flattee, /. that I might have flattered myself 
Que tu te fusses flatte or flattee, 

Qu'il se fut flatte, 
^Qu'elle se fut flattee, 
Qu'on se fut flatte, 
Que nous nous fussions flattes or 



that thou mightest have flattered thy 

self 
that he might have flattered himself 
that she might have flattered herself 
that one might have flattered himself 
that we might have flattered ourselves 

fussiez flattes or that you might have flattered your- 
selves 
flattes, m. that they might have flattered thtm- 

selves 

Qu'elles se fussent flattens,/. that they might have flattered them- 

selves 



Que vous vous 

flattees, 
Qu'ils se 



350 



REFLECTIVE VERB S. § 57. 



IsFrarnvE Mode. 

•RESENT. PAST. 

8e flatter, to flatter one's self | S'e-tre flatte, to have flattered one's selj 

Participle. 

present. compound. 

8c flattant, flattering one's self | S'6tant flatW, having flattered one's stlj 

PAST. 

Flatt*. m. flattie,/. flatWs.ro. p. flatUSes, /. p. flattered 

§ 57. — Neoative Form of TnE Reflective Verb. 
NE PAfl SE FLATTER, SOT TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF. 
Indicative M 



Je no me flatte pas, 
Tu u tfl Battel pas, 

Jl lit- M llatt'- ; 

On m m tiii.it-- 

Noui in- nun-- stations pas, 
VOM M fOOa Battel pas, 
! Ill pas, 

Ac 



I do not flatter myself 

r' not flutter thyself 
he does not flatter hiv. 
one does not flatter hims»:lf 

■■■t ft.iltrr our: 

wradMi 

they do not flalt> r themstlves 



,11 add a compound tense and the imperative conjugated U 
this form. 



past is-m-.riMTK. 



>f 



DM flattl, m i 1 

Til M 

■Da in- i*es1 pas 1 1 .«. - • 

• in in- >'.-t pej tiatt6, 
Nmis in- in .us somnica pas flattis 
or tl.i! 

■ tea pas flatted or you have not flattered yourselves 
flan. 

v.nt pas flattcs. m. 
EUcs ne sc soi.; 



I hare not flattered myself 
t'lou hast not ftatt 
he has 

I Uttrtd herself 
one has. not flattered himself 
we ha ourselvt 



tkey Kane not flattered themselves 
iKey hare not flattered themselves 
•f- 



Imperative ! 



' DM, 

ll.'ltt. 



itte 
vjuil m m flatte 
Qa'an bb «e iatl 

il.itti.ns pas, 

I pAS, 

(ju'ili in- si- (lattcnt pas, 
Ac. Ac 



,lo not flatter thyself 

Ul him not flatter JtSD 

let one nat flatter himself 

Ul us not flatter ourselves 

do not flatter yourselves 

let them not flatter themselves 



Y avoir. — § 6 1-2. 355 

(8.) This formation m ist not prevent the change of y into i, ac- 
cording to Rule (2.) { 49. 

(9.) The participle past forms all the compound tenses of verbs 
with the aid of the auxiliaries avoir and ttre: &s,fai chante,je suis 
aimLf 'avals chante,fetais aime. 

§ 61-2. Paradigm of the Unipersonal Verb Y Avoir, 

To BE THERE. 

Indicative Mode. 

present. past indefinite. 

II y a, there is; there are | H y a eu, tliere has been; tliere have 

been 

IMPERFECT, PLUPERFECT. 

II y avait, there was ; there were | II y avait eu, there had been 

PAST DEFINITE. ^A ANTERIOR. 

II y eut, there was ; there were | II y eut eu^T there had been 

FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

H y aura, there will be | II y aura eu, there will have been 

Conditional Mode. 

present. past. 

II y aurait, there would be | II y aurait eu, there would have been 

Imperative Mode. 

Qu'il y ait, Let there be. 

Subjunctive Mode. 

present. past. 

Qu'il v ait, that iliere may be | Qu'il y ait eu, that 'there may have 

been 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

Qu'il y eut, that there might be | Qu'il y eut eu, that tliere might have 

been 

Infinitive Mode. 

present. past. 

Y avoir, to be there | T avoir eu, to have been there 

Participle.- 

present. compound. 

Y ayant, tliere being | Y ayant eu, there having been 

FAST OR PASSIVE. 



§ 62 ALPHABET 
OF THE IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, 

SEE $ 44, RCLB (2.) 

The figures placed after the infinitive of the Terbt 
The tenses not given In 



lunmnvi. 


PARTICIPLES. 


INDICATIVE. 


IXPERrBCT. 


Part Definite 


Abatyre, 4. to 


abattant 


j'abats 


j'abattais 


j'abattia 


Mtfl dmcrx 


abattu. /. c. 


Ml BATTRE 






Ab-uidrk, 4. 
-A to absolve 


absolvant 


j'absous 


j'absolvais 




absons 


tu absous 


lvais 




MB. avoir 


absout 


il absout 


il absolvait 




defective. 




n. .ilisulvons 
v. absolve/, 
ils absolvent 


n al'solvions 
v. absolviez 
i. absolvaient 




Abstenir (s') 


s'abs tenant 


jo m'abstiens 


je m'abstenaia 


je m'abstina 


.;A5/<it» 


abstcnu. /. e. 


rami 






AnsTBAiRK. 4. 


abstravaiit 


j'abstrais 


jabstrayaia 




to abstract 


■batraB 


See TRAIRE 






!I!R, 2. 


Moouaai 


jac-omrs 


j'accouraia 


j'accourus 


Ui run to 


accouru, / e. 


see courir 








accroissant 


j'aeerois 


j'accroissais 


Jaccnxa 


rrtlSt 


'. .'. 


iTRE 


Beo. 




M.I.IR, 2. 


.i.-ru.illant 


jaccneille 


j'accueillaia 


j'accueilllt 




arrucilli,/. c. 


•I.I.IR 






. A' lll.TKR, 1. 

S\ to buy 


achetant ' 




j'achctais 


j'achetal 


achctA, /. e. 


tu achates 


like CHANTER 




aux. avoir 




il achate 






$ 40 




n. ai'lietons 






peculiar. 




v. achete7. 
i. achotcnt 






Aonra, l. 


achevant 




j'achevais 

like CHANTER 


j'acheval 


to eompUte 


achev6, c. 


tu acheves 




aux. avoir 




il achevo 






% *». (6) 




n. ailievons 






iliar. 




vim 

i. achevent 






V AcqcCrir, 2. 
^ to acquire 


acqu6rant 


j'acquiers 


j'acqueraia 


j'acquis 


acquis,/, e. 


in ar<|uiers 


tu acqueraia 


tu Mqafti 


aux. avoir 




il acquiort 


il arqtirrait 


il acquit 


Irregular. 




n. acqucrona 


n ftoqaftrloBf 


n. acqulmea 






V. ar,|i: 


v. acqucrioz 


v. acquitoa 






i. ac.jnio.rent 


ilsnrqu6raicnt 


ils aojuircnt 


Ap'oivork, 4. 


anjoisnant 


j'a'ljoins 


j'ailjoignaia 


j ailjoignw 


>/!/<•, «f-C. 


adjoint./, c. 


v . iiRE. 






Admettrk, 4. 


aihn.-ttant 


J'admea 


j'admottaia 


j'adraU 


U xdmit 


adrois/. e. 


see METTRB 







ICAL TABLE 

PECULIAR AflD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

§ 43, rule (7) and § 49, 

indicate the conjugations to which they belong 

this Table are not used. 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect 


j'abattrai 


j'abattrais 

j'absoudrais 
tu absoudrais 


abats 


j'abatte 


j'abattiese 


j'absoudrai 
tu absoudras 


j 'absolve 




absous 


tu absolves 




il absoudra 


il absoudrait 


q. absolve 


il absolve 




n. absoudrons 


n. absoudrions 


absolvons 


n. absolvions 




v. absoudrez 


v. absoudriez 


absolvez 


v. absolviez 




i. absoudront 


i. absoudraient 


q. absolvent 


i. absolvent 




je m'abstien- 


je m'abstien- 




je m'abstieniie 


jem'abstinsso 


[drai 


[drais 
j'abstrairais 


abstiens-toi 




' 


j'abstrairai 




j'abstraie 








abstrais 






j'accourrai 


j'accourrais 


accours 


j'accoure 


j'accourusse 


j'accroitrai 


j'accroitrais 


accrois 


j'accroisse 


j'accrusse 


j'accueillerai 


j'accueillerais 


accueille 


j'accueille 


j'accueillisso 


j'acheterai 


j'acheterais 


j 'achete 


j'achetasse 


tu acheteras 


tu acheterais 


achete 


tu achetes 


like 


il achetera 


il acheterait 


q. achete 


il achete 


CHANTER 


n. acheterons 


n. acbdterions 


achetons 


n. achetions 




v. acheterez 


v. acheteriez 


achetez 


v. achetiez 




ils acheteront 


i. acheteraient 


q. achetent 


ils achetent 




j'acheverai 


j'acheverais 




j'acheve 


j'achevasqp 


tu acheveras 


tu acheverais 


acheve 


tu acheves 


like 


il achevera 


il acheverait 


q. acheve 


il acheve 


CHANTER 


n. acheverons 


n. acheverions 


achevons 


n. achevions 




r. acheverez 


v. acheveriez 


achevez 


v. acheviez 




ils acheveront 


i. acheveraient 


q. achevent 


i. achevent 




j'acquerrai 
*n acquerras 


j'acquerrais 




j'acquiere 


j'acquisse 


tu acquerrais 


acquiers 


tu acquieres 


tu acquisses 


il acquerra 


il acquerrait 


q. acquiere 


il acquiere 


il acquit 


n. acquerrons 


n. acquerrions 


acquerons 


n. acquerions 


n. acquissions 


i. acquerrez 


v. acquierriez 


acquerez 


v. acqueriez 


v. acquissiez 


ils acquerront 


i. acquerraient 


q. acquierent 


i. acquierent 


i. acquissent 


j'adjoindrai 


j'adjoindrais 


adjoins 


j'adjoigne 


j'adjoignisse 


j'admettrai 


j'admettrais 


admets 


j'admette 


j'admisse 



y 



358 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, ftClUAR. 



Ihfihitive. J Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definite, 


X Aller, 1. to allant 


je vais 


j'allais 


j'allai 


g° 


alld/. o. 


tu vaa 


tu alia is 


tu alias 


aux.dtre 




il va 


il allait 


il alia 


invgular. 




n. allons 


n. allions 


n. allaroes 






v. allez 


v. allicz 


v. allitea 






ils vont 


ils allaient 


i. allfcrent 


AMPWi 1. to amenant 


j'amfcnc 


j'ameoalB 


j'amenai 


bring aiiici ■ 


$ 49, m 

j amoncollo 


see achkvkr 




Amonocub, 1 Maonewirt 


j'amoDoelaia 


j'araoncela! 


unoBG 


(4) 

j apparais 


H.EK 




AppakaItrk,}. nppamlmnt 


I'apparaiflMfa 


j'apparus 


.-<> appear apparn f. .-. 


LlTEf 






ArPAUTKME, 2 appartonaot 


j'appartiena 


j'appartcnais 


j'appartins 


]g appartnni f. c. 


me rare. 






Appklxb, 1. /- appelant 


j'appelk 


j'appdah 


j'appelai 


call 


appeU 


in appeDaa 




like 


aux. av<.ir 




il appelle 


( iianter 


CHANTER 






n appelona 






peculiar 




v. appelei 
ils appellant 






ArrRKN-niiK.-l. appretumt 


j'appreoda 


j'apprt'iiais 


j'appris 


to learn apprtfl 


MiKK 






Applvhh, 1. to appnyant 


j'appuie 


j'appuyais 


j'appuyai 


support appoyi /. e. 


tu appui.s 


t. appnyaii 


like 


aux. avoir 




il appule 


il appnjaU 


CHANTER 






n appuv.iiis 


ii. appnykNM 




lliar. 




v. appuvc/. 

ils appakat 


v. appajhi 

1 lj [ l!\ U.Ilt 




Absaiu.ir. 2. assalllant 


I'aeeaQle 


j issaill.iis 




U> assault a.vsailli f. o. 


, ; 'lrs 


I i->:iillais 


t. assaillis 






il aaaafllfl 


i. ;i-*aillait 


i. assaillit 






n. assaill-ms 


tOlkai 


n. aasaillirmt 






v. assail!.-/. 


iilii-z 


v. assailii.s 






ils assaillrnt 


latent 


i. assaillirent 


AsSEOIR. ft, 






jassla 


v* somrthi': 


me b'asseoir 






(town; to mat. 








y' A»»koir.(»'j :i. s'aawyant 


'•■■Is 


j.' m'aai 


j Ill'.lSMS 


to+Sit 




t t'antodi 




t. t'assis 


aux. Atre 






i a-s.yait 


t. I'aaU 


irrt-jjular. 






n. n. asseyions 


n. n. asstrae* 








yi./. 


v. v. asMl.'s 






i. s'asscii nt 


i. s'assryai.nt 


i. s'assin nt 


Astrkinpkk 1. astretgnant 


j'.istr.ins 


• 




to compel lastretl 


N !>RE 






ATTrisnru:, 4. att.-ignant 


j'att.'in-* 


j atkigrials 


jatttlgnia 


to attain. att.-int f. c. 


M>RE 






Attf.i.kr. 1. to attelairf 


i'att.'ll.- 


j'uttolais 


J'att:lai 


putto,harnr 


J attrait 


I.ER 




Attraire, 4. to attr.' 


j'attrayais 




attract attrait f. e. 


me trmiie 






AvrsiK. 2. /./avmaut 


il avicnt 


il avenait 


il avint 


happen avenu 


il happens 


il was happen- 
ing 


U happened 


Atoir, to hart 


see model $ 47 







AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



G2 



359 



FUTURE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


j'irai 


j'irais 




j'aiile 


j'allasse 


tu iras 


tu irais 


va 


tu ailles 


tu allasses 


il ira 


il irait 


q. aille 


il aille 


il allat 


n. irons 


n. irions 


allons 


n. allions 


n. allassions 


V. irez 


v. iriez 


allez 


v. alliez 


v. allassiez 


ils iront 


i. iraient 


q. aillent 


i. aillent 


i. allassent 


j'amenerai 


j'amenerais 


amene 


j'amene 


j'amenasse 


j'amoncellerai 


j'amoncelle- 
[rai& 


amoncelle 


j'amoncelle 


j'amoncelasse 


j'apparaitrai 


j'appar&itrais 


apparais 


j'apparaisse 


j'apparusse 


j'appartien- 


j'appartien- 


j'appartienne 


j'appartinsse 


[drai 


[drais 
j'appellerais 


appartiens 






j'appellerai 




j 'appelle 


j'appelasse 


tu appelleras 


t. appellerais 


appelle 


tu appelles 


like 


il appellera 


i. appellerait 


q. appelle 


i. appelle 


CHANTER 


n. appellerons 


n. appellerions 


appelons 


n. appelions 




v. appellerez 


v. appelleriez 


appelez 


v. appeliez 




i. appelleront 


i.appelleraient 


q. appellent 


i. appellent 




j'apprendrai 


j'apprendrais 


apprends 


j'apprenne 


j'apprisse 


j'appuierai 


j'appuierais 




j 'appuie 


j'appuyasse 


t. appuieras 


t. appuierais 


appuie 


tu appuies 


like 


i. appuiera 


i. appuierait 


q. appuie 


il appuie 


CHANTER 


n. appuierons 


n. appuierions 


appuyons 


n. appuyions 




v. appuierez 


v. appuieriez 


appuyez 


v. appuyiez 




i. appuieront 


1. appuieraient 


q. appuient 


ils appuient 




j'assaillirai 


j'assaillirais 




j 'assaille 


j'assaillisse 


t. assailliras 


t. assaillirais 


assaille 


t. assailles 


t. assaillisses 


i. assaillira 


i. assaillirait 


q. assaille 


i. assaille 


i. assailit 


n. assaillirons 


n. assaillirions 


assaillons 


n. assaillions 


n.assaillissions 


v. assaillirez 


v. assailliriez 


assaillez 


v. assailliez 


v. assaillissiez 


i. assailliront 


i. assailliraient 


q. assaillent 


i. assaillent 


i. assaillissent 


j'assierai 


j'assierais 


assieds 


j'asseie 


j'assisse 


je m'assierai 


j. m'assierais 




je m'asseie 


je m'assisse 


t. t'assieras 


t. t'assierais 


assieds toi 


t. t'asseies 


t. t'assisses 


i. s'assiera 


i. s'assierait 


q. s'asseie 


i. s'asseie 


i. s'assit 


n. n. assierons 


n. n. assierions 


asseyons n. 


n. n. asseyions 


n. n. assissiona 


v. v. assierez 


v. v. assieriez 


asseyez v. 


v. v. asseyiez 


v. v. assissiez 


i. s'assieront 


i. s'assieraient 


q. s'asseient 


i. s'asseient 


i. s'assissent 


j'astreindrai 


j'astreindrais 


astreins 


j'astreigne 


j'astreignisse 


j'atteindrai 


j'atteindrais 


j'atteigne 


j'atteignisse 






atteins 






j'attellerai 


j'attellerais 


attelle 


j'attelle 


j'attelasse 


j'attrairai 


j'attrairais 


attra's 


j'attraie 




U aviendra 


il aviendrait 




il avienne 


il avinfc 


it will happen 


it wld. haypen 




it ir.gi. happen 


U mgt. happen 



360 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Im-unTivr. 


Participles. 


LSDICiTIVE. 


IMPERFECT. 


Past Defihitk. 


Avois (r)lobc 


y ayant 


il y a 


il y avait 


il y eut 


there 


eu^unip.) 


there is, are 


there tens, vere 


there icas, veer* 


Battre, 4. to 


hattant 


je bats 


je battais 


je battis 


beat 


battu. /. e. 


tu bats 


tu battais 


tu battis 


aux. avoir 




il bat 


il battel! 


il battit 


irregular. 




n. battons 


n. battions 


n. battimes 






v. battel 


v. bat tie/. 


v. battites 






ils battent 


i. battah-nt 


ils battirent 


, Bcire, 4. to 
^ drink 


buvaut 


je bois 


je buvais 


je bus 


bu, /. e. 


tu bois 


tu buvais 


tu bus 


aux. avoir 




il b.>it 


il buvait 


il but 


irregular. 




n. buvona 


n. buvions 


n. buraes 






v. biivr/. 


v. buvi 


v. butes 






ils boivent 


i. bavaleat 


ils burcnt 


Bodillir, 2. to 


bouillant, 


je bous 


je bouillais 


je bouillis 


bed 


buuilli. f. o. 


tu bous 


tu bouillais 


tu bouillis 






il bout 


il bouillait * 


il bouillit 






ii. bouillons 


u. bouillions 


n. bouillimes 






v. bouillez 


v. boilillk 1 /. 


v. bouillites 






i. bouilk-nt 


ils bouillaient 


ils bouillirent 


BoCRRKI.ER, 1. 


buiirrelant 


|e boarrBlfl 


je bourrelais 


je bourrelai 


to torment 


bourrcW,/. c. 


C*) 






Braik 




il brait 






bray 




iLs braient 














BtllNKK, 1. to 


bru'mant 


il bruino 


il bruinait 


il bruina 


driz 


bruino 


. ; Us 


it tras i 


it drizzled 


rsonal. 






1 




Bttll 


bnriHBl 


il bruit 


il bruyait, or 
il bruissait 




riMir. rustle 








•ive. 






ils briiyai. nt 
ils bruissaient 




CaCHETKR, 1. 


cachctant 




je cachflais 


je cacbetai 




■■■./. e. 








HE, 4. to 




j< Ihs 


-nais 


je ceignis 


gird 




tu (-.•ins 


tu nelfneh 




aux. avoir 




il rvint 


il oeteMtt 

n. ccignions 


il ccignit 

■ 


irregular. 




u oaJgnoni 






v. ceignr7: 


v. ceigtiic/. 


v. oeydtti 

■linTit 






pent 


n.ii.Ttt 


Chan 


■ lant 


noelle 


H-.-lais 


je chaDcelai 


to Sl< 


ObaBOl < 




see iffU 












je change*! 


change 




tu rhangoa 


tu changeaia 


tu changeaa 


aux. avoir 




il cbango 


il changeait 


il change* 


' (1) 




n. iliangcons 


ii. cbangions 


n. changi'iraa* 


;!iar. 




v. change* 


v. changies 


v. chau- 






ils cbaa 


ilschangcaicnt 


ils changorcnt 


CiacONscninE, 


circonsorivant 


je circonscrls 


je circonscri- 


j. circonacriTb) 


ircum- 


droumurtt, 




|vais 




[scribe 


[f.e. 








N V | MR, 


circonvi-iiant 


j circonvieus 


je circonve- 


je ctrconvine 


2. to circum- 


circonveuu, 


see tenia 


[naifl 




[vent 


[/.•• 1 









AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 



S61 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


fly aura 


il y aurait 




il y ait 


il y eut 


there will he 


there would be 




there may be 


there might be 
je battisse 


je battrai 


je battrais 




je batte 


tu battras 


tu battrais 


bats 


tu battes 


tu battisses 


il battra 


il battrait 


q. batte 


il batte 


il battit 


n. battrons 


n. battrions 


battons 


n. battions 


n. battissions 


v. battrez 


v. battriez 


battez 


v. battiez 


v. battissiez 


i. battront 


i. battraient 


q. battent 


i. battent 


i. battissent 


je boirai 


j. boirais 




je boive 


je busse 


tu boiras 


tu boirais 


bois 


tu boives 


tu busses 


il boira 


il boirait 


q. boive 


il boive 


il but 


n. boirons 


n. boirions 


buvons 


n. buvions 


n. bussions 


v. boirez 


v. boiriez 


buvez 


v. buviez 


v. bussiez 


i. boiront 


i. boiraient 


q. boivent 


i. boivent 


ils bussent 


je bouillirai 


je bouillirais 




je bouille 


je bouillisse 


tu bouilliras 


tu bouillirais 


bous 


tu bouilles 


tu bouillisses 


il bouillira 


il bouillirait 


q. bouille 


il bouille 


il bouillit 


n. bouillirons 


n. bouillirions 


bouillons 


n. bouillions 


n. bouillissions 


v. bouillirez 


v. bouilliriez 


bouillez 


v. bouilliez 


v. bouillissiez 


5 bouilliront 


i. bouilliraient 


q. bouillent 


il bouillent 


i. bouillissent 


je bourrelerai 


je bourrelerais 


bourrele 


je bourrele 


je bourrelasse 


il braira 


il brairait 








ils brairont 


ils brairaient 








il bruinera 


il bruinerait 


q. bruine 


q. bruine 


q. bruinat 


it will drizzle 


it wld drizzle 


let it drizzle 


it may drizzle 


it ingt. irizzle 


je cacbetterai 


je cachette- 
[rais 


cacbette 


je cacbette 


je cachetasse 


je ceindrai 


je ceindrais 




je ceigne 


je ceignisse 


tu ceindras 


tu ceindrais 


ceins 


tu ceignes 


tu ceignisses 


il ceindra 


il ceindrait 


q. ceigne 


il ceigne 


il ceignit 


n. ceindrons 


n. ceindrions 


ceignons 


n. ceignions 


n. ceignissions 


v. ceindrez 


v. ceindriez 


ceignez 


v. ceigniez 


v. ceignissiez 


ils ceindront 


ils ceindraient 


q. ceignent 


ils ceignent 


i. ceignissent 


je cbancellerai 


je chancelle- 
[rais 


cbancelle 


je cbancelle 


je chancelassa 


je cbangerai 


je changerais 




je change « 


je changeass« 


like 




change 


tu changes 


tu changeasses 


CHANTER 




q. change 


like 


il changelt 






changeons 


CHANTER 


changeassions 






cbangez 




v change assiez 






q. cbangent 




i.changeassent 


je cirsconcri- 


je circonscri- 




je circonscrive 


je circonscri- 


[rai 


[rais 


circonscris 




[visse 


)«} circonvien- 


je circonvien- 




je circonvi- 


je circonvinsae 


[drai 


[drais 


circonviens 


[enne 





10 



362 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



ijfFlMlTlN 



Clore, 4. to 
close 
defective 

COLLETER, 1. 

U> collar 

CDMBATTnE,4. 

•hat 
(TU,4. 

i ml 

CoMPARAITRF., 

4. to appear 

Co.MPLAlRK, 4. 

to humor 
OOMFBCMOBS, 

itdcr- 
slaiut 

OoKPBOMrr- 

. 

pnniiU 
UOMCL 

to CO:; 

aux. avoir 
irregular. 



urn, - 

he. 4 

aux. av<>ii 
irregular. 



OOKFtl 

;• 

ivi.ir 
.!ar 



PARTICIPLES. 



Indicative. 



je clos 
clos tu clos 

il clot 

collctant je collate 

collet*./, e. (> 49, (5) 
combat taut Je combats 
combattu. f. e. see battre 
oommettaat je oommeta 
commii ;tre 

compai mparaifl 

compara an pahaItbi 

complai mplaia 

LilU 

je oomprenda 

M)RK 



compha 
compreoant 
oomptia,/ & 

compronnt- 

compromia /'.<• 

concluant 



jccom; 
mi 

je concilia 
tu concilia 

il CODOlnt 

In. ooDolaona 
v. coochiea 
i. oonclnent 

• ours 

oonoom . ■ iur 

i-.im itii-.uit je condnia 
con J nit 



IMPERFECT. pAtT. DzFlMTB. 



je coUetaia 

see ACHBTEB 

je combattais 

je commettaJa 

je comparais- 
[aak 
je compuuBsia 

je comprenaia 



jeoompromel 

[tais 

luais 
luais 

il conclualt 
d. coneluiona 

V. colicluicZ 

i concluaient 

•urais 



je conauiaaia 
tu oondalaaJa 
il conduiaait 



<o!i!it. /. e. 



tu OOUdnb 

il oondntl 

ii conduiaona n conduisiona 

r. condaisiei 
Ills conduiacnt I. condulaalenl 



je colletai 
je combattto 
jo commis 
je comparer 
je complua 
je compria 

je compromia 



16, f. e. 



to know 
Irregular. 



conmi f. e. 



il r, .ii lit 

i. conflaenf 



.!-• 



je com • 
hi cool 

il Coll.. 

il. coiilisioiis 

laiea 
i conflaaient 

je cot. 



je oonetaa 
tu conelna 
il conclnt 

11. coticlumcsi 

r. cooclatea 

la coiiclurciit 

je o onoourni 

je con.luisis 
u coinluisis 

il condniaH 
d. condaiatmoa 

v. coinluisitM 

i oondnlalrcvj 

Je ciiiis 
in cenfia 

il coiilit 

ii. confimot 

v. confll 

Kraal 

ji !.ii«i 

j.M-onj. 

je comraa 



■ 



1 

1 
to consent Icooaenti. /. e. 



tu connaiaaaia tu comma 
il connaiaaail il coanat 

•n'iin«'n 
v. rotmuNs 
nun-lit 

nqoJa 



jo oonqu/raia 



AXD UNIPEUSONAL VERBS. § 62 



363 



I Conditional. 



je clorai 
tu cloras 
il clora, &c. ■ 
je colleterai 

je combattrai 

je commettrai 

jo comparai- 

[trai 

je coniplairai 

je compren- 
[drai 

je conipromet- 
[trai 

je conclnrai 
tu concluras 
il conclura 
n. conclurons 
v. conclurez 
ils concluront 
je concourrai 

je conduirai 
tu conduiras 
il conduira 
n. conduirons 
v. conduirez 
ils conduiront 
je confirai 
tu confiras 
il confira 
n. confirons 
v. confirez 
i. confront 
je congelerai 

je conjoindrai 

je connaitrai 
tu connaitras 
il connaitra 
n. connaitrons 
v. connaitrez 
ils connaitront 
je conquerrai 

je consentirai 



je clorais 
tu clorais 
il clorait, etc. 
je colleterais 

je combattrais 

je conimet- 
[trais 

je coniparai- 
[trais 

je complairais 

je compren- 
[drais 

je comproruet- 
[trais 

je conclurais 
tu conclurais 
il conclurait 
n. conclurions 
v. concluriez 
l.concluraient 
je concourrais 

je conduirais 
tu conduirais 
il conduirait 
n. conduirions 
v. conduiriez 
i conduiraient 
je confirais 
tu confirais 
il confirait 
n. confirions 
v. confiriez 
ils confiraient 
je congelerais 

je conjoin- 

[drais 
je connaitrais 
tu connaitrais 
il connaitrait 
n. connaitrions 
v. connaitriez 
i.connaitraient 
je conquerrais 

je consenti- 
[rais 



collete 

combats 

commets 

comparais 

complais 

comprenda 

compromets 

conclus 
q. conclue 
concluons 
concluez 
q. concluent 

concours 

conduis 
q. conduise 
conduisons 
conduisez 
q. conduisent 

confis 
q. confise 
confisons 
confisez 
q. confisent 

congele 

conjoins 

connais 

q. connaisse 

connaissons 

connaissez 

q. connaissent 

conquiers 



Subjunctive. 



je collete 

je combatte 

je commette 

je compa- 

[raisse 
je complaise 

je comprenne 



je compro- 
fmette 

je conclue 
tu conclues 
il conclue 
n. concluions 
v. concluiez 
ils concluent 
je concoure 

je conduise 
tu condnises 
il conduise 
n. conduisions 
v. conduisiez 
ils conduisent 
je confise 
tu 
il 

n. confisions 
v. confisiez 
i. confisent 
je congele 

je conjoigne 

je connaisse 
tu connaisses 
il connaisse 
n. connaissions 
v. connaissiez 
ils connaissent 
je conquiere 

je consente 



jecolletasse 
je combattisso 
je commisse I 
je comparusse 
je complusse 
je comprisse 



je compro- 
[misse 

je conclusse 
tu conclusses 
il conclut 
n. conclussions 
v. conclussiez 
conclussent 
je concourusse 

je conduisisse 
tu conduisissea 
1 conduisit 
conduisissions 
v.conduisissiez 
conduisissent 
je confisse 
tu confisses 
il conf it 
confissions 
confissiez 
ils confissent 
je congelasse 

je conjoigcisse 

je connusse 
tu connusses 
il connut 
n. connussiona 
v, connussiez 
ils connussent 
je conquisse 

jo .'xmnentisge 



3G4 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Innmnv*. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Impkrfect. 


Past Definite. 


CON8TRUIRE,4- 


construisant 


je construis 


je construisais 


je construisis 


to construct 


construit,/. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






CoNTENIR, 2. 


contcnant 


je contiena 


je contenais 


je contina 


to contain 


contenu./. 8. 


see tenir 






C'iNTRAINDRE. 


contraigriant 


je entrains 


je contraignais 


je contraignia 


4. to constrain 


contraint. t'.c. 


\;>m: 






1 Kill RE. 4 


■lisarit 


je oontredia 


je contrediaata 


je contrcdis 




contredit,/ e. 


tu contredia 


like dire 


like dire 


aux. avoir 




il contredit 
n.contrediaona 
v. contrediaea 
i. contrediaent 






CONTREFAIRE, 




jr contrefkla 


je controfai- 


je contrefia 




oontrerait,/ a. 


see kaire 


[aafa 














ikventr. 


iiant 


kreviena 


je contreve- 


je contrcvina 




CoIitH' Willi /..• 


aaa tenth 


Jnais 




ooovainqnant 


1 a'mes 


je coiivain- 


j.' oonrainqoia 


to atn 


i-Miiv.ii: 




[qoaia 






ooDTenanl ' 


je oonvlena 


je convenaia 


je convins 




oonveno, f. e. 


tee TKviH 








ooqnetant 


je ooqnete 


j<" coquetats 


jo coquetai 


;urt 


ooqnet6 


BBTCH 






OOBSOMPBB, 1 


oorrompanl 


je C"iT. .nips 


j.- corrompala 


je corrompia 




eorrompa / e, 


KPBI 








ooasant 


je oonda 


je conaaia 


je cotisis 




r e. 


in condi 


til <-..u-:iis 


Hi < ..it-is 


aux nvi.ir 




il oond 


il couaalt 


il cooait 


"liar. 




a. I'.nisona 


il .-(iii-; 


ii. <''>iisimca 






v oooaei 


v. couaiei 


v. oooa) 






Da ooiuwnl 


ila couaaient 


Da ooaalreat 


US, 2. fa 


coiirant 




j,- 0001 


je conroa 


ooorn 




tu courala 


tu cooraa 


mix 1 




il c.iirt 


il conrait 


il courut 


irngular. 




n. oooroaa 


ii ioiiri«.iis 


n. conr&maa 








v. conriea 


v. couruti'S 






ils c.nr.iit 


Qa ciiinai.iit 


ils cournrent 


Oovn 


couvrant 


Je convre 


j.' oouTrafa 


j.- OoavrJa 




• ■HlVi'lt./. 0. 


. Kill 








eralgnam 






jo croiguia 




cralnl 


.:>RE 






^ i. 


oroyaal 














111 (TUS 


anx avoir 




il IT.. it 


il croyall 


il rnit 


ular. 




n croyona 


n croyiona 


ii. crdjoea 
















iN crofc nt 


ils croyaienl 


[la cninnt 




je 'T..is 


je crow 








m crobH 


tu crua 


• -. .>ir^ 




il in. it 


il <r..i--.iit 


il cnU 






-.»na 


ii orolaalom 


a. crdmafl 


irregular. 






v crob 








ils cruiaacut 


Ua croli 


, icnt 



AND UNU'ERSONAL VEKBri. 



§ 62 



365 



ForuRic, 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je construirai 


je construirais 


construis 


je construise 


je construisis- 
[se 


je contiendrai 


je contien- 

[drais 


contiens 


je contienne 


je continsse 


je contrain- 


je contrain- 




je contraigne 


je contraignis- 


[drai 


[drais 


contrains 




[se 
je contredisse 


je contredirai 


jecontredirais 




je contredise 


like dire 


like dire 


contredis 
q. contredise 
contredisons 
contredisez 
q. contredisent 






je contreferai 


je contreferais 


contrefais 


je contrefasse 


je contrefisse 


je contrevien- 


je contrevien- 




je contrevien- 


je contrevinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


contreviens 


[ne 




je convaincrai 


je convaincrais 


convaincs 


je convainque 


je convain- 
[quisse 


je conviendrai 


je convien- 
[drais 


conviens 


je convieime 


je convinsse 


je coqueterai 


je coqueterais 


coquete 


je coquete 


je coquetasse 


je corromprai 


je con-omprais 


corromps 


je corrompe 


je corrompissa 


je coudrai 


je coudrais 


je couse 


je cousisse 


tu coudras 


tu coudrais 


couds 


tu couses 


tu coussisses 


il coudra 


il coudrait 


q. couse 


il couse 


il cousit 


n. coudrons 


n. coudrions 


cousons 


n. cousions 


n. cousissions 


v. coudrez 


v. coudriez 


cousez 


v. cousiez 


v. cousissiez 


ils coudront 


i. coudraient 


q. cousent 


i. cousent 


ils cousissent 


je courrai 


je courrais 




je coure 


je courusse 


tu courras 


tu courrais 


cours 


tu coures 


tu courusses 


il courra 


il courrait 


q. coure 


il coure 


il courut 


n. courrons 


n. courrions 


courons 


n. courions 


n. courussiona 


v. courrez 


v. courriez 


courez 


v. couriez 


v. courussiez 


ils courront 


ils courraient 


q. courent 


ils courent 


ils courussent 


je couvrirai 


je couvrirais 


couvre 


je couvre 


je couvrisse 


je craindrai 


je craindrais 


crains 


je craigne 


je craignisso 


je croirai * 


je croirais 
In croirais 




je croie 


je crusse 


tu croiras 


crois 


tu croies 


tu crusses 


il croira 


il croirait 


q. croie 


il croie 


il crat 


n. croirong 


n. croirions 


croyons 


d. croyions 


n. cruseions 


v. croirez 


v. croiriez 


croyez 


v. croyiez 


v. crussiez 


ils croiront 


ils croiraieut 


q. croient 


ils croient 


ils crussent 


je croitrai 


je croitrais 




je croisse 


je crusse 


tu croitrus 


tu croitrais 


crois 


tu croisses 


tucrussec 


il croitra 


il croitrait 


q. croisse 


il croisse 


il crut 


n, croitrons 


n. croitrions 


croissons 


n. croissions 


n. crussions 


v. croitrez 


v. croitriez 


croissez 


v. croissiez 


v. crussiez 


Us croitront 


ils croitraient 


q. croissent 


ils croissent 


ils crussent 



3CG 



IRREGL-LAI5, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



CUEH.LIR, 2. to 

gallver 



Ctnai, 4. to cuiaaot 

bake, conk, tf-c. cuit./. e. 



cueillaul 
cueilli,/. c. 



DfBATTRB, 1 

to debate 
I 

1. to ,. 

Mchou 
mix. avoir & 
defective 



debattaot 
debatto,/ e. 

•lccbti, /. e. 



DIcoudrk, 4. decousant 

■:-u. /. e. 
. .mi. 2. d6couvrant 
decouvert,/.* 
, 4. (0 decrh 

Dions, l '< dedfa 
dedil 

dedoil 
D£paii int 



I 



dcfuilli 
(Besckerdle) 



nrulo d6ft 

l i bSgelaoi 









DftJOINDB I 



UK. -1. 
DtPEIM 

iflMMf 
UN- 

VIR, 2. 

r /*<; to- 
Mtiirdu, 4 



je cueille 

ui ciiL'illcs 
il cueille 
u. CUCUlIoDS 

cueillez 
ils cueillent 

TIRE 

je debate 

see BATTBB 

|e ddcacbette 
je decboia 

HI dicboia 

il dechoit 
ii dec! 

b >lent 
J ■ decouda 

DBI 

oavre 

I I! Ill 

tee icBnug 

Bsomi 
jo dedaia 

WD! iltK 

il d6faille 
ii. dofalUcoa 
v. delaillei 
ils d6falllent 
je defkia 
m i'.uih: 



Imperfect. Past. Definite 



dejoibl 

demenl 

iii'iii'-nti. /'. e. 
demettaot 

lrllliv 

depebj 
d6pelnl 

depla, /'. b. 
lesap] 

■ i is,/, e 

rant 

.1. /'. B. 

deteignanl 

devim. /. a 



Je dejoioa 

Je demem 
tee bsnto 
Je demeta 
rmi 
Je dapeioa 
Moaa 

[preoda 
Je deaaen 

m vanrou 



jw sneillaia 

tu cueillais 
il caeillait 
n. iiK'illious 
v. cuellliei 
ils cueillaient 
jc coisaia 

je debattata 

jedficacbetaia 

j.- d6cboyata 
tu decboyaia 
il decboyait 
ii. dechoyiaua 
v. decboyiea 
iIsd6cboyaient 
jr dec m 

je d6couvraia 

je decrivaia 

je il< dl 

je il.'.luisais 
•-illiiis 

C'tC. 



j.' tlcf.iKais 

•ignais 
Je ill inciitais 
j.' il.'-inctt.iis 

Je depeignaia 

j 1 ' ddplt 

Je daaappio 
[Dab 



jo cucillis 
tu cucillis 
il cucillit 
n. cueillimea 
v. cueillites 
ils cucillireat 
je cuisis 

je debattia 

je decacbetai 

je decbaa 

tu dechus 

il dccluit 

n. decbdnwa 
v. decbatea 

ils ilcchiirciit 

je decouala 

je ib'couvris 
je ddcrivis 
Je iledis 
je lU'duisLs 
bJDbbj 

etc. 



je defls 
ii degela 

je dejoiguis 
je ddmentis 
Je demis 

I 
je ddplua 
je dftaapprh 



j« dateignli 



*D UKIPERS01TAL VERBS. 



367 



je cueillerai 
tu cueilleras 
il cueillera 
n. cueillerons 
v. cueillerez 
ils cueilleront 
je cuirai 

je debattrai 

je decachet- 
" [terai 
je decherrai 
tu deeherras 
il decherra 
n. decherrons 
V. decherrez 
ils dechern 
je decoudrai 



•out 



je cueillerais 
tu cueillerais 
il cueillerait 
n. cueillerions 
v. cueilleriez 
i. cueilleraient 
je cuirais 

je debattrais 

je decachet- 
[terais 
je decherrais 
tu decherrais 
il decherrait 
n. decherrions 
v. decherriez 
i. decherraient 
je decoudrais 



decouvrirai je decouvrirais 



je decrirai 

je dedirai 

je deduirai 

see Bescherelle, 
Dictionnaire 
National. 

je deferai 

a degelera 

je dejoindrai 

je dementirai 

je demettrai 

je depeindrai 

je deplairai 

je desappren- 
[drai 

je desservirai 
Jed6teinlrai 



OoKr..TlONAL. 



je decrirais 
je dedirais 
je deduirais 



je deferai 

il degelerait 

je dejoindrais 

jedementirais 

je demettrais 

je dependrais 

je deplairais 

je desappren- 
[drais 

je desservirais 
*e deteindrais 



cueille 
q.. cueille 
cueillons 
cueillez 
q. cueillent 

cuis 

debats 

decachette 

dechois 
q. dechoie 
dechoj T ons 
dechoyez 
q. dechoient 

decouds 

decouvre 

cris 

dedis 

deduis 



defais 
q. degele 



dejoins 
demens 
demets 
depeins 
deplais 
desapprends 



deteins 



Subjunctive. 



je cueille 
tu cueilles 
il cueille 
n. cueillions 
v. cueilliez 
i. cueillent 
je cuise 

je debatte 

je decachette 

je dechoie 
tu dechoies 
il dechoie 
n. dechoj'ions 
v. dechoyiez 
ils dechoient 
je decouse 

je decouyre 

je decrive 

je dedise 

je deduise 



J6' 

il degele 

je dejoigne 

je demente 

je demette 

je depeigne 

je deplaise 

je desappren 
[ne 

je desserve 
je deteigne 



Imperfect. 



je cueillisse 
tu cueillisses 
il cueillit 
n. cueillissiona 
v. cueillissiez 
ils cueillissent 
je cuisisse 

je debattisso 

je decache- 

[tasse 
je dechusse 
tu dechusses 
il dechut 
n. dechussiona 
v. dechussiez 
ils dechussent 
je decousisse 

je decouvrissa 

je decrivisse . 

je dedisse 

je deduisisse 



je defisse 
il degelat 
je dejoignisse 
je dementisse 
je demisso 
je depeignissa 
je deplusse 
je desapprisse 

je desservissa 

je deteignisse 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



iNflNITIV*. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Impbrfect. 


Past Dkhsjti, 


DBTENIB, 2 /(' 


fie tenant 


je detiens 


je detcnais 


jc detins 


detain 


detenu,/, e. 


SCC TENIR 






DirniiRE, 4 


detrui>ant 


jedfitruis 


je detruisaia 


je dfitruisis 




detruit,/ e. 


SCC CONDHRE 






Dktekib, 2. to 


devenant 


je devisBB 


je deveimis 


jo devins 


bccetmc 


develiu./. e. 


see TF.MR 






DavtTia, 2. to 




jo div, 


je devotais 


je dSvfltis 


divest 


1 /. C. 


see vetik 






/^ DiRi: 1 ' 


di-ant 


je <lis 


je disais 


je dis 




■lit. /. C. 


tu (lis 


tu disais 


tu dis 


mix. a?oir 




il .lit 


il disait 


il dit 


Irregular. 




n. diCODB 


n. disimis 


n. dimes 






v. elites 


v. diaiea 


v. dites 








Qfl disaient 


ils dirent 


DlSCOlRIR, 2. 


diaconraaf 


je discoon 


je di.se, .urais 


je discourua 




diacoara 


aia 






:.\ITRK, 


dlspara 


je disparata 


je diaparaia- 


jo disparua 


1 ' 


dlaparu 




[aaia 




Dimoi i 


dlaaolvant 


je dlaaona 


je diatolvaJa 














-IKK, -1. 


diatrayanl 


}■■ diitrala 


je distrayais 






distrait 


IrtK 






sleep 


dormant 


je don 


je don 


je dormii 






tu dormajs 


tu donate 


aux. avoir 




il dort 


il dermal) 


il dormit 


irregular. 




n. dorm 


n. dormloaa 


n. dormlmef 






v. dorm 


v. dormiei 


v. doriintes 


% 




m ut 


lla dormaient 


ils dunnirent 






il echolt 




il ecliut 






!iei 










il eel,, l 






; „;.' 1 


ftoloe 








' 




1'iis 




j'4condui8la 


f use 




1 IRK 












j'i erivais 


j eerivis 










III eerivis 


nux i 








il eerivit 


uliir. 






II reii' 


11. eerivimoa 






■ 


. Lei 












ils i-eri 


tut 


rli^ant 


jelis 




j . lus 












UK. -J. to 


rlnettant 




taia 


j'einis 






rn r. 








emmenant 


j'emmi 


j'ellllle 


jVnimcnal 




emmei 


j ell),, 11, Is 


see mknbi 




DBS, 1. 


etii'Ullant 


!.iia 


j Yinnulus 




I'liluiili: 














j '■"nii.i. 


j "Sinus 




lam, 1 e. 


. Oil 






1 employant 


I'emploie 




j 'employe! 






K 




Empreindbe, empi 


clgoali 




4. to imr 


ut,/. 0. 









AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



62 



369 



Conditional. 



je detiendrai 

je detruirai 

je deviendrai 

je devetirai 

je dirai 
tu diras 
il dira 
n. dirons 
v. direz 
ils diront 
je discourrai 

je disparaitrai 

je dissoudrai 

je distrairai 

je dormirai 
tu dormiras 
il dormira 
n. dormirons 
v. dormirez 
ils dormiront 
il echerra 

il eclora 

j'econduirai 

j'ecrirai 
tu ecriras 
il ecrira 
n. ecrirons 
v. 6crirez 
ils ecriront 
j'elirai 

j'emettrai 

j'emmenerai 

j'emoudrai 

j'emouvrai 

j'emploierai 

j'erutpreindrai 



je detiendrais 

je detruirais 

je deviendrais 

je devetirais 

je dirais 
tu dirais 
il dirait 
n. dirions 
v. diriez 
ils diraient 
je discourrais 



detieus 
detruis 
deviens 



je disp^i cii.- 

[trais disparais 
je dissoudrais 

je distrairais 

je dormirais 

tu dormirais dors 

il dormirait 



Imperative. 



dis 

^. dise 
disons 
dites 
q. disent 

discours 



dissous 

distrais 

dors 

qu'il dorme 



u aormirarc qu u aor 
n. dormirions dormons 



v. dorminez dormez 
ils dormiraient q. dorment 
il echerrait 

il eclorait 

j'econduirais 



^'ecrirais 
tu ecrirais 1 
il ecrirait 
n. ecririons 
v. ecririez 
ils ecriraient 
j'elirais 

J 



'emettrais 

j'emmenerais 

emmene 
j'emoudrais 

emouds 
j'emouvrais 

j'emploierais 

j'empreindrais 



econduis 

ecris 
q. ecrive 
ecrivons 
ecrivez 
q. ccrivent 

elis 

craets 



emeus 
emploie 



Subjunctive. 



empreins 
16* 



je detienne 

je detruise 

je devienne 

je devete 

je dise 
tu dises 
il dise 
n. disions 
disiez 
ils disent 
je discoure 

je disparaisse 

je dissolve 

je distraie 

je dorme 
tu dormes 
il dorme 
n. dormions 
v. dormiez 
ils dorment 



q. eclose 

j'econduise 

j'ecrive 
tu ecrives 
il ecrive 
n. ecrivions 
v. ecrivies 
ils ecrivent 
j'elise 

j'emette 

j'emmene 

j'emoule 

j'emeuve 

j'emploio 

j'empreigne 



je detmsse 

je detruisisse 

je devinsse 

je devetisse 

je disse 

tu disses 

il dit 

n. dissions 

v. dissiez 

ils dissent 

je discourusse 

je disparussa 



je dormisse 
tu dormisses 
il dormit 
n. dormissiona 
dormissiez 
ils dormissent 
qu'il echut 



j'econduisisse 

j'ecrivisse 
tu ecrivisses 
il ecrivit 
n. ecrivissions 
v. ecrivissiez 
ils ecrivissent 
j'elusse 



j'emmenasse 

j'emoulusso 

j'emusse 

j'employasse 

j'empreignisse 



370 



IBREGCLAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Ivmitivk. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Indicative. 


Impkrfkct. 


Past. DrrimTi 


Enci.ore, 4. to 




j'enclos 








enclos, /. e. 








UIR, 2. 


.nit 


j'encours 


j'encourais 


j'encouras 


ur 


encouru./. e. 


KIR 






Endormir, 2. 


endormant 




jVmlorniais 


j'cndormiB 




endormi. /". e. 


:\!IR 






Emu-irk. 4. to endi 


j'endnis 


j'enduisais 


j'cnduisis 


■ f. e. 


NDUIRK 








jVnftvins 


j'enfrcignais 


j'eniYeignis 




mire 








j • mVnfuis 


j. m'enfoyaifl 


je m'cnftiis 


to run away enfui 


mb ron 






1 


ji-iijoins 


j'enjoignala 


j'enjolgnla 










l 


onoie 


j.- lnVnniivais 


jo mVnnuyai 


VKR 


(2) 






j. m'enquien 


j. menqoenuB 


j.- mVnquis 


juin: 


enquu 


. £l!IU 










j. m'ent 


je m'entre- 


j. m'entremis 


PBKX- 


entrem 


ITBB 


[mettaia 




entrepi 




j'entreprenaia 


j\-ntrc>i»ris 




entrepi \i 


I'ttK 
















rarra, 


oant 


Ueu 


tenala 


j'ctitrctins 




entretena. f. e. 


M TBNIR, 








j'cllti. . 


j'ontre 


jVnttvvis 












ji'iiv.ii.' 


i'.nv. .y.iis 


j'enroyaJ 






Ill «II\ 


III ■•IIYuVilis 


in cnvoyaa 


MX. avoir 






il enrojmH 


il eavoyi 


;lur. 




11. <IIY 


;. i.ms 


ii. I'uvoyimca 








v. enroyia 


v. cnviiyitea 






otenl 


ils ciiv.ivairnt 


ils ciivtiyfiront 






j.- in . : 


j.' ill'. -j.j-.-iKiis 


je mVpris 


hi n» 




MiRK 












J'etMJlJ 


- "•" 
















)uis 


jrt.i^is 






. >RK 






I.KR. 1. 




lie 


I'itinoelle 


j'etiiioclal 








I) 
j 6tiquetaJa 




' 


6tiqa 




J'ttlqoetal 






1 TKR 














NDU, 4. 


iant 


-nais 


j'atrolgnU 


to j 














fexdttB 




j'oxcltu 




excla ■ 


I.IKH 






ExTBAiir, 4. 


■ 


j\-xtr.iis 


j'extraj 






/. c. 


!RK 







AKD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 



371 



j'enclorai 

j'encourrai 

j'endormirai 

j'enduirai ^" 

j'enfreindrai 

je m'enfuirai 

j'enjoindrai 

jem'ennuierai 

jem'enquerrai 

je m'entre- 
[mettrai 

j'entrepren- 
[drai 

j'entretiendrai 

j'entreverrai 

j'enverrai 
tu enverras 
il enverra 
n. enverrons 
v. enverrez 
ils enverront 
je m'epren- 
[drai 



Conditional. 



j'enclorais 

j'encourrais 

j'endormirais 

j'enduirais 

j'enfreindrais 

je m'enfuirais 

j'enjoindrais 

je ni'ennuie- 
[rais 

je m'enquer- 
[rais 

je m'entre- 
[mettrais 

j'entrepren- 
[drais 

j'entretien- 

[drais 
j'entreverrais 

j'enverrais 
tu enverrais 
il enverrait 
n. enverrions 
v. enverriez 
ils enverraient 
je m'epren- 
[drais 



fessaierai 
j'eteindrai 
j'etincellerai 
j'etiqueterai 

j'etreindrai 
j'exclurai 
j 'extrairai 



encours 

endors 

enduis 

enfreins 

enfuis-toi 

enjoins 

ennuie-toi 

enquiers-toi 

entremets-toi 

entreprends 

entretiens 

entrevois 

envoie 
q. envoie 
envoyons 
envoyez 
q. envoient 

eprends-toi 



j'eteindrais 

j'etincellerais 

j'etiqueterais 

j'etreindrais 

j'exclurais 

j'extrairais 



Subjunctive. Imperfect 



eteins 

etincelle 

etiquete 

etreins 
exclus 
extrais 



j encoure 

j'endorme 

j'enduise 

j'enfreigne 

je m'enfuie 

j'enjoigne 

je m'ennuie 

je ru'enquiere 

je m'entre- 
[mette 

j'entreprenne 

j'entretiemie 

j'entrcvoie 

j 'envoie 
tu envoies 
il envoie 
n. envoyions 



j encourusse 

j'endormisse 

j'enduisisse 

j'enfreignissc 

je m'enfuisse 

j'enjoiguisse 

je m'ennuyas- 
[se 
je m'enquisse 

je m'entre- 
[misse 

j'entreprisse 

j'entretinsse 

j'entrevisse 

j'envoyasse 
tu envoyasses 
il envoyat 
nenvoyassions 



v. envoyiez v. envoyassiez 
ils envoient ils envoyasstnt 



je m eprenne 

j'essaie 
j'eteigne 
j'etincelle 
j 'etiquete 

j'etreigne 

j'exclue 

j'extraie 



je m epnsse 

j'essayasse 
j'eteignisse 
j'etincelasse 
j'etiquetasse 

j'etreignisse 
j'exclusse 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



bUlMllIB. PARTICIPLES. 


Indicative. 


I.MI-Kr.FECT. 


Past Delimit* 


Faii.lik, 2. to faillissant 


je faillis 


je faillissais 


jo faillis 


fall failli 


/totr regular 


SM F1NIB, 1) 50 




' ' . [B '■rclk) 








(Old form 


faillant 


je faux 


je faillais 


jo faillis 


still 


failli 


tu faux 


iu faillais 


tu faillis 


irregular. 


lie) 


il hut 


il faillait 


i! faillit 






n. billons 


n. faillioOfl 


n. faillimes 






v. failles 


v. failliez 


v. faillites 






ijfaillent 

<F fa is 


ils faillaient 


ils faillircnt 


F.ttiiF., 4. to do, faisant 




jo lis 


to make 


fait /; & 


tu fa is 




tu lis 


■HZ. av.»ir 




il fait 


il faisait 


il lit 


irregular. 








n. times 








v. Busies 


v. Cites 






ils font 


ila I'.ii-.ii.-nt 


ils Brent 


Fai.i. Mil 


il f.iut 


il fallait 


il fallut 


I'll lu 








FcnrDu, 1 


j'- fins 




je f. ignis 


feint 

1 1,1. to lii.lant 


N >RR 






}<• ficelle 


j.- flcelais 


je lieelais 


■ f. c. 


I.ER 


(4) 




Fkirk, 1 








frit./.e. 


tu fris 






■ lil'trlivi 1 




il frit 






fl IK S 


fuvant 


Je foil 




je fuis 




fui 


tu fuis 


in fayais 


tu fuis 






il fuit 




il fuit 








n. fuvions 


n. (olmet 








v. fnyics 








ils talent 


aient 


iis t'nireut 


1 


il gelo 




il gela 


f. c. 














tire 














il gH 

■ 






Grass , yant 






jo gra- 






YKK 






OftaLKI 


Ci'i lant 


il grdlo 




il gr6 la 


hail. unip. 












Cr«L->illant 




;!alt 


11 gresilla 


. unip. 














je liais 




j.- nab 








m ball 


lu liais 


mix. avoir 




il I. ait 




.i ball 


Jar 














. 












talent 


• nt 


■ •■*. 1. 






JO liarci-kis 


• tlaia 




f. c. 









AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



62 



373 



FUTURE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je faillirai 


je faillirais 


faillis 


je faillisse 


je faillisse 


je faudrai 


je faudrais 




je faille 


je faillisse 


tu fandras 


tu faudrais 




etc. 


etc. 


il faudra 


il faudrait 








n, faudrons 


n. faudrions 








v. faudrez 


v. faudriez 








ils faudront 


ils faudraient 








je ferai 


je ferais 




je fasse 


je fisse 


tu feras 


tu ferais 


fais 


tu fasses 


tu fisses 


il fera 


il ferait 


q. fasse 


il fasse 


ilfit 


n. ferons 


n. ferions 


faisons 


n. fassions 


n. fissions 


v. ferez 


v. feriez 


faites 


v. fassiez 


v. fissiez 


ils feront 


ils feraient 


q. fassent 


ils fassent 


ils fissent 


il faudra 


il faudrait 


q. faille 


q. faille 


q. fallut 


je feindrai 


je feindrai 


feins 


je feigne 


je feignisse 


je ficellerai 


je flcellerais 


je ficelle 


je ficelasse 






ficelle 






je frirai 


je frirais 








tu friras 


tu frirais 


fris 






il irira, &c. 


il frirait, &c. 








je fuirai 


je fuirais 




je fuie 


je fuisse 


tu fuiras 


tu fuirais 


fuis 


tu fuies 


tu fuisses 


il fuira 


il fuirait 


q. fuie 


il fuie 


il fuit 


n. fuirons 


n. fuirions 


fuyons 


n. fuyions 


n. fuissions 


v. fnirez 


v. fuiriez 


fuyez 


v. fuyiez 


v. fuissiez 


ils fuiront 


ils fuiraient 


q. fuient 


ils fuient 


ils fuissent 


il gelera 


il gelerait 


qu'il gele 


qu'il gele 


q. gelat 


Je grasseierai 


je grasseierais 


grasseie 


je grasseie 


je grasseyasse 


il grelera 


il grelerait 


q. grele 


qu'il grele 


qu'il grelat 


Jl gresillera 


il gresillerait 


q. gresille 


q. gresille 


q. gresillat 


je hairai 


je hairais 




je haisse 


je haisse 


tu hairas 


tu hairais 


hais 


tu haisses 


tu haisses 


il haira 


il hairait 


q. haisse 


il haisse 


ilhait 


n. hairons 


n. hairions 


haissons 


is. haissions 


n. haissions 


v. hairez 


v. hairiez 


haissez 


v. haissiez 


v. haissiez 


ils hairont 


ils hairaient 


q. haissent 


ils haissent 


ils haissent. 


je harcelerai 


je harcelerais 


harcele 


je harcele 


je harcfilasse 



8U 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



iKmmtvE. 


PARTICIPLES. 


ISDU-ATIVK. 


Imperfect. 


Past. DcriMlT* 


Importer, 1. 


important 


il Imports 


il importa it 


il importa 


to w, 


importe 


it matters 






unipcrsonal. 










I.vnLiiu:, 4. to 


[ndoiuot 


j'induis 


j'induisais 


j 'induisis 


induce 


induit. f. e. 


"CIBE 






Inscrire, 4. /o insorivant 


jlnscris 


j'inscrivais 


j'inscrivia 


kuc 


insmt,/. e. 


see bVrire 






I.V.STRI IRE. 4. 


instrnis'aiit 


j 'instruis 


j'instruisais 


j'instruisis 




instnr' 


mnnu 






Intf.roire, 4. 


interdi 


j'int.Tilis 


j'intordisais 


j'interdis 




intt-nli' 


KED1BE 






Interim iM pre. iiit'Tri'inp.uit 


jlnterrompa 


j'intcrroinpais 


j'interrompia 


'rrmpt [nterrompu f.e 


MPBI 






2 intenrenanl 


j'intervieofl 


j'intorvonais 


j'intervins 


iiiti-rvi-mi ._/'. r. 


see tknir 






L iddirc, 4. latrodnteant 


j intrcxluis 


j'introduisais 


j'introduiaia 




Introdolt, i. •-. 


KDOIBI 






Jf.teh. 1. to 


j'-taiit 




jeletab 


je >tai 






tn jettea 


m |l tais 


tajetM 


mix. avuir 




il t « - 1 1 * - 


ilj.-tait 


Djeta 


;'iar. 

1 i 




n. ji'tutis 


ii. jetiona 


ii. jHamos 




v. jetee 


v. ji'tirz 


v.'jct.ites 






ils jettent 


ils jetaient 


ils fetareoi 


:!:, 4. to 




jeJobM 


jejoigDala 


jo joignia 


y. Lou 


joint, /.e. 










j.- Ua 


Je llaala 


j.- Ins 




tn lis 


tn lisais 


tU Ins 


mix. ITOfr 


il lit 


il lisait 


il hit 


invgular. 




mats lisons 


11. lisinlis 


n. 1 Times 








v. liaiea 


v. latea 






ils lisrllt 


ils li-ainit 


ils luront 


Liik 




jr luis 


j.. luisais 






In] 


-. DORl 








je inaintiiiis 


j.' liiiiiiti'tiais 


J e maintins 




srr TEMIB 






ICaIiFaiu, 1. mi' 






if* the 


i . 










)«• tiiainlis 


je man 1 


j.- mandia 




IlKlllilit,/. c. 


tn maii'lis 


til mar, 


like mas 


mix. av..ir 


il man. lit 


il mai. 




alar. 




n maud 

v. mai:-'. 
iU in i 


ii. maii'li-siuns 
v. mai: i 

l.mand 




MlfAITRE, 




j ■ in. ■ 


nnais- 


jo m6connai 












Minn 


m6disant 




je lni'.i 


Je mddia 




iin*" lit 


KF.DIBE 






| iin'-fais-int 


Je in. ' 


jc mSfaisaia 


J« mi- lis 




nu'lait 


•M FA IKK 






nunaiit 


Je imiio 


Je monaia 


jo menai 




'". c. 








If or 




j.- Ill' IIS 


j>- nuntais 


jo mentis 


. 


moiiti 


. iir 







AKD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 



375 



Future. 


CONDITIO JfiL. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


il importera 


il importerait 


q. importe 


q. importe 


q. importat 


j'induirai 


j'induirais 


induis 


j'induise 


j'induisisse 


j'inscrirai 


j'inscrirais 


inscris 


j'inscrive 


j'inscrivisse 


j'instruirai 


j'instruirais 


instruis 


j'instruise 


j'instruisisse 


j'interdirai 


j'interdii'ais 


interdis 


j'interdise 


j 'inter disse 


j'interromprai 


j'interrom- 




j'interrompe 


j'interromp- 




[prais 


interromps 




fisse 


j'interviendrai 


j'intervien- 
[drais 


interviens 


j'intervienne 


j'intervinsse 


j'introduirai 


j'introduirais 


introduis 


j'introduise 


j'introduisisse 


je jetterai 


je jetterais 




je jette 


je jetasse 


tu jctteras 


tu jetterais 


jette 


tu jettes 


tu jetasses 


il jettera 


il jetterait 


q. jette 


il jette 


il jet*t 


n. jetterons 


n. jetterions 


jetons 


n. jetions 


n. jetassions 


v. jetterez 


v. jetteriez 


jetez 


v. jetiez 


v. jetassiez 


ils jetteront 


ils jetteraient 


q. jettent 


ils jettent 


ils jetassent 


je joindrai 


y\ joindrais 


joins 


je joigne 


je joignisse 


je lirai 


je lirais 




je lise 


je lusse 


tu liras 


tu lirais 


lis 


tu lises 


tu lusses 


il lira 


il lirait 


q. lise 


il lise 


il lut 


n. lirons 


n. lirions 


lisons 


n. lisions 


n. lussions 


v. lirez 


v. liriez 


lisez 


v. lisiez 


v. lussiez 


ils liront 


ils liraient 


q. lisent 


ils lisent 


ils lussent 


je luirai 


je luirais 




je luise 




je niaintien- 


je maintien- 




je maintienne 


je maintinsso 


[drai 


[drais 


maintiens 






tenses 


given 


here 






je maudirai 


je rnaudirai3 




je maudisse 


je maudisse 


like dire 


Like dire 


maudis 

q. maudisse 

maudissons 

maudissez 

q. maudissent 


tu maudisses 
il maudisse 
n. maudissions 
v. maudissiez 
ils maudissent 


like dire 


je meconnai- 


je meconnai- 




jemeconnaisse 


je meconnussa 


[trai 


[trais 


meconnais 






je medhai 


je medirais 


medis 


je medise 


je medisses 


je meferai 


je msferais 


mefais 


je mefasse 


je mefisse 


je menerai 


je menerais 


raene 


je mene 


je menasse 


je mentirai 


}3 mentirais 


mens 


je mento 


je mentisss 



370 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Inhmtivb. 


Pi.RTIClPI.KS. 


Inpicativk. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite 


MiP(IKNDRR,4 


se mepreaant 


j.m. mejpre'ads j. me niepre- 


je me inSpris 


(se) 

i e£ 

LB, 4. to 


mepru 


SCC PBKKD&B 


[nais 






je meffl 


je mettats 


je mis 


put 


mis,/, e. 


til IlK'tS 


tu mettais 


tu mis 


mix. avoir 




il met 


il niottait 


il mit 


irn .- . 




n. mettnns 


n. mottinns 


n. mimes 








v. unttioz 


v. mitos 






ils nirtii'iit 


ils mettaient 


ils niiivnt 


M 1. / • moolairi 


je mouds 


je moolah 


je moulus 




niuulu./. c. 


in moods 


tu monlaia 


tu mooing 


avoir 




il mood 


il ui'Hilait 


il rnoolat 


.lar. 




n. iiiMiiions 


n. mouliooa 


u. tnuulumes 






v. mouloz 


v. moollei 


v. monlatee 






ils lllulll.'Ht 


ils rooulaient 


ils moolarent 






tu mean 


j<- mooraif 


je mourns 




• a, 


tu monrali 


in iiiourus 






il iiiciirt 


il mooraH 


il moarat 


Irregular. 




ii. moarooa 


ii moorloafl 


ii. moiirumes 






v. moil' 


v. moorlei 


v. mom i. 






ils meurent 


uralent 


ils mourarenl 


n,3. /<> 


mmivant 


j.' iiu us 


je moovaia 


je urns 




inn./, a 


tu meoa 


tu moOVBU 


in inns 


ivuir 




il iniMit 


il iimuvait 


il unit 


.lar. 




ii. mon 


ii. mooviom 


n. iin'iincs 






v. mon 


v. moil' 


v. mates 






ils in- a 


ils iiiiMiv.ti.-rit 


ilamaroat 


IB, (so) 


;..mt 


j.- DM I 


j me moovaia 


je me mai 




























j.' uai- 


j'- aaqaii 






■ 


lu uais-.n's 


in oaqaia 






il halt 


il nals&ait 


il naqait 






MM 


Ion 


ii. naqotmef 








v. naimioa 


V n:ti] nitts 






ils Dauaenf 


ils u.ii 


ils naqolrenl 








Je in':: 
















■ 








nnip. 














j.- tiiv.-Ui* 








liui-ant 


LCI 






Ncibb, 4. to 


J6 mils 




j'~ uui.-is 




imi 








' 




j'obtten 


j'obteoaJa 


j'obtui 




ibtenn 


W TSMTB 




1 






j'oflrah 


jCtlii.s 






m •>• vitiu 






' 4. to 


tenant 




j olgnan 


j'"igTii§ 




.illt 


IfOU 






• 


nn.'ttant 


i < -in. ta 


j'uincttais 


jond* 




Dmia, /. o. 


mi 






' 




i'miis 

1 .-Ult 






hear. <1< T. 


jui,/. e. 


' 





AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



62 



37V 



FwTURB. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


SuBJUNCTIfB. 


Imperfect. 


je me mepren- 


je me mepren- 




j.memepren- 


je me mepris- 


[drai 


[drais 


meprends-toi 


[ne 


[se 


je mettrai 


je mettrais 




je mette 


je misse 


tu mettras 


tu mettrais 


mets 


tu mettes 


tu misses 


il mettra 


il mettrait 


q. mette 


il mette 


il mit 


. mettrons 


n. mettrions 


mettons 


n. mettiong 


n. missions 


. mettrez 


v. mettriez 


mettez 


v. mettiez 


v. missiez 


ils mettront 


ils mettraient 


q. mettent 


ils mettent 


ils missent 


je moudrai 


je moudrais 




je moule 


je moulusse 


tu moudras 


tu moudrais 


mouds 


tu moules 


tu moulussea 


il moudra 


il moudrait 


qu'il moule 


il moule 


il moulut 


n. moudrons 


n. moudrions 


moulons 


n. moulions 


n. moulussions 


v. moudrez 


v. moudriez 


moulez 


v. mouliez 


v. moulussiez 


ils moudront 


ils moudraient 


q. moulent 


ils moulent 


ils moulussent 


je mourrai 


je mourrais 




je meure 


je mourusse 


tu mourras 


tu mourrais 


meurs 


tu meures 


tu mourusses 


il mourra 


il mourrait 


q. uieure 


il meure 


il mourut 


n. mourrons 


n. mourrions 


mourons 


n. mourions 


n. mourussions 


v. mourrez 


v. mourriez 


mourez 


v. mouriez 


v. mourussiez 


ils mourront 


ils mourraient 


q. meurent 


ils meurent 


ils mourussent 


je mouvrai 


je mouvrais 




je meuve 


je musse 


tu mouvras 


tu mouvrais 


meus 


tu meuves 


tu musses 


il mouvra 


il mouvrait 


q. meuve 


il meuve 


il mut 


n. mouvrons 


n. mouvrions 


mouvons 


n. mouvions 


n. mussions 


v. mouvrez 


v. mouvriez 


mouvez 


v. mouviez 


v. mussiez 


ils mouvront 


ils mouvraient 


q. meuvent 


ils meuvent 


ils mussent 


je me mouvrai 


je me mouv- 
[rais 


meus-toi 


je me meuve 


je me musse 


je naitrai 


je naitrais 




je naisse 


je naquisse 


tu naitras 


tu naitrais 


nais 


tu naisses 


tu naquisses 


il naitra 


il naitrait 


q. naisse 


il naisse 


il naquit 


n. naitrons 


n. naitrions 


naissons 


n. naissions 


n. naquissions 


v. naitrez 


v. naitriez 


naissez 


v. naissiez 


v. naquissiez 


ils naitront 


ils naitraient 


q. naissent 


ils naissent 


ils naquissent 


je negligerai 


je negligerais 


neglige 


je neglige 


je negligeasse 


il neigera 


il neigerait 


q. neige 


qu'il neige 


q. neigeat 


je nivellerai 


je nivellerais 


nivelle 


je nivelle 


je nivelasse 


je nuirai 


je nuirais 




je nuise 


je nuisisse 


j'obtiendrai 


j'obtiendrais 


nuis 
obtiens 


j'obtienne 


j'obtinsse 


j'offrirai 


j'offrirais 


offre 


j'offre 


j'offrisse 


j'oindrai 


j'oindrais 


oins 


j'oigne 


j'oignisse 


j'omcttrai 


j'omettrais 


j'omette 


j'omisse 






omets 




j'ouisse 
il ouit 



378 



IRUEGULAR, DEFECTIVE, rECTLIAR 



IxriMirivi. 


PaRTICIPLBS. 


lNUli ATIVE. 


I.MPEJllKl T. 


Past. Deficits, 


V Ocvhir, 2. to 


ouvrant 


j'oavre 


j'cuvrais 


j'ouvris 


cpen 


■ invert,/, e. 


tU OUVTCS 


tD mi via is 


tu ouvris 


aux. avoir 




il ouvre 


ilouvrait 


il ouvrit 


irregular 




n. onvrons. 


n. ouvrions 


n. ouvrimes 


; 


V. OUVTCZ 


v. ouvriez 


v. ouvrites 




ils ouvrviit 


ils ouvraicnt 


ils ouvrirent 


Paithk, 4. xo 


1 




j." pah 






pa 


to pais 


tu pai.ssais 




avoir 




il pait 


il pateaatt 




:ive 




n. paissona 
ils paiM nt 


n. pai^sioiis 

v. patesi 
ils paiasatest 




P MRE, \.tO 


parlvJajnt 


je jwirfais 


j 1 ' i ,: " : 


je parfls 


>'rle 


par fait 


an pairs 






.ml 




Je paialnaaai 


Je pares 


■>mr 


para 


• \ utrk. 






■ KIR, 2. 


puoooml 


Je parooon 


j.- parcourah 


Je parcoure* 




par.. Mini /. 9 


rata 






1' 


part. mt 




j.' partais 


Je partis 




parti./, o. 


\ ria 






1' l nib. 2. 


parvenant 


je pan 


j" p*n 


Je parvins 




parvenu 


aM TKMIl 










Je pate 


|e pavais 


Je payai 




pSlgnanf 


rn 


(2.; 




]• ■ 1 ' 




rnais 


^nla 




peinl ■ 


'. !>RK 






] 1, 1. to 






Je pi-lais 








(8.) 






rriu:. 1 




Je pern 


Je p«Tiii'ttnis 


mis 


mil 


pencil 


rrai 






■■■■ Rr.. -1. 




je plains 


Je plaignaia 


ji- plaignis 






mwi 






nm, (se) 




Je DM plains 


Je me piai- 


je me plaignlt 




plaint 




[gnais 




r.-ii i 










V ri.AU: 






je plateati 


Je pins 




plu 




in plal 


tu ]«lus 


nux. avoir 




il plait 


il pl.ii-ait 


il pint 


irregular. 




n. plal 


ii. plaisions 


n. jplumes 








v. plaiatei 


V. pll'lti'S 






[la pi.ii-.iit 


Ua plal 


ils pliirciit 
il plut 


}■ rom, B. 


pl.uvant 


il pltut 


il pk-uvait 


. uni|). 


plu 












il point 






def 










V 


pi>tir>uivant 


Je pom 


Je pom 


Je poursulvie 


Ttm 


pomeoj 


HI TIVRK 






}' rom, 3. 


poanroj 


Je pourvuti 


j.- poor 


Je i>furvua 




p.iiirvu 


111 pom 


in poorrovali 


tu poiinroe 


MIX. av..ir 




il pOQTTOtt 


il pmirviivait 


il pourvnt 


irregular. 




n. DOW 


n ponrvoyton 


n pourvAmea 






v. poorvoyea 


v ponrvoytei 


v poon I 






ils powvotesl 


i puiirvovaiviit 


ils pourrureni 



AND USTIPERSONAL VERBS. § 02 



379 



Future. 



j ouvnrai 
tu ouvriras 
il ouvrira 
n. ouvrirons 
V. ouvrirez 
ils ouvriront 
je paitrai 
tu paitras 
il paitra 
n. paitrons 
v. paitrez 
ils paitront 
je parferai 

je paraitrai 

je parcourrai 

je partirai 

jc parviendrai 

je paierai 

je peindrai 

je pelerai 

je permettrai 

je plaindrai 

je me plain- 
[drai 

je plairai 
tu plairas 
ii plaira 
n. plairons 
v. plairez 
ils plairont 
il pleuvra 



Conditional. 



j ouvrirais 
tu ouvrirais 
il ouvrirait 
n. ouvririons 
ouvririez 
ils ouvriraient 
je paitrais 
tu paitrais 
il paitrait 
n. paitrions 
v. paitriez 
ils paitraient 
je parferais 

je paraitrais 

je parcourrais 

je partirais 

je parviendrais 

je paierais 

je peindrai 

je pelerai 

je permettrais 

je plaindrais 

je me plain- 
[drais 

je plairais 
tu plairais 
il plairait 
n. plairions 
v. plairiez 
ils plairaient 
il pleuvrait 



ouvre 
q. ouvre 
ouvrons 
ouvrez 
q. ouvrent 

pais 



il poindra il poindrait 



jepoursuivrai 

je pourvoirai 
tu pourvoiras 
ii pourvoira 
C. pourvoirons! 
v. pourvoirez I 
Dspourvoirontj 



q. paissent 

parfais 

parais 

parcours 

pars 

parviens 

paie 

peins 

pele 

permets 

plains 

plains-toi 



plais 
q. plaise 
plaisons 
plaisez 
q. plaisent 
q. pleuve 



jepoursuivrais 

je pourvoirais 
tu pourvoirais 
il pourvoirait 
n.pourvoirions 
v. pourvoiriez 
i.pourvoiraient 



j ouvre 
tu ouvres 
il ouvre 
n. ouvrions 

ouvriez 
ils ouvrent 
je paisse 
tu paisses 
il paisse 
n. paissions 

paissiez 
ils- " 



Subjunctive. Imperfect. 



obsolete 
je paraisse 

je parcoure 

je parte 

je parvienne 

je paie 

je peigne 

je pele 

je permette 

je plaigne 

je me plaigne 



je plaise 
tu plaises 
il plaise 
n. plaisions 
v. plaisiez 
ils plaisent 
q. pleuve 



poursuis 

pourvois 
q. pourvoie 
pourvoyons 
pourvoyez 
q. pourvoient 



j ouvnsse 
tu ouvrisses 
il ouvrit 
n. ouvrissiona 
v. ouvrissiez 
ils ouvrissent 



je parfisse 

je parusso 

je parcourusse 

je partisse 

je parvinsso 

je payasse 

je peignisse 

je pelasse 

je permisse 

je plaignisse 

je me plai- 
«*., [gnisse 

je plusse 
tu plusses 
il pk\t 
n. plussions 
v. plussiez 
ils plussent 
q. plut 



je poursuive 

je pourvoie 
tu pourvoie 
il pourvoie 
n. pourvoyions 
v. pourvoyiez 
ils pourvoient 



je poursuivis- 

[se 
je pourvusse 
tu pourvusses 
il pourvut 
n.pourvussioni) 
v. pourvussiez 
ils pourvussent 



380 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



IkPINITIVE. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite, 


j P0CRT0IR,(se) 

8. to provide. 


se pourvoyant 


je me pour- 


je me pour- 


je n-e pourvua 


pourvu, /. e. 


[vois 


[voyais 




Pouvoir, 3. to 
be able 


pouvant* 


je puis 


je pouvaia 


je pus 


pu 


tu peux 


tu pouvais 


tu pus 


aux. avoir 




il peut 


il pouvait 


il put 


irregular. 




n. pouvons 


n. pouvions 


n. piimea 






v. pouvez 


v. pouviez 


v. putes 






ils peuvent 


ils pouvaient 


ils purent 


PniniRE, 4. to 


predisant 


je predis 


je prfdisais 


je prfidis 




priMlit. /. o. 


: REDIRE 






Pbbnsu, -1. t<> 


prenant 


Je prenda 


je prenaJa 


je pris 




pris, /. e. 


tu prenda 


tu prenais 


tu pris 


nux. avuir 




il prend 


il prenait 


il prit 


irregular. 




n. prenons 


ii. preniooi 


o. primes 






v. prenea 


v. preoiea 


v. pritea 






ils prensent 


ils prenaient 


ils priront 


]' bibb, 4. 


ant 


je presi 


Je pnscrivais 


Je picsenvis 


' ribe 


j rOM in f :\ 


S>r icKIBI 






V 


pirwHiiiilnnl 


je pronoona 


je preeaentaia 


Je pnaaeotia 




, iti./. o. 
pnvalant 


N TIR 






Yv.Lx ILOIB, ■">■ 


jo prevaox 


jo pre'valais 


je pn'valus 


Putv 


pivvalu 


■ IK 






nant 


jfl pr. 


je prevenaJa 


je prcvitis 


Pniv.HH, 3. Ut 


ptVV.-tlU. f. 0. 


see TEN 111 








v.. is 


je prevoyaJa 


je previa 

like voir 


1 




fua vuik 


\Ua roil 


i-r.xlu 


Lob 


Je pnxluiaais 


j.- produisis 




prodoil 


MRE 






Pa" 




j' 1 I' r "' 


j.- proJetela 


Je projetai 






U» JETER 






Paoiiarraa, 4. 


proTJDJ : 


j.' prometa 


Je proiinttaia 


jo promia 


nise 


promll 


FM 






P 


promo ■ 


j.' promeoj 


Je promonvaBi 


jo promus 




; ir< mm 


1 'MR 






1 




Je prooorli 
m teems 


jo proscrivais 


jo proscrivis 












proven 


Je proT 


je prov 


Je provins 




provenu,/ e. 








only used 


ft nil ire 


' ta the 


romposition cj 


THE, 4. 




Je rabats 


ittais 


jo rabattis 


'ttk 


rabattu 


VC BATTRE 






R ICHB1 1 


rachetaot 


Je cool 


j.- raclii'tais 


jo rachetai 




t;i'-]i.-(. 


i rn 


(Ft.) 




LKR, 1. 




j.' rappelle 


je rappelaJa 


jo rappelal 




rappcl 


LBS 


<»•) 




Raitrknkrk 1 rapprenant 


Je rapprenda 


j'- rapprcnals 


pris 


rappris,/ o. 








Rattki\i.kk.4. ratteignant 


Je rattrins 


j • r.itt.ignais 


J« rattoignla 


ratteint, f. e. 








Rkh»ttrk. 4 rebal 


je n 1'ats 


Je rebel 


Ja r.battl» 


- rebattu, f. e. 


"HE 






1. , indauant 


Je n rondola 


jo rccondnl- 


jo lecondolala 


4. /, adult,/ e. 


N IQIBI 


[aaia 















AND UNIPEBSONAL VERBS. § 6 


2 381 


FUTURE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je me pour- 


j« me pour- 




je me pour- 


je me pour- 
[vusso 


[voirai 


[voirais 


pourvois-toi 


[voie 


je pourrai 


je pourrais 




je puisse 


je pusse 


tu pourras 


tu pourrais 




iu puisses 


;u pusses 


il pourra 


il p\ mrrait 




il puisse 


ilput 


n. pourrons 


n. pourrions 




n. puissions 


a. pussions 


v. pourrez 


v. pourriez 




v. puissiez 


v. pussiez 


ils jKmrront 


ils pourraient 




ils puissent 


ils pussent 


je predirai 


je predirais 


predis 


je predise 


je predisse 


je prendrai 


je prendrais 




je prenne 


je prisses 


tu prendras 


tu prendrais 


pregids 


tu prennes 


tu prissea 


il prendra 


il prendrait 


q. prenne 


il prenne 


il prit 


n. prendrons 


n. prendrions 


prenons 


n. prenions 


n. prissions 


v. prendrez 


v. prendriez 


prenez 


v. preniez 


v. prissiez 


ils prendront 


ils prendraient 


q. prennent 


ils prennent 


ils prissent 


je prescrirai 


je prescrirais 


prescris 


je prescrive 


je prescrivissa 


je pressentirai 


je pressenti- 
[rais 
je prevaudrais 


je pressente 


je pressentisso 


je prevaudrai 


prevaux 


je prevale 


je prevalusse 


je previendrai 


je previen- 


je previenne 


je previnsse 




[drais 


previens 






je prevoirai 


je prevoirais 




je prevoie 


je previsse 


like pouryoie 


like pourvoir 


prevoi3 


like voir 


like voir 


je produirai 


je produirais 


produis 


je produise 


je produisisse 


je projetterai 


je projetterai 


projette 


je projette 


je projetasse 


je promettrai 


je promettrais 


promets 


je promette 


je promisse 


je promouvrai 


je promou- 


je promeuve 


je promusse 1 




[vrais 


promeus 






je proscrirai 


je proscrirais 


proscria 


je proscrive 


je proscrivisse 


je proviendrai 


je provien- 


je provienne 


je provinsse 




[drais 


proviens 




( 


other verbs 










je rabattrai 


je rabattrais 


rabats 


je rabatte 


je rabattisse 


je racbeterai 


je racbeterais 


racbete 


je racbete 


je racbetasse 


je rappellerai 


je rappellerais 


rappelle 


je rappelle 


je rappelassa 


je rapprendrai 


je rappren- 

[drais 
je ratteindrais 


rapprends 


je rapprenne 


je rapprisse 


je ratteindrai 


ratteins 


je ratteigne 


je ratteignisse 


je rebattrai 


je rebattrais 


je rebatte 


je rebattisse] 






rebats 






Je reconduira 


je recondui- 




je reconduise 


je recondui- 




j [rais 


reconduis 




[sisse 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECLLIA 



<rlKlTIVE. 



PARTICIPLES. 



Reconn'.utre. recoonaisBaol 
4. to rcci >gnizt nooaaxi,/. e. 
BEcoNav^Kin. reconqaArant 



to conquer 

B --STRCIKE 

4. to rccon- 

B ;>re, 4. 
to sci- 

B 

to A/? 



I.MPERFKCT. 



•una is 
nrilitts 
,)•' reoaaaqnien 

SCC ACQl'iuiIt 



reconquis./". e. 



rcconstrnisant , jo reoo ost f u ia 
reoooetnut /.<■ ax GQNDUUU 

je recoads 



aaant 
rocoosu,/ e. 
reoomraat je reoonn 

recouru >irir 

B ruB,2 reoooTrul jerecoufre 

T'-.'. invert f. c. .<•-• ot'VRia 

B .:.iu. '1 recnefllani je recaeflle 

' KII.I.IB 

Je r.-.lis 



Rehire. 4. fa rediaant 

i redit, f. e. 
RiDciKK, 4. fa rtduiaant 

rtdn 
Bbfairb, ; 

■ c.iit t. e. 
B 

RcLIBC, I 

B 

reloi 

Remetti: 

' liTRK 

rendormi,/ e. i •■ Doaana 

Rknti; 

renvoyatit 



SM MIRE 

j-- rtduia 

tee PAtki 

j.' rojoins 

Ml c VtNtMtE 

Je r.-Hs 

■M LIRE 

j'- n-ltiis 

m i.t ire 
Je remeti 

M METTRE 

Je remooda 



i 

BcpaItbs, 4 
B 



r.j.ii 



•i f. c 

te repentant 
wdbb, 4. reprenant 

■ ; • 
'■ 

to reproduce |reprodolt, / e. tee coarotnai 



• : K e 

}•' reoTole 

•TBI 

1 CUE 

N rm 
j'- ri-jM-ins 

SI'RE 

Je me repeat 

i • i nma 

j.> rep 

M'HE 

Je repi 



jo reeonnais- 
[sais 

je reeonque- 
[rais 

je reooDstra] 

[Bah 

Je rocousais 
je recourais 

uvrais 
je reomillais 

Je redlsali 

Je r6dul 

Je refaisais 
j«' r« -jnijnaia 
Je reUi 
jerehd 

j." nnicttais 
Je nuioulais 

je renal 

lormab 
|e reata 

|e r.ii\ 

ssais 
rtaia 

|e nv • 

[tali 
je ro['i 

Je ri'jrixlui- 



PiST. DKflNlT* 



je reconnua 
je reconquis 

>'e -jcconstrai 
[sia 

je rccousis 

je recounts 

je recouvria 
je roouoillis 
Je redis 
je r6duisis 
Je rt lis 
Je nji "ignis 
Je rulus 
]<• tvlui.MS 
j.- roinis 
Je rcmoulus 
Je rtn.-upiis 
je rcndorniia 

Je ronvuyaia 
j-> n-pns 

ut'ta 
j'' rt'j" 

Je mo repaotki 

jo repi is 

Je trpiodnlab 



AND UNIPERSONAL VER: 



62 



Future. 



Conditional. Imperative 



Subjunctive. Imperfect, 



je recormai- 
[trai 
je reconquer- 
[rai 

je rcconstrui- 
[rai 

jo recoudrai 

je recourrai 

je recouvrirai 

je recueillerai 

je redirai 

je reduirai 

je referai 

je rejoindrai 

je relirai 

je reluirai 

je remettrai 

je remoudrai 

je renaitrai 

jerendormirai 

je rentrairai 

je renverrai 

je repaitrai 

je repartirai 

je lepeindrai 

je me repenti- 

[rai 

je reprendrai 

je reproduirai 



je reconnai- 
[trais 
je reconquer- 
[rais 

je reconstrui- 
[rais 

je recoudrais 

je recourrais 

e recouvrirais 

e recueille- 
[rais 
redirais 

reduirais 

e referais 

e rejoindrais 

je relirais 

e reluirais 

e remettrais 

e remoudrais 

e renaitrais 

e rerldormi- 

[rais 

e rentrairais 

e renverrais 

e repaitrais 

e repartirais 

e repeindrais 

e me repenti- 
[rais 
e reprendrais 

e reprodui- 
[rais 



reconnais 
reconquiers 



recouds 
recours 

recouvre 
recueille 
redis 
eduis 
refais 
rejoins 
relis 
reluis 
remets 
remouds 



rendors 

rentrais 

renvoie 

repais 

repars 

repeins 

repens-toi 

reprends 

reproduis 



je reconnaisse 
je reconquiere 

je reconstru- 
[ise 

je recouse 

je recoure 

je recouvre 
je recueille 
je redise 
je reduise 
je refasse 
je rejoigne 
je relise 
je reluise 
je remette 
je remoule 
je renaisse 
je rendorme 
je rentraie 
je renvoie 
je repaisse 
je reparte 
je repeigne 
je me repente 
je reprenne 
jtreproj'u'lse 



je reconnusse 
je reconquisse 

je veconstrui- 
[siaso 

je recousisso 

je recourusse 

je recouvrisse 
je recueillisse 
je redisse 
je reduisisse 
je refisse 
je rejoignisse 
je relusse 
je reluisisse 
je remisse 
je remoulusse 
je renaquisse 
je rendormisse 

je renvoyasse 

je repusse 
&c. 

je repartisse 

je iepeignissa 

je me repen- 
[tisse 
je reprisse 

je reproduis- 
[isse 



384 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECCLIA 



INFINITIVE. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Ini.hativk. 


iMPERrECT. 


Past Dinmn 


Rnai:lRiR, 2. 


requerant 


je requiers 


je requerais 


je requis 


to require 


requia,/ c. 


. 6n\R 






Bd 


rteolvant 




je iv-olvais 


je resolus 


■let 




IUDBE 






B ENTIE, 2. 


tant 


-ens 


-•■ntais 


je resscntis 




reeaenti, /. & 


•TIR. 






itTIR, 2. 




ssora 


je rcssortais 


je ressortia 






see sortir 






B 




reaaos- 


je me reaeou- 


Je me reaawB> 




[neat 


[vk-us 


[venais 


[vins 






Mf TVHU 










Je reatrema 


Je rcstn-i- 


je rcstreignia 




reetreii 


M'RK 


f-nais 








Je retieoa 


ji- reteoaJa 


je retina 




retenn 


•H T F.N in 






IRK, 4. 




jo rctrais 


je retmyaJa 




to r> 


retrail 1 


see TRAIRF. 










je rei : 


..lis 


je re vins 


return 


n-wini./. c. 


Ml VKVIK 






'IR. 2. to 




Je r-v.'-ts 


jerevAtah 


Je rerAtta 




revttn 


tea vfcnR 






1 ' 


rertront 


Je n-vis 


Je re viva is 


Je ruvecua 




revecn 






' 








•yais 


Je r< vis 
















Je ris 


|e ria ; s 


Je ris 




ri 


in ris 




tn ris 


nux avi.ir 




ilrit 


il riait 


il rit 


bm o'ular. 




n. riooa 


n. riicnis 


n. riraea 






v. riei 


V. riirz 


n. ritrs 






Da rfent 


ils ri.iii-iit 


ils rin-nt 


uK, 4. to 




Je rompi 


je rompaJa 


j<' rompfa 




roofm 


in rompa 


In r< >ni|>.iis 


in roinpis 


nux. avoir 




il rompf 


il rompa.11 


il rompft 


■ :'ar. 




n. roes] 


n. rompioaia 


n. ronq 








v. rompfei 


v. nun; 






iN rom] 


IU r. ■iiii'.iifTit 


ils piiupirent 


. (IK, 2. /" 


muvrnnt 


Je ronvTe 


Je n.uvrais 


Je nmvria 




rnuvi-rl. /. c. 


1 RIB 






Baii.uu. 2 to 


snillant 


il Mflk 


il saillait 




BaTISFAIRF., 4. 


willi 


uis 




Je aatfafli 


> BiTOiB, :$. to 




en rami 












jeaua 




■ 






iv..ir 




il viit 




il Silt 


ular. 






ii. s:»\ i<»HH 


















Da S.'lVrllt 


ils aavaii-nt 


|]| Minnt 


IllR, 2. to 


sccnurant 


Jo aocour-t 


jo accouraia 


jo aecourua 




weooni 


aw coram 






Binuar. 4. It 


aJdnlaani 


Je mMiiU 


jc s6dulsaia 


jeridutoia 


teJucc 


a*duit,/. e. 









AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. §62 



385 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je requerrai 


je requerrais 


requiers 


je requiere 


je requisse 


je resoudrai 


je resoudrais 


je resolve 


je resolusse 






resous 




&c. 


je ressentirai 


je ressentirais 


ressens 


je ressente 


je ressentisse 


je ressortirai 


je ressortirais 


ressors 


je ressorte 


je ressortissa 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 




je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


[viendrai 


[viendrais 


ressouviens-toi 


[vienne 


[vinsse 


je restreindrai 


je restrein- 




je restreigne 


je restrei- 




[drais 


restreins 




[gnisse 


je retiendrai 


je retiendrais 


retiens 


je retienne 


je retinsse 


je retrairai 


je retrairais 


retrais 


je retraie 




je reviendrai 


je reviendrais 


reviens 


je revienne 


je revinsse 


Je revdtirai 


je revetirais 


revets 


je revete 


je revetisse 


je revivrai 


je revivrais 


revis 


je revive 


je revecusBO 


je reverrai 


je reverrais 


revoia 


je revoie 


je revisse 


je rirai 


je rirais 




je rie 


je risse 


tu riras 


tu rirais 


ris 


tu ries 


tu risses 


il rira 


il rirait 


q. rie 


il rie 


ilrit 


n. rirons 


n. ririons 


rions 


n. riions 


n. rissions 


v. rirez 


y ririez 


riez 


v. riiez 


v. rissiez 


lis riront 


ils riraient 


q. rient 


ils rient 


ils rissent 


je romprai 


je romprais 




je rompe 


je rompisse 


tu rompras 


tu romprais 


romps 


tu rompes 


tu rompisses 


il rompra 


il romprait 


q. rompe 


il rompe 


il rompifc 


n. romprons 


n. romprions 


rompons 


n. rompions 


n. rompissions 


v. romprez 


v. rompriez 


rompez 


v. rompiez 


v. rompissiez 


ils rompront 


ils rompraient 


q. rompent 


ils rompent 


ils rompissent 


je rouvrirai 


je rouvrirais 


rouvre 


je rouvre 


je rouvrisse 


il saillera 


il saillerait 




q. saille 


q. saillit 


je satisferai 


je satisferais 


satisfais 


je satisfasse 


je satisfisse 


je saurai 


je saurais 




je sache 


je susse 


tu sauras 


tu saurais 


sache 


tu saches 


tu susses 


il saura 


il saurait 


q. sache 


il sache 


ilsut 


n. sar.ron3 


n. saurions 


sachons 


n. sachions 


n. sussions 


v. saurez 


v. sauriez 


sachez 


v. sachiez 


v. sussiez 


ils sauront 


ils sauraient 


q. sachent 


ilssachent 


ils sussent 


je secourrai 


je secourrais 


secours 


je secoure 


je secourusBe 


je seduirai 


je seduirais 


s^duis 


je seduise 


josfiduisiase 



17 



386 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAB 



Ikfiottivi. 


Participles. 


INDICATIVE. 


Imperfect. 


Past. DinicrrB. 


Semer, 1. to 


semant 


je seme 


jo semais 


je semai 


5*w. pec. 


seme,/, e. 








■ Sentir, 2. to 


sentant 


je sens 


je scntais 


je sentis 


fxl 


senti,/. c. 


tu sens 


tu sentais 


tu sentis 


aux. avoir 




il sent 


il sentait 


il sentit 


irregular. 




n. sentons 


n. sentions 


n. sentimes 






v. Bootes 


v. sentiez 


v. sentites 






ils sentent 


ils sentaient 


ils sentirent 


BtfOIR, 3. to fit. 


savant 




il seyait 




became 










Servir, 2. t-> 


servant 


je sers 


je servais 


je scrvis 


serve 


•. a 




to servais 


tu servis 


irregular. 




il serf 


il servait 


il servit 






n. servons 


n. servions 


n. seivimcs 






V. serve/. 


v. servie/. 


v. servites 






ils servellt 


ils servaient 


ils servirent 


SORTII, 


■ortant 


►je s.ts 


je Sortais 


je sortis 




surti f o. 


see BENTIB 






BoirrRiR,2. to Boottfaot 


\>- Booflrfl 


jo souflYais 


je souflris 


sufrr soofffert, f. o. 


1 II IR 






ru, 1. Boametuuri 


toeta 


■■.lettais 


je soumis 


//) sii/nnir Si iim. 


:i»K 






■ 


je s.-uris 


je Booriaii 


je solllLs 


«•,»(/<• 


M«uri 


tee HiitE 






BoUtCB 


vant 


je tOQI 


jo souscrivais 


je sous. 


fo 5u/>s<"riA« 


BOOSCrit 


m BCRIB1 






SOUSTRAIRE, J BOOSt] 


je soiiMrais 


ju soustrayais 




/<> boJj 


LIU 






tot 


Je soot! 


je Booteoui 


je soutins 




SM TK.MR 








J6DM -"livielis 


j.- DM BOOT©- 


je in'' Mttftvj 




BM TKNIR 


funis 




'..h, 2. BODI 


je Bobrlem 


je slllivenais 


je subvin^ 


f<> rvtt 'in /". »>. 


."■<" TKSIR 






BirriRE, 1. I 




j.' sullisais 


je suiiis 


ji/^<-«« 


til BOfflfl 




Ml sullis 


nux avoir 




il Sllh*it 




il raffll 


Milar. 






ii. BOffiaiOM 


n. sntl im.'s 






v. BOfflsCI 


v. BOffisieS 


v. sill! i 










ils sntliretit 


. BOITBJ 


suivant 






je suivis 


follitc 


ralvi ./. o. 


til snis 


in BoivsJa 


tu suivis 


nux. avoir 




il rail 


il Miivnit 


il BOivit 


ular. 






n. soli 1 


n. siiiviine.M 






v. suive/. 


v. suivie/ 


V. Sllivites 






ils BoiTenl 


ils suivaieiit 


ils Hiilvirent 


SCRPAlRF., 4. o> 


surfaisant 


j.' SUlT.lis 


jo surf.. 


je surfls 




suiTait./. c. 


BM f'AIRK 






Blrpre.hdrk, 


■orpreoaot 


j'- BOT] 


jo surprenaia 


je BurprU 


4. to surprise 


f. C. 


M>HE 







AND UNIPERSONAL V 



62 



387 



Future. 


Conditional. Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je semerai 


je semerais 


seme 


je seme 


je semasss 


je sentirai 


je sentirais 




je sente 


je sentisse 


fcu sentiras 


;u sentirais 


sens 


;u sentes 


tu sentisses 


il sentira 


il sentirait 


q. sente 


il sente 


il sentit 


n. sentirons 


a. sentirions 


sentons 


n. sentions 


n. sentissiona 


v. sentirez 


v". sentiriez 


sentez 


v. sentiez- 


v. sentissiez 


ils sentiront 


Is sentiraient 


q. sentent 


ils sentent 


ils sentissent 


il siera 


il sierait 




q. siee 




je servirai 


je servirais 




je serve 


je servisse 


tu serviras 


tu servirais 


sers 


tu serves 


tu servisses 


il servira 


il servirait 


q. serve 


il serve 


il servit 


n. servirons 


n. servirions 


servons 


n. servions 


n. servissions 


v. servirez 


v. serviriez 


servez 


v. serviez 


v. servissiez 


ils serviront 


ils serviraient 


q. servent 


ils servent 


ils servissent 


je sortirai 


je sortirais 




je sorte 


je sortisse 


je souffrirai 


je souffrirais 


sors 
souffre 


je ' souffre 


je souffrisse 


je soumettrai 


je soumettrais 


soumets 


je soumette 


je soumisse 


je sourirai 


je sourirais 


souris 


je sourie 


je sourisse 


je souscrirai 


je souscrirais 


souscris 


je souscrive 


je souscrivisse 


je soustrairai 


je soustrairais 


soustrais 


je soustraie 




jo soutiendrai 


jesoutiendrais 


soutiens 


je soutienne 


je soutinsse 


je me souvien- 


je me souvien- 




je me souvien- 


je me sou- 


[drai 


[drais 


souviens-toi 


[ne 


[vinsse 


je subviendrai 


je subvien- 
[drais 


subviens 


je subvienne 


je subvinsse 


je suffirai 


je suffirais 




je suffise 


je suffisse 


tu suffiras 


tu suffirais 


suffis 


tu suffises 


tu suffisses 


il suffira 


il suffirait 


q. suffise 


il suffise 


il suffit 


n. suffirons 


n. suffirions 


suffisons 


n. suffisions 


n. suffissions 


v. suffirez 


v. suffiriez 


suffisez 


v. suffisiez 


v. suffissiez 


ils suffiront 


ils suffiraient 


q. suffisent 


ils suffisent 


ils suffissent 


je suivrai 


je suivrais 




je suive 


je suivisse 


tu suivras 


tu suivrais 


suis 


tu suive s 


tu suivisses 


il suivra 


il suivrait 


q. suive 


il suive 


il suivit 


n. suivrons 


n. suivrions 


suivons 


n. suivions 


n. suivissions 


v. suivrez 


v. suivriez 


suivez 


v. suiviez 


v. suivissiez 


ils suivront 


ils suivraient 


q. suivent 


ils suivent 


ils suivissent 


je surferai 


je surferais 


surfais 


je surfasse 


je surfisse 


jo 3urprendrai 


je surpren- 
[drais 


surprends 


je surprenne 


je surprisse 



388 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAK 



Ihfikitivr. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite- 


Schseoir, 3. 


sursoyant 


je sursois 


je sursoyais 


je sursia 


to supersede 


sursis,/. e. 


tu sursois 


tu sursoyais 


tu sursia 


aux. avoir 




il sursoit 


il sursoyait 


il sursit 


irregular. 




n. sursoyons 


n. sursoyions 


u. sursimea 






v. soraoyei 


v. Bonoyiea 


v. sursites 






ils sursoi.nt 


ils sursoyaieiit 


ils sursirent 


Scrvemr, 2. 


survcnant 


je sur\ 


je survenais 


je survins 


■:»:n, etc. 


survi nu. /". a 


tee tknir 






StRVIVRK, 4. 


survival it 


Je Borvia 


je survivais 


je survecua 


to survive 


sun ecu 


sec vivrk 






T.virit: 


-.ait 


je me tais 


je mo taisais 


je me tua 


to be siUnt 




.IRE 






Tannma, 4. to 


teignant 




jc teiguais 


jo teignia 


J' je 


t.-int ./. <.-. 


'.ORE 






•1. to 


tenant 


je ti. ns 


je tonais 


je tin8 








in tenaJa 


tu tins 


aux. avoir 




il tient 


il teiiait 


il tint 


invgular. 




11. tlMl. 'IIS 


n. ti-nions 


n. tinmea 






v. tenea 


v. temea 


V. Illlt.S 






ils t"n'iiiK'nt 


ils tciiairnt 


ils tinivnt 


1. /./ 


tonn.mt 


il tolltH' 


il toimait 


il tonna 


unip 


tolltir 








TRAD! 


t radii i- 


j.- traduis 


je traduisaia 


jc traduiaia 


to translate 


traduit./. c. 


••tire 






Thaih. 




je trail 






milk 


trait 


tu tr.iis 


in travais 




aux. avoir 




il trait 


il tray ait 




•ivo 




>na 
ils traleot 


n. tra; 

v krajfea 

ils travaiont 




Teamcbibi I 


[rant 


je traaaorii 


je trail 


jo transcrivla 


1 ssrioe 




tee i iimu: 






M.TTRK 


..• -ttant 


je tnumeti 


j.- transmittals 


je transmia 


insmit 


tr.niMi, 


IRE 






l.LIK, 


in: 


je truce [Tin 


|e tres-aillais 


jo tressaillia 


- 


tr.ssailli 


U I.I.I R 


' 




Vain. i. 


raJnqoant 


je v.iiins 


je vainquais 


je vainquis 


va n ■; 


vaincu,/. e. 


tu vaiiirs 


tu vainquais 


tu vain<|uis 


aux. avoir 




il faine 


il vainquait 


il vainquit 


irngular. 




n. Taiaqaooi 


ii vainquions 


n. vuiiii|uiinci 






v. vai!i.|in/. 


v. vainquiez 


v. vainquites 






ils vaiiK|UL-nt 


ils vainquaiont 


ilsvainquiren 


Vai.oir. ?,. to 


valant 


Je vaux 




je valus 


be icorth 


valu 


tu vaux 


tu valais 


tu valus 


aux. avoir 




il vaut 


il val.iit 


il ratal 


im-gular. 






n. valions 


n valumcs 








v. valioz 








ils valcnt 


ils valairnt 


ils valuront 


Ten-ir, 2. /« 


venanl 


j| vims 


jo venals 


jo rlna 


come 


renu,/. e. 


see TENi a 







and usip: 



0NA1 VE 



§ 62 



389 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Impbrativk. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je surseoirai 


je surseoirais 




je sursoie 


je sursisse 


tu surseoiras 


tu surseoirais 


sursois 


;u sursoies 


;u sursisses 


il surseoira 


il surseoirait 


q. sursoie 


d sursoie 


il sursit 


n. surseoirons 


n. surseoirions 


sursoyons 


a. sursoyions 


n. sursissions 


v. surseoirez 


v. surseoiriez 


sursoyez 


v. sursoyiez 


v. sursissiez 


ils surseoiront 


i.surseoiraient 


q. sursoient 


ds sursoient 


ils sursissent 


je surviendrai 


je surviendrais 


surviens 


je survienne 


je survinsse 


je survivrai 


je survivrais 


survis 


je survive 


je survecusse 


je me tairai 


je me tairais 


tais-toi 


je me taise 


je me tusse 


je teindrai 


je teindrais 


teins 


je teigne 


je teignisse 


je tiendrai 


je tiendrais 




je tienne 


je tinsse 


tu tiendras 


tu tiendrais 


tiens 


tu tiennes 


tu tinsses 


il tiendra 


il tiendrait 


q. tienne 


il tienne 


il tint 


n. tiendrons 


n. tiendrions 


tenons 


n. tenions 


n. tinssions 


v. tiendrez 


v. tiendriez 


tenez 


v. teniez 


v. tinssiez 


ils tiendront 


ils tiendraient 


q. tiennent 


ils tiennent 


ils tinssent 


il tonnera 


il tonnerait 


q. tonne 


q. tonne 


q. tonnat 


je traduirai 


je traduirais 


traduis 


je traduise 


je traduisisse 


je trairai 


je trairais 




je traie 




tu trairas 


tu trairais 


trais 


tu traies 




il traira 


il trairait 


q. traie 


il traie 




n. trairons 


n. trairions 


trayons 


n. trayions 




v. trairez 


v. trairiez 


trayez 


v. trayiez 




ils trairont 


ils trairaient 


q. traient 


ils traient 




je transcrirai 


je transcrirais 


transcris 


je transcrive 


je transcri- 
[visse 


je transmet- 


je transmet- 




je transmette 


je transmisse 


[trai 


[trais 


transmets 






je tressaillirai 


je tressaillirais 


tressaille 


je tressaille 


je tressaillisso 


je vaincrai 


je vaincrais 




je vainque 


je vainquisse 


tu varacras 


tu vaincrais 


vaincs 


tu vainqucs 


tu vainqnisses 


il vaincra 


il vaincrait 


q. vainque 


il vainque 


il vainquit 


n. vaincrons 


n. vaincrions 


vainquons 


n. vainquions 


vainquissions 


v. vaincrez 


v. vaincriez 


vainquez 


v. vainquiez 


v. vainquissiez 


ils vaincront 


ils vaincraient 


q. vainquent 


ils vainquent 


i. vainquissent 


je vaudrai 


je vaudrais 




je vaille 


je valusse 


tu vaudras 


tu vaudrais 


vaux 


tu vailles 


tu valusses 


il vaudra 


il vaudrait 


q. vaille 


il vaille 


il valut 


n. vaudrons 


n. vaudrions 


valons 


n. valions 


n. valussions 


v. vaudrez 


v. vaudriez 


valez 


v. valiez 


v. valussiez 


lis vaudront 


ils vaudraient 


q. vaillent 


ils vaillent 


ils valussent 


je viendrai 


je viendrais 


viens 


je vienne 


je vinsse 



390 



IBREGCLAR, DEFECTIVE, PSCULIAI 



I.SHNITIVK. 


Partk u-lks. 


IsPlfATIV*. 


lMPSRr>l T. 


Past. Dzrunri 


rVfeTIR, 2. tO 


vetant 


je vets 


je vetais 


je vetis 


v clothe 


vctu./. e. 


tu vets 


in vetais 


tu vfitis 


aux. avoir 




il vet 


il retail 


il vetit 


irregular. 




n. vttoas 


Q. vet ions 


n. vetimes 








v. vetiez 


v. vStites 






ils vet. 'lit 


i!s v.'taient 


ils vfitirent 


VrriR 


sc v6tant 


jo me rets 


je me vetais 


je me vetis 


"• one's 


veto,/ e. 






&c. 












\ . 


vivant 




j.' vivais 


je v6cus 




vecu 


iu vis 


in vivais 


tu v6eus 


aux. ." 




il vit 


il viva it 


il veeut 


Irregular. 




i). vivnns 


ii. ririona 


ii. veciimes 








v. riries 


v. vecutes 






ils vivent 


ils vivuient 


ils veenrent 


Von. B. to 


vnyant 






see 




in Vnis 


in vovais 


tn vis 


MX. avoir 




il roil 


il vuvait 


il vit 


irregular. 








m Mines 










v. vites 






ils roleut 


:i''llt 


ils virent 




vnnlant 


jerenx 


je roulaia 


je VnlllllS 




voulu 


til VcllX 


hi roulais 


tU VnlllllS 


mix. avoir 




il Vellt 


il vi.nlait 


il v.uilut 


Irregular. 




n. vi. ul, .us 


a. rouUooa 


n. votiliimes 








v. rouliei 


V. Vullll'l 






• nt 


ils v..ul:iiriit i 


ill voulurent 



iKD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



39J 



Future. 


CONDITIONAL. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect.' 


je vetirai 


je vetirais 




je vete 


je vetis3e 


tu vetiras 


tu vetirais 


vets 


tu vetes 


tu vetisses 


il vetira 


il vetirait 


q. vete 


il vete 


il vetit 


n. vetirons 


n. vetirions 


vetons 


n. vctions 


n. vetissions 


v. vetirez 


v. vetiriez 


vetez 


v. vetiez 


v. vetissiez 


ils vetiront 


ils vetiraient 


q. vetent 


ils vetent 


ils vetissent 


je me vetiiai 


je me vetirais 




je me vete 


je me vetisso 


&c. 


&c. 


vets-toi 


&c. 


&c. 


je vivrai 


je vivrais' 




je vive 


je vecusse 


tu vivras 


tu vivrais 


vis 


tu vives 


tu vecusses 


il vivra 


il vivrai t 


q. vive 


il vive 


il vecut 


n. vivrons 


n. vivrions 


vivons 


n. vivions 


n. vecussions 


v. vivrez 


v. vivriez 


vivez 


v. viviez 


v. vecussiez 


ils vivront 


ils vivraient 


q. vivent 


ils vivent 


ils vecussent 


je verrai 


je verrais 




je voie 


je visse 


tu verras 


tu verrais 


vois 


tu voies 


hi visses 


il verra 


il verrait 


q. voie 


il voie 


il vit 


n. verrons 


n. verrions 


voyons 


n. voyions 


n. vissions 


v. verrez 


v. verriez 


voyez 


v. voyiez 


v. vissiez 


ils verront 


ils verraient 


q. voieiit 


ils voient 


ils vissent 


je voudrai* 


je voudrais 




je veuille 


je voulusse 


tu voodras 


tu voudrais 




tu veuilles 


tu voulusses 


il voudra 


il voudrait 




il veuille 


il voulut 


n. voudrons 


n. voudrions 




n. voulions 


n. voulussiona 


v. voudrez 


v. voudriez 


veuillez 


v. vouliez 


v. voulussiez 


ik roudront 


ils voudraient 




ils veuillent 


ils voulussent 



392 the participle. — §63,64,65,66. 

§ 63. — The Participle. 

(1.) The participle is so called, because it participates of the na- 
ture both of the verb and of the adjective. It partakes of the nature 
of the verb, in having its signification and regimen, and of the na- 
ture of the adjective in relating, like the latter, to nouns and pro' 
nouns. 

(2.; There arc two sorts of participles ; the present and the past 

v$ 64. — The Participle Present. 

(I.) The participle present, which denotes continuance of action 
answers to the English participle in ing. 

(2.) This participle is invariable J always terminating in ant; as, 
chantant, tinging; finimmnt, Jlnithing ; rccevant, receiving; vendant, 
selling. 

one dai a lady walking; 

dee hommee marchtmt, ■iking. 



J'ai vn lea vests grtmimi aor ccs 
Dttiaaone auperoes, 

IMraciinT lea Use, Be dlsputer lea 

gcrbes. I'-.i.ii.ix. 



I have teen the irinds roaring over 
those superb harvests, not up the 
grain, an<l contend for the sheaves. 



. — Vbbbal Anjaonvsa bhmmg in ant. 

(1.) Tlie verbal adjective in ant expresses merely tlio condition, 
the mannei of being, the quality of the noun. It never denotes ac- 
tion. 

j This adjei ttva varies in gender and nnmber. We give helow 
ezamplefl of the same v/orda, need as participlea and aa adjectives: — 

Participles. 
ft imi)'' <<>>li grant tout le 

mondeesf generalement aimee. 

A too 'H>dy u 

general!*) loved. 

boa ■ mint dans ]'Afri.|Ue. 

'• 
iinris aimant la solitude. 



Une f.-uiTii : abate 

rlo i. mt !<• monde. 

An obliging woman is loved by 
•wry /• 

tribua trranUs dq 1' tfrique. 

11 ny a qne lea natures 
qui aotent proprea a I'ttode de la 

nature. BBBNABDIM 

mate naturct IdispOSUionS) 
only, arc fi' for 



aim. nt genfiralament I'itude. 

V ' res (d it positions) lor 

tiide, arc in general fond of 



§ 06.— Tin: PaRTIOIPLI PlW. 

(1.) The participle past denotea the completion of the action, 
(a.) It ii raeeeptible of variationa for gender and number. 
(3.) The participle past, used without an auxiliary, agr e es in gen- 
der and number with the noun which it qualifies, whether the noun 



THE ADVERB. — § 67, 68. 393 

precedes or follows. In short, all that we have said of the agree- 
ment of the adjective with the noun, may be applied to this par- 
ticiple. 

des enfarrts cherts, beloved children ; 

des femmes estvme.es, esteemed women ; 



Like a golden lamp suspended in 
the azure vault, the moon balances 
herself in the confines of the horizon; 
Mr weakened rays sleep on Uie turf. 



Comme une lampe d'or dans l'azur 

suspendue, 
La lune se balance aux bords de 

1'horizon ; 
Ses rayons affaiblis dorment sur le 

gazon. Lamaetine. 

(4.) For further rules on the participle past, see Syntax, $ 134, and 
following. 

§ 67. — The Adverb. 

(1.) The adverb is an invariable word joined to verbs, adjectives, 
or to other adverbs, to modify their signification. 
(2.) Adverbs are divided into seven classes : — 

1. Of manner ; doucement, softly ; sagement, wisely ; &c. 

2. Of order ; premierement, first ; d'abord, at first ; ensuite, af- 

terwards; &c. 

3. Of place ; ici, here ; ou, where ; la, there ; ailleurs, else- 

where; &c. 

4. Of time ; hier, yesterday ; aujourd'hui, to-day ; demain, to- 

morrow; &c. 

5. Of quantity ; peu, little ; trop, too much ; tant, so much ; &c. 

6. Of comparison; plus, more; moins, less; tres, very. 

7. Of affirmation, ne- oui, yes; certes, certainly; non, no; nullemont, 
gation and doubt ; by no means ; peut-etre, perhaps ; ne, pas, point, 

not ; &c. 

(3.) A few adjectives are sometimes used adverbially. They are 
then invariable : — 

chanter juste, to sing in tune ; 

couter cher, to cost dear ; 

parler haut, to speak loud. 

(4.) Several words united together, and having the force of an ad 
verb, are called an adverbial phrase : — 

tout-a-coup, suddenly ; 

peu-a-peu, by degrees ; 

tout-a-1'heure, immediately; 

de-temps en-temps, now and then, &c. 

§ 68. — Formation of Adverbs from Adjectives. 

(1.) Adverbo ending in merit, may be formed from adjectives in the 
following manner : — 

(2.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with a vowel, merd 
is addsd to form the adverb : — 

17* 



394 THE ADVERB. — §69,70. 

Adjective. Adverb. 

utile, useful; utilement, usefuUy; 

poli, polite; polimcnt, politely ; 

aise, aisement, cosily. 

(3.) Exceptions. 

beau, beautiful; bellemcnt, beautifully; 

fou, focU&<, foOement, foolishly; 

man, soft; mollement, softly; 

nouveeu, nouvellemcnt, m'cv'hi ; 

traitr<\ treacherous; traitreusement, treacherously. 

4.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with n consonant, 
the syllable meat is added to its feminine termination: as, 

rvtrsr. 

boo, bonne, pood ; boimomcnt, in a good manner; 

doux, donee, doucement, sofily; 

ln-uri'iix, henrense, happy; heureusement, happily, 

Adjectives ending in w, change thai termination intommm*:— . 
prudent, />/> prudemment, prudently; 

:nt; -,'.7 ;i ////". 

.</»;/•,- tentement, slowly; 

■nt ; presentement, pns<ntiy. 

(6.) The following adverbs require an acute accenl ever tlie r pr*. 
in-ii!, which e is mute in the adjective: — 



blindly ; 

com modiaushj 

communAm 

■ 

■<msly ; 



importunlmcnt, importunately; 

[ncommod6ment, incommodiously ; 

'irrlll; 

m< m, obstt 

■ und/y. 



. ; BBS 1MHNO IN 

(l.) Adverbs ending in men/, are, like :ill the adjectives from which 
formed, susceptible of three degrees of signification; the 
positive, the comparative, and the Bupei 

The tir^t expresses the manner simply. 
(3.) The second expresses it in f equality, superiority, 

or inferiority, by adding to the adverb t nasi, as, 

oirit 
(4.) Tlie thini, by the addition of the \\'>r<ls Men, tret) fin 
that signification to the bij 

- a COMPABHOV. 

oomms )• .i, ,„ m , „„„ 1 Mii.vi thus-, 

f in tic same man- , , 

«!'• memo, > . plus, i __,, 

) n • \ ' 



PREPOSITION S. — § 72. 



395 



better; 



De plus, 
Moins, 

Mieux, 

Pis, 

Tres, very; 

Ni plus ni moins, neither 'more xor 

less; 
Presque, 
Quasi, 



A-peu-pres, nearly ; 

Pour le plus, for the must ; 
Tout au plus, at most ; 
A qui mieux 

mieux, 
A l'envi, 
De mieux en ' better and, better. 

mieux, 



vying with one 
anotluer ; 



§ 71. — The Preposition. 

(1.) The preposition is an invariable word used to express the re- 
lations of things. 

(2.) The preposition conveys by itself no distinct meaning. The 
preposition and the word which it governs, form what is called an 
indirect regimen. 

§ 72. — Table of the Principal Prepositions. 



A, 

A cause de, 


to, at, in; 
on account of; 


Excepte, 
Hormis, 


> except, but; 


Apres, 


after; 


Hors, 


save; 


Attendu, vu, 


on account of; 


Jusqu'a, 


> until, as far as ; 


Aupres de, 


near ; 


Jusques a, 


Autour de, 


about, around; 


Loin de, 


far from; 


Avant, 


before (earlier} ; 


Le long de, 


along; 


Avec, 


with ; 


Malgre, 


in spite of; 


Chez, 


at the house of; 


Moyennant, 


by means of; 


Contre, 


against ; 


Nonobstant 


notvnthstanaling ; 


Dans, 


in, within ; 


Outre, 


besides ; 


D'apres, 


from, after ; 


Par, 


by, through; 


D'avec, 


from ; 


Pardevant, 


before, {law term); 


De, 


of, from, with; 


Parmi, 


among, amongst; 


Dela,au dela de 


) beyond, on that 
J side of; 
since, for ; 


Pendant, 


during; 


Dedela.pardela 


Pour, 


for; 


Depuis, 


Pres de, 


near, close by ; 


Derriere, 


behind ; 


Proche, proche 


&e,near by; 


Des, 


from ; 


Quant a, 


as for, with respect; 


Devant, 


before, opposite; 


Sans, 


without ; 


Durant, 


during; 


Sauf, 


saving, except ; 


En, 


in, at, to ; 


Selon, 


according to; 


En defa de, 


1 this side ; 


Sous, 


under; 


De de9a, par 


i on this side ; 


Suivant, 


according to; 


defa, 




Sur, 


upon, on; 


Entre, 


between ; 


Touchant, 


touching ; 


Envers, 


> towards ; 


Concernant, 


concerning; 


A l'egard de, 


Vers, 


towards, to; 


Environ, 


about; 


Vis-a-vis de, 


opposite. 



(2.) The prepositions are divided into several classes. 
(3.) Among those denoting place are — 

TCe n'est qu'autour de lui que vole la victoire. 
Autour, around; < Racine. 

{Around him alone hovers victory. 



S96 



PREPOSITION S.— § 12. 



Chez, with; at the 
house of; among; 
(apudoftheLatin.) 

Pans, in; 



Parm:, among ; 
Fen, towards; 



Sous, under; 



8ur, upon; 



Enfin, chcz les Chretiens les moeurs sont innocen 

teS. CORNEILLE. 

Among Christians, finally , the manners are innocent. 

Che: inon pare, «/ my father's house. 

Rome n'est plus </<7/is Koine. Corneille. 

Rome is no longer in Rome. 

Parmi les rocliers, vers le milieu de ces montagnci 
eaoarpaes. F£s£los. 

I le rocks, towards the middle of those steep 
mi iu nl a ins. 

L'autel convert de feux. tombe et fnit. sous la 
tern. Voltaire. 

The altar covered icith fire, fills and disappears un- 
der the earth. 

Les riches ne sont sur la terre quo poor Hiiro du 
Men. FfnfbOlt. 

,irc placed on the earth merely to do good. 



(4.) Some, denoting time, ne — 



Purant. ) , 
Pendant, )' lun "?i 



l.i unit, illt* n'a point dorrai. CournUA 
During the night she has had 



(5.) Some mark place and time, .us: — 

Ma Orleans; Dii sa source. L' Academic. 

from Oil- 

L'hi.inmc. dit M naissance a le st ntini'iit du plai.-ir 

et ilr la doalenr. RIamillon. 

i his birth has the sensation of pleat ' 

;:hin jawm'a I'Oeean. 



Dts, from ; 
" (l 

" {time ,-) 



Pepui*. from ; since 

(atari) 



(time ;) 



*mie. 
I ' 

Bo Orient, en Occld< x tnille ans on 

que d'Alea u.o\. 



Dans, on, ROUS v, ' r ~- vV '' • I11; '. v :i ' s " ■"' l' l: "' ,, I under tliis head. 
(6.) Some prepositions mark order; as: — 



Avant. before i 

(at an earlier time ;) 



Aprcs : after; 

EDtre, between ; 

behind; 

>*f(rrr ; 
(in fron ' 



i til en ami, avant de nous 

pmdr. Btammlab. 

Conscience war 

Je craina Di< d tins princlpale- 

ment celnl • 1 1 1 i ne li Sim. 

I / >:r principally the man 
■ nhim. 

L*honune < st plac6 libre < ntre to flee et la rata, 

MlRMOltTKb. 

Man is ; I and virtue. 

11 so met Ion, - eehd 'i"> parle. 

vfcRE. 

// himself always behind the tpeakw. 

rcher d< rant toi I'ange extermmatesr. 

Yol.TAIkC. 

Send before thee the exterminating angel. 



PREPOSITION s. — & 72. 397 



(7 ) The prepositions marking union, are, 



f Je veuxvivre avec elle, avec elle expirer. 
Avec, with; < Corneille. 

[_Iwill live ivith her, die with her. 

(Outre l'estime de soi-meme, l'honnete homme 

j possede encore l'estime et la confiance univer- 
Outre, besides; \ selles. Marmontel. 

| Besides self-esteem, the honest man possesses universal 

[_ esteem and confidence. 

(8.) Those of separation, exception, are : — 

{II travaille toute la semaine, excepte le dimanche. 
L'Acad^mie. 
He works tlie whole week, except Sunday. 

Hormis, except ; \ H % mis **' *° ut le n ! onde est content - 

' c * w 3e"'* ) All are pleased, except you. 

Nuln'aura de l'esprit, hors nous et nos amis. 

Hors, except; «( Moliere. 

No one shall have wit but ourselves and our friends. 

Point de vertu sans religion, point de bonheur 

, sans vertu. Diderot. 

, wi nou ; •< j^ virtue witlwut religion, no happiness without 

virtue. 

"On peut tout sacrifler a l'amitie, sauf l'honnetete 

Sauf save • extent • \ et la J ustice - Martmontel. 

' ; p ; <. We may sacrifice all to friendship, except honesty and 



(9.) The prepositions of opposition are : — 

("Le travail est une meilleureressourcec<ra2re l'ennui 

P t ' tf • J ( l ue * e P^ a i s i r - Trublet. 

t-ontre, against; < j^ a ^ or z - s a De n er resource against ennui than 

\_ pleaspyre. 

f Nous suivronsmaZgye nousle vainqueur de Lesbos. 

Malgre, vn, spite of; < We sJiaU j ollm against our win ilie conqueror ' f 

(^ Lesbos. 

fLa verite nonobstant le prejuge, l'erreur et le 
T$on6bstmt,notwith-\ mensonge, se fait jour a. la fin. Marmontel. 
standing ; ] Truth, prejudice, error and falsehood notwithsland- 

(_ ing, comes at last to light. 

(10.) The prepositions of conformity are: — 

"La terre, cette bonne mere, multiplie ses dongt 

selon le nombre de ses enfants. F£n£lon. 

The earth, that good mother, multiplies her gifts ac 

cording to the number of her children. 
Les talents produisent suivant la culture. 

Marmontel. 
w Talents produce according to their cultivation. 

(11.) Several words placed together and performing the part of a 
preposition, are called a prepositional phrase : — 

A l'egard de, with regard to ; 

En faveur de, in favor of; 

A la reserve de, reserving; <frc. 



Suivant. 



A 



398 



C ON J UN CTIOXS. § V3. 



§ f3. — The Conjunction. 

(1.) Jonjunctfjns are invariable words which serve to connect 
words and sentences. 

(2.) French grammarians divide the conjunctions into nine 
eJasees : — 

1 Copulative : 



2 Adversative, 

3 Disjunctive, 

4 Explanatory, 

6 Circumstantial. 
6 Conditional, 

T I 



et, and ; ni, nor; que, that ; de s)rte que, »o 

that ; fee. 
mais, but ; quoique, though; eependant, 

yet ; ft a. 
ou, or ; ou bion, else ; ni, neither ; &c. 
Bftvoir, namely; comme, as; e'est-a-dire, 

that is /■■ toy; Ac. 
qoand, lorsqae, when; pendant que, while, 
si, (/'; bum qnoi, without which ; suppose que, 

ntppoting that ; A 
ear, far; poisqae, since; pourquoi, why, 

: \ 8. 
or, doi . .linsi, thus; d'ailleurs, 

besul' 
I que, //uz/. 

CO Wei ■ list of the conjunctions and conjunctive 

-nly need in French. We will divide thorn into 

1 I "".':•■■• iona and sonjonctive phraaes which may be placed in 
the fir>t or in the leeond pari of a period: — 

que, 

A ni' 



S Transilive, 



rminat 



ive, J 



[ue, 
Alaal que, 
Attendo qae, 

-Atin . 
An n 

qae, 

nit quo. 

ate que, 
,•• qrae, 
que, 
Dcpah 

que, 

in'-. 



I 01 f 

i 
at, /w . 

Of, .vwirr 

than ; 
although ; 

"■ lmi/n.t; 
for fear • 

I Sat ; 
so that ,- 

irhilf ; 

' hat ; 



■ ce qae, 

on Men, 
Oatre qae, 
I qne, 

Ponrvn 'iu>'. 
I ' 
Qoana, 

Bitol qae, 
Bolt qae, 

- 

■ qae, 
T.int que, 
Tandli qae, 

Yu ■ i 1 !• -, 



v nlil that; 
if, when,' 
or, rlsr ; 

t'tat ; 
'hat; 

if, xrhrn ; 

though; 

,f: , 

v Mca t 

' that; 

■ 

lupfomnm that; 

thai; 
irhilf thai ; 

' that. 



INTERJECTIONS.-— § 74. 



2. The conjunctions and conjunctive phrases which usually come 
between two parts of a sentence, or at the commencement of a dis- 
course momentarily interrupted, are : — 



Aussi bien que, 

Aprcs tout, 

A condition que, 

Au surplus, 

C'est pourquoi, 

Cependant, 

C'est-a-dire, 

C'est^a-savoir, 

Car, 

Done, 



as well as; 

nevertheless; 

on condition that ; 

besides; 

therefore ; 

however ; 

that is to say ; 

that is ; 

for, because; 

therefore ; 



En effet, 


in fact; 


Et puis, 


and then; 


Mais. 


but; 


Partant, 


therefore; 


Par consequent, 


consequently; 


Pourtant, 


however ; \ 


Sans quoi, 


unless that; 


Savoir, 


to wit ; 


Sinon, 


unless ; 


Toutefois, 


nevertheless. 



See Lesson 100 — Examples on the different uses of conjunctions. 

§ Y4. — Interjections. 
(1.) The interjections indicate some sudden affection or emotion 
of the mind. They are exclamations which seem to take the place 
of entire propositions. 

(2.) Some imply astonishment : — 

{ Beaux arts, eh ! dans quels lieux n'avez-vous droit 

Ah ' eh I &c <■ de plaire " Delille. 

$ Fine arts, ah ! in what place have you not a right to 
\ please. 

(3.) Some express derision, irony, distrust, &c. : — 

Ouais ah > indeed > { 0uais ! ce maitre d'armes vous tient bien au cceur. 

( Ah ! indeed ! this fencing master displeases you much. 
(4.) Others express contempt, aversion and disapprobation : — 

Foin ! away with, &c. } l° in dul ™S 6 * d % ™ IT ! , LA Fontaine ' 
J ' ( Away with the wolf and his race ! 

Tout beau l softly ! \ l™} 7 beau > monsieur ; tout beau ! Moliere. 

■> J ( Softly, sir ; softly ! 
(5.) We shall carry no further this classification, but content our- 
selves with giving a list of the most usual interjections : — 



/ so, so I 



Ah! 


ah! 


Oh! 


Ahi! 


eight 


Ouais ! 


Bah! 


bah! 


Ouf! 


Chut! 


silence ! hist ! 


Paf! 


Eh! 


eh! 


St! 


Fi! 


. Jyi 


Sus! 


Gare! 


take care ! 


Zest! 


Ha! 


ha ! . 


Fi done ! 


Helas 


alas ! 


Ho 9a! 


lieu! 


alas ! 


He bien ! 


Hola! 


holla ! 


Eh bien ! 


Ho! 


ho! 


Oui da ! 


Hem! 


hem! 


Or f a! 


Hein ! 


eh! 


Tout beau ! 


Hum! 


hum! 


Silence! Paix 



&c. 




&c. 



400 SYNTAX.— § To, § ML 

§ to— SYNTAX. ' 

(1.) Syntax treats of the agreement, government, and arrangement 
of words in sentences. 

(2.) One word is said to agree with another, when it takes the 
same modification of gender, number, and person. 

(3.) One word governs another, when by the influence of the 
former Chfl latter is made to assume a particular form or place. 

(4.) The proper arrangement of words consists in placing them in 
thf order aaaetioned by grammatical rules, deduced from the best 
tie custom. 

- adopted by the modern Trench grammarians, 
the student is referred to j 2. and j 43, (2.) (3.) (4.) (5.) 

§ 70. — Tin: Noun. — l'i l< i 

(1.) Ill French, as well as in English, a noun used as the subject 
or nominative of an affirmative or negative sentence, generally pre- 
aedea the nth : — 

The must humble man lues liberty. 



I. UM le plus obSCOr nime la 
lil'itN-. « * 1 1 < i IA1 Dai HID. 

/. Hani lien dea nana 

quelle promet L 



// '■nefili 



(2.) In poetry and In < . the subject is sometimes 

placed after the verb: — 

\ vug vable can exist, vhere vir- 
tue it mini in?. 

It ■ ■ ', in is VM H f ti ng, for- 

tune is to be fen re d. 



II n 

./ ttrtu. ' i 

La fortune eat ;i araladre on 

: !'. ui.t. 

thai la, in sentences which we, 

while repeating the words of a person, throw among other sentences, 
to indicata that person aa tl ; le subject, In French, must 

alwaj - follow the verb: — 

Qenret • aple I // Iftntor, the jxop]* 

qui est conduit par on sage roil rnedby avk* 

I | Interrogate . the noOU generally precedes the 

verb which must be immediately followed by a pronoun correspond* 
oder, nnmber and person with the noun: — 
/. iii/ / 

in Meal Cbabiixon. \ fit > Literally, Death, is 'it aw staff 
| &c. 

(5.) When the sentence commences with one of the following 

• >i, irhire ; que, what; rombien, hue much; quard, irhen , 



SYNTAX OF NOUNS. — §76. 401 

the noun may be placed immediately after the verb, or in ac- 
conlance with the last rule : — 

Ou est vttre pere ? or ) -an,*** -•„ ™»,». t«t i^, o 

Ou votre pert Test-il ? J ^ rg u V ™ f* ™ ? 

Mais que sert un long regne, a I Of what use is a long reign, un~ 
moins qu'il ne soit beau 1 less it be glorious ? 

BOURSAULT. | 

(6.) The noun, used as a direct regimen, has the same place in the 
Bentence in French as in English : — 

La force fonde, etend et main- I Power founds, extends and main- 
tient un empire. Saurin. | tains an empire. 

(7.) When there are, in the same sentence, two nouns, one used 
as direct, the other as indirect regimen, and those nouns with the 
words qualifying or modifying them, are of equal length, the direct 
regimen should precede the indirect : — * 



Le malheur ajoute un nouveau 
lustre a la gloire des grands hom- 
ines. F^N^LON. 

Avez-vous donne les livres a mon 
frere 1 Girault Duvivier. 



Misfortunes add a new lustre to the 
glory of great men. 

Have you given the books to my 
brother ? 



(8.) When, however, the qualifying or explanatory words render 
the direct regimen longer than the indirect, the regime indirect is 
placed first : — 



Avez-vous donne a mon frere les 
livres que vous lui aviez promis ? 

Les hypocrites parent des dehors 
de la vertu les vices les plus honteux. 
Noel. 



Have you given my brother the 
books, which you had promised him ? 

Hypocrites adorn with the appear- 
ance of virtue, the most shameful 
vices. 



(9.) The indirect regimen precedes the direct regimen, when the 
meaning would otherwise be doubtful : — 



Tachez de ramener par la dou- 
ceur ces esprits egarts. 

Bescherelle. 



Try to bring back, by mildness, 
these erring spirits. 



Any other construction would render the sentence equivocal. 

(10.) In English, the name of the possessor frequently precedes 
the name of the object possessed; and the two are connected by 
means cf 's (the old Saxon genitive termination). In French the 
order is always different. The name of the object precedes that of 
the possessor, and the connecting link is a preposition : — 

Les livres de mon ami. I My friend's books. 

Vous avez vu la montre de ma You have seen my sister's watch. < 
Boeur. J 

* This must also he the case when the regime direct is shorter than 
the regime indirect. 



402 



I-f-K-f AX -Q -F THE AR-f-MIrE. § V7. 



(11.) The name of an object always precedes the name of th« 
substance of which it is formed, or which it contains. The preposi. 
tit in de comes between them : — 



Une table de marbre. 

La France a beaucoup dc car 
rierea de marbre. 

Un linutcille de vin. 



A marble tabic. 

France has many iflarbk quarries. 



A bottle of wine. 

(12.) The word representing an individual always precedes that 
describing his particular occupation, or the merchandise of which ho 
s: — 

[trade donee. I A dancing master. 

■ languamn. 
Un nurohand de drap. j Adrap ,n cloth. 

(13.) The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, etc., always precedes the 
noun representing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose 
to which it i- adapted. The connecting preposition is generally <1 : — 

mSL 

A crist-miU. 
M • m ills. 

carriage. 

1 

riagc. 

me of an objeci precedes the noon representing its 
particular produce, nan, it append A generally eonneeti 

nouns : — 



iin-a-vetit. 

brine, 

: 

spear. 
I chevanx. 



I Tit flu fruit de Varhrr a pain 

ltd ile l'artieh.iut. 

PlBBBB, 

■ arte dam la bonche 

lir conune \- pent d 

CR. 

• • p.is m 

nombn 
Da bois-&-brdler. 

Ull Veil.' A rail. 



The fas?.- of the fruit of the bread- 
mblettiat 'of the' artichoke. 

The name of virtue in the mouth 
'tis makes one shu/i- 
UM of the rattle-snake. 

If "nils {neat rattle) are 

I as sheep (iwol ani- 

'oom. 

A water glass, I. e. glass for water. 



01 mi: Article. 

(l.) The article* most be need in French before every nova em- 
ployed i" ■ general sense, or denoting i whole spedea of objects; 
although in similar cases, the srtiole is not ased in English. 

* The itcdeut will recoiled thsi the Prencfa have only one article, la 
Ti"' word i"i befag by modern French grammarians, very property class- 
ed uith the muneral adjectives. 



SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. § Y7. 



403 



Les bicnfaits peuvent tout sur 
une ame bien nee. Voltaire. 

L'honneur, aux grands cceurs, est 
plus sher que la vie. Corneil^e. 

La boats suit toujours un lache 
desespoir. Crebillon. 

(2.) The article is used in French, as in English, before a noun 
denoting a particular object, or taken in a particular sense : — 



Benefits are all powerful with a 
well disposed mind. 

Honor is with magnanimous hearts 
more precious than life. 

Shame always follows a cowardly 
despair. 



Le bonheur des mechants comme 
un torrent s'ccoule. Racine. 

Z/arbrisseau le plus sain a be- 
soin de culture. 

Fabre d'Eglantine. 

Le moment du peril est celui du 
courage. La Harpe. 



Tlve happiness of the wicked runs 
aivay like a torrent. 

The healthiest shrub needs cultiva- 
tion. 

The time of peril is tlve time for 
courage. • 



(3.) The article is used before the names of countries, provinces, 
rivers, winds and mountains : — 



La France est bornee au midi 
par les Pyrenees et la Mediterranee ; 
a Z'est par la Suisse et la Savoie ; 
an nord par la Belgique et a Z'ouest 
par Z'Ocean. Ses principales rivieres 
sont la Meuse, le Rhin, la Seine, la 
Loire, la Garonne et le Rhone. 



France is bounded on the south by 
Uie Pyrenees and the Mediterra- 
nean; on the east by Suritzerland 
and Savoy ; on the north by Bel- 
gium, and on the west by the Ocean. 
Its principal rivers are tlie Meuse, 
the Rhine, the Seine, tlie Loire, the 
Garonne and the Rhone. 



(4.) Those countries which take their name from their capital, or 
some other city within their boundaries, take no article : — 

Naples est un pays delicieux. 
Vcnise etait un etat puissant. 
Ncio York est un etat sain. 



Naples is a delightful country. 
Venice was a powerful state. 
New York is a healthy state. 



(5.) The French use the article before titles prefixed to names : — 



General Cavaignac; 
President Bonaparte. 



Le general Cavaignac. 
Le president Bonaparte. 

(6.) The article is also used before the names of dignities, of cer- 
tain bodies, systems of doctrine, and with other words mentioned 
below : — 

La monarcbie, monarchy; 
Le parlement, parliament; 
Le gouvernement. government ; 
Le christianisme, Christianity; 
L'episcopat, episcopacy; 

A l'cglise, at church ; 

(7.) Bsfore the names of the seasons, and the following expres- 
sions : — 

last fall; 

last week; 

&c. 



A l'ecole, 


at school; 


Au college, 


at college ; 


Au marche, 


at, to market 


Au lit, 


in bed. 


&c. 


&c. 



L'annee prochaine, next year ; 
L'annee demiere, last spring; 

Le printemps prochain, next spring ; 



L'automne dernier, 
La semaine derniere, 
&c. 



404 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICL E. § 18. 

(8.) The names of several cities tike the article. Those nouni 
have generally a meaning, and indicate often natural objects : — 

Le Havre, Havre; La Rochelle, Rochelle ; 

La Haic, The Hague ; | Le Detroit, Detroit ; 

(9.) In speaking* of the parts of the body or of the qualities of the 
mind, the French use the article in cases where the English use a 
possessive adjective, or the indefinite article : — 

Votre frcre a les cheveux noirs. Your brother has black hair. 

II s'est blessfi d la main. He has hurt his hand. 

Charles a la m6moire excellento. Charles has an excellent memory. 

§ 78. — Use of the Article before Words taken in a Par- 
titive Sense. 
(1.) A word, when used to denote an entire object or class of ob- 
jects is sai.l to have a general sense ; when, however, it is employed 
to i n d ic ate a jmrt of any thing or class of things, considered in refer- 
ence to the whole, it is said to have a partitive sense. Before a word 
taken partitively, the word some or any, is, or may, in English, often 
be employed. If, for example, I use the words courage and wood, 
abstractedly, 1 take them in the general sense : but if I say, give me 
tnxxl, i/our brother has courage, 1 oae them iii the partitive sense, that 
is, I ask for a pari of thai substance called •/•'»*/, and attribute to your 
brother something of thai quality called courage. 

i The- article accompanied by, or in combination with the prep- 
osition </<, called by some grammarians the partitive article [} 13, 
(10.)] is need before nouns taken in a partitive sense. — 



Du pain ct tie l'cau lui sullisent. 
Apporte/.-ii | ,ni vi- 

Daijpe. 

Toojonrs la pstrie a in channel 
penr mot La H 



Bread and water are sufficient for 
him ; that la, some bread. 

t/s salt and vinegar; that 
soft 

n d has always (some) 
charms for mr. 



(3) The preposlBoD </<• only is used, when the noun taken in a 
partitive sense, Is preceded by in adjective: — 



II poso ado •'■ belles malsons. 
Propoeone-nous a Dous-mamei ie 
grands examples a Indter, pin- 

« Mlivre. 
J. .1. i 



He possesses fine houses. 

1st us projxise to ourselves rat\er to 
imitate <;rcat examples, than to fol- 
low vain systtms. 



(4.) When, however, the noun preceded by the adjective, is con. 
nected with it, and the two form a compound noun that noun takes 
the article according to rule (i>.), as, 

ns ; des grands hom- I Young people; gtat nun (some). 



SYS TAX OF THE ARTICLE. — §79,80. 



405 



Fortunate would it have been, if in 
his time (Alexander's) Macedon had 
had lunatic asylums. 



Heureux si de son temps, pour de 

bonnes raisons, 
La Macedoine eut eu des petites 

maisons ! Boileau. 

(5.) The preposition alone is used before a noun, when it is pre- 
eeded by a collective word or by an adverb of quantity : — 



Une multitudo de peuples. 
Beaucoup de personnes. 
A quoi bon tant d'amis 1 
Unseul nous suffit s'il nous aime. 
Flokian. 



A multitude of nations. 
Many persons. 

Of what use are so many friends 
A single one suffices if he loves us. 



(6.) The article, however, is used, when the noun preceded by a 
collective word, is limited by what follows. The words la plupart, 
the most ; bien, many ; and infiniment, infinitely, form also exceptions 
to the preceding rule : — 

Many of the persons whom I have 



I have few left, of the books which 
have been given me. 

The wicked have much trouble to 



Un grand nombre des personnes 
que j'ai vues. Noel. 

II me reste peu des livres qui 
m'ont ete donnes. Noel. 

Les mediants ont bien de la peine 
a demeurer unis. F&dsLON. remain ■ 

(7.) The preposition is used alone before a noun placed after a 
verb conjugated negatively, but not interrogatively at the same 
time : — 



Je ne vous ferai pas de reproches. 

L'on ne dit jamais que l'on n'a 
point ^'esprit. Boursault. 

On ne fait jamais de bien a Dieu 
en faisant du mal aux hommes. 
Voltaire. 



/ shall cast upon you no reproaches. 
We never say, that we have no wit. 

We never can do good in respect to 
God, by doing evil to men. 



(8.) The commencement of rule (6.) will also apply to this sen- 
tence : — 

Ne donnez jamais des conseils qu'il I Never give advice which it is dan- 
soit dangereux de suivre. gerous to follow. 

Girault Duvivier. I 

§ 19. — English Indefinite Article A or An. 
The French numeral adjective un, masc. une, fern, answers to th 
English article a or an [$ 13, (4.) (11.)]. 

The restrictions to its use are specified in the remarks on the ar- 
ticle. 

§ 80. — Repetition of the Article. 
(1.) General rule. The article* is repeated before every noun 
and every word used as a noun, having a separate meaning : — 

* This rule applies to the determinative adjectives, mon, ton, son, ce, 
cet, &c. 



406 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 



-§81. 



Le coeur, /'esprit, la mceurs, tout | The heart, the mind, \he vmnner* 
jragne a la culture. even/ thing improves by cultivation. 

Le pere et la mere semblaient ex- 1 The father and mother seemed U 
citer leur petite compagne a sen excite their little companion to feea 
repaitre la premiere. BdfPOK. | upon it first. 

(2.) The article will, therefore, be repeated, when one of two ad- 
jectives united by tlie conjunction el, qualities a noun expressed, and 
the other a noun understood : — 

Lhistoireancieiiiieet lannxlerne. | Ancient and modern history. 
that i-, l'hi.-tuire ancienne et l'histoire modorne. 

Ancient and modern philosophers. 

The first and second stories. 



:>sophes anciens et les mo- 

Le premier et le second ctage. 

(3.) Should, however, the two adjectives qualify the same ex- 
pressed word, the article most not be repeated. 

■ and pious Fcnelon has well 



Lc sage et pienx Fenelon b dee 
drou • 

rale. QlRAL'l.T 1)1 . VI VIKII. 

• iota ii lni tend le dons et 
tendi Bon 

(4.) When two Dovria are joined by the conjunction ov, end the 

second is merely ■ repetition c>r explanation of the first, the article 

hhoulil not l»- repeated. 



established rights to general cs- 

ii !s to hii:i the 
:' tender book. 



■ 

«• I M- 'lull ilnvrt 

lioir. 

■u'u.iit parml I 

dee pro- 
J. J. B 



The ch, ' the head of Ihi 

condor, are covered with bla . 

W among t ■ 
the palatines or governors of prov- 



§ 81. — II - OM i iii; I Aktici.h. 

,,; Deed before numbers placed after the names 
•.heir order of succ* . (•.)]. 

/. • . ■•• •(.'■',■ i 

i be French put no article before nouns placed in a; | 

with, or ■ of, other preceding nous : — 

/. 



Louis i. 

bten different de son pere. 

i prosa- 

telir ti.i 

is, vousotcsan.. 



tr\ .''■"■' 

Itt/Sr, a comedy of M » . 
Lamar! /' 

II' i 

Am'-; . 

(3.) If the explanatory word be itself qualified or r» "-tr'cted by 



other word?, the MM is then placed before it : — 



SYNTAX OF THE AR2ICLE. — § 31. 407 



Cet Lommfi est un Fran^ais 
d'une famille illustre, mais malhea- 
reuse. 

Cos messieurs sont des marchands 
de Lycu. 



That man is a Frenchman, of an 
illustrious, but unfortunate family. 

Those gentlemen are merchants 
from Lyons. 



(4.) Under the second rule of this Section may also be placed the 
words mentioned in \ 76, Rules (11.) (12.) (13.) and (14.) :— 

une montre d'or, a gold watch ; 

un maitre de dessin, , a drawing-master ; I 

un moulin-a-vapeur, a steam mill ; 

une chanibre-a-coucher, a bed-room. 

(5.) Some exceptions to rule (2.) will be better explained by ex 
ainples than by precepts: — 

un inagasin a foin, a hay-loft ; 

une bouteille a vin, a wine-bottle, 

are a loft intended for hay, a bottle intended for wine, but not actu- 
ally containing hay or wine. 

un magasin au foin. a hay-loft ; 

la bouteille au vin,' the wine-bottle. 

That is, the loft actually used for hay, the bottle now used for 
wine. 

un magasin de foin, aloft \ r-,, , ihay ; 

une bouteille de vin, a bottle \J J \ wine. 

(6.) Proper names of persons do not receive the article, unless it 
forms a part of the name ; as, Lebrun, Lamartine, La Harpe, La 
Fontaine ; as also in some gallicised Italian names ; as, Le Tasse, 
Tasso, Le Dante, Dante, &c. An adjective, however, coming before 
proper names, is generally preceded by the article. 

Le bon et naif La Fontaine. I The good and candid La Fontaine. 

Le pieux Fenclon. | The pious Fenelon. 

(7.) It has been seen [§ 12, (1.) Examples] that the plural article is 
often placed in elevated style before the names of renowned indi- 
viduals : — 



Nous avons vu a la fois a la tete 
des escadrons imperiaux, les Murat, 
les Kellermann, les Lassalle, les Mon- 
torun, Le G£n£ral Foy. 



We have seen at once at the head 
of the imperial squadrons, Murat, 
Kellerman, Lassalle, Montorun. 



(8.) Names of kingdoms and provinces, when preceded by the 
preposition en, take no article : — 

En France, en Amerique. In France, in America. 

(9.) No article is placed after en preceding a noun used indeter- 
minately ; or after the word ni standing before a noun, which is the 
direct regimen of a verb, preceding the negative ;*— 



408 



6 Y K TAX OF THE ARTICLE. 



-§82. 



Nous irons en voiture. 

Vous etes en peine. 

Nous n'avony ni or ni argent. 



Wc shall go in a carriage. 

You are in trouble. 

Wc have neither gold nor silver. 



(10.) The article is omitted before plus and moins in comparative 
sentences, where, in English, it would, in the corresponding place, bo 
averted: — 

Plus uue action est utile, plus | The more useful an action is, the 
lie est loua'jle. | more praiseworthy it is. 

(11.) The article precedes plus and muins to express comparison 
in the highest degree, and agrees in gender with the noun : — 

Your sister did not icccp, although 



Voire soeur no pieman pas, quoi- 
quYlle fut la plus alllij;<Je do toutos 
cos ilames. 



she was the most grieved of all those 
ladies. 



(12.) The article remains invariable when it stands before a su- 
perlative, in which, however, no direct comparison is intended: — 

VotCQ sccur M plenre pas lors I Your sister does not weep, even 
memo quelle est le plus allligee. when she is most grieved. 

NoiiL. | 

(13.) To give more force to the diction, the article is often omitted 

in a rapid enumeration of individuals: — 



Citojesa, Strangers, amis, enne- 

mis, tous la reverent. 

WIUi'U 

Ajouter fbi 
Avoir besom. 



Avoir cliaud, 
Avoir cootome, 
Avoir >\ 
Avoir dbpntOj 
Avoir envii-. 
Avoir ap|K-tit, 
Avoir t'uim, 
Avoir froi.l. 
Avoir boats, 
Avoir inal. 

Avoir patter ce , 
Avoir p'lir. 
Avoir pitie, 
Avoir raison, 
Avoir .sommeil, 
Avoir lotfj 
Avoir soin. 
Avoir suj-t. 
Avoir I 



to give faith ; 
I 

to be warm ; 
to be accustomed \ 
to intend ; 
to have difficulties ; 
to Irish . | 
to have a r 
to be hu I 
to be e. 

to be ashamed % 
■: pain ; 
to have p 
to be at 
to take pitt/ 1 
to be i tf 
to be si 
to be thirsty ; 
to take care ; 
to have n 
to be wr 



I Citizens, strangers, friends, ene- 
mies, all reverence him. 

mi: Akikm.k is omitted. 
Pomander |>ardon,fo beg pardon; 
Donner avis, * . ■ r 
PairepartTI ***** 

Knii'ii'lro raillorio* to bear jokes, 
Pairs attention, to pay attention ; 
Paire bonne chsre,<0 Hot 

Pairs credit, to give credit ; 

i vie. to excite emy. 

Pairs lioiineur, to honor ; 



Cheroher fortune, to seek one's for- 
tune ; 
Courir risquo, to run t'o 
Demaoder justices 



Pairs horreni, 
Pairs pour, 
Pairs mention, 
Pairs naufrage, 
Pairs place. 
Pairs plaisir. 

Pairs pn 

ilexion, 
Pairs tort, 

Mettre tin, 
Mettro ordro. 

Perdra courage, 
Porter • 
Porter maJhanr, 

Prendre cong6, 



to inspire horror ; 

to frighten ; 

to mention i 

to s uffcr shipwreck ; 

to make room ; 

to obli 

to present ; 

to reflect ; 

to injure ; 

to put an end, 

to arrange ; 

to lose cow age ; 

to envy; 

to cause mis/or- 

tune; 
to take leave; 



• Lu lend re la ruilkrio is also said, but it means to understand yoking. 



IHTAXOF THE ADJECTIVE. §83,84. 409 



Prendre feu, to catch fire ; 

Prendre garde, to take care ; 
Prendre haleine, to take breath ; 
Prendre medecinefo take medicine , 



Prendre racine, 
Rendre compte, 
Rendre justice, 
Rendre service, 
Rendre visite. 



to take root ; 
to account ; 
to render justice ; 
to oblige ; 
to visit, 



Tenir lieu, to take the place ; 

Tenir parole, to keep one's word ; 
Trouver moyen, to find means; 
Avec ardeur, &c, with ardor; 
Par depit, &c, through spite ; 
Pour recompense, as a reward ; 

Sans peine, without difficulty ; 

Sans souci, without sorroio or 



Tenir compagnie, to accompany ; 

§ 83. — The Adjective. 

(1.) We have seen [5 18, Rule (3.)] that an adjective relating to 
two substantives of the same gender must agree with them in gender, 
and he put in the plural : 

(2.) And Rule (4.) that an adjective, relating to two or more nouns 
of different genders, must be put in the masculine plural. 

(3.) When, however, nouns, united or not by the conjunction et, 
are somewhat synonymous; when the writer wishes actually to 
qualify only the last ; or when the mind, more particularly occupied 
with the last noun, seems to forget the others; the adjective will 
assume the gender and number of the last noun only. 

Toute sa vie n'a ete qu'un travail, 
qu'une occupation continuelle. 

Massillon. 

Je ne connais point de roman, 
point de comedie esyagnok sans 
combats. Florjan. 

Le fer, le bandeau, la flamme est 
toute prete. Racine. 

(4.) Sometimes the adjective preceded by two or more substan- 
tives joined by the conjunction et, qualifies the last only. It must 
then, of course, agree with that noun only. 

Le bon gout des Egyptiens leur The g»od taste of the Egyptians 
fit aimer la soUdite et la regularite made tliem like solidity and un- 
toute nue. Bossuet. adorned regularity. 

T/ie smile is a mark of good-will, 
of applause, and of inward satisfacr- 
tion. 



His wlwle life has been nothing but 
continual labor and occupation. 

I know no romance, no Spanish 
comedy, without combats. 

the band, the flame is all 



Le sourire est une marque de 
bienveillance, d'applaudissement, 
et de satisfaction intiHeure. 

Buffon. 



§ 84. — Remarks on the Peculiarities of several Adjectives. 
(1.) The adjective feu (late, deceased), is invariable, when placed 
before the article or adjective determining a noun, but varies when 
placed, after the determining word : — 



J'ai oui dire a feu ma soeur. que 
sa fille et moi naquimes la meme 
ann4e. Montes<hjieu. 

18 



the 



I have heard my late sister say, 
her daughter and I were born 



410 



STNTAX OF THE ADJKCTIV B. § 84. 



Le due de. . . doit a la bienveil- 
lance dont l'honorait la fcue reine, 
les bonnes graces de l'eiupereur. 
Die Salvandy. 



The duke of . . . owes to thegood* 
will of the late queen towards him, 
the good graces of the emperor. 



(2.) The adjectives nu, bare and derui, half; are invariable when 
placed before the noun : — 

11 etait ?! B-tftta ; lea pledfl i'hau»t a //• was bare-headed ; he wore on hit 

de petites sandales. VOUTAIBB. feet small samlaJs. 

-hi-Htv aprde BVOirquitte* Half an hour after having left the 

le vaisseau, jo foolai le BOl am.ri- ship, 1 trod the American soil. 
cain. Chatbaubbiand. 

(3.) The adjectives nu and demi, when coming after the noun 
agree with it : — 



atomes voe entantaa denseo- 
reretfet hiver, jonr et noil kosjoim 
J.J H 
Optmiofl paya la tate de Cains 
Qraoohua, dii 

dor. 



Accustom your children to rcmai i 
i night, 

always .'• 

' i i,.; paid for the head of Caius 
G IAMB ptmndt and a 

hall of 



(1.) The adjectives excep -compria, includ- 

ing ; ci-juint, i-i-iiiclns, annexed, mcloted; franc-de-port, postage free ; 
como under tbfi tw<» last roll 



Vims bronvi ■ la copie 

de la lctlre BJM M , ■ I BBritB. 
.1 J II BBSAU. 

cri|)ii<'M ran. 

VMM trow • i pie de 

ma lettra. 

nde lis ciii'i 
tottrei 

BBBMABOtM Dl Br. PlBBBK. 

J'ni r port one lettre 

BDonyme. ' J. J. fi 

Ll i' -iiitr.it BOClal «-st ini|>riiiit'\ 

. en recevrea doaae exem- 

plaires, /><;»<. < de port. 

TlIK 



I . / !i n ./ a n tiered the 000V of 

the letter which M. . . has written 

of that bird came to 
me from I 
| turn h' 

I unit Jind inclosed, a copy of 
i:iy litte,. 

I I to you the fee letters 

I oed, pottage free, an anony- 

mous / 

V I ■ ' is join ten', 

and you 
of postage. 



(5.) An adjective used adverbially, that is, tnodifying ■ verb, m of 
course invariable [\ *i7, (3.)] : — 

En Lapoole, one peau d'hermine In Lapland the skin of the hcrmtn 

ooftte qnatre <-u cinq boi four or five sous , the fUsh of 

Ohalrdecet animal sen! tri s bad. 
wait, >ki>. 

De gat vie to n'ai eatendu des voii Never in my life have I heard 
de fcuinie DBBflSBT a! . women's voices sound so hud. 
M'»c. Dt Mvioial I 



syntax of the adjective. § 85. 411 

§ 85. — Place of the Qualifying Adjective. 

(1.) No invariable rule can be given for the place of the adjective 
in French, although it follows the noun much more frequently than 
it precedes it : — 

(2.) The adjectives which are generally placed after the noun are :— 

1. All participles present and past used adjectively; 

une personne reconnaissante, a grateful person ; 

une histoire amusante, an amusing history ; 

un enfant cheri, a beloved child; 

de la viande rbtie, roast meat ; 

2. All adjectives expressing the form, the shape ; 

une table ronde, a round table ; 

une chambre ; carree, a square room ; 

(3.) Adjectives explaining the matter of which an object is com- 
posed ; — 

acide sulfurique, sulphuric acid ; 

corps aerie?i, aerial body; 

(4.) Those expressing color, taste, or relating to hearing and touch 

tog; 

un habit noir, a black coat ; 

du fruit amer, bitter fruit ; 

des sons harmonieux, harmonious sounds ; 

de la cire r,wlle, soft wax; 

(5.) Adjectives which may be used substantively; 

un homme riche, a rich man; 

une fenime aveugle, a blind woman ; 

(6.) Adjectives representing nation ;* 

une grammaire franfaise, a French grammar; 

une dictionnaire allemand, a German dictionary; 

(7.) Adjectives expressing the defects of the body and mind ; 

un homme boiteux, a lame man ; 

un esprit aliene, an unsound mind ; 

(8.) Almost all adjectives ending in al, able, ible, ique and if, 

un homme liberal, a liberal man ; 

une nation paisible, a peaceful nation ; \ 

un esprit fanatique, a fanatical spirit; 

un soldat fugitif, a fugitive soldier. 

* The French often use the name of the country instead of the ad- 
jective of nation ; particularly when speaking of the produce of the 
country :— 

De la laine d'Esp&gne, Spanish wool. 

Du fromage d'Angleterre, English cheese. 



412 



ISTAX OF THE ADJECT IV E. i} 86. 



(9.) It must not be inferred from the rules above that the adjective 
always comes after the noun. The deviations are quite frequent; and 
no other reason than taste can be assigned for them. We give a 
few examples, in which the same adjective is, by different authors, 
placed before and after the noun : — 

Before Vie Noun. i After the Noun. 

Jamais nous ne goutons de par- Qu'a-t-il (lit, qu'a-t-il fait, 
taik allegresse. CSBMBILLB. <Jui no promette a Rome un em- 

pereor par/ait f Racine. 

We never enjoy perfect {unalloyed ) What has he said,whai has fie done 
pleasure. which does not promise to Rome a 

■t emperor? 
11 fallut nsveiller <l'uii profond iians un sommeil profond ils ont 
sommeil cet autre Alexandra. " pas.se leur vie. Boileau. 

BOMOST. 



It icas necessary to rouse from <i 
profound sleep that second Alexan- 
der. 

Craignez, d'un vain plai.sir lis 
trompe, Buileac. 

I ' the deceitful allurements of a 
vain plxitiire. 



pent thiir life in a profound 

Le monde est une figure trompeuse 
qui pawio Bcefon. 

The world is a deceitful picture, 
which passes before us. 

(10.) We find, however, in OUI best writers, tew examples of along 
adjective placed before a short noun : although tliey often pllKM the 
adjective before tlie noun to give variety or force to tlie diction, they 

never, for Instance, would say (in prose) tTimaginairet lois, for des 

lois ima^'inaires, imaginary laws. 

(11.; The following adjeetivea when used in a literal sense, gene- 
rally pr e cede the noun: Bee | 144, Note: — 





fine, handsome ; 


MauvaLs, 


bad ; 






Mediant, 


icicJced i 


• 




lieilleur, 


belter; 


Cher. 


dear (loved) ; 


Moindra, 


less; 


Che til", 


?nr,i n ; 


Petit, 


small ; 


Grand, 


tall; 


Saint. 


holy ; 






YiellX, 


old; 


Jeans, 




Vrai. 


true. 


Joli. 


pretty ; 







Those marked with an asterisk are included in the following table. 

§ 86. — Li.-i 01 Ai'ji.'ir. a I >iKn.i;i;\T Mkam.no, 

aoooRDora as thxy b follow the No 

l)n bon homme, a simple, artless Un homme boo, 1 f 

via n ; 
Un brave homme, a worthy man \ 
itaine histoire, a 

story ; 
Un chcr enfunt, a dear child ,- 
Uno commune voix, a unanimous 

voice; 



i homme de men) ; 

Un homme brave, ,t heme man ; 
l ne histoire OSrtalns, a reliable 

story; 
Une rohe chsro, an expensive dress* 
Une voix commune, an ore 

voice ; 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIV E. § 87. 



413 



Un cruel hommo, a tiresome man ; 

La derniere annee, the last year (of 
a scries) ; 

Une fausse clef, a false key ; an imi- 
tation key ; 

Un furieux menteur, an excessive 
liar; 

Un galant homme, a gentleman; 

Un grand homme, a great man ; 

Le grand air, the air of good society ; 

Le haut ton, a haughty tone ; 

Un honnete homme, an honest man; 

Le jeune Pline, young Pliny 

Un malhonnete homme, 

man ; 
Mauvais air, awkward appearance; 

Un mediant livre, a poor book ; 

Morte eau, lowest tides ; 

Un nouveau livre, a new book, (ano- 
ther book) ; 

Un pauvre historien, a wretched his- 
torian ; 

Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous 
man; 

Un petit homme, a man of small 
size ; 

Mes propres mains, my own hands ; 

Un seui enfant, a single child ; 

Un simple soldat, a private soldier; 

Un triste homme. a pitiful man; 

Un unique tableau, a single 'pic- 
ture; 

Un vilain homme, an ugly, unplea- 
sa/nt man; 

Une vraie histoire, a mere story; 



Un homme cruel, a cruel man; 
L'annee derniere, last year ; 

Une clef fausse, a key belonging to 

another lock, (the wrong key) ; 
Un lion furieux, a furious lion; 

Un homme galant, a man attentive 

to the ladies ; 
Un homme grand, a tall man ; 
L'air grand, a noble appearance; 
Le ton haut, a Mid tone ; 
Un homme honnete, a polite man ; 
Pline le jeune, Pliny the younger; 
Un homme malhonnete, an unpoliie 

man; 
L'air mauvais, malicious appear- 
ance; 
Un livre mechant, a biting, caustic 

book ; 
Eau morte, stagnant water; 
Un livre nouveau, a book recently 

published ; 
Un historien pauvre, a historian 

without pecuniary means; 
Un homme plaisant, an agreeable 

man ; 
Un homme petit, a mean man ; 

Mes mains propres, my clean hands; 
Un enfant seul, a child alone ; 
Un soldat simple, a foolish soldier ; 
Un homme triste, a' sorrowful man; 
Un tableau unique, a matchless pic- 



81.- 



Un homme vilain, a sordid, miserly 

man ; 
Une histoire vraie, a true history. 

Regimen of Adjectives. S'\-*' 



(gjj The regimen or complement of adjectives is a noun or a verb 
completing or defining their sense. Between the noun and the ad- 
jective comes one of the prepositions, a, de, dans, en, sur, &c. : — 

Cet homme est digne de louange. I This man is worthy of praise. 

Ce general est digne de commander. \ That general is worthy to command. 

In the first phrase, louange, in the second, commander, is the regi- 
men of the adjective digne. 

(2.) The regimen is not always necessary to the adjective. It is 
added to it only to give it a particular limitation : — i 

Without a regimen. With a regimen. 

Cet homme n'est pas content. Cet homme n'est pas content de 



That man is not pleased. 



That man is not pleased ieith his son. 



414 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — § 83. 



(3.) As may be seen in the last sentence, an adjective is not al- 
ways, in French, followed by the same preposition as the correspond- 
ing adjective in English. Thus, after the adjective content, the 
French use the preposition de (of), while after its English represen- 
tative (pleased), the preposition with must be employed. M. Bes- 
cherelle and several other French grammarians, while acknowledging 
the difficulty, give us the consoling assurance, that "L'usage et lea 
dictionnaires lea tenrnt eonnaitre" (use and dictionaries will make us 
acquainted with them) ; that is, with the prepositions required after 
the adjectives. As the student will scarcely be satis/ait de cela, we 
give a rule or two on this difficult subject, and add lists of adjectives 
with their proper accompanying prepositions. 

When an adjective follows the verb t'trr, used unipersonally, 
the preposition </ is pieced after that adjective, and before the verb 
following: — 

It is sweet to die for one's countni. 
I \sit r to be wise for a iwthcr than 



I] eel dona demourir poor son pays. 
n eel plot aise d'etre sage pom lea 
entree que poor bo! m 

Li K.m BsrOUCAULD. 

11 .st phu glorieux dt ae raincre 
■ei-meme, qua de rainere tee 

autre*. £rx. 



It is more glorious to conquer one's 
self thnn to conquer others. 



(5.) It should be recollected, thai it Ea only when the verb itre ia 
anipereonai, that it thus seems to influence the choice of the prepo- 
sition, bi other fljective must be followed by the prepo- 
hition proper t«. it. See { 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, below. 



teher. 

0i la n '. -: p. | also .i faire. 



Thai ft to tht I mrh. 

■ ;sy to be done {easily 

iti'itr.) 

§ 88. — I nOOTHS BBQl iiii.vi; tiu: PftSPOmnOS Dk. 

from 
sorry fir 

tired 'irilk, of 

■re ad of 

Qlorieux de, promt of 

BonteUX de, ashamed of 

pleama wit* Impatient de, imtyamtnt ef* 

curious to incapable de, incapable of 

desirous to, of Inconsolable de, imeonseUmJew 

disdaining to [ndigne de, vnwortkf ef 

' icritk 

from Inqutet de If about 

de, intoxicated with 

envious of Laa de, weary of 

remote, far from MCcontent de, displeased wml 

a stare to Parent do, related to 



Absent de, 
Ambifleux de, 
Amourem de, 

Avide de, 

Approchant de, 
Capable do, 

Clu ri de, 
Compiii 

<le, 

Curieux de, 

neux de, 

de, 
l>itl'.ivnt de, 

de, 
Bnvicui de, 
Eloign 



from) \ Exempt de, 

ambitious of 

in hrve with. F.itigll6 dc, 

easrer for de, 

Port da 

capable 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — §89,90. 



415 



Plein da, full of 

Ravi de, glad to, of 

Rassasie de, satiated with 

Eeconnaissant de, grateful for 
Rempli de, filled with 

Redevable de, indebted for 

Qui vit content de rien, possede 
toute chose. Boileau. 

II n'est pas de Romain, 
Qui ne soit desireux de vous donner 

la main. Corneille. 



Soigneux de, careful of to 
Sur de, sure of 

Surpris de, surprised of 

Tributaire de, tributary to 
Victime de, victim to t of 

Vide de, void of 

He who lives content wit r i a httie, 
possesses all. 

There is no Roman that is not desir' 
ous to reach you his hand. 



§ 



89. — List of Adjectives Requiring the Preposition A. 

to 



Accessible a, accessible to 
Accoutume a, accustomed to 
Adherent a, adhering to 

Agrcable a, agreeable to 

Ajuste a, fitted for 

Anterieur a, prior to 

Aise a, easy to 

Ardent a, zealous for 

Assidu a, assiduous to 

Attentif a, attentive to 

Bona, good for 

Cher a, dear to 

Conforme a, similar to 

Contraire a, contrary to 

Cruel a, cruel towards 
Difficile a ; difficult to 

Enclin a, prone to 

Etranger a, a stranger to 

Exact a, exact in 

Facile a, easy to 

Favorable a, favorable to 

L'ignorance toujours, est prete d 
s'admirer. Boileau. 

Insensible a, la vie, insensible a, la 

mort, 
11 ne sait quand il veille, il ne sait 

quand il dort. Racine. 



Formidable a, 
Fatal a, 
Importun a, 
Impenetrable a, 
Indispensable a, 
Interesse a, 
Invisible a, 
Insensible a, 
Naturel a, 
Necessaire a, 
Nuisible a, 
Odieux a, 
Posterieur a, 
Preferable a, 
Propice a, 
Propre a, 
Rebelle a, 
Redoutable a, 
Semblable a, 
Sujet a, 



fatal to 
importunate to 
impenetrable to 
indispensable to 
interested in 
invisible to 
insensible to 
natural to 
necessary to 
hurtful to 
odious to 
posterior to 
preferable to 
propitious to 
fit for 
rebellious \ 
formidable to 
similar to 
subject to 



Ignorance is always ready to ad- 
mire itself. 

Insensible to life, insensible toC 
he does not know when lie is < 
or when he sleeps. 



90. — Adjectives requiring a Different Preposition in 
French and in English, not included in the above List, 
with the following signification. 



Bon pour, 



de- 



kind towards, 
voted to 

Celsbre pour, par, celebrated for 
Civil envers, polite to 

- Quand on est bon pour tout le 
monde, on ne Test pour personne. 
C. Delavigne. 
E fut celebre par sa doctrine, au- 
tant que par sa naissance. 

Bosscet. 



Ignorant en, not versed in 

Indulgent pour, indulgent towards 
Insolent avec, insolent to 
Poli envers, polite to 

When one is devoted to every body 
one is so towards nobody. 

He was celebrated for his doctrine, as 
well as for his birth. 



416 BYKTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — §91,92,93. 

§ 91. — Remark. 

It must not be forgotten, that when the verb the is used uniper- 
sonally before the adjectives contained in the two preceding sections 
these adjectives become subject to rule (4.) } 87. 

II est indispensable d'etudier I 11 is indispensable to study much,U 
beaucoup pour devenir savant. | become learned. 

§ 92. — Important Riles. 

(1.) A noun may be followed by two or more adjectives, having 
one and the same regimen, provided those adjectives require the 
same prepositions after them ; thus we may say : — 



Oe pen eel utile et cher ii ss fa- 
mine. GlRAlI.T DlVIVIKR. 

La religion i e et na- 

turelle (i Phomme. Ashwmocs. 



7' ' father is useful and dear to 
his fn mil y. 

■i is necessary and natural 

to num. 



These two sentences are eorrect, because the adjectives, utile, and 
cher, in the first, and lu'crssaire and natunl, in the second, require the 
tame preposition, <"'. 

(•J.) We could DOt in the iir-t of these two sentences, substitute 
for the word cAer, and Bay as in English, 
Thatfathrr is useful to, end beloved r.v his family. Bach ■ constrac- 
tion in French, it never admissible. We must say, That father isuse- 
fitl t<> h&sfasnil ved by them ; because the adjective chin, 

the prepOSitioD </'', or its substitute, the relative pronoun en 
[} 39, (17.)].* Ce DOM est utile B SB l'.nnille et en est cheri, i. c est 
cheri (i 

-1>kti.i;minin(; Ai>ji:ctivi:s. — DsHONBTBATZVl Adjec- 

The demonstrative adjective, which must not be confounded with 
the demonstrative pronoun [; 38.], always preeedei the noun, and 
must be repeated before every substantive. It assumes the gender 
nd number of the word whieli it determines [} 20, (1.)]: — 



C't air pur, ea gazoos, eeile voote 

mobile : 
Id t<>ut plait auca-ur. toutenchantc 

l' s veas. CASTKr.. 



■ air. that turf, that chang- 
t every tk ins; pleases 
the heart and charms the i j 



* The rule witli regard to the regimen of v. rbs is equally imperative. 

We COUld !i"t say in l'r.ii.li. as i:, English I / vnlr l.ltrrs TO, 

emd rscstvs letters nou my bri / 

tents my brother, and fscetvt some from Tout) s l<s •BatttDM J'ocrta 

ttres a moil fiere, et j'.n reools <h lui. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. §94,95 417 



§ 94. — Agreement, Repetition, and Place of the Posses- 
sive Adjective. 
We have said [$ 21, (2.)] that the possessive adjective assumes the 
gender and number of the object possessed, and (4.) that it must be 
repeated before every noun. The place of the possessive adjective 
is the same in French, as in English, that is, before the noun. These 
adjectives must not be confounded with the possessive pronouns 
[$34,(2.)]:- 

Mon pere, ma mere et mes soeurs I My father, mother, and sisters are 
sont arrives. J arrived. 

§ 95. — Remarks. ,, 

(1.) It has been said [§ 77, (9.)] that the French use the article in- 
stead of the possessive adjective, when alluding to the parts of the 
body. This, however, must only take place where the possession i3 
otherwise sufficiently explained. We must say, for instance : — 

J'ai mal a, la tete. My head aches (I have a pain m 

the head). 
Charles s'est casse le bras. Charles has broken his arm. 

because the possession is sufficiently explained by the pronouns^s 
in the first sentence, and se in the second. But, we must say, 
Je vois que mon bras s'enfle, I see that my arm swells. 

because without the mon, the possession of the arm would not ba 
indicated. 

(2.) The English expressions, a book of mine, a cousin of his, can- 
not be translated literally into French. We must say un de mes 
amis, one of my friends; un de ses cousins, one of his cousins. 

Cinna et Carbon, un de seslieuten- I Cinna and Carlo, a lieutenant of 
ants, se camperent sur les bords du his, encamped on the banks of the 
Tibre. Vertot. | Tiber. 

(3.) In familiar or jocose style, we sometimes use the possessive 
pronoun, mien, tien, sien, without the article, to express the same 
relation : — 



A travers d'un mien pre, certain Through a meadow of mine a 

anon passa. Racine. young ass passed. 

Un mien cousin est juge-maire. A cousin of mine is judge and 

La Fontaine. mayor. 

(4.) When the possessor is an inanimate object, the adjectives son, 
ta, ses, leurs, can be placed before the object possessed only when 
the possessor is the subject of the same proposition : — 

La campagne a ses agrements. The country has its pleasures. 

Ces langues ont leurs beautes. j Those languages have their beau- 
I ties. 
18* 



418 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIV E. § 96, 97. 



(5.) When the (inanimate) possessor is not the subject of the 
proposition, in which the possession is expressed, but of a preceding 
one, the article and the relative pronoun en are used [{ 39, (17.) 

{ no.].— 



Ce livre est bien iraprime, le pa- 
pi, r - n esl excellent 

J'hahitc la campagne ; les agree- 
ments en sont sans nombre. 

Cos langues sont riches, jVn ad- 
min.- I- Nob, 



That book is wcU-printed, its paper 
(the paper of it) is excellent. 

J ink abit the country ; its pleasures 
isures <>f it) arc without num- 
ber. 

Those la nguagts arc rich , J a dm ire 
ties of them). 

(6.) Exception. The possession may be expressed by son, sa, ics, 
kurs, although the possessor be not the nominative of the same 
proposition, when the object possessed is the regimen of a prepo- 
sition : — 



Paris est one villi- remsrquable; 
uogera admirenl la beauts' de 

scs c'li::. 



Paris is a remarkable city, foreign* 
cr: admire the ticauty of its edifices. 



6. — Nl MKKAI. Ah.ii:i II 
(1.) The cardinal number used simply to indicate number, not 
Order, | noon. 

a ben need to indicate order [\ '2fi, (3.)], the cardinal number 
generall] pi when indicating the day of the 

month) ; 26, I. |a— 

/. | 'Irrtcn. 

(3.) The ordinal number la planed before the noun: — 

La dixicme Bl TV 

(4.) It follows the worda ehapUrt, page, &c. in 

division of a book. 

Livre sixiemc, cliapitrc dixicme. Sixth book, tenth chapter. 

, . — 1\hi:ki\iii: A 
(1.) Quthjuc is written in thr«-<- wmya: — 
1. Followed by a verb, it ia written in two words, quel que j 

. which ia an adja in gender and number with, 

the subject of the verb, and the second, </i/'\ which is a conjunction, 
is invariable. 



the 



the 



t'.rie. 

is ma tenta avec Recutita. 

■ S'uN. 

•mnie qurlk </!"• tut s.i for- 
tune "u bod iin-ritr, in- put 
dans t' - Boniface. 



or thy country, . u under 



,rn. whatever his fortu\ 
I mi? hi be, could not 
in his undertakings. 



SYNTAX * THE ADJECTIVE. § 97. 419 

2. Followed by a noun, it is then an adjective [() 30, (12.)], and 
itgrees in number with that noun : — 

Princes, quelques raisons que vous I Princes, whatever reasons you may 
puissiez me dire. Racine. | give me. 

3. Quelque followed by an adjective, or an adverb, is invariable. 



Games of chance, howevei trifling 
they may seem, are always expensive 
and dangerous. 



Les jeux de hasard, quelque me- 
diocres qu'ils paraissent, sont tou- 
jours chers et dangereux. 

Mme. de Genlis. 

(2.) Heme is an adjective or an adverb : 

It is an adjective [§ 30, (5.)] : 

1. When it precedes the noun, and means same : — 

Vous retombez toujours dans les I You always fall into the same ap- 
memcs alarmes. Racine. | prehensions. 

2. When it follows a noun or pronoun, and has the sense of him- 
self herself themselves, even, very, and cannot be turned into de la 
m£me maniere, in the same manner : — ■ 

Les dieux enx-mimes devinrent, J Tlie gods themselves became jealous 
jaloux des bergers. Fenelon. of the shepherds. 

Ces murs mimes, seigneur, peu- Tltese very walls, my lord, may have 
vent avoir des yeux. Racine. | eyes. 

(3.) It is an adverb and is invariable, when it modifies a verb, an ad- 
jective, or a participle. It has then the sense of aussi, also ; quoique, 
although, or de la meme maniere, in the same manner : — 

Frappez, Tyriens et mime Israel- 
ites. Racine. 

Leurs vertus et meme leurs noms 
fitaient ignores. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Exempts de maux reels les hom- 
ines s'en forment mime de chimeri- 
ques. 



Strike, Tyrians and Israelites also. 

Their virtues, as well as their 
names, were unknown. 

Wlien exempt from real misfor- 
tunes, men create to themselves imagi- 
nary ones. 



(4.) We have seen that tout, when an adjective, that is, when sig- 
nifying every, all, is variable [§ 30, (15,) (16.)]. 

(5.) Tout, when it means entirely, quite, nothing but, is an adverb, 
and, as such, invariable : — ■ 



Le lion est tout nerfs et muscles. 
Buffon. 

II montra pour rimer des chemins 
tout nouveaux. Boileau. 

Le cliien est tout zele, tout ardeur, 
tout obeissance, Buffon. 



Tlie lion is nothing but nerves and 
muscles. 

He showed us, in poetry, paths en- 
tirely new. 

The dog is nothing but zeal, ardol 
and obedience. 



(6.) But, here, is the same invariable word, variable by euphony 
before a feminine word, commencing with a consonant or an h as- 
pirate : — 

Les plaisanteries ne sont bonnes I Jokes are only good, when they an 
que quand elles sont servies toutes \ served up quite warm. 
chaudes. Voltaire. 



420 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. — ^ 98. 

The following extract (for the historical accuracy of which wa 
eannot vouch) offers an example on the last rule, and on the excep- 
tion: — 

La vanite est sortie toutc par6e del Vanity issued quite adorned from 
la tete tics femmes comrue Minerve \ woman's head, as Minerva issued 
est sortie tout arrafie dc la tMe de^ quite armed from the head of Jw- 
Jupiter. Saint La.mdkrt. [piter. 

§ 98. — The Pronoun. — Place of the Personal Pronoun, 
Subject of the Verb. 

(1.) Personal pronouns, used as subjects of verbs, are in French 
M well as in English, placed before them in affirmative and negative 
sentences: — 



J'inventai des couleurs, j'annai la 

calomnie. 
Jim. ressai sa gloire ; Q tremMa 

pour m Rj 



/ invented colors, I armed eal- 
1 touched his glory ; he trem- 
ble, I 'for his life. 



(2.) In affirmative or n> ■ ;iees commencing with au 

vuiins. a peine, encore, du mains, combien, dec, the 

pronoun may elegantly be placed after the verb, although this con- 
struction is nut Imperative: — 



IVut-vtn- DMU i :itreii'inliai_/- 

aussi de I'aetronomle, 

Aim<-Mahtin\ 
Combii-n (l'lu-inn 

e pai ' 
[a Fontaine. 



■ -jht. 

a- ilk you 
on astronomy. 

1! ■ many wishes he hses, hw 
many steps he t 



(3.) In exclamation*, the DOminative pronoun [a often placed after 
the verb in French, as will as in English : — 

i I yenx y voir torn- May 1 own i/m Mi the 

rndre ! ills. | ■"• 

(4.) In interrogativi anoun la placed 

Immediately after tic verb in the bu i] le I naea, and between the 
auxiliary and the participle, in the compound: — 

on miis ;• .' qn'al ' fall Iqvedoii R I it have I done 1 

jt (aire 1 1 | what ham I yet m do ? 

(5.) In interrogative Bentencei with verba having only one* sylla- 
ble, in the first person singular of the indicative present, and with 

come verhs having more than one syllable, hut in which tint panaa 
ends with an • preceded by a consonant, the pronounce is not placed 

* We may say, however luhvjel an /.' ai-je? hove I? fai> | 
wiaie I dole-Jet should I.' ought I? role-Jel do I sec? vaU-jo/ do I go? 
DUtcnds Jo 1 do I hear ? 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 99. 421 

after the verb. In such case another construction must be given 
to the sentence . — 



Est-ce-que je cours 1 

Esi-ce-que je dors ? 
Est-ce-que je comprends 1 



Do I run? literally, k it. that I 
run? 

Do I sleep ? 

Do I understand ? 

(6.) The same construction is admissible, though not desirable 
with all the persons and tenses which may be used interrogatively. 

§ 99. — Repetition and Omission of the Nominative 
Pronoun. 

(1.) It is proper to repeat the personal pronouns je, ;<& il, nous. 
Us, before every verb : — 

Je lis, j'ecvis, je me promene. | / read, write, and walk. 

(2.) The omission of the pronouns je, tu, il, nous, vous, Us, before 
the second or third verb of a sentence, is a matter of choice and 
subject to the following restrictions :— 

Those pronouns must be repeated : 

1. When the verbs are not in the same tense : — 

Je pretends et je pretendrai ton- I J maintain and will always matn- 
jours. I tain. 

2. When the first verb is in the negative and the second in the 
affirmative : — 

Je ne plie pas et je romps. | I do not bend and I break. 

3. When the propositions are connected by conjunctions other 
than et, and ; ou, or ; ni, nor ; mais, hut : — 

Nous detestons les mechants, par- 1 We detest the vncked because we 
ceque nous les craignons. | fear them. 

(3.) Although we would advise the student fo follow the 1st rule 
of this §, particularly with regard to the pronouns je, tu, nous, vous, 
and thereby avoid all uncertainty, we give a few examples, where 
the pronouns after the first are — 

Omitted : 
11 s'arrache les cheveux, se roule 
sur le sable, reproche aux Dieux 
leur rigueur, appelle en vain a son 
secours la cruelle mort. 

F£n£lon. 
He (Telemachus) tears his hair, 
rolls on the sand, reproaches the Gods 
with their rigor, and calls in vain, 
cruel Death fa his aid. 



Je veux qu'on dise un jour aux 

peuples effrayes, 
H fut des Juifs, il fut une insolente 

race. Racine. 

I wish that they may one day say to the 

frightened nations, there were Jews, 

there was an insolent race. 



422 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. S 100. 



II s'ocoute, il se plait, il s'adonise 
U s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. 

He listen s to himself, he adorns him- 
self, he laves himself. 

Nous avons dit, ct nous allons 
p.-ouvcr, qa'il n'y a pas de bonheur 
sansverta. Basesis. 

Wi have said, and ve arc going to 
prove, that there is no happiness 
without virtue. 



L'Etcrncl est son nom, le monde 

est son ouvrage, 
II entend les soupirs de l'humble 

qa'on outrage 
Juge tons les mortels avec d'egales 

lois, 
Et du hast de son trono interroge 

tea rois. Racine. 

The Eternal is his name, the wtHi 
is his work ; he Ustcns to the sighs 
of the humble oppressed, judges all 
mankind with equal lair's, and in- 
terrogates the mightjf from his lofty 



100. — Place of Personal Pronouns 
Verbs. 



used as Regimens of 



(1.) The personal pronoun used as rigitne direct, (direct object or 
accusative) [ j -«2. | -4.) |, and the pronoun used as regime indirect, (indi- 
ct) with the preposition to, expressed or understood, in Eng- 
Ban, (dative of the L 3.)] are in French placed before 

the verb : — 



/' • /,' 'men, 

1 

■ an !-• del 1 

• lie. 
M 

Un til faiTStfl balaa, rtnmmfl le 

moat 
J »n boa Jen be Fentsfne. 

i MaKTIV. 

P 

the gnat of the good J 

(•2.) 1st Exception: When tin- v.-rl. is in the second person singu- 
lar, or in thfl Bj person plural of the imperative used af- 
firmatively, these pronouns must be pissed after it: — 

Renda moi chretienne e( libra, a 
id. • sonmeta Voltaiss. 
aillons-iuwjaussid'une rains 



/ /.' I ii/irn. 

I 

I iiiii sjxak to them. 

]>rix je leur ]M-rincts do 

vivr.-. Ku-ini:. 

1 allow Hum to 

II faul compter but llngratttnde 
dea bommea 1 pas de 

re -in bfen. PsjotLON. 

h aula expect ingratitude from 



tpeak to 'hem. 

■1 and free, 1 

■• I from a vain 
pride. 

' • lo the next room. 



I 

bra procbaine, Ra- 

: But it* the verb in those persons of the impcrativi 
be used negatively, the pronouns will be placed according to 

Hule ,1.):— 

•ye/ ras. do not uc them. | Nc/rurparlezpas,<fo»w.' rpcaktothem. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. — § 100. 



423 



Si 1 on vous propose de faire une If they propose to you to commit a 

ftiauvaisf- action, ne la faites pas. bad action, do it not. 

Dissipe tcs douleurs, Dissipate thy grief, end trouble me 

Et ne me trouble pas par ces in- not by these unworthy tears. 

dignes pleurs. Boileau. 

(4.) 2d Exception : With reflective verbs, when the r6gime indi 
direct* is a person, the pronoun representing it must follow the ve:b 
This must also be the case with the following verbs : — 



Aller a, to go to, towards. 

Je m'adresse a lui, a eux. 
Jo vais d vous ou a, eux. 
Vous courez a lui ou a elle. 
Elle vient d moi ou a, vous. 
Vous pensez a nous ou a lui. 
Us soiigent d eux et d vous. 



Venir a, to come to. 
Boire a, to drink to. 
Penser a, songer a, to think of. 

I apply to him, to them. 
I go to you or to them. 
You run to him or to her. 
She comes to me or to you. 
You think of us or of him. 
They think of them and of you. 



(5.) The pronoun used as the indirect regimen of the French, 
which answers to the indirect object of the English preceded by a 
preposition other than to, and to the genitive and ablative cases of 
the Latin, is always, in French, placed after the verb, and preceded 
by one of the prepositions de, of; pour, for; avec, with, &c. 

Je parle de lui et de vous. 

J'ecris pmor lui et pour elle. 
Qui rit d'autrui, 
Doit craindre qu'en revanche on 

rie aussi de lui. Moliere. 

(6.) When two imperatives, used affirmatively, are joined together 
by the conjunction el, the pronoun regimen of the second mav be 
placed before it, or after it, as in English : — 



I speak of Mm and of you. 

I write for him and for her. 

He who laughs at others, must fe 
that in their turn, they may also " 
at Mm. 



After the Verb. 

Sortez et l&issez-moi dormir. 

Go out, and let me sleep. 

Marche, et suis-nous du moins ou 
l'honneur nous appelle. Boileau. 

March and follow us, at least, where 
honor calls us. 

Cessez, vous dis-je et laissez-moi, 
Madame, executer les volontes du 

roi. Kacine. 

Cease, I tell you, and suffer me, 
Maiam, to execute the commands of 
ihz king. 



Before the Verb. 

Sortez et me laissez dormir. 

Go out, and let me sleep. 

Laissez-moi cette chaine, ou m'ar- 
rachez le jour. La Harpe. 

Leave me this chain, or deprive me 
of life. 
Vous attendez le roi; parlez et ha 

montrez, 
Contre le fils d'Hector tous les Grecs 

conjures. Racine. 

You expect the king; speak and de- 
pict to him, all the Gi eeks conspiring 
against the son of Hector. 



* Object of the verb preceded in English by to, expressed or under- 
stood, dative of the Latins. 



424 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 101. 



§ 101. — Respective Place of the Pronouns when two occu* 

WITH ONE VeKB. 

(_1.) When two pronouns occur, one regime direct (accusative) and 
the other regime indirect (dative), the pronoun regime indirect, if not 
in the third person singular or plural, must precede the pronoun re- 
ime direct: — 



le donnera. 
II /• le pretera. 
lis notu lea moutreroni 
•lire/.. 
Quand je puis obliger, ma joic est 

aaaes grande; 
Pour a'attendre jamais que Ton, 
me k commando, Boirsaui.t. J 
encore, vona n'aurez 
dea hommea que pat use 

• tO. M'"' I' M • r. 



He will give it to me. 

11 lend it to thee. 

They will show them to ns. 

You will say it to vs. 

When I ran oblige, my joy is great 
enough, without my wishing to wait 
until (hey eommand me (i. e., they 
command it to me.) 

1 lit to you : you can obtain 

n of men only by real virtue. 



(Vfaen the pronoun regime indirect is in the third person singu- 
lar or plural, it must then be placed alter the regime direct: — 



' ■■•/ donnera, 

Now pas. 

Vona le u ur eorfres. 
Le pins aarappnl de I'hon 
■ vona vonlea .'■ hti ravir. 



will give it to him. 
"> ,-.••/// lend it to him. 

not hud it to them. 
■ U write it to them. 
The surest support of man is Goa, 
and you wish to deprive him of it. 



(3.) Re m ar k : stive pronoun st, need aa an indin 

men, makea an ezceptiorj to the above rule, as it takes precedence of 
: regimen: — 



/ n think ill of each other, at 
.. do )0'! say it to each other. 



si lei hommea penaent mal lea 
! - antres, <lu mofoa Da 

diseot > 

(l.) The Rules (l.) ami (2.)i also the Exception (3.), apply to the 
Imperativi lively; but Rule (1.) cannot apply to the impera- 

tive used affirmatively. 

Examples of the Impcralii- \ :fively. 

I ) I to US, 



rates paa [ Hole (2, >j 

L»u s.ui^ <le taut de roia e'eat l'u- 
nique heritage; 

enviea paj, lalaaes-mol mon 

]>.irtagc. Voltaibk. 

(5.) When the imperative used affirmative^ baa two regimena, 



/ ' lot lend it to thrm. 

I . n say it to themselves. 

Oftht blood of to many tittgt, uu 
my only inheritance ; do nut • 
(to me), leave me my ft 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 102,103. 



425 



the pronoun regime direct precedes the regime indirect in all the 
persons : — 



Envoyez-Ze-wwi. • 

Domiez-k-nous. 

Qu'ils k lui donnent. 

Montrez-fe-moi, ce mortel privi- 
.egie. Ballanche. 

Mets-k-toi dans l'esprit ; qui fait 
mal, trouve mal. Anonymous. 



Send it to me. 

Give it to us. 

Let them give it to him. 

Show him to me, that privileged 
mortal. 

Put this into thy mind; he who 
does evil, finds evil. 



§ 102.— Rule. 

When two pronouns in different cases, representing rational be- 
ings, occur, and the pronoun in the regime direct is in the first, or in 
the second person, this pronoun must be placed according to the 
general rules ; and the pronoun in the regime indirect must follow 
the verb, and be preceded by the proper preposition : — 

H nous a recomniandes a eux. 

II vous a presents a elk. 

Nul ne peut se comparer a lui, pour 
faire en peu de temps, un travail 
fort inutile. La Bruyere. 



He has recommended us to them. 

He has presented you to her. 

No one can compare himself to him, 
for doing in a short time, a ver% 
useless piece of work. 



§ 103.— Rule. 
(1.) The personal pronouns lui, die, eux, elles, used as indirect re- 
gimens of verbs and preceded by a preposition, can only relate 
to persons, and not to things. The expressions of or from it; q/*o? 
from them, when relating to things, should be rendered by en [§ 39, 
(17.)]:- 



I speak of it, of them; I give of it 
{some). 

I prize valor too highly to be jealous 
of it. 

He who is in prosperity should feat 



J'en parle ; j'en donne. 

J'aime trop la valeur, pour en etre 
jalous. La Harpe. 

Celui qui est dans la prosperite, 
doit craindre d'en abuser. 

Fen£lon. 

(2.) The relative pronoun y [§ 39, (18.) 5 111], is used in French 
in relation to things, for the indirect regimen, expressed in English by 
at or to (dative). It means at or to it ; or to them ; thereto, &c : — ■ 
J'y songerai, I will think of it. | Faites-y attention, Pay attention to it. 

C'estlorsque nous sommes eloignes 
de notre pays, que nous sentons 
surtout l'instinct qui nous y at- 
tache. Chateaubriand. 

Tous nos jours vont a la mort, le 
dernier y arrive. Montaigne. 



Les choses de la terre ne valent 
pas qu'on h'y attache. Nicole. 



It is when we are far from our coun- 
try that we feel, above all, the in- 
stinct which attaches us to it. 

All our days travel towards death, 
the last one arrives at it {reaches 
it). 

The things of the earth ai e not worth 
our attachment to them. 



426 SYNTAX OF THE PEOKOUN. §104,105,106. 



§ 10t.— Place of En and T. 

(J.) Th) place of en and y is the same as that prescribed by Rule 
(1.) \ 100, for the personal pronouns. They are also subject to Ex. 
ception (2.) and Remark (3.) of the same \. See examples above. 

(2.) En and y are always placed after the other pronouns r6« 
gimes : — 



II nous en a parle. 

II lui en a dit quelque chose. 

Parlez- /uz'-cn. 

Ne nous en jmrlez pas. 

Je l'y ai remove. 

Renvoyes-noue-y. 

Ne none y ronvoyez pas. 



He has spokc7i to us of it. 

He has toll/ him something ofxt. 

Speak to him of it. 

Do not speak to us of it. 

I hare referred him to it. 

Refer, or send us baek to it. 

Do net refr us to it. 



§10,5. — Rkfjritiov or rai Prokouot, Regimes. 

These pronouns must, in French, be repeated before every verb: — 

Ah! moo enfant, oueje roudraia 
Hen oous ?cir on pen, oout enten- 



• • >ir pas- 
Ifme, DbSAVignb. 
Je vcux It voir, It prier, U presser, 

/'importiiiicr, b llechir. 

KELI.K. 



Ah! my child, how J would like to 
rt tan*, to hear you, 
embrace you, ttt unit jxiss. 

I will $te him. entreat him, press 
him, importune him, bend him. 



§ 100. — The Podwiijivi Pbovous. 

(1.) Th«' poeneeaive pronoun, in French, is always preceded by 
the article ['; 34, (2.) (3.)] which, as well as (he pronoun itself, agrees 
in gender and number with the noun represented [j 35, (1.)] : — 

[•'ambition ni la fames ne ton- n ambition nor smoke have 



Such a heart as mine. 

Instead of bevoMimg the death of 
I nth to I' arn from you haw 
.nj own holy. 



client point anooBurconuneltttsmk 
.1. .1. Bosaesao. 
Au lieu de deplorer U mod dea 
Je veux apprendre de roni 
a rendre la mie n nt Minte. 

BOSSCF.T. 

(2.) The pronouns le nutre, le v6tre [\ 34, (3.)], etc., unlike the 
adjectives notre, votre, dec, always take the circumflex accent: — 
La muaique deb andena Orccs I The music of the amcutui Greeks 

■ \ , s ditli rente de 1 1 n,,trc. v,; 1 1 from ours. 

Vol.TAlRF.. I 

(3) When the English pronouns, mine, thine, dtc^ 

MOM after the verb/" be, thej are often rendered into French by the 
indirect pronouns ii BIOS, n I'd: — 

Ce livre t st d v m. That hook is mine. 

Ces plumes »«>nt elles d rous ? Are these pens yours? 



SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUN. — § 107. 



427 



§ 107. — The Demonstrative Pkonoon. 

(1.) Tli3 demonstrative pronouns [} 36] can never be placed be- 
fore nouns. They merely represent them ; — 

La meilleure le^on est celle des 
exemples. La Harpe. 

N'oublie jamais les bienfaits que 
tu as re9us; oublie promptement 
ceux que tu as accordes. 

BOISTE. 



The best lesson is that of examples. 

Never forget the benefits which thou 
hast received; forget quickly those 
which thou hast conferred. 



(2.) The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, as has been said [§ 37, 
(2.)], are often used absolutely, not only in the nominative, but also 
in the regimes, direct and indirect. They have then the sense of he 
who, him whom, of whom ; that which, of which. They apply, in this 
3, as well to things as to persons : — 

He who reckons ten friends, has not 
one. 

We cannot compel him who will not. 



Celui qui compte dix amis, n'en 
a pas un. Malesherbes. 

On ne saurait forcer celui qui ne 
veut pas. 

L'harmonie la plus douce est la 
voix de celle qu'on aime. 

La Bruyere. 



The sioeetest harmony is the voice 
of her whom we love. 



(3.) The French use celui, celle, ceux, celles, indifferently for this, 
that. When they institute a contrast or a comparison, they suffix the 
adverbs* ci (ir.i) and la to the pronouns [§ 37, (3.)] : — 



Corneille nous assujettit a. ses 
caracteres et a ses idees ; Racine 
se conforme aux notres. Celui-la 
peint les hommes, comme ils dev- 
raient etre, celui-ci les peint tels 
qu'ils sont. La Bruyere. 



Corneille subjects us to his charac- 
ters and to his ideas; Racine con- 
forms himself to ours. That one {the 
former) paints men as tlvey should be, 
this one (the latter) paints them as 



(4.) Celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci, may be used absolutely in 
French in the sense of this one, that one, &c. : — 



On la vit, toutes les semaines, es- 
suyer les larmes de celui-ci, pour- 
voir aux besoins de celui-la. 

Fl£chier. 



Every week, she xoas seen wiping 
the tears of this one, providing for tte 
wants of that one. 



(5.) Ceci and cela are always used absolutely. They serve to 
point out things only. They can, of course, never be prefixed to a 
noun [$ 37, (5.)] :— 

* The same adverbs produce the same difference in meaning with the 
demonstrative adjectives ce, cct, &c. They are not placed immediately 
after those adjectives, but after the nouns which they determine : cet 
homme-ci, this man, cet homme-la, that man. The commencement of 
Remark (3.) applies also to the adjectives ce, cet, cette, ces, &c. 



428 



STSTAX OF THE PRO SOU N. § 108. 



Tant que le jour est long, il gronde 

entre ses dents, 
Fais ceci, fais ccla, va, viens, monte, 
descends , Regnard. 

Je suis un peu surpris de tout ceci. 

Massillon. 

Vous n'avez pu dSsavouer cela. 

Pascal. 



The livelong day he mutters i 
his teeth, do this, do that, go, come, 
go up, come down. 

I am a Utile surprised, at all this. 

You have not been able to disavow 
that. 



§ 108. — Remarks ox the Demonstrative Pronolw Cb. 
(1.) Ce, when used as a demonstrative pronoun, is almost always 
construed with the verb ttre, or followed by a relative pronoun : — 

C'est un i«>iils Men pownl qu'un 
gTand nom a soutenir. 

MoNTEMkmSD. 
Ce qui me plait c'est sa modestie. 
LiviZAC. 



A great name is a very heavy weight 
to sustain. 



That which pleases me is her mod- 
esty. 

(2.) Ce is used for he, she, thnj, preceding any part of the verb to 
be, When that verb is followed by a mum, or an adjective used sub- 
stantively and preceded by the, a or arc, or a possessive or demonstra- 
tive adjeetive. 

. that the verb rtrr following the pronoun ce, is put in 
the plural, when the noun following that verb is plural. The pro- 
noun oSfhowereri remains unchanged. 

He is a deceitful man. 

S irnmtin whom I seek. 



an trompear. 
ie r« - 1 1 1 1 1 1 f qneje eherehe. 
tri met unto. 

perotoeexqnbes. 

• :.iit un pend qui parlit. 

M'M.lEKK. 

N'*t.i ■ memea bom 

I'hiTKACDUUNH. 



irouU be exquisite words. 
If a emit man were to speak then. 

II' [fay not the same RM ? 



All those sentences are elliptieal ; a noun being understood after 
: — 

• ■iiinie ett un trempew. That man is a deceitful one 

mme eel la (emme que je That woman islhcwoman whom 1 

eherehe. 

(4.) This is, that is, these are, those are, may also be rendered by 
£est ici, ce sunt ici : — 



I to place. 
' Id mea enfknts. 



This is the place. 

■ ■ my children. 



Void, xoilii, are, however, to be preferred to cesl ici, &e: — 

I place. I / to place. 

■Mi enfants. Those au my children. 

(5.) O answers to the English pronoun it, when this totter word 
i the nominative of the verb to be, without def.nite n 
to an antecedent • — 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. §109. 429 



Ce n'est que par les sens que l'ame 
pout s'instruhe. Fontanes. 

Ce fat d'une retraite de patres et 
d'aventuriers, que sortirent les con- 
querants de l'univers. Rollin. 

C'est un defaut capital qu'il faut 
eviter dans quelque sujet que ce soit. 
Voltaire. 



It is only through the senses that the 
mind can receive instruction. 

It was from a refuge for shepherds 
and adventurers, that emerged the 
conquerors of the world. 

This is a capital defect which should 
be avoided in whatever subject it may 
be. 



(6.) When the verb etre, however, is used unipersonally, and fol 
lowed hy an adjective [§ 87, (3.)], the pronoun it is not rendered by 
ce, but by the pronoun used with all unipersonal verbs (il) : — 

II est necessaire d'etudier. It is necessary to study. 



II est plus difficile pour les na- 
tions que pour les individus, de re- 
couvrer l'estime de leurs voisins 
quand elles l'ont perdue. Boiste. 



It is more difficult fornations than 
for individuals to recover the esteem 
of their neighbors, when they have 
lost it. 



§ 109. — The Relative Pronoun. 
(1.) 1 He relative pronoun que, whom, which, can in French never 
be supp^sssed like the corresponding English pronouns :* — 



The praises (which) we give, have 
always in some way a relation to our- 



Les Jaoanges que nous donnons, 
se rap^ortent toujours par quelque 
chose 4 nous-memes. 

Massillon. 

(2.) The pronouns quel, que, quoi, lequel, represent the English 
pronouns which or what used interrogatively. ^ 

1. Quel is used before a noun in a determinative sense : — 

Quel livre lirons-nous 1 | What or which book shall we read? 

Quel est done votre mal 1 What then is your ailment 1 

Moliere. I 

2. Que is used before a verb :— 

Que dites-vous 1 \ What do you say? 

3. Quoi is used as an exclamation : — 

Quoi ! est-ce vous 1 \ What ! is it you ? 

4. Lequel, used interrogatively, means which one : — 

Voici deux plumes ; laquelle vou- I Here are two pens ; which (whicA 
Wz-vous 1 I one) will you have ? 

(3.) Qui is also used interrogatively for the regime direct, an 
preceded by a preposition, for the regime indirect. It then means 
whom, of whom, to whom, whose, &c. : — 

Qui avez-vous vu 1 Whom have you seen ? 

De qui tenez-vous cette nouvelle 1 From whom have you this news ? 

A qui est ce livre 1 Whose book is this ? 

* The conjunction, that, is often omitted in English ; its equivalent que, 
must always be expressed in French. 

Je crois qu' il est ici. I believe (that) he is here. 



430 



8YSTAX OF THE PROKOC N. § 110-113. 



§ 110.— The Tkoxoux En. 

(1.) We have already [j 39, (17.) J 95, (6.) { 103, Rule (1.)] 
several remarks on this pronoun. 

(2.) En signifies of it, from it, icish it, about it, of them, from them 
&.O., expressed or understood. Though en is by some French v> riters 
oi'Un Med in relation to persons, their example should be imitated 
n raeh eases only as that presented by the example ['; 92, (2.)]. 

(3.) En, u-ed as an equivalent tor the English sojne or any, ex- 
preSBSd or anderstood, preserves its nature of an indirect regimen, 
and baa, in the same manner as the French article placed before a 
noun used partitively, the - \ of (ki m ; the word partie 

being understood: — 

| Hnvt you apples? 
That is. some, or rather, <f the, a part if the apples. 

ai. I / hare, I hare some; I hare of 

| them or I have (a part) of them. 

(4.) En sometimes recalls the whole or part of a proposition: — 

J. -aurait vi>ir 



Poasftder |>ar un autre un Men qn'on 
fur.. 
un a sa 

MOLltHK. 



II 

i» rum in possession 

• irhieh ire hare failed in ob- 

M nhout this, 
every one has his own opinion. 



§ 111.— li. Y. 

id] been made on this pronoun [J39, 
(18.) } 103, (2.)]. >' : it, to them, at them. It is seldom 

used in relation to persons or animal-, but frequently in relation to 
things: — 



I 

Tircr raniM de qnelqn< 
e'esf pronver, qn'on 
eccaal B 

tll'aire ; 

BoMVAea. 



/ *f child, 

anil answer it {make ansiccr thereto) 
in haste. 

' vanity on account of any 
proving, thai ve are not 
I to it. 

ihs affair vpim yourself ; 
give all your care to it. 



g 112. — 1'lai-k oi mi: Pbohouvs Ba am. Y. 

See } 104, (1.) (2.) 

• ( 4 -)l- 
(1.) On. which is very extensively need in the French language, IS 
»aid only of persons. The verb, of which it is always U e nomine- 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 113. 



431 



live, must be in the singular. This pronoun is of the masculine 
gender. [See (2.)] On is used in French for people, one, some one, 
we, (hey, whenever these words have a general and indefinite meaning, 
and do not refer to any particular word : — 

On pardonne aisement le mal 
involontaire. De la Boutraye. 

On cherche les rieurs, et moi je 
es evite. La Fontaine. 

Another translation of the above sentences, will show us that the 
pronoun on often enables the French to make use of the active voice, 
which they always prefer to the passive.* Thus the two examples 
last given, may be rendered as follows: — 



We, (people, they, <fc.) easily for- 
give involuntary injuries. 

People (they, we) seek laughing or 
merry people, and I avoid them. 



Active Voice in French. 

On pardonne aisement le mal 
involontaire. 

On cherche les rieurs, mais moi 
je les evite. 



Passive Voice in English. 

Involuntary injuries are easily for- 
given. 

Merry or joyful people are generally 
sought ; for my part, I avoid t?iem. 



A few more examples, from some of the best French authors, 
elucidating the use of this pronoun, will be useful to the student : — 



Quand on est chretien de quelque 
sexe que Von soit, il n'est pas permis 
d'etre lache. F£n£lon. 

On peut etre honnete homme, et 
faire mal des vers. Moliere. 

On aime peu celui qui n'ose 
aimer personne. Delille. 

A-t-on jamais pleure d'avoir fait 
son devoir 1 Chamfort. 

Quand on a meme but, rarement 
on s'accorde. Lebrun. 

Artistes, ecrivains, poetes, si vous 
vous copiez toujours, on ne vous 
copiera jamais. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 



A Christian of lohichever sex he may 
be, is not allowed to be cowardly. 



One may be a worthy man, and, 
make bad verses. 

We feel but little love for him who 
dares love nobody. 

Have we ever grieved on account 
of having done our duty ? 

Those who have the same aim, 
rarely agree. 

Artists, writers, poets! if you al- 
ways copy each other, no person wiU 
copy you. 



(2.) If the word, on, denotes definitely a female, the adjective re- 
lating to it, takes the feminine termination : — 

Quani on est belle, on ne l'ignore I When one (a lady) is handsome, 
pas. L'Acad^mie. | she is not ignorant of it. 

(3.) The pronoun, on, must be repeated before every verb : — ■ 

On leve l'ancre, on part, on fuit loin 

de la terre, 
On decouvrait deja. les bords de 



l'Angleterre. 



Voltaire. 



They raise the anchor, they depart, 
they flee far from the land, already 
they discovered the shores of England. 



* On dit, it is said ; on rapporte, it is related ; on craint, it is feared, 
&c. Cela se fait ainsi, literally, that makes itself thus, that is made in this 
manner, &c. 



432 



SI.VTAX OF THE V E R J 



-S 114. 



§ 114. — The Verb. — Agreement of the Verb with its 

Subject. 

(1.) The verb agrees with its nominative or subject, whether thai 
aominative precedes or follows : — 

L'homme est ne pour r^gner sur 
I animaux. Voltaire. 

Les hmnmes S"rU encore cnlants d 
Bjixante ans. Albkrt. 

Par c 
legions. Saint Victor. 



Man is born to reign over all tiu 
animals. 

Men are still children {even) <d 
sijehj. 

Through those gates issued the 
proud It , 

(2.) When a verb has two or more singular nominatives connected 
by the conjunction et, the verb is put in the plural : — 



La cvlere et la precipitation son! 
deux Oh MM tort oppOBOM a la pru- 
Mej 

La rioUno- < I peoffcOt 

rien Tunc sur lautrc. Pascal. 



and precipitation are two 
vry much opposed to pru~ 

i v and virtue have no power 

I other. 



(3.) When a verb has several singular nominatives not connected 
by e/, it is put in the singular or in the plural according to circum- 
- : — 

1. It is put in the singular, if the nominatives are in some way 
synonymous : — 

La douceur, la bonte du grand 
Hniri. a eti calebrec de mille 



:»-ut veiiir ret ennui. 06 
I m u'Haei.kvili.k. 



The mildness, the goodness of the 
dby a 



II v, has been celebrated by 
praises. 
II m proceed thai ennui, 

j ust I 



'2. When, in a series of nominatives, the last has more force 

or inter' it, and therefore, makes us, as it were, overlook 

the other- : — 

rifloe— Totre toisret, TOtre I T ^Jcc— your interest, your 

honneur, Din row k t mtmandel \ honor, Ood commands it .' 

3. The verb is put in the plural, when the affirmation is intended 
to bo made of all the nominatives taken collectively, and not of each 
rtkmlar: — 

rrur, les .*>:. 
femme infortunec I 
utchir. Waii.lv. 



Savcz rous, si domain, 
8a liberie, ses jours, seront en votre 
main? 



The sweetness, the sighs of thai un- 
fortunate woman could not move 
him. 

Do vou know, if to-morrow, 

will I 



Ml liberty, his life, 



be in your 



(4.) On the forms of the verbs when connected by ou, See L. St\ 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. — § 115, 116. 



433 



§ 115.- -Number of the Verb after a Collective Noux. 

(1.) Every verb having, as its subject, a general collective noun 
[§ 3, (6.)], preceded by the article, such as la totalite, V infinite, &c, 
takes the number of that noun : — 



L'armee des infldeles/wi entiere- 

ment detruite. L'Academie. 

La multitude des bonnes choses 

ue Ton trouve dans un ouvrage, 

c ait perdre de vue la multiplicity 

mauvaises. Caminade. 



The army of the infidels was en- 
tirely destroyed. 

The multitude of the good things 
which we find in a work, makes us 
lose sight of the multiplicity of the bad 
ones. 



(2.) When a partitive collective noun [§ 3, (6.)] occurs as the sub- 
ject of a proposition, the verb agrees with that noun, if it occupies 
the first rank in the thought of the speaker or writer. 

The verb agrees, on the contrary, with the plural noun following 
the collective word, if the collective acts only a secondary part, or 
if it is employed only to add an accessory idea of number : — 



Agreement with the following Noun, 

Une troupe de nymphes couron- 
nees de fleurs, nageaient autour da 
son char. Fene" lon. 

A troop of young nymphs, crowned 
with flowers, were swimming around 
her chariot. 

Une nuee de barbares desolerent la 
pays. L'Acade'mie. 

A cloud of barbarians desolated the 
country. 

Cette espece de chiens qu'on ap- 
pelle chiens de Laconie, ne vivent 
que dix ans. Boileau. 

That species of dogs which they call 
Laconian dogs, live only ten years. 



Agreement with the Collective. 

Une troupe d'assassins entra dans 
la chambre de Coligny. 

Voltaire. 

A gang of assassins entered Co- 
ligny 's chamber. 

Une nuee de traits obscurcit l'air. 

A cloud of arrows darkened the air. 

Cette espece de paons parait avoir 
eprouve les memes effets par la 
meme cause. Buffon. 

That species of peacocks seems to 
have experienced the same effects 
through the same cause. 

§ 116. — Number of the Verb Etre after the Pronoun Ce. 

(1.) The verb etre preceded or followed by ce, as the grammatical 
subject, takes the number of the noun placed in apposition with tiai 
pronoun [$ 108, (3.)] :— 

Ce sont les moeurs qui font la 1 It is morals which form good com- 
bonne compagnie. La Chaussee. pany. 

Sont-ce des religieux et des pre- | Are they monks and priests who 
tres qui parlent aind'? sont-ce des speak so? are they Christians? 
Chretiens ? Pascal. | 

(2.) The verb etre may also be put in the plural, when the pro- 
nouns eux and elles are put in apposition with the pronoun ce. This 
rule, however, is optional, as the examples will show. Before turns 
19 



434 8TNTAX OF THE VERB. §117,118. 

andious similarly placed, the verb is always in the singular: e'ert 
nous ; e'est vous : — 



Plural. 
Cc sont eux qm viennont. 

Bescherelle. 
It u they who come. 



C'est eux qui ont bati ce snperbe 
labyrinthe. Bossuet. 

// is they who have built thai su- 
perb labyrinth. 

r in, The Verb relating to several Nouns in Different 

A vert liaving several robjeets in different persons, is put in the 
plural, ana assumes the termination of the first person in preference 
to that of the neeond, end that of the aecond in preferenee to that 
of the third. It may then be preceded by the plural pronoun of the 
jMrr-on preferred, recapitulating, as it were, all the other subjects:— 
\ Your J and I have long been 

oemia inn de I'antn ****. 

FtM 
All. '■ M J""* arenot 

to bt transp, anted. 

Kom m it 
§ 118.— Use ok »■ Ptisni of the Indica- 

(i.) This tenee denotes what asjsta, or ie taking place at the time 

we speak : — 

Jc lis, roca paries, I 1 <!"" k - 

(2.) The Kr.'u.h ha\e SQTJ »fthe indicative present :— 

m a ms, therefor I "■"'< erawi 

(3.) The indicative present is need m French, as well na in Eng- 
li»h, for cxpr. irWeh are and will always be true-.— 

it rfrrnal, Ml ^wcr is bound- 

Mtl s ! mqjugtm. 

OiBAI-I.tDi VlVlfR. I 

(4.) It is often used to express a proximate future:— 

/ i- lack io a moment. 



I T.'us has rpoken, if he mama 

I 



Je suis de retonr dans on mo- 
ment. ; "> ; - 

Si Titus a pari*, ■ 
pars. 

(5.) i'he present is frequently nsed for the peat, to awoken atten- 
tion.and pfef fee event, sa it vrere, before fee reader:— 
J'ai vu, Bsknrnr, J*al vn votre I taw, my lord, I saw your un- 

Balbourealula dm^cd by the horses 



Traini- | OJL M» e sumain 

a nooirii ; 
D veui les rappelcr, niais sa volx 
■ \nrf,aie. Racine. 



which his mm hand has fed; he 
■ < recall Iher.i, b%U his voice 
Jr^hlcns than. 



syntax of the verb. — §119,120. 435 

§ 119. — The Imperfect. 
(1.) The mperfect, or simultaneous past, is used to express some- 
thing which was in progress, while another thing was taking place. 
It leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undeter- 
mined : — . 4 

J'ecrivais, quand je re9US votre I / was writing, when I received 
lettre. | your letter. | 

(2.) The French imperfect, as may be seen in the above example, 
represents the English past tense formed of the auxiliary to be, and 
the participle present of a principal verb. 

(3.) The imperfect is also used to express repeated or customary 
action. It may then often be rendered in English by the infinitive 
of the verb preceded by " used to" : — 

Lorsque j'etoz's a Londres, j'allais 
me promener le matin, ensuite je 
dinais, et je passais le reste de la 



journee a lire et a ecrire. 



Wlien I was in London, I walked 
{used to walk) in the morning, after- 
wards dined {usually dined), and 
spent {usually) the remainder of the 
day in reading and writing. 

(4.) The use of this tense will be further explained in the next 
Section. 

§ 120. — The Past Definite. 

(1.) The past definite indicates an action performed at a time en- 
tirely past : — 



/ went to London, where I saw 
your father ; I finished my business 
in that city, and returned hither 



Mr. such-a-one wrote last evening 
six verses to Miss such-a-one. 



J'al^ii a Londres, ou je vis votre 
pere ; je finis mes affaires dans 
cette ville, et revins aussitot ici. 

M. un tel ecrivit hier au soir un 
sixain a Mademoiselle une telle. 

MOLIERE. 

(2.) The past definite can only be used, as we have seen above, 
when the time at which an action took place is entirely elapsed. 
We cannot, therefore, use it in connection with the words to-day, this 
morning, this week, this month, this year, &c. [See § 121, Past Indefi- 
nite.] We may use it in speaking of yesterday, last week, last year t 
&c. : — 

Je vous envoie, mon cher frere, I send you, my dear brother, a let- 
une lettre que j'ecrivis hier pour ter which I wrote yesterday for Ma- 
Madame de Laval. F£n£lon. dame de Laval. 

(3.) The imperfect may almost always be rendered in English by 
Hie participle present of the verb and the auxiliary to le ; or by pre- 
fixing " used to" to the infinitive mood. The preterite definite can 
never be so rendered. 



436 6 Y X T A X OF THE V IB B. § 120. 

(4.) The imperfect might he called the descriptive tense of tne 
French. 

(5.) The past definite might he called the narrative tense. It ex- 
presses that which took place at some time fully past. We will 
endeavor to illustrate this difference between those two tenses.— A 
traveller lias entered a wood and discovered a retired cottage; ho 
- to describe what lie saw there, and makes use of the imper- 
fect Of descriptive tense j lie says : — 

Uu vieiUard se promcnalt BOOS lea An old man was walking vndcr the 

■rbrei ■ fl tenon nn livre a la main ; trees; he \dd {\ras holding) a book m 
,1,- temps en temps, D - ""•'•• from time to time he raised 

v.ux vera I.- del on lea - - ' d '- :rJs "•"•aa, or concealed 

j u „, , B'abimer dans them with his hand, and sea: 

une i ' 

.„„.,,.',. door of the hut. sat (teas sitting) 

U mine qui bercail un enfant Mir Bee I ■'•'"> »SU rocking} a 

wot Man aw 

[was w«Jfl at tne 
couiai , i temdi laan/twM (w<t<? 

i Aw checks. 

let baa ben drawn a picture of what presented itself to 

,.■ approached the cottage. Nol content with represent- 

: , rely the then preaent litaation of things, be wishes also to 

narrate what took place. He has described the theatre on which 

\ place, which he is going to relate; he now pro- 

- the paflt definite Or narrative tense:— 

. i rfeUaud; Ion I "'" t ■*•»*• 

duil maprrcut. \\ s a M nc" \ 

not to 

usiblc retraite <lu ma "/ the 

heur. 11 r,t,urn.: | I " 

: he child from the woman S 
rcntra; elle M i' followed km. 

iher example might he taken frum La Fontaine's well-known 

fchla ■.— 

1.E COKBEAU KT U BBXAIA THK SAVES AND Tllr. 

Mafttre eorbean anr on arbre i--r- M perektd upon 

hrld {was holding) in his beak a 
ion bee nn iromage ; ek ''.» f f 

trd, par l'odeox aJl6ch6, i '"" » farh J "» thc /"** 

Lnl I ^S - , '"" 

- the imperfect of tmir i" deaoriblng the situa- 
tion in which Ml f->x found the raven, hut in relating the action of 

Fontaine uses the narrative tense of the same ran* 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 121. 



437 



The commencement of the first book of Telemaque, offers an ex- 
cellent illustration of what we have here advanced on the use of the 
anperfect and the past definite. 

§ 121. — The Past Indefinite. 

(1.) The past indefinite expresses an action entirely completed, 
but performed at a time of which some part is not yet elapsed, as to- 
day, this month, this year, &c. 



Le roi m'a nomme aujourd'hui 
archeveque de Cambray. F£n£lon. 

Ce matin j'ai trouve le pave si glis- 
sant, que j'ai pense que si je venais 
a tomber sur le bras droit, je serais 
tout a fait desempare. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Je t'ai defendu {see (2.) below) 
cent fois de racier ton mecbant 
violon ; cependant, je t'ai entendu ce 
matin — Ce matin 1 Ne vous souvient- 
il pas que vous me le mites [§ 120 
(2.)] bier en pieces % Palaprat. 



The king appointed me to-day 
archbishop of Cambray. 

This morning I found the street so 
slippery, that I thought in case 1 
happened to fall on my right arm, 1 
should then be completely helpless. 



" / liave forbidden thee a hundred 
times to scrape thy wretched violin ; ne- 
vertheless, I heard thee this morning." 
" This morning! Do you not re- 
collect that you broke it to pieces yes- 
terday ?" 



(2.) The past indefinite is, also, used with regard to a time en 
tirely past, but not specified : — 

Les fruits de la terre ont ete la 
premiere nourriture des bommes. 
Girault Duvivier. 



Les Franjais ont gagne la bataille 
de Marengo. 



The fruits of the earth were the 
first aliments of mankind. 



The French gained the battle of 
Marengo. 



(3.) When the time is specified and entirely elapsed, the past in- 
definite is by many of the best French writers, used indifferently 
with the past definite : — 

Past Definite: 

Huit jours apres son depart, il 
vcHecrivit une lettre. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

A week after his departure, he wrote 
me a letter. 

Je fus bien fache bier, ma cbere 
cousine, de vous avoir quittee avec 
tant de precipitation. F£n£lon. 

I was very sorry yesterday, my dear 
cousin, for having left you in so much 
haste. 



Past Indefinite. 
Je vous ai ecrit, il y a quinze 
jours. The Same. 

J wrote to you a fortnight ago. 

Hier en travaillant a. mon qua- 
trieme dialogue, j'ai eprouve un 
vrai plaisir. Mirabeau. 

Yesterday, while working at my 
fourth dialogue, I experienced real 
pleasure. 



(4.) When the first verb of a sentence is put in the past indefinite, 
every other verb of that sentence, and of the sentences referring to 
it, should be in the same tense : — 

Ou a-ye^r-vous eie ? I Where have you been ? 

J'ai d'abord ete a. l'egbse, ensuite J first went to church; and then 
fe suis venu diner, came home U dinner. 



438 erxTAX of iiie verb. 

§ 122.— The Past Axterior. 

The pasl anterior expresses what took place immediately before 
another event which is also past: the latter event being usually the 
result of, or dependent upon the former : — 

Quaml feus reamnu tnon erreur, When I had perceived my error, I 
te fns bootanz de mauvais proctdes j mu ashamed of my bad conduct it 
q Ifl j avais eus pour lui. wards nim. 

GlRAUI.T DlVIVlEB. | 

Sec (3.i of the | boJOW. 

§ 123. — Tin: PfcunUKMf. 

(1.) The pluperfect marks an event not only past in itself, but aa 
p:>st with regard 10 MOthl I : — 

1 vow I / had break fasted, when you came 
ladar. \to inquire for me. 

Girallt Di vivikr. ! 

(2.) The pluperfect having as its auxiliary the imperfect of the 

:iti'Mi of that tense. It 
may. therefore) often be need t<> denote customary action s — 

D&s que j 'amis lu quelnues psgi I us I had reatl a few pages, 

y- me promenala. I / si 'ilk. 

In such cases, it generally PTOOedoa or follow! another verb in the 

Imperl 

(3.) When the nction is not ■ one, and the sentence 

ci.uiiiin-iii is with one of the adverbs quoad, Inrsijue, aussitot que, dis 
que, &lc, the just interior is generally need : — 

- pages je I At MM as I had read a few pages, 

\ I tr> ■ 

§ 124. — Tit!: Tu 

(1.) The future simple is used to signify what will he, or will take 
| et come : — 
i main. | Your brother will go to-morrow. 

Phe future is ued, hi Preneb, alter an adverb of time, incases 
Ingush use the preeenl of the indicative: — 

II app..r- I Wit | i/ou come, you will bring my 
■ livre. | book. 

(3.) It has sometimes the sense of the imperative in sentences like 

the following: — 

Croira qui M*aVfl lliisfori.-n C.i- j . trill the historian Ce- 

pitolin et.pielcpics I and several other wtilers, 

qui Ihnl deOBBf les llephaota mr la I wh<> make tlephants dance on a rapt. 

FtRACD. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. — § 125, 126, 127. 439 

(4.) The future anterior is used to signify what will have "been at 
ft future period ; it is also used after an adverb of time in cases where 
the past indefinite is used in English : — 

Qua,ndfauraifini mes affaires, je I When I have finished my affairs, I 
vous irai von. Girault Duvivier. \ will go and see you. 

§ 125. — The Two Conditionals. 

(1.) The conditional present denotes what would take place under 
a certain condition : — 



* Nous gouterio?is bien des jouis- 
Bances, si nous savions faire un bon 
usage du temps. 

Girault Duvivier. 



We should have many enjoyments, 
if we knew how to make a good use 
of time. 



(2.) The conditional past denotes what would have taken place, 
at a time past, if the condition on which it depended, had been ful- 
filled:— 

H serait alle a la campagne, si le I He would have gone into the coun- 
temps le lui avait permis. | try, if the weather had alloioed him. 

(3.) The two futures, and the two conditionals, cannot, in French, 
follow the conjunction si, meaning in ease that. The indicative pres- 
ent is then used instead of the future, and the imperfect instead of 
the conditional. This rule is often violated by the French, but sel- 
dom by the Americans or English who have acquired a good knowl 
edge of the French language. 

§ 126. — The Imperative. 

(1.) The imperative is used to express a command, exhortation, 
permission, or entreaty : — 



Connais-moi tout entiere. 

CORNEILLE. 

Ah ! demeurez, seigneur, etdaignez 
m'ecouter. Racine. 

Ne tardons plus, marchons et s'il 

faut que je meure, 
Mourons. Racine. 



Know me entirely. 

Ah! remain, my lord, and deign 
to listen to me. 

Let us tarry no longer ; let us pro- 
ceed ; and, if I must die, let us die. 



§ 127. — The Subjunctive. 

(1.) The subjunctive is the mode of doubt or indecision : — 

Obeis si tu veux qu'on t'obeisse I Obey, if thou wishest that one day 
%n jour. Voltaire. | others may obey thee. 

(2.) A vsrb, which is governed by the conjunction que, must be 



440 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. §127. 

put in the subjunctive mode in French, though it may be ir the in 
dicative or conditional in English :* — 

1. When the part of the sentence, which precedes qie, beiig inter- 
rogative or negative, expresses a doubt: — 

Peosez-vom que v.. us reussissiez 1 A' you think that youiciil succeed 
lite ] in this affair? 

mdraifl pas assurer, qfe'on | / imad «<>< <7#r;», /A*>/ 1/ i^>i*M 

| rir.'. JEAU. be written. 

■ nnc } \ Do you believe he will come 7 

2. When the verb preceding qu 1 1 sen/, command, doubt 

■rprise, icarii, duty. '. apprehension : — • 

•nets, jo s"u ; . - 

Tu v ux. qn'en ta f.»v< ur nous 
NULLS. 

root, qne d 



/ II ,!oubt, I desire, 

1 I am surprised, that you may 

or shout 

a i may Apart Mil rrry 

moment, 

r i-ishest that for thy sake ice 
nponibiKtiti, 

I ire happen te> 

a. When the Bret verb i r or apprehension, the verb 

preeeded by q\ •, must also be preceded by w: — 

[U j.- trembl J M ' v . I apprehend, 1 

ii pear, <|ti i " HSf 09SU. 

. VIM. 

I the word m/, moaning 

. ihooid be followed by the ■ubjanctive, when that part of 

- them, expreasee an interrogation, <»r inv- 

I They mnat also !><• followed 

re, when they are preeeded i>y a super- 



V a til qnelqa'nn . 

le inalK' 

/. '.y.r rooajntu- 

I 

tranquille. 



/ any one trho iocs not re- 

m da. 



• -,:/ m which you may 

i A rerb preceded bj e of the nnfperaona] verbs 

faiioir, h '"■ by the rerb Un, 

um-d l ud personslly in with the adja ux^usie. 



nd is put 
In the bdicatrre, b?th< 

On m*aaflore que vow am rc^u I 
nm- letl 'ither. 



YNT AX OF THE VE! 



■§ 128. 



441 



'njuste, suprenant, possible, or with & propos, temps, & desirer, 

souhaiter, &c, must be put in the subjunctive [seeL.73, R. 1.] : — 

Ufaut que vous veniez. 



H est temp3 que vous partiez pour 
Rome. 

II ne me plait pas, que vous alliez 
la. I/Acad£mie. 

II n'est pas certain, que vous ayez 
raison. 



You must come, or it is necessary 
that you should come. 

It is time that you should go to 
Rome. 

It does not please me that you should 
go there. 

It is not certain, that you are right. 



(5.) After the expressions quelque . . . que, quel que, si . . . 
fiie, quoique, the verb is always put in the subjunctive : — 

Quelqu'effort que f assent les horn- Wliatever effort men may make, 

aaes, lear ncant parait partout. their nothingness appears everywhere. 
Bossuet. 

Qui que ce fofi, parlez et ne le Whoever he may be, speak, and do 

«raignez pas. Racine. not fear him. 

Si mince qu'il puisse etre, un che- However thin it may be, a hair has 

veu fait de l'onibro. Villefr£. a shadow. 

(6.) For the other conjunctions which must be followed by the 
subjunctive, see \ 143. 

§ 128. — The Infinitive. 
^1.) The infinitive represents the being, action or passion in an 
indefinite manner and without number or person : — 

Vouloir tromper le ciel, c'est folie 
a la terre. La Fontaine. 

L'ardeur de vaincre, cMe a la 
peur de mourir. Coeneille. 

Hair est un tourment. 

BfGDR. 



To wish to deceive Heaven, is folly 
in men. 

The ardor of conquest (to conquer), 
yields to the fear of death {to die). 

To hate is a torment. 



(2.) The infinitive is often used substantively : — 



Ou plutot, que ne puis-je au doux 
tomber du jour 1 Lamartine. 



Or rather, why can I 
sweet close of the day ? 



at the 



(3.) The infinitive present is used in French after certain verbs, 
which are, in English, joined to other verbs by the conjunction 
and : — 

Allez chercher mon pere. | Go and fetch my father. 

(4.) We might give as a general rule, that a verb immediately pre- 
ceded and governed by another verb (avoir and etre excepted) or by 
a preposition (en excepted) is put in the present of the infinitive : — 
All that ike fancied that she held, 
escaped her suddenly. 



Tout ce qu'elle s'imaginait tenir, 
lui echappait toufr-a-coup. 

F£n£lon. 
Vos raisons sont trop bonnes 
d'elles-memes, sans etre appuyees de 
ces secours etrangers. 

Racine. 



Your recsons are too good in them* 
Ives to need that foreign asrlstance. 



19* 



442 



87KIAX OF THE VERB. § 129, 130. 



Voufl pensez tout savoir. 

PlETRE. 

Croit il \cpouvoir romprc? 

Th. Corneili-e. 



You think that you fauna every 

thin::. 

I > i he eelicve he can break it ? 



(5.) The French language preferring the active to the passive 
requires the use of the active verb in the following and 
\ herein the English use the passive voice : — 



id plaindre. 
La eboea Ml •!>' tree pea da aaa> 

■SgTMDCe ]">ur In / 
mctit. 

AIRE. 



lady is much to be pitied. 
I0NM is to be sold. 
The matter is of too little 1M 
sequence to be treated seriously. 



..■rl»- in ii; ! rned by prepoaitiona ilifle rent from 

tlio-f which eooneel <>r govern the aame verbs in French. Some, 
np;un, which arc in Engliah, joined by prepoaitiona, require none 
between tben in French. We i r 'i\<- below, liata of verbs with the 
appropriate pn oording to the bes1 Prench authorities. 



§ 130.- 



I 'HI TuMlloS BEFORE ANOTHER 

[HI imiivk. 



Aim- i 
Aller, 

1 

Courir, 
( "r<»irc, 

I 
I 
I 

Ire, 

I 
Fallotr, 

nor(a*), 

I 
' 
Nicr, 



to run 

■ 

to beliere 

I 

to hear 
to hope 

to imagmt 

■ suffer 
to lead 
to deny 



■ 
P 

ire, 

I 

Proteater, 

Bappefc 

Bapportar, 

.Htre, 

rner, 

K-v.nir, 
Savoir. 

Benblar, 
Bench', 

Iter, 
Bo utenir, 
Temolgner, 

Val..ir niieux, 
Venir. 

Vouk.ir, 



to notice, to observ* 

to i/nrc 

to srem 

to think, tofancf 

U> be able 

to prctnxd 

to jirrfrr 

to remember 
to report 
to ack notrledge 
to look at 
to return 

back 
: i | mm 

to scent 

to wish 
to maintain 
to testify 
to be better 
to come 

to fee 

U be trilling 



ctrnds Tons trailer comma 
tn'-n proprc flls. R*< 



/ intend to treat you at my mm 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 8 131 



443 



Et le Rhin de ses fiots ira grossir I And the Rhine will go and swell 
la Loire, the Loire with its waves, before the 

Avant que tes faveurs sortent de J remembrance of thy goodness leaves 
ma memoire. Boileau. | my memory. 



§ 131, 



-Verbs requiring- the Preposition A befohe an 
Infinitive. 



The (s') placed after the verb shows it to be reflective. 



r(B'), 

Aboutir, 
Accorder (s'), 
Accoutumer, 
Acharner (s'), 
Adm^ttre, 
Aguerrir (s'), 
Aider, 
Aimer, 

Appliquer (s'), 
Apprendre, 
Appreter (s'), 
Aspirer, 



Assujettir (s'), 
Attacher (s'), 
Attendre (s'), 
Attendre, 
Augmenter (s'), 
Autoriser, 
Avilir (s'), 
Avoir, 
Avoir peine, 
Balancer, 
Borner (se), 
Chercher, 
Complaire, 
Concourir, 
Condamner (se). 

Condescendre, 

Consentir, 

Consister, 

Conspirer, 

Consumer, 

Contribuer, 

Convier, 

Codter 

Determiner, 

Determiner (se), 

Disposer (se), 

Divertir (se), 

Employer, 

Encourager. 

Engager, 

Enhardir, 

Enseigner, 



to stoop 
to end in 

to accustom 

to strive 

to admit, to permit 

to become inured 

to help in 

to like 

to endeavor, to apply 

to learn 

to prepare 

to aspire 

to summon 

to subject one's self 

to apply 

to expect 

to put off 

to increase 

to authorize 

to debase one's self 

to have 

to have difficulty in 

to hesitate 

to confine one's self 

to endeavor 

to delight in 

to co-operate 

to condemn one's 

self 
to condescend 
to consent 
to consist 
to conspire 
to destroy 
to contribute 
to invite 
to cost 
to induce 
to resolve 
to prepare one's self 
to amuse one's self 
to employ, to devote 
to encourage 
to induce 
to encourage 
to teach 



Etre, etre a. lire 
aecrire, &c. 
Entendre (s'), 
Evertuer (s'), 
Exceller, 
Exciter, 
Exhorter, 
Exposer (s'), 
Fatiguer (se), 
Habituer (s'), 
Hasarder (se), 
Hesiter, 
Instruire, 
Interesser, 
Inviter, 
Mettre, 
Mettre (se), 
Montrer, 
Obstiner (s)', 
Offrir (s'), 
Pencher, 
Penser, „ 
Perseverer, 
Persister, 
Plaire (se), 
Prendre plaisir, 
Preparer (se) 
Porter, 
Provoquer, 
Pousser, 
Reduire, 
Reduire (se), 
Renoncer, 
Repugner, 
Resigner (se), 
Rester, 



Risquer, 

Servir, 

Songer, 

Sumre (not unip. 

Tarder, 

Tendre, 

Tenir, 

Travailler, 

Viser, 

Vouer, 



I to be reading, 
I writing, $>c. 
to be expert in 
to strive 
to excel 
to excite 
to exhort 

to expose one's self 
to weary one's self 
to become used to 
to venture 
to hesitate 
to instruct 
to interest 
to invite 
to set, to put 
to commence 
to show, to teach 
to persist in 
to offer 
to incline 
to think, to intend 
to persevere 
to persist 
to delight in 
to take pleasure 
to prepare 
to induce, to exctie, 

to urge 
to urge 
to constrain 
to tend, to end 
to renounce 
to be repugnant 
to be reconciled 
to tarry too long 
to succeed 
to risk 
to serve 

to think, to intend 
.yto suffice 
to tarry 
to tend 

to intend, to aim 
to labor 
to aim 
to devote 



444 



TNTAX OF THE VERB. § 132. 



L'homme n'aime point d s'occu- 
per de son neant, et de sa bassesse. 
LLON. 
Avi>z-vous jamais petui a offrir a 
Diea Urates cos soutlrances 1 

The same. 



Man does not like to contemplate 
his nothingness and his vileness. 

Have you ever tJunight of offering 
all these sufferings to God .' 



!o UttVt off 



£j 182. — Vekus BBOOXBora tiie Treposition De before ax 
Infinitive. 
to abstain Dteaccoutamw 

M 0n<:'j sr// | 
tofimuk Dfishal.ituer 

pirer, 

/<> Af the question IV- lei -'). 

irikT, 
/o <7/>/>r< PiilVnT, 



/<> bethink one's st '•' Disoonvenir, 



:r (s'), 
.\ COMT (8*), 

A'hiV.T, 

Affiiger 

Applea I 
Apprthi 

Av.rtir. 

Avoir 1 

■turns, 

Avoir il<>>-.iii. 
Avoir riivii-, 

Avoir noo&e. 

Avoir intention, 

Avoir I. ' 

• • courage, to 
Avoir peur, 



to trant 

to be aecustomed 

to intend 

' 

to be ashamed 

I 

/<> lam ' 



Avoir :• 
Av-.ir I 

loin, 

Braler, 

1 
1 
i 
Charger, 

r (se), 
Ohoinr, 
Commander, 
Conjurer, 
■ ler, 

Content 

ncre, 
air, 
1 ! 

Ii^rmiragor, 

r(§e), 



to be ' 

to hare 

to blame 

I 

■ 



Discontinuer, 

Discnlper 
Dissnader, 
Douter, 
Bflbroer {%'), 
Bffiraver («'), 

fipouvai 
Bntreprendre, 

! 

( S ')l 

Bzcuser 
vftHdter, 

Platter I 



•find 

I 

, suit 

■ 

tochalU '.•:. 
to hasten 



Glorifl. • 



Imputer, 

[naplrer, 

Juror, 

ftfanquer, 

so), 

Moqoor (to), 



to despair 

tn dissuade 
tO put off 

to toy, fell 

to dtwjf 

to diseontinu* 
to disp- 
to former 

to diss i/. 

to doubt 

■lined 

to hasten 

dened 

to avoid 

■ ne's S'iJ 

iiulaie 

to flutter one's Stlj 
to shudder 

to take rare 
to l.nnent 

•■u's vlf 
t.i venture 

to impute 

to bt indignant 

to inspire 

to twmt 

'■< intend 

■ 

to laugh et 



SYN1AX OF THE VERB. § 133. 



445 



Mourir (figu ), 

Negliger, 

Nier, 

Pardonncr, 

Parler, 

Passer (se), 

Permettre, 

Persuader, 

Piquer (se), 

Plaindre, 

Plaindre (se), 

Prendre garde. 

Prendre soin 

Prescrire, 

Presser, 

Presser (se), 

Presumer, 

Prier, 

PromettrQ, 

Proposer, 

Proposer (se), 

Protester, 

Punir, 

Rebuter (se), 

Recommander, 

II vaut mieux hasarder de sauver 
un coupable que de condamner un 
innocent. Voltaire. 

Le monde se vante de faire des 
heureux. Massillon. 



to long 


Refuser, 


to refuse 


to neglect 


Regretter, 
Rejouir (se), 


to regret 


to deny 


to rejoice 


to excuse 


Remercier, 


to thank 


to speak 


Repentir (se), 


to repent 


to do without 


Reprendre, 


to censure 


to permit 


Reprimander, 


to reprimand 


to persuade 


Reprocher (se), 


to reproach one^t 


to take pride in 




self 


to pity 


Resoudre, 


to resolve 


to complain 


Ressouvenir (se) 


, io remember 


to take care, heed 


Rire. 


to laugh 


to take care 


Rougir, 


to blush 


to prescribe 


Scandaliser (se) 


to take o fence 


to urge 


Seoir (unip.), 


to become, suit 


to Iiasten 


Sommer, 


to summon 


to presume 


Soupfonner, 


to suspect 


to desire 


Souvenir (se), 


to remember 


to promise 


Suffire (unip.), 


to suffice 


to propose 


Suggerer, 


to suggest 


to intend 


Supplier, 


to beseech 


to protest 


Tenter, 


to attempt 


to punish 


Trembler, 


to tremble 


to be weary 


Vanter (se), 


to boast 


to recommend 







It is better to run the risk of sparing 
a guilty person, than to condemn an 
innocent one. 

Tlie world boasts that it can rendet 
men happy. 



§ 133.— Rule. 

(1.) Two or more verbs may govern the same object, provided 
they require the same regimen : — 



Nous aimons, nous instruisons, et 
nous louons nos enfants. 



We love, we instruct, and we praise 
our children. 



This sentence is correct, because aimer, instruire, and louer, being 
active verbs, govern one and the same case, the direct regimen. 

(2.) But when the verbs require different regimens, they cannot 
govern one and the same noun; and therefore another form must be 
given to the sentence. We could not say in French, — Un gran 
nombre de vaisseaux entrent et sortent de ce port tous les mois, — A 
great number of vessels enter and go out of this port every month, be- 
cause the verb entrer reaches its regimen by means of the preposition 
dans, and sortir by means of the preposition de. We should say : — 

"On grand nombre de vaisseaux en- I A large number of vessels enter thii 
trent dans ce port et en sortent tous port and lea ve it every month. 
Icb mois. | 

See 5 92, (1.) (2.), also note, and \ 140. 



446 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 134. 



§ 134. — The Participle Past. 

(1.) We have seen [} 66, (3.)] that the participle past, not accom 
panied by an auxiliary, assumes the gender and number of the noua 
which it qualifies : — 

Les inimities sourdes et cachces | Quiet and concealed enmity it 
Bout plus a craindrc que k-s balnea more to be feared than open and de- 
ouvertcs ct declarers. \ | 

(2.) The participle past accompanied by the auxiliary itre, agrees 
in gender ami Dumber with the subject Of the verb, whether the sub- 
ject be planed before or after it. S ] 135, (1.)] 

The sirord is blunted ; the piles are 
extinguished. 

Emmble virtue is often despised. 

The Greeks icere persuaded, that 

the soul is immortal. 

H tived the urn in 

irhirh were enclosed the ashes of Hip- 
pias, he ski I tears. 



Lo fer est emoussc ,• 1« s bachera 
sont eteints. TUB*. 

rerta obfcare <st Boarest 
• 

Qrecj ftelenl 
lime est immortelle. 

Uarthexemy. 
Qnand il \it l*iinie on etalent 
renfermSet l«s oendree d'HIpplas, il 
d torrent de larmee. 

MaiLOM. 

(3.) The perUeiple peat, having avoir a.s its auxiliary, never agrees 
with the nominative: — 



I 

' peril ,• lean 
Hont atten drfa . I i una, 

■ nt lu. 

BELLE. 



\ .' Put dorrn that she 

ATJ El have spoken; Uieir 

have read. 



(4.) The participle past, having avoir for ao auxiliary, agi 

men, when that regimen precedes the participle: — 



i.. i ' 

,-in i.iit de ace raon- 

k la grille. 

meiUenrea harangnei sont 
oellee </ 

M \ltv 

Jo les ai cherches d 

ooine, at j>' i" vis, 

||ine, 1 1 Q 



have icritten. 
hast thou done lrit.i 
our horf s .' Mil lord, I have fast- 
ened them to thr . 

^ addrtrtt are tkose which 
thr heart has dictated. 

I - sought them in every corner, 
id them. 



(5.) But, if the direct regimen ia placed after the participle, thai 
participL remain! Invariable: — 

/ td your Utter. 



J'ai rr^v rotre lettre. 

la reritl eUe-meme qui lui 

■ f I • \\rg pir Irs. 

BORBUET. 



// il truth itself wkieh 
to him those fine words. 



S TNT AX OF THE PARTICIPLE. — § 135. 



447 



Les dieux ont attache presque 
»utant de malheurs a la liberte, qu'a 
la servitude. Montesquieu. 



The gods have attached almost as 
many misfortunes to liberty, as to ser- 
vitude. 



§ 135. — Remarks on the Foregoing Rules. 
(1.) Although the compound tenses of the reflective or pronominal 
verbs [§ 43, (6,), § 46, (2.), § 56] take tire as an auxiliary, the past 
participle of those verbs does not follow the rule (2.) of the preceding 
section ; but comes under the same rules with those conjugated with 
avoir. It agrees with the direct regimen, when that regimen comes 
before it, and is invariable when that regimen succeeds : — 



Votre soeur s'est 



de belles 



Cette femme s'est rendue mal- 
heureuse. 



Your sister has bought {herself) 
handsome dresses, i. e.,for herself. 

That woman has rendered herself 
unhappy. 

Achele in the first example does not vary, because se, placed before 
it, is an indirect regimen or dative, while the direct regimen or accu- 
sative, robes, is placed after the participle. Rendue in the second ex- 
ample varies, because the word se, representing femme, is a direct 
regimen, and precedes the participle. 

We will add a few extracts as examples : — 

REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS 



Used as direct Objects. 
Elles se sont proposees comme des 
modeles de douceur. 

Quoted by Bescher. 
They have proposed, themselves as 
patterns of gentleness. 

La langue latine et la langue 
grecque se sont longtemps parlies. 
Lemare. 

The Latin and Greek languages 
were long spoken. 

La vie pastorale qui s'est conser- 
vee dans l'Asie, n'est pas sans opu- 
lence. Voltaire. 

The pastoral life vihich has been 
preserved in Asia, is not without opu- 
lence. 

(2.) When pronominal or reflective verbs, of which the second 
pronoun is an indirect regimen, are accompanied by another pronoun, 
or by a noun, used as a direct regimen, the participle agrees with this 
latter pronoun or noun when it is preceded by it, and remains inva- 
riable, when the regime direct follows. See Rules (4.) (5.) of the 
preceding section •■ — 



Used as indirect Objects. 
Us ne se sont propose, pour exem- 
ple, que la constitution la plus sim- 
ple des anciens. Voltaire. 

They have proposed to tliemselves, 
as an example, only the most simple 
constitution of the ancients. 

II est vrai, qu'elle et moi nous 
nous sommes parte des yeux. 

Moliere. 
It is true, that she and I have spo- 
ken to each other vnth our eyes. 

Neanmoins, il s'etait conserve 
l'autorite principals Bossuet. 



Nevertheless, he had 
limself the principal authority, 



448 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. §135. 



V I Invariable. 

L 'indiscretion que nous nous Nous nous sommes rcprocbS ltn. 
*©inmes rcproclite. discretion. 

The indiscretion with which we II proached ourselves with 

have reproached ours | the indiscretion. 

Or to render in English the relations the same as in French : 

r "* irhieh t« have \ We have reproached to ourselves 

reproach | the indiscretion. 

(3.) The participle past conjugated with avoir, and preceded ly a 
. is sometimes followed by an infinitive. In such 
ten the direct regimen is under the government of the in.ini- 
:• thaa of the participle, the latter of coarse remains tU- 
ed: — 

Lex- 1 v 
I 

i The verb in the infinitive is sometimes understood; yet the 
participle mast follow the same rule, aa if it were expressed The 
participle //iV, followed by an infinitive, and iatss*, followed by the 
Lnfinitiv) rerb, are always invariable : — 

tit fkvon irhich 



La d 

1 



Ham). 

\icA J have had built, 
u n h,ivr shJ 

(5.) In soiii' difficult to ascertain whether the 

■ ri. in. nt of the participle or of the 
infui> 
If til-' • ; ., rforming tl i 

. the infinitive, the participle is made to agree with that 
I !'-r and nnmlxr : — 

/ 

In this example it will }„■ - grime ,l,r,rt) is repre- 

•.\ hat is expressed by the infinitive, and that 
the infinitive itself is translated by the prttent participle. 

Hi how represented aa sufTeiing the 

actios expressed by the infinitive, then tin' participle will remain •m- 

sd, and the infinitive will be trai Thus:— 

•Urir par lenn I / gy fkdf rv- 

wroemta, 

bat examples : — 

I .aide. /„,-,; 

■ater lesenno- Je tu ni vu repowasar par lea 
raia. r i j i s. . 

/ M thrm repel (repellint;) the / mm them repelled by the en* 

enemies. w„.<. 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. — § 135. 



449 



Je les ai vus prendre la fuite. 
I saw them taking flight 
Je les ai vus frapper. 
/ saw them striking. 
Les personnes que j'ai entendues 
«hanter. 

The persons whom I heard sing- 



le les ai vu prendre sur le fait. 
/ saw them taken in the deed. 
Je les ai vu frapper/ 
I saw them struck. 
Les chansons que j'ai entendu 
chanter. 

The songs which I heard sung. 



(6.) The participles past of neuter verbs, conjugated with avoir 
and those of unipersonal verbs, are always invariable : — 

How much good has slie not done, 



during the few days that she reigned! 



The excessive heat which we have 
had, has caused much sickness. 



Que de bien n'a-t-elle pas fait, 
pendant le peu de jours qu'elle a 
regne! Fl£chier. 

Les chaleurs excessives qu'il a 
fait, ont cause beaucoup de mala- 
dies. Condillac. 

(7.) The past participle never agrees with en, because en can have 
no other relation to the participle than that of an indirect regimen.* 
The presence of en does not of course prevent the agreement of the 
participle with a direct regimen preceding the verb : — 

Have you eaten of the fruits ? I 



Avez-vous mange des fruits ? 
J'en ai mange. 

Tout le monde m'a oiFert des 
services, et personne ne m'en a 
rendu. Mme. DE Maintenon. 



have eaten of them. 

Every body tendered me services, 
and no person rendered me any. 



En, -preceded by the direct Regimen of the Participle. 

Cassius naturellement fier et im- 
perieux, ne cherchait dans la perte 
de Cesar que la vengeance de quel- 
ques injures qu'il en avait rec-ues. 
Vertot. 

Rendez graces au ciel qui nous en 
a venges. Corneille. 

(8.) Le peu has in French two meanings : 
quantity, or the want of. 

When it signifies a small quantity, the participle agrees with the 
noun which follows le peu : — 

Le peu d'affection que vous lui 
avez temoignee, lui a rendu le cou- 
rage. | 

* Noel and Chapsal, page 165. Several grammarians call en at times a 
regime direct. We think with Bescherelle {Dictionnaire national, page 
1114), that en does not represent the entire direct regimen, but only a 
part of it, or rather merely refers to it ; the direct regimen being itself 
understood. Ex. Avez-vous des livres 1 J'en ai. Have you books ? I 
have some. In the latter sentence, the word quelques-uns, the direct object 
is understood after the verb. J'en ai quelques uns, and en is :'ather a re- 
ference to it, than a substitute for it. The literal translation of the sen- 
tence will show this : / have of them a few. 



Cassius naturally proud and im- 
perious, sought in the death of Cesar 
only revenge for some injuries which 
he had received from him. 

Render thanks to Heaven which has 
revenged us for it. 

it signifies a small 



The little affection which you hav 
shown him, has restored his courage. 



450 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. § 136, 137. 

When le peu is u?ed in the sense of the icant of the participle re. 
mains unaltered. 

Le pru d'affection que rous lui I The icant of affection which yon 
avez temaigne, l'a deco irage. | have shown him, has discouraged him. 

§ 13G. — The Adverb. — Rules. — Place of the Adverb. 

(1.) In French the adverb used to modify a verb in a simple tens* 
Is generally placed after the verb: — 

Qae dfl pens prennent hardiment I Hotr mam/ people assume boU2y 
Ifl iii;i-iji:i de Li vt-rtu ! the mask of virtue ! 

Borate. 

(2.) Adverbs of place, and those used in interrogations, have the 
iee in French u in FqglMi i — 

Ou eat fQtra I 1 Where is your brother? He is here. 

i'i.) In compound teii-es the adverb is placed between the auxi- 
iiary and the participle: — 

Tan toe* done wmtg. 

11 nous iMni \ II HI veil. 

mut Boding in mmt, may, in compound tenses, 
■ I hi fore the participle Or after it, when they are nut very 

(bUowed by other modifying words, When, however, they 
j moat be placed after the par- 

: — 

ureusement cxprimd. \ „,. . . .. .. . ... , 

\ofpOjftsprm 

■ Vena hrurcusement a Unipf. | He came fortunately in time. 

r ,<• adverbe anjonrd'hai, today; domain, to mo rr ou >; hier, 
. may be placed before or after the verb, but never between 
ary and the participle. The adverb davnntage, more, muat 
alwaya follow • ; — 



Nous Bonuncfl arrives aujounCkui. 

i I temps ; 

demam il pleuvra. 

Qirault Dovmn. 



H' • ,l,zy. 

I hrothrr hurt himself yesteriay. 
v, U is fine weather; to* 
rain. 



g I :;7.- i ' 

(1.) Tie adverbs of e >mpariaon l pfva, mein$, muat be repeated be- 
fore every adjective which they modify: — 

Tl eft Metal parcssnux ?t moms I He It less idle and 
otMtioe que son | his brother. 



8TNTAX OP THE ADVER] 



138. 



451 



(2.) These adveibs and the adverbs of quantity, need not be re- 
peated before every noun ; but the preposition de, which must always 
rome between pen, trop, beaucoup, tant,plus, mains, and a noun or an 
adjective, used substantively, must be repeated in every case :— 



II n'y aurait pas tant de peine et 
de misere dans ce monde. . . . 

Ce libraire a beaucoup de bons 
et de mauvais ouvrages dans son 



There would not be so much trou- 
ble and misery in the world. . . . 

This bookseller has many good and 
bad works in his establishment. 



(3.) The adverbs mieux, better ; pis, worse, must not be confounded 
with the adjectives meilleur and pire. See note § 14, (7). 

§ 138. — Adverbs of Negation. 

(1.) The negation is composed of ne placed before the verb, and 
pas or point, after it in the simple tenses. The second negative comes 
between the auxiliary and the verb, in the compound tenses : — 

Heaven does not regulate things 
according to our wishes. 

Rome does not by any means con- 
fine offices to the nobility. 

Esteem is the true principle of con- 
sideration, which is not always at- 
tached to offices. 

Kings are by no means protected by 
laws. 



Le ciel sur nos souhaits ne regie 
pas les choses. Corneille. 

Rome ?j'attache point le grade a, 
la noblesse. Corneille. 

L'estime est le vrai principe de 
la cousideration, qui w'est pas tou- 
jours attache aux dignites. 

Fontenelle. 

Les rois ne sont point proteges 
par les lois. Chenier. 

It will be seen in the above examples, that the negative, point, is 
stronger than pas. The meaning of these two words, which are in fact 
substantives used adverbially to strengthen the negative ne, wil. 
sufficiently explain this : 

N'allez pas means n'allez un pas, do not go or move one pace or 
step. N'allez point means rtallez un point, do not go, or move a 
point or dot. 

(2.) The second negative may be suppressed after the verbs pou~ 
voir, oser, savoir and cesser : — 



Non, deesse ; je ne puis souffrir, 
qu'un de leurs vaisseaux fasse nau- 
frage. Fenelon. _ 

Dans son appartement, elle ?i'osait 
rentrer. Voltaire. 

Qui vit ha'i de tous, ne saurait 
longtcmps vivre. Corneille. 

La liberte ne cesse d'etre aima- 
fole. Corneille. 



No, goddess; I cannot suffer that 
single one of their vessels perish. 

She dared not re-enter her apart- 
ment. 

He who lives hated by all, cannet 
exist long. 

Liberty cannot cease to be worthy 
of love. 



(3.) Pas or point is suppressed, when the verb is modified by an. 
other negative word, such as jamais, guere, nul, nullement, aucun, 



452 



TKTAX OP THE ADVERB. § 138. 



personm, ni, ne, or followed by que, meaning only, and phis used 
negatively : — 



L'ambition, seigneur, n'a cut re 
de limites. Boursault. 

Nut n'est heurcux, s'il ne jouit 
de 8a propre estime. 

J. J. Rousseau. 

Personne n'aime a recevoir de 
eoroefla. De S*gur. 

Un mechant ne sait jamais par- 
donncr. NoiL. 



Ambition, my lord, has scaiccly 
any limits. 

No one is happy, unless he can 
esteem himself. 

No one likes to receive advice. 

A wicked man never knows how to 

forgive. 



(4.) Ne used Idiomatically. 
The negative ne is used without any negative sense after the 
conjunction* a raoins que, unless ; de pcur que, de crainte que; for 
frar (lint : — 



A in. 'ins gne tots m lui parties. 
De penr gn'on m rem trompe, 

L'Acaii^.mix. 



/ B you speak to him. 

/' or (V.vV yu eMJpM f/e dc- 



(5.) Ne is need in the tame manner after autre, different ; w ire- 

mr-nt, otherwise; plus, inuins, lnicux. forming a comparison, and after 

.rain. if, avoir penr, trembler, apprehender, empeeher: — 



11 est tout antra anU a'emtfc 
n parte antremenf qu'ii 

• plus modi's to qu'il n- lc 

:•• >r.iina,qu'un 
'•,-.■. Bacura. 

I'i.ii penr <!'•' 

La pink empecha an'on ne so 

am. 



// -liferent from what he 
was. 

// amd acts very dijfa V nlly. 

II mart moitesl than he appears. 

I am almost afraid thai {lest) a 
dream it da rti tag ne, 

\ ftat murk, lest J may change 
my mVhli 

n prevented thnr taking a 
walk m the gardens. 



(6.) Remark. — Ne is not used when the verb of the preceding pre- 
position is accompanied bye negative: — 



n ne. park pea entrement anil 

agit. 
n n'eet pas plus modeeta anU 

le parait. 



// !oa 7w/ 5/*aA otherwise than 

II u/,t more modest than .he ap- 
pears. 



(7.) After crainJre, apprehender, avoir peur, trembler, we put pat 
aft.T tlio nr when vre wisli for the aoeompliebment of the action ex- 
: bf the second verb : — 

,'.i il M vi.ini.' pas. 1 ■■ or, fiat he may not come. 

J'ai penr, qne man ftere n'errive lam afrax 4 , th.it' my br •» 

pas. not come. 



YNTAX OFT: 



prepositio N 8 139. 453 



§ 139. — The Preposition. — Regimen of Prepositions and 
Prepositional Phrases. 



(1.) Prepositions may be divided according to their regimen, into 


three classes 


: — 






1st. Prepositions governing nouns without the aid of another 


preposition. 


They are :* — 






A, 


at or to 


Hors, 


5 except, (see hors be* 
} low) 


De, 


of, from 


Hormis, 


Des, 


from, as soon as 


Malgre, 


in spite of 


Apres, 


after 


Moyennant, 


by means of . 


Attendu, 


on account of 


Joignant, 


joining 


Avant, 


before 


Nonobstant, 


notwithstanding 


Avec, 


with 


Outre, 


besides 


Chez, 


with, at the house 


Par, 


by 




"f 


Pour, 


for 


Concernant, 


touching 


Parmi, 


among, amongst 


Contre, 


against 


Pendant, 


during 


Dans, 


in 


Sans, 


without 


Depuis, 


since 


Sauf, 


safe, save 


Derriere, 


behind 


Selon, 


according to 


Dessus, 


above 


Sous, 


under 


Dessous, 


under 


Suivant, 


according to 


Devers, 


towards 


Sur, 


upon 


Devant, 


before 


Touchant, 


touching 


Durant, 


during 


A travers, 


through 


En, 


in 


Vers, 


towards 


Entre, 


between 


Voici, 


here is 


Envers, 


towards 


Voila, 


there is 


Excepte, 


except 


Vu, 


considering 


2d. Prepositions requiring the p 


reposition de after them :f — 


Aupres, 


near 


A la reserve, 


reserving 


Autour, 


around 


A l'exception, 


excepting 


Ensuite, 


after 
for want 


A l'exclusion, 


excluding 


Faute, 


A l'egard, 


with regard 


Hors, 


out of 


A l'insu, 


unknown 


Loin, 


far * 


A l'opposite, 


contrary 


Pres, 


near 


A moins, 


unless, for less 


Proche, 


near 


A raison, 


by reason, at th 


A cause, 


on account 




rate 


A cote, 


by the side 


Au rez, 


on a level 


A couvert, 


under cover 


Au de9a, 


this way 


A fleur, 


even with 


Au dela, 


that way, beyond 


A force, 


by dint 


Au dessous, 


under 


A la faveur, 


by means 


Au dessus, 


above 


A l'abri, 


under ifudter 


Au dedans, 


within 


A la mods, 


according to the 


Au dehors, 


without 




fashion 


Au devant, 


before, te meet 



* Governing the accusative. 

t Governing the genitive or ablative. 



454 ST NT AX OF THE PREPOSITION. § 140, 141. 



through 

at the expense 

in the neighborhood 

in spite of 

along 

opposite 



irith regard 
as to 



Au milieu, in the middle Au travers, 

Au lieu, instead Aux depens, 

Au nioyen, by means Aux environs, 

Au niveau, on a En depit, 

Au peril, at Vie peril Le long, 

Ail prix, at the price Vis-a-vis, 

Au risque, at the risk 

3d. The prepositions followed by <i are : — 

Attenant, joining I Par rapport, 

Jusque, as far as \ Quant, 

9 Kanycf the prepositions which govern the regime direct, are 

funned I'mni active verbs. Almost all the prepositions requiring de 

before the regimen, are formed ofs preposition and a noun. Those 
requiring the pit have i relation of tendency, of aim, &o 

§ 140. — Rkmakk. 
The rules whieh we have given, [( 9J, (1.) (2.) note, and 

ritfa regard t<> the regimen or government of verbs and adjec- 
pry also to prepositions. When two prepositions require 

tin- sa regimen, it is useless to repeal this regimen after each one, 

but, if they require ■ different regimen, it is neeesaary to give to 
each its proper object It would, therefore, be incorrect to say, — l T n 
magistral doit tonjonrs jngei eaivant et conformement aux lota: — A 
magistrate snmiU uhraysjv-i; ■, </»</ amfw maNy t<\ 

. besaaae the preposition tuivtau governs the noun in the 

i red. that Is without the aid of another preposition, and 
I governi the noun in the regime indirect by means of d. 

■ ii hi say: — 

Un ma A magistrate should ahoa 

in aennda nee xrith the lairs 

ce qu'eUee nreecrivent >y prescribe. 

NTKt.. 



§ 141. — Kkkkiiiios- i.k PbBPOSXOOVS. 

1. The pupi r j ■ ted before 

\.rv reL'imeti. be it a noun, a pronoun or a verb: — 

: if ei n'est qn'nne 1« 't.-ri-- Tail world is but a lutkij of 

de rangs, </'• dignltSs, it jj<><".'.<, of ranks, of dign 

est un art / ■ y important art, 

d^riiux destml >i Instrnlre, mstnei, t" repress pas- 

primer 1 ' ' tomct manners, to support 

A- 
lit. 
TeDe est Is multitude el smut Back is tfm multitude, without n- 
(Vein et sans lois. La Uabpk. | strand and without lawt. 



SYNTAX OF THE FREFOSITIO N. § 142, 143. 455 



2. The other prepositions must also be repeated before avery 
noun, pronoun, or verb, unless the words used as regimens, have 
a similarity of meaning; in which case the prepositions may be 
placed before the first regimen only, or tefore all, at the option of the 
speaker: — 

Je vous donne ceci pour vous et I give you this for you and for 

vow votre frere. your brother. 

II perd sa jeunesse dans la mol- He wastes his youth vn, effeminacy 

esse et (dans) la volupte. and voluptuousness. 

§ 142. — Observations on several Prepositions. 



(1.) Avant marks a priority of time and place: 
simply opposite, in front of: — 



-Devant mean* 



Je marche avant vous. 
Je marche devant vous. 



I walk before you, i. e. J walk 
earlier than you, or / have the prece- 
dence of you in walking. 

I walk in front of you. 



(2.) En, d, dans. — The sense of en is more indefinite, more exten- 
sive than that of dans. En is generally used before the name of a 
division of the earth, a kingdom, &c. ; a before the name of a town, 
and dans before a word restricted by an article or a determinative 
adjective : — 



En Europe, en France, a Paris, 
dans ma chambre. 

En Amerique, ce sont les bisons 
qui ont une bosse sur le dos. 

Bupfon. 

Dans 1' Amerique meridionale le 
bceuf etait absolument inconnu. 

BUFFON. 



In Europe, in France, in Paris, 
in my room. 

In America the bisons have a 
bunch on their back. 

In South America the ox was en- 
tirely unknown. 



(3.) Chez might be rendered in English by at the house of, with, 
among, &c. : — 



Chez votre pere ; chez vous. 

La condition des comediens etait 
infame chez les Romains, et hono- 
rable chez les Grecs. 

La Bruyere. 



At your father's ; at your house. 

The condition of comedians wr^s 
infamous among the Romans, and 
honorable with the Greeks. 



§ 143, 



-The Conjunction — 
[See 



■Government of Conjunctions. 
§ 127.] 



(1 ) Conjunctions govern the verbs following them, in the infinitive, 
the indicative, and the subjunctive modes. 

1. The infinitive must be put after every conjunction which is 
followed by the preposition de, and after all those which dilTer from 



456 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. — §143. 



prepositions, only because they are followed by a verb instead of a 
noun: — 

Etii'Iiez diligemment afin dc sur- I Study diligently that you may (in 
passer vos conipagnons. | order to) surpass your companions. 

We think with M. Bescherelle that the words described in the pre- 
ceding rule, belong more properly to the prepositions than to the 
onjunctions. 

(2.) The following conjunctions always require the subjunctive 
after them in French, whatever mode they may take in English. 
Those marked with an asterisk require n-: before the verb [} 138, 
(4.)] :- 



in order that 
unless 

before that 
akktmgk 



qiie, alt-hough 

•riihstanding 



Nod que, 
Nod pas qua, 
Post que, 
Poor que, 

I'oiirvu que, 

Qnoique, 
Sans que, 

S. >i t qtlf. 

Bupposi que, 



not that 
supposing that 
that, in order that 
provided that 
although, though 
without that 

irhclh'T 

suppose that 



1 / can srarrely 

misfortunes, I would rather suffer 
M them. 

I m V"U persist, I must men- 
'irnlth to the prince 
to the king. 



Afin que, 
•A humus que, 
que, 

Av.mi 

in-. 
♦De erainte que, for fear 
•De peni 

que, incase 

que, a' 1 

Joaqu'S OS que, till, until that 
Loin que. far from, I 

Q I B DM ! DMI maux je 

iter, 

J atone mi" ux wt Nuflrtr, que d.- 

HI imiiti-r. nrs. 

u i/i//" vou.s persisties, il t'.iu- 

Finl 

(3.) The following conjunctions: — De aumiere qne, de sotte que, 

. tallemenl <nif, in such a manner that; si m n'est 

:i que, unhss that, but thai ; govern the following verb in 

tlie indieative or conditional modes when the preceding Verh ex- 

isertion; bat they govern the subjunctive, when 

•J,e preceding verb expreai or ■ command: — 

// //, so that he w at 

retirer. i bUged to wii 

■ | sortc qu'un toii content /.' i such a inanwr that 

I imu. 

IVben there are in a sentence two or more verbs governed by 
a conjunction, que must be placed before the second and the f.dlow- 
rba, <t the conjunetii.il ils.lt' may be repeated: — 

/ D in* ii it . et I md we be- 

deviant malade, 
11 Iknt dee Drtdedoa, il faul d< a 
avocats. La Fontaine. 



tick, toe must have physician, 
ve must havi lawyers. 



COLLOCATION OF WORDS. — §144. 457 

Si vous partez et que vous vou- J If you go and wish to tak-~ me with 
liez me prendre avec vous. I you. 

Bescheeelle. I 

(5.) The other conjunctions generally govern the same tense in 
French as in English : — 



Fais du bien aujourd'hui puisque 
tu vis encore. Villefr£. 

Rien n'eblouit les grandes Smes, 
pcrceque rien n'est plus haut qu'el- 
les. Massillon. 



Do good to-day, since thou yet 
livest. 

Nothing dazzles great minds, br 
cause nothing is higher than they. 



(6.) With regard to the conjunction, si, see § 125, (3.) 

§ 144. — Collocation of Words. 
(1.) The place of the different parts of speech has been mentioned 
in the Syntax, under their several heads, and in various other parts 
of the work. A resume of the principal rules of construction may, 
however, not be unacceptable here. 

(2.) The collocation of words is the order according to which the 
several words which form a sentence should follow one another. 
This order is fixed for the several forms of sentences, affirmative, 
negative, and interrogative, by the genius of the language, and the 
practice of the best writers. 

(3.) The construction of the affirmative sentence is as simple in 
French as it is in English. The following is the arrangement of the 
words : — 

1. The Subject. 2. The Verb. 3. The Adverb. 

Le marchand est ici. 

The merchant is here. 

(4.) When the subject is accompanied by an adjective, or another 
attribute, the order is as follows : — 



1. The Subject. 


2. Its Attribute* 


3. The Verb. 


4. TU Adverb. 


Le marchand 
The merchant 


anglais 
English 


est 
is 


ici. 
here. 


Leffls 
The son 


de votre ami 
of your friend 


est 
is 


la. 

there. 


Le marteau 
The hammer 


de fer 

of iron 


est 
is 


ici. 
here. 


Le bateau 
The boat 


a vapeur 

steam 


est 
is 


la. 

there. 



* Some adjectives [§ 85, (11.)] are generally placed before the noun, 
when used alone with a noun ; but when another adjective comes with 
them, they follow the noun : — un petit homme, a little man; un homme 
petit et gros, a short, stout man; others have a different meaning before 
the noun or after it [§ 86.] 

20 



458 COLLOCATION" OF WORDS. § 144. 

(5.) When the attribute is placed in apposition with the subject, the 
construction is the same in the two languages : — 

1. The Subject. 2. The Verb. 3. The Attribute. 

Le marehand est anglais. 

The merchant is English. 

i B ) When the verb is in a compound tense, mrniy adverbs are 
placed between the auxiliary and the participle :— 
1. The Subject. 2. The Auxiliary. 3. The Adverb. 4. TheParliciple, 
Nous avons souvent lu. 

II' have often read. 

(7.) Long adverbs of manner, ending in ment, other long adverbs, 
and the adwrbs of time and place, nttjuurd'hui, demean, hicr, ici, h), 
are not placed between the auxiliary and the participle [} 136, 
L.41, 5.]:— 

RoOfl avons ccrit aujourd'hui, JIV have written to-day. 

(8.) When there is a direct regimen in the sentence, it is placed 
after the verb : — 

1. Subject. -1. Attribute. 3. Verb. 4. Adverb. 6. Regime Direct. 
ettentlf apprend toujour! sa teeon. 

T%e .' It urns always his lesson. 

(9.) When there are tw.> regimens of equal length, or nearly so, 

the direit precedes the indirect : — 

1. \ JL 1 8. Direct Regim n. 4. Indirect Regimen. 

Jean a 00086' le livre a mOD ]><"re. 

John has - '">ok to my father. 

(10.) Should the direct regimen be followed by a relative pronoun, 
or by attributes rendering it longer than the indirect regimen, the 
latter i> placed Bret: — 

1. Suhj. -1. Verb. 3. Ind. Regimen. \. Direct Regimen. 

Jean adonnc a mon pflre le Tlvre qn'U lnl avait promis. 

Jnhn haigivtM to my father the book which he had promised him. 

(11.) The pronouns representing the direct regimen, and those 
mpifiewiHlig the indirect regimen, preceded by to, expressed or un- 
derstood in English, are placed before the verb in French: — 
1. Subject. 2. Direct Reg. 3. Vt rb. i 1. Subject. 'J. Ind. Reg. 3. Verb. 
les royons, Nona lenr parlous. 

II them see. M" totktm speak. 

(12.) In the imperative used affirmatively, those pionouns follow 
the verb : — 

1. Verb. 2. Direct Rrg. , |. Verb. 2. Ind. Reg. 
Vojez- les. Parlez- lour. 

&" them. Speak to them 



COLLOC illON OF WORDS. — §144. 459 

(13.) When two personal pronouns are used as regimens in a sen- 
tence, the indirect, if in the first or second person, precedes the 
direct: — 

1. Subject. 2. Ind. Reg. 3. Direct Reg. 4. Verb. 
Paul nous le donne. 

Paul to us it gives. 

Paul vous le donne. 

Paul to you it gives. 

(14.) Should, however, the indirect regimen be in the third person, 
it is placed after the direct :— 

1. Subject. 2. Direct Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 4. Verb. 
Paul le lui donne. 

Paul it to him gives. 

(15.) In the imperative used affirmatively, the direct regimen pre- 
cedes always the indirect : — 
1 . Verb. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. i 1. Verb. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 

Donnez- les nous. Donnez- les- lui. 

Give them to us. \ Give them to him. 

(16.) The pronoun representing a noun in the oblique cases, gen- 
erally preceded in English by a preposition other than to, is, in French, 
placed after the verb : — 
1. SubJ. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Reg. i 1. SubJ. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Reg. 

Je parle de lui. Je parle avec lui. 

I speak of him. | J speak with him. 

(17.) To render a sentence negative, ne is placed immediately be- 
fore the verb, and pas, jamais, rien, &c. after it: — 

1. SubJ. 2. Negat. 3. Verb. 4. NegaL 

Je ne vois pas. 

I not see not. 

Je ne lis jamais. 

/ not read never. 

(18.) When the verb is in a compound tense, the first negative is 
placed before the auxiliary, and the second between that auxiliary 
and the participle : — 
1. Subject. 2. Negat. Z.Reg. 4. Aux. 5. Negat. 6. Participle. 

Je ne 1' ai pas vu. 

I not him have not seen. 

Je ne leur ai jamais parle. 

J not to them have never 



Je ne leur ai rien donne. 

/ not to them have nothing given. 

(19.) The pronouns used as direct regimens, and as indirect regi- 



460 COLLOCATION OF WOKDS. §144. 

mens, are placed before the imperative, used negati>ely. They aro 
subject to the rules of precedence, (13.) and (14.) 

1. Negat. 2. Reg. 3. Reg. 4. Verb. 5. Negat. 
[Rule (13.)] Ne nous lo donnez pas. 

Not to us it give not. 

[Rule (14.)] Ne le lui donnez pas. 

Not it to him give not. 

(20.) The construction of an interrogative sentence, which has e 
noun for its subject, differs in the two languages. The following 
examples will show the order of the words in French : — 

1. The Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Duplicate Subj. 4. Regimen. 

Lo march and re^oit- il son argent! 

The merchant receives he his money? 

t'rerc ecrit- II des lettres 1 

My brother writes he letters? 

(21.) When the sentence commences with oh, where; que, what; 
quel, irluit, tchich ; combien, how much, haw many ; the noun may be 

plaoed ■iter the rarb; — 

rotreamil Wim* it your fiintd? 

QQ0 dit v..tr. What rays your father? 

(22.) The construction of Interrogative sentence*, in which the 
Mihjcot of the verb li ■ prononn, la very simple. The pronoun is 

iftev tin- verb in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in 
fieiliponiMl tenses: — 

1. BajemmJM r*. 3. Subject. A. Direct Reg. 

Nous onvoyrz- vous notre Ifgeol f 

To us snui you our money ? 

1. Reg. Ind. 2. Aux. 3. Subj. 4. Part. 6. Direct Reg. 

Lt-ur aw/.- vous dniiiic cct argent 1 

Tb them have you given that money? 

(23.) The order of the words in a sentence, at once negative az4 
nterrogative, is as follows: — 

1. 1st Sfg. 2. Reg. Prn. 3. \ .-'. 5. 2d Neg. 6. Direct Reg. 

Ne nous envoyes- vous pss del'srgcntl 

to us tend you not money? 

(24.) In a compound tense: — 

1. 1st Neg. 2. Reg. Prn. 3. Verb. 4. Subj. 6. 2d Neg. 6. Part. 7. />«>. Reg 

No nous svez- vous pss envoy* do rargent? 

Not to us have you not sent money ? 

(25.) The first person singular of the present of the indicative of 
most verbs, wluoh have in that person only one syllable, and of s feW 



USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. § 145. 461 

ethers having more than one syllable, but ending in s, car not admit 
of the construction mentioned in the 22d rule of this Section. To 
render the sentence interrogative, est-ce-que is prefixed to the affir- 
mative form of the verb :— ■ 

Est-ce-que vous parlez'? 
Is it that you speak? 
Do you speak? 

Est-ce-que je pretends lui parler 1 

Is it that I pretend to speak to him ? 

Do I pretend to speak to him ? 

(26.) Every person of a tense susceptible of being conjugated in- 
terrogatively, may be rendered so by prefixing est-ce-que to the 
affirmative form : — 

Est-ce-que vous lisez 1 I Do you read? 

Est-ce-que votre frere est arrive ? | Is your brother arrived ? 

(27.) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject of an affirmative 
sentence is sometimes placed after the verb : — 



Tout-a-coup au jour vif et bril- 
lant de la zone torride, succede 
une nuit universelle et profonde ; a 
la parure d'un printemps cternel, 
la nudite des plus tristes hivers. 
Raynal. 



Suddenly to the vivid and brilliant 

<aj of the torrid zone, succeeds a 

universal and profound night ; to the 

attire of an eternal spring, the naked- 

ofth 



ness of the saddest winters. 



(28.) The article, the demonstrative, and the possessive adjective 
are repeated before every word which they determine [L. 86]. 

(29.) Pronouns, used as subjects of verbs, may be repeated before 
every verb [§ 99, L. 87]. 

(30.) Pronouns, used as regimens of verbs, must be repeated be- 
fore every, verb [$ 105, L. 87]. 

(31.) Prepositions are generally repeated before every word which 
they govern [§ 141]. 

§ 145. — Use of Capital Letters. 

The only important difference existing in the two languages, in the 
use of capital letters, is that the French do not use a capital for an 
adjective, unless it be used substantively, and applied to a person or 
persons, or unless it form an integral part of a name : — 



Ce monsieur est-il frangais? 
C'est un Frangais. 
Est-il frangais 1 
Cette dame est^elle anglaise 1 
C'est une Anglaise. 
Elle est anglaise. 
Apprenez-vous le franyais ? 
Je n'apprends pas l'anglais. 



Is that gentleman French? 

He is a Frenchman. 

Is he French? 

Is that lady English ? 

She is an English lady. 

She is English. 

Do you learn French 7 

I do not learn English. 



402 ANALOGY OF E X L I S II AND FRKXCU. §147. 

J'attcnds le Franjais qui demeure | I am wailing for the Frenchman 

lei 1 | who lives here. 

Le departemeut des Basses- Alpes. I The department of the Lower Alps. 

Le royanmfl defl Pays-Bas. The kingdom of the Netherlands. 

§ 146.— Elision 
(1.) Elision is the suppression of the final vowel of a word, and 
the substitution of an apostrophi (',> before words commencing with 
a vowel or an h mute : — 

a is only elided in la, ariiele or pronoun — L'ime, the soul, instead 
of la ame ; l'linuiilite, humility, instead of la humilite ; je 
l'admire, je riionore, I admire her, I honor her, instead of je 
la admire, je la honure. 
E is elided in le, article or pronoun, in je, te, me, se, ce (meaning 
it, dem. prn.), de, ne, que, pareeque, quidque, puisque,jusque, 
quelqw:, — l'ami, the friend ; 1'hoiniiR', the man. 
I is only elided in tj coming before il, lie ; ils, they. 
U is never elided. 

(±) Although the words ( ,;i;^ and oitci&M commonce with a 
vowel, the article is not elided before them, fa <oize, le onzieme. 

§ 147. — A- U8B and French 

W uRUS. 
IV . al,cr,de, ge, fa, me, ant, rnl, ion, are the 

tame in both langu.:_- 
AX Mineral, general, animal, principal, fatal. 
ce Race, prudence, not. diflee. 

DK Parade, grade, ambuscade, parrieide, pn lude. 

ge Couragi age, d«'-luge. 

lt- 1' I'lr, fertile, ridicule 

we Doctrine, min. •, ad Be, f.unine. machine, h< roi'no. 
ast Dotnant, vigilant, constant, instant, arrogant 
r.M l' nnt t arwidnnt. pr^aslent. leaidowl 

ios Question, fr:. n, religion. 

ords ending in ary, ory, gy, ncy, ty, ous, or, me, im 
Freneh by changing: — 
akv into am 

onv •* on be, 

■ <;if. ftnergie, geologie, afigjft 

hcy " itcE Cb'nienic. i . llenco 

TT " Ti Charite, alacrit.'-, divinitt'-. 

out " BUS Industrieux, ourieiix, fameuE. 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. — § 148. 



463 



oe into Eira Candeur, ardeur. acteur. 
Ihe " in Masculin, feminin, clandestin. 
ive " if Actif, passif, massif. 

§ 148. — G-allicisms or Idiomatic Phrases. 
Gallicisms, or idioms peculiar to the language, are very numerous 
in French. We have already in the first part of this work, presented 
a considerable number of such expressions, and will here give a 
somewhat extended list of those not placed in the examples and ex- 
ercises. In proverbial sayings, v/e have endeavored to give the equi- 
valent English phrase. We would advise the student to analyze 
carefully the following idiomatie sentences, and particularly those 
which do not admit of a literal or near translation. Idioms and pro- 
verbial phrases give a great insight into the character and customs 
of a nation, and their analysis is often of great assistance in the ac- 
quisition of a language : — 



Ce piano n'est pas d'accord. 
Arrangez cette affaire a l'amiabje. 
Nous sommes d'accord sur ce point. 
Quel age donneriez-vous a cet 



Cela fera bien mon affaire. 
Allons au fait. 

Vous mettez ma patience a bout. 
Ce sont deux fetes dans un bonnet. 
Vous avez toujours ces propos a la 

bouche. 
Entre nous soit dit, ce n'est pas la 

mer a boire. 
Vous ne savez plus de quel bois 

faire fleche. 
J'avais ce mot sur le bout des 

levres. 
C'est son bras droit. 
II nous a ferme la porte au nez. 
Vous allez toujours droit au but. 
En tout cas, je leur remettrai votre 

lettre. 
Ne voyez-vous pas qu'il rit sous 

cape'? 
Nous avons pique des deux. 
Nous en sommes sur ce chapitre. 
Oh ! pour le coup, vous avez raison. 
Cet orateur bat la campagne. 

IJarlez-moi a coeur ouvert. 
Nous avons couch e a la belle etoile. 
Je n'ai que faire de son argent. 
J'ai fait si bien mon compte, que 

j'ai obtenu cet argent. 
CHa ne me fait rien du tout. 



This piano is out of tune. 

Settle that business amicably. 

We agree upon that point. 

How old would yon take that man to 

be? 
That will suit me exactly. 
Let us come to the point. 
You exhaust my patience. 
They are both of the same mind. 
You always use those expressions. 

Between ourselves, the thing is not so 

very difficult. 
You are put to your last shift. You 

are at your wit's end. 
J had that word at my to?igue's end. 

He is his right hand. 

He shut the door in our face. 

You come always to the main point. 

At all events, J will give them your 
letter. 

Do you not see that he laughs in his 
sleeve ? 

We put spurs to our horses. 

We are speaking about this matter. 

Oh! for this time, you, are right. 

That speaker wanders from his sub- 
ject. 

Speak to me without reserve, openly . 

We slept in the open air. 

I do not want his money. 

I managed matters so well, that 1 ub< 
tained that money. 

That is nothing at all to me. 



464 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. § 148. 



Faites-moi grace de tous ces details 
C'en est fait. 
Comme vous voila fait ! 
11 ru'a prie de rooa fa ire ses amities 
tu attendant, faites-lui rues com- 
pliments. 
Chemin faisaut, nous lo rcncon- 

aea 
Le plu> furt BSt fuit. 
Jc Boldat n a jamais vu le feu. 

.lire. 

mmea an foil de l'hiver. 

VJu'allait-il faire ilai^ eattfl 

.tin- il l.iut. 

prix. 

II BQ lit j"tir a traven. le- | tmeiuis. 
: m- mi autre j.mr. 

II me la r beao- 

oonp. 

I »ur de BOO metier. 

pied da mm*. 

;i \a le mieUX da :.. 

.•••us. 
OH ii.iiuri'l. 

ned'cefl. 

•iil. 

11 a rendu *-a mantra poor an mor- 

iloiine la monnaie de 

. lor. 

i 

Je lui ai COmpi la \>.i 

■ 

i ehandalla, 

\ . .i i 
i 

II met la eh. in ue d< rani l< - 
\ 

• 
,i . ,i oomble de I 

i 

into. 

ooater. 

La ■entioelk I 

Ce molade n'eo rerlaad 

Nona «<imme» au couraut de tuut 



Spare me all those particulars. 
It is all over. All is gone. 
What a condition you art in ! 
He icished vie to give his lore to yen. 
In the mean while, present my com. 

plinunts to him. 
Going along, ice met him. 

The most diffieull part is done. 
That- soldier has never smell gu*~ 

' J very well. 

il ptA of v-inler. 

What business had he there ? 

II mn. 

Thai rlfti is extravagantly dear. 

II : his H-oii through theenemy. 

■ Ught. 
Tell me exactly how the matter stands. 
II '. nevertheless 

quits another thing. 

Vim left 

!' ing mi finely. 

isfxisttion. 
Those tkrubs grotO pern ptibly. 

%t tight. 

II I i _■' I a mere song. 

I him in his own coin. 

it 

\ I man of your word. 

I cut him 

• 

il A ./in. 

i ■ 

scent. 

U friends. 

I! ■■!>/ I* ■fore the horse. 

■ nrrffn m Ust 

i 

■me you to reproach 

II .he frying pan into the 

>■'■ you. 
II long arquainlo 



11 



Ttr. 
jpiainUd with m 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. — § 148. 



465 



Cela fait dresser les cheveux. 

lis chantent sur une autre note. 

Ce vers est frappe au bon coin. 

Je lui ai donne le clef des champs. 

II ne sait ou donner de la tete. 

Vous vous donnez toujours raison. 

II a donne dans le piege. 

Cela lui donne de l'buineur. 

Je n'entre point la dedans. 

H entre dans vos interets. 

Je m'embarrasse fort peu de cela. 

Son amitie est a toute epreuve. 

Vos propos m'echauflfent les oreilles. 

Finissez ce badinage. 

Reposez-vous-en sur moi. 

Cette marcbandise n'a point de de- 
bit. 

II est toujours sur le qui-vive. 

Cette maison est a vendre au plus 
offrant et dernier encberisseur. 

De quelle part ce domestique vient- 
ill 

Doublons le pas ; il se fait tard. 

J'y vais de ce pas. 

Passe pour ceci. 

II faut en passer par la. 

Vous m'avez peint avec de beaux 

traits. 
Pour moi, je m'y perds. 
Peu s'en fallut qu'il ne me frappat. 
Dites-moi un peu ce que vous en 

pensez. 
II nous jette de la poudre aux yeux. 
Vous seriez bien embarrasse, si on 

vous prenait au mot. 
Ne vous en prenez pas a moi. 
Le malade n'en pouvait plus. 
Je l'ai envoye promener. 
Le bon homme que c'est ! 
Brisons la dessus. 
II en fut quitte pour la peur. 
Vous en etes quitte a bon marche. 
Cela n'est pas de refus. 
Je l'ai entrevu ce matin. 
Je ne m'en soucie guere. 
H a des affaires par dessus la tete. 
Qu'a cela ne tienne. 
A. la bonne beure. 
Tout fin qu'il est, il s'est trcmpe. 
Ce n'est pas la un trait d'ami. 
Treve de compliments. 
Je vous vois venir, monsieur. 
Voila comme vous etes. 
Tout cela va le mieux du monde. 
Vous n'y etes pas. 
Vous voila bien avance. 



That makes one's hair stand on end. 
They have changed their tone. 
That verse bears the right stamp.' 
I sent him about his business. 
He does not know which way to turn. 
You pretend to be always in the right. 
He fell into the snare. 
That puts him out of temper. 
That is no business of mine. 
He interests himself for you. 
I care very little about that. 
His friendship ■mill stand any test. 
Your expressions provoke my ange 
Put an end, to this trifling. 
Trust to me about this matter. 
This article has no sale. 

He is always on the voatch. 

That house is to be sold to the hi^Jtest 

bidder. 
Who sent that servant ? 

Let us mend our pace ; it is g- owing 

late. 
I am going thither this mom nt. 
Let this pass. 

We must submit to tlwse tenns. 
Yon have given a fine account of me. 

As for me, I cannot see into it. 
He came very near striking me. 
Just tell me what you think of it. 

He casts a mist before our eyes. 

You would be at a great loss, if vou 

were taken at your word. 
Do not blame me about this. 
The patient was quite exhausted. 
I told him to mind his business. 
Wliat a simple man he is ! 
No more of this. 
He escaped, though frightened. 
You came off c/ieaply. 
That is not to be reftcsed. 
I had a glimpse of him this morning. 
I care but little about it. 
He is over head and ears in business. 
That shall not make us disagree. 
Well and good. 

Cunning as he is, he made a mistake. 
Tliat is not acting like a friend. 
No more compliments. 
I see what you are about, sir. 
That is the loay with you. 
All goes on as well as possible. 
That is not it. 

You are much the better for it. 
0* 



READING LESSONS. 



I.— FABLES. 

l. LE ciiF-NT. H LI BYOQMOIEH. 

Uk cli£nc t'tait plant.- prea .run aycomore. Le dernier poussadea 

19. B.] feaQlea dea le commencement da printemps, ct m6- 

I lensibUite tin [l» 5. ].] premier. Yi>i>in, dit (din, iV.) le 

trop Bar l<-^ careeaea de cbiqae zephyr incona- 

fr-iiii peal enir. Poor moi, je m suis 

de poaeeer dea feailles; j'attandi que la oha> 

leur soit mte. II avail raisoa: [L.8. l.] am gelee dcV 

traisit ' ' - naieaantea [I* 18.] do syeomore. 

Efa l>i<Mi ! «lit r.-mir.-. i de ae me pea preaaor I 

:.. I.) -J] lea car oaaoa nl ear toe protea- 
: nairement de oenrti 
Pebrin. 

LOUP D&GUIB& 

il'im troopean, ne aavait (aoaoar, 3. ir.) com* 
men! fain* pour attraperdea [L. 12. .*?.] moatone; le bergeretait con- 
tinoellemenl in L'animal vorace B'aviaa de se degoiaef 

] <lo la peau (Tone brebis qu'il avait enlevi 

danl qoelqoe b ifin, le berger decouvril I'aitifioi I 

Ua chietu eoutte lui ; ila loi L87. arracherenf la t . .i-'.n .i. 
ales, el le m 

. oara .'i 1'i-vt. ri.-ur. I'ii bomme dc j 
ft de i' on lea apparei ra 

m: BT BON M \itki: 

Un &no tronva par bajHud one peau de lion, [L. 5. 3.] ct s'en [} 38; 
Ainal deguiae il nlla dana les foreta, 



READING LESSONS. 467 

et repandit partout la [L. 8. 2.] terreur et la consternation. Toua 
les animaux fuyaient (fuir, 2. ir.) devant lui. Enfin il rencon- 
tra son maitre qu'il voulut epouvanter aussi ; mais le bon homme 
aperoevant quelque chose de [L. 18. 3.] long, aux deux cotes de la 
tete de 1'animal, lui dit : maitre baudet, quoique vous soyez [L. 73. 
4.] vetu comme un lion, vos oreilles vous trahissent et montrent que 
Vous n'etes reellement qu'un ane. 

Un sot a toujours un endroit qui le decouvre et le rend ridicule. 
L'affectation est un juste sujet de mepris. Perrin. 

4. L'AIGLE ET LE HIBOU. 

L'aigle et le hibou, apres avoir [L. 21. 2.] fait longtemps la guerre, 
convinrent d'une paix ; les articles preliminaires avaient ete prealable- 
ment signes par des [L. 12. 3.] ambassadeurs : l'article le plus essen- 
tiel etait que le premier ne mangerait pas les petits de l'autre. — Les 
connaissez (connaitre, 4. ir.) vous, demanda le hibou 1 — Non, repon- 
dit l'aigle. — Tant pis. — Peignez, (peindre, 4. ir.) les moi [L. 28. 4.] on 
me les montrez ; [§ 100, (6.)] foi d'honnete aigle je n'y [5 39, (18.)] 
toucherai jamais. — Mes petits, repondit 1'oiseau nocturne, sont mi- 
gnons, beaux, bien faits ; ils ont la voix douce et melodieuse [L. 13. 
5.] ; vous les reconnaitrez aisement a ces marques. — Tres bien, je ne 
l'oublierai pas. II arriva un jour que l'aigle apergut dans le coin 
d'un rocher de [L. 8. 4.] petits monstres tres laids, reehignes, avec un 
air triste et lugubre. Ces enfants, dit-il, n'appartiennent (appartenir, 
2. ir.) pas a notre ami ; mangeons les : aussitot il se mit a. en [L. 15. 
7.] faire un bon repas. L'aigle n'avait pas tort [L. 8. 1.] Le hibou 
lui avait fait une fausse peinture de ses petits ; ils n'en avaient pas le 
moindre trait. 

Les parents devraient (devoir, 3. reg), eviter avec soin ce faible en- 
ters leurs enfants, il les rend souvent aveugles sur leurs defauts. 

Perrin. 

5. LE PAYSAN ET LA COULEUVKE. 

Un paysan, allant au bois avec un sac pour y [J 39, (18.)] mettre 
des noisettes, (c'etait [L. 82. 1.] la saison,) trouva une couleuvre. 
Ah ! ah ! dit le manant, je te tiens (tenir, 2. ir.) a present ; tu ne 
m'echapperas pas : tu viendras (venir, 2. ir.) dans ce sac et tu mourras 
(mourir, 2. ir.) L'animal pervers, ( je veux dire [L. 32. 5.] la cou- 
leuviM, et non pas l'homme,) lui dit : qu'ai-je fait pour meriter un 
pareil traitement ? — Ce que tu as fait 1 Tu es le symbole de l'ingra- 
tituda, le plus odieux de tous les vices. — S'il faut (Jalloir, 3. ir.) que 



468 READIXQ LESSONS. 

lesingrats meurent, repliqua hardiment le reptile, vous vousconuam- 
nez vous meme : de tous les animaux rhomme est le plus ingrat. — 
L'homme ! dit le paysan, surpris de la hardiesae do la couleuvre ; je 
pourrais (pouvotr, 3. ir.) tYcraser dans l'instant, mais je veux (rou- 
loir, 3. ir.) m'en rapporter a quelque juge. — J'y eonsens [j 39, (18.)] 
.he etait a quelque distance : on [< 41, (4.) (5.)] l'appelle, elle 
vient (vcnir. 2. ir.) ; on lui propose le caa. — CV-tait bion la peine de 
m'appolcr. dit-elle J la chose est claire; la couleuvre a raison. Je 
nounia riiomme de mon tail ; il en Gut du beam el du fromage : et 
pouree bienfiut, il mange mea enfanta A peine aonUla nee (nnitre, 
4. ir.) qu'il > - [j 184, (-. | et coupes en milk moreeaex 

tout : quand je suis vieQle, et que je ne lui donne plus 
de lair, lMngral m'aeeomme ami pitie; ma peas memo n'ost p 

de aon ingratitude ; il la tanne et en But deabottea at dee sou- 
li.r>. !)-• I... Je eoneraa que l'homme eal le mi aymbole de l'ingra- 
titade. Adieu \ j'ai dit ee que je penae, 

L'homme, tout etonne, dit aa reptile: je ne croie paa ee quo ootte 
ue a dit ; elle :i per.lu I'eepril : rapportona-uoua en a la deeU 
le eet arbro . D e tout mon eosur. — L'arbre etant pris pour juge, 
ee tut bieo pia encore. — Je meta fhomme a I'abri [1*08. I. 
-. de la eheleur, et de la pluie. Bn eta, il troure aoui 
bwoehea one embre agieeble; je produia dea Boon et de i'mit ; ee* 
.,t, aprea mil in mananl me (ait tomber a coups de 

heebe i il eoupe toutee mea branch a, en fait da feu, el reaerve mon 
planebee. L'homme ae voyant ainej eee> 
vaioea :je suis Uea eot, dit-il. d'ecouter L 21. %] one radotei 
un jaeeur. AuaaiUM il inula La e i pieda el l\ ta 

La plus fed ■ kOBJoura reiaoa, il opprim< le plua bible. La t'..rce 
et le nenetnn aont aourdea i le troii de la juatic< et de la v.'ritc. 

Pf.ruin. 

a u bo 

n etant mort, aon ombre deaeendit dans la *om 
neaeede Pluton, oo. elle < etouTnerpanaiieetfraiiau, 

Pluton voulait [{ 119.] la renvoyer dans le corpa d'un ana peaeoJ ot 
atupide, pow lui i I -• 1 aoupleaae, aa viva.it.', et aa ma 

- .lie tit taut de tours plaiaanta el badina, <i«n- I'inflexibta 
rol dot enfera ue | ri <""'- et lui laiaaa le 

clu.ix d'uno condition. I da a entrer dans le corpa d'un 

penoquet/-— Au moina, diaahVelle, je conaerverai p->r la quelque re*- 
eainblanee area los homi &tuA sin R« 



READING LESSONS. 469 

je faisaia des gestes tomme eux ; et, etant perroquet, je parlerai avec 
eux dans les plus agreables conversations. 

A peine l'ombre du singe fut introduite dans ce nouveau metier, 
qu'une vieille femme causeuse l'acheta. II fit (faire, 4. ir.) ses de- 
liaes; elle le mit dans une belle [L. 13. 6.] cage. II faisait bonne 
chere, et discourait toute la journee avec la vieille radoteuse, qui ne 
parlait pas plus sensement que lui. II joignit (joindre, 4. ir.) a son 
nouveau talent d'etourdir tout le monde je ne sais (savoir, 3. ir.) quoi 
de son ancienne profession. II remuait sa tete ridiculement, il fai- 
sait craquer son bee, il agitait ses ailes de cent facons, et faisait de 
ses pattes plusieurs tours qui sentaient encore les grimaces de Fago- 
tin. La vieille prenait a toute heure ses lunettes pour l'admirer ; elle 
etait bien fachee d'etre un peu sourde, et de perdre quelquefois des 
paroles de son perroquet, auquel elle trouvait plus d'esprit qu'a per. 
sonne. Ce perroquet gate, devint bavard, importun, et fou. II se 
tourmenta si fort dans sa cage, et but (boire, 4. ir.) tant de vin avec 
la vieille, qu'il en mourut. 

Le voila revenu devant Pluton, qui voulut (vouloir, 3. ir.) cette 
fois le faire passer dans le corps d'un poisson. Mais il fit (faire, 4. 
ir.) encore une farce devant le roi des ombres; et les princes ne 
resistent guere [L. 17. 5.] aux demandes des mauvais plaisants qui les 
flattent. Pluton accorda done a. celui-ci, qu'il irait (atter, 1. ir.) dans 
le corps d'un homme; mais comme le dieu eut honte [L. 21, (4.)] de 
l'envoyer dans le corps d'un homme sage et vertueux, il le destina 
au corps d'un harangueur ennuyeux et importun, qui mentait, qui se 
vantait sans cesse, qui faisait des gestes ridicules, qui se moquait de 
tout le monde, qui interrompait toutes les conversations les plus 
polies et les plus solides, pour dire rien, ou les sottises les plus gros- 
sieres. Mercure qui le reconnut [L. 51.] dans ce nouvel etat, lui dit 
en riant. — Ho ! ho ! je te reeonnais ; tu n'es qu'un compose du singe 
et du perroquet que j'ai vus [L. 42. 7.] autrefois. Qui [§ 39, (5.)] 
t'6terait tes gestes et tes paroles apprises par coeur sans jugement, 
ne laisserait rien de toi. D'un joli singe et d'un bon perroquet o 
nVn fait qu'un sot homme. Fenelon. 



4Y0 READING LESSONS. 

H.— APOLOGUES ET ALLEGORIES. 
6. LE BERGER ET LE TROUPEAU. 

Quand * ous voyez. quelquefoia an nombreux troupeau qui, repandu 

Bur une colline vers le d, olin d'un bean jour, patt (jmitre. 4. ■>.) 

rsnqoiUemenl le tfaym et le Berpolet, on qui bronte dans use prairie 

urn- harbe menu.- et t.-ndre qui I 6chapp6 ft la fiuw du moissonnour, 

•■ ntit. rM debout auprea de sea brebia; il no 

lea ponl pae de vnr. il lee suit (aware, 4 ir.) il lea conduit, il lee 

[L 87. 7.] ohaage de paturage : si ellea ae diapereent, il leeraaeemblej 

n mi loop avide paratt, il lache bod chien qui le me1 en fttite; il lee 

nourrit [L 87.] il Irs defend : I'aurore le brouve deja en pieina oanv 

I n, »e retire qu'avec le BoleiL Qnela [{ 30, (10.)] aoinel 

quelle servitude! Quelle condition voua paratt la 

plus debeieuaeel la plua libre, on dn berger, on dee brebia 1 fa 

m eat-D (ail pour le berger, on le berger pour le troupeau 1 

Image naive [L 18. •'».; dea peuplea, el dn prince qui lea gov, ne, 

La BaOTtBS. 

I LEfl PABVBNl 

Zteobie.qui agitenl votre empire, nl la guerre qua 

, m .-nt eontre une nation puiaaante, depnii la mort 

iminnent rien de votre magnincenee: roua 

. aatrecontree leariveade I'EuphnU 

. r on anperbe edifice : I'air y eal aain el tempera, la artu- 

, re I'ombrage dn eotA du 

qui habitenl quelquefoli la tern-, n'y 

ohoiatr nne p i belle demeure : la campagne antonr, eat 

- qui laillenl e1 quicoupent, qaj rout 

' qui roulenl on qui charrient 

l .:t,an. rairain el le porphyre ; lee gruea el lea machn 

u I'air, et fonl eeperer a ceux qui voyaged vera !' \ral.ie, 

laia acheve, et dans settt 

porter, avanl de Cbabiter, voua et les 

rien, granda n 

. Pot el ti>u1 1'ari dea plua excellent ouvriera; que lea 

Lxig de votre ni< cle dcploient [{ V.\ (2.)] toute lev 

,r voa lambris: tr 

rdina,dont 1'enchantemenl soil tel, qu'ils ne paraiasent paa 

fait* de la main dea hommea. I • votre Industrie 



READING LESSONS. 4Vl 

sur cet ouvrage incomparable ; et, apres que vous y aurez [L. 61. 5.] 
mis, Zenobie, la derniere main, quelqu'un de ces patres qui habitent 
les sables voisins de Palmyre, devenu riche par les peages de vos ri- 
vieres, achetera [§ 49, (5.)] un jour a deniers comptants cette royale 
maison, pour l'embellir et la rendre plus digne de lui et de sa for- 
tune. La Bruyere. 



3. LE PALAIS DE LA RENOMMEE. 

Aux extremites du monde, sous le pole, dont [L. 31. 8.] Pintrepide 
C'Cok mesura la circonference a travers les vents et les temples ; au 
milieu desterres australes qu'une barriere de glace derobe a la curio- 
site des hommes, s'eleve [§ 49, (6.)] une montagne qui surpasse en 
hauteur les sommets les plus eleves des Andes dans le Nouveau- 
Monde, ou du Thibet dans l'antique Asie. 

Sur cette montagne est bati un palais, ouvrage des puissances in- 
fernales. Ce palais a mille portiques d'airain ; les moindres bruits 
viennent (yenir. 2. ir.) frapper les domes de cet edifice, dont le silence 
n'a jamais franchi le seuil. 

Au centre du monument est une voute tournee en spirale comme 
une conque, et faite de sorte que tous les sons qui penetrent dans 
le palais, y aboutissent ; mais, par un effet du genie de Parchitecte 
des mensonges, la plupart de ces sons se trouvent [L. 36. 2.] fausse- 
ment reproduits; souvent une legere rumeur s'enfle et gronde en 
entrant par la voie preparee aux eclats du tonnerre, tandis que les 
roulements de la foudre expirent en passant par les routes sinueuses 
[L. 13. 5.] destinees aux faibles bruits. 

C'est la que, l'oreille placee a l'ouverture de cet immense echo, 
est assis sur un trone retentissant, un demon, la renommee. Cette 
puissante fille de Satan et de l'orgueil, naquit (nailre, 4. ir.) autrefois 
pour annoncer le mal. Avant le jour ou Lucifer leva l'etendard 
contre le Tout-Puissant, la renommee etait inconnue. Si un mondo 
venait a s'animer ou a s'eteindre ; si l'Eternel avait tire un univers 
du neant, ou replonge un de ses ouvrages dans le chaos ; s'il avait 
jete un soleil dans l'espace, cree un nouvel ordre de seraphins, essaye 
[5 49, 2.] la bonte d'une lumiere, toutes ces choses etaient aussitot 
connues [L. 42. 6.] dans le ciel par un sentiment intime d'admiration 
et d'amour, par le chant mysterieux de la celeste Jerusalem. Mais, 
apres la rebellion des mauvais anges, la renommee usurpa la place 
de cette intention divine. Bientot, precipitee [5 06, (3.)] aux enters, 
ce[L.81. 1.] fut elle qui publia dans l'abyme la naissance de notre 
globe, et qui porta l'ennomi de Dieu a tenter k chute de l'homme. 



472 READING LESSONS. 

Elle vint sur la terre avec la mort, et des ce moment elle e'tablit sa 
demeure sur la montagne, ou elle entend et repete confusement ce 
qui se passe Mir la tern, iu enters, et dans !es cieux. 

CHATEAUBRIAND. 

4.-LACADKMIK BILENC1EUSE OU LES EMBLEMES. 

11 y avail [! 61, 'J. ] .'i Amadan nne e.'li'bre academic, dont le premiei 

tatut etait 00000 (cMKCVOtr, 3.) 60 CSS termes : hn acad< miciena 

penseront beaucoup, icrinml /» u, rl w [L. 19. 2.] parhront que le moins 

!. (4.)] I'appslait f \ . et il nV'tait 

point ■ vrai savant <[iii n'sftl l'ambition d'y i-tre admis. 

item* <l'un petit livre excellent, intitule le BttiSon, 

nppni an fond ile h province, qoU (unij>.) vnquaif 

DM | II part au-situt ; il arrive a 

-.• pr lentant a la ports de la aalle <"'i lea acadiiniciens 

lea, il prie riiuissi.-r lie remettre an president ce billet . 
/.ib demands bnmblement la place Tacante. I/huN-iei 
litta BnrJs-ehamp de la ootnmisaion ; maia le dootsnr et son bil- 
let arri\.i ■ • ' 119.] trnp tard. la place •'•tait deja rrinj)lie. 

Dtre-tsmps; elle avait re<;n OH pen 
-prit. <b>iit | I 
dmiration de la eour, et elle m royaft (voir, 3. t>.) 
reds .'. Is doetsnr Zsb, le fleaa dea bavarda, une U 

bien (aits, si bill) meublec ! Le pn uident charge d'annonen an <loc- 
teur ei-tte oouvel ponrait pr- 

. prendre. Apr.' s avoir on pen 
il tit 1 remplir (Teas ane grands coups, mala si bien ran- 

• t'.it deborder lalfqnsnr; puis il fit 
qn'on Introd araltre, \. ir. 

■ qol annonce pvesqne tonjosn le vnri bmV 
roferer une aenle parole, il lui 
montra d'an air affllgi' la coupe embl< ra il que, cet( 
nii-tit pleiiir. : L ir.) ds r its, qn"fl 

maia, anna perdra eon- 

omprendre qu'un .- -iirminn'rniro 

n'jr derangerait rien. II voit i ssa pieda une feoills i 11.)] 

il ia ramasse, il la pose di licatement sur la to, et fait si 

bien, qu'fl n'SB utte. 

A setts rsponas ingt nieuae, toul le uniii.li' bat£t des mains, on 
taiasa dormir lea regies pour cs jour-la, et le doctenc Zsb fut n-ru 
par acclamation. On lui preaenta Mir-lrcliamp, le rsgiatn ou lea 

eyx-meme*. Til a'y in* 



READING LESSONS. 473 

crivit done, et il (unip.) ne lui restait plus qu'a prononcer selon 
l'usage une phrase de remerciment. Mais, en academicien vraiment 
silencieux, le docteur Zeb remercia sans dire mot. II ecrivit (ecrire, 
4. ir.) en marge le nombre cent, c'6tait [§ 108, (1.)] celui de ses nou- 
veaux confreres ; puis, en mettant un zero devant le chiffre, il ecrivit 
au dessous : llsn'en vaudront (valoir, 3. ir.) ni moins ni plus (0100). 
Le president repondit au modeste docteur avec autant de politesse 
que de presence d'esprit. II mit le chiffre un devant le nombre cent 
et il ecrivit : lis en vaudront dix fois davantage (1 100). 

L'abbe Blanchet. 



UL-^-ANECDOTES. 
1. LE BON MINISTRE. 



Le puissant Aaron-Rashid commencait a soupconner que son vi- 
sir Giafar, ne meritait pas la confiance qu'il lui avait donnee [§ 134, 
(4.)J les femmes d' Aaron, les habitants de Bagdad, les courtisans, les 
derviches, censuraient le visir avec amertume. Le calife aimait Gia- 
far ; il ne voulut point le condamner sur les clameurs de la ville et 
de la cour [§ 141]. II visita son empire; il vit partout la terre bien 
eultivee, la campagne riante, les hameaux opulents, les arts utiles en 
honneur, et la jeunesse dans la joie. II visita ses places de guerre et 
ses ports de mer ; il vit de nombreux vaisseaux qui menacaient [§ 119.] 
les cotes de l'Afrique et de l'Asie ; il vit {voir, 3. ir.) des guerriers 
disciplines et contents. Ces guerriers, les matelots, et les peuples 
des campagnes s'ecriaient : O Dieu ! benissez les fideles en prolon- 
geant les jours d' Aaron-Rashid et de son visir Giafar ; ils maintien- 
nent dans Pempire la paix, la justice, et l'abondance ; tu manifestes, 
grand Dieu, ton amour pour les fideles, en leur donnant un calife 
comme Aaron et un visir comme Giafar ! Le calife, touche de ces 
acclamations, entre dans une mosquee, s'y precipite a genoux, et 
s'ecrie : Grand Dieu ! je te rends graces : tu m'as donne un ministre 
dont mes courtisans me disent du mal, et dont mes peuples me disent 
du lien. Saint-Lambert. 

2. BONAPARTE ET LA SENTINELLE* 

Apres avoir gagne la bataille d'Arcole, qui avait dure [\ 135, (6.)] 
trois jours, Bonaparte, toujours infatigable, parcourait son camp, sous 

* The word sentinelle is always feminine. 



474 READING LESSONS. 

nn vetement fort simple, qui no decelait point en lui le genera, en chef, 
a 1'effet d'examiner par lui-menie si les fatigues de trois journees aussi 
penibles que :ette bataille, n'avaient rien fait perdre a ses soldats de 
ieur discipline et de leur surveillance habituelles [J 18, (3.)]. Le ge- 
neral trouve [} 118, (5.)] une sentinelle endonnie, lui enleve douee- 
ment son fusil sans l'cveiller, et fait taction a sa place. Quelques 
[L. 88.] moments apres, le aoldat se reveille ; se voyant ainsi de> 
8:irm.'- et reconnaissant son general, il sWrie : Je suis perdu! — Ras- 
sure toi, lui dit Bonaparte avec douceur, aprea tant de fatigues, U 
pout < tre pemia ;i U brave kel que toi de sueeomber au sommeil 
mail une autre foil ehoiau niieux ton temps. 

3. BIKNF .USANCE. 

Le Sim de Ifontmorenei, qui fat deca p i t e a Toulouse, aimait a re- 

pandre dea bienfaita, Ce aeigneor, voyageant [.} 49, (l.)] en Lan- 

rcnt dam on champ, qnatre laboorenn qui dtnunri I 

PombfC *l*un Iniisson. ApprOOhona DOM de OM bonnes gens, dit-il 
a qui le siiivaicnt, et «!<> ni.u ul < > ns leur s'ils se eroient heureux. 

repondirent, qm bornant lent fetiche' i> nertainea oonunoditea 

de l-ur condition, que Dim Iciir a\ail donnr.-, { \,. 1J. 7. | il- iu- -.ui- 
liailaieiit rien dlU le inonde. I ,e quatrieine avoiia l'ranehenient 

«;u'une ehoaa manqnait a aon bonhenr : e'etait da ponvoir aoqnerif 

a heritage qm lient — Et si tu I'araia, | L Hi 

If, de Ifontmorenei, aeraia-ta content? — Autant 

(jue je li- | L 4& ). .v ] poia etre, r< pondil le payaan. — Combkai vaut- 

-, 3. ir.) il ? demanda to due — Deux milla francs, ropon di t le 

i. — Qn'on [ L. 88.] les lui (lunue. reprit le due, et qu'il soit 

dit que j'ni rendu un lioinine lieunux 60 ma vie. 

Lk Vassor. 



iv.— maximks i;t REFLEXIONS. 

i.l Li religion donne a la rerta les plna doni -. n vice 

[ 78, (3.)] jnatea alarmea, et an vrai repontir les plus 

m eonaolationa ; maia elle tache anrtont d*inapirer aux 

hommea de l'amour ('; 78, fS).],de la doneenr, et de b prtff pour lea 

MnNTESQUIEU. 

t Tiiin extraot and aarera] <>f the following, fornlsb excellcnl illustra- 
te of the article. 



READING LESSONS. 4^5 

2. Aimez et observez la religion, le reste nseurt, elle ne meurt ja- 
maio. Fenelon. 

3. Les vertus nees de la religion, se cachent dans la religion meme. 

Lacretellk. 

4. La religion est encore plus necessaire a ceux qui commandent, 
qu'a. ceux qui obeiesent. Bossuet. 

5. Prier ensemble, dans quelque langue, dans quelque rite que ce 
soit, c'est la plus touchante fraternite d'esperance et de sympathie 
que les hommes puissent contracter sur cette terre. 

Mme. de Stael. 

6. La conscience est un juge plac6 dans 1'interieur de notre etre. 

Segur. 

7. La conscience est la voix de 1'ame, les passions sont la voix du 
corps. J. J. Rousseau. 

8. La vertu obscure est souvent meprisee, parceque rien ne la re- 
leve a. nos yeux. - Massillon. 

9. La vertu est un eftbrt fait sur nous-memes, pour le bien d'au- 
trui, dans l'intention de plaire a Dieu seul. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

10. II y a une amitie chretienne que la philosophie humaine ne 
comprend guere; c'est l'association de deux ames qui mettent en 
commun leur foi et leurs prieres, et s'elevent ensemble vers Dieu. 

Laurentie. 

11. La modestie est au merite, ce que les ombres sont dans un 
tableau ; elle lui donne de la force et du relief. La Bruyere. 

12. La verite n'a jamais besoin de l'erreur, et les ombres n'ajoutent 
rien a la lumiere. Lamartine. 

13. On n'est pas digne d'aimer la verite, quand on peut aimer 
quelque chose plus qu'elle. MASsn-LON. 

14. La flatterie est une fausse monnaie qui n'a de cours que par 
notre vanite. La Rochefoucauld. 

15. On ne triompbe de la calomnie qu'en la dedaignant. 

Mme. de Maintenon. 

16. Ce n'est que pour l'innocence, que la solitude peut avoir des 
charmes. Leczinska. 

17. Les conseils agreables sont rarement des conseils utiies- 

Massillon. 

18. Ceux qui donnent des conseils sans les accompagner d'exem- 
ples, ressemblent a ces poteaux de la campagne, qui indiquent lea 
ihemins sans les parcourir. Rivakol. 



476 READING LESSOKB. 

V.— POESIE. 
HYMNE DE L'ENFANT A SON RfiVEIL. 

O Pere qu'adore mon pere ! 
Toi qu'on ne nomme qu'a genoux, 
Toi dont le nom terrible et doux 
Fait courber le front de ma mere ; 

On dit que ce brillant soleil 
N'est qu'un jouet de ta puissance, 
Que sous tes pieds il se balance 
Comme une larape do vermeil. 

On dit que c'c9t toi qui Ada naitre 
Lea pt- tits oiseaux dam Im rhHmp*, 
Et qui donnes auv prtits enfanta 
Une ftme aus.-i pour to eonnaftre. 

On dit que 0*6*1 tui lt ui j.ro.luis 
Lea flcurs font le jiidJn *o pare ; 

Et <)ue MM t « » i , t.Mijour- avare, 
Le verger n'aurait poinl dfl fruits. 

Aux dons que ta bonAf mesure, 
Tout l'tinncrs i-t coiivir ; 
N" til I ul. lie'- 

A ce lV-tin (If la nature. 

L'agncau broute le Berpolet ; 
La chrvre s'attaclie an eytiae ; 
I.i inouclie, an bord du vase, putM 
Les bland M '•• mon lait* 

I/aloiiette a la (jraine UBI 
Que lalflM BDTOleV le flaneur, 
Le passereau suit le v.mneur, 
Et 1'eiifant s'.ittache ;\ sa mere. 

Et, pour obtenir ehaque don 
Que ehaque jour tu fa is »' c ore, 

A miili. le soir, .. I'rarora, 

Que faut-il .' — prononoer ton nom. 



READING LESSONS. 477 

O Dieu, ma bouche balbutie, 
Ce nom, des anges redoute, 
Un enfant meme est ecoute 
Dans ie chceur qui te glorifie ! 

Ah f puisqu'il entend de si loin 
Les vo3ux que notre bouche adressa , 
Je veux lui demander sans cesse 
Ce dont les autres ont besoin. 

Mon Dieu ! donne l'onde aux fontames 
Donne la plume aux passereaux, 
Et la laine aux petits agneaux, 
fit l'ombre et la rosee aux plaines. 

Donne aux malades la sante 
Au mendiant Je pain qu'il pleure, 
A l'orphelin une demeure, 
Au prisonnier la liberte. 

Donne une famille nombreuse 

Au pere qui craint le Seigneur, 

Donne a* moi sagesse et bonheur 

Pour que ma mere soit heureuse. Lamartine. 

2. LA FEUILLE. 

De ta tige detachee 

Pauvre feuille dessechee, 

Oil vas tu ? — Je n'en sais rien. 

L'orage a brise le chene 

Qui seul etait mon soutien. - 

De son inconstante haleine 

Le zephyr ou l'aquilon, 

Depuis ce jour me promene 

De la foret a la plaine, 

De la montagne au vallon. 

Je vais ou le vent me mene, 

Sans me plaindre ou m'effrayer, 

Je vais ou va toute chose, 

Ou va la feuille de rose 

Et la feuille de laurier. Arnault 

* The d in this line is a poetical license. 



478 READING LESSONS. 

8. LE MONTAGNARD fiMIGRfi. 

Combien j'ai douce souvcnance 

Du joli lieu de ma naissance ! 

Ma soeur, qu'ils etaient beaux cos jour* 

L}e France ! 
O mon pays, sois mes amours ! 

To uj ours. 

Te souvient-il que notre mere 
Au foyer ile notre chaumiere 
Nous pressait sur son scin joyeux, 

Ma ill.' re ! 
Et nous baisions ses blonds cheveu 

Tous deux. 

Ma soMir, te souvirnt-il encoro 
Du chateau que baignait la Dore 
Et de oettfl tant vieille tour 
Du Hove, 

Oil l'airain sonnait le rctour 
Du jour .' 

- iviiMit-il du lac tranquille 
Qu'etiK-urait l'hirondrlle agile, 
Du VVOt qui courbait le roseau 

Mobile, 

VA du soldi eoiu-liant, sur l'eau, 
Si beau ? 

• >uvicnt-il de cette amie, 
Douce compagne de ma 
Du . -ueillant la fleur 

Jolic, 
Helens appojatt sur mon iour 

Son cuur. 

Oh! qui me rendra m<»n !!• Kne, 
Et la montagne et le grand chene ? 
Leur souvenir fait tous les jours 

Ma peine : 
Mon pays sera mes amour* 

Toujours. CHATKAUBMura 



READING LESS OH 8. 470 



4. STANCES. 

Et j'ai dit dans mon cceur ; que faire de la vie ? 
Irai-je encor, suivant ceux qui m'ont devance, 
Comme l'agneau qui passe ou sa mere a passe, 
Imiter des mortels, 1'immortelle folie ? 

L un cherche sur les mers les tresors de Memnon 
Et la vague engloutit ses voeux et son navire ; 
Dans le sein de la gloire ou son genie aspire, 
L'autre meurt, enivre par l'echo d'un vain nom. 

Avec nos passions, formant sa vaste trame, 
Celui-la fonde un trdne, et monte pour tomber ; 
Dans des pieges plus doux aimant a succomber, 
Celui-ci lit son sort dans les yeux d'une femme. 

Le paresseux s'endort dans les bras de la faim ; 
Le laboureur conduit sa fertile charrue ; 
Le savant pense et lit ; le guerrier frappe et tue ; 
Le mendiant s'assied sur le bord du chemin. 

Ou vont-ils cependant ? — lis vont ou va la feuille 
Que chasse devant lui le souffle des hivers. 
Ainsi vont se fletrir dans leurs travaux divers 
Ces generations que le temps seme et cueille. 

lis luttaient contre lui, mais le temps a vaincu; 
Comme un fleuve engloutit le sable de ses rives, 
Je l'ai vu devorer leurs ombres fugitives. 
Us sont nes, ils sont morts : Seigneur, ont-ils vecu ! 

Pour moi, je chanterai le maitre que j'adore, 
Dans le bruit des cites, dans la paix des deserts, 
Couche sur le rivage, ou flottant sur les mers, 
Au deelin du soleil, au lever de l'aurore. 

La terre m'a crie : Qui done est le Seigneur ? 
— Celui dont I'ame immense est partout repandue, 
Celui dont un seul pas mesure Petendue, 
Celui dont le soleil emprunte sa splendeur; 

Celui qui du neant a tire la matiere, 
Celui qui sur le vide a fonde l'univers, 



480 READING LESSON 8. 

Celui qui sans rivage a renfernie les mere, 
Celui qui d'un regard a lance la lumiere ; 

Celui qui ne connait ni jour, ni lcndemain, 
Celui qui de tout temps de soi-meme s'enfante, 
Qui vit duns l'avenir eomme -a l'heure present©, 
Et rappelle les temps Oehappes de sa main. 

Cest lui, c'est le Seigneur ! Que ma langue rediae 
Les cent noms de sa gloire aux enfants des morsels! 
Comme la harpe 4*OI pendue I Ml autels, 
Je chanterai pour lui, Juqu'i M qu'il me brise! . .. 

L MiRiwm. 



6. LAFAYETTE EN AMfcRIQUE 

HftpobUeaina, quel eortege ■'avium ? 

— Un vieux gnerrier debarqne parmJ nous. 

1 d'un roi vmis jurer 1'alliauce .' 
— II a <l.-s roil allium' le MORODX 

■it .'— Seul il fraucliit les ondcs. 
— Qu'a-t-il done fait ? — 11 I l«n- 

I i mmorteHe -i fhoniM dM deux mondea! 

l'univers! 

ir M rivage 
Qui rvtentit de joy urs, 

r, satis troiihli- et sans servage, 
lei hn's, le travail, et les D 
-inies ces bords sont le refuse ; 
La tyrannie a people DM d 
I/lmnime et sea droit! out iei Dieu pour jug*. 
•■ triniuplie, .'elairez l'mii'. 

Mais que de sang nous couta ce bien-ctre ! 
Nous succombions ; I. 'Unit, 

Montra la France, eo1 Washington pour maltra 
Lutta, vainquit, et l'Anglais disparut. 
IT la liherte sainte, 

II a depuis grand] dans les r 

Des fere d'Olmutz, n lempreinte. 

Joure de triomphe, ecluirez runiveral 



READ ISO LESSONS. 481 

Ce vieil am' que iant d'ivresse accueille 
Par un beros, ce heros adopte, 
Benit jadis, a sa premiere feuille, 
L'arbre naissant de notre liberte. 
Mais aujourd'hui, que l'arbre et son feuillage 
Bravent en paix la foudre et les hivers, 
II vient s'asseoir sous son fertile ombrage. 
Jours de triomphe, eclairez 1'univers ! 

Autour de lui, vois nos chefs, vois nos sages, 
Nos vieux soldats se rappelant ses traits ; 
Vois tout un peuple, et ces tribus sauvages 
A son seul nom sortant de leurs forets. 
L'arbre sacre, sur ce concours immense 
Forme un abri de rameaux toujours verts. 
Les vents au loin porteront sa semence, 
Jours de triomphe, eclairez 1'univers ! 

L'Europeen que frappent ces paroles, 

Servit des rois, suivit des conquerants ; 

Un peuple esclave encensait ces idoles ; 

Un peuple libre a des honneurs plus grands. 

Helas, dit-il, et son ceil sur les ondes 

Semble chercher des bords lointains et ehers. 

Que la vertu rapproche les deux mondes ! 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez 1'univers ! B£s anger* 

6. LA MARSEILLAISE. 

Allons, enfants de la patrie : 

Le jour de gloire est arrive : 

Contre nous de la tyrannie 

L'etendard sanglant est leve. 

Entendez-vous dans les campagnes 

Mugir ces feroces soldats ? 

lis viennent jusque dans vos bras 

figorger vos fils, vos compagnes. 
Aux armes ! citoyens ; formez vos bataillons ; 
Marchez, — qu'un sang impur abreuve vos sillons I 

Chceue. 
Aux armes ! citoyens ; formons nos bataillons ; 
Marchons ; — qu'un sang impur abreuve nos sillons ! 

21 



482 READING LESSOR*. 

Que vent ccttc horde d'esclavea, 
De traitres, de rois conjures? 
Pour qui ces ignobles entraves, 
Ces lers des longlemps prepares ? 
— Francois, pour nous, all ! quel outrage 
Quels transports il doit exciter! 
C'eat nous qu on ose menacer 
De rendre I 1 antique esclavage ! 
Aux 

Quoi! des ohurtos etrangeres 

Faralent la loi dans aoa I 

Quoi ! ces phalangea BMiwoaim 

T.-rrassvraient DOS tiers tfuerriere! 

: Dien ! par dea mains enchalnem 
N<M frontl BOM le jottg M plieraient \ 
. I i'-iuiraient 

Aux 

Tr.-rnl.Ir7. tyran»! • •: vu-. |>vrndes 

L'opprobrv d 

Tr.iiil.l. ■/. ... \..s projttl parricide* 

Vi.ut eafia raetvoir law pais. 
Ti.ut eat aoldal pow v.. us couibattra 
liatoay 
an prodoil da Bonn 

Contr.- rot uittre. 

Aux 

Francais; en giierrit-rs magnaniux* 
1'ortez on r .ups : 

Kpargaai laaj Ifiataa riillmm 
A regret a'annant contre vous ; — 

Mais lea oompUoaa <lo 11. mill. 
Tou* 

Aux aruic- 

Amour sac re da la patrio, 

Conduia, souticns noa braa venture 



READING LESSONS. 483 

Liberte, liberte cherie 
Combats avec tes defenseurs. 
Sous nos drapeaux, que la victoire 
Accoure a tes males accents ; 
Que nos ennemis expirants 
Voient ton triomphe et notre gioire ! 

Aux armes, etc. Rouget de l'isle 



7. LE RETOUR DANS Li *ATRIE. 

Qn'ii va lentement le navire 
A qui* j'ai confie mon sort ! 
Au rivage ou mon cceur aspire, 
Qu'il est lent a trouver un port! 

France adoree ! 

Douce contree ! 
Mes yeux cent fois ont cru te decoovw?-. 

Qu'un vent rapide 

Soudain nous guide 
Aux bords sacres oii je revfens moorir. 
Mais enfin le matelot crie : 
Terre, terre, la-bas, voyes ! 
Ah ! tous mes maux sont oubliea. 

Salut a. ma patiie I 

Oui, voila les rives de France ; 
Oui, voila le port vaste et sar, 
Voisin des champs oii mon enfanoe 
S'ecoula sous un chaume obscur i 

France adoree! 

Douce contree ! 
/pres vingt ans, enfin je te revois; 
De mon village 
Je vois la plage, 
Je vois fumer la cime de mes toits. 
Combien mon ame est attendrie ! 
La furent mes premieres amours ; 
La ma mere m'attend toujours, 

Salut a. ma patne ! ! 



" A poetical license ; this should be auquel. % 39 (2). 



484 READING LI8BOI1 

Au bruit des transports d'allegreM*, 
Enfin le navire entrc au port. 
Dans cette barque ou Ton se press© 
Hatons-nous d'atteindre le bord. 

Franco adon'e ! 

Douce contn'e ! 
Puissent tes fill te rcvoir ainsi tous ! 

Enfin j'arrive 

Et sur la rive, 

:nl> :ui oil 1, je rends grAce a genon*. 
Jc I'tiiiliras-c, A tern- clu'-no ! 
Dieu ! <;u'un 6tiU doit soufirir ! 
lloi, dr-nrmai-, }>• puis mourir. 

Salut I ma pal/io ! Ber ajiueh 



VOCABULARY FOR THE READING LESSONS. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



adj. adjective. 

adj. v. verbal adjective. 

adv. adverb. 

art. article. 

conj. conjunction. 

f. feminine gender. 

ind. p present of indicative. 

int. interjection. 

m. masculine gender. 

n. noun. 

p. d. past definite. 



S. 

pre. 
prn. 
v. a. 



participle, 
plural, 
preposition, 
pronoun, 
active verb. 



v. a. & n. active and neuter verb, 

v. aux. auxiliary verb, 

v. unip. unipersonal verb, 

v. ir. or ir. irregular verb, 

v. n. neuter verb, 

v. r. reflective verb. 



The numbers after the verbs indicate the conjugation. 



A-AD. 



A, a {with a grave accent), pre. at or 
to. 

Abondance, n. f. abundance, plenty. 

Aboutir, v. n. 2. to end in, to come 
to. 

Abreuver, v. a. 1. to water, to Jill. 

Abyme, n. m. abyss, depth. 

Abri, n. m. shelter. 

Academicien, n. m. Academician. 

Academie, n. f. academy. 

Accent, n. m. accent, pi. voice. 

Acclamation, n. f. acclamation. 

Accompagner, v. a. 1. w accompany. 

Accorder, v. a. 1. to grant, (s') v. r. 
to agree. 

Accourir, v. n. ir. 2. to run, to has- 
ten to. 

Accueillir, v. a. ir. 2. to welcome. 

Acheter, v. a. 1. to buy. 

Achever, v. a. 1. to achieve, com- 
plete. 

Acquerir, v. a. ir. 2. to acquire. 

Acquitter (s'), v. r. to acquit one's 
self of, to discharge. 

Adieu, int. & n. m. adieu, farewell, 
leave. 

Admettre, v. a. ir. 4. to admit. 

Admiration, n. f. admiration. 

Admirer, v. a. 1. to admire. 

Adopter, v. a. 1. to adopt. 

Adorer, v. a. 1. to adore. 



?, v. a. 1. to address, (»') 
ref. to apply. 

Affectation, n. f. affectation. 

Afflige, p. & adj. v. grieved, af- 
flicted. 

Agacer, v. a. to entice, to tease. 

Agile, adj. nimble-, light. 

Agiter, v. a. to agitate. 

Agneau, n. m. lamb. 

Ah ! int. Ah. 

Aigle, n. m. eagle. 

Aile, n. f. wing. 

Aimer, v. a. 1. to love, to like. 

Ainsi, adv. thus, so. 

Air, n. m. air. 

Airain, n. m. brass. 

Aisement, adv. easily. 

Ajouter, v. a. 1. to add. 

Alarm, n. f. alarm. 

Allegorie, n. f. allegory. 

Aller, v. n. ir. 1. (ind. p. je vais,} 
to go. 

Alliance, n. f. alliance. 

Allumer, v. a. 1. to light, kindle. 

Alouette, n. f. lark. 

Ambassadeur, n. m. ambassador. 

Ambition, n. f. ambition. 

Ame, n. f. soul. 

Amer, e, adj. bitter. 

Amertume, n. f. bitterness, 

Ami, e, n. m. &. f. friend. 



486 



AU-BU 



Amour, n. m. lave. 
An, n. m. anne-e, f. year. 
Ancien, m. adj. ancient, old. 
Ange, n. m. angel. 
Animal, (pi. aux,) n. m. animal. 
Aniiner, v. a. 1. to animate, to excite. 
Ainu nicer, v. a. 1. to announce. 
Antique, adj. ancient, antique. 
A peine, adv. scarcely, hardly. 
•■■ pcxivc. 
Apologue, n. m. apologue. 
Appetence, n. f. appearance. 
Apparleiiir. v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. j'ap- 

pertiene), /" belong. 
Appeler. v. a. 1. to call. 

Ire, v. a. 4. (p. appris), to 

learn. 

.it, v. a. 1. to bring near, (»') 

v. r. to approach. 

Appnyi hav, 

pre. afler. 
Aqnllon, n. m. north i, 

I tree. 
Architects, n. m. architect. 

Aimer, r. a. l. to ar»i,(»') v. r. to am 

I self. 
Arraeher. v. a. 1. to tear. 
Arriver, v. n. 1. to arri'rc. 
i:l. a//. 
D. m. article. 
n. m. artifice, cunning, 

v. n. 1. to ajpt'/r. 

r v. a. 1 to assemble. 

r. ir. .'}. (tnd. p. je 
ma-isieda, p. aasu), to jii /tojr/i. 
Association, n. f. association, com- 
pany. 
A&sommer, t. a. 1 . to strike dawn, to 

i. ir. 4. (p. d. jat- 
'ach. to Ait. 
•rait, to expect. 

% "ieved. 
Attentif. ve. adj 
Attrajwr, v. a. 1. to catch. 
Au. art. at, or to the. 
AnjoonThni, adv. to-day. 

Auparavant. adv. before. 
■ id?, near. 

Anrote, n. f. ennm, <* 

Au^si r,,|ij. A adv. as so, also. 
It, adv. immediately. 

Autre ' al. 

Autant. adv. as much, as many 

Antel, n. ni. altar. 



Anteur, n. m. author. 

Autour, pre. & adv. round, around* 

Autre, adj. other. 

Autrefois, adv. formerly. 

Autrui, prn. other, others. 

Avancer (s') F v. r. 1. to advance, 

approach. 
Avant, pre. before. 
Avare. n. & adj. miser, avaricious. 
Avec. pre. with. 
Avenir, n. m.futwe. 
Aveugle. adj.' blind. 
A vide adj. anxious, eager. 
Aviser (a ') v. r. 1. to think, to talc* 

into ours it 
Avoir, v. aux. & a. ir. (p. d. j'ena), 

v. a. 1. to confess. 



B. 

Harlin. e. a<^j. playful. 

v u 1. to bathe. 

IUiillon. s. in 

■■> ias>. 
v. u 1. to 

Balbatier, v. a. & n. 1. to stammer. 
Berqne, n. f. bark, boat. 
Barnere, n r 

llataille. a f. battle. 

n. n. m. battalion. 
Bitir. v. a 2. to build. 

. a ir 4. (n. battu,) to beat 
Baodet, n. in. donkey. 

ft adj. talkative, prat- 

• 1 f belle, adj. fine, hand- 
some. 

:■■ adv. much, many. 
ii. f beauty. 
Beo, ii m. taut. 

rlt, n. ni. tn'/. 
B6nir, v. a. 2. to Ma*. 
Berger, n. m. shepherd. 

n in n/r</, um«/. 
Beurre, n m. /• 
Bien n. m. property, adv. «tf. 

», comfort. 
lii' lil'.iisaiire, n. f. beneficence, he* 

Itieiif'iiit, n. m. benefit. 
BientOt, adv. soon. 
Millet, n in. note. 
Blanc, Mancbe, adj. «o*ito. 



CH-CO. 



481 



Boire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je bus, p. 

bu), to drink. 
Bois, 11. m. wood, forest. 
Bon, ne, adj. good., kind, simple. 
Bonheur, n. m. happiness. 
Bonne-cbere, n. f. good living. 
Bonte, n. f. goodness, kindness. 
Bord, n. m. border, shore. 
Borner, v. a. 1. to confine, to bound. 
Botte, n. f. boot, bundle. 
Bouche, n. f. mouth. 
Branche, n. f, branch. 
Bras, n. m. arm,. 
Brave, adj. brave, worthy. 
Braver, v. a : 1. to brave, affront. 
Brebis, n. f. sheep. 
Brillant, e, adj. shining, brilliant. 
Briser, v. a. 1. to break. 
Brouter, v. a. & n. 1. to browse, to 



Bruit, n. m. noise. 
n. m. bush. 



C, prn. it. 

Cacber, v. a. 1. to hide, conceal, (se) 

v. r. to hide one's self. 
Cage, n. f. cage. 
Calife, n. m. calif. 
Camp, n. m. camp. 
Campagne, n. f. country, campaign. 
Candidat, n. m. candidate. 
Caresse, n. f. caress. 
Causeur, se, acy. talker. 
Ce, prn. & adj. this, that. 
Celebre, adj. celebrated. 
Celeste, adj. celestial. 
Celui, prn. this, that. 
Censurer, v. a. 1. to censure. 
Cent, adj. num. hundred. 
Centre, n. m. centre. 
Cependant, conj. however. 
Certain, adj. certain. 
Cesse (sans) without ceasing. 
Chaleur, n. f. heat. 
Gbamp, n. m. field. 
Changer, v. a. & n. 1. to 
Chant, n. m. song, singing. 
Chanter, v. a. & n. 1. to sing. 
Chaos, n. m. chaos. 
Chaque, adj. each. 
Charger, v. a. 1. to charge, load. 
Charme, n. m. charm. 
Charrier, v. a. 1. to transport, carry. 



Cbasser, v. a. & n. 1. to hunt, to chase, 
to drive away. 

Chateau, n. m.' castle, villa. 

Chaume, n. m. thatch. 

Chaumiere, n. f. cottage. 

Chef, n. m. chief. 

Chemin, n. m. way, road. 

Chene, n. m. oak. 

Cher, e, adj. dear. 

Chercher, v. a. to seek. 

Cheveux, n. m. pi. hair. 

Chevre, n. f. goat. 

Chien, n. m. dog. 

Chiffre, n. m. figure. 

Chceur, n. m. choir, chorus 

Choisir, v. a. 2. to choose. 

Chose, n. f. thing. 

Chute, n. I fall. 

Ciel, n. m. (pi. cieux,) heaven. 

Cime, n. f. peak, top. 

Circonference, n. f. circumference. 

Cite, n. f. city. 

Citoyen, n. m. citizen. 

Clair, e, adj. clear, n. m. light. 

Clameur, n. f. cry, clamor. 

Cceur, n. m. heart. 

Cohorte, n. f. cohort. 

Coin, n. m. corner. 

Colline, n. f. hill. 

Commander, v. a. 1. to command, to 
order. 

Combat tre, v. a. & n. 4- to combat, 
to fight. 

Combien, adv. how much, how many. 

Comme, adv. & conj. as, like, when. 

Commencement, n. m. beginning. 

Commencer, v. a. 1. to begin. 

Comment, adv. how. 

Commission, n. f. commission. 

Commodite, n. f. convenience. 

Comniun, e, adj. common, usual. 

Compagne, n. f. companion. 

Complice, n. m. accomplice. 

Composer, v. a. 1. to compose. 

Comprendre, v. a. ir. 4. to under- 
derstand, to comprise. 

Comptant, adj. & adv. ready, for cash, 

Compter, v. a. 1. to count,' to i 

Concevoir, v. a. 3. to conceive. 

Conclure, v. a. ir. 1. to conclude 

Concours, n. m. concourse, 

Condamner, v. a. 1. to condemn 

Condition, n. f. condition. 

Conduire, v. a. ir. 4. to conduct. 

Confiance, n. f. confidence, depen- 
dence. 



488 



Confier, v. a. 1. to trust, to confide. 

Confrere, n. m. brother, fellow. 

Confusement. adv. confusedly. 

Conjure, a. v. no <rn together. 

Comattre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je con- 
mis. ]). canon), to knew, to be ac- 
quainted tcitA. 

Conque. n. f. shell. 

nit n. iu. conqueror. 

I aoe, n. f. conscience. 

Conseil, n. iu. a ivice, counsel. 

•ir. v. n. 2. to consent, agree. 

I \. to preserve. 

1 

• int. 

< 

< b nt. 

Contiiraeuement, adr. consmmaBg, 

■ 

I ' strict . 

' n in. di sap ps in t msnt . 

air, v. ii. ii. to agree, '<> «»'/, 

ictte. 

1 
' 
1 
1 

I <lotcn. 

Ooatearre, n f. jwair, adder, 
law. 

«'..iij» r I 

1 

Ooarrom n m 

• adj. short. 
I n 

1 
: 
Cniin.l 

p. craint i I 

Orier, v. n 1. 1 

1 

am 
I | ■ at greedily. 

Cu.illir, v. a. ir. & H father, to 

pick. 
CulliviT, v. a. 1 to cult 






Curiosity, n. f. cvriosUw 
Cytiso, n. m. cytisus. 



P. 



Dans, pro. m, tefa. 
Davantage. adv. Mrc 
De, pre. of or fr om, 
Debarauer, v. a. & n. 1. to land. 
Deborder, v. n. 1. to run over. 
Debont, adv. standing. 
Decapiter, v. a. 1. to behead. 
Deoeler, v. a. l. to discover. 
Dechlrer, v. a. 1. to /<v;r. 
Decision, n. f. dedstcm. 

tall. 
Ir, \ . a. ir. ^.'/o discover, «*• 

Dedaigner, v. a. 1. to distlain. 

1 1 /"orto/i 
• . .frc/or. 
r. a. 1. to i 

•itcly. 

■ 

g its. 

■- 

' aurstion. 
lar, v. a 1. /-> fl-U-, //' request. 
Demean ->Mng. 

I', in.. ii n in. drmnn. 

MM, means. 
I 'lay. 
Depute, pre. ft 

I 1. f<> <li slurb, to put 

. 1 '- ..■/, to I 

M 

i lj. disagreeable. 
mrd. 
n. 4. /<> desctnd, to 

risk, desirt. 
It, hence fortk. 
,i. 1. "/. rf»e «f, «• 

/<ito. 



DE-EF. 



489 



pcstiner, v. a. 1. to destine. 

Detacher, V. a. 1. to detach, to sepa- 
rate. 

Detruire, V. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je de- 
truisis), to destroy. 

Devancer, v. a. 1. to outstrip;to come 
before. 

Devant, pre. before, opposite. 

Devenir, v. n. 2. to become. 

Devoir, v. a. ir. 3. to owe. 

Devorer, v. a. 1. to devour. 

Dieu, n. m. God. 

Digue, adj. worthy. 

Diminuer, v. a. 1. to diminish. 

Dire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. dit.), to say, tell. 

Discourir, v. n. ir. 2. to discourse. 

Discipline, n. f. discipline. 

Disparaitre, v. n. ir. 4. to disappear. 

Disperser, v. a. 1. to disperse. 

Distance, n. f. distance. 

Divers, adj. diverse, different. 

Divin, e, adj. divine. 

Docteur, n. m. doctor. 

Dome, n. m. dome. 

Don, n. m. gift. 

Done, conj. therefore, tlten. 

Donner, v. a. 1. to give. 

Dont, prn. of which, of whom. 

Dorrnir, v. n. ir. 2. to sleep. 

Doucement, adv. softly, sweetly. 

Douceur, n. f. softness, sweetness. 

Doux. ce, adj. soft, sweet. 

Drapeaux, m. p. colors, standards. 

Droit, n. m. right. 

Droit, adj. straight. 

Due, n. m. duke. 

Duree, n. f. duration. 

Durer, v. n. 1. to last, to endure. 



Eau, n. f. vjater. 

Echapper, v. n. 1. to escape. 

Echo, n. m. echo. 

Eclairer, v. a. 1, to light. 

Eclat, n. m. brightness 

ficlore, v. n. ir. 4. to hatch. 

Ecouler (s'), v. r. 1. to elapse, to 

pass. 
ficouter, v. a. 1. to listen, to hear. 
ficraser, v. a. 1. to crush. 
fierier (s'), v. r. 1. fo exclaim. 
Ecrire, v. a. ir. 4. to writs. 
Edifice, n m. edifice, 
Effacer, v. a. to efface. 

21 



Effet, n. m. effect. 

Effleurer, v. a. 1. to graze, to touch 
slightly. 

Effort, n. m. effort, endeavor. 

Effrayer, v. a. 1. to frighten, (s') ref. 

__ to be frightened. 

Egorger, v. a. 1. to slaughter, to mur- 
der, to cut the throat. 

Eh bien ! int. well ! 

Elever, v. a. 1. to raise. 

Embrasser, v. a. 1. to embrace, to 
kiss. 

Elle, prn. she, it. 

Eloquence, n. f. eloquence. 

Embellir, v. a., 2. to embellish. 

Emblematique, adj. emblematical. 

Emigre, n. & adj. emigrant. 

Empecher, v. a. 1. to prevent. 

Empire, n. m. empire. 

Employer, v. a. 1. to employ, to use 

Empreinte, n. f. marl, print. 

Emprunter, v. a. 1. to borrow. 

En, pre. in, into, at, to. 

En, rel. prn. of it, of them, &c. 

Encenser, v. a. 1. to flatter, to adore. 

Enchainer, v. a. 1. to chain. 

Enchantement, n. m. enchantment, 
charm. 

Encore, adv. yet, still, again. 

Endormir, v. a. ir. 2. to put or lull 
to sleep, (s') ref, to go to sleep. 

Endroit, n. m. spot, place. 

Enfant, n. m. child. 

Enfanter, v. a. to produce. 

Enfer, n. m. hell. 

Enfin, adv. at last,finally. 

Enfler, (s') v. r. 1. to swell, to increase. 

Engloutir, v. a. 2. to swallow up. 

Enivrer, v. a. 1. to intoxicate. 

Enlever, v. a. 1. to take or carry 
away. 

Ennemi, n. m. & adj. enemy, in- 
imical. 

Ennuyeux, se, adj. tiresome, wearU 
some. 

Ensemble, adv. together. 

Entraves, n. f. pi. bands, obstacles, 
stocks. 

Entrer, v. n. 1. to enter, to go in. 

Envers, pre. towards, to. 

Envoler (s'), v. r. 1*. to fly away. 

Envoyer, v. a. 1. to send. 

Epargner, v. a. 1. to spare. 

Epaule, n. f. shoulder. 

Epouvanter, v. a. 1. tofiighten. 

fipoux, se, n. in. & f. husband, wife. 



490 



EP-FA. 



fipuiscr, v a. 1. to exhaust. 
Erreur. u. f. error. 
n. ni. slave. 
n. m. space. 
I 

Baperer, v. a. 1. to hope. 
Esprit, ii in. wit, mimt. 

r v. a. 1. to try, attempt. 
Et. cmij. and. 
KtaMir, v. a. 2. to es'-r 
ft tat, n. m. state, condition, trade. 

in. summer. 
fiteindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j etoignis), 

urd, ii. 111. tta 

■ t 

Kternel, to, b4J 8 
fitotmer, r. a. l. to astonish. 

■tisturh. 
im\. & ii ir. 4. v iii'i. p. Je 

(0 *tf. 

■ 

^*pean. 
Box, prn. in p] 
ftveiller, v. a. 1 
ft\iu-r. v. n 1 

• //y. 

omltM. 
t 'lent. 
I 

Mif, dying. 
■rioT. 
f. extremity. 



angry, sorry, 
•ay. 
■ 
, 
Fa i til : 

a. ir. 1. p i j 

Fall-.ir, v. nnip. ir. B. , .iii'l. p. il 

! ' •' 

Faroe, a I 

I 

Fatigne, n f. fatigue, weariness. 



Faux. se. adj. /aZse. 

Felicitc, n. f. happiness, felicity. 

Femme, n. f. woman, wife. 

Fera, n. m. pi. chains, irons. 

Fertile, adj. fruitful, fertile. 

Fiu. n. m.Jirc. 

Fouillage. n. ra. foliage. 

Feoffle, n. C be/. 

Festin, n. m. sumptuous meal, 

Fiddle, n. iu. & adj. .faithful. 

Fier, e, m\\. proud, formidable. 

Fier (se), v. r. 1. to fruit, to confide 

Fillc. n. f. daughter, girl. 

Fils. n. ni. 10ft. 

Flatterie, a I. flattery. 

Flt'uu. n. in. scourge. 

Fl.'-trir. v. a A n. 2. to/<n/<r, witUr. 

Floor, n. (.fairer. 

Fleure, u. m. river, stream. 

Plotter, v. n. 1. to float, to wave. 

F.i n. I'. faith. 

Fob, n. t time. 

Folie, ii. (.Jolly. 

in'. I- Horn. 
Fonder, r. a. 1. to found. 
Fontaine, n. t fumt mln , spring. 

■ ngth. force. 

Former, v. a. 1. to form. 

Portnne, n. '(.fortune. 

Foadre, n. f. ItunderboU. 

Poo (bile, adj. & "• m- &• f- /<x»*i 

1 to tread underfoot. 

ii in. pi hearth, home, na- 

Francbement, u<\v. frankly. 
Franen /' oier,tofas. 

■rike. 
Fiat- mite. n. f. brotherhood. 

n. m. cheese. 
Front, D brow. 

Fruit ii. in. /' 
Fugttif re, adj. fugitive. 
FuTte, n. t / 

Pomer, r. n. dt a. 1. to moi«. 
Fusil, n. in. fftftt 

G. 
QegBer, v. a. 1. to win, gam. 



GA-HO. 



Ho-iy. 



491 



Garde, n. f. guard, watch, care. 

Gate, adj. v. spoiled. 

Gelee, n. {.frost. 

Gemir, v. n. 2. to moan, groan. 

General, n. m. & adj. general. 

Generation, n. f. generation. 

Genie, n. m. genius. 

Genou, n. m. knee. 

Gens, n. pi. people. 

Gestes, n. m. pi. gestures. 

Glace, n. f. ice, looking-glass. 

Glaneur, n. m. gleaner. 

Globe, n. m. globe. 

Gloire, n. f. glory. 

Glorifier, v. a. 1. to glorify, praise. 

Goutte, n. f. drop. 

Gouverner, v. a. 1. to govern. 

Graces, n. f. pi. graces, thanks. 

Graine, n. f. grain. 

Grand, e, adj. great, large. 

Grandir, v. n. 2. to grow. 

Grimaces, n. f. pi. grimaces, faces. 

Gronder, v. a. & n. 1. to scold, to 

roar. 
Gros, se, adj. large. 
Grossier, e, adj. coarse. 
Grue, n. f. crane. 
Guere, adv. but little, but few. 
Guerre, n. f. war. 
Guerrier, n. m. warrior. 
Guide, n. m. guide. 



H. 

Habitant, n. m. inhabitant. 

Habiter, v. a. 1. to inhabit. 

Habituel, le, adj. usual, habitual. 

Hache, n. f. axe. 

Hameau, n. m. hamlet. 

Harangueur, n. m. orator. 

Hardiesse, n. f. boldness. 

Hardiment, adv. 

Harpe, n. f. harp. 

Hasard, n. m. chance. 

Hauteur, n. f. height, 

Herbe, n. f. herb, grass. 

Heros, n. m. hero. 

Heure, n. f. hour. 

Heritage, n. m. inheritance, property. 

Heureux, se, adj. happy, fortunate. 

Hibou, n. m. owl. 

Hirondelle, n. f. swallow. 

Hiver, n. m. winter. 

Homme, n. m. man. 

Honnete, adj. honest, polite. 



Honneur, n. m. honor. 

Honte, n. f. shame. 

Horde, n. f. horde, troop. 

Huissier, n. m. doorkeeper, attendant, 

Humain, e, adj. human, humane. 

Humblement, adv. humbly. 



Idole, n. f. idol. 

Ignoble, adj. mean, low, debasing. 

II, ils, prn. he, it, they. 

Image, n. f. image, resemblance. 

Imiter, v. a. 1. to imitate. 

Immense, adj. immense, vast. 

Immortel, le, adj. immortal. 

Impenitent, adj. impenitent, unre- 
penting. 

Importun, e, adj. importunate, trou- 
blesome. 

Impur, e, adj. impure. 

Incomparable, adj. incomparable, 
matchless. 

Inconnu, e, adj. unknown. 

Inconstant, e, adj. inconstant, 
changeable. 

Indiquer, v. a. 1. to indicate, to 
point out. 

Industrie, n. f. industry. 

Infatigable, adj. indefatigable, un- 
tiring. 

Infernal, e, adj. infernal. 

Inflexible, adj. inflexible, unbend- 
ing. 

Ingenieux, se. adj. ingenious. 

Ingrat, e, adj. & n. ungrateful. 

Ingratitude, n. f. ingratitude. 

Innocence, n. f. innocence. 

Inscrire, v. a. ir. 4. to inscribe. 

Insecte, n. m. insect. 

Insensibility n. f. insensibility. 

Inspirer, v. a. 1. to inspire. 

Instant, n. m. instant, moment. 

Intention, n. f. intention, meaning. 

Interieur, e, adj. & n. interior, in- 
side. 

Interrompre, v. a. ir. 4. to inter- 
rupt. 

Intime, adj. intimate, close. 

Intitule, adj. v. entitled, called. 

Intrepide, adj. intrepid. 

Introduire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j'intro- 
duisis), 1 1 introduce. 

Ivresse, n. f. intoxication, excessive 
joy. 



492 



JA-LX. 



LE-ME. 



J. 



Jadis, adv.formerJf. 

Jamais, adv. 
Jaidin. n. m. garden. 

Be, n. ru. & f. talker, prat- 

Jr.y, prn. /. 

Jeter, v. a. 1. to throtr, cast. 

JOJO, ll ' 

Joindre, v'. a. ir. 4. »i>. cLJe 

]). j":' '. to add. 

adj. pretty. 
Joii-t, n. in. pUtijIhiiti.- 

Joor, ii. i 

Journ o o, a f <'«.•;/. ■'.///'.< m>ri. 
J 

C mrnt. decision. 

. 

promise. 

' tar as. 
■ 
Justice, ii. (.justice. 



La, 1'. ar 

i7. 

■ ' 
Lobounur. n m. tmm 
Lm. ii. i 

1. (o l-Mise h. 

I 

■ !k. 

j-^t. 

Lamp 

t , to send forth 

language. 

■ 

• tan. 

vi/rmw. 
plU Mow. 
Lear, adj. pL 
Li'iir i 

V, (t») v. r. to 
■ arur. 



Lever, n. m. t iling . 

Liberte. n. f. liberty, freedom. 

Libre. adj. //re. 

Lieu, n. in. place, spot. 

Li. hi. n. in. //"/i. 

Liqueur, n. f. liquor, liquid. 

Livre, n. in. i 

Loi, n. f. /<//r. 

Loin, adv./er. 

i. e, adj. remote, distant. 
..■ adj. toft*, 
mpa, adv. /<>//;:, /<>/»»• <i>U. 

LOOP, 11. In 

Lugubre, adj. mournful, sad. 
I.ui. prn. to wak '<» A<r. 
Lumiere, n f. tight. 
Lunettes, d. t pL spectacles. 
Latter, v. n. 1. f<> contend tcdh, U 



It 

ime adj. wqgnwi i iwg m 

■ 

v, a ir. 2. (ind. p. jo 
p d j.- mnlnttni), /* 

■ 

M.il n in I // adv. I 

./. 5/Vrlr. 

i ificd. 

■ 

i |.<0 7iianife.fi, totes, 

L. to nte, fc>/atf, 

li f. 7/1// r A'. 

■ tUaise kymn. 

Mo, prn iw, '" hm. 

n. in. beggar. 



ME-MY. 



493 



Mener, v. a. to lead, to take. 
Mensonge, n. m. falsehood. 
Mentir, v. n. ir. 2. to lie, to tell 



Menu, e, adj. small, short. 
Mepris, n. m. cmtempt. 
Mepriser, v. a. 1. to despise. 
Mer. n. f. sea. 

Mercenaire, adj. mercenary, 
Mere, n. f. mother. 
Merite, n. m. merit. 
Meriter, v. a. 1. to merit, to 
Mes, adj. pos. pi. my. 
Mesurer, v. a. 1. to measure. 
Metier, n. m. trade, occupation. 
Mettre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je mets, 

p. d. je mis, p. mis), to put, to 

set. 
Meubler, v. a. 1. to furnish. 
Midi, n. m, south, noon. 
Mignon, ne, adj. delicate, pretty. 
Milieu, n. m. middle. 
Mille, adj. num. thousand. 
Ministre, n. m. minister. 
Mobile, adj. movable, light. 
Modeste, adj. modest. 
Moeurs, n. f. pi. morals, manners. 
Moi, prn. me. 
Moindre, adj. lesser, less. 
Moins, adv. less, (au) at least. 
Mois, n. m. month. 
Moissonneur, n. m. harvest-man, 

reaper. 
Moment, n. m. moment. 
Monde, n. m. world, people, (tout le) 

every body. 
Monnaie, n. f. money, change. 
Monstre, n. m. monster. 
Montagnard, n. m. mountaineer. 
Montagne, n. f. mountain. 
Monter, v. a. & n. 1. to ascend, to 

mount. 
Montrer, v. a. 1. to show, to point 

out. 
Monument, n. m. monument. 
Moquer (se), v. r. 1. to laugh at, to 

mock. 
Morceau, n. m. piece, morsel. 
Mort, n. f. death, n. m. dead. 
Mosquee, n. f. mosque. 
Mot, n. m. word. 
Mouche, n. tfiy. 
Mourir, v. n. ir. 2. to die. 
Mouton, c. m. sheep. 
Mugir, v. n. 2. to roar. 
Mysterieux, adj. mysterious. 



N. 

Naif, ve, adj. arilesi unaffected, 

simple, innocent. 
Naissance, n. f. birth. 
Naissant, e, adj. v. rising, growing. 
Naitre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je nais, 

p. d. je naquis, p, ne), to be bom 
Nation, n. f. nation. 
Navire, n. m. ship, vessel. 
Ne, adv. not. 
Ne, p. born. 
Ne — pas, adv. not. 
Ne — que, adv. only, but. 
Neant, n. m. nothingness. 
Ni, conj. nor, neither. 
Nocturne, adj. nocturnal, nightly. 
Noisette, n. f. hazel-nut. 
Nombre, n. m. number. 
Nommer, v. a. 1. to name, to call. 
Non, adv. no. 

Nourrir, v. a. 2. to feed, to nourish. 
Nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, adj. 

new. 
Nouvelle, n. f. news. 



O. 

Obeir, v. n. 2. to obey. 

Obscur, e, adj. dark, obscure. 

Observer, v. a. 1. to observe, to take 
notice of. 

Obtenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. j'ob- 
tiens, p. d. j'obtins), to obtain. 

Odieux, se, adj. odious, 

Oeil, n. m. (pi. yeux), eyes. 

Oiseau, n. m. bird. 

Ombrage, n. m. shade. 

Ombrager, v. a. 1. to shade, to shelter. 

Ombre, n. f. shade, shadow. 

On, prn. indefinite, one, they, we, 
people ; on dit, it is said (one says). 

Onde, n. f. wave, water. 

Opprime, adj. v. oppressed. 

Opprobre, n. m. opprobrium, shame 

Opulent, e, adj. rich, loealthy. 

Or, n. m. gold. 

Orage, n. m. storm. 

Ordinairement, adv. commonly. 

Ordre, n. m. order. 

Oreille, n. f. ear. 

Orgueil, n. m. pride. 

Orphelin, e. n. m. & f. orphan. 

Oter, v. a. 1. to take away, to de- 
prive of, 



494 



PK-PO. 



On, conj. or. 

Ou. adv. where, in which, wherein 

Oublier, v. a. 1. to forget, to ncglca. 

Outrage, n. m. outrage, offence, shame. 

Ouverture. n. f. op> 

Ouvrage. n. m. work. 

Ouvrier. n. m. icorkman. 



r:iitrc. v. a. A n. 4. to graze. 
I'ai.v n. {.peace. 

;i. m. palace. 
e. by. 

ir. 1. (p. paru), to op- 
pear. 

: to travel over, 
■■ 
P.in-il. 1<\ iulj '■pial, similar. 
Parer (so I. v. r. 1. to adorn one's 

Paresacux, se, adj. idle, lazy, indo- 

v. n. 1. to speak. 
Panni. pie, among, amongst . 

parricidal. 

Parti ii m. jMirt, party, resolution. 

Partir v. n. ir . 
>trt. 

I u i noun), 
Uf$t 
Pa», adr. not, n. m. step, pace. 

!■' pass. 
■ 
Passion, n. f. passion. 

rdsman, shepherd, 
ntry, native country. 
I 

c, pasturage, 
ntry. 

trynan. 
a. m toll. 
I 
I 

describe. 
1' 
P 

P 

I a lion. 

I a 1. to penetrate. 

J I a*. 



Pere, n. m. father. 

Perflde, adj. perfidious, treacherous. 

Perdre, v. a. 4. ?<> &w. 

Permettre, v. a. ir. 4. to permit, ai 

Perroquct, n. m. parrot. 
Personno. prn. ind. nobody. 
IYrvers. adj. jvrvcrse. 
Petit, e, adj. iMft Huh 
IVsant adj. v 
Pen, adv. Ktffc, 
People, n. bdl people. 
Penpler, v. a. 1. to people. 
Phalange, n. m. phalanx. 
Philosophic, n. f. philosophy. 
Phrase, n. f. rhrase, sentence. 

ii. £ piaet. 
Pled, ii d 

ii. in. //77/>, .•mrtrr. 

• ■•■. tant pis, jo wu^i ti« 

Place, n 

Plafond, n. in. i 

beach. 
Platndre (ee), v. r. ir. (ind. p. je me 
I je me plaignis), to 

I ; <1. je plus, p. 

<>ker. 

v. a'. Si, n. 1. to weep, to 

Plier, v. bend. 

P 

Plomi /vn. 

Plnparl wrf, mo*. 

'i/, adr. wo<. 
ii. n\ fish. 

shed. 
tst. 
Porphyre n. m. pmykyrf. 

Porter '-y, toktmr. 

Portique, d. in 

i 1 to lot/, to set, to pUat 

: sstss. 
I 

pott. 
l'ciir, p* 



PO-QTJ. 



QCT-RE. 



495 



Pousser, T.aU push, to hasten. 

Pouvoir, v. n. ir. (ind. p. je puis, p. 
d. je pus, p. pu), to be able. 

Prairie, n. f. meadow. 

Prealablement, adv. previously. 

Precipiter, v. a. 1. to hasten, precipi- 
tate. 

Preferer, v. a. 1. to prefer. 

Preliminaire, n. & ^.preliminary. 

Premier, e, adj. first. 

Prendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je pris, p. 
pris), to take, (s'y) ref. to go about 
it, to open the matter. 

Preparer, v. a. 1. to prepare. 

Pies de, pre. near, nearly. 

President, n. m. president. 

Presence, n. f. presence. 

Present, n. m. present. 

Presenter (se), v. r. 1. to pi-esent 
one's self. 

Presque, adv. almost. 

Presser, v. a. & r. (se) to hasten, to 
press. 

Pret, e, adj. ready, prepared. 

Prier, v. a. & n. 1. to pray, to entreat. 

Priere, n. f. prayer. 

Prince, n. m. pri.xe. 

Printemps, n. m. spring. 

Prisonnier, n. m. prisoner. 

Prix, n. m. price, prize. 

Produire, v. a. ir. 4". to produce. 

Proferer, v. a. 1. to utter, to speak. 

Profession, n. f. profession. 

Projet, n. m. project. 

Promener, v. a. 1. to carry about. 

Prononcer, v. a. 1. to pronounce. 

Protestation, n. f. protest, protesta- 
tion. 

Province, n. f. province, district. 

Publier, v. a. 1. to publish. 

Puis, adv. then. 

Puiser, v. a. 1. to dip, to find. 

Puisque, conj. since. 

Puissance, n. f. power. 

Puissanfc^e_ adj. powerful. 



Quand, adv. when. 

Quatre, adj. num. four. 

Qu', que, conj. that, prn. which, 

whom. 
Quel. adj. what, which. 
Quelque, adj. some, adv. however. 
Quelque chose, n. m. something. 



Quelquefois, adv. 

Qui, prn. who, which. 

Quoi, prn. which, what. 

Quoi ! int. what ! 

Quoique, conj. although, though. 

R. 

Radoteur, se, n. m. & f. dotard. 

Raison, n. f. reason, right. 

Ramasser, V. a. 1. to pick up, to coU 
led. 

Rameau, n. m. branch. 

Rappeler, v. a. 1. to recall, to re- 
mind, (se) v. r. to remember, to 
recollect. 

Rapporter, v. a. 1. to bring back, to 
relate. 

Rapprocher, v. a. 1. to bring near 
or together. 

Rarement, adv. rarely, seldom. 

Rassembler, v. a. 1. to collect, to 
bring together. 

Rassurer (se), v. r. 1. to take cour- 
age, to cheer up, to settle. 

Recevoir, v. a. 3. to receive. 

Rechigne, adj. gruff, awkward, re- 
pulsive. 

Recipiendaire, n. m. candidate, one 
chosen to a post. 

Reconnaitre, v. a. ir. 4. to recognize, 
know again. 

Redire, v. a. ir. to say again, re- 
peat. 

Redoute, adj. v. dreaded, feared. 

Reduire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je redui- 
sis), to reduce, to compel. 

Reellement, adv. really. 

Refuge, n. m. refuge, asylum. 

Refuser, v. a. 1. to refuse. 

Regard, n. m. look. 

Registre, n. m. register, book. 

Regner, v. n. 1. to reign, to prevail. 

Regret, n. m. regret. 

Reine, n. f. queen. 

Religion, n. f. religion. 

Relever, v. a. 1. to raise again. 

Relief, n. m. en relief, raised, em- 



Remerciment, n. m. thank. 

Remettre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je re- 
mis, p. remis), to replace, to give, 
to hand, to deliver. 

Remplir, v. a. 2. to fill, to fulfil. 

Remuer, v. a. 1. to move, to tfir. 



RE-RI. 



RI-8K. 



Renccntrer, v. a. 1. to meet. 
Bendre, v. a. 4. to render, to return, 

■■■ back. 

tner, v. a. to inclose, to con- 

mmee, n. f. fame, report. 
yer, v. a. ir. 1. to send back. 

■ i spread, spill, 
' iked. 

vital. 

; 

■ply. 

. or cast 

'tnsicer, reply. 

produce. 
B 

I 
r, v. n. 1. t« : 

■'■ d. jo 

emnant. 

I 

. i 
: 

i 

»i to go 

! 

I 

ir. 2. /« refw 

B 

ir. | p. rcvu), to see 

I ;j. ridicu- 
■ adv. ridiculously. 



Rfcn, adv. nothing. 
Bite, n. m. ri/*. 
Rivage, n. m. *a»Jt. stow*. 
Rive, n. f. bunk, shore. 
Hire. v. n. ir. 4. (md. p. je ria, a 
ri), to laugh. 

n. in. root. 
Roi, n. in. Mag; 

: n. in. reed. 

Route, n. f. r.»ff</, way, path. 
RooJement, n. m. rolling. 
i a. 1. to ™//. 
adj. rojud, kim:h/. 
Rumeur, d. f. rumor, re p o rt , noim 



So, idj. poaa, f. Ai.«, Aw, »'/5. 
. in. aondL 

3 
■ 

: 

Balle, n f. hall, jxirlor, room. 

Saint ! int. //.- 

Main-, u«Jj. bloodthirsty, sa% 

: <ng, bloody. 

adj. i'-i/./. i 

4,', /-rarn*i 

bid. p. ji'saw.p 

- 

utr, himself, herself. 

■ 
S> in, D 

v M A m» i i »- 1. to »m, ft 

apjrar. 

(far. 
Sentiment, n n houghi 

Scntinclle, n. f. a 

, <mctf. 



SB-SO. 



SO-TE. 



497 



BSrapbin, n. m. seraphim. 
Serpolet, n. m. wild thyme. 
Servage, n. m. bondage. 
Servir, v. a. & n. (ind. p. je sers), to 

serve, to be used. 
Servitude, n. f. servitude, slavery. 
Ses, adj. pos. pi. his, her, its. 
Seuil, n. m. threshold, door-step, sill. 
Si, conj. if, adv. so. 
Siecle, n. m. age, time, century. 
Signe, n. m. sign. 
Signer, v. a. 1. to sign. 
Silence, n. m. silence. 
Silencieux. se, adj. silent, not loqua- 
cious. 
Sillon, n. m. furrow. 
Simple, adj. simple. 
Singe, n. m. ape, monkey. 
Sinueux, se, adj. sinuous, winding. 
Situation, n. f. situation. 
Soigneux, se, adj. careful. 
Soi-meme, pm. himself, one's self. 
Soin, n. m. care. 
Soil*, n. m. evening. 
Soldat, n. m. soldier. 
Soleil, n. m. sun. 
Solide, adj. strong, solid. 
Solitude, n. f. solitude. 
Sombre, adj. dark, gloomy, sad. 
Sommeil, n. m. sleep. 
Sommet, n. m. summit, top, pinnacle. 
Son, n. m. sound. 
Son, adj. pos. m. s. his, her, its. 
' .Songer, v. n. 1. to dream, to think. 
Conner, v. n. 1. to ring. 
Sort, n. m. lot, fate. 
Sorte, n. f. kind, de sorte, adv. so 

that. 
Sortir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. je sors), 

to go out. 
Sot, sotte, n. & adj. fool, foolish. 
Sottise, n. f. nonsense. 
Soudain, e, adj. sudden, unexpected, 

adv. suddenly. 
Souffle, n. m. breath, wind.- 
Souffrir, v. a. ir. 1. to suffer, to bear. 
Souhaiter, v. a. 1. to wish, to desire. 
Soulier, n. m. shoe. 
Soupfonner, v. a. 1. to suspect. 
Souplesse, n. f. suppleness, docility. 
Sourd, e, adj. deaf. 
Sous, pre. under. 
Soutenir, v. a. ir. 3. (ind. je sou- 

tiens), to sustain, to support, to 

bear, to maintain. 
Soutien, n. m. support. 



Souvenance, n. f. remembrance, re- 
collection. 

Souvenir, n. m. remembrance, recol- 
lection. 

Souvenir (se), v. r. ir. 2. (ind. p. je me 
souviens), to remember, recollect. 

Souvent, adv. often. 

Spirale (en,), winding. 

Splendeur, n. f. brilliancy, splendor. 

Statut, n. m. statute. 

Stratageme, n. m. stratagem, trick. 

Stupide, adj. stupid, silly. 

Succomber, v. n. 1. to fall. 

Suivre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je suis), 
to follow. 

Sujet, adj. & n. subject. 

Superbe, adj. proud, superb, mag- 
nificent. 

Stir, e, adj. sure, certain, safe. 

Sur, pre. on, upon. 

Sur-le-champ, adv. immediately. 

Surface, n. f. surface. 

Surnumeraire, adj. supernumerary. 

Surpasser, v. a. 1. to surpass. 

Surprendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je sur- 
pris, p. surpris), to surprise, 

Surpris, e, adj. v. surprised. 

Surtout, adv. above all. 

Surveillance, n. f. watch, care. 

Symbol, n. m. symbol. 

Sycomore, n. m. sycamore. 

Sympatbie, n. f. sympathy. 



Tableau, n. m. facte, picture. 

TScber, v. n. 1. to endeavor, to try. 

Tailler, v. a. 1. to cut, to shape. 

Talent, n. m. talent. 

Tandis, adv. while. 

Tanner, v. a. 1. to tan. 

Tant, adv. so much. 

Tant mieux, adv. so much the better 

Tant pis, adv. 50 much the worse. 

Tard, adv. late. 

Te, prn. thee. 

Tel, telle, adj. such. 

Tempere, e, adj. temperate. 

Tempete, n. f. tempest. 

Temps, n. m. time, weather. 

Tendre, adj. tender, kind. 

Tenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je tiens, p. 

d. je tins, p. tenu), to hold. 
Tenter, v. a. 1. to ter.npt, to attempt, 

to try. 



498 



lE-TY. 



Terme, n. m. term, end, expression. 
Terrasser, v. a. 1. to throw down,. 
Terre, n. f. land, earth. 
Teneur, n. f. fear, terror. 
Terrible, adj. terrible. 
Tete. n. f. head. 
Thym, n. m. thyme. 

f. stalk', stem. 
Tigre, n. m. tiger. 
Tin t. v. a. 1. .'.< I'.rav, to extract, to 

■ shoot. 

T..it, ii. m. roof. 
Tomlx-r v. n. 1. to fall. 
Tonnerre. n. in. thunder. 
Turt. n. in. ; • 
Tonehi U uch. 

. adv. always. 

Tour, ii. i'. / 

Tour, n. m. trick, turn. 

T.Mirrinnt r : v. n. 1. to torment, to 

tease. 
Toura him. 

T.mt. .. , ite. 

■ •-. to mark. 
v. a. 2. to betray. 
Trait n TW. 

hnrcif. 
Timltre, n. ni. & adj. traitor, treacher- 

Tnuna d 

Tnui ,; ', tranquil. 

quietly, tran- 

m.transjiort, carriage. 
• 
Travfrs (a), pr -r>«. 

; 1. ^<» tremble, shud- 

. m. treasure. 
Trfbu, n. f. fnAf. 
Triomphe. n. m. triumph. 
'. sorrowful. 
'•} num. three. 
:i ni. throne. 
Trap, adv. /«.> r;iw<^, /<*> many. 
Trouble, n. m. trouble, vexation, <Hs- 

H n. m. flock, herd. 
Troorer, v. a. 1. to find, (se) v. r. 

to happen to be, to be present, to 

appear. 
Tii.V. v. a. 1. t. kill, slay. 
Tyrannic, n. f. tyranny. 



u. 

Un, une, adj. num. one, a, an. 
Univers, n. m. universe. 
Usage, n. m. custom, use. 
Usurper, v. a. 1. to usurp. 
Utile, adj. useful. 



Vacant, e. adj. vacant, unoccupied. 

Vache, n. f. cow. 

Vacuo, n. f. wave, billow. 

Vain, e, adj. vain. 

Vaincre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. jo vaincs, 
p. d. ji' vainquis, p. vaincu), Is 
vanquish, to conquer, to overcome, 

Vaisseea, n. m. vessel, ship. 

Valloa, n. in. valin, vale. 

Valoir, v. n. ir. 8. (ind. je vamt, p. 
ije valus), /,. be worth. 

Vaniu'-, n. t vanity. 

\aniKur, n. in. winnower. 

Vant.-r (86), v. r. to boast. 

Vaquer, v. onlp. & n. to be vacant 

i'. n in. avenger. 
V'-mr. v. ii. ir. 2. {'mil. p. Jo vioM, p 
d j«' \ insv to come. 
0. in. wind. 
Verger, n. m. orchard, 

n. i'. truth, 
\ i riniil. n. in. silver gilded, 
re. towards. 

Vert, ftdj 

Vertaenx, m, adj. virtuous. 

nt. n. in. garment. 
Y.'tir. v. a. ir. 2. to cltthe. 

\ I.'' II. I: 

Vi<tiin<\ n. f. victim. 

U. raefv. ii. m. emp/v im 

Vi.ux. vifil, vieille, adj. eW, an'ii 

Vil' TO adj. //rr/y, jfNtfik. 

VJffUaDoe. a r. pqptfi 
Vii. e, adj. ii//-, 77i/-a«, iow. 

Villas-', ii ni. village. 
Vllle, n. f. /«i/vi, ci/y. 
Viril.inrnt, adv. manfully, eoura. 

Vlalr, ii. in. ptafcr. 

Visit, r, v. a 1. to visit. 
f. vivacity. 



499 



Vivant, e, adj. v. limn *. 

Vivre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je vis, p. 

d. je vecus, p. vecu), to live. 
Vceu, n. m. vow, wish. 
Voici, pre. here is, tliis is. 
Voila, pre. there is, that is. 
Voler, v. n. 1. to fly, v. a. 1. to steal. 
Voir, v. a. ir. (p. d. je vis, p. vu), to 

see, to perceive. 
Voisin, n. m. neighbor. 
Voix, n. f . voice. 
Vorace, adj. greedy, voracious. 
Vos, adj. pos. pi. your. 
Votre, adj. p. your. 
Youloir, v. a. & n. ir. 3. (ind. p. je 

veux, p. d. je voulus, p. voulu), 

to wish, to be willing. 
Vous. prn. you. 
Voute, n. f. vault, arch. 
Voyager, v. n. 1. to travel. 



Vrai. e, adj. true. 
Vraiment, adv. truly. 
Vue, n. f. view, sight. 



Y. 

Y, adv. there. 

Y, prn. to it, to them, at it, at them, 

in it, in them. 
Y avoir, v. unip. il y a, there is, 

there are; il y a nn an, a year 

Yenx, n. m. p. (plural of ceil), eyes. 



Z. 

Zephyr, n. m. light wind, zejmyr 
Zero, n. m. zero, naught. 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. 

GERMAN. 



Uaanuxfs «0mjrUte 6tnon Strits. 

L WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD WITH 

German. $1 60. 



II. WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE WITH 

German. 75 cenU. 

II L K BY TO WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE. 

60 cents. 

IT. WOODBURY'S ELEMENTARY GERMAN 

Reader. 76 cent*. 

V. WOOD B UBT' S ECLECTIC GERMAN 
tar. |1. 

Vr. WOODBURY'S GERMAN-ENGLISH AND 

r:iiLrli-h-(;.rin:in Kia.l-r. |0 M 

VIL WOODBURY'S NEW MKTIIOD FOR GER- 
maMto l..!irn Bngliah; or, ffeaa RietWe nix Erlernung der 

$i. 

VIEL ELWELL'S GERMAN DICTIONARY. A 

eriou Dictionary of tha Bngliah asd 
Gkannan Languages, with the Pronunciation and Accentuation 
rding to tli- metlu.,1 ..f WVl.stor ami Ileinsius. By Wm. 
Odd! lilw.ll. New Stereo. Edition. I 

**• *'"• li naetalb invltwUo tbe 

imlnallon on the par) af n.- i 
...i hy Hi- mnm 
™*». '• "" rtM m Ih-m b) Ihoaa fully oonvefunl wiih ih» 

fierman ion ••..-. .•„,.! mirh uniformly their rfflclonrv In the ' ,.1-ni, m to 

Ju.iifv Um IMHI...I c Bfluanos in commending u„„i M l< rtmm; decidedly the beat 



♦- 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. 



WOODBURY'S COMPLETE GERMAN SERIES. 



I. WOODBUKY'S NEW METHOD WITH THE 

German Language ; embracing both the Analytic and Syn- 
thetic Modes of Instruction ; being a plain and practical way 
of acquiring the art of Reading, Speaking and Composing Ger- 
man ; containing likewise a choice selection both of Prose and 
Poetry ; to which a complete Vocabulary is appended. By 
W. H. "Woodbury. $1 50. 

NOTICES. 

From the Watchman and Reflector, (Boston.- 

" Its plan is highly approved by competent judges, as simple and philosophical, as 
leading to the knowledge of the science and the art of the language, thus making pro 
gress thorough." 

From W. H. Allen, President of Oirard College, 
"The New Method with German contains all that is necessary to make the acqui- 
sition of German easy and delightful to the student. Its style is perspicuous, its ar- 
rangement natural, and its method, combining as it does the practical with the 
theoretic, is well adapted to all classes of learners. The ' Eclectic German Reader,' 
and ' Shorter Course with German,' I consider deserving unqualified praise." 

From O. Faville, A.M., Principal of Ohio Wes. Female College. 

" After a careful examination of Woodbury's Method with German, I am convinced 
of its superiority over any other that I have seen on that subject." 

From Professor J. C Picard, Illinois College. 

" I have examined carefully Woodbury s Method, and have no hesitation in 
pronouncing it decidedly superior to any other German grammar of which I have any 
knowledge. It meets the wants which I have felt as student and as teacher." 

From the Worcester (Mass.) Palladium. 

"The plan of this book is philosophical and practical, more so than any other 
which has been provided for learners of the German language. Beginning with the 
elements of "the study, it presents a plain and practical way of acquiring the art of 
reading, speaking and composing German." 

From the National Magazine. 

" Mr. Woodbury's Text-Books have received general sanction ; they are fast dis- 
placing others in our academic institutions. We will guarantee for the preference of 
any teacher who will test them." 

From A. B. Hyde, A.M., Prof, of Languages in Oneida Con. Sem. 

"I have carefully examined Woodbury's New Method with German, and am de- 
lighted. It is far the best scheme of language-learning with which I have ever become 
acquainted." 

From A. S. Hutchens, A.M., Principal of Norwalk (Ohio) Institute. 

"It is with feelings of real pleasure that we greet Mr. Woodbury's New 
Method with the German, as a valuable addition to our means of acquiring this 
noble language. He has struck out a new and independent course, and has hit 
upon a happy method of treating the " 



PUBLISHED BY IYISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. 

WOODBURY'S COMPLETE GERMAN SERIES. 



NOTICE8 OF WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD. 

From Wm. Xatt, D.D~, Editor of Dtr Christliche .Ipohrrete. 

M t have frequently l>een asked which was the best method of . earning German, 
and was therefore fTnatlT itniigtllwl wlion Mr. Woodbury's New Method fell into my 
hand*. 1 m "ii the point of describing its merits, when the following review in the 
New York Tribune met my eye, which expresses fully what I wished to have said 
myself." 

From the A'eie York Tribune. 

"This work is distinguished for the extent and comprehensiveness of its plan. The 
form* Of the la n g M J gW . which are of the Amplest and BOM familiar character, are first 
i the sluileiil, without any frightful array of grninmatical 
combination', fT which he ll not yet prepared, A faithful study of the exercises, of 
whirl, there is a great variety In the flr«l portion of the work, planet the student in 
possession of a practical knowledge of Die language; while the synthetic summary 
aplaa tbt latter part Of the volume, presents the subject In new relations, 
(Jiving a view of the elements of the language as a comprehensive whole," 

II. WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE WITH 

German ; embracing a brief and comprehensive course of 
study, recognizing throughout, the laws that govern the 
language, ami by clear statement*, and appropriate exercises, 
rendering them thoroughly practical. By W. II. Woodbury. 
76 cents. 

From Jotrph fV. Jrnke, Profettor of Language in the I'rbana L'nivrriity, Ohio. 
"I know of no I,.. iter Intn-l : I - mun language than Woodbury's 

IIM, Tb« more I examine and use It, the bolter am I satisfied with it. 
To the inimrroiis lastimonlali the book ha* - i, permit mo to add mine 

In respect lo the clearness of lla arrangement, and the ren Interesting manner In which 
It presents and treats its ml iblnlng simplicity with oomp r ehe na lyeneei 

ana depth. These merits are enbanri-d — and it Is no trilling praise for a school-book— 
by great excellence in paper, Ijrpography. and bludlng." 

From the Wkliotkfta. Saer* and Bibtitai Repository. 

"Mr. Woodhurj's fundamental Idea Is to unite the practical and IheorcUcal, to 
blend the principle sad the application, the doctrine ami the illustration. In (-.inclu- 
sion, we can confidently commend this grammar as one of the best wo havo seen on 
anv in. ■.)• rn language. It bean the marks of intelligent and conscientious labor on 
every page," 

HI. KEY TO WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE. 

fiO cent*. 

IV. WOODBURY'S ELEMENTARY GERMAN 

ii.l Poetry, ehietlj 

from Staii<l-ird G'thkih Writer* ; with a full Vocabulary, eoptont 

to the Author*! Qerman Grammars, nnd a mi 
Explanatory Notes; J.- vol.* und private .Student*. 

By W. II. woodlmry. 75 cent*. 

y 



PUBLISHED BY IYISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. 



WOODBUEY'S COMPLETE GlttMAN SERIES. 



NOTICES OF WOODBGRY'S ELEMENTARY 4ERMAN READER. 

Irom the New York Tribune. 

"In connection with Jr. Woodbury's previous publications, his Elementary 
German Reader forms a complete and effective apparatus for the study of German, 
and may be unhesitatingly recommended for its brevity, simplicity, and practical 
adaptation to the wants of the learner." 

From the Western Christian Advocate. 

" If you have an intelligent German in. your employ, and want him to leam the 
English, get Woodbury's Neue Methode zur Erlernung der Englischen Sprache for him. 
And if you have children who want to learn German, order, with the above, Wood- 
bury's Shorter Course with the German, and his English German Reader, and you will 
see that the German in your employ will soon master the English", and your children 
the German language." 

Prom the New York Observer. 

"The Grammatical works of this author upon the German language have a wide 
and well-deserved reputation, which will recommend the present volume. The plan is 
excellent, comprising selections from every department of the wide field of German 
literature, wUh copious Grammatical References and Vocabulary." 

V. WOODBUEY'S ECLECTIC GERMAN 

Reader; containing a large and choice collection of pieces 
from the best German writers, for advanced Students; with 
copious References to the Author's Grammars, and a complete 
Vocabulary. By W. H. Woodbury. $1. 

From Harper's New Monthly Magazine. 

"This is an admirable manual for German students, combining the excellencies of 
a simple text-book ft>r beginners, and a copious and authentic work of reference for 
more advanced pupils. It has already been extensively adopted by judicious teachers " 

From the New York Commercial Advertiser. 

"This volume will be very useful to those who have begun to acquire a knowledge 
of the German. The selections have been taken from Goethe, Fichte, Klopstock, Heine, 
Richter, Lessing, and others, among the most celebrated German authors, and mostly 
relate to subjects which will interest the student, and repay him for the drudgery of 
translation." 

From the Literary Advertiser. 

"Woodbury's Grammars are highly esteemed for the manner in which the old- 

i fashioned analytic method of studying a language, and the synthetic way have been 

I happily combined. The peculiar advantage of this Reader, which contains copious 

selections from standard German writers, is its frequent references to the Author's 

Grammars. A full Vocabulary is added to the volume. The book is worthy of general 

adoption." 

From the New York Daily Times. 
"It is a most useful compend, and will do excellent service." 

From H. S. Noyes, A.M., Principal of Newberry Collegiate Institute, Vt. 

"Mr. Woodbury's text-books in German are so decidedly superior to those which 
we are at present using, that I shall adopt them forthwith, to be used in my German 
classes. Nothing could better suit my ideas of a proper system for teaching that lan- 
guage." 

64 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. Y » 

WOODBURY'S COMPLETE GERMAN SERIES. 
VI. WOODBURY'S GERMAN-ENGLISH AND 

English-German Rentier, for the use of German and English 
Sunday-Schools, Families and Private Learners. Containing 
complete B i the " Shorter Course" and "Neue Me- 

tho<le,'' supplying the learner of either language with every 
aid necessary for acquiring a critical acquaintance with the 
text By W. H. Woodbury. 25 cents, 

NOTICES. 

From the A'ete York Evan/relist. 

Ibury's German-English and English-German Reader is an ingenious method 

ih, by means of parallel translations, noting nil dlf- 

ire. I;. ■[< rriu'.-s are mado continually to the grammar for 

irriiiw'. It is small and compact, l>ut appears to us 
iiii-nt fur its j.urp •-.-. Tin- Author it :i practical teacher, whos. 
.he study of this best and most useful of 

I'.MCUi--." 

VH. WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD FOR GER- 

tiuhis to Learn English; or, Naiia Mothnde sur Erlernung der 

Engliachen Sprache, is ou the same plan as the corresponding 

ka for those who desire to learn German. By W. EL 

;l.ury. $1. 

Fr*m .1. Shurat, Principal of Rapptknnoek .IcnJemy, Carolina Ofc, I 

i admirable work; clear in statements of prln- ;l 
: and m«sl happy In I - -laljrtle 

of (German with such a guide mast 
become rather n rawnllon Una ■ lott." 

From Pre/. P. II. Hermann, Troy Female Seminary. 

"Mr. Woodbury la entitled to the warm ■ r ~ and pupils for 

Uda work, and to U ■ ■■ GraauaattcV whloh I 

hare used with good success In teaching English to my countrymen." 

From Anton J. Vpwon. .1 M.. Vr ofentor of Rhetoric and Oratory, and formerly 
German in Hamilton College. 

he Gcrmnn language In this country, which 
Mr. WiMHlburv, a-> I think, li 
method.. ! ■• and which, I think, la WtB ( 

I 

VIII. ELWELL'S GERMAN DICTIONARY. A 

and complete Am nary >>f the English and 

Gen i the Pronunciation and .Ventilation 

method of Webster and Hcinsius. By Wm. 

n.lell r.hvell ' Motion. |1 50. 

"* ~"%V" 






riM l w rt MM Bapl • V)06 



PreservationTech 









UBRARYOFCONCRESS 

: ' -111111 



INGRESS 



003 116 7516 



:' -V, 



■ 






